Chengde Mountain Resort: Imperial grandeur and natural harmony
Is Hollywood inspired by the CIA, or the other way around?
LANGLEY, Va. — At CIA headquarters, beyond the handsome granite seal on its lobby floor and a wall of stars carved in honor of the agency’s fallen, experts are at work in the complex tasks of spycraft: weapons-trained officers, computer engineers, virologists, nuclear scientists.
But there are also storytellers, makeup artists, theater majors and ballerinas — Americans who probably never thought their skills would match the needs of a spy agency. Yet the CIA thought otherwise.
Though it rarely gets the spotlight, there’s a revolving door of talent between the country’s premiere intelligence agency and its entertainment industry, with inspiration and influence often working both ways.
The agency is targeting professionals at the intersection of arts and technology for recruitment, CIA officers told The Times, and continues to cooperate with entertainment giants to inspire the next generation of creative spies.
This month, the agency is assisting a New York Times bestselling author on a young adult book examining the foundations of the CIA laid during World War II. Scenes from a major upcoming film production were just shot at its headquarters, a logistical feat at an intelligence campus tucked away in the Virginia suburbs behind rings of security perimeters, where officers roam cracking down on Bluetooth signals. Another popular streaming TV series will be back at Langley to film this fall.
But their collaboration goes far deeper than that, officers said. Creative minds in Hollywood and the entertainment industry have long had a role at the Central Intelligence Agency, devising clever solutions to its most vexing problems, such as perfecting the art of disguise and harnessing a magician’s ability to cast spellbinding illusions. Indeed, in the 1950s, a magician from New York named John Mulholland was secretly contracted with the agency to write a manual for Cold War spies on trickery and deception.
These days, the officers said, creative skills are more valuable than ever in such a technologically complex world.
“You’re only limited by your own imagination — don’t self-censor your ideas,” said Janelle, a CIA public affairs officer, granted the ability to speak under her first name at the request of the agency. “We’re always looking for partners.”
An elusive history
David McCloskey, a former CIA analyst and author of “Damascus Station” and other spy thrillers, offered several theories on why the agency might be interested in fostering a robust relationship with Hollywood, calling it “a two-way street.”
“There definitely have been operational applications for espionage,” McCloskey said. “It’s probably the exception to the rule, but when it happens, it’s compelling.”
It’s easy to see why CIA leaders would be interested in Hollywood, he said, in part to shape impressions of the agency. “But their bread and butter business is receiving people to give secrets,” he continued, “and part of that is getting close to people in power.”
“The closer you are to Hollywood,” McCloskey added, “that’s a really interesting ‘in’ to having a lot of interesting conversations.”
The CIA’s mission to rescue six American diplomats out of Tehran during the Iran hostage crisis, the subject of the film “Argo,” featured a detailed ruse centered around a fabricated movie project.
(CIA Museum)
Some of the CIA’s most iconic missions — at least the declassified ones — document the agency’s rich history with Hollywood, including Canadian Caper, when CIA operatives disguised themselves as a film crew to rescue six American diplomats in Tehran during the Iran hostage crisis, an operation moviegoers will recognize as the plot of “Argo.”
“‘Argo’ was almost too far-fetched to even believe,” said Brent, an in-house historian at CIA headquarters. “It’s almost more Hollywood than Hollywood.”
Canadian Caper was both inspired by Hollywood and relied on Hollywood talent. Agent Tony Mendez had been a graphic artist before joining the agency and helping craft the mission.
Another key player was John Chambers, the makeup artist who gave the world Spock’s ears on “Star Trek” and won an honorary Oscar for his trailblazing simian work on “Planet of the Apes.” He was awarded the CIA’s Intelligence Medal of Merit for his work on the covert rescue effort.
The Los Angeles Times broke the story in February 1975 that business tycoon Howard Hughes had lent his ship, the Glomar Explorer, as cover for a CIA operation.
(CIA Museum)
Just a few years before, Howard Hughes, then one of the world’s richest men and a tycoon in media, film and aerospace, agreed to work with the CIA to provide cover for an effort by the agency to lift a sunken Soviet nuclear submarine off the floor of the Pacific Ocean.
Deploying Hughes’ Glomar Explorer under the guise of mineral extraction, the CIA was able to salvage most of the sub before The Times broke a story blowing its cover — “the story that sunk our efforts,” in CIA parlance.
And another mission was made possible thanks to a device invented by a professional photographer — a gadget that later became the inspiration of an over-the-top scene in the blockbuster Batman film “The Dark Knight.”
In Project Coldfeet, CIA agents gathering intelligence on a Soviet station erected on a precariously drifting sheet of ice in the Arctic needed a reliable extraction plan. But how does one pick up an agent without landing a plane on the ice?
The answer was the “skyhook”: Balloons lifted a tether attached to a harness worn by an agent high into the sky. A CIA plane snagged the tether and carried the agent off to safety.
In “The Dark Knight,” Batman makes a dramatic escape deploying the same kind of balloon-harness contraption.
‘The superhero spy’
CIA leadership often says that acceptance into the agency is harder than getting into Harvard and Yale combined. Yet the agency still has challenges recruiting the type of talent it is looking for — either in reaching those with unconventional skills, or in convincing them that they should leave secure, comparatively well-paid, comfortable jobs for a secretive life of public service.
It is no easy task managing work at the agency, especially with family, CIA officials acknowledged. Deciding if and when to share one’s true identity with their children is a regular struggle. But Janelle said the CIA tells potential recruits there is a middle ground that doesn’t require them to entirely abandon their existing lives.
A professional photographer working with the CIA invented what became known as the “skyhook,’ a surface-to-air recovery system used by the spy agency in an Arctic mission and later featured in the 2008 Batman film “The Dark Knight.”
(CIA Museum)
“People don’t have to leave their companies to help their country and to work with CIA,” Janelle said. “People come here because they love their country and know they can make a difference.”
Janelle is part of a team that regularly engages with creatives who want to portray the agency or spies as accurately as possible.
“Some producers and directors reach out and they do care about accuracy,” Janelle said, “but they ultimately pick and choose what’s going to work for the film or show.”
CIA analysts have also been known to leave the agency for opportunities in the entertainment industry, writing books and scripts drawing from their experiences — so long as they don’t track too closely with those experiences.
Joe Weisberg, the writer and producer behind the television series “The Americans,” and McCloskey, who is working on a fifth novel focused on U.S. and British intelligence, were both part of the agency before launching their writing careers. And as CIA alumni, they had to submit their works for review.
“There’s a whole publication and classification-review process,” Brent said.
That process can be a bit of a slog, McCloskey said: “They quite literally redact in black ink.”
But it is far more difficult for nonfiction writers than novelists.
“There could be bits of tradecraft, or alluding to assets, or people at the agency, which are clear no’s,” McCloskey said. “But with novels, it’s not that hard to write them in a way to get them through the review board.”
Try as they may, studios often repeat the same falsehoods about the CIA, no matter how often they are corrected. Officers and agents aren’t the same thing, for one. And as disappointing as it may be for lovers of spy thrillers, the majority of officers are not licensed or trained to carry weapons.
“One thing Hollywood often gets wrong is the idea that it’s one officer doing everything, when it’s really a team sport here,” Janelle said.
Jessica Chastain, center, plays a member of the elite team of spies and military operatives who secretly devoted themselves to finding Al Qaeda leader Osama bin Laden in the Columbia Pictures 2012 film “Zero Dark Thirty.”
(Jonathan Olley / Sony Pictures)
“Zero Dark Thirty,” an Oscar-winning film released in 2012 about the hunt for Al Qaeda leader Osama bin Laden, was widely acclaimed but criticized by some within the intelligence community over the credit it lends a single, fictional CIA analyst for tracking him down.
McCloskey sympathizes with the writer’s dilemma.
“I can’t have 35 people on a team. From a storytelling standpoint, it just doesn’t work,” he said, acknowledging that little in the field of espionage is accurately captured on screen, even though there are plenty of former spies available to work as consultants.
“There’s no lack of sources to get it right,” he said. “It’s that the superhero spy — the Jack Ryans and Jason Bournes — are pretty much the Hollywood representation of espionage.”
However inaccurately glorified and dramatized, the agency hopes that Hollywood’s work can keep the revolving door moving, inspiring atypical talent to join its ranks.
“We have architects, carpenters, people who worked in logistics,” Brent said. “People might not realize the range of skill sets here at CIA.”
And as Canadian Caper showed, sometimes spycraft requires stagecraft. It’s possible that what’s needed most to complete the next mission won’t be oceanography or data mining, but costume design. Or maybe another ballerina.
Mahindra BE 6 Pack Two, Mahindra XEV 9e Pack Two Launched With 79 kWh Battery Option, Deliveries To Start on July End; Check Price and Other Details
Mumbai, July 5, 2025: Mahindra’s Electric Origin SUVs have become the EV market leaders in India by value. Thanks to overwhelming customer trust and enthusiasm, one Mahindra electric SUV is sold every 10 minutes across the country.
Building on this remarkable momentum, Mahindra is commencing deliveries of Pack Two for its acclaimed BE 6 and XEV 9e eSUVs from end-July at a compelling price of INR 21.90 Lakh. Responding to strong customer feedback, Pack Two will now have a 79 kWh battery option alongside the existing 59 kWh variant, delivering real-world city ranges of 500 km and 400 km respectively. Ferrari Amalfi Coupe Launched With 3855cc Twin-Turbo V8 Engine, Replacing Ferrari Roma; Check Specifications, Features and Price.
Mahindra BE 6 Pack Two, Mahindra XEV 9e Pack Two Price
| Model | Battery | Ex-Showroom Price** |
| BE 6 Pack Two | 59 kWh | INR 21.90 Lakh* |
| 79 kWh | INR 23.50 Lakh* | |
| XEV 9e Pack Two | 59 kWh | INR 24.90 Lakh* |
| 79 kWh | INR 26.50 Lakh* |
Mahindra BE 6 Pack Two, Mahindra XEV 9e Pack Two Specifications and Features
Both battery options come comprehensively equipped with Mahindra’s advanced technology suite, including a 16-speaker Harman Kardon sound system with Dolby Atmos, a full glass roof, Level 2 advanced driver assistance systems (Level 2 ADAS), the triple-screen wide cinemascope in XEV 9e, and race-ready Digital Cockpit in BE 6 — seamlessly blending innovation, safety, and modern luxury.
In addition, Mahindra is enriching BE 6 Pack Two with the premium sage leatherette interiors from Pack Three, complemented by an elegant ivory roof finish to further enhance the cabin’s spacious and sophisticated feel. All waiting customers will have the opportunity to upgrade their bookings to the new Pack Two 79 kWh variant if desired, reaffirming Mahindra’s commitment to delivering flexibility and customer choice. Hero Vida VX2 Electric Scooter Launched in India With Battery-as-a-Service Subscription; Check Prices of Each Variant, Specifications and Features.
Starting from INR 21.90 Lakh, Pack Two underscores Mahindra’s promise to democratise premium electric mobility while staying true to its design and technology leadership. Supported by Mahindra’s robust service network spanning over 300 locations across India, customers can drive with complete peace of mind, anywhere the road takes them.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 05, 2025 12:51 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
For Today’s Business Traveler, It’s All About Work-Life Integration
“There are always surprises [on the road], so I carve out time for myself,” says Kelly Wearstler, the design eye behind Proper Hotels, who might have a mint tea before bed or a double macchiato before dawn; or apply face oils that tell her body it’s morning or midnight—small touch points that carry a whiff of life at home, keep the beat of one’s internal rhythm, and make a hotel room feel less borrowed. Christa Cotton, the New Orleans–based founder of El Guapo Bitters, takes a similar tack. Wherever she touches down, she unpacks fully, even if she’s gone by morning, then lights a votive candle—from her own brand, of course—and walks a local grocery aisle. (“Even unfamiliar shelves can spark my next million dollar idea,” she says.) And for Mauricio Umansky, founder and CEO of The Agency, a global luxury real estate brokerage, a fitness routine is the key: He packs a jump rope wherever he goes, and stretches with resistance bands between calls. Even a fully populated Netflix queue—much of which he’ll doze off to, he admits—is part of a routine designed to hold him steady, wherever business takes him. All this, Umansky says, “helps me feel human.”
ILLUSTRATION: Alex Green
That instinct for ritual is also felt by people in the tourism industry working behind the scenes to meet travelers’ evolving needs. Tim Harrington, who shapes boutique hotels along Maine’s coastline for Atlantic Hospitality, begins each reservation with what he calls a “pre-concierge,” where he fine-tunes details before a guest even drops a bag. Cottages pivot into studios; pool cabanas double as conference rooms. When a touring musician needed a recording setup last minute, Harrington’s team pulled a vintage desk and a few worn lamps from their warehouse and rebuilt a bunk room into a makeshift sound booth by dusk.
It’s the kind of flexibility that turns hospitality into a craft. Personal time also guides David Zipkin at Tradewind Aviation, the boutique carrier that fuses scheduled flights with charter services. Whereas most commercial air travel feels like a sprint through checkpoints and waiting areas, Tradewind slows the clock. “Our guests arrive just 30 minutes before takeoff,” he says, “so they’re wrapping up a call at home or lingering a bit longer with their family instead of wasting an hour in a terminal.” Onboard, there’s a deliberate shift in tempo, too: a seat with room to breathe, a playlist cued up, a sense that the trip bends around them rather than the other way around.
While most business travelers go to great lengths to recreate home on the road, Chad Robertson and Liz Barclay strip it all back. Robertson is a cofounder of Tartine and one of America’s most respected bakers, and Barclay is a photographer with a sharp eye for overlooked detail. The couple spent two years moving light, bouncing between residencies and fieldwork across four continents. What began as a surf-and-reset in Costa Rica quickly opened into a more active practice, one that pulled them between home and rural grain mills in Latin America and back-alley bakeries in Melbourne, chasing new angles for their crafts. “Allowing for last-minute pivots, even on a work trip, keeps you sharp,” Robertson says.
Wherever they found themselves, they built a loose rhythm around what they found—a quiet corner where Barclay could center herself, a countertop where Robertson could knead bread or bang out a post for his Substack. “You need just enough structure to make the work feel real,” Barclay says, “then leave the rest open enough for the place itself to leave its mark.”
Save On Optimus Prime Lego Transformers Set Ahead Of Prime Day 2025
Optimus Prime is one of the most popular and highly rated buildable models in the Lego Icons lineup–for good reason, too. The 1,508-piece collectible display set has an exceedingly clever 2-in-1 design that allows Transformers fans to convert the Autobot leader into his signature truck. Ahead of Prime Day 2025, multiple major retailers have restocked the 1,508-piece Optimus Prime set for $144, which is a 20% discount from its $180 MSRP. At the time of writing, Amazon is running low on units, but you can also snag this deal at Walmart and Target.
All three retailers have sold out of this display model, which is geared toward adults, several times already this year. And though it has returned once again, it’s worth noting that Optimus Prime was out of stock everywhere from last holiday season until March. The Lego Store has units available at the moment, but it’ll cost you the full $180 MSRP. Lego officially lists Optimus Prime as “hard to find.” This description combined with the prolonged stock shortages could mean that the Optimus Prime kit, which debuted in 2022, is close to retirement.
$144 (was $180)
Optimus Prime is a highly detailed model of the Autobot leader’s G1-era design. With 19 points of articulation, you can create an wide range of poses by adjusting his limbs in robot mode. Lego’s detailed scale-model of the G1-era Optimus Prime is essentially a 13.5-inch action figure. You certainly don’t want to be rough with it, but it has more movable components than you’d normally expect with Lego thanks to its 2-in-1 design.
Switching from robot to truck mode and back again is a relatively straightforward process. At first, the switch might take you a couple minutes, but once you have the steps memorized, it’s possible to convert the build in less than a minute.
Beyond its ability to completely transform, Optimus has a suite of interactive features and accessories that make it one of the most dynamic builds in Lego’s lineup of collectible sets for adults. Brick-built replicas of the ion blaster and Energon axe can be attached to his hands. You can easily fasten or remove his jetpack and swap between two different waist panels. The dual windows covering his chest can be swung open to access the Matrix of Leadership artifact. It also comes with an Energon cube and an information plaque to display alongside the model.
Lego makes a ton of vehicle display models, so it’s pretty remarkable that Optimus Prime’s “secondary” truck mode looks good enough that you could mistake it as a vehicle that doesn’t transform into a robot. When displayed as a truck, Optimus is 10.5 x 4.5 x 5.5 inches.
Like many other Lego sets geared toward adults and collectors, Optimus Prime has a more complex build process than the average set. An ample variety of conventional bricks and unique piece types makes it a thoroughly rewarding set to construct. Depending on your experience with Lego sets of this size, it could take you anywhere from three to six hours to complete.
$85 (was $90)
After two years of talking to himself and converting into a truck to take long, aimless drives, one of Optimus Prime’s pals finally joined him in the brick-built world of Lego last summer.
Lego’s 950-piece Bumblebee kit has yet to receive a discount, but this comparatively smaller buildable figure is one of the coolest Lego sets under $100. It has numerous points of articulation, and you can quickly transform the Autobot from robot to car.
Bumblebee is 9.5 inches tall in robot mode and 8.5 inches long in vehicle mode. Lego based the design on the character’s look in the 1980s. Bumblebee comes with a detachable ion blaster, jetpack, and information plaque.
Amazon also has great deals on two other iconic vehicles from movie history. The Lego Icons Back to the Future Time Machine is discounted to $170 (was $200). This is a 3-in-1 build, but unlike the Transformers sets, you’ll need to pick which DeLorean model from the trilogy you want to build. If you change your mind later on, you can partially deconstruct the model and rebuild it using the instructions for one of the other designs. Similar deals are also available at Walmart and Target.
Meanwhile, Dune fans can save 20% on the Lego Icons: Atreides Royal Ornithopter, dropping the price from $165 to $132. The 1,369-piece build comes with six Lego minifigures.
Check out a list of our favorite Lego display model deals for adults below:
Lego Deals at Amazon (July 2025)
Star Wars Lego Deals
Star Wars fans should take a look at the Walmart-exclusive Kylo Ren and Darth Vader Helmet bundle while it’s in stock. Over at Amazon, you can save on a nice variety of 25th Anniversary Lego Star Wars sets, including the 1,138-piece C-3PO statue. For even more offers, check out our. roundup of the best Lego Star Wars deals available now.
- Lego Star Wars 25th Anniversary Series:
- Lego Star Wars Helmets:
- More Starship Display Models:
Scientists discovered how a scent can change your mind
Mice taught to link smells with tastes, and later fear, revealed how the amygdala teams up with cortical regions to let the brain draw powerful indirect connections. Disabling this circuit erased the links, hinting that similar pathways in humans could underlie disorders like PTSD and psychosis, and might be tuned with future brain-modulation therapies.
Vitasta Law Journal (VLJ) [ISSN 2277-5234]
About The Vitasta Law Journal
The Vitasta Law Journal (VLJ), ISSN 2277-5234, is an annual, peer-reviewed, and refereed journal published under the auspices of the Vitasta School of Law and Humanities, Nowgam, Srinagar. The journal is affiliated with the University of Kashmir and approved by the Bar Council of India.
It provides a platform for meaningful discussion and debate on legal issues of both national and international importance. The journal seeks to present high-quality research articles, insightful policy analyses, critical case comments, and thematic explorations in the field of law.
Submissions are invited for the next issue of the journal. Academicians, legal practitioners, scholars, and students are encouraged to contribute. Manuscripts addressing contemporary legal issues, whether from specific or interdisciplinary perspectives, are welcome.
Guidelines
- Authors must submit their manuscripts in MS Word format via email to [email protected] or [email protected]
- The subject line of the email should state “Submission for Vitasta Law Journal.”
- Formatting: Manuscripts should have one-inch margins on all sides and be double-spaced. The main text must be written in Times New Roman, font size 12, and footnotes in Times New Roman, font size 10. All text, including footnotes, should be fully justified. Authors must paginate all pages and footnotes.
- The Oxford Standard for Citation of Legal Authorities (OSCOLA) must be used for referencing.
- Every submission must include an abstract of not more than 250 words, summarizing the central theme of the paper. Additionally, five keywords reflecting the manuscript’s primary focus should accompany the abstract.
- Authors are required to provide a separate title page that includes their full name, designation, institutional affiliation, contact number, postal address, and email address. Submissions must be original and unpublished, free from copyright restrictions, and not under consideration elsewhere.
- Manuscripts submitted to VLJ will undergo a rigorous double-blind peer review process. Acceptance will depend on approval from both reviewers and the editorial board.
- Contributions may include research articles between 4,000 and 6,000 words, case comments or legislative reviews between 2,000 and 3,000 words, or book reviews between 1,000 and 2,000 words.
- The journal does not charge a processing fee for submission or review.
- Authors are expected to ensure their work meets high academic standards and adheres to ethical guidelines, including a similarity index below 10%.
Deadline
Last date for the submission of full paper is 30th August 2025
Contact
For any queries or additional information, you may contact the Vitasta School of Law and Humanities [email protected] or reach out by phone at +91-7889712522.
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
Access Denied
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/woman-who-lost-32-kg-shares-5-habits-that-helped-her-go-from-xl-to-xs-size-never-cut-out-fast-food-carbs-sugar-101751774875663.html” on this server.
Reference #18.d4c25068.1751782896.36c9cc7
https://errors.edgesuite.net/18.d4c25068.1751782896.36c9cc7
Slowing migration puts the brakes on Australia’s population growth – Dec 2024 population
The latest population numbers to December 2024 are out for Australia, States and Territories.
Australia’s population is still growing strongly, but the very high overseas migration we saw in 2022-23 and 2023-24 financial years is tapering off leading to slightly lower growth.
At December 31st, 2024, the population of Australia stood at 27,400,013 people, up by 445,900 people from the previous year, or 1.65%.
That’s down from a peak of 2.53% annual growth recorded at the height of the post-COVID migration boom in September 2023.
This is the lowest annual growth rate recorded since June 2022 (1.30%) which was affected by border closures.
Prior to that – we’re back to the moderately high growth levels seen in the 2016-2017 period.
Approximately 76% of Australia’s growth came through net migration and the other 24% from natural increase (births minus deaths).
Net migration has slowed each quarter since peaking in September 2023, with annual migration now at 340,750 for the calendar year 2024, down from 530,620 the year before (a record for a calendar year).
While it has slowed, the net migration is still higher than any year prior to 2022.
Quarterly net migration was only 68,043 (Oct-Dec 2024), which would indicate an annual migration coming down to around 280,000.
However the December quarter is traditionally the slowest quarter for migration each year (students come in during the March quarter) so it’s likely to be a little higher than this.
We had 292,500 births in Australia for the calendar year, and 187,300 deaths, giving a natural increase in population of 105,100 people.
While our birth rate is well below replacement level, at 1.50 – due to the current age structure of the population it will be at least another 20 years before Australia’s population starts to experience natural decline (excluding migration).
Estimated Resident Population and annual components of change by State/Territory, December 2024
| State/Territory | ERP December 2024 | Change over previous year | % change over previous year | Natural Increase | Net Overseas migration | Net interstate migration | % overseas migration |
| NSW | 8,545,140 | 108,056 | 1.28% | 29,444 | 106,730 | -28,118 | 98.8% |
| Vic | 7,011,123 | 132,572 | 1.93% | 35,272 | 100,503 | -3,203 | 75.8% |
| Qld | 5,618,765 | 102,756 | 1.86% | 19,939 | 56,877 | +25,940 | 55.4% |
| SA | 1,891,670 | 20,673 | 1.10% | 2,709 | 19,546 | -1,582 | 94.5% |
| WA | 3,008,697 | 70,312 | 2.39% | 12,576 | 45,124 | +12,612 | 64.2% |
| Tas | 575,756 | 1,580 | 0.28% | 171 | 3,856 | -2,447 | 244.1% |
| NT | 262,191 | 3,130 | 1.21% | 2,283 | 3,081 | -2,234 | 98.4% |
| ACT | 481,677 | 6,838 | 1.44% | 2,801 | 5,005 | -968 | 73.2% |
| Australia | 27,400,013 | 445,924 | 1.65% | 105,174 | 340,750 | 0 | 76.4% |
Source: ABS, National, State and Territory Population, December 2024
Two states have just hit major milestones, with Victoria’s population reaching 7 million, and Western Australia reaching 3 million.
Only two states, WA and Queensland have positive interstate migration – all other states and territories are now negative.
The ABS have made significant adjustments to the past few years interstate migration estimates, by using different sources such as Tax Office data to supplement Medicare change of address records and make these more accurate.
New South Wales
New South Wales grew by 1.28% for the year, substantially lower than the previous year’s 2.25%, with Overseas Migration making up almost 100% of growth.
The natural increase in NSW is almost exactly offset by interstate migration which is outwards.
Traditionally NSW has the most interstate out-migration of any state, mainly to Queensland, but that trend is a bit smaller than previous years.
Victoria
Victoria had the largest numerical growth and the second-highest percentage growth of any state or territory, with 1.93% increase, but falling below 2% now after almost hitting 3% a year ago.
The population of Victoria has exceeded 7 million for the first time, with over 5 million of that in Greater Melbourne.
Interstate migration has turned negative again with more people leaving than coming in.
In the previous update it was slightly positive but ABS has revised this (see above) and Victoria hasn’t seen a positive quarter of interstate migration since March 2020 (immediately pre-COVID).
Victoria also had the largest natural increase of any state, over 35,000.
Queensland
Queensland added 102,756 people with a growth rate of 1.86% for the 2024 calendar year, and gets the largest share of its growth from interstate migration, as a destination for people from all over Australia.
Interstate migration to Queensland is particularly strong from NSW – the interstate loss from NSW is very close to the total Queensland gain.
As a result of this it’s also the state with the least reliance on overseas migration, which however still makes up more than half (55.4%) of the state’s growth.
South Australia
South Australia is the second-slowest growing state/territory adding 20,673 people, and at this rate will be about 5 years away from reaching the milestone of 2 million people.
With an older population, natural increase is very low, less than +3,000 p.a.
Interstate migration is now slighly negative, but quite small at about -1,500 p.a, and it has been revised up by the ABS for the last few years.
During COVID SA gained population from interstate migration, and it hasn’t gone back to the large interstate migration losses seen during the 2010s which peaked at around -7,000 p.a.
Like NSW it gets close to 100% of growth from overseas migration, but at a much smaller level.
Western Australia
Western Australia is the fastest growing state, the only one with a growth rate that held above 2%.
It’s 2.39%, but down from over 3% in the previous year.
WA added 70,312 people for the calendar year 2024, and all 3 components of change were strongly positive, with the largest share being over +45,000 net overseas migrants.
As mentioned above, the state has punched through a key milestone of 3 million people.
Despite being the largest state by area, has the most centralised population, with over 2.4 million of that (80%) living in Greater Perth (technically that’s from the June 2024 figures, as capital city populations are only estimated annually).
Tasmania
Tasmania is by far the slowest growing state or territory, with a population growth of just 1,580 people or 0.28%, the only state/territory with growth under 1% in the 2024 calendar year.
After a surprise increase at the last Census due to migration from the mainland during COVID, it has turned strongly the other way, and the main drag on growth is a -2,447 net interstate migration, which is a larger loss than SA, in a smaller population.
Natural increase is also very small, just +171 people.
Due to an older age structure, Tasmania will likely be the first state to record negative natural change with more deaths than births.
This will probably occur as soon as 2027.
Because of this, and somewhat counter-intuitively, Tasmania is also the state with the highest share of population growth due to overseas migration – it accounts for 244% of the growth (as the interstate component is negative).
Northern Territory
The Northern Territory had moderate population growth of 1.21%, adding 3,130 people in calendar year 2024.
It has the distinction of being the only state or territory to increase population growth from the year before, when it was 0.95%.
Overseas migration is offset by significant losses interstate.
It remains the lowest population of the states and territories, with 262,191 people.
Australian Capital Territory
The Australian Capital Territory has fallen back to a moderate growth rate a little below the national average, adding 1.44% or 6,838 people last year.
The population sits at 481,677, closing in on its own milestone of half a million, likely to be reached around 2028.
The ACT’s interstate migration rate fluctuates but has been slightly negative for a few years now.
How To Increase Libido After Menopause
If you’ve been feeling like your sex drive packed up and left sometime after menopause, you’re not alone, and you’re definitely not broken. It’s one of the most common, and yet least talked about, changes women experience in midlife. The hormonal shifts, sleep disruptions, stress, and emotional changes that come with this transition can all impact your desire. But the good news is, you can get it back. This guide on how to increase libido after menopause is here to help you understand what’s really going on in your body and walk you through science-backed, real-life strategies to reignite your desire naturally and confidently.
Menopause And Sex Drive: Why Libido Tends To Decrease
According to research, about 50% of women between 40 and 60 report a decline in libido compared to earlier years. The connection between menopause and sex drive is largely hormonal. As a woman ages, estrogen and testosterone levels fall. “These hormones are linked to desire,” explains gynecologist Dr. Hutcherson.
Lower estrogen can cause vaginal dryness and thinner tissues, making intercourse uncomfortable or even painful, which naturally dampens arousal and interest in sex. It’s hardly surprising, then, that a lot of women find themselves confused and frustrated by this change that can seem “sudden”, and are left wondering about how to increase libido after menopause, or if it’s even possible.
Related Reading: How To Say No To Sex Without Hurting Him?
However, the physiological changes during menopause impact libido are only part of the story. “There’s sort of a nesting doll situation. Many of the common issues around menopause affect each other,” notes sexologist Carol Queen, PhD. Your lack of desire might be influenced not only by hormones but also by what’s happening in your life and mind. Menopausal symptoms like hot flashes, insomnia, mood swings, and anxiety can all erode your libido.
Stress from work or caregiving often spikes at midlife, and relationship dynamics may shift as well. “All of those forces work together to disrupt your libido, even if you want to want it,” Queen adds. Emotional factors like feeling disconnected from your partner or less confident in your changing body also play a huge role in menopause and sex drive changes. It’s a complex situation with layered triggers. The good news is that low libido after menopause isn’t permanent. Think of this phase as an opportunity to understand your “new” body and redefine intimacy on your terms.
“Once hormones stabilize post-menopause, the chaos calms down.”
—Dr. Jenn Gunsaullus, sociologist and sex educator
Although arousal can take longer and old techniques might not work as easily, you can absolutely rekindle your desire with the right approaches. If you’ve been asking yourself, “How can I get my libido back after menopause?”, take heart. Many women before you have navigated this change successfully. The key is addressing both the physical and emotional factors behind a low sex drive, and keep trying different approaches until you figure out what works best for you.
How To Increase Libido After Menopause—9 Easy Ways
There isn’t a one-size-fits-all answer for how to increase female sex drive after menopause, but a combination of approaches can help. We’ve rounded up nine strategies, ranging from natural remedies to supplements, methods, and devices, that many women have found effective. In one or a combination of these may lie your answer to how to increase libido after menopause.
Take your time to experiment and see what works best for you. As you go through this journey, keep an open mind and be patient with yourself. With some effort and experimentation, it’s entirely possible to revive your libido and enjoy a fulfilling sex life after menopause. Let’s talk about some how:
1. Consult your doctor about hormone therapy
One of the first steps for increasing libido after menopause is checking in on your hormones. The decline in estrogen and often testosterone during menopause can directly lead to low sex drive. Rebalancing those hormones may significantly improve things.
Talk to your doctor or a menopause specialist about your options. One of your options is Hormone Replacement Therapy (HRT), which usually involves estrogen and sometimes progesterone. It is known to relieve many menopausal symptoms that are killing your desire like vaginal dryness, night sweats, and mood swings. “HRT can stabilize levels of hormones like estrogen, lessening the impact of many menopause symptoms that make sex painful and uncomfortable,” notes Dr. Susanna Unsworth, a menopause specialist.
Keep in mind HRT isn’t a magic libido pill and desire is complicated, but it often lays a necessary foundation. Besides systemic HRT, vaginal estrogen products like creams, tablets or rings can be a game-changer if painful intercourse is a barrier. These deliver a small dose of estrogen locally to rejuvenate vaginal tissues and lubrication. DHEA vaginal inserts (prasterone) are another prescription option that can improve vaginal comfort and some aspects of libido. The bottom line is, there are many medical options available to treat low sex drive after menopause. Consult a healthcare provider to rule out any medical issues and consider whether hormone therapy is right for you.
2. Soothe dryness with lubricants and moisturizers
When sex is painful, it’s only natural to lose your appetite for it. Vaginal dryness and discomfort are common culprits behind low libido during menopause. Addressing these issues can dramatically improve your desire. After all, if you know sex will feel good, you’re more likely to want it! An easy, immediate fix is to invest in good lubricants and vaginal moisturizers.
Look for water-based or silicone-based lubricants. For example, a product like Good Clean Love Almost Naked, a popular gentle, water-based lube available on Amazon, or Sliquid H2O can make intercourse much more comfortable. Apply a generous amount before and during sex. Reapply as needed and experiment with different brands or consistencies (gel, liquid, etc.) until you find what feels best for you.
In addition to lubes, consider a daily or every-other-day vaginal moisturizer to keep your tissues hydrated. These are creams or gels you apply internally to combat dryness. Kind of like a face moisturizer but for your vaginal wall. Products like Replens Long-Lasting Moisturizer or Yes VM Vaginal Moisturizer can be used a few times a week. They aren’t for sex per se, but they improve your baseline comfort. Many women in menopause find that using a moisturizer regularly keeps the vagina more supple and enhances natural lubrication when aroused.
If dryness is severe or causing tiny tears, you might also try vaginal vitamin E suppositories or even organic coconut oil as a natural remedy to increase libido during menopause. While these do not directly boost desire, they can help combat discomfort during intercourse by making your vagina feel soothed. A comfortable vagina is more responsive and sensitive, which can only help female arousal after menopause.
Along with lubes, you might explore arousal gels or oils like Zestra Essential Arousal Oil, which claim to increase blood flow and sensation when applied to the clitoris. Some women find them helpful for warming up. They can be a fun addition to your intimacy toolbox once you’ve handled the basic dryness issue.
Related Reading: Maintenance Sex – What Is It, Why Is It Important, And How To Have It?
3. Try natural remedies and female libido supplements
Many women wonder how to increase libido after menopause naturally, seeking options beyond hormone prescriptions. If you, too, prefer a more natural approach to increasing libido after menopause, you have plenty of options on that front, too, ranging from herbs, supplements, and alternative therapies. The most popular ones include:
- Maca root: A Peruvian herb traditionally used as an aphrodisiac. Maca may help with sexual function during menopause, according to some studies. Women taking maca have reported improved desire and even relief from menopause-related sexual dysfunction. You can try maca powder or capsules like Organic Maca capsules
- Ginseng: Research suggests that Ginseng, particularly Korean Red Ginseng, improved sexual arousal in menopausal women and overall sexual function. It works by increasing blood flow and reducing stress, and is considered safe short term. Korean Red Ginseng Extract supplements, as well as menopause-focused supplements like Estroven’s menopause relief formula, can be worth exploring
- Tribulus terrestris: This herb, also known as puncture vine, is known to help boost testosterone levels modestly and improve arousal. A 2016 study found Tribulus could be a safe alternative to hormonal medications for low libido. You can find tribulus in products like Tribulus libido boosters for women.
- Ginkgo biloba: Commonly taken for memory, ginkgo may also have “positive effects on sexuality after menopause,” according to a 2021 review. It might improve blood flow and help with relaxation. Ginkgo is also found in some menopause supplements like the brand Ristela, for arousal. You can even take a Ginkgo supplement alone.
Other supplements sometimes used for female libido include,
- L-arginine, an amino acid that may enhance blood flow to the genitalia
- Chasteberry (Vitex) for hormone balance
- DHEA, a precursor hormone, you can buy OTC in the US
- Ashwagandha, an adaptogenic herb that can reduce stress and improve sexual function indirectly
Before you rush to fill your cart with female libido supplements, always talk to your healthcare provider first, especially if you have any medical conditions or take other medications. As Dr. Unsworth wisely points out, if your libido issues stem from something like stress or relationship problems, “no amount of medical or herbal treatment is going to improve that” until those underlying issues are addressed.
Supplements are not a cure-all, but rather one piece of the puzzle. Also, natural does not mean automatically safe. That said, some women do feel a real boost from the right supplement. You might need to experiment (one at a time, please!) to find what works. Reading reviews can be helpful. For instance, a product called “Love Goddess” female libido supplement contains a blend of herbs like muira puama, maca, ginseng, etc. Women who tried it have reported “a significant improvement in my desire and overall satisfaction” after a few weeks. Others noted “feeling more connected with my partner and more confident overall” when using such herbal blends.
Related Reading: 7 Things No One Tells You About Married Sex
4. Experiment with sexual aids and intimate devices
The answer to how to increase libido after menopause doesn’t necessarily have to be external. Trying to shake up your bedroom routine by trying something new can infuse a freshness into your intimate connection, giving you a reason to look forward to it. This can mean using sexual aids like vibrators, massagers, or other adult devices to increase libido after menopause by enhancing physical stimulation.
Dr. Jenn Gunsaullus, who at 52 has gone through these changes herself, puts it this way: “We’re not in 22-year-old bodies anymore. Maybe it’s a lot harder to experience an orgasm now. It can be frustrating. But you have the right to do that for yourself through masturbation or to ask that from a partner.”
So, don’t shy away from using a tool to get the job done. You deserve pleasure, whatever it takes! If the “old tricks” like manual or oral stimulation aren’t working as well as before, “take some time to discover what does, and treat yourself to it, whether it’s lube, a new vibrator, or just more quality time and fewer quickies,” says Dr. Gunsaullus. Here are a few sex toys and aids you can experiment with to boost libido or stir up sexual desire during and after menopause:
Along with these targeted sex toys, don’t discount the impact of simpler aids and adult novelty items like sensual massage candles or vibrating rings. The goal is to make arousal easier and more exciting. If you feel a bit hesitant or shy about using a sex toy, remember that it’s just a tool, not very different from the reading glasses you put on to read fine print.
Related Reading: How To Clean A Vibrator? 9 Mistakes You Must Avoid
5. Exercise regularly and strengthen your pelvic floor
It’s no secret that exercise is good for you, but did you know it can boost your libido too, especially after menopause? If you’re looking for how to increase sex drive after menopause naturally, one answer is to get moving. Regular physical activity has multiple benefits that directly translate to a better sex drive. First, exercise improves blood circulation throughout the body, including the pelvic region, which means better arousal and lubrication responses.
Cardio activities like brisk walking, dancing, and swimming get your blood pumping and can help counteract the reduced genital blood flow that menopause often brings. Besides, exercise is also a great stress reducer and mood booster. Anything that reduces stress and boosts your mood will contribute to enhanced desire.
Beyond general fitness, there’s one specific type of exercise for better sex and sexual wellness every woman in menopause should consider: pelvic floor exercises, commonly known as Kegels. Strengthening your pelvic floor muscles can have a surprisingly positive effect on sexual function. A study with postmenopausal women showed that after 12 weeks of doing pelvic floor muscle training, the women had significantly higher arousal, orgasm, and satisfaction scores compared to before.
To do Kegel exercises, you simply squeeze the pelvic floor muscles, as if you’re stopping the flow of urine, for a few seconds, then release. Do sets of 10 squeezes, a few times a day. If you’re not sure you’re doing it right, there are phone apps and devices that can guide you. For instance, the Care+ Trainer is a small insertable device that connects to an app and games that encourage you to do your Kegels correctly. There are also lower-tech Kegel balls or weights you can use.
Related Reading: What Do You Do When Your Partner Is Feeling Horny But You Aren’t?
6. Reduce stress and prioritize quality sleep
Ever notice how much more in the mood you are when you’re relaxed and rested? There’s a direct link between stress, sleep, and libido. During menopause, life stresses can pile up. You might be juggling work, family, and aging parents, all while dealing with menopausal symptoms. The chronic stress resulting from all of this can prove to be a major mood killer in the bedroom.
High stress triggers the release of cortisol, which at high levels can blunt your sex hormones and reduce libido. It’s hard to feel frisky when your mind is on work deadlines, finances, or the million items on your to-do list. “To experience desire, women need to be relaxed and able to focus on pleasure,” explains Dr. Hutcherson, “Unfortunately, women are easily distracted by life stressors, making it difficult to think about sex.”
That’s why managing stress and getting good sleep is one of the most important natural strategies for how to increase libido after menopause. In fact, some experts say it’s the most important. Consider this permission to indulge in self-care
- Prioritize downtime
- Say no to extra obligations you don’t want
- Incorporate stress-reduction techniques like meditation, deep breathing exercises, or yoga into your routine
- Create calming rituals like taking a nightly bath, going for a quiet walk, or listening to music before bed
- Try supplements like ashwagandha or CBD oil to de-stress
- Consider a natural sleep aid such as melatonin or a herbal blend like OLLY Sleep gummies
- A white noise machine or weighted blanket can also improve sleep quality by reducing nighttime anxiety
- If anxiety or mood swings are overwhelming, don’t hesitate to seek support from a therapist or support group
Be mindful that menopause and sexless marriage situations can arise partly due to mismanaged stress. Couples stop being intimate not because they don’t love each other, but because one or both partners are too stressed or tired to initiate or participate. Taking conscious steps to reduce stress can prevent that scenario.
7. Communicate openly and reconnect with your partner
A fulfilling sex life after menopause isn’t just about your body. It’s also just as much linked to the emotional connection with your partner. In fact, low libido sometimes has less to do with hormones and more to do with relationship dynamics. Years of marriage or long-term partnership can breed routines and even avoidance around sex, especially if you’ve hit some rocky patches or fallen into a sexless marriage pattern. To increase your libido, it’s often crucial to improve the intimacy outside the bedroom and open the lines of communication.
Start by having an honest, compassionate conversation with your partner about what you’re experiencing. It can be as simple as saying, “I’ve noticed my sex drive isn’t what it used to be, and I miss our intimacy. I’d like to work on it together.” Encourage your partner to share their feelings too. You might be surprised that they may have fears of their own—fear of hurting you if you have pain, or fear of rejection. Team up against the problem, rather than quietly drifting apart.
Related Reading: Discover Your Worth: 13 Ways To Feel Loved And Appreciated
Focus on non-sexual intimacy and friendship with your partner. Sometimes, libido wanes because the relationship bond needs tending. Plan date nights or new activities together to spark some novelty. Cuddling, kissing, holding hands, giving each other back rubs, these affectionate touches release oxytocin and can gently stoke the embers of desire without pressure.
If you worry the spark is completely gone, don’t despair. Many couples have been in a near-sexless marriage after menopause and turned it around by addressing the emotional distance. Couples therapy or sex therapy is immensely helpful. A professional can guide you through conversations and exercises to improve both emotional and sexual intimacy. The point is, don’t silently accept a sexless status quo if it’s bothering you. Menopause and sex drive changes can challenge a relationship, but they can also be an opportunity to reinvent your sex life together.
8. Embrace novelty, fantasy, and playfulness
One reliable way to spark a waning libido is to infuse some novelty and excitement into your sex life. After many years and certainly post-menopause, sex can start feeling routine or boring, which doesn’t do much to light the fire. Our brains crave variety. New experiences release dopamine, the “excitement” neurotransmitter that is also linked to sexual desire. So, how to increase libido after menopause naturally? One answer is: try something different. Give yourself permission to play, experiment, and even get a little out of your comfort zone in the fantasy department.
Think about what “new thing” might intrigue you. It could be as simple as changing the setting. If you always have sex in the bedroom at night, try a daytime encounter in the living room. Or perhaps invest in some sexy lingerie or a silk robe that makes you feel like a goddess. Some couples break out of a rut by trying role-playing or using alter egos in the bedroom (even if it’s just silly fun). Others find that watching erotic movies or reading erotica gets them in the mood. Sexologist Carol Queen suggests “Hand skills, oral sex, making out, sharing fantasies, and watching erotic movies” as options to add to your sexual menu. If you’re looking for ideas to get started, here are some things you can explore:
- An erotic card game like Monogamy: A Hot Affair Game, which guides you through different levels of intimacy and dares
- Try a blindfold and a feather for some sensory play
- Check out erotic books like Atomic Girls: Erotic Stories of Women’s Fantasies, or the classic 365 Days of Sensational Sex
- Erotic short story collections or audio erotica apps like Dipsea or Audible’s erotic section
Finally, don’t underestimate the power of laughter and play. Sex can become so serious when you’re concerned about your libido. Flip the script and try to be playful. Maybe that means having a glass of wine and doing a goofy striptease, or trying a silly adult board game that makes you both giggle. When you lower your guard and play, your natural sensuality often sneaks back in.
9. Cultivate a positive mindset and self-image
Your mindset about sex and yourself plays a huge role in libido. Menopause can be a time of immense change, not just physically, but psychologically. You might feel like you don’t recognize your body anymore, or struggle with feeling attractive as you age. Negative thoughts or body image issues can quickly sabotage your sex drive. It’s hard to feel sexy when you’re thinking, “Ugh, I’ve gained weight,” or “I have wrinkles now,” or “My body is betraying me.” Part of increasing your libido is learning to see yourself as a sexual, desirable being in this stage of life, and shedding any shame or baggage that’s built up over the years.
Take stock of your beliefs about sex and aging. Are you holding onto the idea that menopause signals the end of your “sexy years”? If so, challenge that! Many women have the best sex of their lives in their 50s and 60s, often because they feel more confident and uninhibited than they did when younger.
Try to reframe menopause as a new chapter of sexual maturity where you’re in control and free to define what intimacy means to you. If you’ve been wondering how to increase a woman’s libido after menopause, consider that a big part of it is nurturing self-compassion and confidence. When you treat yourself with love and view yourself as sexy, your body will often follow suit with renewed libido.
Key Pointers
- Hormonal shifts, especially drops in estrogen and testosterone, are key drivers of low libido during menopause, often causing dryness and discomfort during sex
- Emotional and lifestyle factors like stress, insomnia, mood swings, and relationship changes also heavily influence desire
- Hormone therapy, vaginal moisturizers, and lubricants can significantly ease physical symptoms and make sex more comfortable
- Natural libido-boosters like maca, ginseng, and tribulus, along with vibrators and pelvic floor exercises, can help reignite arousal
- Rebuilding intimacy through open communication, playfulness, emotional connection, and a positive body image is just as essential as treating the symptoms
Final Thoughts
With these well-rounded strategies that cover everything from hormone health to communication to playfulness, how to increase libido after menopause will no longer seem like a daunting challenge. You will discover that there is passion and desire after menopause. Many women find that their post-menopausal sex life, while different, is just as satisfying, once they figure out what works for them. It may take some experimentation, but don’t give up. You are in control of writing this chapter of your life. Embrace your sexuality and enjoy this new phase with confidence and joy.
The Pressure to Perform, When Intimacy Becomes a Chore
The Best Sex Is Enjoyed Without Guilt Or Shame
What Is Mercy Sex? 10 Signs You Have Had Pity Sex
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
Why Amazon’s Fire TV Stick 4K Is Better Than a Chromecast in 2025
I was a longtime fan of the Google Chromecast, having owned one since the first iteration in 2013. However, its 2024 discontinuation forced me to move over to Amazon’s Fire TV Stick 4K—and it’s been a surprisingly great upgrade!
6
An Intuitive and Feature-Rich Interface
Having not owned an Amazon streaming device since the first-generation Fire TV Stick, I was impressed by the significant improvements that the Fire TV OS has undergone in recent years. In 2025, it is one of the most user-friendly streaming interfaces I’ve used, and while Chromecast also stepped up to the challenge with Google TV, the Fire TV Stick’s UI still surpasses it in terms of personalization, discoverability, and overall responsiveness.
Like with Google TV, the Fire TV home screen is neatly organized into personalized content rows, shortcuts, and trending shows, along with quick access to your favorite apps. However, unlike Google TV, which often prioritizes Google services and content, Fire TV provides a more neutral experience, whether you’re watching Hulu, Netflix, or Amazon’s native Prime Video.
5
A Superior Remote Control With Alexa Integration
The Fire TV Stick 4K features a newly redesigned Alexa Voice Remote, which sets it apart from Chromecast with Google TV—the only generation of the device to include a remote. While the latter does support Google Assistant, it’s not as polished and lacks the deeper ecosystem capabilities that Amazon Alexa provides.
The latest Alexa Voice Remote is highly intuitive, with dedicated app buttons and volume and power buttons that sync to your TV. The blue-highlighted microphone button takes pride of place at the top of the handset next to the mic itself. This allows you not only to open apps and search for shows and movies but also to control your smart home devices, check weather reports, and manage Alexa routines.
In contrast, over the years, Chromecast has been heavily reliant on its app. While Chromecasts are still a good purchase in 2025 and can be controlled by my smartphone, for home use, I prefer the holistic and simplified solution that the Alexa Voice Remote provides.
4
Third-Party App Support and Native Streaming Services
One of the primary benefits of the Fire TV Stick 4K is its support for a wide range of third-party apps and streaming services. Of course, there is the usual array of options available, including Netflix, YouTube, Max, Disney+, Apple TV+, and live TV streaming, among others. However, what really sets it apart from other plug-and-play devices is the ability to sideload apps for better customization and a more personalized viewing experience.
While Chromecast with Google TV also offers a wide selection of mainstream apps, Fire TV’s compatibility with lesser-known services, like IPTV services and gaming platforms, as well as its ad-free integration of Prime Video and Freevee, makes it a much more versatile tool overall.
3
Straightforward Integration for Smart Homes
Amazon has invested considerable effort in creating its native ecosystem, and the Fire TV Stick 4K integrates seamlessly, offering superior automation and control compared to its Google counterpart. Amazon’s smart products are affordable and readily available, and the Fire TV Stick 4K easily connects with a wide range of devices, including Echo speakers, Ring doorbells, Blink cameras, and smart plugs.
For example, you can ask Alexa to show your front door camera while watching a movie or dim your smart lights using voice commands via the remote. Fire TV even supports Matter and Thread, making it a future-proof hub for smart home devices across different brands. For me, deeper control and better customization options make the Fire TV Stick 4K stand out in comparison to Google Assistant-supported devices.
2
Improved Performance Overall
The latest Fire TV Stick 4K is powered by an upgraded quad-core processor and GPU combination for smoother navigation, quicker app launches, and buffering-free playback. It also supports 4K Ultra HD, HDR10+, Dolby Vision, and Dolby Atmos, providing a premium audiovisual experience that will hold its own when connected to a high-quality TV.
This performance is similar to that of the new Google TV Streamer, which is also a premium device, although it has a much larger footprint and a price tag that is double that of Amazon’s Fire TV Stick 4K.
1
Excellent Value for Money
Value for money was the most compelling reason for me to opt for the Fire TV Stick 4K. In recent years, Google has decided to drop the ultra-compact, smartphone-activated, and affordable Chromecast in favor of the more expensive, bulkier, and remote-controlled Chromecast with Google TV. This was ultimately succeeded by the even bulkier shelf-top console, the Google TV Streamer, which is significantly more powerful—and more expensive.
When I considered that the Fire TV Stick 4K combines portability, convenience, app compatibility, performance, and affordability, along with the ability to stream live TV and free ad-supported content, it was a no-brainer for me.
If you also want a secondary streaming device for sideloading apps, streaming foreign networks via VPN, and having a portable backup unit for all your streaming subscriptions, the Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K is a perfect fit. And while Google’s streaming products have never let me down, and I will continue to pack my Chromecast in my tech pouch when traveling, the Fire TV Stick 4K offers the best balance of functionality, ecosystem compatibility, and affordability, making it my top choice for streaming in 2025.
Beijing Wildlife Park's "foodie" brown bears
Former CAA executive accused of trafficking by woman who says she was kept as a ‘sex slave’
An unnamed woman this week sued prominent British soccer agent Jonathan Barnett, accusing him of raping her and keeping her as a “sex slave.”
The woman alleged in a lawsuit filed Wednesday in U.S. District Court in Los Angeles that Barnett coerced her into having sex and used his company’s resources to aid in his control over her.
The woman, who was referred to in the lawsuit as “Jane Doe,” also sued Hollywood talent firm Creative Artists Agency and sports agency CAA Stellar, where Barnett served as executive chairman.
Barnett denied the allegations.
“The claims made in today’s complaint against me have no basis in reality and are untrue,” Barnett said in a statement. “We will vigorously defend this lawsuit through the appropriate legal process. I am looking forward to being entirely vindicated and exonerated.”
CAA said it first learned of the woman’s allegations through a press inquiry in 2024 and settlement demands from the woman’s attorney.
“While the complaint attempts to connect these allegations to CAA’s business, Ms. Doe has never been an employee, consultant, or contractor of CAA, ICM, or Stellar, nor has she ever had any business connection to CAA, ICM, or Stellar,” CAA said in its statement. “CAA takes any allegations of this nature seriously, and through counsel, promptly urged Ms. Doe to contact law enforcement in the United Kingdom.”
London’s Metropolitan Police did not confirm whether it is investigating Barnett. The department does not reveal names of people it is investigating who have not been charged.
Barnett exited Stellar in February 2024.
The woman, who currently resides in Australia, said Barnett had initially promised her employment at CAA Stellar and paid for her to move her children from Australia to the United Kingdom as part of the employment package, according to the lawsuit. But after she moved to the U.K., she alleged she was “trafficked, threatened, tortured, and held” in bondage in different locations throughout the world, including L.A., from 2017 to 2023, the lawsuit said.
The woman was introduced to Barnett by a friend in the mid-1990s and then reconnected with Barnett in 2017 after he sent her a message on LinkedIn, the lawsuit said. After the two met for lunch in London in 2017, Barnett offered her an employment package that included payment for moving expenses, sponsorship of her and her two children’s visas, school tuition for her children, housing and a starting salary of 4,000 pounds and a summer bonus, the lawsuit said.
After she moved to London, Barnett asked to meet the woman at a hotel room, where Barnett allegedly told her that he “owned” her and to call him “my Master,” the lawsuit said. Then he ordered her to remove her clothes and later struck her down and raped her, according to the lawsuit.
“Realizing she was powerless against a dangerous predator, Ms. Doe submitted to Barnett in order to avoid being severely beaten or even killed,” the lawsuit said.
The complaint alleged that Barnett referred to the woman as “slave” as well as other demeaning words like “dog” or “whore,” and demanded she send videos of herself doing degrading acts, including drinking her own urine, licking the toilet with her mouth, eating her own feces and whipping herself as “punishment.” The woman said Barnett punched, kicked, stomped on her fingers and whipped her, insisting she send him videos and photos of the wounds he inflicted to his company phone, the lawsuit said.
“To this day, Ms. Doe still has urinary tract infections, skin rashes, mouth ulcers, and bleeds from her vagina in an abnormal way as a result of Barnett’s horrific and barbaric torture and abuse,” the lawsuit said.
Barnett has been a leading figure in the sports representation business. In 2019, he ranked as No. 1 on Forbes’ most powerful sports agent list. A year later, the magazine named him the world’s top soccer agent, negotiating $1.42 billion in active contracts and transfer fees.
He negotiated deals for boxers — clients have included the former heavyweight champion Lennox Lewis — before launching Stellar Sports with co-founder David Manasseh in 1992. The two men represented cricket players and later signed prominent soccer athletes such as Glen Johnson and Peter Crouch.
Stellar eventually became the world’s largest soccer agency, with a roster of more than 800 athletes when it sold to talent agency ICM Partners in 2020. Now owned by CAA, the firm helped make CAA the most valuable sports agency on Forbes’ 2022 list.
Barnett had served as CAA Stellar’s executive chairman until last year.
The lawsuit alleged that CAA, which acquired ICM in June 2022, and other defendants “turned a blind eye” to emails and other communications on company-owned devices and company-monitored accounts where he referred to her as “slave” and told her to “get back to work.”
CAA Stellar’s accounting firm BSG Valentine had guaranteed the apartment leases where he kept the woman and a Stellar assistant assisted Barnett in dropping off payments to the woman, the lawsuit said. During the workday, Stellar drivers would bring Barnett to where the woman was staying and wait for him while he beat and raped her, the lawsuit alleged.
In 2020, Stellar was negotiating its sale to ICM Partners. In January, July and September of that year, Stellar wired payments to the woman worth 20,400 pounds, the lawsuit said.
After Stellar was acquired, the company posted on its website a modern slavery statement that said ICM Stellar Sports is committed “to ensure that modern slavery and human trafficking are not taking place anywhere within either our business or any of [our] partners or suppliers,” the lawsuit said.
The plaintiff is represented by attorney Tamara Holder, who alleged she had been sexually assaulted by a Fox News executive in 2015. The allegation resulted in a $2.5-million settlement with the network.
2025 Bajaj Dominar 400 and 2025 Bajaj Dominar 250 Price, Specifications and Features Revealed, Know Everything About Next-Gen Bajaj Dominar Bikes Launched in India
New Delhi, July 5: Bajaj Auto has launched the updated 2025 versions of the Bajaj Dominar 400 and Bajaj Dominar 250 motorcycles in India. Both models come with enhancements to improve touring comfort and riding experience. The bikes now feature new electronics and new design features. Bajaj has also included advanced features like ride-by-wire technology on the Dominar 400 and ABS modes on the Dominar 250.
The 2025 Bajaj Dominar models are equipped with several upgrades. Both bikes now come with a bonded glass speedometer and an integrated speedo flap. Riders will also find a redesigned handlebar, updated switchgear, and a rear carrier with a GPS mount. The 2025 Dominar 400 is available in Canyon Red, Aurora Green, and Charcoal Black, and is priced at INR 2.39 lakh (ex-showroom). The 2025 Dominar 250 comes in Canyon Red, Sparkling Black, and Citrus Rush, which is priced at INR 1.92 lakh (ex-showroom). Mahindra BE 6 Pack Two, Mahindra XEV 9e Pack Two Launched With 79 kWh Battery Option, Deliveries To Start on July End; Check Price and Other Details.
2025 Bajaj Dominar 400 Specifications and Features
The 2025 Bajaj Dominar 400 is powered by a 373.3cc, single-cylinder, liquid-cooled, DOHC engine that delivers a maximum power of 29.4kW at 8800 rpm and peak torque of 35Nm at 6500 rpm. The bike comes with a 6-speed gearbox and offers four ride modes, which include Road, Rain, Sport, and Off-Road. It has a wheelbase of 1453 mm and a ground clearance of 157 mm. The 2025 Dominar 400 comes with a 320 mm front disc and 230 mm rear disc, both with ABS. The new Dominar 400 also features a full LED headlamp. Hero Vida VX2 Electric Scooter Launched in India With Battery-as-a-Service Subscription; Check Prices of Each Variant, Specifications and Features.
2025 Bajaj Dominar 250 Specifications and Features
The 2025 Bajaj Dominar 250 is powered by a 248.77cc, 4-stroke, single-cylinder, liquid-cooled DOHC engine. The 2025 Dominar 250 delivers a maximum power output of 19.85 kW at 8500 rpm and a peak torque of 23.5 Nm at 6500 rpm. It also features four ride modes like Road, Rain, Sport, and Off-Road. The braking system includes a 300 mm front disc and 230 mm rear disc with ABS. The bike has a ground clearance of 157 mm, and a 13-litre fuel tank.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 05, 2025 01:27 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Affluent Travelers Are Ditching Business Class for Business Jets
That’s changing. With the majority of companies implementing hybrid or full-time office mandates, business travel has resumed and, with that, business jets are back in business. So far this year, worldwide private jet activity has been up year-over-year for 20 out of the past 24 weeks, per WINGX data. According to Qi, VistaJet has received three times as many RFPs (request for proposals) from corporations looking for private aviation solutions during the first six months of 2025 compared to the first six months of 2024.
But business travelers aren’t the only customers driving the surge in demand. Private carriers have long been a popular option for reaching leisure destinations that lack commercial connections. According to aircraft charter specialist Chapman Freeborn, harder-to-reach destinations like Scotland’s Hebrides, and the French and Italian islands of Corsica and Ischia, are trending this summer, alongside perennial favorites like the Hamptons and Ibiza. The biggest spikes in worldwide private jet activity in recent months have coincided with major sporting events and holidays; over Memorial Day weekend, private jet flights in the US hit an all-time record compared to previous years.
There’s still room for growth—according to 2021 data, the majority of US households who can afford to fly private, in fact, do not. One reason for this is that private aviation requires a relatively manual booking process. From calling up brokers and comparing jet card memberships to purchasing fractional ownership models, it’s often easier to purchase a $10,000 business class ticket than to go through the motions of reserving a private charter.
The industry is now beginning to address those pain points with new products and tech. A handful of start-ups are vying to become “the Uber of private jet travel,” such as Kinectair, which offers real-time pricing and route search features, without charging membership fees. This summer, Uber itself launched a helicopter booking feature in the Amalfi Coast.
The intersection between commercial and private aviation is continuing to grow. In an industry-first, Delta Air Lines is now connecting its international business class passengers with Wheels Up charter flights throughout Europe.
Meanwhile, “semi-private” carriers like JSX, XO, and Aero offer scheduled services aboard private aircraft that travelers can book by the seat—a model that’s proven a hit among premium travelers. Tradewind Aviation—which offers both book-by-the-seat scheduled flights and private charters in the US and the Caribbean—says it’s seeing roughly a 33 percent year-over-year increase in scheduled service bookings across its routes; However, private charters are seeing “less of an increase” this summer compared to last, a Tradewind spokesperson says.
As demand for scheduled services increases, carriers like these are expanding their route maps. This May, Aero launched a bicoastal Los Angeles to New York flight (featuring in-flight Erewhon meals and Starlink Wi-Fi). The company says the new route was “built for business travelers, flying from Los Angeles to New York on Monday mornings and returning to Los Angeles on Thursday afternoons.”
Mattson, of Wheels Up, believes even more travelers will be making the leap from business class to business jet in the years to come. Above all else, the core draw of private aviation—whether used for a corporate or leisure trip—remains a simple one, he says: “You can save a lot of time—and time, ultimately, is money.”
Republican Megabill Will Mean Higher Health Costs for Many Americans
The tax and spending legislation the House voted to send to President Donald Trump’s desk on Thursday, enacting much of his domestic agenda, cuts federal health spending by about $1 trillion over a decade in ways that will jeopardize the physical and financial health of tens of millions of Americans.
The bill, passed in both the House and the Senate without a single Democratic vote, is expected to reverse many of the health coverage gains of the Biden and Obama administrations. Their policies made it easier for millions of people to access health care and reduced the U.S. uninsured rate to record lows, though Republicans say the trade-off was far higher costs borne by taxpayers and increased fraud.
Under the legislation Trump’s expected to sign on Friday, Independence Day, reductions in federal support for Medicaid and Affordable Care Act marketplaces will cause nearly 12 million more people to be without insurance by 2034, the Congressional Budget Office estimates. That in turn is expected to undermine the finances of hospitals, nursing homes, and community health centers — which will have to absorb more of the cost of treating uninsured people. Some may reduce services and employees or close altogether.
Here are five ways the GOP’s plans may affect health care access.
Need Medicaid? Then Get a Job
The deepest cuts to health care spending come from a proposed Medicaid work requirement, which is expected to end coverage for millions of enrollees who do not meet new employment or reporting standards.
In 40 states and Washington, D.C., all of which have expanded Medicaid under the Affordable Care Act, some Medicaid enrollees will have to regularly file paperwork proving that they are working, volunteering, or attending school at least 80 hours a month, or that they qualify for an exemption, such as caring for a young child. The new requirement will start as early as January 2027.
The bill’s requirement doesn’t apply to people in the 10 largely GOP-led states that have not expanded Medicaid to nondisabled adults.
Health researchers say the policy will have little impact on employment. Most working-age Medicaid enrollees who don’t receive disability benefits already work or are looking for work, or are unable to do so because they have a disability, attend school, or care for a family member, according to KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
State experiments with work requirements have been plagued with administrative issues, such as eligible enrollees’ losing coverage over paperwork problems, and budget overruns. Georgia’s work requirement, which officially launched in July 2023, has cost more than $90 million, with only $26 million of that spent on health benefits, according to the Georgia Budget & Policy Institute, a nonpartisan research organization.
“The hidden costs are astronomical,” said Chima Ndumele, a professor at the Yale School of Public Health.
Less Cash Means Less Care in Rural Communities
Belt-tightening that targets states could translate into fewer health services, medical professionals, and even hospitals, especially in rural communities.
The GOP’s plan curtails a practice, known as provider taxes, that nearly every state has used for decades to increase Medicaid payments to hospitals, nursing homes, and other providers and to private managed-care companies.
States often use the federal money generated through the taxes to pay the institutions more than Medicaid would otherwise pay. Medicaid generally pays lower fees for care than Medicare, the program for people over 65 and some with disabilities, and private insurance. But thanks to provider taxes, some hospitals are paid more under Medicaid than Medicare, according to the Commonwealth Fund, a health research nonprofit.
Hospitals and nursing homes say they use these extra Medicaid dollars to expand or add new services and improve care for all patients.
Rural hospitals typically operate on thin profit margins and rely on payments from Medicaid taxes to sustain them. Researchers from the Cecil G. Sheps Center for Health Services Research who examined the original House version of the bill concluded it would push more than 300 rural hospitals — many of them in Kentucky, Louisiana, California, and Oklahoma — toward service reductions or closure.
Republicans in the Senate tacked a $50 billion fund onto the legislation to cushion the blow to rural hospitals. The money will be distributed starting in 2027 and continue for five years.
Harder To Get, and Keep, ACA Coverage
For those with Obamacare plans, the new legislation will make it harder to enroll and to retain their coverage.
ACA marketplace policyholders will be required to update their income, immigration status, and other information each year, rather than be allowed to automatically reenroll — something more than 10 million people did this year. They’ll also have less time to enroll; the bill shortens the annual open enrollment period by about a month.
People applying for coverage outside that period — for instance because they lose a job or other insurance or need to add a newborn or spouse to an existing policy — will have to wait for all their documents to be processed before receiving government subsidies to help pay their monthly premiums. Today, they get up to 90 days of premium help during the application process, which can take weeks.
Republican lawmakers and some conservative policy think tanks, including the Paragon Health Institute, say the changes are needed to reduce fraudulent enrollments, while opponents say they represent Trump’s best effort to undo Obamacare.
The legislation also does not call for an extension of more generous premium subsidies put in place during the covid pandemic. If Congress doesn’t act, those enhanced subsidies will expire at year’s end, resulting in premiums rising by an average of 75% next year, according to KFF.
On Medicaid? Pay More To See Doctors
Many Medicaid enrollees can expect to pay more out-of-pocket for appointments.
Trump’s legislation requires states that have expanded Medicaid to charge enrollees up to $35 for some services if their incomes are between the federal poverty level (this year, $15,650 for an individual) and 138% of that amount ($21,597).
Medicaid enrollees often don’t pay anything when seeking medical services because studies have shown charging even small copayments prompts low-income people to forgo needed care. In recent years, some states have added charges under $10 for certain services.
The policy won’t apply to people seeking primary care, mental health care, or substance abuse treatment. The bill allows states to enact even higher cost sharing for enrollees who seek emergency room care for nonemergencies. But if Medicaid patients fail to pay, hospitals and other providers could be left to foot the bill.
Cuts for Lawfully Present Immigrants
The GOP plan could cause at least hundreds of thousands of immigrants who are lawfully present — including asylum-seekers, victims of trafficking, and refugees — to lose their ACA marketplace coverage by cutting off the subsidies that make premiums affordable. The restriction won’t apply to green-card holders.
Because the immigrants who will lose subsidies under the legislation tend to be younger than the overall U.S. population, their exit would leave an older, sicker, and costlier population of marketplace enrollees, further pushing up marketplace premiums, according to marketplace directors in California, Maryland, and Massachusetts and health analysts.
Taking health care access away from immigrants living in the country legally “will do irreparable harm to individuals we have promised to protect and impose unnecessary costs on local systems already under strain,” John Slocum, executive director of Refugee Council USA, an advocacy group, said in a statement.
The bill reflects the Trump administration’s restrictive approach to immigration. But because it ran afoul of Senate rules, the legislation doesn’t include a proposal that would have reduced federal Medicaid payments to states such as California that use their own money to cover immigrants without legal status.
KFF Health News chief Washington correspondent Julie Rovner contributed reporting.
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
USE OUR CONTENT
This story can be republished for free (details).
Everything To Know About NTE
Ever since Persona transformed the RPG into a wonderfully voyeuristic Japanese tourism simulator, I’ve had an appetite for games that let me experience living on the other side of the planet. Whether it’s roaming the streets of Osaka in Yakuza or trudging across the dung-filled fields of Kingdom Come: Deliverance’s medieval Bohemia, there’s something satisfying about picking up a controller and being given a window into someone else’s life.
Yet since Persona offers a disappointingly linear Tokyo to traverse, I’ve been left pining to get lost in a truly sprawling virtual metropolis. Thankfully, it turns out my oddly specific prayers have been answered. Welcome to the slick and exciting new anime open-world RPG from Hotta Studio, NTE.
Hot-ta Go
Developed by the creators of the 2021 hit, Tower of Fantasy, NTE is a fully open-world anime brawler made using Unreal Engine 5. Putting players into the near-future city of Hethereau, anime-styled characters are free to roam the futuristic metropolis as they see fit. Feeling like a blend of Shanghai, Seoul, and Tokyo, Hethereau is fully explorable in its gargantuan glory – and it finally satisfies that free-form slice of life itch.
It helps that the city of Hetherau looks absolutely stunning. As crisp character models are brought to life with expressive animations, Lumen lighting tech brings street lamps and puzzles shimmering to life with impressive reflections. In a nice touch, exploring this cityscape feels pleasingly kinetic. From sprinting across packed plazas to sipping coffee at a quiet cafe or fighting anomalies in back alleys, there’s an impressively vast map begging to be explored. As you hop into a car and crash into incoming traffic, chat to overly excitable citizens and then head into a portal to slice up some dudes, it’s hard not to feel like you’re playing a Shonen Jump twist on GTA.
Real-time weather helps to keep your time in Hethereau feeling fresh – no matter the forecast. Whenever you boot up NTE, you never know what kind of day awaits, with your daily adventures shifting from sun-soaked ambles across packed city streets to racing across town with snowflake-laden windscreen wipers. It’s all surprisingly well realised and immersive stuff, with snow even affecting NPC behaviour. Pedestrians leave snow prints as they go about their days, and heavy snowfall even brings traffic edging to an authentic standstill.
Anomaly of a Fall
Still, it’s not all a breezy good time here – there is an existential threat facing humanity, after all. With people around the world suddenly mutated by thick goo falling from the sky, a hyper vortex has corrupted and maddened once ordinary citizens, and it’s up to the authorities to try and contain this horrific anomaly before it spreads. As a member of the Anomaly Control’s Containment Unit, it’s up to you to help keep citizens safe.
Much like in the games that inspired it, there’s a murky distinction between regular city life and the action-packed showdowns with anomalies. In NTE, the vast city of Hethereau shimmers with a surrealist quality, seamlessly blending day-to-day city life with reality-bending sci-fi. Divided into two main sections, the city’s Frontworld is a meticulously ordered, seamless open-world cyberpunk metropolis where players can explore and progress the story, while the Backworld – you guessed it – is littered with local urban distortions caused by those pesky supernatural anomalies.
The sun-soaked streets of the Frontworld offer a nice contrast to the murky, horror-tinged encounters that define the anomalies. One such section saw me roaming an eerily abandoned school. With its glistening corridors devoid of life, and a pulsating crimson oozing out of the windows, these spooky sections are nice and atmospheric – a welcome change from simply being dumped straight into combat.
Speaking of combat, NTE offers unique mechanics depending on your character, such as character-specific Critical Dodge Counterattacks and Parry Attacks, which add fresh layers of strategy and style to enemy encounters.
Grand Theft Anime
In a Michael-Scott pleasing touch, urban exploration comes with a parkour twist, allowing players to navigate the sprawling urban metropolis by sprinting, jumping, and climbing their way across the packed city streets. If that all sounds far too exhausting, you can instead opt to simply hop on the subway, chatting to the locals for new leads on anomaly locations, or to engage in some enjoyably silly side quests. If parkour doesn’t float your proverbial boat, you can always take to the sky, hopping on a zipline to speed across the neon skyline and uncover the city’s hidden corners.
Of course, it wouldn’t be GTA-like without, well, some grand theft auto. Just like in Rockstar’s flagship franchise, vehicles in Hethereau can be commandeered under Anomaly Control’s Containment Unit (more on them later) authority via Requisition gameplay, allowing you to peacefully take over any car if it will help you keep the city safe. If, however, you step out of line and attack fellow citizens, you’ll trigger a Wanted level, with the Security Office putting out a warrant for your arrest and chasing you down. Continuing to break the law will increase your wanted level with escalating consequences based on the severity of your offence. The more you attempt to escape or the more wanton destruction you cause, the higher the said wanted level. GTA VI, eat your heart out.
And if that wasn’t enough law-flaunting for you, you can also team up with friends to try out street racing challenges, competing with crews from various districts in high-octane multiplayer races. If you fancy testing your driving skills, Hetherau’s streets are littered with fast and furious drivers, all itching to put the pedal to the metal and helping you try out all manner of torque-testing new rides. Just be careful in bad weather: the snow might be immersive and realistic – with snowflakes organically blowing in the wind and the snow getting deeper in real time – but rain or snow means slippery roads and a greater chance of you dramatically spinning off track.
In NTE, you’re an anomaly hunter, with the game’s core missions revolving around hunting down said anomalies. Story beats are punctuated with gorgeously rendered cutscenes, leaning fully into their anime inspirations, as devious plot twists and turns are delivered with pleasing cinematic flourish.
Beta Than Paradise
Whether you’re cruising down the streets in your sweet new ride or clambering up the side of buildings, NTE is a surprisingly varied and feature-packed game. I was pleasantly surprised by the open world’s scope, with developer Hotta Studio promising that players will be able to choose how they mould their own destiny – yet it was too early to tell how these choices will ultimately pan out.
If the year-long wait for GTA VI has got you down, and modern gatcha games aren’t doing it for you, you can always take a trip to Hethereau when NTE comes out on PC, mobile, and PlayStation 5. The NTE beta on PC is available now until July 16th, and you can register your place here.
Frozen light switches: How Arctic microbes could revolutionize neuroscience
Imagine the magnificent glaciers of Greenland, the eternal snow of the Tibetan high mountains, and the permanently ice-cold groundwater in Finland. As cold and beautiful these are, for the structural biologist Kirill Kovalev, they are more importantly home to unusual molecules that could control brain cells’ activity.
Kovalev, EIPOD Postdoctoral Fellow at EMBL Hamburg’s Schneider Group and EMBL-EBI’s Bateman Group, is a physicist passionate about solving biological problems. He is particularly hooked by rhodopsins, a group of colorful proteins that enable aquatic microorganisms to harness sunlight for energy.
“In my work, I search for unusual rhodopsins and try to understand what they do,” said Kovalev. “Such molecules could have undiscovered functions that we could benefit from.”
Some rhodopsins have already been modified to serve as light-operated switches for electrical activity in cells. This technique, called optogenetics, is used by neuroscientists to selectively control neuronal activity during experiments. Rhodopsins with other abilities, such as enzymatic activity, could be used to control chemical reactions with light, for example.
Having studied rhodopsins for years, Kovalev thought he knew them inside out – until he discovered a new, obscure group of rhodopsins that were unlike anything he had seen before.
As it often happens in science, it started serendipitously. While browsing online protein databases, Kovalev spotted an unusual feature common to microbial rhodopsins found exclusively in very cold environments, such as glaciers and high mountains. “That’s weird,” he thought. After all, rhodopsins are something you typically find in seas and lakes.
These cold-climate rhodopsins were almost identical to each other, even though they evolved thousands of kilometres apart. This couldn’t be a coincidence. They must be essential for surviving in the cold, concluded Kovalev, and to acknowledge this, he named them ‘cryorhodopsins’.
Rhodopsins out of the blue
Kovalev wanted to know more: what these rhodopsins look like, how they work, and, in particular, what color they are.
Color is the key feature of each rhodopsin. Most are pink-orange – they reflect pink and orange light, and absorb green and blue light, which activates them. Scientists strive to create a palette of different colored rhodopsins, so they could control neuronal activity with more precision. Blue rhodopsins have been especially sought-after because they are activated by red light, which penetrates tissues more deeply and non-invasively.
To Kovalev’s amazement, the cryorhodopsins he examined in the lab revealed an unexpected diversity of colors, and, most importantly, some were blue.
The color of each rhodopsin is determined by its molecular structure, which dictates the wavelengths of light it absorbs and reflects. Any changes in this structure can alter the color.
“I can actually tell what’s going on with cryorhodopsin simply by looking at its color,” laughed Kovalev.
Applying advanced structural biology techniques, he figured out that the secret to the blue color is the same rare structural feature that he originally spotted in the protein databases.
“Now that we understand what makes them blue, we can design synthetic blue rhodopsins tailored to different applications,” said Kovalev.
Next, Kovalev’s collaborators examined cryorhodopsins in cultured brain cells. When cells expressing cryorhodopsins were exposed to UV light, it induced electric currents inside them. Interestingly, if the researchers illuminated the cells right afterwards with green light, the cells became more excitable, whereas if they used UV/red light instead, it reduced the cells’ excitability.
“New optogenetic tools to efficiently switch the cell’s electric activity both ‘on’ and ‘off’ would be incredibly useful in research, biotechnology and medicine,” said Tobias Moser, Group Leader at the University Medical Center Göttingen who participated in the study. “For example, in my group, we develop new optical cochlear implants for patients that can optogenetically restore hearing in patients. Developing the utility of such a multi-purpose rhodopsin for future applications is an important task for the next studies.”
“Our cryorhodopsins aren’t ready to be used as tools yet, but they’re an excellent prototype. They have all the key features that, based on our findings, could be engineered to become more effective for optogenetics,” said Kovalev.
Evolution’s UV light protector
When exposed to sunlight even on a rainy winter day in Hamburg, cryorhodopsins can sense UV light, as shown using advanced spectroscopy by Kovalev’s collaborators from Goethe University Frankfurt led by Josef Wachtveitl. Wachtveitl’s team showed that cryorhodopsins are in fact the slowest among all rhodopsins in their response to light. This made the scientists suspect that those cryorhodopsins might act like photosensors letting the microbes ‘see’ UV light – a property unheard of among other cryorhodopsins.
“Can they really do that?” Kovalev kept asking himself. A typical sensor protein teams up with a messenger molecule that passes information from the cell membrane to the cell’s inside.
Kovalev grew more convinced, when together with his collaborators from Alicante, Spain, and his EIPOD co-supervisor, Alex Bateman from EMBL-EBI, they noticed that the cryorhodopsin gene is always accompanied by a gene encoding a tiny protein of unknown function – likely inherited together, and possibly functionally linked.
Kovalev wondered if this might be the missing messenger. Using the AI tool AlphaFold, the team were able to show that five copies of the small protein would form a ring and interact with the cryorhodopsin. According to their predictions, the small protein sits poised against the cryorhodopsin inside the cell. They believe that when cryorhodopsin detects UV light, the small protein could depart to carry this information into the cell.
“It was fascinating to uncover a new mechanism via which the light-sensitive signal from cryorhodopsins could be passed on to other parts of the cell. It is always a thrill to learn what the functions are for uncharacterised proteins. In fact, we find these proteins also in organisms that do not contain cryorhodopsin, perhaps hinting at a much wider range of jobs for these proteins.”
Why cryorhodopsins evolved their astonishing dual function – and why only in cold environments – remains a mystery.
“We suspect that cryorhodopsins evolved their unique features not because of the cold, but rather to let microbes sense UV light, which can be harmful to them,” said Kovalev. “In cold environments, such as the top of a mountain, bacteria face intense UV radiation. Cryorhodopsins might help them sense it, so they could protect themselves. This hypothesis aligns well with our findings.”
“Discovering extraordinary molecules like these wouldn’t be possible without scientific expeditions to often remote locations, to study the adaptations of the organisms living there,” added Kovalev. “We can learn so much from that!”
Unique approach to unique molecules
To reveal the fascinating biology of cryorhodopsins, Kovalev and his collaborators had to overcome several technical challenges.
One was that cryorhodopsins are nearly identical in structure, and even a slight change in the position of a single atom can result in different properties. Studying molecules at this level of detail requires going beyond standard experimental methods. Kovalev applied a 4D structural biology approach, combining X-ray crystallography at EMBL Hamburg beamline P14 and cryo-electron microscopy (cryo-EM) in the group of Albert Guskov in Groningen, Netherlands, with protein activation by light.
“I actually chose to do my postdoc at EMBL Hamburg, because of the unique beamline setup that made my project possible,” said Kovalev. “The whole P14 beamline team worked together to tailor the setup to my experiments – I’m very grateful for their help.”
Another challenge was that cryorhodopsins are extremely sensitive to light. For this reason, Kovalev’s collaborators had to learn to work with the samples in almost complete darkness.
PII India National Youth Competition on Drug Use Prevention, 2025
About PII India
Prevention Influencer Initiative India (PII India) is a youth-led public health initiative focused on drug use prevention through creative engagement and stigma reduction.
As part of its mission, PII India is currently organizing a nationwide National Youth Competition to empower and engage young people across India. Managed by a dynamic team of two, PII India is executing this project under a grant awarded by the Colombo Plan in collaboration with the U.S. Department of State.
About the National Youth Competition
The Prevention Influencer Initiative India (PII India) is pleased to announce its PII India National Youth Competition focused on raising awareness through creativity. This unique competition encourages India’s youth to express their ideas on the importance of prevention in public health.
Theme
“₹1 invested in prevention is ₹10 saved in cure”
Each entry must adhere to this theme with a focus on drug use prevention and public health awareness. Participants can interpret and express this theme creatively through either one or both the categories:
- Creative Writing
- Poster Making
Eligibility
- The competition is open to all Indian youth aged 18–30 years.
- Only individual entries are allowed. Group submissions will not be accepted.
- Each individual may submit one entry per category (1 creative writing + 1 poster max).
- Only the first 200 entries will be accepted. So, submit early!
Submission Guidelines
- All entries must be submitted in PDF format.
- Each entry must adhere to the theme.
- Submissions should align with the evidence-based prevention standards outlined by UNODC and WHO. Click here to access the document.
- Submissions must be made only via the Google Form provided at the end of this post.
- The decision of the judges, based on their expertise, shall be final and not open to challenge.
Registration Fees
Registration is free for all participants.
Submission Window
5th July – 15th July, 2025
Prizes
- First Prize – Rs.15,000/-
- Second Prize – Rs. 10,000/-
- Third Prize – Rs. 5,000/-
Separate prizes will be awarded in both categories.
Contact
For any queries, write to: [email protected]
Click here to submit.
Click here to access their Instagram handle.
Access Denied
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/fitness-coach-shares-10-simple-rules-to-lose-10-kgs-in-50-days-without-dieting-or-gym-weight-loss-tips-101751726957013.html” on this server.
Reference #18.d4c25068.1751739640.a4dd03e
https://errors.edgesuite.net/18.d4c25068.1751739640.a4dd03e
Did the Baby Boomers Really Have It Easier in Property?
Key takeaways
Boomers bought homes at 3–4 times their annual income, versus today’s 9+ times in major cities.
Millennials and Gen Z typically start saving for property later due to extended education and delayed family formation.
Political incentives keep housing prices high, protecting voter wealth.
Policies designed to help first-home buyers (grants, accessing superannuation) often just increase property prices, worsening affordability in the long term.
Parental assistance is now a key factor for young buyers, averaging around $200,000 per family.
However, inheritances usually come too late to significantly impact Millennials’ home-buying and family-building years.
Gen X faces the greatest immediate pressure, caught between supporting aging parents and dependent teenagers.
Gen Z potentially stands to benefit most from eventual inheritances combined with improved future housing policies.
You’ve probably heard it before—or maybe even said it yourself: “Baby Boomers had it easy.”
They bought property when homes were three times the average income, got free university, and watched their house prices skyrocket while sipping cheap coffee.
But is it really that simple?
Or are we falling into the trap of generational finger-pointing instead of understanding how we got here—and more importantly, how we move forward?
Baby Boomers: the lucky generation?
There’s no denying it—Baby Boomers are Australia’s wealthiest generation.
Despite only making up 26% of households, they own over 50% of owner-occupied dwellings.
Many of these homes are debt-free and sit on prime land.
In short, they’ve passed GO multiple times on the Monopoly board of life—and collected their $200 (and capital growth) each time.
So how did this happen?
- Timing: Boomers bought in when homes cost just 3–4x the average income. Today it’s more than 9x in major cities.
- Booms on Booms: They’ve ridden multiple property booms—from Whitlam-era inflation in the 70s through to the early 2000s.
- Tax Perks: Negative gearing, capital gains tax discounts, and no CGT on the family home all helped accelerate wealth.
- Free Tertiary Education: Many Boomers enjoyed debt-free higher education, unlike today’s graduates, saddled with HECS.
- Policy Power: Boomers were (and still are) the largest voting bloc, helping shape policy that favoured asset growth.
But was it easy?
Not exactly, when I bought my first property in the 1970s, interest rates were high, banks didn’t count a wife’s income for loans, and the rent on my first property that cost $18,000 was just $12 a week.
It felt risky.
I had no roadmap, no certainty—just a belief in property.
And while Boomers didn’t start with HECS debts, we didn’t have super either—at least not until Keating brought it in during the 90s.
We scrimped and saved for deposits, dealt with double-digit inflation, and weathered recessions, too.
But the key difference?
Asset price inflation was on our side.
Once on the property ladder, the wind was blowing in the right direction.
Younger generations: doing it tougher
Today’s younger generations—Millennials and Gen Z—are facing a different game altogether:
- Later Starts: With longer time in education and delayed family formation, many don’t start saving for a home until their 30s.
- Higher Hurdles: It can take a decade to save a deposit, even in a low-interest environment.
- Widening Wealth Gap: Younger Aussies have significantly less wealth than Boomers did at the same age. Median wealth for Boomers is $1.1 million; for Millennials, it’s just $550,000.
Housing as a fortress
The political cost of making housing more affordable is too high because it risks hurting the asset base of voters.
And here’s the kicker: Even policies meant to help first-home buyers, like grants or using super, are largely ineffective.
All they do is bid up prices and kick the affordability can down the road.
The “Bank of Mum and Dad” and the great wealth transfer
But with property so out of reach, more young Aussies are turning to their parents for help.
The “Bank of Mum and Dad” is now one of the country’s biggest financial institutions, offering an average of $200,000 in gifts or guarantees to help kids get on the property ladder.
And the future?
We’re only at the beginning of a massive intergenerational wealth transfer.
But here’s the catch: most Millennials and Gen Zs won’t see that money until they’re in their 50s or later, often too late to impact their family-forming years or first home purchases.
Gen X, sandwiched between caring for aging parents and supporting dependent teens, may face the toughest decade ahead.
But Gen Z might be the generation to benefit from both eventual inheritance and (hopefully) better housing policy reforms.
So, where does that leave us?
It’s easy to point fingers.
But we don’t need a generational blame game—we need smarter solutions.
Yes, Baby Boomers benefited from good timing and favourable policy.
But they also took risks, saved hard, and stayed the course.
Yes, younger generations face bigger hurdles.
But they also have the most important resource of all: time.
And with smart strategies like rentvesting, building multiple income streams, and getting strategic advice, they can still build wealth and get ahead.
The rules may have changed, but the game isn’t over.
Final Thoughts: choose your playing field
In Monopoly, everyone starts with a different roll of the dice.
But in real life, you can pick your advisors, map your path, and build your board.
You don’t need to land on Park Lane to win—you just need to play smart, adapt quickly, and stay in the game.
Whether you’re 25 or 65, it’s not too late to start building wealth.
The key is not to complain about the rules, but to learn to play by them—and find your way to win.
Vaginal Atrophy Menopause And Its Toll On Intimate Relationships
If you’re navigating menopause and suddenly dealing with discomfort “down there” or wondering, “Why am I dry down there all of a sudden?”, you’re not alone. Vaginal atrophy, also called genitourinary syndrome of menopause (GSM), is a common condition where vaginal tissues become thinner, drier, and more fragile after estrogen levels drop in midlife. Lower estrogen means less natural lubrication and elasticity in your vagina, which can lead to itching, burning, and pain during sex. That’s the vaginal atrophy menopause connection in a nutshell.
In this article, we discuss the different aspects of vaginal atrophy, exploring its symptoms, causes, impact on intimate relationships, and, most importantly, how you can manage it. Let’s dive in!
What Is Vaginal Atrophy?
Vaginal atrophy is the thinning and drying of the vaginal walls due to a lack of estrogen. It usually develops during or after menopause, when your body’s estrogen levels fall. Estrogen is the hormone that keeps your vaginal tissue healthy. It helps maintain lubrication, elasticity, and thickness in the vaginal lining. As estrogen dips, the vaginal skin loses moisture and stretchiness. The result? The tissue can become fragile, inflamed, and less able to lubricate itself, leading to some pretty uncomfortable symptoms. Common symptoms of vaginal atrophy include:
- Vaginal dryness and irritation: You might notice a persistent dry feeling inside your vagina or even around the vulva. The lack of moisture can cause itchiness or a raw, irritated sensation
- Burning or stinging: Some women feel a burning sensation in the vagina or when urinating, which is easily mistaken for a urinary tract infection (UTI). In fact, vaginal atrophy can also increase UTI risk due to changes in vaginal pH. Sex during UTI can be immensely discomforting
- Pain during sex (dyspareunia): With less natural lubrication and thinner skin, intercourse can range from uncomfortable to downright painful. Women can also experience minor vaginal tearing or light bleeding during or after sex, due to the fragility of tissues
- Itching inside or around the vagina: Thinning skin can become itchy. Even the vulva can get dry and itchy, so sometimes just putting on underwear can cause irritation
- Frequent urinary issues: Because vaginal and urethral tissues are hormone-sensitive, you might find you have to urinate more often or feel urgency. Some women also experience mild incontinence or recurrent UTIs as part of the genitourinary changes of menopause
Sharing her experience of noticing the vaginal atrophy menopause connection, a woman on Reddit says, “Painful sex was the first atrophy symptom I had. I had never heard of vaginal atrophy and now I don’t shut up about it because I think it’s one of the worst symptoms that I’ve been surprised by.”
It often isn’t talked about openly, so many women feel blindsided when these symptoms hit. If some of these symptoms of vaginal atrophy sound familiar, take heart in the knowledge that this condition is very common and treatable. Up to half of menopausal women experience low estrogen symptoms like dryness and discomfort.
It’s not something you “just have to live with.” There are means to manage these symptoms effectively, and the first step toward making that happen is to understand what’s happening in your body that’s manifesting as all this discomfort. Let’s talk about that.
Related Reading: Five Fulfilling Alternatives To Intercourse
Why Women Experience Vaginal Atrophy During Menopause
So, what are the vaginal atrophy causes, and how does menopause contribute to it? Menopause is typically to blame, due to the hormonal rollercoaster your body goes through. As you approach menopause, your ovaries produce less and less estrogen. This estrogen drop is the main trigger for vaginal atrophy. Think of estrogen as the “maintenance crew” for your vaginal tissues. When it’s in abundant supply during your reproductive years, it keeps the vaginal lining plump, moisturized, and resilient. When that supply shrinks, the vaginal skin starts to dry out, thin down, and lose flexibility, becoming more like delicate paper than elastic tissue.
In fact, low estrogen symptoms often manifest in multiple ways during menopause. You might get hot flashes, night sweats, mood swings, and yes, vaginal dryness is one of those hallmark symptoms of low hormones. The natural acids and fluids that used to keep your vagina lubricated are now in shorter supply, which can also upset the pH balance and protective environment.
This onset can feel sudden for many women, leaving them wondering, “Why am I dry down there all of a sudden?” Explaining why it often feels sudden, Dr. Cynthia Abraham, an OB/GYN, says, “Many patients only realize something is wrong when they attempt intercourse after a period of abstinence and find that sex is painful due to dryness.” So while the tissues may have quietly thinned over time, you notice the dryness only when it starts affecting your intimacy.
How Vaginal Atrophy Impacts Intimate Relationships
The impact of vaginal atrophy menopause connection isn’t limited to your body. It influences your relationship with your partner and can lower self-esteem. As Dr. Abraham says, many women only notice postmenopausal atrophic vaginitis when they experience dryness and discomfort during sex. This can bring up feelings of frustration, lead to a decrease in libido, and even leave you worried about intimacy with your partner.
Painful sex can understandably lead to a decreased sex drive or avoidance of intimacy altogether. After all, if your brain starts to associate sex with pain, it’s hard to feel eager for it. This can create a cycle of both partners withdrawing: you might dread intercourse, and your partner might feel confused or rejected.
Licensed marriage and family therapist Katie Ziskind explains that vaginal dryness can deeply impact a romantic relationship and healthy sex life. “Painful sex is often one of the main symptoms of vaginal dryness,” Ziskind notes, “And that pain can cause anxiety or reluctance around intimacy.”
In turn, couples may experience tension or a loss of closeness. You might find yourself in a pattern of turning down advances or your partner becoming hesitant to initiate, for fear of hurting you. Emotional side effects like feeling “old” or less attractive can creep in as well. A man going through something similar asked for help on Reddit, saying,
“My wife (53) & I (52) have been struggling for the last year with vaginal dryness during sex. It started out with only occasional dryness, which we would work around, but now it’s made penetrative sex nearly impossible because of the pain. I would love to give or get oral sex, but she’s not into it, she says it makes her feel uncomfortable.
“She has hot flashes & hasn’t had her period for about a year. She has gone to the doctor, and Estrogen replacement therapy has been suggested, but at this point, she refuses to start because she has unspecified health concerns. She will not use lube because she gets UTIs & itching from the variety of brands we’ve tried. So I’m here trying to get help for us because I feel that our marriage is at a breaking point, I can not live in a sexless relationship. Please give us advice, what has worked for you?”
It’s plain to see how devastating untreated vaginal atrophy can be for both partners in a relationship. The silver lining is that with openness and the right approach, couples can adapt and overcome these challenges. Here are some things you can try:
- Communication is key. As awkward as it may seem, talking to your partner about what you’re experiencing physically will help them understand it’s not about lack of attraction
- Try to approach it as a team problem to solve, rather than suffer in silence. Often, just validating that “it’s not you, it’s the menopause” can relieve a lot of the emotional strain on both sides.
- Many couples find that working with a sex therapist or counselor can help them navigate these changes. “Couples can gain sex education and sexual confidence from working with a sex therapist,” says Ziskind
- Be open to redefining intimacy. It doesn’t have to mean penetrative sex. Focusing on sensual massages, oral sex (if comfortable), or simply increasing non-sexual affection can maintain connection while you address the physical issues.
- Don’t underestimate the value of patience and humor with your partner. Menopause is a natural phase of life, and while vaginal dryness is serious, it’s okay to approach solutions with a bit of lighthearted teamwork
Vaginal atrophy can affect your sex life, but it doesn’t have to end it. With good communication, the right treatments, and maybe some professional guidance, your sex life can absolutely continue to be satisfying after menopause.
How To Manage Vaginal Atrophy
Ready for the good news? There are many ways to manage vaginal atrophy and relieve that dryness, pain, and irritation. From simple home remedies to doctor-prescribed therapies, you have options. It may take a bit of trial and error to find what works best for your body, but countless women have been in your shoes and found solutions that let them feel comfortable and sexual again.
Before we break these down for you, remember that what works for one woman might not work for another. Your body is unique, so stay open-minded and give yourself some grace and time to find the right regimen. If something isn’t helping or causes new irritation, you can always pivot to another solution. Relief is definitely possible. Here are some solutions to counter the vaginal atrophy menopause connection effectively:
1. Natural supplements for vaginal dryness
One of the first things many women ask is whether there are natural supplements for vaginal dryness—vitamins, herbs, or dietary changes that can boost your body’s lubrication from the inside out. The answer is yes, there are a few promising options,
A 2023 study, along with other studies, for instance suggests that certain vitamins and fatty acids may improve vaginal moisture. Vitamin E and vitamin D have been shown to help increase vaginal lubrication and improve tissue health in postmenopausal women. Similarly, omega-3 fatty acids might support vaginal health by mildly increasing estrogen levels and enhancing lubrication.
Related Reading: Sexual Intimacy: Meaning, Benefits And Ways To Improve
“I’ve tried slippery elm and sea buckthorn oil and both have worked for me,” one Reddit user shared, discussing natural approaches to dryness. “They increase mucus in all mucous membranes. Slippery elm is the most common for vaginal dryness – I would start there first!” Many women in online forums echo that certain supplements helped them “get wet” again or at least improved overall dryness over time. Sounds promising? Here are some natural supplements for vaginal dryness you can explore:
- Membrasin Vitality Pearls (Sea Buckthorn Omega-7): A popular oral supplement rich in omega-7 fatty acids. Membrasin’s formula is designed to restore natural vaginal moisture by nourishing the mucous membranes from within. Some postmenopausal women report less dryness and itching after a couple of months of use
- O Positiv “MENO” Vaginal Moisture Support: An OBGYN-formulated capsule that includes a blend of vitamins like D3 and E, hyaluronic acid, and herbal extracts to support healthy vaginal moisture and tissue comfort. It’s a hormone-free daily supplement created specifically for menopause-related dryness
- OLLY “Mellow Menopause” Capsules: A daily menopause supplement containing EstroG-100, a blend of herbal extracts, along with ingredients to help with mood and stress. EstroG-100 has some clinical backing for menopause symptoms; women say this supplement helped with vaginal dryness, hot flashes, and even occasional mood swings (a nice bonus!)
Of course, maintaining a balanced diet with healthy fats like avocados, nuts, oily fish, and staying well-hydrated can also support your body’s moisture levels. Supplements are not magic bullets, but they can be a helpful part of a holistic approach, especially in combination with direct local treatments, which we’ll discuss next.
2. Estrogen creams and hormonal options
Since vaginal atrophy is fundamentally caused by lack of estrogen, one of the most effective treatments is, unsurprisingly, to add some estrogen back into the vaginal tissue. This doesn’t mean you have to go on full-body hormone replacement therapy (HRT) if you don’t want to. There are low-dose vaginal estrogen therapies that provide targeted relief right where you need it, with minimal absorption into the bloodstream.
Many gynecologists consider vaginal estrogen creams, tablets, or rings the gold standard for moderate to severe vaginal atrophy because they actually address the hormonal deficiency and can even reverse some of the tissue changes over time.
What are the options? There are a few forms of prescription vaginal estrogen that slowly release estrogen:
Related Reading: How to Spice Up A Sexless Relationship and Bring Intimacy Back?
All of these are inserted into the vagina. The ring you leave in place for around 3 months at a time; creams and tablets are used daily or a few times a week. These treatments deliver a micro-dose of estrogen locally, much lower than systemic HRT doses. According to the American College of OB/GYN, they carry very few risks for most women, even those in their 60s and beyond, and the estrogen stays largely in the vaginal tissue. If you have a history of breast cancer or other contraindications to estrogen, you’d need to discuss with your doctor. Often, even cancer survivors can use vaginal estrogen safely.
Women who use vaginal estrogen often report significant improvement in symptoms of vaginal atrophy. It’s not an instant fix; usually you use the product for a few weeks before noticing big changes, and maximum benefits come with regular use over months.
If estrogen cream isn’t an option for you because you absolutely cannot use hormones due to medical reasons, there are other prescription approaches available. One is DHEA vaginal suppositories. DHEA is a hormone precursor that your body locally converts into estrogen and testosterone, helping rejuvenate vaginal tissue. Another is an oral medication called ospemifene, which isn’t estrogen but acts like estrogen in the vaginal tissue to reduce pain with sex. However, these alternatives should be used only when suggested by your doctor.
3. Vaginal moisturizers
When you think of moisturizer, you probably imagine a face or hand cream. Well, your vagina can benefit from moisturizer too! Vaginal moisturizers are OTC products that you apply inside the vagina and sometimes around the vulva on a regular basis, either daily or a few times a week, to hydrate and nourish the tissues.
If you’re dealing with daily dryness or irritation, not just during intercourse, a vaginal moisturizer can be a game-changer. Dr. Cynthia Abraham says, “For vaginal dryness by itself, I recommend trying over-the-counter moisturizers and lubricants as a first line of treatment.”
These products often contain ingredients like hyaluronic acid, vitamin E, glycerin or glycol, and soothing agents. Some are gels or creams you apply with an applicator internally; others are ovule inserts or “beads” that dissolve. Then there are external vulvar moisturizers to relieve itching and dryness around the vaginal opening. Here are some popular vaginal moisturizers you can explore to address vaginal atrophy:
- Replens Long-Lasting Vaginal Moisturizer: A well-known glycerin-based moisturizing gel. It comes with applicators for internal use every 3 days or so. Replens works by coating the vaginal walls and hydrating the tissue; many women feel improved comfort after using it regularly
- Revaree Vaginal Inserts (Hyaluronic Acid): Revaree is a hormone-free vaginal insert made with hyaluronic acid. You insert one vaginal suppository tablet every few days; it dissolves and provides deep hydration. Clinical studies have shown hyaluronic acid can be as effective as estrogen cream for symptoms of vaginal atrophy in some cases, making Revaree a popular new option
- VMagic Organic Vulva Balm: This is an external moisturizing balm with natural ingredients like olive oil, honey, and beeswax that you apply to the vulva to soothe itching, redness, or splitting skin. It’s basically like a gentle, chemical-free lotion for your intimate skin. Women going through menopause love it for daily comfort. It can relieve that dry, sandpapery feeling around the vaginal opening
4. Lubricants for comfortable intimacy
While moisturizers help on a daily basis, you’ll still want a good lubricant on hand for sexual activity. Lubricants are designed to be applied right before intercourse or masturbation to reduce friction and pain. Using lube generously and frequently is one of the simplest and most effective ways to make sex pleasurable again. There are a few types of lubes you can explore:
- Water-based lubricants: These are the most common. They’re compatible with condoms and sex toys, easy to wash off, and generally gentle. The downside is that they can dry out or get absorbed, so you might need to reapply during a long session. If you’re prone to UTIs or yeast infections, look for glycerin-free and paraben-free labels
- Silicone-based lubricants: These are very slick and long-lasting, making them great for people who find water-based lubricants dry up too fast. Silicone lubes are also excellent for use in water because they won’t dissolve. They are safe with condoms, but not with silicone sex toys, as they can degrade the toy’s material
- Oil-based lubricants: This includes natural oils like coconut oil, olive oil, etc., as well as petroleum jelly or mineral oil products. Oil lubricants last a long time and feel moisturizing; however, they’re not compatible with latex condoms and can cause breakages. Some oils can trap bacteria or irritate sensitive tissue with long-term use. Coconut oil is a popular bedroom lubricant for those who don’t need condoms. Many women find it soothing and non-irritating. However, as a rule, doctors often recommend water-based lubes first to avoid any condom or infection issues
Related Reading: 11 Critical Sexless Marriage Effects On Wife
It’s worth trying a few different lubricants to find what texture and formula you like best. Here are some top options from each category you can explore:
- Astroglide Liquid: A classic water-based lubricant that’s been around for ages. Astroglide is known for being super slick initially. It does contain glycerin, which makes it very slippery, but that means some women might need to wash after sex to avoid any irritation. Astroglide is a good basic lube to try. Just reapply as needed since it can get a bit sticky when it dries
- Sliquid H2O or Sliquid Organics Gel: Sliquid is a popular brand formulated specifically for sensitive women. It’s water-based, glycerin-free, and paraben-free, with a short ingredient list. Sliquid H2O is a thin liquid, whereas the Organics Gel is a bit thicker. Both provide cushioning without irritation. Many menopausal women rave that Sliquid doesn’t burn or upset their vaginal pH
- Uberlube Silicone Lubricant: A premium silicone-based lube that comes in a sleek glass pump. Uberlube is extremely silky and long-lasting, with only a couple of ingredient:s silicone and a little vitamin E. It’s great for those who find water-based lubes evaporate too quickly on their tissue. Users often comment that Uberlube feels very natural and even reduces friction for hours
5. Vitamin E suppositories and other home remedies
Now let’s talk about some DIY and home remedies that many women find useful— vitamin E suppositories, coconut oil, and other natural oils. Vitamin E is a star player in this arena. Vitamin E is known for its skin-healing antioxidant properties, and it turns out it can work wonders for vaginal tissue as well. You can find vitamin E vaginal suppositories in the form of capsules or inserts, marketed for vaginal dryness, or you can literally use vitamin E gel capsules from the drugstore.
The idea is to place the capsule in the vagina, usually at night. It dissolves and releases the vitamin E oil, coating the vaginal walls. Women report that this can reduce dryness, itching, and even improve elasticity with regular use. A postmenopausal user shared on Reddit, “Get some cheap vitamin E oil capsules – the gel ones. Pop a couple up the hoo-ha before bed. The gel melts and the oil treats… this was the very best tip I was given.”
She found that vitamin E was more soothing for her vaginal “dry patches” than regular lubricants, essentially acting like a healing salve internally. Many in the thread agreed that vitamin E suppositories or oil provided relief from the “razor blade” feeling of vaginal dryness. You can also purchase pre-made vitamin E suppositories like Carlson Key-E Suppositories, specifically made for vaginal dryness. These are convenient and formulated for easy insertion.
Related Reading: Maintenance Sex—What Is It, Why Is It Important, And How To Have It?
Another beloved remedy is coconut oil. As mentioned earlier, coconut oil can serve as a natural lubricant, but it’s also a day-to-day moisturizer. Some women make little coconut oil suppositories by refrigerating small chunks of extra virgin coconut oil using a suppository mold, then inserting them at bedtime. The oil melts with body heat and coats the vagina. Coconut oil is natural, gentle, and has mild antimicrobial properties, so it generally doesn’t upset the vaginal flora.
Other home remedies people use include olive oil, sweet almond oil, or aloe vera gel applied to the vulva and vagina. These can be soothing for external dryness or mild internal use. Every woman’s chemistry is different, so what feels calming to one person might not agree with another. If you try a natural oil, introduce one at a time and see how you feel. Typically, pure, food-grade oils are safe—just avoid anything with fragrances or additives.
Another option is lidocaine gel. This isn’t exactly a natural remedy, but it’s something some doctors suggest for those with severe pain. A lidocaine gel applied to the vaginal opening 5-10 minutes before sex can numb the area just enough to make initial penetration tolerable while you work on longer-term fixes. It doesn’t take away all sensation, and it can be a useful bridge solution if pain is a big barrier.
Key Pointers
- Vaginal atrophy is a common postmenopausal condition where estrogen loss causes thinning, dryness, and inflammation of vaginal tissues, often leading to painful sex and irritation
- Symptoms include vaginal dryness, burning, itching, painful intercourse, and urinary issues, which can significantly affect quality of life and intimate relationships
- Menopause is the primary trigger, with the drop in estrogen weakening the vaginal lining’s elasticity, moisture, and pH balance
- Treatments include local estrogen therapies, vaginal moisturizers, lubricants, DHEA suppositories, ospemifene, and hormone-free natural supplements like vitamin E, omega-3s, and sea buckthorn oil
- Open communication, therapy, and redefining intimacy are key to managing its emotional and relational impact—it’s treatable, not something to silently endure
Final Thoughts
Dealing with vaginal atrophy during menopause can feel overwhelming, but remember: you have many tools at your disposal. Often, the best approach is a combination of strategies. For instance, you might take a supplement to address internal balance, use a vaginal moisturizer every other day for ongoing hydration, apply a vitamin E suppository or coconut oil as needed, and always use a good lubricant for sex. If symptoms are still troublesome, you can talk to your doctor about adding vaginal estrogen to really get to the root of the issue. There’s no one-size-fits-all, but there is a solution that will work for you.
Your sexual health and comfort matter. Whether it’s using natural supplements for vaginal dryness or asking your doctor about the latest treatments, you deserve to feel good in your body. With the right care routine, those pesky symptoms of vaginal atrophy can be effectively managed. You might even find your confidence and pleasure soaring back once you’ve got everything moisturized and sorted out. Here’s to keeping your lady parts happy and your intimate life thriving through menopause and beyond.
17 Signs A Woman Has Not Made Love For A Long Time
I Have No Sex Drive And My Husband Is Mad: Expert Advises What To Do
The Pressure to Perform, When Intimacy Becomes a Chore
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
This One Feature Makes Adobe’s New AI App a Must-Try
Image editing on mobile has always been a compromise—either you settle for basic tools or wrestle with apps that are too clunky for a phone. Adobe’s new Firefly app flips that on its head. It comes with a feature that makes image editing faster, simpler, and surprisingly fun.
Adobe’s New AI App Brings Generative Fill to Mobile
Generative Fill used to be locked away in Photoshop’s desktop interface and Adobe’s web tools. Now it’s broken free into a mobile app you can pull out anywhere, even while waiting in a coffee shop line.
The Firefly mobile app brings the same powerful AI editing to your phone. The process works in three straightforward steps: highlight what you want to change, describe what you want instead, and let the AI handle the rest.
Related
Why I Prefer Editing My Photos With AI Tools Over Manual Techniques
Letting AI handle the heavy lifting in photo editing has been a game-changer for me.
What makes this especially compelling on mobile is how fluid the workflow feels. You don’t need layers or masks. You don’t even need precision. Adobe has simplified the interface so that it feels more like sketching with a finger than editing with a mouse. There’s enough power under the hood to create high-quality results, but the barrier to entry is low enough that anyone can use it within minutes.
Unlike Google’s Magic Eraser and Apple’s Clean Up, which require specific hardware or subscriptions, Adobe Firefly runs on any modern smartphone. Adobe includes 10 Generative Fill uses each month for free, so you can try the tool without committing to a plan.
If you need more, you can subscribe to a Creative Cloud plan or a Firefly credit bundle. And because it’s tied to your Creative Cloud account, whatever you create syncs instantly across devices. This cross-platform integration puts it ahead of platform-locked alternatives.
Download: Adobe Firefly for iOS | Android (Free, in-app purchases available)
How to Use Generative Fill
Using Generative Fill is straightforward. You don’t need to understand layers, masks, or technical settings. Just tap, describe, and wait a few seconds.
Here’s how it works in practice:
- Open the Firefly app.
- Select Generative fill from the tool list.
- Upload a photo.
- Once the image is on the screen, tap the Insert icon.
- Use your finger to highlight the area you want to change.
- A text box will appear asking what you want to add, remove, or replace.
- Type your prompt and Firefly will generate the result in seconds.
Say you’re editing a beach photo and there’s a stranger walking through the background, you can brush over them and type: “remove person, replace with sand.” The app processes it in seconds and gives you a few variations to choose from. Pick your favorite, and it’s done.
The same works in reverse. Want to add something? Just highlight empty space and type “add a palm tree” or “place a surfboard leaning on the wall.” It doesn’t matter if you’re exact with your selection, Firefly’s model fills in surrounding details naturally, blending lighting and perspective better than most mobile editors ever could.
This is also where Firefly really outshines simpler tools like Magic Eraser or Clean Up. While those focus primarily on removing objects, Firefly’s Generative Fill can remove, replace, and add elements with sophisticated understanding of context. Instead of just erasing that photobomber, you can replace them with a palm tree that matches the scene’s lighting perfectly.
Processing typically takes 5-10 seconds per generation, depending on your internet connection and the complexity of your edit.
Related
How I Instantly Remove Unwanted Objects From My Photos With One Tap
You saw the object. Now it’s gone.
Surprising Ways You Can Use Generative Fill
You might open the Firefly app thinking you’ll just erase a trash can or clean up a messy corner. And yeah, it’s great at that. But the more you use Generative Fill, the more it becomes your quiet little cheat code for making images feel complete.
Take a product photo that feels a little empty. With a quick brush over the corner and the prompt “add potted plant with soft light,” the whole scene looks professionally styled instead of rushed.
When a portrait background feels dull, you don’t have to reshoot or hunt for stock. Just select the area behind your subject and try a prompt like “brick wall with window light” or “cozy bookstore interior.” Instantly, the mood shifts.
Took a decent photo but your coffee table’s a disaster? Brush over the mess, type something like “clean wooden surface with a book,” and watch it turn into something you’d actually post.
If you try one thing in Adobe’s new Firefly app, make it Generative Fill. It’s fast, intuitive, and surprisingly fun, like Photoshop magic without the learning curve.
Shaolin Pagoda Forest: Stones of a monastic legacy
The Shaolin Pagoda Forest is a place where ancient monks’ legacies are honored and history is carved in stone. Part of the “Center of Heaven and Earth” World Heritage site in Dengfeng, Henan Province, it contains 248 Buddhist pagodas, the oldest dating back 1,400 years to the Tang Dynasty. More than just the largest group of pagodas in China, it’s also the most complete timeline of monastic architecture. Each stone and brick structure reveals the skill of ancient artisans – carvings, calligraphy and designs telling the stories of past dynasties. Known as the “Museum of Ancient Pagoda Art,” it demonstrates how religion and art merged over the centuries.
South Korea celebrates the transformative power of ‘Squid Game’
SEOUL — The third and final season of Netflix’s “Squid Game” broke viewership records on the streaming platform following its release on June 27, marking a fitting close for what has arguably been the most successful South Korean TV series in history.
Although reviews have been mixed, Season 3 recorded more than 60 million views in the first three days and topped leaderboards in all 93 countries, making it Netflix’s biggest launch to date.
“Squid Game” has been transformative for South Korea, with much of the domestic reaction focused not on plot but on the prestige it has brought to the country. In Seoul, fans celebrated with a parade to commemorate the show’s end, shutting down major roads to make way for a marching band and parade floats of characters from the show.
In one section of the procession, a phalanx of the show’s masked guards, dressed in their trademark pink uniforms, carried neon-lit versions of the coffins that appear on the show to carry away the losers of the survival game. They were joined by actors playing the contestants, who lurched along wearing expressions of exaggerated horror, as though the cruel stakes of the game had just been revealed to them.
At the fan event that capped off the evening, series creator Hwang Dong-hyuk thanked the show’s viewers and shared the bittersweetness of it all being over.
“I gave my everything to this project, so the thought of it all ending does make me a bit sad,” he said. “But at the same time, I lived with such a heavy weight on my shoulders for so long that it feels freeing to put that all down.”
Despite the overnight global fame “Squid Game” brought him (it’s Netflix’s most-watched series of all time), Hwang has spoken extensively about the physical and mental toil of creating the show.
(Lee Jin-man / Associated Press)
He unsuccessfully shopped the show around for a decade until Netflix picked up the first season in 2019, paying the director just “enough to put food on the table” — while claiming all of the show’s intellectual property rights. During production for the first season, which was released in 2021, Hwang lost several teeth from stress.
A gateway into Korean content for many around the world, “Squid Game” show served to spotlight previously lesser-known aspects of South Korean culture, bringing inventions like dalgona coffee — made with a traditional Korean candy that was featured in the show — to places such as Los Angeles and New York.
The show also cleared a path for the global success of other South Korean series, accelerating a golden age of “Hallyu” (the Korean wave) that has boosted tourism and exports of food and cosmetics, as well as international interest in learning Korean.
But alongside its worldly successes, the show also provoked conversations about socioeconomic inequality in South Korean society, such as the prevalence of debt, which looms in the backstories of several characters.
A few years ago, President Lee Jae-myung, a longtime proponent of debt relief, said, “‘Squid Game’ reveals the grim realities of our society. A playground in which participants stake their lives in order to pay off their debt is more than competition — it is an arena in which you are fighting to survive.”
In 2022, the show made history as the first non-English-language TV series and the first Korean series to win a Screen Actors Guild Award, taking home three in total. It also won six Emmy Awards. That same year, the city of L.A. designated Sept. 17 — the series’ release date — as “Squid Game Day.“
Although Hwang has said in media interviews that he is done with the “Squid Game” franchise, the Season 3 finale — which features Cate Blanchett in a cameo as a recruiter for the games that are the show’s namesake — has revived rumors that filmmaker David Fincher may pick it up for an English-language spinoff in the future.
While saying he had initially written a more conventional happy ending, Hwang has described “Squid Game’s” final season as a sobering last stroke to its unsparing portrait of cutthroat capitalism.
“I wanted to focus in Season 3 on how in this world, where incessant greed is always fueled, it’s like a jungle — the strong eating the weak, where people climb higher by stepping on other people’s heads,” he told The Times’ Michael Ordoña last month.
“Coming into Season 3, because the economic system has failed us, politics have failed us, it seems like we have no hope,” he added. “What hope do we have as a human race when we can no longer control our own greed? I wanted to explore that. And in particular, I wanted to [pose] that question to myself.”
Toll Rates: Government Slashes Toll Charges by up to 50% on Select National Highway Sections With Tunnels, Bridges, Flyovers and Elevated Roads
New Delhi, July 5: In a major relief for motorists, the government has reduced toll rates by up to 50 per cent on certain sections of National Highways that include structures like tunnels, bridges, flyovers, and elevated roads. The move is aimed at lowering travel costs and making road journeys more affordable for the public.
The Ministry of Road Transport and Highways has amended the National Highways Fee Rules, 2008, and notified a new formula for calculating toll charges. According to the new rule, toll will now be calculated in a way that significantly reduces the fee on highway sections that consist mainly of such costly infrastructure. 2025 Bajaj Dominar 400 and 2025 Bajaj Dominar 250 Price, Specifications and Features Revealed, Know Everything About Next-Gen Bajaj Dominar Bikes Launched in India.
As per the notification, if a section of the National Highway includes structures like flyovers or tunnels, toll will be calculated based on the lesser of two values: Either ten times the length of the structures or five times the total length of the highway section. To explain this with an example, the ministry said that if a 40-kilometre stretch of a highway is entirely made up of structures like bridges or flyovers, then toll will be calculated on the lower of the two options — either 10 times the structure length (400 km) or 5 times the total length (200 km).
In this case, toll will be charged based on 200 km, effectively reducing the rate by half. Earlier, users had to pay ten times the regular toll rate for every kilometre of such structures, as these types of infrastructure are more expensive to build and maintain. Meanwhile, in another step towards hassle-free highway travel, Union Road Transport and Highways Minister Nitin Gadkari announced a new FASTag-based annual pass for private vehicles last month. Mahindra BE 6 Pack Two, Mahindra XEV 9e Pack Two Launched With 79 kWh Battery Option, Deliveries To Start on July End; Check Price and Other Details.
The pass, priced at Rs 3,000, will be available from August 15 this year. Designed specifically for non-commercial private vehicles such as cars, jeeps, and vans, the annual pass will remain valid for one year from the date of activation or up to 200 trips — whichever comes first.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 05, 2025 01:36 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
This Is Why Tesla’s Robotaxi Launch Needed Human Babysitters
“This is a demo or test using safety drivers—it’s not an [autonomous vehicle] deployment,” says Bryant Walker Smith, a law professor at the University of South Carolina who studies autonomous vehicles. “Tesla is splashing around in the kiddie pool and everyone is asking where it’s going to place in the Olympic swim competition.”
Bloopers and Sensors
Tesla has kept quiet about many of the particulars of its technology. And it’s hard to reach definite conclusions about its tech from social media posts uploaded by riders. But some of those posts appear to show less-than-smooth rides. In one video, a robotaxi attempting to make a left turn appears to cross a double yellow line into oncoming traffic. In another, a robotaxi apparently fails to detect a UPS truck stopping and reversing to park, and the front seat safety monitor has to intervene to stop the car.
One YouTuber uploaded a video showing a robotaxi “phantom braking”—suddenly coming to a stop for no apparent reason—a phenomenon that’s also been flagged by hundreds of users of Tesla’s less-advanced Full Self-Driving (Supervised) feature and investigated by the federal government. Unlike actual self-driving technology, Full Self-Driving (Supervised) requires users to keep their eyes on the road.
The service pauses for bad weather, according to Tesla’s website. One YouTuber had their ride halted for a rainstorm; the robotaxi dropped the rider in an Austin park as the wind began to whip around them. Minutes later, according to a video, the same Robotaxi picked the creator up to continue their ride. However, contradicting the above, one poster has reported the cars perform “FLAWLESSLY” in heavy rain.
The early bloopers aren’t surprising, experts say. Full Self-Driving (Supervised) requires a human driver to intervene when needed, and it appears robotaxi is the same right now, says Philip Koopman, a professor at Carnegie Mellon University who studies autonomous vehicle safety. The slip-ups the robotaxis have made are not unlike what human drivers do on the road, he says. But autonomy’s value add is supposed to be safety, so it makes sense that the videos—and the tech’s “rough edges”—are making people nervous.
Camera Quandary
The launch has reopened public debates about a core tenet of Tesla’s technology: its use of cameras alone to perceive and “make decisions” as it drives. Musk and his company have long argued that artificial intelligence, supplemented by the data collected by cameras, is sufficient to operate a safe, driverless car. The CEO has promised that all of its cars can become autonomous without any modifications, with a simple push of updated software (though Tesla also quietly reneged on this claim). Other companies see more expensive sensors, including radar and lidar, as important validators and support. (Lidar has dramatically dropped in price; many Chinese automakers are now including the sensor on every car that they sell.)
Advances in large language models have convinced some in the auto industry that Musk’s approach is the right one. In a podcast interview published this week, Kyle Vogt, the former CEO of General Motors AV unit Cruise, argued that images from multiple vehicle-mounted cameras plus advanced models can be “really accurate.” (Vogt stepped down from Cruise after one of its driverless vehicles hit and dragged a pedestrian. The company was not transparent with regulators about the incident, a report later found.)
For Cummings, the reports out of Austin have confirmed her beliefs that cameras alone aren’t enough to operate a car autonomously. “There is no robotic system that exists that is safety critical—meaning people can die [using it]—that has ever been successful on a single sensor strain,” she says. “It’s unclear why Tesla thinks that they can do what has never before been done.”
One metric that might reveal Tesla’s internal success: how quickly it expands. Musk boldly said in May that Tesla will have hundreds of thousands—and perhaps up to a million—autonomous vehicles on the road next year. The company seems motivated. According to a job posting, Tesla is hiring for additional vehicle operators, who are paid to drive cars around Austin to collect data. But, of course, Musk is no stranger to deadlines unmet.
To Keep Medicaid, Mom Caring for Disabled Adult Son Faces Prospect of Proving She Works
Four years before Kimberly Gallagher enrolled in Medicaid herself, the public health insurance program’s rules prompted her to make an excruciating choice — to give up guardianship of her son so she could work as his caregiver.
Now, another proposed twist in the rules could mean that, even though Missouri pays her to do that work, she might still have to prove to the state that she’s not unemployed.
The Kansas City, Missouri, resident has cared for her disabled son, Daniel, for all 31 years of his life. A rare genetic condition called Prader-Willi syndrome, in addition to autism, left him with an intellectual disability; a constant, excessive hunger; and an inability to speak. His needs left Gallagher, an elementary school teacher by training, with little opportunity to work outside her home.
As congressional Republicans slash about $1 trillion in federal Medicaid spending, Gallagher is among the 18.5 million Americans who could be required to prove that they work enough to keep their health insurance.
A budget bill that passed the House and Senate would require 80 hours of work or community service a month for adults who are insured through the Affordable Care Act’s Medicaid expansion program, which has allowed states to extend Medicaid coverage to more adults with low incomes. Forty states, plus Washington, D.C., have expanded their programs, additions that now cover about 20 million Americans, including Gallagher.
She enrolled in the coverage in December 2023, after she could no longer afford her private insurance. Before her husband died of cancer in 2019, the couple paid for private insurance and supported themselves on the income he earned as a master watchmaker. After his death, Gallagher was left to earn a living and find insurance on her own. At 59, she’s too young to collect her husband’s Social Security survivor benefit.
The Medicaid program that pays for in-home care for Daniel and 8,000 other Missourians with disabilities allows family members to be compensated for caregiving, but only if they’re not the legal guardian of the person they care for. So, Gallagher went to court to give up her rights to make decisions for her son and transfer authority to her parents.
“I think it’s appalling that it’s required, but it was necessary,” she said. “There was no way I could work outside of taking care of Daniel.”
Republicans have touted Medicaid work requirements both as a way to reduce federal spending on the program and as a moral imperative for Americans.
“Go out there. Do entry-level jobs. Get into the workforce. Prove that you matter. Get agency into your own life,” Mehmet Oz, administrator of the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services, said in a recent interview on Fox Business.
Democrats, meanwhile, have cast the requirements as bureaucratic red tape that won’t meaningfully increase employment but will cause eligible people to lose their health insurance because of administrative hurdles.
Indeed, the vast majority of Americans enrolled in Medicaid expansion are already working, caregiving, attending school, or have a disability, according to an analysis by KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
And while the Congressional Budget Office estimates the work requirement included in the House bill would cause 4.8 million Americans to lose their insurance, only about 300,000 of those people are unemployed because of lack of interest in working, according to the Urban Institute, a nonprofit research group. Recent history in states that have tried work requirements suggests technical and paperwork problems have caused a substantial portion of coverage losses.
Still, the provisions are generally popular among Republican lawmakers and the public. Sen. Josh Hawley (R-Mo.), who has repeatedly cautioned against cutting people off from Medicaid, has signaled support for adding work requirements.
And 68% of Americans favor the requirement described in the House bill, according to a recent poll conducted by KFF. But support for work requirements dropped as low as 35% when respondents learned that most Medicaid recipients already work and could lose their coverage because of paperwork requirements.
That’s what happened in Arkansas, where 18,000 people lost their Medicaid coverage in 2018 after the state phased in a work requirement. Thousands more were on pace to lose coverage in 2019 before a federal judge halted the requirement, largely over concerns about coverage losses. In discussions with focus groups, KFF found that many Arkansas Medicaid participants did not fully understand the requirements, despite the state’s outreach efforts, and some people didn’t receive mailed notices. Others were confused because the work-reporting paperwork and separate forms to renew Medicaid coverage asked for similar information.
Many family caregivers would be exempt from the work requirements proposed in Congress, but Gallagher probably would not, since she had to relinquish guardianship of her son to be paid for the work. While the hours she already logs should be enough to satisfy the requirement, she’ll need to report them again — unless the state can identify her through its existing data. But Missouri has a history of procedural problems in the state agency that administers Medicaid.
In early 2022, for example, Missouri was taking more than 100 days on average to process applications for Medicaid expansion, a wait that prompted patients to put off needed care and was more than twice the processing time allowed by federal law.
And 79% of the more than 378,000 Missourians who lost Medicaid coverage when covid-era enrollment protections ended in 2023 did so because of procedural reasons.
The next year, a federal judge ruled that Missourians were illegally being denied food aid by the state, in part because insufficient staffing at call centers left eligible people without assistance.
“They’re historically understaffed,” Timothy McBride, a health economist at Washington University in St. Louis, said of the state agency that administers Medicaid and food assistance. “I think that’s really the underlying problem.”
McBride’s analysis of Missouri’s Medicaid recipients found that fewer than 45,000 of the people enrolled in expansion in 2023 were unemployed for reasons other than caregiving, disability, attending school, or retirement. But more than twice that many Missourians could lose their insurance if work requirements prompt disenrollment rates similar to Arkansas’ implementation, according to a study from the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, a left-leaning think tank that analyzes government policies.
The estimate assumes many otherwise eligible people would still lose coverage as a result of falling through the cracks, McBride said.
Hawley, who backed the Senate bill, declined to comment for this article. The senator previously told reporters that “we can sort that out” when asked about eligible people inadvertently losing Medicaid because of work requirements.
Gallagher worries about her coverage, because she recently was diagnosed with Hashimoto’s disease, an autoimmune disorder that attacks the thyroid gland. She said she had to search for her Medicaid card to fill the prescription that followed, having barely used it in the year in a half she’s been covered.
She also worries about her son’s Medicaid. A nursing home is not a realistic option, considering his needs. His coverage doubles as Gallagher’s only source of income and also pays for other caregivers, when she can find them, who give her breaks to tend to her own health and to her aging parents.
But nearly all in-home services like those Daniel receives are optional programs that states are not required to include in their Medicaid programs. And the magnitude of the cuts being proposed have prompted fears that the optional programs could be chopped.
“It would destroy our lives,” Gallagher said. “The only income we would have would be Daniel’s Social Security.”
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
USE OUR CONTENT
This story can be republished for free (details).
To Keep Medicaid, Mom Caring for Disabled Adult Son Faces Prospect of Proving She Works
Four years before Kimberly Gallagher enrolled in Medicaid herself, the public health insurance program’s rules prompted her to make an excruciating choice — to give up guardianship of her son so she could work as his caregiver.
Now, another proposed twist in the rules could mean that, even though Missouri pays her to do that work, she might still have to prove to the state that she’s not unemployed.
The Kansas City, Missouri, resident has cared for her disabled son, Daniel, for all 31 years of his life. A rare genetic condition called Prader-Willi syndrome, in addition to autism, left him with an intellectual disability; a constant, excessive hunger; and an inability to speak. His needs left Gallagher, an elementary school teacher by training, with little opportunity to work outside her home.
As congressional Republicans slash about $1 trillion in federal Medicaid spending, Gallagher is among the 18.5 million Americans who could be required to prove that they work enough to keep their health insurance.
A budget bill that passed the House and Senate would require 80 hours of work or community service a month for adults who are insured through the Affordable Care Act’s Medicaid expansion program, which has allowed states to extend Medicaid coverage to more adults with low incomes. Forty states, plus Washington, D.C., have expanded their programs, additions that now cover about 20 million Americans, including Gallagher.
She enrolled in the coverage in December 2023, after she could no longer afford her private insurance. Before her husband died of cancer in 2019, the couple paid for private insurance and supported themselves on the income he earned as a master watchmaker. After his death, Gallagher was left to earn a living and find insurance on her own. At 59, she’s too young to collect her husband’s Social Security survivor benefit.
The Medicaid program that pays for in-home care for Daniel and 8,000 other Missourians with disabilities allows family members to be compensated for caregiving, but only if they’re not the legal guardian of the person they care for. So, Gallagher went to court to give up her rights to make decisions for her son and transfer authority to her parents.
“I think it’s appalling that it’s required, but it was necessary,” she said. “There was no way I could work outside of taking care of Daniel.”
Republicans have touted Medicaid work requirements both as a way to reduce federal spending on the program and as a moral imperative for Americans.
“Go out there. Do entry-level jobs. Get into the workforce. Prove that you matter. Get agency into your own life,” Mehmet Oz, administrator of the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services, said in a recent interview on Fox Business.
Democrats, meanwhile, have cast the requirements as bureaucratic red tape that won’t meaningfully increase employment but will cause eligible people to lose their health insurance because of administrative hurdles.
Indeed, the vast majority of Americans enrolled in Medicaid expansion are already working, caregiving, attending school, or have a disability, according to an analysis by KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
And while the Congressional Budget Office estimates the work requirement included in the House bill would cause 4.8 million Americans to lose their insurance, only about 300,000 of those people are unemployed because of lack of interest in working, according to the Urban Institute, a nonprofit research group. Recent history in states that have tried work requirements suggests technical and paperwork problems have caused a substantial portion of coverage losses.
Still, the provisions are generally popular among Republican lawmakers and the public. Sen. Josh Hawley (R-Mo.), who has repeatedly cautioned against cutting people off from Medicaid, has signaled support for adding work requirements.
And 68% of Americans favor the requirement described in the House bill, according to a recent poll conducted by KFF. But support for work requirements dropped as low as 35% when respondents learned that most Medicaid recipients already work and could lose their coverage because of paperwork requirements.
That’s what happened in Arkansas, where 18,000 people lost their Medicaid coverage in 2018 after the state phased in a work requirement. Thousands more were on pace to lose coverage in 2019 before a federal judge halted the requirement, largely over concerns about coverage losses. In discussions with focus groups, KFF found that many Arkansas Medicaid participants did not fully understand the requirements, despite the state’s outreach efforts, and some people didn’t receive mailed notices. Others were confused because the work-reporting paperwork and separate forms to renew Medicaid coverage asked for similar information.
Many family caregivers would be exempt from the work requirements proposed in Congress, but Gallagher probably would not, since she had to relinquish guardianship of her son to be paid for the work. While the hours she already logs should be enough to satisfy the requirement, she’ll need to report them again — unless the state can identify her through its existing data. But Missouri has a history of procedural problems in the state agency that administers Medicaid.
In early 2022, for example, Missouri was taking more than 100 days on average to process applications for Medicaid expansion, a wait that prompted patients to put off needed care and was more than twice the processing time allowed by federal law.
And 79% of the more than 378,000 Missourians who lost Medicaid coverage when covid-era enrollment protections ended in 2023 did so because of procedural reasons.
The next year, a federal judge ruled that Missourians were illegally being denied food aid by the state, in part because insufficient staffing at call centers left eligible people without assistance.
“They’re historically understaffed,” Timothy McBride, a health economist at Washington University in St. Louis, said of the state agency that administers Medicaid and food assistance. “I think that’s really the underlying problem.”
McBride’s analysis of Missouri’s Medicaid recipients found that fewer than 45,000 of the people enrolled in expansion in 2023 were unemployed for reasons other than caregiving, disability, attending school, or retirement. But more than twice that many Missourians could lose their insurance if work requirements prompt disenrollment rates similar to Arkansas’ implementation, according to a study from the Center on Budget and Policy Priorities, a left-leaning think tank that analyzes government policies.
The estimate assumes many otherwise eligible people would still lose coverage as a result of falling through the cracks, McBride said.
Hawley, who backed the Senate bill, declined to comment for this article. The senator previously told reporters that “we can sort that out” when asked about eligible people inadvertently losing Medicaid because of work requirements.
Gallagher worries about her coverage, because she recently was diagnosed with Hashimoto’s disease, an autoimmune disorder that attacks the thyroid gland. She said she had to search for her Medicaid card to fill the prescription that followed, having barely used it in the year in a half she’s been covered.
She also worries about her son’s Medicaid. A nursing home is not a realistic option, considering his needs. His coverage doubles as Gallagher’s only source of income and also pays for other caregivers, when she can find them, who give her breaks to tend to her own health and to her aging parents.
But nearly all in-home services like those Daniel receives are optional programs that states are not required to include in their Medicaid programs. And the magnitude of the cuts being proposed have prompted fears that the optional programs could be chopped.
“It would destroy our lives,” Gallagher said. “The only income we would have would be Daniel’s Social Security.”
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
USE OUR CONTENT
This story can be republished for free (details).
Walmart+ Is 50% Off – Here’s Why It Offers Incredible Value
Walmart’s biggest sale of the year (so far) kicks off alongside Amazon Prime Day on July 8. While you don’t need a Walmart+ subscription to shop the discounts during Walmart’s sale, members get five-hour early access starting July 7 at 4 PM PT / 7 PM ET. Ahead of the sale, Walmart is offering a 50% discount on a full year of Walmart+, dropping the price to only $49 (was $98).
$49 (was $98)
Considering some of the best gaming, tech, and collectible deals routinely sell out during the early access portion of Walmart sales–or within minutes of the official start time–the membership can make it a lot easier to secure the deals you’re eyeing. Outside of being able to shop Walmart Deals 2025 five hours early, a Walmart+ membership has proven useful for restock events on popular products. In recent weeks, this has included the Nintendo Switch 2 and Pokemon Trading Card Game releases.
But there are other, year-round benefits that make Walmart+ a great subscription service. Here are the highlights:
- Free shipping on all online orders
- Free delivery from local stores ($35 minimum)
- 1-Year Paramount+ Essential membership ($60 value)
- Save 10 cents per gallon on fuel
- Early access to big sales and product restocks
The free shipping on online orders is similar to Amazon Prime. Orders are typically delivered within two days, though one- and even same-day delivery are regular occurrences.
The free delivery from local stores perk is an even larger benefit, depending on your proximity to a brick-and-mortar store. Many subscribers can get their entire grocery orders delivered. But even if your Walmart doesn’t have a full supermarket, it’s still nice to be able to get free delivery on random products you’d normally have to drive to the store to buy. Local delivery is often fulfilled the same day you place your order, and you can schedule the time slot when making your purchase.
If you’re a Paramount+ Essential subscriber, you’re likely spending more money on that subscription alone than you would by gaining access via Walmart+.
Other perks include 10 cents off fuel, free pharmacy deliveries, 25% off Burger King orders every day, free online pet care via Pawp, free automobile tire repair, 5% back in Walmart Cash on travel via Expedia, and the ability to return unwanted purchases from home. And if you do still find yourself in your local Walmart after getting a subscription, you can use the app to scan your items as you shop, which allows you to skip the normal checkout process.
Walmart Deals 2025 runs from July 8-13, whereas Amazon Prime Day 2025 is July 8-11. Amazon’s sale is geared toward Prime members, so many of the deals are exclusive to subscribers. If you’re new to Prime, you can get your first 30 days–or six months, if you qualify for Prime Young Adults–at no cost.
Prime members can take advantage of a wide assortment of early deals ahead of the official start date. There are two notable subscription deals for Prime members, too: Amazon Kindle Unlimited and Audible Premium Plus. New subscribers can get their first three months of the digital reading and audiobook memberships for free.
Sweet-smelling molecule halts therapy-resistant pancreatic cancer
Cancer cells have the capacity to multiply rapidly. The aggressive cancer cells undergo conversion from their tightly connected epithelial state into a mesenchymal state, which lacks contact restrictions and spreads easily to other parts of the body. Such epithelial-to-mesenchymal plasticity also makes the cancer cells resistant to elimination by anticancer therapies.
The search is ongoing for newer anticancer agents that can overcome this acquired resistance to therapy and destroy the ‘rogue’ cancer cells. A group of researchers led by Dr. Hideyuki Saya, Director of the Oncology Innovation Center, Fujita Health University, Japan, has uncovered the mechanism of the anticancer activity of benzaldehyde, a compound responsible for the aroma of almonds, apricots, and figs.
Giving insights into their motivation for this study, Dr. Saya explains, “In the 1980s, researchers demonstrated the anticancer activity of benzaldehyde and its derivatives. The first author of our study, Dr. Jun Saito, is the daughter of one of the researchers involved in those early studies, and she was driven by a strong desire to uncover the mechanism behind benzaldehyde’s anticancer effects.” This study, published online in the British Journal of Cancer on May 02, 2025, shows the impact of benzaldehyde on key signaling protein interactions within the cancer cells and the resulting cytotoxicity.
Early studies reported the ability of benzaldehyde to inhibit the progressive development of mouse embryonic cells, indicating its potential in preventing rapid cell proliferation. Here, the anticancer effects of benzaldehyde were studied by using a mouse model grafted to have a growing pancreatic cancer.
In cell culture studies, benzaldehyde inhibited the growth of cancer cells resistant to radiation therapy and also those resistant to treatment with osimertinib, an agent blocking tyrosine kinases in growth factor signaling. Benzaldehyde synergized with radiation to eliminate previously radiation-resistant cancer cells.
The study findings revealed that benzaldehyde exerted its anticancer effects by preventing interactions of the signaling protein 14-3-3ζ with the Ser28-phosphorylated form of histone H3 (H3S28ph). This interaction, key to cancer cell survival, was also responsible for treatment resistance and the expression of genes related to epithelial-mesenchymal plasticity.
Here, benzaldehyde prevented 14-3-3ζ-dependent phosphorylation of the serine28 amino acid of histone H3. Consequently, benzaldehyde treatment reduced the expression of genes responsible for treatment resistance. Treatment of mice with a benzaldehyde derivative inhibited the growth of pancreatic tumors and suppressed the epithelial-to-mesenchymal plasticity, thus preventing the spread of cancer to distant organs like the lungs.
By blocking an interaction key to cancer cell survival, benzaldehyde overcomes therapy resistance and prevents metastasis. Sharing the implications of their findings, Dr. Saya concludes, “The 14-3-3ζ protein has long been considered a target for cancer therapy, but its direct inhibition is not feasible due to its important functions in normal cells. Our results suggest that inhibition of the interaction between 14-3-3ζ and its client proteins by benzaldehyde has the potential to overcome the problem.”
The present study shows benzaldehyde is effective against cancer cells that have acquired resistance to radiation and tyrosine kinase inhibitors commonly used in cancer treatment. In the long term, this study suggests its potential as a combinatorial anticancer agent, alongside molecular-targeted therapies.
Dr. Jun Saito is a researcher in the laboratory of Dr. Hideyuki Saya, Oncology Innovation Center, Fujita Health University. She obtained her Ph.D. from the Nihon University Graduate School of Medicine. Continuing the legacy of one of her parents, who pioneered the breakthrough research on the anticancer activity of benzaldehyde in the 1980s, Dr. Saito has uncovered the underlying mechanism of benzaldehyde’s anticancer effects. Her expertise includes oncology, pathophysiology, immunology, applied physics, and chemistry.
This work was supported by Grants-in-Aid for Scientific Research from the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science, and Technology of Japan (KAKENHI 19K22568).
Internship Opportunity at Kerala State Planning Board, Kerala
About Kerala State Planning Board, Kerala
The Kerala State Planning Board is headed by a Chairperson and consists of a Vice Chairperson, members (ministers and non-ministers) and a Member Secretary. The Chief Secretary to the Government and the Additional Chief Secretary to the Finance Department are permanent invitees to the Board.
The Chairperson of the Board is the Chief Minister of the State. The term of the Board runs co-terminus with the term of the ruling party.
The main function of the State Planning Board is to formulate five-year and annual plans, prepare annual financial review, monitor plan implementation, coordinate with various departments regarding plans, coordinate the activities of the Decentralization Cell, provide inputs and recommendations related to Commission studies, externally aided programs, centrally sponsored schemes, and prepare policy briefs for the Chairperson.
About the Opportunity
Kerala State Planning Board invites applications from eligible candidates for Students Internship Programme 2025-26 which aims to promote evidence-based planning and policy-oriented research among young scholars in the State. The areas in which internships are invited include:
- Agriculture and allied activities
- Co-operatives
- Decentralization and Good Governance
- Demography and Care Economy
- Disaster Management
- Education and Knowledge Economy
- Environment and Climate Change
- Fiscal State of the Economy and Revenue Mobilization
- Health and Nutrition
- Industry, Innovation and Infrastructure
- IT, Tourism and Migration
- Labour, Employment and Skill Development
- MSMEs and Entrepreneurship
- Poverty and Livelihood
- SCs and STs and other Marginalized Sections
- Social Security and Development
- Women and Child Development
- Public Policy
- Any other topic related to development and planning process of the State
Eligibility Criteria
The Students who are pursuing PhD or Post-Graduation (final year/semester) from a recognized University/College/Institute in India are eligible to apply. A recommendation letter from the Head of the Department in the prescribed format given in Annexure-II is to be submitted along with the duly filled application form.
The applicant must be an Indian citizen. The specified subjects of Post-Graduation or PhD to be eligible for the programme include Economics, Econometrics, Sociology, Development Studies, Statistics, Commerce, Demography, Agriculture, Fisheries, Forestry, Environmental Science, Social Work, Education, Law, Political Science and Public Policy.
Duration
The duration of the programme is for 3 months.
Location
Kerala
Stipend
On successful completion of the internship programme a consolidated sum of Rs.24,000/- and Rs.30,000/- will be given to the Post-Graduate and PhD students respectively.
How to Apply?
Applicants can apply in the prescribed proforma enclosed as Annexure-I. Student should submit application to the State Planning Board through the given E-mail id: [email protected].
A Research Proposal of 1500 words should be submitted along with the application. Applications without Research Proposal will not be considered.)
Deadline
The last date for receipt of duly filled application:30th July 2025, 11.59 pm.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
Access Denied
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/fashion/amazon-sale-crochet-tops-to-slay-your-summer-in-style-top-8-picks-at-low-prices-101751616048236.html” on this server.
Reference #18.dec25068.1751696367.ac55c7a7
https://errors.edgesuite.net/18.dec25068.1751696367.ac55c7a7
The miracle of personal development
Today I’d like to share with you one of the biggest “Ah-Ha’s” I ever experienced.
You see…I’ve been running my Mentorship Program for over 18 years now.
I believe it’s Australia’s longest-running program of its type.
I’ve had the pleasure of working with some very, very successful property investors and I’ve had the joy of seeing some beginning investors grow, mature and flourish.
The thing all these successful investors have in common is that they understand the importance of personal development and, more importantly, they are prepared to change.
You see, what you become is far more important than what you get.
The important question to ask on the job is not, “What am I getting?”
Instead, you should ask, “What am I becoming?”
What you become directly influences what you get
Think of it this way: Most of what you have today, you have attracted to you by becoming the person you are today.
I’ve also found that income rarely exceeds personal development.
Sometimes income takes a lucky jump, but unless you learn to handle the responsibilities that come with it, it will usually shrink back to the amount you can handle.
If someone hands you a million dollars, you’d better hurry up and become a millionaire.
A very rich man once taught me, “If you took all the money in the world and divided it equally among everybody, it would soon be back in the same pockets it was before.”
It is hard to keep that which has not been obtained through personal development.
So here’s the great axiom of life:
To have more than you’ve got, become more than you are.
This is where you should focus most of your attention.
Otherwise, you just might have to contend with the axiom of not changing, which is:
Unless you change how you are, you’ll always have what you’ve got.
If you are interested to learn more about my Mentorship Program where I teach you The Science of Getting Wealthy – please click here.
The results I’ve achieved have been very gratifying for me, but life-changing for many mentorees.
Some beginners have significantly sped up their journey by having someone hold their hand and show them where the landmines are.
Other more successful business people, investors and entrepreneurs have taken their “game” to the next level.
If you are interested to learn more about my Mentorship Program where I teach you The Science of Getting Wealthy – please click here.
Don’t Use Chrome on Android Without Knowing These Tips
Chrome on Android is a great browser out of the box, but you can make it so much better. These tips and features will supercharge how you browse.
11
Unlock Experimental Features With Chrome Flags
While you may already be familiar with many of Chrome’s great features, there are plenty of lesser-known ones hidden under the hood. These are experimental features currently being tested, which may be added to the browser once they’re deemed stable.
However, you can get them early by enabling their respective flags. Chrome offers plenty of flags across different categories, like Parallel downloading, GPU rasterization, Auto Dark Mode for Web Contents, Partial swap, and Incognito Screenshot.
Related
Speed Up Chrome By Changing These 8 Flags
While many people claim Chrome is a memory hog, it is possible to greatly improve your browser’s speed by tweaking some “flags”. Here are the eight best tweaks that you can make today.
To find and enable a flag, open Chrome, tap the address bar, and type chrome://flags. You’ll see a list of all the flags currently available; tap one to reveal its complete description. Alternatively, you can use the search bar at the top to find a flag by name.
Once you’ve found the flag you want to enable, tap the dropdown next to it and select Enabled (or an equivalent option). Hit the Relaunch button at the bottom to restart Chrome and apply the changes.
Return to this page when you want to modify a flag. You can also use flags on Chrome for desktop, following the same method.
10
Switch to Desktop View
Most websites today have a fully functional mobile version. However, there are times when you may need to access websites that lack a dedicated mobile version, or ones that have limited features or a poor layout on their mobile version.
You can access the desktop version of such websites in Chrome on Android so you can use their full functionality. To do this, tap the three-dot menu in the Chrome toolbar and tick the checkbox for Desktop site. This will reload the page and open its desktop version. You may need to use the pinch-to-zoom gesture to zoom in and interact with the content on the page.
When you’re done browsing, go to the three-dot menu and uncheck the Desktop site checkbox.
9
Always Browse With Secure Connections
Not all websites are secure. Some websites still use HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol), which doesn’t encrypt sensitive details such as passwords and payment information during transmission. That means anyone monitoring the network could intercept and read the information.
Related
HTTP vs. HTTPS: What’s the Difference?
You might be aware that HTTPS is an improvement on HTTP, but how exactly, and why should you be using it?
Browsing or entering personal details on such sites can be risky. However, you can protect yourself by enabling the Always use secure connections feature. Once enabled, it will warn you every time you try to access an unsecured website, so you don’t accidentally enter your personal information. You can then decide to proceed or go back.
To enable this feature, open Chrome’s Settings under the three-dot menu. Select Privacy and security, then scroll down to the Security section. Select Always use secure connections and enable the switch on the next page. Choose whether you want Chrome to warn you about insecure public sites, or both public and private sites (private sites are those that aren’t available to the wider web, such as internal company sites).
8
Capture Screenshots in Incognito Mode
Chrome doesn’t allow you to take screenshots in incognito by default. But thanks to support for flags, you can bypass this and enable the screenshot functionality in Chrome’s incognito mode.
Go to the Chrome flags page, as explained above. Here, look for the Incognito Screenshot flag. Tap the dropdown button below it and select Enabled. Hit Relaunch.
You should now be able to take screenshots of pages open while incognito.
7
Secure Your Incognito Browsing
Aside from enabling screenshots in incognito, you can also secure your browsing sessions in this mode for added privacy. Once you do this, Chrome will automatically lock incognito tabs whenever you switch apps, minimize Chrome, or lock your screen—preventing anyone from accessing them or taking screenshots from the Recents menu.
Locking incognito tabs in Chrome is easy. Tap the three-dot menu and go to Settings. Select Privacy and security under Basics, and toggle on the Lock Incognito tabs when you leave Chrome option under Privacy. You’ll need to authenticate yourself.
Now, whenever you try to access incognito tabs, Chrome will prompt you to authenticate yourself. Use your phone’s unlock method to verify, and it will let you see the tabs.
6
Preview Pages Before Opening
There’s a fast and easy way to preview links without fully loading them, which helps reduce unnecessary tab clutter. Additionally, it keeps you in the same spot on your current page, so you can resume browsing where you left off.
To quickly preview a link in Chrome, long-press it until you see a context menu. Select Preview page, and Chrome will open a preview of the link in a slide-up pane. You can browse this page like you usually do and close it out once you’re done. It’s also possible to open it in full view (in a new tab) if desired.
Chrome on Android app features a toolbar near the address bar, which has buttons for quick actions like going home, jumping into the app switcher, and accessing other settings.
However, that’s not all. Chrome also lets you add a shortcut button for other actions, such as Share, Voice Search, and Translation. You can even tell Chrome to surface the relevant button based on your usage.
To add a shortcut to the Chrome toolbar, tap the three-dot menu in the toolbar and select Settings. Scroll down to the Advanced tab and select Toolbar shortcut. Turn on the toggle next to Toolbar shortcut on the following page. Then, choose an action listed below.
4
Listen to a Webpage Aloud
For times when you don’t want to scroll through a page and read the text yourself, Chrome’s Listen to this page feature comes in handy. It allows you to have the contents of webpages read out loud.
Start by bringing up the page whose content you want to listen to, tap the three-dot menu in the toolbar, and select Listen to this page. Chrome will start reading the text on the page—highlighting the text as it goes so you can follow along visually.
You’ll also see a mini-player at the bottom of the page. Tap this to display a bunch of controls. From here, you can play/pause, skip forward/back by 10 seconds, adjust the playback speed, and change the voice.
If you plan to use this feature regularly going forward, you can add the Listen to this page action to your toolbar using the steps shown above.
3
Perform Instant Searches on a Webpage
When you come across new words or phrases online, you can look them up by copying and pasting into a Google search in a new tab. However, this is slow.
Instead, Chrome for Android has a Web search feature that lets you quickly look up a word or phrase directly from a page. To use it, long-press on the word or phrase you want to look up until you see a context menu pop-up.
Tap Web search, and Chrome will open a quick Google search in a new tab for what you chose. When you’re done, swipe inwards from the left edge of the screen or tap the back button to close this tab and take you back to where you were.
2
Quickly Find Text on a Page
Chrome also makes it easy to search for any word or phrase on a webpage you’re currently viewing, so you don’t have to peruse the entire page manually. This is possible thanks to the Find in Page feature, which highlights all instances of your search and lets you navigate between them easily.
To use it, tap the three-dot menu in the toolbar and select Find in page. Type in the word or phrase you want to search for; you’ll see it at the top in a search field.
If it finds any matches, Chrome will highlight all instances in yellow. At the top, you’ll also see the number of times it appears on the page. Tap the up or down arrow to navigate through the various instances, then hit the X button to close the search field when done.
Sansha links Silk Road civilizations via S. China Sea cultural relics
The vast South China Sea is not only a vital maritime passage for China but also a cradle for long-standing historical cultures. In recent years, Sansha in Hainan Province has continuously promoted the protection, utilization, and inheritance of intangible cultural heritages, including relics from the Maritime Silk Road and ancient shipwreck sites.
How Paramount’s $16-million Trump settlement came together
By early spring, Paramount Global was in crisis. President Trump wouldn’t budge from his demand for an eye-popping sum of money and an apology from the company to settle his lawsuit over a CBS News “60 Minutes” interview with Kamala Harris. Journalists at the storied broadcaster were in revolt against the parent company.
Meanwhile, Paramount’s board faced withering pressure, with a settlement widely seen as a prerequisite for getting government approval for the company’s $8-billion sale to David Ellison’s Skydance Media, or the deal would collapse.
Then a new emergency erupted.
On May 4, CBS aired a hard-hitting “60 Minutes” segment that took aim at Trump’s targeting of law firms. Correspondent Scott Pelley anchored the report, which relied heavily on an interview with a leading Trump irritant — former top Hillary Clinton advisor Marc Elias.
Trump was furious. He threatened Paramount with an additional lawsuit alleging defamation, according to people close to the situation who were not authorized to comment.
The behind-the-scenes drama eventually would culminate with Paramount agreeing to pay $16 million to end the president’s battle over edits to October’s Harris interview, which Trump alleged was manipulated to boost the then-vice president’s election chances. Trump’s suit had demanded $20 billion in damages.
The deal resulted from months of back-and-forth among a constellation of power players with competing interests: the president, mogul Shari Redstone, tech billionaire Larry Ellison and his son David, Hollywood super agent Ari Emanuel, CBS News’ ousted leader Wendy McMahon and Jeff Shell, a former NBCUniversal chief now with RedBird Capital Partners, which backs Ellison’s Skydance.
The settlement, which the president approved late Tuesday, included a commitment by Trump to drop his claims and not sue over the May “60 Minutes” broadcast, according to sources and a Paramount statement.
Paramount said it agreed to pay Trump’s legal fees. The remainder of the $16-million settlement will go toward his future presidential library.
“Larry Ellison is a friend of mine. He’s a great guy,” Trump told reporters following a Thursday night rally in Iowa. “I think he’s going to run CBS really well, and I think he’s making a good deal to buy it.”
The beleaguered company behind “Mission: Impossible” and “Yellowstone” mustered victories during the negotiations, withstanding the Trump team’s earlier demand for a $100-million payout, the knowledgeable sources said.
The company also refused to apologize for CBS’ reporting or edits, a stance to protect its journalistic ethics and 1st Amendment rights.
“This settlement allows Paramount to focus on its prospective sale, and CBS can maintain its principles,” said C. Kerry Fields, a business law professor at the USC Marshall School. “But principle has its price, and there certainly was one set here.”
The eight-month skirmish with Trump shined a harsh light on Paramount’s vulnerabilities — and deep divisions within the company and its prospective new owners.
Paramount had a narrow window to reach a truce. The company wanted to finalize the settlement before Wednesday, when Paramount held its annual shareholder meeting and three new members joined the board.
“This [settlement] was all about survival — it was that dark,” Fields said. “Paramount has to execute the sale to Skydance in order to survive.”
At first, Paramount’s sale to the Ellison family seemed like a sure bet. Larry Ellison, co-founder of Oracle Corp., is close to Trump and his company is a possible buyer for TikTok, another deal of interest to the president. The landmark Paramount-Skydance deal, struck a year ago, could reshape one of Hollywood’s original studios and the entertainment landscape.
Redstone and her family agreed to part with their entertainment holdings, National Amusements Inc., and controlling Paramount shares. The family’s shaky finances were a catalyst for the sale. Redstone has borrowed heavily to meet debt obligations, including a $186-million term loan from Larry Ellison last year. The family is waiting for the cash from the sale of Paramount and National Amusements to the Ellisons and RedBird, a private equity firm.
But an unexpected misstep altered the deal’s course.
Last fall, “60 Minutes” invited Trump and Harris to participate in preelection interviews. Trump agreed, then backed out. CBS News went forward with a Harris sit-down.
Former Vice President Kamala Harris talks to “60 Minutes” correspondent Bill Whitaker.
(CBS News)
Correspondent Bill Whitaker asked Harris about the Biden administration’s rocky relations with Israel’s prime minister. Producers used different portions of her answer on two programs: a convoluted response on CBS’ Sunday morning show “Face the Nation,” and a more succinct part on “60 Minutes.”
Trump and his supporters zeroed in on the discrepancy. They accused CBS of doctoring the interview. CBS News denied the allegation, saying the edits were routine.
Days before the election, Trump sued in Amarillo, Texas, ensuring the case would be overseen by a Trump-appointed judge.
His lawsuit alleged the “60 Minutes” edits amounted to election interference — “malicious, deceptive, and substantial news distortion calculated to confuse, deceive, and mislead the public,” in the suit’s words.
President Donald Trump in the Oval Office.
(Bloomberg)
1st Amendment experts said the case had no merit; some figured it was a campaign stunt.
Days later, Shell, the RedBird executive who will become Paramount’s president should Skydance take over, held a conference call with top CBS executives. Shell suggested “60 Minutes” release the full Harris interview transcript in a bid for transparency, according to people familiar with the matter.
News executives refused, drawing a clear division between some high-level Paramount executives and Ellison’s team.
Those Paramount executives have bristled over Shell’s involvement, including a comment he reportedly made to McMahon late last year, stating the company eventually would have to settle. Skydance has said it has an agreement with Paramount that gives Ellison and Shell the ability to give input on key business issues — even before acquiring Paramount.
A spokesperson for Shell declined to comment.
The role of Shell, ousted from his previous role running NBCUniversal after acknowledging an inappropriate relationship with an underling, has been controversial. Representatives for the creators of “South Park” have accused him of overstepping his authority and meddling with a protracted negotiation over their overall deal and streaming rights to the long-running cartoon. A representative for Shell denied that accusation.
Trump had scored previous victories over media organizations. In December, the Walt Disney Co. agreed to pay him $16 million, including $1 million for his attorney fees, to end a dispute stemming from ABC anchor George Stephanopoulos’ inaccurate description of Trump’s liability in a civil court case. Press advocates howled.
Paramount held firm. But it failed to get Trump’s case dismissed or moved to a court in New York, where CBS and “60 Minutes” are based.
So the company was in a box. Its sale to Skydance requires the approval of the Federal Communications Commission to transfer CBS TV station licenses to the Ellisons, and that consent has been elusive.
In one of his first moves as FCC chairman, Trump appointee Brendan Carr launched an inquiry into whether CBS’ edits of the Harris interview rose to the level of news distortion — the crux of Trump’s lawsuit.
In February, Carr demanded CBS release a raw transcript of the Harris interview and the unedited footage. CBS complied; the material showed Harris had been accurately quoted.
The Texas judge ordered Paramount and Trump’s lawyers into mediation. Talks began April 30.
That weekend, “60 Minutes” ran its report on Trump and the law firms, riling Redstone and others. The Trump team and Paramount were already far apart, the sources said.
Soon, CBS News and Stations President Wendy McMahon was forced out. Knowledgeable sources attributed her departure to months of strife and persistent criticism from Redstone, who serves as Paramount’s chair. McMahon also made missteps, including overseeing an unsuccessful reboot of “CBS Evening News.”
Her exit followed that of Bill Owens, the longtime executive producer of “60 Minutes,” who fought efforts to settle.
The day McMahon was ousted, left-leaning U.S. Sens. Elizabeth Warren (D-Mass.), Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.) and Ron Wyden (D-Ore.) lobbed a salvo at Redstone. In a May 19 letter, they warned that Paramount board members risked possible bribery charges if they paid Trump to settle the lawsuit as a way to win FCC approval for the Skydance deal.
By early June, Redstone and the Ellison team were getting restless.
Emanuel, the agent, stepped in to help get the dealmaking back on track, people familiar with the matter said. Emanuel is Trump’s former talent agent and one of Ellison’s closest allies.
On June 7, Ellison met briefly with Trump at a UFC event in New Jersey. Emanuel is executive chairman of the WME Group and chief executive of UFC’s parent company, TKO.
According to a source, Emanuel associate Dana White, the Trump-supporting UFC chief executive, helped facilitate the Ellison meeting with the president, which occurred steps away from the fighters’ octagon.
People close to Ellison and Emanuel declined to discuss Ellison’s interactions with the president. Representatives of Skydance, Redstone and Emanuel declined to comment for this story.
Finally, a breakthrough came when Trump offered support for Ellison and the Skydance deal, though he continued to blast Harris and CBS News.
“Ellison is great,” Trump said from the White House lawn on June 18. “He’ll do a great job with it.” Late Thursday, Trump called David Ellison “a fantastic young man.”
Meanwhile, the clock was ticking. Redstone and others wanted the board to handle the settlement before the shareholder meeting, when one director stepped down, and three new members joined the board.
Redstone recused herself from voting but made her wishes known.
The settlement was finally reached about 10 hours before the Paramount board switched.
One person close to the legal effort said the agreement “got over the finish line” due to a sweetener for Trump. His team anticipates that Paramount networks eventually will run millions of dollars worth of free commercials, or public service announcements, in support of Trump causes, including combating antisemitism and increasing border security.
Trump also referenced the alleged side deal.
“We did a deal for about $16 million plus $16 million — or maybe more than that in advertising,” Trump said. “So [the settlement] is like $32- to maybe $35 million.”
Paramount said it agreed to a $16-million settlement. .
“Paramount’s settlement with President Trump does not include PSAs,” the company said in a statement. “Paramount has no knowledge of any promises or commitments made to President Trump other than those set forth in the settlement proposed by the mediator and accepted by the parties.”
Skydance declined to comment. Emanuel did not respond to messages.
The settlement does contain another provision championed by Trump.“60 Minutes” will release transcripts of interviews with eligible U.S. presidential candidates after those interviews air, “subject to redactions as required for legal or national security concerns,” Paramount said.
1st Amendment advocates were disheartened by the deal. So were Trump’s enemies, including the senators who had vowed to investigate the deal for bribery.
Paramount’s move to “settle a bogus lawsuit with President Trump over a “60 Minutes” report he did not like is an extremely dangerous precedent,” Sanders, the U.S. senator, said in a statement. “Paramount’s decision will only embolden Trump to continue attacking, suing and intimidating the media.”
GM’s Cruise Cars Are Back on the Road in Three US States—But Not for Ride-Hailing
Cruise robotaxis are back on the road… well, kind of. Though General Motors pulled the plug on its self-driving taxi business last year, the automaker has been quietly repurposing a few of the vehicles as it seeks to develop new driver-assistance technologies.
This week, WIRED spotted a GM Bolt electric hatchback on the San Francisco-Oakland Bay Bridge, and later saw a similar vehicle on Interstate 880 near Oakland. In each instance, the car was being driven by a human. But it held equipment on the roof such as lidar sensors that resembled the setup from the Cruise ride-hailing system. The vehicle had “Mint” written on the hood, but didn’t include any visually apparent Cruise branding.
GM spokesperson Chaiti Sen confirms to WIRED that the company is indeed “using a limited number of Cruise Bolt vehicles on select highways in Michigan, Texas and Bay Area for testing with trained drivers to further develop simulation models and advanced driver assistance systems.” She adds, “This is internal testing and does not involve public passengers.”
GM removed the orange-and-white Cruise logo from the cars’ sides after it took full ownership of the unit in February, she says. The recent activity began in Michigan and Texas in February and the San Francisco Bay Area-region in mid-April, Sen says. Cruise had named each vehicle in its fleet, and Sen confirmed that “Mint” has been among the vehicles newly active in the Bay Area.
The testing shows for the first time how GM is beginning to give a second life to a fleet of no less than hundreds of vehicles left over from a costly project that ran aground.
GM initially acquired a majority stake in San Francisco-based Cruise in 2016, and invested more than $8 billion into developing a robotaxi service. The operation was off to a fast start and eyeing a rapid expansion until October 2023, when a Cruise vehicle struck a pedestrian in San Francisco who had just been hit by a human-driven vehicle.
In the aftermath of the incident, Cruise misled state regulators, lost a key permit, halted operations, and laid off a quarter of its workers.
After some attempts to restart the business, GM announced this past December that the experiment would be cancelled altogether. At the time, GM CEO Mary Barra told analysts that running a robotaxi fleet was an expensive distraction from the business of making cars.
But the technology behind Cruise is helping improve the roughly 7-year-old Super Cruise system found in some GM cars. It aims to help drivers stay in and change lanes, or apply the emergency brake without needing to use their hands.
Several automakers are racing to develop cars that offload an increasing amount of driving tasks to computers. GM claims about 60 percent of its 360,000 Super Cruise customers regularly make use of the capability.
In the US, the robotaxi industry has been dominated by Waymo, though Elon Musk’s Tesla and Amazon’s Zoox are among those continuing to try to catch up.
GM’s repurposed Bolts blend into San Francisco-area roads, on which cars with heavy-duty computer gear attached to roof, back, and sides have become commonplace. They include not only companies testing sensors and algorithms, but also map providers collecting data and hobbyists attempting to upgrade their personal rides.
GOP Governors Mum as Congress Moves To Slash Medicaid Spending for Their States
The last time a Republican-controlled Congress and President Donald Trump moved to slash Medicaid spending, in 2017, a key political force stood in their way: GOP governors.
Now, as Congress steamrolls toward passing historic Medicaid cuts of about $1 trillion over 10 years through Trump’s tax and spending legislation, red-state governors are saying little publicly about what it does to health care — even as they face reductions that will punch multibillion-dollar holes in their states’ budgets.
Medicaid, a program jointly run by states and the federal government, covers more than 70 million low-income or disabled people, including nearly half of the nation’s children. Republicans say the $900 billion-a-year program was allowed to grow too large under Democrats Barack Obama and Joe Biden by adding nondisabled adults they say don’t deserve government assistance, and they have long sought to scale it back.
Some of the biggest health cuts in the legislation Trump calls the “One Big Beautiful Bill” are achieved through new policies that would reduce enrollment by imposing more paperwork demands on enrollees, including a requirement that many prove they’re working. Those policies would affect only states that expanded Medicaid to more low-income people under the Affordable Care Act.
Nineteen of those states are led by Republican governors. Their silence on the bill’s health measures is giving political cover to GOP lawmakers from their states as they seek to cut Medicaid coverage for millions of people who gained it within the last decade.
KFF Health News contacted all 19 governors for comment on the legislation’s Medicaid cuts. Only six responded. Most said they backed imposing a work requirement on adult Medicaid enrollees.
“Implementing work requirements for able-bodied adults is a good and necessary reform so that Medicaid is being used for temporary assistance and not a permanent entitlement,” said Drew Galang, a spokesperson for Gov. Patrick Morrisey of West Virginia.
“Governor Rhoden supports workforce participation as a requirement of Medicaid expansion eligibility,” said Josie Harms, a spokesperson for South Dakota Gov. Larry Rhoden, adding that congressional lawmakers have the governor’s support: “South Dakota has an excellent federal delegation, and Governor Rhoden trusts them to fight for South Dakota’s priorities while delivering on President Trump’s promises.”
In a sign of how the political winds have changed, none of the governors said anything about another of the legislation’s significant cuts, to provider taxes — a tool that nearly all of their states use to help pay their share of Medicaid and gain additional funds from the federal government. That change is expected to cost states billions.
No Longer a Bipartisan Issue
In contrast to the radio silence from GOP governors, Democratic governors have campaigned against the megabill for weeks.
Pennsylvania Gov. Josh Shapiro posted on the social platform X that Trump and congressional Republicans were misleading Americans by saying they were cutting only waste, fraud, and abuse in Medicaid.
“They’re rushing to kick hundreds of thousands of Pennsylvanians off their healthcare — and lying about it,” he posted. “The damage this will do here in Pennsylvania and across America is staggering and will be felt for years to come.”
In New York, Gov. Kathy Hochul on July 1 charged that Trump’s legislation would devastate hospitals and could lead to more than 34,000 job cuts in her state.
“The collective impact of the GOP reconciliation bill in Washington, D.C., could force hospitals to curtail critically needed services such as maternity care and psychiatric treatment, not to mention to downsize operations, and even close entirely,” she said in a statement.
In 2017, the chorus was bipartisan, as Republican governors in Ohio, Nevada, and Massachusetts spoke out against cutting Medicaid. Trump’s bill to repeal much of the Affordable Care Act and roll back its Medicaid expansion narrowly failed in the Senate.
“It’s been surprising that red-state governors, particularly those in Medicaid expansion states, haven’t spoken out against Medicaid cuts,” said Larry Levitt, executive vice president for health policy at KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News. “Republican governors were a potent political force in the failed 2017 effort to repeal and replace the ACA, including Medicaid expansion.”
What’s changed since 2017, policy experts say, is that there are fewer moderate Republican governors, and GOP state executives who advocated for Medicaid expansion over a decade ago are no longer in office.
Additionally, seven of the then-red states that expanded Medicaid did so via ballot initiative, mostly over opposition from their governors.
In fact, the Medicaid work requirement is backed by many Republican governors, even if it means less federal Medicaid money and leads to fewer people covered.
Several states, including Arkansas and Ohio, have already passed state laws to implement a requirement that adults enrolled under the ACA’s Medicaid expansion work, volunteer, go to school, or participate in job training. Most states have yet to bring work requirement programs to fruition because they are waiting for federal government approval.
Charles “Chip” Kahn, president of the Federation of American Hospitals, a trade group of investor-owned hospitals, said that while fewer governors have engaged publicly in trying to block Medicaid cuts under the bill, federal lawmakers are hearing from legislators in their states.
A political dilemma for Republican governors is that, unlike in 2017, the bill before Congress is not legislation aimed expressly at repealing Obamacare. With a scope broader than health care, it would extend many of Trump’s tax cuts and direct billions in new spending toward border security, immigration enforcement, and the military, while also cutting health care spending.
“It’s like playing multidimensional chess rather than focusing on one issue,” Kahn said.
Larry Jacobs, director of the Center for the Study of Politics and Governance at the University of Minnesota, said some Republican governors may have expressed concerns privately to their states’ GOP senators but are not speaking out publicly for fear of drawing Trump’s wrath.
“Why are they being cagey? Trump and not wanting to be ‘Liz Cheney’d,’” Jacobs said, referring to the Republican former Wyoming lawmaker whom Trump helped oust after she served as vice chair of an inquiry into his attempts to overturn the results of the 2020 election.
Walking Political Tightropes
The political peril Republican lawmakers face in publicly challenging Trump remains explicit. On June 29, Sen. Thom Tillis (R-N.C.) announced he would not run for reelection after he voiced concerns about the bill and the president threatened to back a primary challenger. Tillis was one of three GOP senators to vote against it on July 1, though it still narrowly passed.
In addition to the work requirement, the biggest Medicaid cuts in the bill stem from its restrictions on provider taxes — levies that states impose on hospitals, nursing homes, and other health care institutions to help increase their federal reimbursement. Much of the additional money is then returned to the health care providers in the form of higher payments for their Medicaid patients.
The practice, which has been adopted in every state but Alaska, has been criticized by some Beltway Republicans as “money laundering” — even though the taxes are approved by state lawmakers and the federal Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services and have been allowed under federal law for decades.
The Senate bill would limit the money states could raise — a move that would mean billions in funding cuts to states and their hospitals.
The states with Republican governors that expanded Medicaid are Alaska, Arkansas, Idaho, Indiana, Iowa, Louisiana, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, New Hampshire, Nevada, North Dakota, Ohio, Oklahoma, South Dakota, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia, and Utah.
One of the governors who expressed concerns about repealing the Obamacare Medicaid expansion in 2017 was Jim Justice of West Virginia, a Democrat at the time.
In a June 2017 letter to West Virginia Sen. Shelley Moore Capito, a Republican, Justice wrote: “Since so many of our people count on Medicaid, any cut to Medicaid would destroy families in West Virginia.” He added that “the consequences would be beyond catastrophic.”
On July 1, Justice — elected to the Senate as a Republican last year — voted for Trump’s megabill, including its Medicaid cuts.
“The Senator believes this bill strikes a good balance between protecting the most vulnerable and those who rely on the program while rooting out waste, fraud, and abuse to ensure the program is run efficiently for those deserving,” William O’Grady, a Justice spokesperson, said in an email July 2.
KFF Health News correspondent Arielle Zionts contributed to this report.
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
USE OUR CONTENT
This story can be republished for free (details).
Zelda: Breath Of The Wild And Tears Of The Kingdom Updates Out Now, Fix Zelda Notes Issues
Nintendo has rolled out new updates for both The Legend of Zelda: Breath of the Wild and its sequel, Tears of the Kingdom. The latest patches are fairly minor, primarily addressing a few issues related to the Zelda Notes service for the Nintendo Switch 2 Editions of both games.
According to Nintendo’s patch notes, the new updates resolve a bug that can occur when attempting to use certain Daily Bonus perks. Specifically, Nintendo says it has “fixed an issue in which the player was unable to use the Daily Bonus effects ‘Health Recovery’ or ‘Hearty Meal’ if they had increased their hearts to the maximum number.”
The updates also resolve “several other issues related to Zelda Notes,” although no specific details were provided beyond that. Both games have also gotten other minor fixes “to improve the gameplay experience.” You can read the full patch notes for each update below.
You’ll need to install the latest patches in order to continue using the Zelda Notes service. The updates should download automatically when your system connects to the internet, but you can manually initiate the download by highlighting the game’s icon on the home menu, pressing the Plus Button, and selecting Software Update.
Zelda Notes is a companion service available exclusively for the Nintendo Switch 2 Editions of Breath of the Wild and Tears of the Kingdom. Players who own the Switch 1 versions can purchase upgrade packs for the games through the eShop. Nintendo Switch Online + Expansion Pack subscribers can also download both upgrade packs for free, although it may not be immediately clear how to.
The Legend Of Zelda: Breath Of The Wild Ver. 1.8.2 Patch Notes
Nintendo Switch 2 Edition: Fixes related to ZELDA NOTES
- Fixed an issue in which the player was unable to use the Daily Bonus effects “Health Recovery” or “Hearty Meal” if they had increased their hearts to the maximum number.
- Several other issues related to ZELDA NOTES have been addressed.
*The latest update data is required to play elements related to ZELDA NOTES.
General
- Several issues have been addressed to improve the gameplay experience.
The Legend Of Zelda: Tears Of The Kingdom Ver. 1.4.2 Patch Notes
Nintendo Switch 2 Edition: Fixes related to ZELDA NOTES
- Fixed an issue in which the player was unable to use the Daily Bonus effects “Health Recovery” or “Hearty Meal” if they had increased their hearts to the maximum number.
- Several other issues related to ZELDA NOTES have been addressed.
*The latest update data is required to play elements related to ZELDA NOTES.
General
- Fixed an issue in which the background music would not be played correctly in certain battles in the Nintendo Switch 2 Edition.
- Several other issues have been addressed to improve the gameplay experience.
Even low levels of air pollution may quietly scar your heart, MRI study finds
Researchers using cardiac MRI have found that long-term exposure to air pollution is associated with early signs of heart damage, according to a study that was published today in Radiology, a journal of the Radiological Society of North America (RSNA). The research indicates that fine particulate matter in the air may contribute to diffuse myocardial fibrosis, a form of scarring in the heart muscle that can precede heart failure.
Cardiovascular disease is the leading cause of death worldwide. There is a large body of evidence linking poor air quality with cardiovascular disease. However, the underlying changes in the heart resulting from air pollution exposure are unclear.
“We know that if you’re exposed to air pollution, you’re at higher risk of cardiac disease, including higher risk of having a heart attack,” said the study’s senior author Kate Hanneman, M.D., M.P.H., from the Department of Medical Imaging at the Temerty Faculty of Medicine, University of Toronto and University Health Network in Toronto. “We wanted to understand what drives this increased risk at the tissue level.”
Dr. Hanneman and colleagues used cardiac MRI, a noninvasive imaging technique, to quantify myocardial fibrosis and assess its association with long-term exposure to particles known as PM2.5. At 2.5 micrometers in diameter or less, PM2.5 particles are small enough to enter the bloodstream through the lungs. Common sources include vehicle exhaust, industrial emissions and wildfire smoke.
The researchers wanted to evaluate the effects of air pollution on both healthy people and those with heart disease, so the study group included 201 healthy controls and 493 patients with dilated cardiomyopathy, a disease that makes it more difficult for the heart to pump blood.
Higher long-term exposure to fine particulate air pollution was linked with higher levels of myocardial fibrosis in both the patients with cardiomyopathy and the controls, suggesting that myocardial fibrosis may be an underlying mechanism by which air pollution leads to cardiovascular complications. The largest effects were seen in women, smokers and patients with hypertension.
The study adds to growing evidence that air pollution is a cardiovascular risk factor, contributing to residual risk not accounted for by conventional clinical predictors such as smoking or hypertension.
“Even modest increases in air pollution levels appear to have measurable effects on the heart,” Dr. Hanneman said. “Our study suggests that air quality may play a significant role in changes to heart structure, potentially setting the stage for future cardiovascular disease.”
Knowing a patient’s long-term air pollution exposure history could help refine heart disease risk assessment and address the health inequities that air pollution contributes to both in level of exposure and effect. For instance, Dr. Hanneman said, if an individual works outside in an area with poor air quality, healthcare providers could incorporate that exposure history into heart disease risk assessment.
The air pollution exposure levels of the patients in the study were below many of the global air quality guidelines, reinforcing that there are no safe exposure limits.
“Public health measures are needed to further reduce long-term air pollution exposure,” Dr. Hanneman said. “There have been improvements in air quality over the past decade, both in Canada and the United States, but we still have a long way to go.”
In addition to illuminating the links between air pollution and myocardial fibrosis, the study highlights the important role that radiologists will play in research and clinical developments going forward.
“Medical imaging can be used as a tool to understand environmental effects on a patient’s health,” Dr. Hanneman said. “As radiologists, we have a tremendous opportunity to use imaging to identify and quantify some of the health effects of environmental exposures in various organ systems.”
Call For Papers By Competition Commission of India
About Competition Commission of India
Competition Commission of India is a statutory body of the Government of India established on 14 October 2003 under the Competition Act 2002.
Competition Commission of India is a body responsible for enforcing the Competition Act, 2002 throughout India and to prevent activities that have an appreciable adverse effect on competition in India.
About the Opportunity
The Competition Commission of India (CCI) will organize the 11th National Conference on Economics of Competition Law tentatively in February/March 2026 at New Delhi.
Object
- Stimulate research and debate on contemporary issues in the field of economics of competition law
- Develop a better understanding of competition issues relevant to the Indian context
- Draw inferences for implementation of competition law in India
Eligibility
The conference targets economists including scholars, practitioners and competition agency officials with a keen interest in economics of competition law and policy.
Co-authored papers are allowed. However, one of the authors should be an Indian citizen having expertise/ specialization in Economics.
Submission Guidelines
A 1000-word abstract of the paper including research questions, methodology and expected results along with one-page curriculum vitae and contact details should be submitted initially.
Authors of selected abstracts will then be invited to submit full, original and unpublished papers of not more than 6000 words.
Theme
- Market definition, measuring market power and abuse of dominance: Issues like empirical methods of defining markets, measuring market power, and assessment of exclusionary unilateral conduct etc. may be covered among others.
- Vertical restraints and competition: Vertical restraints can have many procompetitive as well as anticompetitive effects. Papers may explore areas such as resale price maintenance, assignment of exclusive territories or exclusive dealing, tying and bundling and circumstances under which these restrictions have anti competitive effects.
- Horizontal agreements and cartelization: Prohibition of collusive conduct of firms is a key component of competition law. Papers may explore issues such as economics of collusion, information exchange, price signaling, facilitating factors for cartels, detecting and discouraging cartels etc.
- Economics of platform markets and challenges for antitrust enforcement: New digital products and business models as well as the special characteristics of digital markets have created new challenges for enforcement and competition policy. Papers may explore new tools and techniques that the discipline of economics offers for assessing competition issues in platform markets.
- Intellectual Property Rights and Competition Law: Competition law will be concerned not with the legitimate exercise of an IP right, but with efforts of the holders of this right to expand the scope, either to new products, or beyond a certain time or by conditioning access to the right on restrictions. Papers may explore areas of recent concerns in the IPcompetition law interface.
- Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Competition Law: AI is emerging as a new factor of production, augmenting the traditional factors of production viz. labour, capital and innovation and technological changes captured in total factor productivity. AI can fundamentally reshape how firms make decisions, in particular by generating predictive analytics, automating decision-making, and optimising business process. Papers may explore concerns related to potential competition issues in AI ecosystem and application of AI in user industries.
- Price and non-price effects of mergers: Economic analysis is playing an increasingly important role in merger review. Papers may focus on recent developments in estimating the effects of mergers (merger simulation, diversion ratios, pricing pressure indices, etc.), innovation effects and welfare effects of mergers including vertical or conglomerate mergers, issues in the use of appropriate remedies, that is, adoption of structural and/or behavioral remedies.
- Any other issues related to competition policy and law.
How to Submit?
Abstract along with CV may be sent to [email protected].
The CV should necessarily include citizenship of Author/Co-author, educational qualification (clearly mentioning Discipline of Post Graduation or Doctorate Level) with passing year, work experience and publication in the area of economics, if any.
Post-Conference Publication
Papers submitted by authors, after incorporating suggestions, will be published by the CCI on its website and/or CCI Journal on Competition Law and Policy after reviewing for quality.
Financial Support & Certification
An honorarium of INR 30,000 per paper along with certificate will be provided to Author(s) of papers selected for presentation at the Conference. No TA and eDA will be provided to attend the Conference.
Important Dates
- Notification of Call for Papers: 3rd July, 2025
- Last date of submission of abstracts: 18th August, 2025
- Review, Selection and intimation to authors: 1st October, 2025
- Last date for submission of full papers: 1st December, 2025
- Review and Finalization of papers: 30th January, 2026
- Presentation in Conference: February/March 2026 (tentatively)
Location
Delhi.
Contact Information
For any queries, please contact at [email protected].
Click here for LinkedIn Notification.
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
Access Denied
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/fashion/how-banarasi-sarees-are-getting-a-modern-makeover-for-millennials-and-gen-z-wardrobes-101751639467136.html” on this server.
Reference #18.d4c25068.1751653104.47f9c03
https://errors.edgesuite.net/18.d4c25068.1751653104.47f9c03
New Survey Reveals a Quiet Shift in Aussie Homeownership
Key takeaways
Westpac’s latest Housing Pulse shows a quiet shift: Aussies are warming back up to homeownership.
While affordability concerns and rate pressures persist, sentiment among owner-occupiers is improving.
There’s renewed interest in lower-density housing, detached homes and small-unit blocks. suggesting a continued post-COVID preference for space, lifestyle flexibility, and autonomy.
Policymakers must encourage investor participation and facilitate first home buying, or risk worsening the housing crunch.
For proactive investors: now’s the time to plan, secure finance, and position yourself.
Don’t wait for the headlines to tell you it’s time, opportunity favours the prepared.
Is Australia finally falling back in love with homeownership?
Westpac’s latest housing survey says… maybe
Once upon a time, owning a home was the Great Australian Dream, etched into our psyche like Vegemite on toast.
But in recent years, that dream’s been dented by sky-high prices, interest rate hikes, and affordability woes.
So it’s fair to ask, have Aussies given up on homeownership altogether?
According to the latest Westpac Housing Pulse, there’s been a quiet but notable shift.
While economic challenges remain, the desire for homeownership seems to be stirring again.
Owner-occupier confidence is rebounding
After a tough few years, owner-occupiers are beginning to show signs of cautious optimism.
Westpac’s consumer survey showed that home buying sentiment has ticked up, especially among owner-occupiers.
Confidence isn’t roaring back, but it’s definitely rebounding.
According to their data, preferences are leaning toward lower-density housing, with detached houses and units in smaller blocks being favoured over high-rise apartments.
That’s an important signal.
It reflects not just affordability concerns, but also lifestyle shifts that have accelerated post-COVID.
People want space, flexibility, and a sense of control, something you’re less likely to get in a 40-storey tower with rising strata fees and a revolving door of neighbours.
For investors, this is a nudge.
It suggests there’s a stronger underlying demand for family-friendly properties, apartments, villa units and townhouses, particularly in established suburbs that offer amenities, schools, and transport access.
First home buyers: interest but no urgency
Now here’s where things get a bit more nuanced.
First home buyer sentiment is still sitting below average, despite surging population growth and rental market stress.
According to Westpac’s data, many would-be buyers are interested, but they’re not in a hurry.
Why the hesitation?
Simple: At the time of the survey, many were being priced out or struggling to navigate tighter lending criteria.
Furthermore, concerns about job security and affordability haven’t disappeared simply because inflation has cooled slightly.
Add to that the steady drumbeat of media negativity, and you’ve got a recipe for deferral, not action.
That’s not to say the desire isn’t there; it is.
But desire without capacity or confidence doesn’t translate into market activity.
However, I believe that’s going to change over the next couple of months as the federal government’s new home buying first homebuyer incentives come into play, particularly after first of January 2026, when first homebuyers will be able to buy with only a 5% deposit.
The investor conundrum: still out in the cold
Interestingly, investor sentiment remains weak according to Westpac’s survey.
That won’t surprise seasoned investors who’ve watched state and federal governments roll out a red carpet of disincentives—from rising land taxes to anti-landlord rhetoric.
Westpac’s survey shows property investors continue to face an uphill battle in terms of sentiment.
While savvy investors see opportunity in today’s low-sentiment, high-rent environment, most remain cautious.
That means fewer investors are building rental supply at a time when we desperately need more of it.
And yes, that’s part of why rents continue to surge.
What this all means
There’s a subtle but important message in Westpac’s latest numbers: we’re entering a new phase in the housing cycle, one where:
- Owner-occupiers are regaining confidence, especially those upgrading or buying family homes;
- First home buyers remain on the sidelines, not because they’ve given up, but because affordability and borrowing limits are still major hurdles. And this will change in around 6 months when the 5% first home buyer scheme kicks in.
- Investors are missing in action, which bodes poorly for rental supply and long-term housing affordability.
For policymakers, this should be a wake-up call.
Without investor participation and improved pathways for first home buyers, housing pressures will intensify.
For investors like us, though? This is where opportunity lives.
When the herd is cautious and sentiment is low, savvy buyers can negotiate well, buy quality assets, and position themselves for the next upswing.
Remember, markets move in cycles, but wealth is built when others hesitate.
Why now is a window of opportunity for strategic property investors
I believe we’re in a window of opportunity for property investors who take a long-term view.
Right now, we’re seeing what some would call a “perfect storm” of fundamentals that are aligning to support strong property markets in the years ahead:
- Continued rapid population growth is putting pressure on housing.
- An acute undersupply of dwellings,
- A chronic shortage of skilled labour, making new development slower and more expensive.
- Inflation has moderated, now sitting within the RBA’s target range.
- Interest rates will keep falling, bringing more buyers into the market
- Government first homebuyer incentives will pour fuel on the flames of our undersupplied housing market.
As interest rates keep falling and confidence returns among both buyers and sellers, we’ll enter the next phase of the property cycle.
And historically, this stage has delivered some of the best capital growth for those who act early.
To be clear, I’m not suggesting anyone try to “time the market”, that’s nearly impossible to get right consistently.
However, many successful investors built significant wealth by buying during the early stages of an upturn, when fear still lingered and competition was low.
Looking ahead, demand will continue exceeding supply for the foreseeable future. Strong immigration, restrictive planning regulations, and the slow delivery of new housing stock will keep upward pressure on prices.
Meanwhile, the cost to deliver new dwellings is rising and will continue to rise.
It’s not just supply chain issues or labour shortages—it’s also financial viability. Developers won’t launch projects unless the numbers stack up, and right now, that means new stock will need to enter the market at significantly higher prices than existing homes.
Eventually, as interest rates ease further and media headlines turn positive, consumer sentiment will rebound.
Pent-up demand will be unleashed. And just as it always does, greed (FOMO) will overtake fear (FOBE – Fear of Buying Early) as the cycle kicks into gear.
So if you’re in a financially stable position and thinking of buying your next home or investment property, this may be your moment.
Because in property, like in life, you don’t get rewarded for waiting. You get rewarded for acting with clarity while others are uncertain.
Fact is, the smart money is already on the move.
But what about you?
Are you clear on how to take advantage of these market conditions — or are you still waiting for “certainty”?
That’s where our Complimentary Wealth Discovery Session comes in. We’re offering you a 1-on-1 chat with a Metropole Wealth Strategist to help you:
- Clarify your financial goals
- Understand how macro trends affect your position
- Build a personalised, data-driven property strategy
- Get ahead of the curve — before everyone else piles in
There’s no cost, no obligation — just practical, tailored guidance based on decades of experience.
Click here now to book your free Wealth Discovery Session
130 Beautiful Things to Say About Your Wife
Your wife is more than just your partner—she’s the woman who knows your silences, stands by your chaos, and loves you in a hundred quiet ways. Why not celebrate all that she is to you by thinking of beautiful things to say about your wife? Yes, we get it, in the rhythm of daily life, these gestures can sometimes take a backseat.
Even if your heart is in the right place, you may not find the right words to appreciate how much your life partner means to you. Or may just take for granted the fact that she already knows. But when you prioritize consistent emotional appreciation, the quality of your relationship improves in ways you cannot even imagine.
Your words have the power to make her heart sing. These words don’t have to be poetic or profound. They just have to be real. If you don’t quite know where to begin, we’ve rounded up 130 beautiful things to say about your wife. Whether it’s a quiet moment, a tough day, or a celebration of love, you can use these to make her heart melt.
Beautiful Things to Say About Your Wife
Your wife is more than just your partner, she’s the heart of your story. And as life gets busy, it’s easy to forget how powerful a few meaningful words can be. According to our research from relationship experts and couples around the world, beautiful things to say to your wife aren’t just romantic, they’re relationship-sustaining.
These small but intentional expressions help your wife feel seen, loved, and emotionally safe. This list includes everything from sweet one-liners to deep emotional affirmations. Whether you’re whispering them at night, texting her mid-day, or writing something beautiful to say to your wife in an anniversary card, these words will stay with her.
Sweet things to say to your wife
The smallest, most consistent compliments for women often carry the most emotional weight. These short and sweet expressions aren’t about grand declarations, they’re about making her feel adored in life’s ordinary moments. Here are some sweet words to tell your wife to make her happy:
- You make every day feel peaceful just by being in it.
- I still look at you and feel lucky.
- You bring out a softness in me that no one else ever has.
- Home isn’t a place. It’s wherever you are.
- I hope you know how much I treasure you.
- Loving you is my favorite habit.
- You have a kindness that makes everyone around you better.
- I feel most myself when I’m with you.
- You brighten every room you walk into.
- I still get excited when I see your name pop up on my phone.
Romantic things to say to your wife
Romance isn’t reserved for anniversaries. A well-timed, heartfelt compliment can sweep her off her feet, even after years of marriage. These suggestions are just right for those moments when you’re thinking, “I want something beautiful to say to my wife to make her feel truly desired and adored.” Just pick one of these or use it as inspiration to come up with your own and you’re older:
Related Reading: The Perfect Love Letter To My Wife: 35 Samples For Inspiration
- You’re not just beautiful—you’re captivating.
- The way you love me still takes my breath away.
- You’re the kind of woman people write love songs about.
- Every love story I see feels incomplete without you.
- If I had to relive my life, I’d find you sooner.
- You make love feel effortless and real.
- I’d choose you over and over—even in a world of options.
- You still give me butterflies.
- You are the most beautiful chapter of my life.
- You’re my once-in-a-lifetime kind of love.
Compliments that admire her personality and strength
Your wife is more than a pretty face, she’s intelligent, resilient, empathetic, and endlessly capable. Acknowledging these aspects of her personality is a unique way to show affection to your partner. Compliment who she is on the inside, and the impact she makes just by being herself with these beautiful words to say to your wife:
- I admire how deeply you feel and how gracefully you love.
- You manage so much and still make space for others.
- You lead with compassion in a world that forgets kindness.
- You make me want to grow, just by being near you.
- You’re calm, wise, and wildly capable.
- You inspire me to be better every day.
- You are as brilliant as you are beautiful.
- You handle chaos with such quiet grace.
- You make strength look gentle.
- The way you love others is rare.
Beautiful things to say when she’s feeling down
Life gets overwhelming. Even the strongest women need reminders of their worth. These thoughtful words for your wife don’t fix everything, but they do remind her she’s loved, supported, and never alone, even on her hardest days.
Related Reading: Husband Wife Relationship – 9 Expert Tips To Improve it
- You don’t have to carry it all alone—I’m here.
- Even on your worst day, you’re still the best part of mine.
- You are enough. Right now. Always.
- You’re allowed to feel overwhelmed—I’ll be your calm.
- I see how hard you try, even when no one else does.
- You deserve softness and rest, too.
- You’re stronger than you think—but you don’t always have to be.
- You never have to impress me. Just be you.
- I love every version of you.
- I love you hardest when you feel weakest.
Beautiful things to say to your wife in front of others
Praising your wife in public, letting the world know how proud you’re of her, hits different. These beautiful things to say about your wife in presence of your family, friends, and loved ones honor her presence. You will notice that she suddenly walks taller after hearing you say these things about her:
- She makes everything better, just by being in it.
- I wouldn’t be who I am without her.
- She’s the heart of our family.
- She’s my inspiration and not just at home.
- I learn from her every day.
- She’s beautiful, brains, and pure strength.
- My greatest success was marrying her.
- She’s the real reason behind anything good I do.
- I’m proud to walk through life with her.
- She’s not just my wife, she’s my world.
Beautiful texts to send your wife randomly
She’s probably not asking for a poem in the middle of the day, but she’ll never forget that one random sweet text that made her smile. These beautiful quotes for your wife are easy to copy-paste or tweak to make her day better.
Related Reading: 101 Beautiful Compliments For Women To Melt Their Hearts
- Just thinking about how lucky I am to have you.
- You’re the best part of my day, every day.
- I can’t wait to come home to you.
- Thank you for being my peace.
- Hope someone’s told you how amazing you are today—if not, let it be me.
- I miss your smile right now.
- You’re everything good in my world.
- Just needed you to know—I love you deeply.
- You’re the reason I still believe in love.
- Just had to pause and smile—because of you.
Beautiful things to say on your anniversary
Anniversary celebrations are more than just cake, gifts, and romantic dinners, they’re checkpoints of growth, memories, and shared dreams. These beautiful words to say to your wife acknowledge your shared journey and everything she’s brought to it.
- I’d marry you all over again—only sooner.
- Every year with you has been my favorite.
- You’ve made forever feel like home.
- I’m still in awe of your love.
- Thank you for choosing me every day.
- You’ve turned time into something beautiful.
- With you, love only gets stronger.
- Our story is my favorite one.
- You’re my always.
- Every year with you feels like a blessing I never earned.
Beautiful things to say before bed
The way you end the day with your wife can leave a lasting imprint, especially during quiet, late-night moments. Bedtime is one of the most intimate windows for deepening your emotional connection. These loving words offer comfort, gratitude, and a soft landing, reminding her that no matter how the day went, your love remains steady.
Related Reading: 35 Heartfelt Love Quotes and Messages for Wife
- I’m here for the long haul, in all seasons.
- You’re my forever person.
- I still choose you, every single day.
- You’re not just the love of my life, you’re my life.
- I’ll always fight for us.
- You are the only future I want.
- My heart is yours, completely.
- No matter where life takes us, I’m with you.
- I’m never letting you go.
- I’m not going anywhere. This is forever.
Funny but beautiful things to say
Laughter is one of the most underrated forms of intimacy. Relationship experts and psychologists agree that sharing humor with your wife can boost emotional closeness and reduce tension. These lighthearted yet loving phrases add playfulness to your affection, proving that love doesn’t always have to be serious to be sincere.
- You’re the only person I’d share fries with.
- I still can’t believe someone as weird as me landed someone like you.
- You’re cuter than all the cat videos combined.
- Thanks for loving me despite my snoring.
- I’d get lost without your directions, literally.
- You make grown-up life bearable.
- You’re my favorite kind of trouble.
- If I had a rupee for every time I loved you, I’d be a billionaire.
- I’m lucky you have bad taste in men.
- You still make me laugh harder than anyone else.
Deep, emotional things to say from the heart
Sometimes, the most powerful love messages come from raw honesty. Based on observations across emotional wellness resources and couples’ personal stories, it’s clear that vulnerability fosters real connection. These aren’t just lines—they’re reflections of everything unsaid, everything felt deeply. Use them when you want your words to match the weight of your love.
- You’ve healed parts of me I didn’t know were broken.
- I feel safest when I’m with you.
- I trust you more than anyone in this world.
- You see me in ways no one else does.
- Your love makes me feel whole.
- I’d walk through fire for you.
- Being loved by you is my greatest gift.
- I never have to hide with you.
- You are the most beautiful thing that’s ever happened to me.
- Loving you has made me a better man.
More beautiful things to say for all occasions
Not every moment fits into a category, but every moment is a chance to make your wife feel valued. We’ve gathered a few additional beautiful things to say about your wife, from relationship forums and user-submitted love notes, to give you a versatile mix of compliments. Whether it’s a casual day, a birthday, or a spontaneous voice note, these lines always land with heart.
Related Reading: 33 Most Romantic Things To Do For Your Wife
- I love falling asleep next to you.
- Thank you for sharing today with me.
- You make my dreams sweeter.
- I sleep better knowing you’re near.
- Goodnight, my love. Always.
- You’re the last person I want to talk to every day.
- I’m grateful for you, today and always.
- I’ll hold you in my dreams tonight.
- I love you more today than yesterday.
- Lying beside you is my favorite part of every night.
She’s not just your partner, she’s your whole world
Through the hard years of marriage and the wonderful ones, there come many moments in which you look at your wife and realize she’s become the center of your universe. These beautiful things to say to your wife sum up the emotion perfectly and help you express that sense of awe and gratitude, the kind that turns an ordinary woman into your whole world.
- You’re not just part of my life, you ARE my life.
- Everything starts and ends with you.
- You are my heart outside my body.
- My world makes sense because you’re in it.
- You’re not my other half, you’re the best part of me.
- Every good day starts with your smile.
- I see my future in your eyes.
- You’re the one thing I’d never trade.
- You’re more than my wife, you’re my home.
- My world would lose its color without you in it.
Things to say that make her feel safe with you
While flowers and romance are sweet, what most women really crave is to feel safe with their partner, emotionally, mentally, and spiritually. According to relationship experts and long-term couples alike, the foundation of lasting intimacy is trust and security. These words remind your wife that no matter what she’s going through, she has a supportive husband she can lean on you without fear, without filters, and without having to earn your tenderness.
- You never have to pretend with me.
- I’m here, even when it’s messy.
- Your feelings are always valid with me.
- You’re safe to cry, to yell, to just be.
- I’ll never judge what’s in your heart.
- I’m not going anywhere. Ever.
- You can trust me with your fears and your dreams.
- You’re safe here, always.
- I see you, fully. And I still choose you.
- I will never use your vulnerability against you.
Final Thoughts
You don’t have to be a poet to speak love into your marriage. Whether it’s through beautiful quotes for your wife, quick notes, or bedtime whispers, the effort matters more than the format. These beautiful things to say to your wife help build connection, trust, and joy. Tell her the beautiful things. Not just when she’s dressed up. Not just when things are perfect. But also when she’s tired, frustrated, makeup-free, and vulnerable. Because love is not about grand gestures, it’s in the everyday acknowledgments, the small truths, and the simple reminders that she is seen, chosen, and adored.
5 Types Of Intimacy In A Relationship
100 Good Morning Text Messages For Her To Brighten Her Day
Funny Marriage Advice For Newlyweds: Keep The Laughter Alive!
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
Transform Your Living Room into a Movie Theater With These Upgrades
Once every blue moon, I love going to the movie theater to see a blockbuster, and also for the experience. But when you don’t want to leave the house or just have some friends over, there are a few ways to capture the cinematic magic without leaving your living room.
7
Invest in a Big Screen or Projector
When it comes to replicating the theater experience at home, screen size plays a major role. While a standard 55-inch TV works well for casual viewing, it falls short of delivering the immersive, larger-than-life feel you get at the movies. To achieve that sense of immersion, the screen needs to fill more of your field of vision, which is similar to how it does in a cinema.
THX, the well-known audio/visual standards company, recommends a 36-degree viewing angle for optimal immersion without causing eye strain. In practical terms, that usually means upgrading to a 75- to 85-inch TV or opting for a projector system. Projectors, in particular, can recreate a cinematic feel with screen sizes typically ranging from 100 to 120 inches.
If you choose a projector, the screen is just as important as the projector itself. A good projection screen offers significantly better contrast, color fidelity, and image sharpness compared to a plain white wall. For TV setups, OLED or premium LED models are ideal, especially in dark rooms, thanks to their deep blacks and rich, vibrant colors.
6
Upgrade Your Sound System
Few things kill the movie mood faster than muffled dialogue or action scenes that sound like they’re happening in the next room. Your built-in TV speakers simply aren’t equipped to deliver the kind of immersive, room-filling sound that draws you into the story.
For a true Dolby Atmos experience, three key elements matter: room layout, speaker placement, and equipment that matches your space. That might sound like a big ask, but you don’t have to go full audio geek right away. You can start with a solid Dolby Atmos-enabled soundbar, which can level up your experience in a big way.
Related
How I Upgraded My Home Audio Setup Without Spending Much
You can make your audio so much better, and it doesn’t have to cost a month’s wages.
But if you’re ready to dive in headfirst, the gold standard is a 7.1.4 setup—seven speakers at ear level, four overhead, and a subwoofer to shake the floorboards. Even a classic 5.1 arrangement (front left/right, center, two rears, and a sub) is more than enough to bring your movie watching to life. You’ll hear every whisper, every footstep, and every explosion the way it was meant to be heard.
5
Tweak Your TV Settings
Most TVs are shipped with default settings tuned for bright retail environments, not the dim, controlled lighting of a home theater. These factory presets often result in overly saturated colors, excessive brightness, and motion-smoothing features that distort the cinematic look.
To get a more accurate and immersive picture on your TV, start by switching to the Cinema or Movie mode. These presets are generally closer to filmmakers’ visual intent. Then, turn off motion smoothing (it could be labeled as “Auto Motion” or “TruMotion,” depending on your TV). That setting tries to smooth out motion, but it ends up making movies look weirdly artificial, like they were shot on a camcorder.
It’s also important to adjust brightness and contrast to match your actual viewing environment. In a dark room, lower brightness settings tend to provide a more comfortable and visually accurate experience. If your TV supports HDR, double-check that HDR mode is enabled and properly configured. When set up correctly, HDR can dramatically enhance color depth and contrast, making movies look truly cinematic.
4
Turn Off the Lights and Block Out Natural Light
The goal is to create a space where your screen is the primary light source, just like in a real theater. The first move is to turn off all room lights during movie time. But to go a step further, consider installing blackout curtains or blinds to block out natural light, especially during a mid-afternoon movie binge.
You should also pay attention to reflected light sources within the room. That lamp in the corner might be off, but if it’s reflecting light from your screen back at you, it’s still creating glare. Try to rearrange or remove anything that’s shining light where it shouldn’t.
3
Add Theater-Style Seating (If You Can)
Comfort is a make-or-break part of the whole home theater movie experience. If you’re constantly shifting around trying to get comfortable, you’re not fully immersed in what’s happening on screen. Everyone should have an unobstructed view of the screen without having to crane their necks or lean around someone else.
For seating itself, recliners specifically designed for home theaters are worth the investment if your budget allows. Look for chairs with cup holders, storage compartments, and motorized reclining functions. Some premium options—like the Valencia Tuscany lineup—even throw in built-in USB ports and subtle LED lighting, because why not lean into the luxury?
If dedicated theater seating isn’t in the cards, work with what you have. Arrange your existing furniture to create the best viewing angles, add comfortable cushions and throw blankets, and make sure everyone has a place to set drinks and snacks without blocking views. A little thoughtful setup goes a long way.
2
Set the Mood With LED Lighting
The goal here is to add light without stealing the spotlight. You want ambient lighting that complements the screen, not something that competes with it or washes it out, and that’s where bias lighting comes in. These are LED strips you stick behind your TV or projector screen, and they’re more than just a cool glow. They help reduce eye strain during long viewing sessions and, bonus, they make the blacks on your screen look deeper and more dramatic by boosting contrast.
For the most comfortable vibe, go for warm white LEDs around the 6500K range—something like the Luminoodle USB Bias Lighting you’ll find on Amazon. If you want to take things a step further, you can think about adding dimmable LED strips around the edges of the room or tucked behind furniture. They can double as pathway lights, so people can move around without fumbling in the dark or flipping on that one blinding ceiling fixture. Remember to keep the brightness low and the color subtle. Again, the lighting should support the movie, not upstage it.
Related
Govee TV Backlight 3 Lite Review: This Affordable Ambilight Clone Is Much Better Than Expected
Despite using a webcam on top of your TV, this sub-$100 TV backlighting kit is virtually indistinguishable from an original Ambilight.
1
Opt to Play Blu-ray Movies
In our streaming-dominated world, it might seem old-fashioned to suggest physical media, but Blu-ray discs still offer the highest quality movie experience you can get at home. Streaming services compress video and audio to save bandwidth, which means you’re not getting the full quality that filmmakers intended.
Related
Why It’s Still Worth Buying Blu-rays in 2025
I’m still all in on physical media, and Blu-ray is an excellent option.
4K Blu-ray discs provide uncompressed video with higher bitrates than any streaming service can match. The difference is most noticeable in action scenes with lots of movement, where streaming compression can create artifacts and softness that Blu-ray handles cleanly. If you don’t own a Blu-ray player, you can consider a gaming console like the PlayStation 5, which doubles as a solid Blu-ray player, among several other uses beyond gaming.
Audio quality also stands out in Blu-ray. Lossless audio formats like Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio deliver every nuance of the soundtrack without the compression artifacts you get from streaming. If you’ve put money into a good sound setup, this is where it really starts to earn its keep. Beyond the technical advantages, there’s something satisfying about the ritual of selecting a disc, seeing the studio logos, and watching trailers, which all contribute to creating that special movie atmosphere.
You’ve got the screen, the sound, the lighting, and the atmosphere, but don’t forget the viewing rituals that complete the experience. Silence all phones, keep conversation to a minimum, and avoid hitting pause unless absolutely necessary. And of course, don’t forget to grab some popcorn (air-popped or drenched in butter—I’m not judging), something to sip on, and let yourself sink into the movie.
Roads weave new future for rural revitalization in Anhui
In Lianyun Township of Yuexi County, Anhui Province, a rural landscape unfolds where winding roads cut through vibrant fields and neatly arranged homes. These modern highways, resembling ribbons weaving through the countryside, have become a symbol of progress and transformation.
In recent years, Yuexi County has ramped up its investment in road infrastructure, building a comprehensive and multifaceted transportation network. Anchored by various expressways and highways, the region now boasts a well-connected road system.
Nathan’s Hot Dog Eating Contest 2025: How to watch on July Fourth
We’ve all eaten an extra hot dog at a Fourth of July barbecue — but only the greats can stomach 50 dogs in rapid fire.
Nathan’s Famous Fourth of July International Hot Dog Eating Contest brings the world’s top competitive eaters to Coney Island, N.Y., to see how many hot dogs they can eat in 10 minutes. Here’s what you need to know about this year’s competition.
Is Joey Chestnut competing?
Joey Chestnut, the competition’s most decorated eater, is returning to the Coney Island stage this year after a sponsorship conflict barred him from competing in 2024. Banned after signing a sponsorship deal with Impossible Foods, Chestnut got his fill competing at a different contest in El Paso, Texas. Major League Eating eventually ceded the sponsorship issue with Chestnut, who posted on X in June that he is “grateful we’ve been able to find common ground.”
Who are the eaters?
Chestnut — ranked No. 1 in the country — is the favorite to win again, boasting a Major League Eating record of 76 hot dogs in 10 minutes. Other eaters to watch are the 2024 winner and No. 2-ranked Patrick Bertoletti, No.-3 ranked eater Geoffrey Esper, No.-4 ranked eater James Webb and No.-6 ranked eater Nick Wehry.
Miki Sudo is the front-runner in the women’s competition. The reigning champ with a 10-year winning streak, Sudo will be aiming to top her personal record set in 2024 of 51 hot dogs.
When is the contest?
The 2025 Nathan’s Famous Hot Dog Eating Contest will take place July 4 outside the original Nathan’s Famous on the corner of Surf and Stillwell Avenues in Coney Island in Brooklyn, N.Y. ESPN will continue its annual broadcast of the Fourth of July contest this year, with coverage beginning at 7:45 a.m. PT/10:45 a.m. ET. The main hot dog eating contest is expected to begin at 10 a.m. PT/1 p.m. ET.
How can I watch?
The contest will be broadcast live on ESPN2 at 10 a.m. PT/1 p.m. ET. It will air again on ESPN at 2 p.m. PT/5 p.m. ET and 6 p.m. PT/9 p.m. ET, and at 3 p.m. PT/6 p.m. ET on ESPN2. This will give fans some timing options as they iron out their Fourth of July plans.
The women’s competition will air on ESPN3 at 7:45 a.m. PT/10:45 a.m. ET and will be recapped around 12 p.m. ET.
How did the contest come to be?
In 1916, Polish immigrant Nathan Handwerker used a $300 loan and his wife’s secret recipe to open a nickel hot dog stand — it wasn’t until 1972 that the first hot dog eating contest began.
What was initially a lighthearted challenge has become a physically taxing sport, formalized by Major League Eating and extensive media attention. Many see the contest as emblematic of America’s obsession with spectacle and excess. Nathan’s is also not shy about its original goal of self-promotion. Every Independence Day, tens of thousands of fans flock to Coney Island with millions more watching on ESPN.
So, what’s on the table?
The winner receives the highly coveted and bejeweled Mustard Belt, a $10,000 grand prize and the esteemed champion title.
Happy Fourth of July — it’s time to dig in!
Airport Lounges Are Sexy Again—if You Can Get In
Let’s be honest: A crowded airport lounge without a seat in sight is usually less appealing than an empty gate area. Over the past decade, an influx of travelers with club access has led to overcrowding, long wait lists, and a diminished (read: not luxurious) experience.
However, a version of commercial air travel—often hidden from public view and inaccessible to even premium credit card holders—has emerged. This more private, preflight experience is essential for the affluent business traveler, says Rob Karp, founder and CEO of travel consultancy firm MilesAhead.
“What we’re seeing now is a correction: tiered access, differentiated spaces, and new incentives to spend or commit more to a particular airline,” Karp notes. Business travelers are looking to optimize time and minimize stress—and they’re willing to pay for it. That means sitting down for a proper meal, taking a call in a quiet, uninterrupted setting, or even squeezing in a quick spa treatment before boarding.
Differentiated Spaces
In the US, newer lounges that require an international business-class ticket for access, like the network of Delta One Lounges or United Polaris Lounges, are delivering on that promise.
Delta, for instance, offers an á la carte, bistro-like dining experience, soundproof phone booths, and even external monitors for focused work at each of its flagship business lounges. “Each space is designed to balance comfort and luxury with practical efficiency,” says Claude Roussel, vice president of Delta Sky Club and lounge experience.
For Aaron Kokoruz, a public relations executive who clocks nearly 100 flights per year, lounges like these are about crafting a moment of calm and comfort before boarding, regardless of whether you are hopping over to Omaha or flying halfway across the world. Kokoruz lists both the Qantas First Lounge at LAX (with a Neil Perry menu) and the Cathay Pacific First Lounge at London-Heathrow as personal favorites.
“My top priorities in a lounge are healthy and hearty food options, and a solid selection of cocktails and mocktails,” Kokoruz says. “It’s 2025—every great lounge should nail both.”
Trump’s Bill Reaches the Finish Line
The Host
Julie Rovner
KFF Health News
Read Julie’s stories.
Julie Rovner is chief Washington correspondent and host of KFF Health News’ weekly health policy news podcast, “What the Health?” A noted expert on health policy issues, Julie is the author of the critically praised reference book “Health Care Politics and Policy A to Z,” now in its third edition.
Early Thursday afternoon, the House approved a budget reconciliation bill that not only would make permanent many of President Donald Trump’s 2017 tax cuts, but also impose deep cuts to Medicaid, the Affordable Care Act, and, indirectly, Medicare.
Meanwhile, those appointed by Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. to a key vaccine advisory panel used their first official meeting to cast doubt on a preservative that has been used in flu vaccines for decades — with studies showing no evidence of its harm in low doses.
This week’s panelists are Julie Rovner of KFF Health News, Alice Miranda Ollstein of Politico, Maya Goldman of Axios, and Sarah Karlin-Smith of the Pink Sheet.
Panelists
Maya Goldman
Axios
Sarah Karlin-Smith
Pink Sheet
@sarahkarlin-smith.bsky.social
Alice Miranda Ollstein
Politico
Among the takeaways from this week’s episode:
- This week the GOP steamrolled toward a major constriction of the nation’s social safety net, pushing through Trump’s tax and spending bill. The legislation contains significant changes to the way Medicaid is funded and delivered — in particular, through imposing the program’s first federal work requirement on many enrollees. Hospitals say the changes would be devastating, potentially resulting in the loss of services and facilities that could touch all patients, not only those on Medicaid.
- Some proposals in Trump’s bill were dropped during the Senate’s consideration, including a ban on Medicaid coverage for gender-affirming care and federal funding cuts for states that use their own Medicaid funds to cover immigrants without legal status. And for all the talk of not touching Medicare, the legislation’s repercussions for the deficit are expected to trigger spending cuts to the program that covers those over 65 and some with disabilities — potentially as soon as the next fiscal year.
- The newly reconstituted Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices met last week, and it looked pretty different from previous meetings: In addition to new members, there were fewer staffers on hand from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention — and the notable presence of vaccine critics. The panel’s vote to reverse the recommendation of flu shots containing a mercury-based preservative — plus its plans to review the childhood vaccine schedule — hint at what’s to come.
Plus, for “extra credit,” the panelists suggest health policy stories they read this week that they think you should read, too:
Julie Rovner: The Lancet’s “Evaluating the Impact of Two Decades of USAID Interventions and Projecting the Effects of Defunding on Mortality up to 2030: A Retrospective Impact Evaluation and Forecasting Analysis,” by Daniella Medeiros Cavalcanti, et al.
Alice Miranda Ollstein: The New York Times’ “‘I Feel Like I’ve Been Lied To’: When a Measles Outbreak Hits Home,” by Eli Saslow.
Maya Goldman: Axios’ “New Docs Get Schooled in Old Diseases as Vax Rates Fall,” by Tina Reed.
Sarah Karlin-Smith: Wired’s “Snake Venom, Urine, and a Quest to Live Forever: Inside a Biohacking Conference Emboldened by MAHA,” by Will Bahr.
Also mentioned in this week’s episode:
Credits
Francis Ying
Audio producer
Emmarie Huetteman
Editor
To hear all our podcasts, click here.
And subscribe to KFF Health News’ “What the Health?” on Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Pocket Casts, or wherever you listen to podcasts.
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
USE OUR CONTENT
This story can be republished for free (details).
We encourage organizations to republish our content, free of charge. Here’s what we ask:
You must credit us as the original publisher, with a hyperlink to our kffhealthnews.org site. If possible, please include the original author(s) and KFF Health News” in the byline. Please preserve the hyperlinks in the story.
It’s important to note, not everything on kffhealthnews.org is available for republishing. If a story is labeled “All Rights Reserved,” we cannot grant permission to republish that item.
Have questions? Let us know at [email protected]
Prime Day Kindle Deals: Save $220 On Kindle Scribe Bundle At Amazon
A bunch of Amazon devices are already discounted to official Prime Day 2025 prices, including the priciest electronic reader in the ubiquitous Kindle lineup. The newest Kindle Scribe has received a massive $140 price cut, dropping the hybrid ereader and journaling e-ink tablet to its best price since launching last December. But you can save even more–up to $220 total–by opting for the Kindle Scribe Essentials Bundle.
New Kindle users will almost certainly want to go with the bundle, but if you’re upgrading to a new Kindle, you might want to skip the bundle due to a trade-in deal outlined below. The Kindle Scribe deals are exclusive to Prime members.
Save up to $220
The Kindle Scribe Essentials Bundle comes with Amazon’s Premium Pen ($80 value), the official Fabric Folio Cover ($60 value), and a 9W power adapter for Amazon devices ($20 value). You can choose between Black, Denim, and Rose colors for the cover, while the tablet itself is Tungsten. The cover protects the screen and includes a built-in stand with multiple viewing angles.
All three storage configurations are eligible for the Prime Day deal: 16GB, 32GB, and 64GB. Each tier is separated by only $15-$25, so if you plan on using your Kindle Scribe to store and listen to audiobooks via Audible, you may want to opt for 32GB or 64GB model.
The Kindle Scribe has a 10.2-inch front-lit display with anti-glare coating, so you can read in any lighting setting. With 300ppi (pixels per inch) and 94 nits of brightness, text is crisp and clear.
The Scribe doubles as a physical notebook. With the Premium Pen, you can create handwritten notes and email them to other devices. It feels remarkably similar to writing on actual paper. You can also take notes in books and documents you’re reading. If you like writing in the margins of novels, the Scribe is the ereader for you.
Save $140 | Additional 20% off with eligible trade-in
At first glance, it doesn’t make much sense to purchase the non-bundle version of the Kindle Scribe during Prime Day. The 16GB model is only $10 less than the bundle version; the 32GB model is $5 less; and the 64GB edition is actually the same price. So why would you willingly give up the $60 Fabric Folio and $20 AC adapter?
You probably shouldn’t unless you have a device that’s eligible to trade in toward the new Scribe. The non-bundle version is eligible for an additional 20% discount when you trade in a device. Your old Kindle is the obvious choice, but Amazon also accepts other devices, including Fire tablets, Fire TV Sticks, and even some Apple products.
With a trade-in, you’ll get the value of that device and an additional 20% discount on your new purchase. That’s a substantial savings. Trade-in values vary considerably, but the extra 20% is worth $52 to $62–and that’s automatic. Here are the new prices, not including your trade-in.
- 16GB — $208
- 32GB — $224
- 64GB — $248
It doesn’t matter if you trade in a Fire Stick worth $3 or the original Kindle Scribe 16GB model for $85. But it is worth noting that if you own the original 2022 Scribe and want to upgrade, that $85 figure is what Amazon offered me, effectively lowering the price of the 2024 model to $123.
If you take advantage of the Kindle Scribe deal and have never tried Kindle Unlimited, you can get your first three months for free, which grants access to a library of over 4 million books, comics, graphic novels, manga, and more.
Some Kindle Unlimited titles also include audiobook versions that can be listened to on your Kindle. But for even more audiobooks, you’ll want to check out Audible Premium Plus, especially since the $15/month subscription program is free for your first three months, too. With Audible Premium Plus, you’ll be able to claim and keep one audiobook of your choosing. New releases and even preorders are eligible, so Prime members shouldn’t miss out on this offer.
Amazon is already offering steep discounts on Kindle ebooks ahead of the July 8-11 sales event, so you can pair your new ereader with some cheap books.
And if you plan on listening to audiobooks on the Kindle Scribe, Amazon’s Echo Buds with active noise cancellation are on sale for only $45, down from $140. These Bluetooth earbuds can sync wirelessly with Kindle ereaders as well as other Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Parkinson’s reversal? One drug brings dying brain cells back to life
Putting the brakes on an enzyme might rescue neurons that are dying due to a type of Parkinson’s disease that’s caused by a single genetic mutation, according to a new Stanford Medicine-led study conducted in mice.
The genetic mutation causes an enzyme called leucine-rich repeat kinase 2, or LRRK2, to be overactive. Too much LRRK2 enzyme activity changes the structure of brain cells in a way that disrupts crucial communication between neurons that make the neurotransmitter dopamine and cells in the striatum, a region deep in the brain that is part of the dopamine system and is involved in movement, motivation and decision making.
“Findings from this study suggest that inhibiting the LRRK2 enzyme could stabilize the progression of symptoms if patients can be identified early enough,” said Suzanne Pfeffer, PhD, the Emma Pfeiffer Merner Professor in Medical Sciences and a professor of biochemistry. Researchers can mitigate overactive LRRK2 using MLi-2 LRRK2 kinase inhibitor, a molecule that attaches to the enzyme and decreases its activity.
Pfeffer added that because the genetic mutation is not the only way to end up with overactive LRRK2 enzyme, the inhibitor treatment might help with other types of Parkinson’s disease or even other neurodegenerative diseases.
Pfeffer is the senior author of the study published in Science Signaling on July 1. Ebsy Jaimon, PhD, a postdoctoral scholar in biochemistry, is the lead author. The work is part of a longstanding collaboration with Dario Alessi, PhD, at the University of Dundee in Scotland.
Cellular antennae
About 25% of Parkinson’s disease cases are caused by genetic mutations, and the single genetic mutation that makes the LRRK2 enzyme too active is one of the most common. An overactive LRRK2 enzyme causes cells to lose their primary cilia, a cellular appendage that acts like an antenna, sending and receiving chemical messages. A cell that has lost its primary cilia is like your mobile phone when the network is down — no messages come through or are sent.
In a healthy brain, many messages are sent back and forth between dopamine neurons in a region of the brain called the substantia nigra and the striatum. These cellular “conversations” are possible because dopamine neuron axons, which are tubular extensions coming off the cell body, reach all the way to the striatum to communicate with neurons and glia, cells that support neuronal function.
An important communication that is disrupted by too much LRRK2 enzyme activity occurs when dopamine neurons are stressed and release a signal in the striatum called sonic hedgehog (named after the cartoon character). In a healthy brain, it causes certain neurons and astrocytes, a type of glial support cell, in the striatum to produce proteins called neuroprotective factors. As their name suggests, these proteins help shield other cells from dying. When there is too much LRRK2 enzyme activity, many of the striatal cells lose their primary cilia — and their ability to receive the signal from dopamine neurons. This disruption in sonic hedgehog signaling means that needed neuroprotective factors are not produced.
“Many kinds of processes necessary for cells to survive are regulated through cilia sending and receiving signals. The cells in the striatum that secrete neuroprotective factors in response to hedgehog signals also need hedgehog to survive. We think that when cells have lost their cilia, they are also on the pathway to death because they need cilia to receive signals that keep them alive,” Pfeffer explained.
Restored cilia were unexpected
The goal of the study was to test if the MLi-2 LRRK2 kinase inhibitor reversed the effects of too much LRRK2 enzyme activity. Because the neurons and glia that were examined in this study were fully mature and no longer reproducing through cell division, the researchers were initially unsure whether cilia could regrow. Working with mice with the genetic mutation that causes overactive LRRK2 and symptoms consistent with early Parkinson’s disease, the scientists first tried feeding the mice the inhibitor for two weeks. There were no changes detected in brain structure, signaling or the viability of the dopamine neurons.
Recent findings on neurons involved in regulating circadian rhythms, or sleep-wake cycles, inspired the researchers to try again. The primary cilia on those cells — which were also no longer dividing — grew and shrank every 12 hours.
“The findings that other non-dividing cells grow cilia made us realize that it was theoretically possible for the inhibitor to work,” Pfeffer said.
The team decided to see what happened after mice with overactive LRRK2 enzyme consumed the inhibitor for a longer period of time; Pfeffer described the results as “astounding.”
After three months of eating the inhibitor, the percentage of striatal neurons and glia typically affected by the overactive LRRK2 enzyme that had primary cilia in mice with the genetic mutation was indistinguishable from that in mice without the genetic mutation. In the same way moving from an area with spotty cell service to one with good service restores our ability to send and receive text messages, the increase in primary cilia restored communication between dopamine neurons and the striatum.
The striatal neurons and glia were again secreting neuroprotective factors in response to hedgehog signaling from dopamine neurons in the same amounts as the brains of mice without the genetic mutation. The hedgehog signaling from dopamine neurons decreased, suggesting they were under less stress. And, indicators of the density of dopamine nerve endings within the striatum doubled, suggesting an initial recovery for neurons that had been in the process of dying.
“These findings suggest that it might be possible to improve, not just stabilize, the condition of patients with Parkinson’s disease,” Pfeffer said.
The earliest symptoms of Parkinson’s disease begin about 15 years before someone notices a tremor. Typically, these symptoms are a loss of smell, constipation and a sleep disorder in which people act out their dreams while still sleeping, according to Pfeffer. She said the hope is that people who have the LRRK2 genetic mutation can start a treatment that inhibits the enzyme as early as possible.
The next step for the research team is to test whether other forms of Parkinson’s disease that are not associated with the LRRK2 genetic mutation could benefit from this type of treatment.
“We are so excited about these findings. They suggest this approach has great promise to help patients in terms of restoring neuronal activity in this brain circuit,” Pfeffer said. “There are multiple LRRK2 inhibitor clinical trials underway, and our hope is that these findings in mice will hold true for patients in the future.”
The study was funded by The Michael J. Fox Foundation for Parkinson’s Research, the Aligning Science Across Parkinson’s initiative and the United Kingdom Medical Research Council.
Legal Internship Opportunity at Monotype, Noida
About the Organization
Monotype brings brands to life through type and technology that consumers engage with every day. The company’s rich legacy includes a library that can be traced back hundreds of years, featuring famed typefaces like Helvetica, Futura, Times New Roman and more.
Monotype also provides a first-of-its-kind service that makes fonts more accessible for creative professionals to discover, license, and use in our increasingly digital world. We work with the biggest global brands, and with individual creatives, offering a wide set of solutions that make it easier for them to do what they do best: design beautiful brand experiences.
About the Opportunity
Monotype is hiring Legal Interns (Enforcement Specialist) – and this is not your typical internship.
Are you a final-year law student (2024 or 2025 batch) who’s obsessed with IP law, fonts, and fighting copyright infringement? Want to work with brands using Helvetica, Futura & Times New Roman? Ready to build a career in Intellectual Property & Contracts from the ground up?
This could be your chance.
Role & Responsibilities
- Reviewing real-world IP contracts
- Supporting enforcement actions & legal research
- Collaborating with Sales & Legal teams across the globe
- Learning through legal workshops, case files & more!
Eligibility
- Final-year law students (2024 & 2025 batch)
- Excellent with communication, deadlines & documentation
- Passionate about IP law, contracts & tech-driven legal work
Mode
Hybrid
Location
Noida
How to Apply?
Interested Candidate can apply through the link given.
Click here for the LinkedIn Notification
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
Access Denied
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/lifestyle/health/fitness-coach-shares-21-food-cheat-codes-for-weight-loss-chew-your-food-until-it-becomes-liquid-eat-on-a-blue-plate-101751606943002.html” on this server.
Reference #18.d4c25068.1751609806.2c6401c
https://errors.edgesuite.net/18.d4c25068.1751609806.2c6401c
AbbVie to buy CAR-T developer Capstan in deal worth up to $2.1B
Dive Brief:
- Abbvie has agreed to acquire cell therapy developer Capstan Therapeutics in a deal worth up to $2.1 billion, the companies announced Monday.
- The acquisition will hand AbbVie access to technology developed by Capstan that uses small fatty spheres known as lipid nanoparticles to deliver into the body genetic instructions able to engineer specific cells. It’s an ambitious scientific approach that blends the science behind CAR-T cell therapy with that of messenger RNA vaccines.
- Capstan is a few weeks removed from dosing the first patient in a Phase 1 trial of its lead drug candidate, which it’s testing as treatment for B cell-mediated autoimmune diseases. Dubbed CPTX2309, the therapy is designed to reprogram immune T cells to target a protein called CD19 that’s commonly found on B cells.
Dive Insight:
AbbVie’s deal to buy Capstan takes the pharmaceutical company to the frontiers of cell therapy research.
While CAR-T therapies are now well established in cancer medicine, all existing treatments are constructed by removing a patient’s own cells and reengineering them in a laboratory. The complexity, expense and time involved in this process has, for the most part, kept adoption of CAR-T to just a few treatment niches within oncology broadly.
Researchers have imagined broader usage could come if production of CAR-T was done by the body, rather than by technicians in a lab. This “in vivo” approach requires delivery of genetic instructions to the target cells.
Capstan accomplishes this by using modified lipid nanoparticles and messenger RNA, building blocks similar to the technology that enables mRNA vaccines to train the body to recognize viral proteins. Capstan engineers its lipid nanoparticles to especially seek a certain type of T cell.
In vivo CAR-T could offer a more convenient alternative in oncology, where AbbVie is already working with partner Umoja Biopharma.
But it also could be well suited for applying CAR-T to immune disease. Academic research from several years ago showed CAR-T’s potential treating diseases like lupus and kindled a frenzy of investment from small and large drugmakers alike. Capstan is one of many companies now exploring whether cell therapy might help “reset” the immune system in diseases where the body’s self regulation has come unglued.
With its drug CPTX2309, Capstan aims to redirect T cells to hunt down B cells that express the CD19 protein. By clearing both pathogenic and normal B cells, the reprogrammed T cells will prompt this immune reset and hopefully prevent disease progression.
And because T cell reprogramming is accomplished by mRNA instructions, Capstan believes the engineered T cells its treatment creates will be transient and clear out after accomplishing their job.
Prior to Monday’s deal, the biotech had convinced a good number of investors in its approach. Pfizer, Bayer, Eli Lilly, Bristol Myers Squibb, Novartis and Johnson & Johnson all invested in Capstan in at least one of its private funding rounds, through which the startup has raised $340 million.
The acquisition could pay Capstan’s investors up to $2.1 billion at closing. A spokesperson for AbbVie, reached via email, declined to break down the deal’s terms further.
Earlier this year, AstraZeneca paid $425 million upfront to acquire EsoBiotech, which is also working on in vivo cell therapy.
Seven auction sins
I know that many property investors are a little intimidated by the thought of bidding for a property at auction.
I can understand why because auctions are an emotional and exciting event.
And even after bidding at hundreds and hundreds of auctions, I must admit I still get that surge of adrenaline every time I bid.
But auctions can also be a psychological battle, so it’s important to have a strategy in place to give you the best chance of winning on the day.
And as our property markets are heating up many of the A Grade homes and investment grade properties are still being put to auction.
Unfortunately, for every auction winner, there are usually three or four auction losers.
Let’s be blunt, 7 out of 10 auctions end up selling to the person with the deepest pockets, but for the other third — the winning mix will be a combination of style, guile, and savvy use of a smaller pile of savings.
So let’s look at some things you shouldn’t do at auctions – blunders that could cost you a great home or investment property.
1. Not bidding at all
It’s interesting that sometimes many prospective buyers don’t want to make a bid and some let the property pass to another buyer.
Then, you see, they’ll hang around after the auction, hoping a deal isn’t reached so they can jump in and negotiate the bargain of the century – alas, this is usually a terrible tactic.
The way to be the winner at the end is to actually bid.
In fact, serious buyers should make sure they’re the last ones to bid because they can negotiate with the seller, with the vast majority reaching a favourable deal.
2. Deciding on a round number
Many bidders set an inflexible limit, and often a round number such as $700,000, for no valid reason.
Buyers should do their homework about exactly what they can afford and consider being a bit more flexible if they have the capacity.
Often buyers can miss out on a property because they’re not prepared to increase their bid by as little as $500, which is silly when you think about the long-term capital growth potential they may be missing out on.
3. A is for assertive
A buyer’s game-day performance can shake off competition, which may believe you have a bottomless wallet.
It’s important to dress like you have the means to buy the property, be assertive, and to stand at the front so you can see where the other bidders are.
Don’t be afraid to look other bidders straight in the eye and make sure you bid confidently in a loud clear voice.
4. Stopping and starting
Buyers who pause mid-auction to confer with their family or friends about their limit or intentions could be giving away more than they know.
It’s important for a buyer who’s there with their partner to decide on who’s actually bidding and also to determine key signs to allow you to communicate in a non-verbal fashion mid-auction.
Savvy homebuyers should attend as many auctions as they can to watch the theatre of how successful bidders behave, their body language, and their interaction with the auctioneer.
A buyer needs to be assertive, even if they’re on their last bid, by making it seem like they have several bids still up to their sleeve
5. Making ridiculous offers
Starting too low, in some cases, might invite other bidders into the auction ring and allow momentum to build.
But going in with a strong, confident bid could knock out several contenders early on.
If you’ve done your market research, and hopefully you have, then making a ridiculously low offer is usually a mistake.
6. Pretending you’re not interested
It’s a strange phenomenon that some buyers attend auctions and then pretend they’re not interested in them at all.
But it can work in the buyer’s favour to show interest during the entire auction campaign.
If no one bids at the auction, because seemingly they’re not interested, then the vendor is legally entitled to make a vendor bid on the property to help move the auction along.
This can either get things started or when the auction stalls because everyone is trying to “play the game”.
Agents say however, that they want to help a genuine buyer purchase the property, so it’s important to be upfront about your intent and to bid with confidence.
It’s always better to be a standout buyer because it can help you compete better on auction day as well as be on the agent’s radar.
7. Going in too hard, too late
Just because a property is passed in, it doesn’t mean the vendor will necessarily sell the property to anyone there.
They may decide to try to sell it by private treaty or even take it off the market if they’re not going to achieve the price that they wanted.
While it’s important to be assertive, prospective buyers at this point in time shouldn’t be aggressive because this rarely works and will most likely just put the vendor offside.
These iCloud Settings Are Eating Up Your Storage—Here’s How to Fix Them
Your 5GB of free iCloud storage probably didn’t last long; even with a paid iCloud plan, you can find your storage filling up faster than you expected. As it turns out, some of your iPhone’s default settings are to blame for this.
6
Backups From Messages
While keeping your old conversations backed up is a good way to preserve memories, Messages app backups are one of the biggest hidden storage consumers. Usually, the worst offenders within this are large videos or photos you receive.
It’s up to you to decide how important your old messages are compared to the space they take. You might wish to turn off Messages backups after taking screenshots of any particularly sentimental text threads, for instance.
Switching off automatic backups is quite easy:
- Go to Settings and tap your Apple Account at the top of the screen.
- Navigate to iCloud > Saved to iCloud.
- Go to Messages in iCloud and toggle off Use on this iPhone.
- Select Disable and Download on this iPhone when the pop-up window appears.
If you need to move messages to your new iPhone from an old one, you can temporarily turn this feature back on.
You can also limit the timescale for how long you keep synced messages in iCloud, to free up space. Doing this is a good balance between keeping your recent conversations synchronized and freeing up storage. To do this, go to Keep Messages and choose your preferred timescale.
5
iCloud Photos Syncing
Photo backups are one of the most common reasons why people upgrade to a paid version of iCloud. It’s not uncommon for your image library to consume multiple gigabytes; while storing your memories is important, you’ll need to consider the impact on your storage space.
The best way to stop the Photos app from consuming so much iCloud storage is by switching the feature off altogether:
- Go to Settings > Apple ID > iCloud.
- Select Saved to iCloud > iCloud Photos and go to Manage Storage.
- Scroll to the bottom and tap Turn Off and Delete Photos before confirming your choice when the pop-up appears.
Once you’ve switched the feature off, you can download your photos and videos from iCloud within 30 days. Consider spreading your photos around other cloud storage services, like Google Photos, to keep them backed up without spending a lot more.
Decluttering your iPhone’s Photos app by removing images you no longer need, along with duplicates and screenshots, can also help.
4
Device Backups to iCloud
Turning off iCloud device backups can reduce the amount of storage used, but you need to strike a balance. If you completely disable backups, you’ll lose everything if something happens to your iPhone. As a replacement, it’s a good idea to back up your iPhone to your computer instead.
If you wish to go ahead with turning off your device backups to iCloud, the process is simple:
- Go to Settings > Apple Account > iCloud.
- Tap iCloud Backup in the list.
- Toggle Back Up This iPhone off and confirm.
- If applicable, tap your other Apple devices in the bottom list and turn off backups for them too.
3
Backups for Apps You Rarely Use
Third-party messaging apps, such as WhatsApp, also sync with iCloud by default. If you don’t need these backups, you can stop this from happening and subsequently free up a bit of space. The process is slightly different from the Messages app; you can repeat these same steps for any apps you rarely use:
- In Settings > Apple Account > iCloud, go to iCloud Backup.
- Under the All Device Backups list, tap the one labeled This iPhone.
- Wait for your apps to load and select Show All Apps.
- Toggle off all the apps you don’t want to sync with iCloud and confirm as needed.
This is one of the best alternative iPhone backup options: a balance between optimizing storage and not losing your most important data.
2
Notes Synchronization
While Apple Notes might not seem like a big storage eater, it can end up using a lot of space, especially if you use your phone to scan documents or include photos in your notes. Turning off Notes app synchronization can save some space in iCloud, especially if you don’t need to access your notes across devices:
- Navigate to Settings > Apple Account > iCloud.
- Select Notes, which should appear under Saved to iCloud.
- Toggle Sync this iPhone off.
- Go into Manage Storage and tap Delete from iCloud.
You can use alternatives to Apple Notes on your iPhone and turn off iCloud syncing for these. Instead, use an app that automatically syncs across devices, such as Notion or Simplenote. That way, you’ll always have access to your content without having to worry about cloud space.
1
Your Health Stats
Your Health app statistics might not seem like the most obvious consumer of space, but they can add up over time—especially if you use all the functionality of the app. Turning off this feature is one of the easiest ways to free up some extra storage:
- Go to Settings > Apple Account > iCloud.
- Select Saved to iCloud > Health.
- Toggle Sync this iPhone off.
- Select Manage Storage > Delete Data From iCloud.
While default settings can consume significant iCloud storage, you don’t need to let them do that. With a few simple tricks, you can free up more space than you might think. Depending on how much space you need, you may not even need to upgrade to a paid plan.
Yuan Dadu City Wall Ruins Park: Tracing the past in a green ribbon
Nestled among the bustling roads of Beijing, the Yuan Dadu City Wall Ruins Park, also known as Tucheng or Earth Wall Park, provides a tranquil retreat where nature and history intertwine.
The city wall of Dadu, the capital of the Yuan Dynasty, was constructed between 1267 and 1284. Today, only the remnants of the West and North Earth Walls survive, serving as silent witnesses to the rise and fall of an ancient dynasty.
‘And Just Like That’ seems determined to insult every woman
I didn’t think my level of loathing for the Max sequel to HBO’s “Sex and the City” could get any higher, and just like that, along came Season 3.
You see what I did there? Like every single person who has written about “And Just Like That…,” I have used the title in a naked and half-assed attempt to be clever.
Which honestly could also be the title of the series.
We’re midway through the third — and one can only hope final — season, and I am hoarse from screaming at watching these beloved characters behave as if they had done some sort of “Freaky Friday” switch with 13-year-olds.
Which is actually an insult to most 13-year-olds.
In the course of the barely-recognizable-as-human events that make up this latest episode, Miranda (Cynthia Nixon) prolonged her inexplicable bout of homelessness by acting shocked — shocked! — that Seema (Sarita Choudhury), having found her a dream house, would expect her to make a bid over asking price; Lisa (Nicole Ari Parker) dealt with the grief over her father’s death by whining about the amazing send-off orchestrated by his friend Lucille (Jenifer Lewis) despite it including a performance by … Jenifer Lewis; and Charlotte (Kristin Davis) continued to behave as if it were perfectly normal for her husband Harry (Evan Handler) to keep his prostate cancer diagnosis secret from everyone including their children, who would no doubt handle it better than Charlotte.
All of which paled in comparison to the latest installment in the emotional horror show that is the second-time-around courtship of Carrie (Sarah Jessica Parker) and Aidan (John Corbett), which has been under threat since it was revealed in Season 2 that Aidan’s 15-year-old son Wyatt (Logan Souza) has some issues, including a recent ADHD diagnosis. Events lead Aidan to impulsively announce that he and Carrie will have to put their relationship on hold until Wyatt turns 20 (when, as everyone knows, parental responsibilities officially end).
Aidan puts his relationship with Carrie on hold because of issues related to his teenage son, Wyatt (Logan Souza).
(Craig Blankenhorn / Max)
Not surprisingly, this plan does not work out, and in this episode, Aidan celebrates the fact that Wyatt is attending a week-long wilderness camp (um, what?) by showing up at Carrie’s apartment, where he immediately breaks a window by throwing a pebble at it. You know, like he used to in the old days before Carrie had a jillion-dollar apartment with 19th century windows that, as she says, “survived the Mexican War, the Civil War, the Draft Riots of ‘63” (memo to Carrie — New York saw no action in the Mexican War).
After going to obsessive lengths to replace the glass, Aidan then confesses that he and his ex Kathy (Rosemarie DeWitt) had to force Wyatt onto the plane (how they managed to be at the gate as unticketed passengers to do this remains a mystery), an event so upsetting that Aidan and Kathy were forced to comfort each other with sex.
For one brief and shining moment, I waited for Carrie to call time of death on one of the unhealthiest relationships this particular universe has seen (and that’s saying something). Instead, and impossibly, she said she understood.
Apparently love means ignoring every sign God could think to send you. Not only did Aidan have sex with his ex, he forced his unmedicated, unsupervised 15-year-old with ADHD onto a plane headed to the Grand Tetons. (Whether the poor kid made it to camp or is currently having a meltdown in the Jackson Hole airport is never mentioned.)
But then Carrie, and the series, has continued to treat Wyatt’s condition, and his father’s obvious irritated denial of its realities, as simply a logistical obstacle in her fairy tale love story. This would barely make sense if Carrie were still in her 30s, and it makes absolutely none for a woman of her age.
I begrudge no one the desire to reboot a groundbreaking series, and two years ago, the prospect of seeing these iconic 30-somethings as mid-to-late 50-somethings was certainly appealing to one who shares their mature demographic. If only Michael Patrick King, the force behind “And Just Like That…,” allowed any of them to have matured. I don’t mean physically — stars Parker, Nixon, Davis and Kim Cattrall (briefly glimpsed at the end of Season 2) — are fit and lovely and obviously older. I mean emotionally, spiritually and psychologically.
“And Just Like That…” has had two and a half seasons to make these women seem like actual people who might exist, if not in real life, then at least the “Sex and the City” universe (remember the opening credits, when Carrie gets splashed by a bus? Hyperrealism compared to the eat-off-the-sidewalks vision of “And Just Like That…’s” New York.)
Instead, the series seems determined to prove that age is just a number by forcing its leads, now including Choudhury and Parker, to act as if 50 is the new (and very stupid) 30.
I get that Miranda is coming to grips with her newly discovered queerness, but surely a successful, Harvard-educated lawyer who has survived a divorce and raised a teenage son would have a bit more confidence and self-awareness in love, real estate and basic guest etiquette — after moving in briefly with Carrie, she eats the last yogurt!
Charlotte has always been an original Disney princess, all wide eyes and faith in the restorative nature of small animals and florals, but at 55, her high-strung reaction to her husband’s prostate cancer (caught early, easily treatable) is helpful to no one. And don’t get me about her little foot-stamping approach to motherhood or how she speaks about her dog.
Aidan’s shocking confession did little to derail Carrie or their relationship.
(Craig Blankenhorn / Max)
As for Carrie, well, it’s one thing to be a relentlessly hopeful romantic addicted to tulle, stilettos and problematic men in your 30s, but Carrie’s pushing 60 now, so when she agreed, with no demur, to Aidan’s absurd five-year plan, I wondered if she had simply gone mad.
Watching as she subsequently rattled around her huge, empty (if incredibly luxe) apartment wearing a see-through, Ophelia-like dress stuffed with roses or traipsed through Central Park wearing a hat the size of a hot-air balloon only exacerbated my fears. Dressing like Marie Antoinette to attend a luncheon at Tiffany’s isn’t sassy fashion sense — it’s a cry for help.
She most certainly needs help. The reunion with Aidan seemed too good to be true, and thus it is proving to be. Even a 30-something Carrie would have known that being in a relationship with a father means being in a relationship with his children. But the notion that she must be kept separate from Wyatt is not just unsustainable — it’s insulting.
What, she’s never experienced, met or even read about children with ADHD or post-divorce trauma? Or is she such a delicate flower that she can’t handle being around a teenager with anger management issues? She lives in New York, for heaven’s sake, the city that invented anger management issues.
Frankly, Aidan’s behavior is far more concerning than Wyatt’s, a flag so big and red that Carrie could make a stunning sheath dress out of it.
Which she appears to be doing, instead of, you know, acting like the grown-ass rich widow she is and calling Aidan out on his bull.
“And Just Like That…” purports to celebrate the mid-life do-over, just as it purports to show that women in their 50s are just as vibrant, complicated and fun as women in their 30s. Both are admirable goals, neither of which the series achieves. Even with its title — ”And Just Like That…” — this series seems determined to erase everything that might have made the older versions of these characters interesting and resonant.
Like the ability to buy a house or say the word “cancer” or get out of an unhealthy romantic relationship before it spits right in your eye.
Trump’s Defiance of TikTok Ban Prompted Immunity Promises to 10 Tech Companies
US attorney general Pam Bondi has told at least 10 tech companies, including Apple, Microsoft, Amazon, and Google, that they have “incurred no liability” for supporting TikTok despite the federal ban on providing services to the popular video-sharing app, according to letters disclosed on Thursday.
Under orders from President Donald Trump, Bondi has refused to enforce a law passed by Congress last year that classifies TikTok as a national security risk because of its ties to China and bars companies from distributing the app to US consumers.
TikTok can dodge the ban by reducing the ownership Chinese entities have in its US operations, and Trump has described those negotiations as ongoing. But constitutional experts have questioned the legality of executive orders by Trump that delay enforcement of the ban as those sales talks drag out.
Early this year, TikTok disappeared from the US app stores of Apple and Google after the ban went into effect. But despite the law still being on the books, TikTok returned to the stores after just a 26-day hiatus. Several media outlets reported at the time that Bondi had written to Apple and Google promising they would not face prosecution. But the letters had not been publicly disclosed until Thursday.
Silicon Valley software engineer Tony Tan had sought the letters under the Freedom of Information Act. The Department of Justice initially claimed it did not have records matching Tan’s request. He sued the department, which ended up releasing several letters to him on Thursday.
A Justice Department spokesperson did not immediately respond to a request for comment.
The disclosures show the first letters were dated January 30 and sent to four companies—Microsoft, Google, Apple, and content delivery network provider Fastly. “Google has committed no violation of the Act and Google has incurred no liability under the Act during the Covered Period,” then acting attorney general James McHenry wrote. “Google may continue to provide services to TikTok as contemplated by the Executive Order without violating the Act, and without incurring any legal liability.”
Bondi took over as attorney general in early February, and days later Google and Apple separately wrote to her, according to the released documents. In responses dated February 11, Bondi wrote that “the Department of Justice is also irrevocably relinquishing any claims the United States might have had against” the companies for violating the TikTok ban.
After Microsoft inquired, it also received on March 10 a letter “irrevocably relinquishing any claims.” Similar language was included in letters dated March 10 to Amazon, data center company Digital Realty, and cell phone service giant T-Mobile.
In early April, Trump extended the negotiating window for a TikTok sale and further delayed enforcement of the ban. That led to a round of 10 letters on April 5, including to content delivery provider Akamai, cloud vendor Oracle, and TV maker LG. Among those letters, only the ones to Apple and Google mentioned the “irrevocably relinquishing” vow. But three days later, Bondi sent a new version to Microsoft including the language.
Microsoft and the other nine companies didn’t immediately respond to requests for comment.
Tan, who obtained the letters, last month filed a lawsuit against Google parent company Alphabet accusing it of withholding information about its decision to continue distributing TikTok on its Play store. (Google previously declined to comment to WIRED on the suit.) He worries that the promises from Bondi are nonbinding and that Trump or a future president could end up prosecuting tech companies that are currently supporting TikTok. Google could face billions of dollars in fines if found in violation of the ban.
States Brace for Reversal of Obamacare Coverage Gains Under Trump’s Budget Bill
Shorter enrollment periods. More paperwork. Higher premiums. The sweeping tax and spending bill pushed by President Donald Trump includes provisions that would not only reshape people’s experience with the Affordable Care Act but, according to some policy analysts, also sharply undermine the gains in health insurance coverage associated with it.
The moves affect consumers and have particular resonance for the 19 states (plus Washington, D.C.) that run their own ACA exchanges.
Many of those states fear that the additional red tape — especially requirements that would end automatic reenrollment — would have an outsize impact on their policyholders. That’s because a greater percentage of people in those states use those rollovers versus shopping around each year, which is more commonly done by people in states that use the federal healthcare.gov marketplace.
“The federal marketplace always had a message of, ‘Come back in and shop,’ while the state-based markets, on average, have a message of, ‘Hey, here’s what you’re going to have next year, here’s what it will cost; if you like it, you don’t have to do anything,’” said Ellen Montz, who oversaw the federal ACA marketplace under the Biden administration as deputy administrator and director at the Center for Consumer Information and Insurance Oversight. She is now a managing director with the Manatt Health consulting group.
Millions — perhaps up to half of enrollees in some states — may lose or drop coverage as a result of that and other changes in the legislation combined with a new rule from the Trump administration and the likely expiration at year’s end of enhanced premium subsidies put in place during the covid-19 pandemic. Without an extension of those subsidies, which have been an important driver of Obamacare enrollment in recent years, premiums are expected to rise 75% on average next year. That’s starting to happen already, based on some early state rate requests for next year, which are hitting double digits.
“We estimate a minimum 30% enrollment loss, and, in the worst-case scenario, a 50% loss,” said Devon Trolley, executive director of Pennie, the ACA marketplace in Pennsylvania, which had 496,661 enrollees this year, a record.
Drops of that magnitude nationally, coupled with the expected loss of Medicaid coverage for millions more people under the legislation Trump calls the “One Big Beautiful Bill,” could undo inroads made in the nation’s uninsured rate, which dropped by about half from the time most of the ACA’s provisions went into effect in 2014, when it hovered around 14% to 15% of the population, to just over 8%, according to the most recent data.
Premiums would rise along with the uninsured rate, because older or sicker policyholders are more likely to try to jump enrollment hurdles, while those who rarely use coverage — and are thus less expensive — would not.
After a dramatic all-night session, House Republicans passed the bill, meeting the president’s July 4 deadline. Trump is expected to sign the measure on Independence Day. It would increase the federal deficit by trillions of dollars and cut spending on a variety of programs, including Medicaid and nutrition assistance, to partly offset the cost of extending tax cuts put in place during the first Trump administration.
The administration and its supporters say the GOP-backed changes to the ACA are needed to combat fraud. Democrats and ACA supporters see this effort as the latest in a long history of Republican efforts to weaken or repeal Obamacare. Among other things, the legislation would end several changes put in place by the Biden administration that were credited with making it easier to sign up, such as lengthening the annual open enrollment period and launching a special program for very low-income people that essentially allows them to sign up year-round.
In addition, automatic reenrollment, used by more than 10 million people for 2025 ACA coverage, would end in the 2028 sign-up season. Instead, consumers would have to update their information, starting in August each year, before the close of open enrollment, which would end Dec. 15, a month earlier than currently.
That’s a key change to combat rising enrollment fraud, said Brian Blase, president of the conservative Paragon Health Institute, because it gets at what he calls the Biden era’s “lax verification requirements.”
He blames automatic reenrollment, coupled with the availability of zero-premium plans for people with lower incomes that qualify them for large subsidies, for a sharp uptick in complaints from insurers, consumers, and brokers about fraudulent enrollments in 2023 and 2024. Those complaints centered on consumers’ being enrolled in an ACA plan, or switched from one to another, without authorization, often by commission-seeking brokers.
In testimony to Congress on June 25, Blase wrote that “this simple step will close a massive loophole and significantly reduce improper enrollment and spending.”
States that run their own marketplaces, however, saw few, if any, such problems, which were confined mainly to the 31 states using the federal healthcare.gov.
The state-run marketplaces credit their additional security measures and tighter control over broker access than healthcare.gov for the relative lack of problems.
“If you look at California and the other states that have expanded their Medicaid programs, you don’t see that kind of fraud problem,” said Jessica Altman, executive director of Covered California, the state’s Obamacare marketplace. “I don’t have a single case of a consumer calling Covered California saying, ‘I was enrolled without consent.’”
Such rollovers are common with other forms of health insurance, such as job-based coverage.
“By requiring everyone to come back in and provide additional information, and the fact that they can’t get a tax credit until they take this step, it is essentially making marketplace coverage the most difficult coverage to enroll in,” said Trolley at Pennie, 65% of whose policyholders were automatically reenrolled this year, according to KFF data. KFF is a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
Federal data shows about 22% of federal sign-ups in 2024 were automatic-reenrollments, versus 58% in state-based plans. Besides Pennsylvania, the states that saw such sign-ups for more than 60% of enrollees include California, New York, Georgia, New Jersey, and Virginia, according to KFF.
States do check income and other eligibility information for all enrollees — including those being automatically renewed, those signing up for the first time, and those enrolling outside the normal open enrollment period because they’ve experienced a loss of coverage or other life event or meet the rules for the low-income enrollment period.
“We have access to many data sources on the back end that we ping, to make sure nothing has changed. Most people sail through and are able to stay covered without taking any proactive step,” Altman said.
If flagged for mismatched data, applicants are asked for additional information. Under current law, “we have 90 days for them to have a tax credit while they submit paperwork,” Altman said.
That would change under the tax and spending plan before Congress, ending presumptive eligibility while a person submits the information.
A white paper written for Capital Policy Analytics, a Washington-based consultancy that specializes in economic analysis, concluded there appears to be little upside to the changes.
While “tighter verification can curb improper enrollments,” the additional paperwork, along with the expiration of higher premiums from the enhanced tax subsidies, “would push four to six million eligible people out of Marketplace plans, trading limited fraud savings for a surge in uninsurance,” wrote free market economists Ike Brannon and Anthony LoSasso.
“Insurers would be left with a smaller, sicker risk pool and heightened pricing uncertainty, making further premium increases and selective market exits [by insurers] likely,” they wrote.
Sony’s High-End Gaming Earbuds Hit New All-Time Low In Early Prime Day Amazon Sale
Out of the box, the Inzone Buds are compatible with PS5, Nintendo Switch, Steam Deck, Android, and iPhone 15/16 via the 2.4GHz dongle. Even though these are geared toward PC gamers, the Inzone Buds fully support the PS5’s audio features, including Tempest 3D Audio and Dolby Atmos.
Along with superb active noise cancellation and up to 12 hours of battery life (24 with the charging case), Inzone Buds benefit from using the same audio drivers as Sony’s popular WF-1000XM5 earbuds, which are discounted to $248 (was $300) at Amazon.
PC users can customize their audio experience with the Inzone Hub app. Those settings, including one of up to 256 sound profiles, can be synced to the earbuds and used on PS5 and other devices. Tap and touch shortcuts can be reprogrammed using the app, too.
Sony’s experience manufacturing high-end earbuds certainly helped when designing the Inzone Buds. They are comfortable to wear for hours of continuous use and inside the box you’ll find four sets of silicone eartips of varying sizes.
The biggest downside to the earbuds is that many users will need to use the included USB-C dongle on mobile, as its Bluetooth LE Audio connection isn’t supported by many devices. Some newer Android phones have Bluetooth LE, but Apple’s iPhones aren’t part of that small ecosystem. iOS users with an iPhone 15 or 16 can simply connect the USB-C dongle for playback, but if you have an iPhone with a Lightning port, you’ll need a Lightning to USB-C adapter that supports audio. (including iPhone). This $16 adapter works perfectly in our experience, but it obviously adds a dangling cord to your iPhone and introduces the risk of diminishing sound quality and increased latency–we never noticed this, but different adapters and phones may lead to different results.
If you want to read more about Sony’s gaming earbuds, check out our Sony Inzone Buds review.
AI spots deadly heart risk most doctors can’t see
A new AI model is much better than doctors at identifying patients likely to experience cardiac arrest.
The linchpin is the system’s ability to analyze long-underused heart imaging, alongside a full spectrum of medical records, to reveal previously hidden information about a patient’s heart health.
The federally-funded work, led by Johns Hopkins University researchers, could save many lives and also spare many people unnecessary medical interventions, including the implantation of unneeded defibrillators.
“Currently we have patients dying in the prime of their life because they aren’t protected and others who are putting up with defibrillators for the rest of their lives with no benefit,” said senior author Natalia Trayanova, a researcher focused on using artificial intelligence in cardiology. “We have the ability to predict with very high accuracy whether a patient is at very high risk for sudden cardiac death or not.”
The findings are published today in Nature Cardiovascular Research.
Hypertrophic cardiomyopathy is one of the most common inherited heart diseases, affecting one in every 200 to 500 individuals worldwide, and is a leading cause of sudden cardiac death in young people and athletes.
Many patients with hypertrophic cardiomyopathy will live normal lives, but a percentage are at significant increased risk for sudden cardiac death. It’s been nearly impossible for doctors to determine who those patients are.
Current clinical guidelines used by doctors across the United States and Europe to identify the patients most at risk for fatal heart attacks have about a 50% chance of identifying the right patients, “not much better than throwing dice,” Trayanova says.
The team’s model significantly outperformed clinical guidelines across all demographics.
Multimodal AI for ventricular Arrhythmia Risk Stratification (MAARS), predicts individual patients’ risk for sudden cardiac death by analyzing a variety of medical data and records, and, for the first time, exploring all the information contained in the contrast-enhanced MRI images of the patient’s heart.
People with hypertrophic cardiomyopathy develop fibrosis, or scarring, across their heart and it’s the scarring that elevates their risk of sudden cardiac death. While doctors haven’t been able to make sense of the raw MRI images, the AI model zeroed right in on the critical scarring patterns.
“People have not used deep learning on those images,” Trayanova said. “We are able to extract this hidden information in the images that is not usually accounted for.”
The team tested the model against real patients treated with the traditional clinical guidelines at Johns Hopkins Hospital and Sanger Heart & Vascular Institute in North Carolina.
Compared to the clinical guidelines that were accurate about half the time, the AI model was 89% accurate across all patients and, critically, 93% accurate for people 40 to 60 years old, the population among hypertrophic cardiomyopathy patients most at-risk for sudden cardiac death.
The AI model also can describe why patients are high risk so that doctors can tailor a medical plan to fit their specific needs.
“Our study demonstrates that the AI model significantly enhances our ability to predict those at highest risk compared to our current algorithms and thus has the power to transform clinical care,” says co-author Jonathan Crispin, a Johns Hopkins cardiologist.
In 2022, Trayanova’s team created a different multi-modal AI model that offered personalized survival assessment for patients with infarcts, predicting if and when someone would die of cardiac arrest.
The team plans to further test the new model on more patients and expand the new algorithm to use with other types of heart diseases, including cardiac sarcoidosis and arrhythmogenic right ventricular cardiomyopathy.
Authors include Changxin Lai, Minglang Yin, Eugene G. Kholmovski, Dan M. Popescu, Edem Binka, Stefan L. Zimmerman, Allison G. Hays, all of Johns Hopkins; Dai-Yin Luand M. Roselle Abrahamof the Hypertrophic Cardiomyopathy Center of Excellence at University of California San Francisco; and Erica Schererand Dermot M. Phelanof Atrium Health.
Junior Legal Operations Specialist at RemotePass
About RemotePass
RemotePass is a leading global platform transforming the way businesses access and manage top talent.
Recognized as one of G2’s Top 100 Fastest Growing Software Products, we’re on a mission to break down geographical barriers and create a world where exceptional talent can thrive anywhere.
About the Opportunity
As we rapidly expand, we’re on the lookout for a Junior Legal Operations Specialist with 2-3 years of experience.
If you’re a proactive lawyer who is excited to learn, build solid in-house experience, and contribute meaningfully to a fast-paced, global legal function – we want you on our team!
Roles and Responsibilities
- Contract Support: Draft, review, and edit standard agreements such as employment contracts, NDAs, vendor agreements and contract addenda.
- Employment Lifecycle Legal Support: Assist in onboarding, offboarding, and employee documentation across multiple jurisdictions, with a strong understanding of process compliance.
- Legal Research and Advisory: Conduct legal research across multiple regions, summarizing jurisdiction-specific employment laws and prepare legal briefs, country playbooks, and compliance summaries to support internal legal decisions and client advisory.
- Cross-Functional Collaboration: Collaborate with stakeholders across departments to provide legal support.
- Process Improvement & Documentation: Support the creation of legal templates, internal playbooks, and SOPs to enhance team efficiency.
Eligibility Criteria
- Qualifications & Experience
- Law Degree (LLB/JD) from a recognized university.
- Bar membership or qualification in any country.
- 2–3 years’ experience in an in-house legal department
- Exposure to employment law, commercial contracts, or global HR-related work
- Skills & Qualities
- Strong legal research, writing, and analytical skills.
- High attention to detail and a strong sense of ownership.
- Eagerness to learn and take initiative in a fast-paced environment.
- Good communication skills and a collaborative approach.
- Language Proficiency:
- Fluency in English is required.
- Proficiency in another language (e.g., French, Spanish, German, Arabic) is a plus.
How to Apply?
Interested candidates can apply through the link given below this post.
Click here to Apply.
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
Access Denied
You don’t have permission to access “http://www.hindustantimes.com/htcity/htcity-delhi-junction/ht-city-delhi-junction-catch-it-live-on-4-july-2025-101751555954745.html” on this server.
Reference #18.dec25068.1751566389.8ec9a799
https://errors.edgesuite.net/18.dec25068.1751566389.8ec9a799
Acadia CEO sets sights on ‘much more assertive’ deals to invigorate pipeline
Acadia Pharmaceuticals, the brain-focused drug developer, surprised some on Wall Street last week with a pair of predictions.
The first: the company’s two products, which brought in close to $1 billion in 2024, should eventually generate between $1.5 billion and $2 billion in combined yearly sales. The second: five experimental medicines in Acadia’s research pipeline could, if they come to market, collectively peak at $12 billion in annual sales.
The road to such commercial success will be long and fraught, as neuroscience is a famously difficult, setback-ridden area of development. But Catherine Owen Adams, the industry veteran who took over as Acadia’s CEO last fall, maintains the company is up to the challenge.
“I didn’t come into this job to putter along at a $3 billion market cap,” she said in an interview. “I believe this company can get to the next level of mid-cap. That’s how I’m leading this business to get there.”
To reach that goal, Owen Adams said a top priority for her team is further building out Acadia’s research, through a “much more assertive” business development strategy. That may include deals for drugs in the later stages of testing — the kind of assets that can serve as the “value inflection point” analysts have sought.
The hope, according to the chief executive, is Acadia’s pipeline will grow at least 25% to 30% from external innovation in the coming years, and that $12 billion figure bumps up to $15 billion or $20 billion as a result.
Owen Adams spoke to BioPharma Dive about why Acadia offered up such bold sales forecasts and where the company believes it can “play to win” in brain research.
The following conversation has been edited and condensed for clarity.
BIOPHARMA DIVE: Neuroscience is a wide area of research, and your pipeline reflects that. Acadia is going after two rare diseases, Alzheimer’s psychosis, depression, epilepsy. Why did the company decide to target those indications?
CATHERINE OWEN ADAMS: When I came to Acadia nine months ago, part of the attraction was the pipeline. A lot in there was super interesting. I spent the last six to seven months with [research and development head] Liz Thompson trying to understand what we’re trying to achieve. What’s our focus?
The brand we are developing is underserved neurological and rare diseases. Underserved is actually quite an important descriptor of those two areas, because we’re not going to move into Alzheimer’s degeneration. It’s just too big for us.
However, the areas around that, where there are maybe less players, less interest sometimes because it might be smaller populations, more niche populations — we believe we can play to win.
If you look at our pipeline, most of those fit. I would say [ACP-211] probably is on the bubble. Treatment-resistant depression is a fairly large space, but we argue it’s underserved, and we believe we have the opportunity to really make a difference there with something that has less monitoring.
Forecasting Acadia’s pipeline potential
| Drug | Stage | Indication | Peak sales potential |
|---|---|---|---|
| ACP-101 | Ph. 3 | Prader-Willi Syndrome | ~$1-2B |
| ACP-204 | Ph. 2 | Alzheimer’s psychosis, Lewy body dementia psychosis | >$2B |
| ACP-211 | Ph. 2 | Major depressive disorder | >$2B |
| ACP-271 | Ph. 1-ready | Huntington’s disease, tardive dyskinesia | ~$1-2B |
| ACP-711 | Ph. 2 | Essential tremor | >$2B |
SOURCE: Table and estimates from research by Mizuho Securities analyst Uy Ear.
How do you strike a balance between drugs seen as higher risk-reward, and those with maybe a more straightforward shot at getting through testing and onto the market?
OWEN ADAMS: The balance for us comes with the ability to drive precision medicine into neurological diseases. The risks inherent within neuropsych, particularly, are subjective endpoints, large studies, high placebo effects. We all know it’s hard. What we’re trying to build is a movement into that space that’s anchored in a bit more than just symptomatic endpoints.
If you look at how we’re running the Alzheimer’s disease psychosis trial and the Lewy body dementia psychosis trial, what we unveiled at our R&D Day was an additional level of rigor around using biomarkers within those patients to try and understand the science.
In each of those trials, while we have the more subjective endpoints of the various scales, we are also looking at augmenting that and making the populations more homogeneous using additional biomarkers.
How important is having promising biomarkers when deciding whether or not to pursue a disease or subset of research? Are biomarkers part of go, no-go decisions?
OWEN ADAMS: In some areas it’s go, no-go. In the areas that we’re in, the biomarker science is not necessarily concrete yet.
My belief, having spent 25, 30 years in pharma and more recently, in oncology, where biomarker [reliance] goes without saying, is that as a society we need to get more precise about where we use medicines, what patients we use them, how we use them. Biomarkers are our current way of doing that, and we need to advance that within neuropsych. It’s been sort of a backwater, in terms of advancing the science as fast as other areas. It’s harder.
My vision for Acadia becoming a biotech powerhouse in this space is built on precision medicine and data innovation. I’m really looking to push the company to advance the science, as well as, obviously, build a clinical trial we believe is the right one.
If we look globally at countries where we want to have our medicines available, I think having biomarker-led patient population identification is going to help, particularly in single-payer systems. We have seen an unwillingness to pay [when] you just use a medicine on everybody and see what happens.
Analysts claim that, during turbulent markets, companies will double down in areas they feel most experienced. You have two products: Nuplazid for Parkinson’s disease psychosis and Daybue for Rett syndrome. How much have those two products influenced your pipeline decisions?
OWEN ADAMS: I think [they do], but it’s not necessarily based on the last six months of market volatility.
With most pharma companies, you see a tendency to understand an area, have a lot of learning and then build the next product to be better. You can see many examples. In the case of Rett syndrome, Daybue has GI side effects, and we are looking to improve upon that. We look at ‘2591 with the hope that maybe we can evolve the side effect profile and still have the same efficacy.
Similarly, Nuplazid is a great drug. But there are areas where it could do better. We were limited because it had a QT signal, so we’ve designed ACP- 204 to eliminate the QT signal and to act faster. Those things, for me, make sense, because you’re really derisking, even though the analysts haven’t given us much credit.
If you look at essential tremor with ACP-711, which we just licensed in from Saniona in December, it’s a very different space; high unmet need, a bit of a graveyard. We think we found some really interesting science.
‘211 is in major depressive disorder, another very different space. But I was at Janssen when we launched Spravato, so I know the space and understand what it takes.
I don’t want us to be so focused that we miss opportunities. It’s about balancing where we know and then new areas where we think we can learn.
What were the biggest lessons you learned from the Spravato story?
Spravato became a blockbuster product over seven years. It was not a blockbuster product out the door. The efficacy was always really strong, but the infrastructure that the U.S. healthcare system had in place when we launched Spravato was very underdeveloped.
Catherine Owen Adams
Permission granted by Acadia Pharmaceuticals
J&J had to spend a lot of time developing that infrastructure and support systems to allow doctors to be able to use it for the right patients. Every six months to a year, we’d learn more, and they’d put different things in place to ensure it continued to evolve. It was a huge investment to get Spravato to where it is now.
We are now the beneficiaries of a much more defined system where doctors get paid for monitoring. When we launched Spravato, there wasn’t even a code that doctors could use to get paid. There’s always a downside to being the first, but it was a long, long road. Longer than they thought anyway.
What are Acadia’s BD priorities right now?
OWEN ADAMS: We’ve defined our focus: underserved neurological and rare diseases. That’s where we want to play to win. Within that space, we’re fairly open about the science we want. Science that is hopefully first in class or best in class. Everybody says that, but I mean it. I don’t want to be the second, third or fourth to market, unless we’ve got something we believe is truly differentiating, which I think is where ‘211 fits.
Acadia is not afraid to make scientific risk decisions, regulatory risk decisions. Where I won’t make a risk decision is financially. We are in a very strong financial position, and I believe for the future of our company, we need to hold true to minimizing financial risk.
With that in mind, I’d also like to look at some slightly later-stage products. We’ve got a lot of earlier-stage products. I would love to see us focusing a bit more on Phase 2 — Phase 3 if it’s possible — but Phase 2-stage products, where we can get something to market in the 2030 timeframe.
The upside of this market being a little bit difficult is that there are quite a few earlier-stage companies who maybe are more financially fragile than they were six months ago. So there’s opportunity to go in and make a deal.
You gave two big sales predictions during the R&D day. One was on Nuplazid and Daybue. Why did you release that figure?
OWEN ADAMS: I’ve come up through the commercial line, and I believe analysts need to understand where I think we can get to. I’m strongly commercial, and I don’t put numbers out there that I don’t believe we can achieve. Those numbers are based on strong, objective data that I stand behind, and I think the analyst community are underestimating and have been overly cautious about both Daybue and Nuplazid.
One of the big things in the last two months is that we got clarity on our patent for Nuplazid, now out to 2038, so that gives us a lot more runway. Nuplazid will, at some point — if the Inflation Reduction Act exists as it does today, which is a big caveat — run into a pricing situation with the IRA, as every other drug will. But Daybue has the potential to continue to grow and to go global. I think people are underestimating … our ability to stabilize the current patient population.
I’d rather have a conversation about: are we going to hit $1.5 billion to $2 billion or not, than say I’m not willing to go there. As a CEO with a commercial background, I should be willing to go there. I can’t hide behind, “Well, I don’t feel comfortable.” Okay, then, why am I here?
There was also that $12 billion peak annual sales forecast you put on the pipeline programs. What’s the biggest challenge you see getting to that number?
OWEN ADAMS: Without wanting to be flippant, the biggest hurdle is the clinical outcome of the trials. The trial designs that we’re looking at; the thinking that’s gone into them; the additional biomarkers; the additional steps we’re putting in place … I think we’re really focused on getting the best Phase 3 trial designs we can.
Then, it becomes: can you commercialize with that outcome? Again, I stand behind the numbers. I don’t think they’re unreasonable. I’ve not pushed the team. I understand how all parts of a forecast are built.
The biggest headwind, ultimately, will be the clinical data and the access environment that exists when we launch. Those two are outside of our control. We can design the clinical trials, we can prepare for the access environment, but that will make a difference.
Property investment company: reduce CGT by 28%!
Typically, accountants tend to advise against using a private company structure to hold geared property investments.
However, investors shouldn’t automatically dismiss this approach, as it can provide substantial capital gains tax (CGT) savings.
Commonly cited disadvantages of a company ownership structure
There are two main disadvantages of using a company structure for property investment:
- No immediate benefit from negative gearing: Companies cannot distribute losses directly to shareholders. Unless the company earns other income to offset rental losses, these losses remain trapped within the company, carrying forward to future years. This means investors may lose the immediate tax benefits associated with negative gearing.
- No access to the 50% CGT discount: The 50% CGT discount is only available to trusts and individuals who hold an asset for more than 12 months. For individuals at the highest marginal tax rate (47%), this discount effectively caps CGT at 23.5% of the net gain. Conversely, a company pays a flat tax rate of up to 30% on capital gains. This could result in paying at least 6.5% more in tax compared to individual or trust ownership. The tax disadvantage could worsen if profits are distributed fully as dividends in a single year, resulting in substantial additional personal tax liabilities.
Although these disadvantages are valid, some investors may successfully manage or entirely mitigate them through strategic planning.
Negative gearing: Structure for PAYG employees
Negative gearing allows you to reduce tax by offsetting rental property losses against other income, such as salary or wages.
This tax benefit makes property investing more affordable because it lowers your annual cash outlay.
In simple terms, reducing your holding costs improves your overall investment returns.
To maximise your investment returns (internal rate of return), you must aim to maximise the benefits from negative gearing.
Typically, this means borrowing personally so that interest expenses can directly offset your salary or wage income.
If you are a PAYG individual looking to hold property within a company but still maximise negative gearing, there’s an alternative approach.
Instead of the company borrowing directly to buy property, you can personally borrow funds to purchase shares in your new company.
PAYG: Here’s an example
Here’s a simplified example for a PAYG employee:
- You establish a new company, which issues you 1 million shares at $1 each, totalling $1 million.
- You borrow $1 million from the bank personally to buy these shares.
- Your new company now holds $1 million cash raised from issuing shares and uses that money to purchase an investment property.
- Because you personally borrowed the money to buy the shares, you can claim the interest on that loan as a personal tax deduction, effectively achieving negative gearing in your name.
These 4 steps could occur simultaneously so that the bank could use the Company’s new property as security for the loan.
The rental income earned by the company can either be distributed to shareholders as dividends or retained inside the company for reinvestment or debt reduction.
PAYG: What happens when the company sells the property?
When your company eventually sells the property, it pays tax on any capital gain at the flat corporate tax rate of up to 30%.
Importantly, profits can remain within the company and be distributed gradually over time to minimise your personal tax liability – more on this below.
The company can then return capital to the shareholder, so they are able to repay their loan.
For example, the company can reduce the face value of each share from $1 down to $0.01 (or lower), effectively returning 99% of the initial capital to shareholders.
Shareholders can then use this returned capital to repay their personal loans, typically without incurring any CGT liability.
PAYG: Other potential advantages and considerations
A potential advantage of holding property in a company structure is flexibility regarding ownership.
You can change the ownership of the property by transferring or selling shares in the company, typically without incurring stamp duty.
However, it is important to note that a share transfer/sale will trigger CGT.
Careful planning is required to avoid the “land rich” provisions, which generally apply if the company owns land valued above $1 million.
If the company is deemed “land rich,” transferring shares will likely trigger stamp duty.
If you have surplus cash savings or other income-generating assets, another option is to contribute these directly to your property investment company.
The company could then use this income to offset rental losses internally.
In this scenario, the borrowing could remain within the company rather than personally in your name.
Negative gearing: Structure for self-employed taxpayers
Borrowing to invest in property via a company structure can be simpler for self-employed investors, provided their business income arrangements are correctly structured.
If so, you should be able to direct business profits to a dedicated property investment company to offset rental losses internally.
In this scenario, the company itself borrows funds directly to acquire the investment property.
Ideally, the shareholder of your property investment company should be a family trust.
This provides maximum flexibility when distributing future income and capital gains and delivers asset protection benefits.
However, the main drawback of this structure is that negative gearing benefits are restricted to the company’s own tax rate, either 25% or 30%, depending on your specific business income arrangements.
This is significantly less attractive than negatively gearing at the highest individual marginal tax rate of 47%, thereby potentially reducing the overall tax savings available.
Massive CGT saving: Spread the gain over 16+ years
The key advantage of using a company for property investment is that shareholders receive a credit (franking credit) for any tax the company pays.
So, even though the company initially pays tax at up to 30% on any capital gain, this tax is not lost, the shareholders claim it back when dividends are paid.
Let’s use an example to illustrate this: Suppose a company makes a $1.5 million net capital gain from selling an investment property.
Initially, the company pays a tax of up to $450,000 (30%).
However, rather than distributing this gain in one lump sum to shareholders, you could spread dividend payments over multiple years to manage individual tax rates effectively.
For instance, assuming the company distributes grossed-up annual taxable dividends (i.e., a dividend of $31,500 plus franking credit of $13,500) of $45,000 each to two spouse shareholders, effectively drip-feeding the capital gain to the individuals.
Because shareholders receive franking credits equal to the 30% company tax already paid, and since their personal tax rate on income up to $45,000 per annum is only 18%, each shareholder would receive an annual tax refund of approximately $8,500.
At this pace, the full $1.5 million capital gain can be fully distributed within roughly 16 years.
Over this period, the total CGT paid after franking credit refunds is around $164,000.
However, because the tax was initially prepaid by the company, and shareholders receive refunds gradually, the present value of all tax paid is around $213,000.
That equates to an effective tax rate of approximately 14% and a saving of approximately $82,000 amount 28%), compared to owning the property in personal names.
In theory, you could further optimise this by spreading dividend payments over an even longer period, say, 37 years, to keep each shareholder’s annual taxable income below $20,000 (nil tax).
At this level, the shareholders could reclaim all the company-paid tax through refunds.
After accounting for the time value of money, this scenario would result in an effective tax rate of approximately 10%, which represents your best-case tax outcome – and is around half the rate of tax that you would pay in personal names.
No land tax surcharge
Unlike family trusts, private companies typically do not attract surcharge rates of land tax.
This means a private company will usually pay land tax at the same rate as an individual owner.
Victoria and NSW have “grouping provisions” that combine land holdings across related companies and tax them as one taxpayer.
However, some states have more limited or no grouping rules, making it possible to reduce your land tax by holding properties in separate companies.
But be cautious about structuring your investments solely to minimise one specific tax, as tax laws regularly change, and what’s advantageous today might become disadvantageous in the future.
Downsides to a property investment company
Every ownership structure has advantages and disadvantages.
Some common drawbacks of owning property through a private company can include:
- Initial and ongoing costs: It costs approximately $2,000 to set up a private company. Ongoing annual expenses include preparing financial statements, lodging company tax returns, and submitting annual statements to ASIC (which attracts an additional fee). In total, annual costs for a basic investment company typically range between $2,000 and $2,500 per year.
- Borrowing limitations and complexity: If you borrow personally to purchase shares in the property investment company and need to use the company’s property as security for that loan, the company must provide a guarantee. Having a company involved in your loan structure reduces the number of lenders and loan products available. Typically, lenders will not allow offset accounts linked directly to these loans. Although the number of suitable lenders is smaller compared to standard residential loans, it’s unlikely you will need to pay higher interest rates or fees if you have a great mortgage broker.
- Potentially more CGT: A major potential downside arises if you need to sell the property and want immediate access to the sale proceeds personally. In this case, the company must distribute the full capital gain to shareholders as a dividend in a single tax year (or create a Div. 7A loan). This could result in a tax liability of up to 47% on the capital gain if shareholders are on the highest marginal rate. Therefore, if your investment strategy includes selling a property to reduce debt, for example, a company may not be the optimal ownership structure.
This is not an exhaustive list.
Depending on your circumstances, there may be additional risks or complexities associated with owning property via a private company structure.
It’s rarely all or nothing…
Diversification is a valuable goal when structuring your wealth because every ownership structure has its own set of advantages and drawbacks.
If you plan to own multiple investment properties, it’s worth considering holding at least one property within a company structure to take advantage of the advantages discussed in this blog.
Jawline Fillers And Masculinity—Redefining Attraction In Modern Relationships
Many men want to look more attractive and feel confident in their appearance. Sometimes, workouts and healthy habits do not give the sharp jawline they hope for. Issues like wrinkles or receding hairlines can also make a person seem older than they feel inside.
A fast-growing trend is changing how people think about male grooming and masculine features. More men now choose dermal fillers such as Juvederm products for facial rejuvenation instead of facelifts or other cosmetic surgery. In this article, we talk about how jawline fillers boost self-confidence and support modern beauty standards. You will learn about the procedure, risks, recovery time, and what to look for in skilled plastic surgeons or aesthetic professionals.
- More men are choosing jawline fillers, with requests rising sharply from 2010 to 2023. Social media platforms like Instagram and TikTok boost this trend by setting new standards for masculine beauty
- Jawline fillers offer a non-surgical way to achieve a stronger, more defined facial structure. They provide quick results with minimal downtime compared to facelifts or surgery
- Many men report higher self-confidence after getting jawline fillers. This improvement often leads to better social interactions and stronger relationships
- Choosing an experienced and qualified practitioner is crucial for safety and natural-looking results. Experts use personalized plans based on each person’s facial structure
- Jawline fillers reflect changing ideas about masculinity in modern relationships. Men use these enhancements to express confidence and align their appearance with today’s standards of attraction
The Rise of Jawline Fillers Among Men
More men are choosing jawline fillers to enhance their appearance. Social media fuels this trend by showcasing new beauty standards that emphasize strong jawlines and defined features.
Related Reading: Powerful Intense Attraction Signs
Growing demand for non-surgical enhancements
Men now choose non-surgical cosmetic procedures like filler injections and Botox more than ever before. From 2010 to 2023, the number of men requesting jawline fillers and other facial injectable fillers saw a sharp increase. Many find these options appealing because they offer quick results with minimal downtime.
Social media has set new beauty standards for masculine looks, making strong jawlines even more popular. Aesthetic plastic surgeons use Juvederm products or dermal fillers to shape faces without surgery or scars.
These trends push men who want a defined physique to buy Juvederm products as part of their skincare routines, boosting self-assurance without needing liposuction or lengthy recovery times.
Influence of social media and modern standards
Photos on Instagram and TikTok often showcase sharp, chiseled jawlines as a sign of beauty. Celebrities and influencers highlight their results from juvéderm or intense pulsed light treatments.
This creates new trends for men who want stronger facial features without plastic surgery. Viewers see before-and-after images daily, increasing demand for non-surgical options that improve masculine traits.
Modern standards now favor more defined looks with balanced faces. Trends in haircuts, skincare, and even products like sunscreen help shape these ideals further. Increased attention to personal grooming sets the stage for procedures aimed at achieving a stronger jawline and a masculine look; this leads right into how jawline fillers can boost self-confidence and support modern masculinity.
Related Reading: Techniques Of Stealth Attraction To Use NOW
How Jawline Fillers Enhance Masculinity
Jawline fillers can create a stronger and more defined jawline. This enhancement often leads to a balanced, symmetrical face that many associate with traditional masculinity.
Creating a stronger, more defined jawline
Dermal fillers help men achieve a sharper and more structured lower face by enhancing the chin and jawbone area. Skilled injectors often use cannulas, which are thin tubes, to place filler safely with minimal discomfort or bruising.
A strong, defined jawline can make facial features appear more balanced and masculine. Most men notice results right after treatment, adding an edge to their appearance without surgery.
Achieving a balanced and symmetrical face
Jawline fillers shape the face by enhancing its symmetry. A well-defined jawline creates balance, which many find attractive. Men often seek these fillers to achieve a more masculine look. They fill in areas that may appear weak or feminine, resulting in a stronger facial structure.
A balanced face boosts self-esteem and impacts social interactions. People with symmetrical features frequently receive positive attention from others. This can lead to increased confidence and improved relationships. Making choices about enhancements like jawline fillers involves considering personal goals for attractiveness and masculinity.
Related Reading: Powerful Signs Of Male Attraction You Need to Know
Psychological Benefits of Jawline Fillers
Jawline fillers can significantly boost a man’s self-confidence. This confidence often leads to better interactions in social settings and deeper connections in relationships.
Boosted self-confidence
Jawline fillers can significantly boost self-confidence in men. Many feel more attractive and empowered after the procedure. A defined jawline often aligns with traditional views of masculinity, leading to a positive impact on self-image.
Individuals report feeling bolder in social situations and relationships after enhancing their features. Increased confidence can enhance decision-making skills as well, making it easier to interact with others.
Men often find that improved self-esteem translates into better connections with partners and friends. This newfound assurance encourages them to express themselves freely without fear of judgment.
The influence of these changes extends far beyond appearances, shaping personal interactions for the better. Understanding the procedure’s details prepares individuals for what comes next: learning about the injection process and its minimal downtime.
Positive impact on relationships and social interactions
The increased confidence often leads to improved interactions with others. Men feel more attractive and secure, which helps them connect more easily in social settings. They tend to engage confidently during conversations and build stronger bonds with friends or potential partners.
Friends notice these changes too. Enhanced facial features can lead to positive feedback from peers, reinforcing feelings of attractiveness. As men experience validation, they may pursue new relationships or deepen existing ones. The support and admiration they receive enhance their overall social life, creating a cycle of confidence built on successful interactions.
The Procedure Explained
The process starts with a consultation. The practitioner will assess your face and discuss your goals. Then, they will customize the treatment plan just for you. During the injection process, you may feel slight discomfort, but it is quick and straightforward. Most patients experience minimal downtime afterward.
Consultation and personalization
Consultation plays a key role in the treatment process. Patients meet with their practitioners to discuss goals and expectations. During this meeting, they explore facial structure and potential enhancements.
A practitioner will assess individual needs and recommend appropriate techniques. Personalization helps create results that look natural. Each jawline is unique; therefore, practitioners customize every procedure accordingly.
Injectors often use hyaluronidase to tailor the results further if needed. This enzyme can dissolve fillers if adjustments are necessary after the initial application. By focusing on both consultation and personalization, patients receive treatments that align closely with their desired outcomes.
Next comes an explanation of the injection process and what kind of downtime to expect after receiving jawline fillers.
Injection process and minimal downtime
During the injection process, a skilled practitioner applies a numbing agent to minimize discomfort. The injections themselves take only about 15 to 30 minutes. Patients typically see immediate results in their jawline definition.
Feelings of swelling or tenderness may occur but usually fade within a few days. Downtime is minimal. Most people return to their daily activities right away. Some might choose to avoid strenuous exercise or heavy lifting for a short time, allowing the area to heal properly.
This quick recovery appeals to many men looking for enhancements without significant interruptions in their lives. Choosing an experienced medical director plays a crucial role in achieving natural-looking results and minimizing complications during treatment.
Final Thoughts
Jawline fillers can reshape how men view their attractiveness. These enhancements create a stronger jawline and boost confidence. Many guys find that looking good helps them feel better in social situations. In modern relationships, this shift shows how perceptions of masculinity are changing. Embracing these options allows men to redefine themselves and connect better with others.
Why Am I So Sexually Attracted To Someone?
Signs Of Male Body Language Attraction
Signs Of Magnetic Attraction Between Two People
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
I Love Spotify Discover Weekly, but Wish It Would Make These Changes
The Discover Weekly playlist is one of my favorite Spotify features—but I can’t pretend it’s always spot on. Old music tastes locked into the algorithm can easily upset the week, and that’s without getting into the absolute curveball oddities sometimes served up.
So, while I love Spotify Discover Weekly, these are the changes I’d like to see to make it even better.
5
Some User Input—Just a Little
Part of the wonder of Spotify’s Discover Weekly is that it pulls from your listening taste profile to create a unique playlist packed with new music.
For me, it means a weekly dose of new music that often hits the spot, and I’ll typically add a few tracks to my existing go-to playlists, and maybe favorite one or two. However, there are some weeks when the option to steer the Discover Weekly playlist in a certain direction would be welcome.
Now, in fairness, Spotify is experimenting with this at the time of writing. Spotify’s June 2025 Discover Weekly update introduced the idea of tweaking your playlist.
You’ll also now see a list of five genres above the songs, allowing you to tweak the playlist more to your liking. Essentially, this means you now have six distinct Discover Weekly playlists to explore each week. Which will be (literal) music to the ears of fans of the feature.
It’s a good start. But I’d like to push that one step further and have the option to add mood filters to this, too, like “chill,” “euphoric,” “studying,” and so on. And how about an era toggle for those weeks where you want to hear something new from, say, the 70s that you’ve never heard before?
Another interesting way Spotify could implement this is with a selection of randomized options relating to your algorithm. Instead of a set list of six core genres, it adds six randomized options that throw up something new. Or, how about a weight slider that pushes your algorithm to artists with fewer than a certain number of monthly listeners or similar.
As said, Spotify is experimenting with this feature already, which I’m really happy to see.
4
Why Is This Track on My Discover Weekly?
One feature that I’d like to see is how Spotify decides what music it’s serving up to you each week.
The Spotify Discover Weekly algorithm, like much of Spotify’s other algorithmically-generated playlists, is a black box. It’s great when your Discover Weekly playlist appears, but it would be wonderful to know why some of the tracks were chosen.
Discover Weekly uses a range of different signals to populate your playlist: implicit behavior, playlist graphs and groupings, global listening history and links, collaborative filtering, and so on.
However, it would be great if you could hover over a track and see a little information on why it was selected—the strongest signal that pushed it onto your list.
3
Easier Options to Remove Genres From the Taste Profile
Your Spotify Taste Profile is what guides your Discover Weekly playlist. It’s an evolving set of data that Spotify uses to serve up new music to you, taking in every decision you make to better refine it choices.
How well the Taste Profile works depends on your listening preferences. Spend a week listening to dubstep, and your Discover Weekly is likely to assume you’re keen to hear more. But we’ve all been there: that brief stint listening to obscure Brazilian hip-hop was fun, but it was just a phase.
So, having the option to remove specific genres from your Taste Profile would be great.
It’s very much worth pointing out that this functionality exists in Spotify. The Exclude from your taste profile button is available on most Spotify playlists. Before you begin playing the niche flavor of the week, select this option, and Spotify will ignore it. It works—but you have to remember to do this for each playlist you switch to. And, I don’t know about you, but I definitely don’t always consider that I don’t want this in my Taste Profile.
The option to remove certain genres, songs, and styles from your Discover Weekly would be another welcome addition.
2
Show My Past Discover Weekly Playlists
Your Spotify Discover Weekly is a one-off playlist, generated each week. If you want to keep a particular week, you have to create a new playlist with all of the songs on it. It’s not a taxing process; creating a Spotify playlist is easily done.
But it would be fantastic if there were an option to return to old Discover Weekly playlists. You could see the songs that you liked earlier in the month or year, building a small personal archive of your unique Discover Weekly playlists.
1
Let Me Rate It
You can run down your Spotify Discover Weekly playlist and add them to your Liked Songs list. But the option to give the whole of the Discover Weekly playlist a proper rating would be a handy way to provide specific feedback to Spotify on what it served up that week.
The introduction of a weekly rating would help to guide Spotify and improve your playlists each week.
I’d be slightly concerned that Spotify would interpret this as a message to focus on specific genres repeatedly, but it’s another way for listeners to signal their approval (or not).
Circus show draws visitors to ocean-themed resort in Wuhan
‘All the Sharks’ review: The friendliest competitive shark show
It’s been 50 years since “Jaws” ruined that summer, spawning a fleet of increasingly dreadful sequels and knockoffs, turning a simple fish into a movie monster, and a dozen since “Sharknado” turned the monster into a joke. Sharks had been swimming in the culture before that, to be sure, often with the prefix “man-eating” appended, though men eat sharks too, and way more often — so who’s the real apex predator? And even though they are not as naturally cute as our cousins the dolphins and whales — I have never heard of one balancing a ball on its nose — they have also been made adorable as plush toys and cartoon characters.
“All the Sharks,” premiering Friday on Netflix, is a competition show in which four teams of two vie to photograph the most, and the most different, species of sharks, across two eight-hour days, and are set loose in the waters off Japan, the Maldives, South Africa, Australia, the Bahamas and the Galapagos Islands. And, brother, are there a lot of varieties — hammerhead shark, walking shark, whale shark, tawny nurse shark, pajama shark, pelagic thresher, tiger shark, tasselled wobbegong shark, puffadder shy shark, baby shark, mommy shark and daddy shark, to name but a few. (There are 124 species of sharks in Japanese waters, we’re told, and 200 off South Africa.) Points are awarded according to the rarity or abundance of the species in each location. These sharks are neither monsters nor jokes, though at least one contestant finds the banded houndshark “freaking adorable … their little cat eyes, their subterminal mouth.”
As competitions go, it is friendly, like “The Great British Baking Show” or “MasterChef Junior.” There’s no way to sabotage your opponents, no strategy past guessing where the sharks might be running, eating or hanging out. The purse — $50,000 — goes to the winners’ chosen marine charity, though prizes are also awarded to the top-scoring team in each episode. (Cool gear, seaside vacations.) Winning is not so much the point as just staying in as long as possible — because it’s fun. Sometimes things don’t go a team’s way, but no one has a bad attitude.
“All the Sharks” is hosted by Tom “The Blowfish” Hird, far left. The competitors are Randy Thomas, Rosie Moore, Aliah Banchik, MJ Algarra, Dan Abbott, Sarah Roberts, Brendan Talwar and Chris Malinowski.
(Netflix)
Naturally they are good-looking, because this is television, and fit, because you need to be to do this; most have professional expertise in fishy, watery or wild things. (They certainly know their sharks.) Brendan (marine biologist) and Chris (fisheries ecologist) are a team called the Shark Docs. Aliah (marine biologist specializing in stingrays — which are closely related to sharks, did you know?) and MJ, identified as an avid spearfisher and shark diver, comprise Gills Gone Wild; they met at a “bikini beach cleanup” and have been besties ever since. British Bait Off are Sarah (environmental journalist) and Dan (underwater cameraman), who like a cup of tea. And finally, there are the Land Sharks, Randy and Rosie. Dreadlocked Randy, a wildlife biologist, says, “I was always one of the only Black guys in my classes … I got that all the time: ‘Oh, you’re doing that white boy stuff’ and it’s just like, ‘No, I’m doing stuff that I love.’” Rosie, an ecologist who specializes in apex predators, wants to show girls it’s “OK to be badass … work with these crazy animals, get down and dirty.” She can hold her breath for five minutes.
The show has been produced with the usual tics of the genre: comments presented in the present tense that could only have been taped later; dramatic music and editing; the “hey ho uh-oh” narrative framing of big, loud host Tom “The Blowfish” Hird, with his braided pirate’s beard, whose website identifies him as a “heavy metal marine biologist.” Footage of great white sharks — the variety “Jaws” made famous — is inserted for the thrill factor, but none are coming.
But whatever massaging has been applied, “All the Sharks” is real enough. The contestants deal with rough seas, strong currents, jellyfish and sundry venomous creatures, intruding fishermen, limited air, sinus crises, variable visibility and unexpected orcas. And the sharks — who do not seem particularly interested in the humans, as there is no lack of familiar lunch options — do sometimes arrive in great, unsettling profusion. (There’s a reason “shark-infested waters” became a phrase.) Meanwhile, the ocean itself plays its ungovernable part. In their enveloping blueness, dotted with colorful fish and coral reefs, the undersea scenes are, in fact, quite meditative. (Humans move slow down there.) Someone describes it as like being inside a screen saver.
In the bargain, we learn not a little bit about shark behavior and biology, and there is an implicit, sometimes explicit, conservation theme. Each encountered species gets a graphic describing not only its length, weight and lifespan but the degree to which it is or isn’t endangered — and, sad to say, many are.
Despite Protests, Elon Musk Secures Air Permit for xAI
A local health department in Memphis has granted Elon Musk’s xAI data center an air permit to continue operating the gas turbines that power the company’s Grok chatbot. The permit comes amid widespread community opposition and a looming lawsuit alleging the company violated the Clean Air Act.
The Shelby County Health Department released an air permit for the xAI project Wednesday, after receiving hundreds of public comments. The news was first reported by the Daily Memphian.
In June, the Memphis Chamber of Commerce announced that xAI had chosen a site in Memphis to build its new supercomputer. The company’s website boasts that it was able to build the supercomputer, Colossus, in just 122 days. That speed was due in part to the mobile gas turbines the company quickly began installing at the campus, the site of a former manufacturing facility.
Colossus allowed xAI to quickly catch up to rivals OpenAI, Google, and Anthropic in building cutting-edge artificial intelligence. It was built using 100,000 Nvidia H100 GPUs, making it likely the world’s largest supercomputer.
xAI’s Memphis campus is located in a predominantly Black community known as Boxtown which has been historically burdened with industrial projects that cause pollution. Gas turbines like the ones xAI is using in Memphis can be a significant source of harmful emissions, like nitrogen oxides, which create smog. Memphis already has some of the highest child asthma rates in Tennessee. Since xAI began running its turbines, residents have repeatedly met and rallied against the project.
“I am horrified but not surprised,” says KeShaun Pearson, the leader of Memphis Community Against Pollution. “The flagrant violation of the Clean Air Act and the disregard for our human right to clean air, by xAI’s burning of illegal methane turbines, has been stamped as permissible by the Shelby County Health Department. Over 1,000 people submitted public comments demanding protection and got passed over for a billionaire’s ambitious experiment.”
Under the Clean Air Act, “major” sources of emissions—like a cluster of gas turbines—need a permit, known as a Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) permit. However, Shelby County Health Department officials told local reporters in August that this wasn’t necessary for xAI since its turbines weren’t designed to be permanent. Amid mounting local opposition, xAI finally applied for a permit with the Shelby County Health Department in January, months after it first began running the turbines.
Last month, the NAACP and the Southern Environmental Law Center (SELC) announced that they intended to sue xAI for allegedly violating the Clean Air Act.
“The decision to give xAI an air permit for its polluting gas turbines flies in the face of the hundreds of Memphians who spoke out against the company’s permit request,” said SELC senior attorney Amanda Garcia in a press release. “Instead of confronting long-standing air pollution problems in South Memphis, the Shelby County Health Department is turning a blind eye to obvious Clean Air Act violations in order to allow another polluter to set up shop in this already-overburdened community without appropriate protections.”
North Korean Hackers Use NimDoor macOS Malware to Target Web3, Crypto Platforms
North Korean hackers are using a special type of malware known as NimDoor to target macOS computers used at Web3 and crypto firms, according to details shared by a cybersecurity research firm. The threat actors are reportedly using bash scripts to collect and transfer sensitive information, such as browser data, iCloud Keychain credentials, and Telegram user data. The attacks rely on social engineering (via a chat platform) and malicious scripts or updates, like others linked to the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK).
NimDoor Maintains Access After Malware Termination or System Reboot
Analysis of the NimDoor malware by Sentinel Labs shows that DPRK-linked threat actors are relying on a combination of malicious binaries and scripts that are written in three languages: C++, Nim, and AppleScript. These Nim-compiled binaries are reportedly being used to target Mac computers used in crypto and Web3 firms.
Victims are contacted via messaging apps like Telegram, and the hackers use social engineering to convince a person to join a call using a scheduling service like Calendly. In order to infect the victim’s system, the threat actor sends an email with a malicious “Zoom SDK update” script that installs the malware silently, while allowing it to communicate with a command and control (C2) server.
Once the malware is installed on the target’s Mac computer, the hackers execute bash (terminal) scripts to access and exfiltrate data from browsers like Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge, Arc, Brave, and Firefox. It can also steal iCloud Keychain credentials and Telegram user data from the target’s device.
The cybersecurity research firm also noted that the NimDoor malware feature a “signal-based persistence mechanism” (using SIGINT/SIGTERM handlers) to reinstall itself and continue operating on a target device, even if the malicious process it terminated, or the system is rebooted.
You can read more about the NimDoor malware used to target Web3 and crypto firms on Sentinel Labs’ website, which includes detailed explanations of how the North Korean hackers used novel techniques to gain persistent access to victims’ computers.
The firm also warns that threat actors are increasingly using less popular programming languages to target victims. This is because as they are less familiar to analysts and offer some technical benefits over more widely used languages, while making it difficult to detect and block using existing security measures. .
For the latest tech news and reviews, follow Gadgets 360 on X, Facebook, WhatsApp, Threads and Google News. For the latest videos on gadgets and tech, subscribe to our YouTube channel. If you want to know everything about top influencers, follow our in-house Who’sThat360 on Instagram and YouTube.
Honor Watch 5 Ultra Launched With eSIM Support, ECG Tracking, Up to 15 Days Battery Life
To Cut Medicaid, the GOP’s Following a Path Often Used To Expand Health Care
President Donald Trump’s “One Big Beautiful” budget reconciliation bill would make some of the most sweeping changes in health policy in years, largely affecting Medicaid and Affordable Care Act plans — with reverberations felt throughout the health care system.
With only a few exceptions, the budget reconciliation process — which allows the political party in control to pass a bill with only 51 votes in the Senate, rather than the usual 60 — is how nearly every major piece of health legislation has passed Congress since the 1980s.
But using reconciliation to constrict rather than expand health coverage, as the GOP is attempting now? That is unusual.
One of the best-known programs born via reconciliation is the “COBRA” health insurance continuation, which allows people who leave jobs with employer-provided insurance to keep it for a time, as long as they pay the full premium.
That is one of dozens of health provisions tucked into COBRA, or the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985. Also included was the Emergency Medical Treatment and Active Labor Act, which requires hospitals that take Medicare to treat or transfer patients with medical emergencies, regardless of their insurance status — a law that’s become a focus of abortion opponents as they seek to limit access to the procedure.
A key reason so much health policy has passed this way has to do with how Congress manages the federal budget. Federal government spending falls into two categories: mandatory, or spending required by existing law, and discretionary, which traditionally is allocated and renewed each year as part of the appropriations process.
Lawmakers use the reconciliation process to make changes to mandatory spending programs — Medicare and Medicaid are among the largest — as well as tax policy. (For complicated political reasons, reconciliation bills cannot touch Social Security, the last prong in the entitlement program trifecta.)
Reconciliation comes into play only if it is needed to reconcile taxes or mandatory spending to comply with the terms Congress sets for itself each year, through the annual budget resolution. This year the GOP’s focus is finding the cash to renew Trump’s expiring tax cuts, which largely benefit wealthier Americans, and boost military and border security spending.
In years when Congress orders a reconciliation bill, health policy almost always plays a major part. Usually, reconciliation instructions call for reductions in payments to health providers under Medicare — which costs the most of the federal health programs.
For much of the 1980s and 1990s, Democrats in Congress quietly used reconciliation to expand eligibility for the Medicaid program, often by cutting more than the budget called for from Medicare. For every $5 cut from Medicare, about $1 would be redirected to provide Medicaid to more low-income people.
But budget reconciliation has also become a convenient way to make policy changes to the nation’s major health programs, as it is usually considered a “must-pass” bill likely to be signed by the president and not subject to filibuster in the Senate.
As a result, all manner of now-familiar health programs were created by budget reconciliation bills, many of which provided health coverage to more Americans.
The 1989 reconciliation bill created a new system for paying doctors who treat Medicare patients, as well as a new federal agency to study the cost, quality, and effectiveness of health care, today known as the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality.
Children’s health has been a popular add-on over the years, including the gradual expansion of Medicaid coverage to more children based on family income. The 1993 reconciliation bill created the Vaccines for Children program, which ensures the availability and affordability of vaccines nationwide for uninsured and underinsured kids. The 1997 reconciliation bill created the Children’s Health Insurance Program, which today provides insurance to more than 7 million children.
In fact, the list of major health bills of the past 50 years not passed using budget reconciliation is short. For instance, the 2003 Medicare Modernization Act, which added a prescription drug benefit to the program for the first time, attracted just enough bipartisan support to pass on its own.
The biggest health care law of recent decades — the Affordable Care Act — didn’t start out as a reconciliation bill, but it ended up using the process to clear its final hurdles.
After initial passage of the bill in December 2009, a special election cost Democrats their 60th seat in the Senate — and with it, the supermajority they needed to pass the bill without Republican votes. In the end, the two chambers used a separate reconciliation measure, the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010, to negotiate a compromise that included the ACA.
HealthBent, a regular feature of KFF Health News, offers insight into and analysis of policies and politics from KFF Health News chief Washington correspondent Julie Rovner, who has covered health care for more than 30 years.
8BitDo’s Official Wuchang-Themed Ultimate 2 Controller Looks Awesome
The Wuchang: Fallen Feathers Edition of 8BitDo’s flagship Ultimate 2 Wireless Controller looks pretty awesome. It’s important to note that the Ultimate 2 is a 2.4GHz wireless controller for PC. It also has Android support via Bluetooth. PS5 and Xbox Series X users will not be able to use this controller to play the game–unless you play it via remote play on your PC or Android device.
The Ultimate 2 launched earlier this year with an MSRP of $60, so this special-edition model only costs five bucks more than one of the standard variants.
We’ve tested the Ultimate 2 and the Ultimate 2 Bluetooth–which has Switch 2 and Switch support–and it’s better than many controllers that cost two or three times its price.
The Ultimate 2 has TMR electromagnetic analog sticks–smoother and more reliable than Hall Effect sensors–two remappable back buttons, two extra remappable bumpers, trigger locks, and RGB lighting rings.
It also has 6-axis motion controls, rumble, and a turbo button. With 8BitDo’s Ultimate Software V2, you can create three custom profiles to cycle through on the fly, adjust stick and trigger sensitivity, create dead zones, and more.
The Ultimate 2 comes with a matching charging dock. In this case, the character art continues from the controller to the dock, making it a pretty cool display piece.
This isn’t the first official collaboration with a big new release. Last year, 8BitDo collaborated with Game Science on a Black Myth: Wukong Ultimate 2C Controller. The 2C is 8BitDo’s budget PC controller, so this new collaboration is more exciting. That said, 8BitDo’s Wukong-themed controller is still worth checking out, especially since you get the wireless model for $30 and the wired edition for $18 right now.
Key Features
- PC and Mac: 2.4GHz Wireless (USB-C dongle)
- Android: Bluetooth
- TMR electromagnetic analog sticks
- Hall Effect triggers with adjustable stop point
- 2 remappable back triggers
- 2 extra remappable shoulder buttons
- Tactile bumpers
- RGB lighting rings
- 1,000Hz polling rate for 2.4GHz and wired
- 6-axis motion controls
- Rumble
- Turbo button
- 1,000mAh battery
- Includes matching USB-C charging dock
Customize with 8BitDo Ultimate Software V2
- Remap inputs
- Set up three custom profiles
- Set up dead zones
- Adjust motion control sensitivity
- Adjust stick sensitivity
- Adjust trigger sensitivity
- Adjust rumble intensity
- Adjust lighting effects
The fatal mutation that lets cancer outsmart the human immune system
New research from UC Davis Comprehensive Cancer Center has uncovered an evolutionary change that may explain why certain immune cells in humans are less effective at fighting solid tumors compared to non-human primates. This insight could lead to more powerful cancer treatments.
The study was published in Nature Communications. It revealed a tiny genetic difference in an immune protein called Fas Ligand (FasL) between humans and non-human primates. This genetic mutation makes the FasL protein vulnerable to being disabled by plasmin, a tumor-associated enzyme. This vulnerability seems unique to humans and is not found in non-human primates, such as chimpanzees.
“The evolutionary mutation in FasL may have contributed to the larger brain size in humans,” said Jogender Tushir-Singh, senior author for the study and an associate professor in the Department of Medical Microbiology and Immunology. “But in the context of cancer, it was an unfavorable tradeoff because the mutation gives certain tumors a way to disarm parts of our immune system.”
Tumor environment neutralizes key immune protein
FasL is an immune cell membrane protein that triggers a programmed cell death called apoptosis. Activated immune cells, including CAR-T cells made from a patient’s immune system, use apoptosis to kill cancer cells.
The UC Davis team discovered that in human genes, a single evolutionary amino acid change — serine instead of proline at position 153 — makes FasL more susceptible to being cut and inactivated by plasmin.
Plasmin is a protease enzyme that is often elevated in aggressive solid tumors like triple negative breast cancer, colon cancer and ovarian cancer.
This means that even when human immune cells are activated and ready to attack the tumor cells, one of their key death weapons — FasL — can be neutralized by the tumor environment, reducing the effectiveness of immunotherapies.
The findings may help explain why CAR-T and T-cell-based therapies can be effective in blood cancers but often fall short in solid tumors. Blood cancers often do not rely on plasmin to metastasize, whereas tumors like ovarian cancer rely heavily on plasmin to spread the cancer.
Plasmin inhibitors may enhance immunotherapy
Significantly, the study also showed that blocking plasmin or shielding FasL from cleavage can restore its cancer-killing power. That finding may open new doors for improving cancer immunotherapy.
By combining current treatments with plasmin inhibitors or specially designed antibodies that protect FasL, scientists may be able to boost immune responses in patients with solid tumors.
“Humans have a significantly higher rate of cancer than chimpanzees and other primates. There is a lot that we do not know and can still learn from primates and apply to improve human cancer immunotherapies,” said Tushir-Singh. “Regardless, this is a major step toward personalizing and enhancing immunotherapy for the plasmin-positive cancers that have been difficult to treat.”
The Tamil Nadu Dr. Ambedkar Law University, Chennai
This Law School Review has been shared anonymously.
Name
Anonymous
Full name of your college
The Tamil Nadu Dr. Ambedkar Law University, School of Excellence in Law, Chennai, Tamil Nadu
Full address of the college
Perungudi Campus, M.G.R. Salai, Near Taramani [ MRTS ] Railway Station, Perungudi, Chennai – 600 113.
Tell us about the infrastructure of your law college
The classrooms are air-conditioned, and each one is equipped with a projector, as well as both black and white boards. The library is fully digitized, with no manual processes or procedures.
It features a digital room with monitors specifically for BCA students, and a separate monitor room for students from other departments. However, a few systems are outdated, and the internet connection tends to fail occasionally. Overall, I would rate it 3.5 out of 5.
How are the academic culture and faculty in your college?
There are a total of 76 regular teaching staff members, along with 12 faculty members working on a contractual basis. One Physical Education Director is responsible for overseeing the university’s physical education program.
There are no major quality concerns regarding the faculty. However, due to time constraints, some faculty members occasionally struggle to complete the syllabus.
To address this, special classes are usually arranged for first-year students to help them catch up with the syllabus and adapt to the new area of study—especially since law can be challenging for those new to the subject.
The attendance system is extremely strict, with virtually no scope for proxy attendance. The rate of proxy attendance is close to 0%. This is because faculty members take attendance by visually identifying each student, and students do not have access to their attendance records. To illustrate this, I once witnessed a faculty member reject a student’s attempt to have attendance marked through an office assistant (OA) on another floor.
The university operates in two shifts. The morning shift runs from 10:00 AM to 1:30 PM, while the evening shift runs from 2:00 PM to 5:30 PM. Each class period lasts between 45 to 50 minutes.
Overall, I would rate the current system 4 out of 5.
How’s the peer quality in your college?
The university admits students strictly on the basis of merit. Most of the students are academically strong, and the institution is regarded as one of the most reputed law schools in the state of Tamil Nadu. Admission is highly competitive, and no one can gain entry through influence or connections, as the entire admission process is fully transparent.
The peer quality is commendable—I would rate it 4 out of 5. The university has also produced some of the finest mooters and Model United Nations (MUN) delegates across the state.
Tell us about the co-curricular and extra-curricular activities
The university hosts several student-led committees, among which the most prominent is the Moot Court Society. It operates through its dedicated MCA website, offering mentorship programs and a unique “team finder” feature to help baby mooters connect with potential teammates. It is one of the most well-structured and organized societies at SOEL.
The MUN Society is also highly active, with over 2,500 followers on Instagram and a track record of consistently hosting six successful editions. Another notable initiative is the Indian Society for Universal Dialogue, a student-led platform inspired by the prestigious Oxford Union Society, which is renowned for fostering meaningful discourse and celebrating two centuries of advocating free speech and intellectual exchange.
The university also has a vibrant cultural committee known as the Excellence Cultural Association. Lexcellence, a student-run journal, operates under the guidance of experienced and distinguished faculty members, encouraging legal scholarship among students.
In addition, NCC, NSS, and YRC units are active on campus, regularly organizing camps and community engagement activities. Notably, one NCC cadet from the university has gone on to become a JAG officer, and several others have represented Tamil Nadu in the Republic Day Parade.
An active Legal Aid Clinic also functions on campus, with practicing advocates visiting twice a week to provide legal assistance. The clinic has adopted a village where it offers continuous support to underprivileged families.
Beyond societies, the university frequently conducts workshops and special lectures, almost on a daily basis, catering to students from various departments and academic years.
Overall, I would rate the university’s co-curricular and extracurricular ecosystem 4 out of 5.
How are the placements in your college?
The university has a dedicated Internship and Placement Cell that actively guides students regarding job opportunities and vacancies. Almost every year, some senior students have the prestigious opportunity to intern under the Chief Justice of India. Additionally, pre-final and final-year students regularly secure internships at top-tier law firms such as Shardul Amarchand Mangaldas, Fox Mandal, Khaitan & Co., among others.
Many students opt for a career in litigation, while others successfully pursue Company Secretary (CS) qualifications. Some graduates have gone on to become judges, civil servants, JAG officers, and professors, with several choosing to pursue their master’s degrees as well.
Overall, I would rate the university’s internship and placement support at 4.5 out of 5.
How are the hostels in your college?
The girls’ hostel is located close to the university, while the boys’ hostel is situated near the railway station. Due to this close proximity, there are no major concerns regarding daily travel. While there have been no complaints about the quality of food in the hostels, some issues have been reported with the laundry services.
The curfew time is generally set at 6:00 PM, although it can be adjusted based on the student’s academic schedule and requirements.
Overall, I would rate the hostel facilities 3.5 out of 5.
What are the best things you like about your college?
- The campus library is my favorite place. I enjoy reading the wide variety of books, especially those in the general category.
- The academic schedule is another highlight. Since the college operates for only half a day, it provides ample opportunity to pursue internships throughout the year without interference. This structure has significantly contributed to my professional growth.
- The faculty members are generally very amiable and approachable. I often engage in discussions about my research papers—especially those I present at conferences—with faculty who possess strong subject knowledge and specialization.
- The Moot Court in-charge faculty have always been supportive and encouraging. They consistently guide both experienced mooters and baby mooters who are just stepping into the world of mooting.
- The university canteen is decent and well-maintained. It offers a comfortable space for students to relax and unwind during recess.
- The entire campus is disabled-friendly. Students with special needs can access most areas of the university independently, without requiring external assistance.
- The university has offered enriching student exchange opportunities. I had the privilege of participating in two such programs—one at Gujarat National Law University (GNLU) and another at Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.
- The university has signed MOUs with several international institutions and has also hosted academic conferences in collaboration with some of them.
In your opinion, what are bad things about your college?
Indeed, every college has its limitations, and SOEL is no exception to this general rule. Students are often burdened with a large number of assignments, some of which are hand-written, and at times, research is not adequately integrated into these tasks.
The university does not consistently prioritize sports and physical activities, which is an area that could use more attention. At one point, we also faced issues with limited access to certain legal research tools due to a lack of subscriptions, although this has now been resolved.
Additionally, the overall student strength is quite high, which sometimes makes it challenging for the administration to effectively manage and cater to individual student needs.
Anything else you want to share?
Personally, I have had several experiences where people express genuine admiration for our university. Many advocates openly prefer SOEL students over those from other institutions. This isn’t just my personal belief—it was also shared with me by a student from another reputed deemed university.
I have always felt proud to speak about my university. Over the years, it has played a significant role in shaping who I am today. My communication skills have improved considerably, and I now speak with greater confidence and clarity.
However, I did witness a troubling incident where one of my close friends experienced ragging by her own classmates. She lodged a complaint with the Anti-Ragging Committee, and the university took swift and appropriate action. In fact, some students have even been suspended for engaging in such behavior.
That said, the overall culture of ragging at SOEL is very minimal. In most cases, seniors are supportive and go out of their way to guide and mentor juniors.
How would you rate your college overall on a scale of 10?
8/10
Are you interested in sharing your Law School Review with the community? Click here to submit your Law School Review today on Lawctopus.
Disclaimer: Law School Experiences are opinions shared by individual law students and tend to be personal and subjective in nature. The law school experiences shared on Lawctopus are NOT Lawctopus’ official views on the law school. We also do not edit law school experiences (except to ensure readability) to ensure that the author’s voice remains intact.
No time for long vacation? Here’s how to plan your next 3 day micro-retreat | Travel
When the world nowadays feels like a race against time itself, juggling work responsibilities, personal commitments, and family, accommodating a long vacation feels more like a luxury than anything. With limited bandwidth and burnout on our heels, plans are postponed, daydreaming with a sigh over the ‘someday.’ This is why micro-retreats are becoming more relevant than ever; a brief respite without sweating over extended leaves, disturbed routines and big logistics.
ALSO READ: Goa for monsoon trip: 8 hidden places to visit during the rainy season
In an interview with HT Lifestyle, Mohit Patel, Co-founder and CEO at Raga Svara, a family-run boutique luxury retreat dedicated to holistic learning and healing, shared how micro-retreat is the new way to hit pause and take a bite-sized vacation.
Explaining how the roots of micro-breaks are wellness-centric, he traced them back to their origins. He said, “India, with its rich legacy of Ayurveda and Yoga, naturally aligns with the ethos of micro-retreats. Traditionally, such wellness experiences were rooted in long durations. However, the modern consumer’s reality calls for a different approach. Instead of multi-week stays, many are now finding more sustainable renewal through shorter, focused experiences.”
Most importantly, convenience sets micro-retreat apart. Along with this, it is also beneficial for health, bringing much-deserved calm and a break from routine. Mohit added, “Micro-retreats may be more effective for some. By disrupting chronic patterns, like poor eating habits or irregular sleep, even a 72-hour break can reset routines and shift perspectives. And because they’re short, people are more likely to integrate what they’ve learned once back home. For younger generations accustomed to rapid experience or working parents juggling multiple responsibilities, micro-retreats strike the ideal balance between rejuvenation and practicality.”
5 reasons micro-retreats are rising
The shift towards micro-retreats is a reflection of the contemporary world’s need for time-efficient vacations. Mohit said,“This shift represents a deeper understanding of how transformation works. It’s not always about duration, but about the quality of attention and intention. Micro-retreats work with real life, not against it.”
Mohit Patel shared a comprehensive guide with us, explaining the fundamentals of micro-retreats, from reasons behind the rise, micro-retreat types, to how to plan one:
1. Time poverty is real:
- Today’s professionals face packed schedules, family responsibilities, and an always-on digital world. Carving out even a full week for wellness often feels impossible.
- Micro-retreats meet people where they are, offering a breather without requiring a complete exit from life.
2. Ease of planning:
- Unlike traditional week-long retreats that demand complex coordination, like work leaves, childcare, and travel, 3-day retreats are easier to schedule.
- A weekend escape is more manageable for young professionals, working parents, and anyone navigating a full calendar.
3. Quick, intentional impact:
- Micro-retreats challenge the assumption that longer automatically means better.
- Shorter, focused getaways allow participants to experience rapid mental and physical resets, cleaner eating, deeper sleep, reduced stress, all without the fatigue of extended disengagement.
4. Better reintegration:
- One of the underrated advantages of a micro-retreat is how smoothly it allows for reentry into daily life.
- While long breaks often cause a jarring return to reality, the shorter span of a micro-retreat supports a gentler transition.
5. Wellness on your terms:
- Micro-retreats let people curate their wellness journey over the year.
- For instance: digital detox in spring, a fitness retreat in summer, and a mindfulness-focused one in fall, addressing evolving needs without overcommitting.
What do micro-retreats look like?
1. Digital detox retreats:
- Unplug from devices, social media, and screens.
- These retreats focus on reconnecting with self and nature by removing digital noise.
2. Wellness and yoga retreats:
- Short getaways featuring guided yoga, meditation, and mindful eating.
- Ideal for those seeking physical reset and mental clarity.
3. Solo travel retreats:
- They are made for introspection and independence.
- Solo micro-retreats offer solitude, self-discovery, and personalised pace.
4. Creative escapes
- Focused on writing, painting, photography, or crafts.
- These retreats offer a break from routine to recharge creatively.
5. Adventure micro-retreats
- Packed with hikes, cycling, or water sports.
- Ideal for thrill-seekers wanting both adrenaline and a mental refresh.
How to plan a micro-retreat?
1. Before you go:
- Pick your purpose: Know whether you want to relax, detox, create, or be active. It helps narrow your options.
- Choose closer destinations: Save time and avoid exhaustion by picking places that are just a short flight away, ideally within 2 to 5 hours. It lets you start relaxing sooner and makes short getaways more worthwhile.
- Be Flexible: Off-season or weekday bookings offer better rates and quieter experiences.
2. Packing and prep:
- Pack light and smart: Carry only essentials suited to the retreat’s theme (yoga mat, journal, etc).
- Digital boundaries: Leave the laptop. Silence or switch off your phone if going for a detox.
3. Making an itinerary for a micro-retreat
- Don’t overstuff: Leave room for rest. Micro-retreats work best when unhurried.
- Plan ahead for a stress-free escape: Pre-book key activities, whether it’s spa sessions, guided nature walks, or wellness consultations, to avoid last-minute hassle and ensure a seamless experience. Opt for all-inclusive retreats that bundle everything together, from meals to activities, easing the planning stress and allowing you to truly unwind.
- Return buffer: Try to come back by Sunday noon, which gives you time to settle before the workweek.
Organon drug for endometriosis falls short in mid-stage study
Dive Brief:
- Organon’s experimental treatment for endometriosis failed to improve pelvic pain for women in a Phase 2 study, leading the company to give up on the drug.
- The trial tested three oral doses of OG-6219 in women between the ages of 18 and 49 who have moderate-to-severe pain related to endometriosis. Researchers had hoped the medicine would show an improvement for patients on an 11-point scale of pelvic pain compared with placebo after three months of twice-daily treatments.
- Organon’s head of research called the results disappointing in a statement Wednesday, but said endometriosis remains among the company’s targets in women’s health. Executives had been especially excited about OG-6219 because it was a non-hormonal treatment with a new mechanism of action.
Dive Insight:
The study failure marks another setback in women’s health, which has traditionally been underfunded and less understood than men’s. As many as one in 10 women suffer from endometriosis, but available treatments are often underwhelming for patients. Two of the more recently approved medicines can only be taken for a maximum of two years because they may decrease bone density.
Organon, which focuses on women’s health, had high hopes for OG-6219. The company’s head of research, Juan Camilo Arjona Ferreira, called the drug “perhaps the biggest potential opportunity we have” in a conference call with analysts in February. “Currently available treatments only address pain, have limited efficacy, a limited duration of use, or have significant side effects,” he said.
Chief Executive Kevin Ali called the drug a “multibillion dollar opportunity” during the J.P. Morgan Healthcare Conference in January. The company had hoped to kick off Phase 3 research in 2026 and launch the medicine around 2029.
Organon acquired the drug in its purchase of Forendo Pharma in 2021.
Smart Strategy or Just a Trend? With Stuart Wemyss
We’ve all heard the phrase “rent money is dead money,” right? But is it really?
As property prices surge and affordability challenges mount—especially for younger Australians—a growing number of people are turning to an alternative path: rentvesting. That’s where you rent the home you live in and invest in a property elsewhere.
Is this just a clever workaround, or is it a genuinely smart wealth-building strategy?
In today’s episode I’m joined once again by Stuart Wemyss to explore this in depth.
And even if you’re not particularly interested in rentvesting, I’m sure many of the investment principles Stuart and I will be discussing today will be of benefit to everyone interested in property.
Takeaways
- Rent-vesting allows flexibility in property investment.
- Owning a home can provide long-term financial security.
- Demographic shifts are changing home ownership trends.
- Tax implications play a significant role in property decisions.
- Rent-vesting may not suit everyone financially.
- Understanding personal goals is crucial in property investment.
- Long-term strategies are essential for financial success.
- Common mistakes in rent-vesting can derail financial goals.
- The importance of a holistic financial strategy.
- Buying a property is a long-term commitment.
Links and Resources:
Answer this week’s trivia question here- www.PropertyTrivia.com.au
- Win a hard copy of How to Grow a Multi-Million Dollar Property Portfolio – in your spare time.
- Everyone wins a copy of a fully updated property report – What’s ahead for property for 2025 and beyond
Stuart Wemyss – Prosolution Private Clients
Stuart’s Book – Rules of the Lending Game & Investopoly
Get the team at Metropole to help build your personal Strategic Property Plan Click here and have a chat with us
Get a bundle of free reports and eBooks – www.PodcastBonus.com.au
Also, please subscribe to my other podcast Demographics Decoded with Simon Kuestenmacher – just look for Demographics Decoded wherever you are listening to this podcast and subscribe so each week we can unveil the trends shaping your future.
Subscribe & don’t miss a single episode of Michael Yardney’s podcast
Hear Michael & a select panel of guest experts discuss property investment, success & money related
topics. Subscribe now, whether you’re on an Apple or Android handset.
Need help listening to Michael Yardney’s podcast from your phone or tablet?
We have created easy to follow instructions for you whether you’re on iPhone / iPad or an Android
device.
Prefer to subscribe via email?
Join Michael Yardney’s inner circle of daily subscribers and get into the head of Australia’s best
property investment advisor and a wide team of leading property researchers and commentators.
Windows 11 Is Barely Usable Until I Add These Essential Mods
Windows 11 may look pretty, but Microsoft’s design choices often frustrate rather than make your life easier. These free mods address those shortcomings, turning a barely functional system into a productive powerhouse.
8
Fences
A cluttered desktop can slow you down and make your computer feel overwhelming to use. While organizing files into folders is a good start, there’s an even better solution that can improve desktop management.
Fences is a desktop organization tool that creates shaded, labeled containers on your desktop where you can group related files, folders, and shortcuts. I have a Current Projects fence for active work files, a Tools fence for frequently used apps, and a Downloads fence that automatically captures new downloads.
I love that double-clicking anywhere on the desktop instantly hides all icons—perfect for screen recordings or presentations. The roll-up feature is also a nice touch. Hover over a fence title, and it collapses to give you more desktop space without losing organization. For anyone juggling multiple projects or dealing with desktop clutter, Fences turns your messy desktop into a clean, functional workspace.
While Fences offers a 30-day free trial, it’s a premium app that costs $29.99 for a lifetime license, $9.99 per year for a single device, or $19.99 per year for up to five devices.
Download: Fences ($9.99/year, free trial available)
7
Start11
Start11 turns Windows 11’s pretty-but-sluggish Start menu into something that actually works—and works your way. Click Start and it opens instantly, with no half-second delays to break your flow. Searches feel just as fast: type any filename and it appears right away, instead of getting buried under Bing results and web clutter.
But Start11 doesn’t stop at fixing the Start menu: it brings back the taskbar customization that Microsoft removed. I keep my taskbar on the left side of my ultrawide monitor with ungrouped buttons, so I can see exactly which files and apps are open. I’ve also pinned project folders directly to the Start menu for instant access to my current work without opening File Explorer.
If you prefer the old look, you can switch back to a Windows 7- or 10-style Start menu. For me, the upgraded Windows 11 style with Start11’s performance boost strikes the best balance between modern design and real productivity.
Start11 comes from Stardock, the same team behind Fences. Like the company’s desktop organizer, it offers a 30-day trial before you’ll need a license: $7.49 per year for one device or $11.24 per year for up to five.
Download: Start11 ($7.49/year, free trial available)
6
Windhawk
Windhawk is a free, open-source tool that works like an app store for Windows modifications. With one-click installation, these mods fix Windows 11’s minor annoyances while adding quality-of-life improvements.
Some of my favorite Windhawk mods include the classic taskbar labels (so I can see which Word documents are open), middle-click to close on the taskbar, and the ability to disable the Windows 11 context menu completely in favor of the classic one. The browser tab scrolling mod is another clever trick—hover over Chrome or Edge on the taskbar and scroll through tabs with your mouse wheel.
For non-technical folks, it’s the safest way to add power-user features. Just browse the mod library, install on what you want, and enjoy a more functional Windows. Each mod clearly explains what it changes, includes user reviews and ratings, and can be toggled off instantly if you don’t like the result.
Download: Windhawk (Free)
5
WinToys
Windows has hundreds of settings scattered across the Control Panel, Settings app, and registry/Group Policy. WinToys consolidates them into one clean interface. Instead of going through endless menus trying to find that one privacy toggle, you can change all the essential settings from a centralized dashboard.
While the Home tab shows your system specs and real-time usage stats at a glance, the Apps tab lists all installed programs with sizes and dates, making bloatware easy to spot. In the Services tab, you can view what’s running in the background without having to open the Task Manager.
The Performance tab lets you manage settings to improve system performance. It offers simple toggles to turn on the Ultimate performance power plan to squeeze maximum performance by allowing the PC to draw necessary power, reduce graphics task latency with hardware-accelerated GPU scheduling, change game settings, and disable startup apps.
In the Health tab, you have tools to check disk health and fix corrupted files. Moving to the Tweaks tab, you’ll find privacy improvements like disabling telemetry and removing Windows ads. You can also configure what appears on your desktop, clean up the Start menu, and restore the classic context menu in File Explorer, among other nifty customizations.
Download: WinToys (Free)
4
PowerToys
Microsoft’s own PowerToys feels like an apology for Windows 11’s missing features. While PowerToys includes a hidden suite of productivity tools, a few stand out as the most important for Windows 11 specifically.
Among the standout utilities, Awake prevents your system from entering sleep mode during critical tasks like large file downloads or lengthy video exports. FancyZones takes window management to the next level with custom screen layouts where you can define specific zones for different applications and snap windows into place with a simple drag motion.
One of my favorites is the Peek utility (Ctrl+Space), which offers instant file previews for images and documents without opening them first. Always on Top complements this by letting you pin any window above all other applications, preventing important windows from disappearing behind whatever you’re actively using.
Download: PowerToys (Free)
3
Ditto
Windows 11 has a clipboard history feature that lets you access up to 25 of your most recent copied items (using Win + V), but it’s pretty limited. I’ve switched to Ditto instead, which remembers everything (text, images, and files) with no arbitrary limits. It even keeps your clipboard history after system restarts.
Hit Ctrl + Accent (`) (a customizable shortcut) to see your entire clipboard history. Search for that SQL query from yesterday, find that customer email from this morning, or grab that hex color code from last week. Ditto saves everything with full text search, and you can sync your clipboard across multiple computers.
Download: Ditto (Free)
2
Rainmeter
Rainmeter transforms your desktop from a static wallpaper into an information dashboard. Yes, it can get complicated, but starting with pre-made skins makes it accessible to everyone.
I use a minimal setup: system stats in the corner (CPU, RAM, and disk usage), a better clock with calendar, and weather that actually updates. The Spotify integration shows what’s playing with controls right on the desktop.
For beginners, grab a skin like Mond or Enigma and customize from there. Advanced users can create anything—I’ve seen everything from desktops that look like Iron Man’s interface to minimalist productivity dashboards.
If Rainmeter feels too complex, there are other excellent desktop customization tools worth exploring. The community shares thousands of skins, so you don’t need to code anything yourself.
Download: Rainmeter (Free)
1
Monitorian
Monitorian allows you to control the brightness of your external monitors with hotkeys or the mouse. No more reaching behind the monitor hunting for tiny buttons.
The free version handles most needs perfectly: you get brightness control, large sliders for easy adjustment, and automatic start with Windows. The app shows your adjusted brightness percentage and maintains the order of your monitor arrangement.
For power users, there’s a premium subscription that adds customizable hotkeys, command-line options, brightness sync across monitors, and control for more than four displays. But the free version does everything most people need.
Download: Monitorian (Free, subscription available)
Each tool on this list tackles a specific Windows 11 frustration—whether it’s Start11’s instant search that actually finds your files, or Ditto’s unlimited clipboard history that remembers everything you copy. Most are completely free, and the paid ones offer generous trials, so you can test them thoroughly before deciding to buy.
Red-bellied paradise flycatcher soars like a phoenix
For #MeToo advocates, Diddy verdict is ‘a huge setback’ as powerful men prep comebacks
When Lauren Hersh, the national director of the anti-sex trafficking activist group World Without Exploitation, heard Wednesday that Sean “Diddy” Combs was convicted only on the two least serious charges against him, she felt grief for his former partner Casandra Ventura and his other accusers.
“I think this is a travesty,” Hersh said. “It shows there is culturally a deep misunderstanding of what sex trafficking is and the complexity of coercion. So often in these cases, there’s an intertwining of horrific violence and affection.”
Hersh, the former chief of the sex trafficking unit at the Kings County district attorney’s office in Brooklyn, said that Combs’ verdict — guilty on two charges of transportation to engage in prostitution but acquitted on one for racketeering and two for sex trafficking — is a mixed message about Combs’ conduct. But it will likely be felt as a step backward for the movement to hold powerful men to account for alleged sex crimes.
In a cultural moment when other music stars like Marilyn Manson and Chris Brown have mounted successful comebacks after high-profile abuse investigations and lawsuits, Hersh worries the Diddy verdict may deter prosecutors from pursuing similar cases against powerful men and chill the MeToo movement’s ability to seek justice for abuse victims.
“It’s a huge setback, especially in this moment when the powerful have continuously operated with impunity,” Hersh said. “It sends a signal to victims that despite the MeToo movement, we’re still not there in believing victims and understanding the context of exploitation. But I’m hoping it’s a teachable moment to connect the dots with what trafficking is and understanding the complexity of coercion.”
The charges against Combs were not a referendum on whether he had abused Ventura or the myriad other women and men involved in his “freak-off” parties, where group sex and drug use intertwined into an allegedly decadent and violent culture around Combs.
Combs’ defense team freely admitted that his relationship with Ventura was violent, as seen in an infamous 2016 videotape of Combs beating Ventura in an elevator lobby at the InterContinental hotel in Los Angeles. Marc Agnifilo, one of Combs’ lawyers, said in closing arguments that Combs has a drug problem but described his relationship with Ventura as a “modern love story” in which the hip-hop mogul “owns the domestic violence” that plagued it.
“The defendant embraced the fact that he was a habitual drug user who regularly engaged in domestic abuse,” federal prosecutors wrote in a hearing about Combs’ possible bail terms.
The jury decided that Combs’ conduct, however reprehensible, did not amount beyond a reasonable doubt to a criminal racketeering organization or sex trafficking. Yet the case’s impact on movements within music and other industries to hold abusers to account is uncertain.
Many civil suits against the music mogul are still moving through court and could affect his depleted finances. Combs’ reputation has been thoroughly tainted by the lurid details of the trial and strong condemnations from his many accusers.
Still, for victim advocates, the verdict was a bitter disappointment.
Reactions within the music world were swift and despairing. “This makes me physically ill,” said Aubrey O’Day of Danity Kane, the band Diddy assembled on his popular reality TV show “Making the Band,” on social media. “Cassie probably feels so horrible. Ugh, I’m gonna vomit.”
“Cassie, I believe you. I love you. Your strength is a beacon for every survivor,” wrote singer Kesha, who in 2014 sued producer Dr. Luke, accusing him of assault. Kesha has frequently altered the lyrics of her hit single “TikTok” in performances to lambast Combs.
Even longtime Diddy antagonist 50 Cent seemed to acknowledge his partial victory. “Diddy beat the feds that boy a bad man,” 50 Cent wrote on Instagram, before referencing a famous mobster notorious for evading convictions. “Beat the RICO he the gay John Gotti.”
Mitchell Epner, a former assistant U.S. attorney in New Jersey who prosecuted numerous sex trafficking and involuntary servitude cases, said that despite some recent high-profile sex trafficking cases that ended in convictions, Combs’ charges were never going to be easy to prove.
“In recent years, we’ve seen prosecutions of Ghislaine Maxwell in the Jeffrey Epstein case, Keith Raniere of NXIVM and R. Kelly, where they are trafficking in order to feed the traffickers’ sexual desire,” Epner said. “But this indictment was all about Sean Combs sharing women with people he was paying. He wasn’t receiving money, he wanted to be a voyeur. That technically fits the definition of sex trafficking, but it wasn’t the primary evil Congress was thinking about.”
The hurdles for accusers to come forward with claims against powerful men, and for juries to discern between transgressive sexual relationships and criminally liable abuse beyond a reasonable doubt, make such cases difficult to prosecute.
In the absence of convictions, some recently accused artists have already mounted successful comebacks.
Shock-rocker Marilyn Manson had been under investigation by the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department since 2021, when several women accused him of rape and abuse including “Westworld” actor Evan Rachel Wood and “Game of Thrones” actor Esmé Bianco.
Dist. Atty. Nathan Hochman said in January that the statute of limitations had run out on Manson’s domestic violence allegations, and that prosecutors doubted they could prove rape charges.
“While we are unable to bring charges in this matter,” Hochman said in a statement then, “we recognize that the strong advocacy of the women involved has helped bring greater awareness to the challenges faced by survivors of domestic abuse and sexual assault.”
Bianco told The Times that, “Within our toxic culture of victim blaming, a lack of understanding of coercive control, the complex nature of sexual assault within intimate partnerships, and statutes of limitations that do not support the realities of healing, prosecutions face an oftentimes insurmountable hurdle. Once again, our justice system has failed survivors.”
Manson has denied all claims against him. He has since released a new album and mounted successful tours.
Meanwhile, R&B singer Chris Brown was recently the subject of “Chris Brown: A History of Violence,” a 2024 documentary that shed new light on a 2022 lawsuit where a woman accused Brown of raping her on a yacht owned by Combs in 2020.
That lawsuit — one of many civil and criminal claims made against Brown over the years, beginning with the infamous 2009 incident in which he assaulted his then-girlfriend Rihanna — was dismissed. In 2020, Brown settled another sexual assault lawsuit regarding an alleged 2017 incident at the singer’s home. Brown currently faces criminal charges around a 2023 incident where he allegedly assaulted a music producer with a tequila bottle in a London nightclub.
Brown denied the claims in the documentary, and his attorneys called the film “defamatory.” He sued Warner Bros. Entertainment for $500 million. He is currently on a stadium tour that will stop at SoFi Stadium in Inglewood in September.
Combs, meanwhile, may still face a range of criminal and civil consequences. He could be sentenced from anywhere up to the maximum of 10 years apiece on each prostitution charge, or to a far lesser sentence. Some experts said it’s possible he may be sentenced to time served and walk away a free man soon.
Though it’s too soon to know what kind of future awaits Combs should he return to public life, it’s hard to imagine a return to the heights of influence that defined his ‘90s tenure at Bad Boy Entertainment, or his affable multimedia-mogul personality in the 2000s. A fate similar to the former hip-hop mogul Russell Simmons seems most likely — reputationally tarnished and culturally irrelevant.
Still, his supporters thronged outside the New York courtroom waving bottles of baby oil — an infamous detail of the trial — in a pseudo-ironic celebration of his acquittal on the most serious charges.
If Combs wants to ever return to music, he’ll have at least one ally in Ye, the embattled Nazi-supporting rapper who showed up in court to bolster Combs. Ye featured the incarcerated mogul on his song “Lonely Roads Still Go to Sunshine,” and released clothing featuring the logo of Combs’ old fashion label Sean John.
President Trump, another convicted felon and alleged sexual assailant who quickly returned to the heights of power, has said he is open to pardoning Combs. “It’s not a popularity contest,” he has said, regarding a Combs pardon. ”I would certainly look at the facts if I think somebody was mistreated.”
What Could a Healthy AI Companion Look Like?
What does a little purple alien know about healthy human relationships? More than the average artificial intelligence companion, it turns out.
The alien in question is an animated chatbot known as a Tolan. I created mine a few days ago using an app from a startup called Portola, and we’ve been chatting merrily ever since. Like other chatbots, it does its best to be helpful and encouraging. Unlike most, it also tells me to put down my phone and go outside.
Tolans were designed to offer a different kind of AI companionship. Their cartoonish, nonhuman form is meant to discourage anthropomorphism. They’re also programmed to avoid romantic and sexual interactions, to identify problematic behavior including unhealthy levels of engagement, and to encourage users to seek out real-life activities and relationships.
This month, Portola raised $20 million in series A funding led by Khosla Ventures. Other backers include NFDG, the investment firm led by former GitHub CEO Nat Friedman and Safe Superintelligence cofounder Daniel Gross, who are both reportedly joining Meta’s new superintelligence research lab. The Tolan app, launched in late 2024, has more than 100,000 monthly active users. It’s on track to generate $12 million in revenue this year from subscriptions, says Quinten Farmer, founder and CEO of Portola.
Tolans are particularly popular among young women. “Iris is like a girlfriend; we talk and kick it,” says Tolan user Brittany Johnson, referring to her AI companion, who she typically talks to each morning before work.
Johnson says Iris encourages her to share about her interests, friends, family, and work colleagues. “She knows these people and will ask ‘have you spoken to your friend? When is your next day out?’” Johnson says. “She will ask, ‘Have you taken time to read your books and play videos—the things you enjoy?’”
Tolans appear cute and goofy, but the idea behind them—that AI systems should be designed with human psychology and wellbeing in mind—is worth taking seriously.
A growing body of research shows that many users turn to chatbots for emotional needs, and the interactions can sometimes prove problematic for peoples’ mental health. Discouraging extended use and dependency may be something that other AI tools should adopt.
Companies like Replika and Character.ai offer AI companions that allow for more romantic and sexual role play than mainstream chatbots. How this might affect a user’s wellbeing is still unclear, but Character.ai is being sued after one of its users died by suicide.
Chatbots can also irk users in surprising ways. Last April, OpenAI said it would modify its models to reduce their so-called sycophancy, or a tendency to be “overly flattering or agreeable”, which the company said could be “uncomfortable, unsettling, and cause distress.”
Last week, Anthropic, the company behind the chatbot Claude, disclosed that 2.9 percent of interactions involve users seeking to fulfill some psychological need such as seeking advice, companionship, or romantic role-play.
Anthropic did not look at more extreme behaviors like delusional ideas or conspiracy theories, but the company says the topics warrant further study. I tend to agree. Over the past year, I have received numerous emails and DMs from people wanting to tell me about conspiracies involving popular AI chatbots.
Tolans are designed to address at least some of these issues. Lily Doyle, a founding researcher at Portola, has conducted user research to see how interacting with the chatbot affects users’ wellbeing and behavior. In a study of 602 Tolan users, she says 72.5 percent agreed with the statement “My Tolan has helped me manage or improve a relationship in my life.”
Farmer, Portola’s CEO, says Tolans are built on commercial AI models but incorporate additional features on top. The company has recently been exploring how memory affects the user experience, and has concluded that Tolans, like humans, sometimes need to forget. “It’s actually uncanny for the Tolan to remember everything you’ve ever sent to it,” Farmer says.
I don’t know if Portola’s aliens are the ideal way to interact with AI. I find my Tolan quite charming and relatively harmless, but it certainly pushes some emotional buttons. Ultimately users are building bonds with characters that are simulating emotions, and that might disappear if the company does not succeed. But at least Portola is trying to address the way AI companions can mess with our emotions. That probably shouldn’t be such an alien idea.
El megaproyecto de ley republicano supondrá más costos de salud para muchos estadounidenses
El “One Big Beautiful Bill” del presidente Donald Trump recorta el gasto federal en los mercados de Medicaid y la Ley de Cuidado de Salud a Bajo precio (ACA) en aproximadamente $1.000 millones a lo largo de una década, según la Oficina de Presupuesto del Congreso (CBO), una entidad no partidista. Esto amenaza la salud física y financiera de decenas de millones de estadounidenses.
El proyecto de ley, aprobado por el Senado el martes 1 de julio, revertiría muchos de los avances en cobertura médica de las administraciones Biden y Obama, cuyas políticas facilitaron el acceso a la atención médica a millones de personas y redujeron la tasa de personas sin seguro en el país a mínimos históricos.
El plan del Senado para recortar drásticamente la financiación de Medicaid y los mercados de ACA podría hacer que unas 12 millones de personas más no tuvieran seguro para 2034, según estima la CBO.
Esto, a su vez, perjudicaría las finanzas de hospitales, residencias de adultos mayores y centros de salud comunitarios —que tendrían que absorber una mayor parte del costo del tratamiento de las personas sin cobertura— y podría obligarlos a reducir servicios y personal, hasta a cerrar instalaciones.
La legislación está en el escritorio de Trump a la espera de su firma, aunque primero el Senado y la Cámara de Representantes deben aprobar la misma versión. La Cámara de Representantes aprobó su propia versión en mayo y se espera que considere la versión del Senado hoy (2 de julio), según Tom Emmer, líder de la mayoría en la Cámara.
A continuación, se presentan cinco maneras en que los planes del Partido Republicano podrían afectar el acceso a la atención médica.
¿Necesita Medicaid? Entonces consigue un trabajo
Los recortes más profundos al gasto en atención médica provienen de la propuesta de un requisito de trabajo para Medicaid, que cortaría la cobertura a millones de afiliados que no cumplen con estos nuevos estándares.
En 40 estados y Washington, D.C., que han ampliado Medicaid bajo ACA, algunos beneficiarios de Medicaid tendrían que presentar regularmente documentación que demuestre que trabajan, hacen voluntariado o asisten a la escuela al menos 80 horas al mes, o que califican para una exención, como por ejemplos el cuidado de un niño pequeño.
El requisito del proyecto de ley no se aplicaría a las personas en los 10 estados, mayoritariamente republicanos, que no han ampliado Medicaid.
Investigadores de salud afirman que la política tendría poco impacto en el empleo. Según KFF, la mayoría de los beneficiarios de Medicaid en edad laboral que no reciben prestaciones por discapacidad ya trabajan o buscan trabajo, o no pueden hacerlo porque tienen una discapacidad, asisten a la escuela o cuidan a un familiar.
Los experimentos estatales con requisitos de trabajo se han visto plagados de problemas administrativos, como la pérdida de cobertura de los beneficiarios elegibles por problemas con el papeleo, y más gasto.
El requisito de trabajo de Georgia, que se implementó oficialmente en julio de 2023, ha costado más de $90 millones, de los cuales solo 26 millones se han destinado a prestaciones de salud, según el Georgia Budget & Policy Institute, una organización de investigación no partidista.
“Los costos ocultos son astronómicos”, afirmó Chima Ndumele, profesor de la Escuela de Salud Pública de Yale.
Menos dinero significa menos atención en las comunidades rurales
Las medidas de ajuste que se aplicarían a los estados podrían traducirse en una disminución de los servicios de salud, profesionales médicos e incluso hospitales, especialmente en las comunidades rurales.
El plan del Partido Republicano reduciría una práctica conocida como impuestos a los proveedores, que casi todos los estados han utilizado durante décadas para aumentar los pagos de Medicaid a hospitales, residencias de adultos mayores y otros proveedores, así como a empresas privadas de atención médica administrada.
Los estados suelen utilizar el dinero federal generado a través de los impuestos para pagar a las instituciones más de lo que Medicaid pagaría de otra manera. (Medicaid generalmente paga las tarifas más bajas por la atención médica, en comparación con Medicare, el programa para personas mayores de 65 años y algunas personas con discapacidad, y los seguros privados).
Los hospitales y residencias de adultos mayores afirman que utilizan estos fondos adicionales de Medicaid para ampliar o añadir nuevos servicios y mejorar la atención para todos los pacientes.
Los hospitales rurales suelen operar con márgenes de ganancia reducidos y dependen de los pagos de impuestos de Medicaid para sostenerlos. Investigadores del Cecil G. Sheps Center for Health Services Research que examinaron el proyecto de ley de la Cámara concluyeron que este obligaría a más de 300 hospitales rurales, muchos de ellos en Kentucky, Louisiana, California y Oklahoma, a reducir sus servicios o cerrar.
Los senadores republicanos agregaron un fondo de $50 mil millones a su versión del proyecto de ley para amortiguar el impacto en los hospitales rurales.
Más dificultad para obtener, y mantener, la cobertura de ACA
Para quienes tienen cobertura del mercado de seguros de salud de ACA, el plan republicano dificultaría la inscripción y el conservar los planes.
Los asegurados del mercado de seguros estarían obligados a actualizar sus ingresos, estatus migratorio y otra información cada año, en lugar de reinscribirse automáticamente, algo que más de 10 millones de personas hicieron este año.
También tendrían menos tiempo para inscribirse; el proyecto de ley acorta el período anual de inscripción abierta en aproximadamente un mes.
Las personas que soliciten cobertura fuera de ese período —por ejemplo, porque pierden su trabajo u otro seguro, o necesitan agregar a un recién nacido o cónyuge a una póliza existente— tendrían que esperar a que se procesen todos sus documentos antes de recibir subsidios del gobierno para ayudar a pagar sus primas mensuales. Actualmente, reciben hasta 90 días de ayuda con las primas durante el proceso de solicitud, que puede tardar semanas.
Los legisladores republicanos y algunos centros de estudios de políticas conservadoras, incluido el Paragon Health Institute, afirman que los cambios son necesarios para reducir las inscripciones fraudulentas, mientras que los opositores afirman que son el último intento de desmantelar el Obamacare.
La legislación tampoco contempla una extensión de los subsidios mejorados implementados durante la pandemia de covid-19. Si el Congreso no actúa, estos subsidios expirarán a finales de año, lo que resultará en un aumento promedio del 75% en las primas el próximo año, según KFF.
¿Tienes Medicaid? Se pagará más por las consultas médicas
Muchos beneficiarios de Medicaid podrían tener que pagar más de su bolsillo por las citas.
El proyecto de ley exigiría a los estados que han ampliado Medicaid cobrar a los beneficiarios hasta $35 por algunos servicios si sus ingresos se encuentran entre el nivel federal de pobreza (este año, $15.650 por persona) y el 138% de esa cantidad ($21.597).
Los beneficiarios de Medicaid generalmente no pagan nada cuando buscan servicios médicos, ya que estudios han demostrado que cobrar incluso copagos pequeños lleva a las personas de bajos ingresos a renunciar a atención necesaria. En los últimos años, algunos estados han agregado cargos inferiores a $10 por algunos servicios.
Esta política no se aplicaría a las personas que buscan atención primaria, atención de salud mental o tratamiento de adicciones.
Recortes para inmigrantes con residencia legal
El plan republicano podría provocar que al menos cientos de miles de inmigrantes con residencia legal —incluyendo solicitantes de asilo, víctimas de tráfico humano y refugiados— pierdan su cobertura del mercado de seguros al eliminar los subsidios que hacen que las primas sean asequibles. La restricción no se aplicaría a los titulares de tarjetas de residencia permanente (Green Card o tarjeta verde).
Dado que los inmigrantes que perderían subsidios bajo este plan tienden a ser más jóvenes que la población general, su salida dejaría una población de afiliados de mayor edad, con mayor riesgo de enfermedad y costos más elevados, lo que incrementaría aún más las primas del mercado, según directores de los mercados de seguros de salud en California, Maryland y Massachusetts, y analistas de salud.
Quitar el acceso a la atención médica a los inmigrantes que viven legalmente en el país “causará un daño irreparable a las personas que hemos prometido proteger e impondrá costos innecesarios a los sistemas locales que ya están sobrecargados”, declaró John Slocum, director ejecutivo del Refugee Council USA, un grupo de defensa, en un comunicado.
Tanto la versión de la Cámara de Representantes como la del Senado del proyecto de ley reflejan el enfoque restrictivo de la administración Trump hacia la inmigración.
Sin embargo, debido a que contravenía las normas del Senado, la legislación no incluirá una propuesta que habría reducido los pagos federales de Medicaid a estados como California, que utilizan sus propios fondos para cubrir a inmigrantes sin papeles.
La corresponsal principal de KFF Health News en Washington, Julie Rovner, contribuyó con este artículo.
Prime Day Echo Dot Deal Makes Spider-Man Your Friendly Virtual Assistant
While Prime Day 2025 doesn’t officially begin until July 8, there are already some great early deals on Amazon devices. The fifth generation Echo Dot, for example, is just $32–the lowest price we’ve seen this year. And if you’re a Marvel fan, consider pairing it with the Limited Edition Echo Dot Spider-Man Stand. Modeled after Spider-Man’s iconic mask, it’s a fun choice for a kid’s room or game room. The stand is seeing its first-ever discount ahead of Prime Day, dropping the price to $30 (was $40).
$30 (was $40) / Bundle it with a new Echo Dot for $32 (was $50)
This fun little Echo Dot Stand is compatible with the 4th and 5th generation Echo Dot. It’s designed so you can easily slot the smart speaker into the top of the mask, with a small cutout on the back for the power cable. The coolest part of the stand? Spidey’s eyes will glow, as the light ring on your Echo can shine through its translucent cover. The light adjusts automatically–so the darker the room, the brighter his eyes.
The stand doesn’t bring any additional functionality to your Echo, but it’s a fun way to display it in your home. It also won’t hinder your ability to operate the smart speaker, as all its buttons and ports are still easily accessible. As mentioned, this is the first discount we’ve seen for the stand, and it’s prominently featured on Amazon’s home page, so we wouldn’t be surprised if it sells out.
Unless otherwise stated, all of the deals below are for the newest editions of Amazon’s various Echo smart home devices.
Amazon previously released an Iron Man Echo Dot Stand last holiday. Iron Man fans can still grab that model today, but it’s selling for its full $40 MSRP. The bundles are discounted, however, allowing you to pick up an Echo Dot (5th Gen) and Iron Man Stand for $62 (was $90). That’s the same price you’d pay if you picked up the discounted Spider-Man Stand and an Echo Dot (5th Gen), making it a good choice if you don’t yet have the smart speaker.
Speaking of the Echo Dot, the standalone speaker is available for $32 (was $50), though you can also find it bundled with an Amazon Basics Smart Color Bulb for $37 (was $63). Consider spending the extra few bucks on this option, as you’ll be able to control the bulb via voice commands with your new smart speaker. The bulb typically costs $13, so you’re saving a nice chunk of change for Prime Day. If you’re not sold on the Echo Dot, the bulb can be bundled with several other products.
A bunch of Amazon devices are discounted for Prime Day, including the affordable Echo Pop. This smart speaker is now just $22 (was $40), and while it doesn’t sound quite as robust as the Echo Dot, it’s a good choice for small spaces that don’t need the 360-degree soundscape provided by the Dot. This is the best price we’ve seen in 2025, and it’s not likely to stick around past Prime Day. The Echo Spot, meanwhile, is an excellent bedside companion, as its small display makes it a good alternative to a traditional alarm clock. Its current price of $45 (was $80) matches its lowest price ever.
While these and other Echo devices are great gadgets, keep in mind they’re not compatible with the Spider-Man Stand.
For private listening with built-in Alexa support, check out the Amazon Echo Buds with active noise cancellation for only $45 (was $140).
A midlife MRI that spots rapid aging and signals disease long before symptoms
Any high school reunion is a sharp reminder that some people age more gracefully than others. Some enter their older years still physically spry and mentally sharp. Others start feeling frail or forgetful much earlier in life than expected.
“The way we age as we get older is quite distinct from how many times we’ve traveled around the sun,” said Ahmad Hariri, professor of psychology and neuroscience at Duke University.
Now, scientists at Duke, Harvard and the University of Otago in New Zealand have developed a freely available tool that can tell how fast someone is aging, and while they’re still reasonably healthy — by looking at a snapshot of their brain.
From a single MRI brain scan, the tool can estimate your risk in midlife for chronic diseases that typically emerge decades later. That information could help motivate lifestyle and dietary changes that improve health.
In older people, the tool can predict whether someone will develop dementia or other age-related diseases years before symptoms appear, when they might have a better shot at slowing the course of disease.
“What’s really cool about this is that we’ve captured how fast people are aging using data collected in midlife,” Hariri said. “And it’s helping us predict diagnosis of dementia among people who are much older.”
The results were published July 1 in the journal Nature Aging.
Finding ways to slow age-related decline is key to helping people live healthier, longer lives. But first “we need to figure out how we can monitor aging in an accurate way,” Hariri said.
Several algorithms have been developed to measure how well a person is aging. But most of these “aging clocks” rely on data collected from people of different ages at a single point in time, rather than following the same individuals as they grow older, Hariri said.
“Things that look like faster aging may simply be because of differences in exposure” to things such as leaded gasoline or cigarette smoke that are specific to their generation, Hariri said.
The challenge, he added, is to come up with a measure of how fast the process is unfolding that isn’t confounded by environmental or historical factors unrelated to aging.
To do that, the researchers drew on data gathered from some 1,037 people who have been studied since birth as part of the Dunedin Study, named after the New Zealand city where they were born between 1972 and 1973.
Every few years, Dunedin Study researchers looked for changes in the participants’ blood pressure, body mass index, glucose and cholesterol levels, lung and kidney function and other measures — even gum recession and tooth decay.
They used the overall pattern of change across these health markers over nearly 20 years to generate a score for how fast each person was aging.
The new tool, named DunedinPACNI, was trained to estimate this rate of aging score using only information from a single brain MRI scan that was collected from 860 Dunedin Study participants when they were 45 years old.
Next the researchers used it to analyze brain scans in other datasets from people in the U.K., the U.S., Canada and Latin America.
Faster aging and higher dementia risk
Across data sets, they found that people who were aging faster by this measure performed worse on cognitive tests and showed faster shrinkage in the hippocampus, a brain region crucial for memory.
More soberingly, they were also more likely to experience cognitive decline in later years.
In one analysis, the researchers examined brain scans from 624 individuals ranging in age from 52 to 89 from a North American study of risk for Alzheimer’s disease.
Those who the tool deemed to be aging the fastest when they joined the study were 60% more likely to develop dementia in the years that followed. They also started to have memory and thinking problems sooner than those who were aging slower.
When the team first saw the results, “our jaws just dropped to the floor,” Hariri said.
Links between body and brain
The researchers also found that people whose DunedinPACNI scores indicated they were aging faster were more likely to suffer declining health overall, not just in their brain function.
People with faster aging scores were more frail and more likely to experience age-related health problems such as heart attacks, lung disease or strokes.
The fastest agers were 18% more likely to be diagnosed with a chronic disease within the next several years compared with people with average aging rates.
Even more alarming, they were also 40% more likely to die within that timeframe than those who were aging more slowly, the researchers found.
“The link between aging of the brain and body are pretty compelling,” Hariri said.
The correlations between aging speed and dementia were just as strong in other demographic and socioeconomic groups than the ones the model was trained on, including a sample of people from Latin America, as well as United Kingdom participants who were low-income or non-White.
“It seems to be capturing something that is reflected in all brains,” Hariri said.
The work is important because people worldwide are living longer. In the coming decades, the number of people over age 65 is expected to double, reaching nearly one fourth of the world’s population by 2050.
“But because we live longer lives, more people are unfortunately going to experience chronic age-related diseases, including dementia,” Hariri said.
Dementia’s economic burden is already huge. Research suggests that the global cost of Alzheimer’s care, for example, will grow from $1.33 trillion in 2020 to $9.12 trillion in 2050 — comparable or greater than the costs of diseases like lung disease or diabetes that affect more people.
Effective treatments for Alzheimer’s have proven elusive. Most approved drugs can help manage symptoms but fail to stop or reverse the disease.
One possible explanation for why drugs haven’t worked so far is they were started too late, when the Alzheimer’s proteins that build up in and around nerve cells have already done too much damage.
“Drugs can’t resurrect a dying brain,” Hariri said.
But in the future, the new tool could make it possible to identify people who may be on the way to Alzheimer’s sooner, and evaluate interventions to stop it — before brain damage becomes extensive, and without waiting decades for follow-up.
In addition to predicting our risk of dementia over time, the new clock will also help scientists better understand why people with certain risk factors, such as poor sleep or mental health conditions, age differently, said first author Ethan Whitman, who is working toward a Ph.D. in clinical psychology with Hariri and study co-authors Terrie Moffitt and Avshalom Caspi, also professors of psychology and neuroscience at Duke.
More research is needed to advance DunedinPACNI from a research tool to something that has practical applications in healthcare, Whitman added.
But in the meantime, the team hopes the tool will help researchers with access to brain MRI data measure aging rates in ways that aging clocks based on other biomarkers, such as blood tests, can’t.
“We really think of it as hopefully being a key new tool in forecasting and predicting risk for diseases, especially Alzheimer’s and related dementias, and also perhaps gaining a better foothold on progression of disease,” Hariri said.
The authors have filed a patent application for the work. This research was supported by the U.S. National Institute on Aging (R01AG049789, R01AG032282, R01AG073207), the UK Medical Research Council (MR/X021149/1), and the New Zealand Health Research Council (Program Grant 16-604).
Webinar on ‘Legal Sanctions and Right to Privacy’
About the Webinar
Chanakya University invites you to an insightful webinar on the evolving legal landscape surrounding the right to privacy in India. The session will be conducted by Dr. Harshita Kulkarni, Assistant Professor, School of Law, Governance and Public Policy, and former visiting faculty at the National Forensic Sciences University, Dharwad.
Topic
Legal Sanctions and Right to Privacy – Contemporary Challenges
Key Areas
Key areas of focus include the Constitution of India, the Information Technology Act, 2000, the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023, the Aadhaar Act, 2016, and the Criminal Procedure (Identification) Act, 2022. Dr. Kulkarni will examine how these legislations influence privacy rights, legal sanctions, and the balance between state power and individual freedoms.
About the Speaker
Dr. Harshita Kulkarni
School of Law, Governance and Public Policy
Assistant Professor, School of Law, Governance and Public Policy
Ph.D., Karnatak University, Dharwad
Former visiting faculty at National Forensic Sciences University, Dharwad
Who can Attend?
This webinar is ideal for law students, scholars, and professionals interested in the intersection of privacy, technology, and legal reform.
How to Register?
Interested participants can register using the link provided at the end of this post.
Date
July 12, 2025
Time
12:30 pm to 2:00 pm
Mode
Microsoft Teams
Click here to register.
Rash around the eyes? It can be allergies, says doctor; know symptoms and 6 care tips | Health
The skin around the eyes is incredibly delicate and highly susceptible to allergens. During the monsoon season, the risk of irritation and allergic reactions increases significantly, often making the eyes one of the first areas to be affected. Also read | Eye allergies got you down? These home care tips could change everything
In an interview with HT Lifestyle, Dr. Kunal Nirmal, ophthalmologist, phaco refractive and ocular trauma surgeon, Kalubha Road, Bhavnagar said, “The skin around the eyes is the thinnest on the body—just 0.3 to 0.5 millimeters compared to 1 to 2 millimeters elsewhere—making it exceptionally delicate and highly prone to irritation. This sensitivity, combined with a lack of protective oil glands, makes the periorbital region particularly vulnerable to environmental allergens and irritants.”
Triggers that can cause rash around eyes:
“For individuals with seasonal or environmental allergies, airborne particles like dust mites, pollen, mold, and pet dander are common triggers. These allergens can easily affect the skin around the eyes and the eyes themselves, leading to both dermatological and ocular symptoms,” said Dr. Kunal Nirmal. Also read | Eyes, allergies and monsoon: Tips on coping with seasonal eye allergies in rainy season
Ocular symptoms to be aware of:
- Itching
- Watering
- Redness
- Burning sensation
- Blurred vision (due to excessive watering)
- Sensation of heaviness around the eyes
- Congestion
- Chemosis (swollen conjunctiva)
- Periorbital edema and puffiness
Tips to take care of your eyes:
1. Cold compression/icing: Helps relieve inflammation and itching. Applying a cold compress to closed eyelids can quickly reduce swelling and provide soothing relief from discomfort. It’s a simple, non-invasive method that can be repeated several times a day for ongoing symptom management.
2. Low-potency steroid eye drops: May be prescribed for short-term use under medical supervision. These drops help control severe inflammation and allergic reactions in the eyes but should only be used as directed to avoid potential side effects. Prolonged or unsupervised use can increase the risk of complications such as increased eye pressure or infection.
3. Lubricant eye drops: Help ease discomfort and soothe the eyes. They provide much-needed moisture, especially if your eyes feel dry or gritty due to allergies or environmental irritants. Regular use can help flush out allergens and reduce redness, making daily activities more comfortable.
4. Clean bedding and towels: Reduces allergen buildup. Washing these items frequently in hot water helps eliminate dust mites, pollen, and other common allergens. Maintaining a clean environment is essential for preventing recurrence of symptoms and supporting overall eye health. Also read | Winter making your eyes dry and irritated? 6 expert tips and precautions to maintain healthy vision in cold weather
5. Use hypoallergenic products: Fragrance-free, dermatologist-tested products are best for the delicate eye area. These products are less likely to cause irritation or allergic reactions, making them ideal for sensitive skin and eyes. Always check ingredient labels and opt for formulas specifically designed for sensitive or allergy-prone individuals.
6. Consult a specialist: A dermatologist or allergist can help identify triggers and prescribe appropriate treatment. Professional guidance ensures that you receive a tailored management plan, reducing the risk of complications and persistent symptoms. Early intervention can also help prevent long-term damage and improve your overall quality of life.
Note to readers: This article is for informational purposes only and not a substitute for professional medical advice. Always seek the advice of your doctor with any questions about a medical condition.
Regeneron bispecific approved for myeloma; Concentra to buy IGM
Today, a brief rundown of news involving Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, IGM Biosciences and Catalio Capital, as well as updates from Roche, Hikma Pharmaceuticals and several others that you may have missed.
The Food and Drug Administration on Wednesday approved Regeneron Pharmaceuticals bispecific antibody linvoseltamab for relapsed or refractory multiple myeloma. The clearance was based on tumor response rates in clinical testing and is conditional on Regeneron obtaining confirmatory evidence of the drug’s benefit in further study. Regeneron previously tried to secure an FDA OK of the drug last year, but had its application rejected due to issues with a third-party manufacturer. Linvoseltamab, which Regeneron will sell as Lynozyfic, is one of two bispecific antibodies the company hopes will boost its oncology business. The other, odronextamab, is under regulatory review for lymphoma, with a decision expected by July 30. — Ned Pagliarulo
Concentra Biosciences is buying another struggling biotechnology company, this time agreeing to pay roughly $1.25 per share to acquire IGM Biosciences. The entity controlled by Tang Capital Partners announced Tuesday that IGM’s shareholders would also receive a contingent value right equal to 80% of the proceeds of a deal involving IGM’s intellectual property and experimental drugs, as well as all net cash in excess of $82 million at closing. IGM’s board unanimously approved the merger agreement, and the deal is expected to close in August. Last month, Concentra brokered a similar agreement with Elevation Oncology, and previously acquired companies Jounce Therapeutics and Kronos Bio. — Gwendolyn Wu
Venture capital firm Catalio Capital Management has brought in more than $400 million for its latest healthcare investment fund, according to a Tuesday announcement. The fund is its fourth since launching in 2020. Recently, Catalio invested in the AI drug discovery company Superluminal Medicines and antibody-drug conjugate developer Alentis Therapeutics. Catalio will continue investing in “deals with prospects for near-term liquidity,” as well as “prospects for long-term growth,” said Diamantis Xylas, Catalio’s head of research. — Gwendolyn Wu
With biotech markets still unsettled, several drugmakers this week turned to royalty and debt deals to obtain new funding. BridgeBio Pharma secured $300 million to support launching its new drug Attruby with an agreement that sells some of the company’s royalties on sales of the medicine in Europe, where it’s marketed by Bayer. Meanwhile, Dyne Therapeutics will receive up to $275 million in debt financing via a deal with Hercules Capital, and Apellis will trade Sobi up to 90% of ex-U.S. royalties on sales of its drug Aspaveli for as much as $300 million. — Ned Pagliarulo
Roche said two of its top executives will be retiring from the company, leaving vacancies on its corporate executive committee. Johannes Clevers, head of Roche pharma research and early development since 2022, will step down in August from his current role but remain as leader of the company’s Institute of Human Biology until a successor can be found. Barbara Schädler, head of group communications who’s been employed by Roche since 2019, will retire at the end of the year. Roche said it will announce successors “in due course.” — Jonathan Gardner
Generic drugmaker Hikma plans on spending $1 billion to boost its U.S. manufacturing and research and development capacity by 2030, the company said Saturday. Hikma said the expansion will “increase the company’s US-based capacity to produce large volumes of high-quality and affordable medicines,” which currently stands at 12 billion doses a year. The U.K.-based company joins Johnson & Johnson, Eli Lilly, Merck & Co., Novartis, Roche and Gilead Sciences in pledging to build up U.S.-based manufacturing as President Donald Trump has threatened tariffs on drugs produced overseas. Hikma has facilities in Ohio and New Jersey. — Jonathan Gardner
What the Numbers Are Really Telling Us
Key takeaways
After World War II, homeownership became central to the Australian identity, driven by government policy, migration, and the availability of affordable land.
Homeownership peaked at 73% in 1966, underpinned by rising dual incomes, easier access to finance, and strong cultural aspirations.
Today’s rate sits at ~66% – still high globally, but with a deepening generational divide.
For generations, the Great Australian Dream of homeownership was almost a given.
It wasn’t just a goal, it was seen as a rite of passage.
But today that dream is becoming harder to achieve.
While some point fingers at migrants or property investors, the reality is far more complex.
So in this week’s Demographics Decoded Podcast Simon Kuestenmacher and I take a deeper look at how we got here, what’s really going on beneath the surface, and what this means for our future.
For weekly insights and strategic advice, subscribe to the Demographics Decoded podcast, where we will continue to explore these trends and their implications in greater detail.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
The journey from post-war boom to today
If we go back to the 1930s, only about 60% of Australians owned their home.
Many lived in rental properties, often controlled by private landlords, at a time when rental protections were minimal.
As Simon Kuestenmacher noted in our latest Demographics Decoded episode, this reflected a society still reeling from the Great Depression, where low-income workers lived hand to mouth, with homeownership out of reach for most.
Source: Avid Commentator Substack
Then things changed dramatically after World War II.
The Menzies government stepped in with bold housing initiatives aimed at returned servicemen.
Land was made affordable, and building a home became a pathway to both economic prosperity and social stability.
The post-war migration boom added fuel to the fire.
Migrants from Greece, Italy, and elsewhere not only helped build the homes but also embraced the dream themselves, a dream they passed on to their children and grandchildren.
By 1966, homeownership peaked at 73% of dwellings, a figure underpinned by easier access to finance, the rise of building societies, and the growing inclusion of dual incomes in lending assessments.
Back then, borrowing was harder, but with the right policy mix, people could afford to buy.
Source: CheckRate
The decline in homeownership rates
Today, homeownership has slipped to around 66%.
Now, that’s still high by international standards, but it masks some uncomfortable truths.
One is the generational divide.
As Simon pointed out, “The average 30-year-old today is far less likely to own a home than their parents or grandparents were at the same age.”
Why?
Because we’ve changed the timeline for adulthood.
In the 1950s, most young people entered the workforce straight from school.
They began saving, bought a home earlier, and paid it off over decades.
Today, we encourage higher education, meaning many young adults only begin earning meaningful money in their mid-20s, at a time when house prices have soared beyond their parents’ wildest dreams.
At the same time, we haven’t built new major cities since the Gold Coast emerged in the 1950s.
Despite our vast continent, we’ve created artificial land scarcity by concentrating growth in just a few urban centers.
Combine that with our failure to deliver large-scale social housing since the 1960s and ’70s, and it’s no wonder we’re seeing rising prices and falling ownership rates.
Why we can’t blame migrants or investors
It’s tempting to look for scapegoats especially migrants.
Well, we had a perfect natural experiment during COVID when net migration turned negative, yet house prices surged.
As Simon aptly said, that alone should tell us the story is about more than just population growth.
And what about investors?
Yes, investors, particularly the so-called mum-and-dad landlords, have benefited from tax concessions and the security that property provides.
However, even if you were to remove the tax breaks, Simon reminds us that property would still attract investment because it’s “a safe and scarce resource” in Australia.
The real problem is that we’ve built a system that prompts investors to buy, while making it harder for first home buyers to compete.
Interestingly, the government’s promotion of built-to-rent projects aims to shift rental stock into institutional hands.
But as we’ve seen, these projects, while adding supply, aren’t delivering affordable rentals.
They’re well-appointed, well-located, but they’re not cheap.
As Simon put it, “Built-to-rent in its current form is still profit-driven, not designed for affordability.”
The growing intergenerational wealth divide
Here’s where the real long-term risk lies.
The divide between those who own property and those who don’t is widening, and that gap is being handed down through the generations.
The Bank of Mum and Dad has become one of the largest lenders in the country, helping those lucky enough to have wealthy parents get on the property ladder.
Simon highlighted a powerful truth: A $100,000 parental gift doesn’t just cut a deposit shortfall – it can save a family hundreds of thousands in interest over the life of a mortgage.
And if you don’t have that support you’re not just behind, you’re falling further back through no fault of your own.
This challenges the notion that we live in a purely merit-based society where hard work alone gets you ahead.
Are we drifting towards a European-style rental market?
The short answer: yes, to a degree.
Renting will become more common, and as Simon points out, this will bring policy changes.
We can expect to see stronger protections for renters, increased rights, additional responsibilities for landlords, and possibly a shift in how property management is conducted.
But here’s the difference: Europe’s rental models are often supported by large-scale institutional landlords and significant public housing programs.
Australia isn’t there, and we’re not on track to get there either, at least not anytime soon.
Policy responses: sugar hits, not solutions
Many of the measures we see today, whether it’s first home buyer grants, government-backed loans with 5% deposits, or super-for-housing schemes, do little to address the root issues.
They assist some people into the market, yes, but they also inflate demand without dealing with supply or structural affordability.
As Simon said, “These are policies designed to keep the current system running.”
Real reform would mean rethinking land use, infrastructure, taxation, and social housing policy.
But that would require political courage, and as history has shown, when Bill Shorten proposed modest changes to negative gearing and capital gains tax, the political risks are high.
Most voters own property or aspire to, so there’s little appetite for change that might depress prices.
Where do we go from here?
The forces driving the decline in homeownership are multifaceted, encompassing demographic, economic, social, and political factors.
There is no single culprit and no silver bullet solution.
But one thing is certain: unless we find ways to make housing more accessible, we risk deepening inequality and establishing a permanent class of renters with no stake in the property market.
That’s not good for individuals, and it’s not good for our society.
We need a conversation that’s honest about the challenges and courageous about the solutions.
Because the Great Australian Dream shouldn’t just be for those with wealthy parents, it should be within reach for anyone willing to work for it.
If you found this discussion helpful, don’t forget to subscribe to our podcast and share it with others who might benefit.
Subscribe now on your favourite Podcast player:
101 Silly Questions To Ask Your Partner For Fun, Laughter, And Bonding
Not every conversation between you and your partner has to be deep, serious, or perfectly timed. Sometimes, the best way to connect with your partner is through a moment of shared silliness. One great way to do this is by asking a question so random it makes you both pause, laugh, and wonder where on earth that idea came from. Whether you’re in a new relationship or have been together for years, injecting humor into your conversations can reignite curiosity, deepen your bond, and bring you emotionally closer in the most unexpected ways. This list of 101 silly questions to ask your partner helps you do exactly that.
These fun questions for couples serve as a toolkit for lightheartedness to counter the heavy, stressful moments of life. From bizarre hypotheticals to flirty absurdities, there is a diverse mix here to help you rediscover the playful, spontaneous side of love. So grab your partner, get comfy, and let the ridiculous bonding begin with these playful questions to ask in a relationship.
Why Silly Questions Matter In A Relationship
Every strong relationship needs more than just love to thrive. In addition to serious elements of a healthy relationship such a trust, mutual respect, healthy boundaries, and the works, you also need laughter. When life gets serious, playful questions to ask in a relationship can be the unexpected glue that keeps you and your partner feeling close, lighthearted, and in sync. These silly questions to ask in a relationship not only ease tension but also give both partners the freedom to express themselves in unpredictable and funny ways.
They spark laughter, curiosity, and those spontaneous smiles that remind you how fun love can be and bring out sides of each other you rarely see—the quirky, carefree, wildly imaginative parts that don’t always surface in daily routines. That’s why we’ve put together this fun list of silly questions to ask your partner.
- Helps you bond through humor and play
- Makes conversations more fun and spontaneous
- Sparks surprising and lighthearted intimacy
Related Reading: 125 Spicy Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend
101 Silly Questions To Ask Your Partner
Whether you’re looking for fun road trip questions to ask your partner or seeking novel new ways to make the most of your interactions, be it while relaxing at home or texting during your lunch break, these silly questions to ask your boyfriend or girlfriend are perfect for keeping the mood joyful and connected. We’ve divided the list into categories so you can jump to the vibe you’re in, whether it’s flirty, ridiculous, or simply random.
Silly icebreaker questions to ask your partner
Break the monotony with these light and quirky questions. Ideal for new couples or seasoned partners needing a playful reset, these are the kind of funny couple questions that lead to unexpectedly hilarious and memorable conversations.
- If you could turn into any fruit for a day, which one would it be and why?
- What would you name your own sitcom?
- Which cartoon world would you love to live in?
- Would you rather have spaghetti hair or pancake feet?
- What’s your superhero power if it had to be completely useless?
- If animals could talk, which one would be the sassiest?
- What’s your made-up title if you ruled a tiny island?
- What’s your most dramatic way to enter a room?
- Would you trust me to cut your hair? Why or why not?
- If you had a pet dinosaur, what would you name it?
Related Reading: 100+ Epic Hypothetical Questions For Couples
Weird but fun questions for couples
These weird but fun relationship questions for couples are designed to spark off-the-wall thoughts and reactions. Perfect for couples who love to let their imaginations run wild, these will have you laughing uncontrollably while revealing just how compatible you are intellectually and emotionally.
- Would you still date me if I had feet for hands?
- If you woke up invisible, what’s the first chaotic thing you’d do?
- Do you think fish ever get thirsty?
- If your burp could speak, what would it say?
- Would you rather be attacked by 100 duck-sized elephants or 1 elephant-sized duck?
- If your life had background music, what genre would play during arguments?
- If I could read your mind for one hour every day, when should I use it?
- If we had a haunted toaster, would you keep it?
- What would you do if your belly button started glowing?
- What item would you haunt if you became a ghost?
Related Reading: 125 Rapid Fire Questions For Couples
Flirty and playful questions to ask in a relationship
Why be serious when you can be sweet and silly at the same time? These flirty silly questions to ask your partner bring a cheeky twist to romance, making them ideal for when you want to laugh and flirt without pressure. They’re perfect for casual fun or even texting weird questions to ask your boyfriend over text.
- If I were a dessert, what would I be?
- What’s the weirdest way you could say “I love you”?
- If we got matching tattoos, what ridiculous thing would they be?
- Would you still kiss me if I had garlic breath forever?
- What emoji best describes me in bed?
- What’s the cheesiest pickup line you think I’d fall for?
- Would you rather cuddle a giant teddy bear or me (but I’m wrapped in bubble wrap)?
- How would you propose using only fast food items?
- If we had our own reality show, what embarrassing name would you give it?
- What’s your favorite silly thing I do?
Questions that make no sense but are fun to ask
These random questions to ask your partner are purely nonsensical, but that’s the point. They’re perfect for moments when you both want to escape logic and dive into sheer silliness. Plus, they show how much joy lives in the unpredictable.
- Can a sandwich be a hat if you believe in it hard enough?
- If socks could talk, what scandalous secrets would they tell?
- If we had a pet rock, what personality would it have?
- What would chairs say about us when we leave the room?
- If toothpaste were spicy, how would mornings change?
- Would you marry me in a parallel universe where everyone is a potato?
- What if clouds were made of cotton candy—would we eat the sky?
- If your sneeze summoned a mythical creature, which one would you want?
- What’s the least useful item to take on a desert island, but you’d take it anyway?
- What would you name our pet imaginary dragon?
Related Reading: 120 Juicy Questions To Ask Your Girlfriend
Cute questions to ask your partner for late-night laughs
Late-night chats are their own kind of intimate. When you’re half-asleep, fully unfiltered, and totally open. These lighthearted, cute questions to ask your partner are ideal for turning quiet nights into memorable bonding moments.
- If dreams were movies, what would last night’s be rated as?
- Would you rather have glowing ears or a tail that wags when you lie?
- If you could only whisper or shout for the rest of your life, which one?
- What song would play every time you entered our bedroom?
- What’s the worst first date idea you can think of (but we try it anyway)?
- If I were a mattress, what firmness would I be?
- What’s something you’d do for a million dollars but never tell anyone?
- What’s the weirdest recurring dream you’ve had?
- If you had to trade one body part with me, what would you pick?
- If I was a robot this whole time, how would you react?
Related Reading: 100+ Quirky Yet Romantic Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend To Make Him Laugh
Couple goals: The ridiculous edition
Forget serious couple goals. These silly things to ask your boyfriend or girlfriend will have you both fantasizing about the most ridiculous and random things, and loving every minute of it.
- What’s our couple’s Halloween costume, but make it absurd?
- If we joined a competitive sport together, which one would make us lose the fastest?
- Would you rather have our faces on socks or coffee mugs forever?
- If we had a statue built in our honor, what pose would we be doing?
- If we opened a food truck, what would be our most bizarre dish?
- What would our couple’s TikTok dance look like?
- If we had to create our own holiday, what ridiculous traditions would we have?
- If I dared you to prank call your mom as me, would you?
- What would be the weirdest name to give our future dog (but still kinda cute)?
- What’s one silly thing we should try together this weekend?
“I have this thing where I tell my husband, ‘Guess what, new question dropped!’ And he will roll his eyes. I have asked him about the worm one and other variations of that one. I don’t really expect him to answer seriously; he gets creative with whatever I ask.” — Reddituser
Absurd but fun questions for couples
If you love weird but fun relationship questions to ask your partner or just enjoy imagining absurd situations together, this selection is for you. It’s a reminder that laughter and playfulness are powerful connectors, especially when shared with someone you love.
- If you were a vegetable, what vegetable would you hate to be?
- Would you wear matching glitter jumpsuits with me for a full day, in public?
- If we could only eat food that starts with “P” forever, what’s on the menu?
- What would be your war cry in a pillow fight?
- If we opened a zoo, what imaginary creatures would we feature?
- If I turned into a lamp at midnight, would you still cuddle me?
- What flavor of ice cream would best describe our relationship?
- If I could only talk in song lyrics for a day, how would you respond?
- What’s the weirdest gift you’d actually love from me?
- If your feet had personalities, what would they be called?
- Would you still love me if I made duck noises every time I sneezed?
- What’s our couple’s handshake with sound effects?
- If we swapped voices for a day, how would you prank your friends?
- What would you name our spaceship if we were astronauts?
- What would our life look like as a musical?
- What conspiracy theory would you start just for fun?
- Would you rather hiccup bubbles or fart glitter?
- What’s your spirit animal when you’re hungry?
- If you were my pet, what tricks would you learn?
- Would you go on a game show where the prize is just unlimited hugs from me?
- What job would you have in a world where everyone is a different kind of cheese?
- Would you still flirt with me if I dressed like a magician every day?
- If I could teleport but only to weird places, where would I keep going?
- If our love story were a soap opera, what would it be called?
- If I could read your mind only when you’re dancing, what would I hear?
- Would you rather kiss me with whipped cream on your nose or a clown wig on mine?
- If we were action figures, what accessories would we come with?
- What would you do if I suddenly spoke in riddles for a whole day?
- If I challenged you to a ridiculous talent show, what would be your act?
- Would you rather serenade me in public or do a silly dance at a wedding?
- What board game best represents our relationship chaos?
- What would our imaginary child’s imaginary friend look like?
- If we had our own theme park, what would our main ride be called?
- Would you rather dress as a pineapple or a flamingo for date night?
- What’s the weirdest compliment I’ve ever given you?
- If you could prank me with zero consequences, what would you do?
- Would you rather I had laser eyes or random teleportation powers?
- What’s your funny nickname for me that you’ve never said out loud?
- If we could switch lives for a day, what’s the first thing you’d do?
- What ridiculous invention would make our lives easier?
- What’s the one silly thing you secretly hope we do together someday?
“I cannot tell you how much time my husband and I have spent debating the question of the best weapon in a zombie apocalypse. (Currently: me crossbow, him trident)” — u/thebuffyb0t
FAQs
1. Why should couples ask silly questions?
Because laughter is intimacy in disguise. Silly questions let you connect without pressure. They’re like mini bonding hacks.
2. Can silly questions improve intimacy?
They encourage vulnerability in a light-hearted way, making it easier to open up and be your true self with your partner.
3. What if my partner doesn’t enjoy silly conversations?
Start small and notice what they respond to. If they prefer deeper chats, sprinkle in silly moments without forcing it. It’s all about balance.
Final Thoughts
Silly questions might sound frivolous, but in reality, they can do wonders for emotional connection. Whether you’re asking flirty, silly questions over dinner or texting weird things to ask your boyfriend during a boring workday, these moments become shared memories. And in relationships, that’s gold. So the next time you’re stuck in a conversation rut or want to reconnect after a long day, come back to this list. It’s not about the answers. It’s about the laughter, the bonding, and the beautiful weirdness you create together. Try it tonight. Laugh till your stomach hurts. Love deeper than you did yesterday.
10 Thought-Provoking Relationship Check-In Questions for Deeper Connection
300 This Or That Questions For Couples – Funny, Flirty, Juicy, Deep & Random
The 36 Questions That Lead To Love
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
How I Used ChatGPT to Reverse Outline My Ideas—and You Can Too
Last month, I stared at a 1,200-word blog post about an idea I wanted to write about and felt unsure. The thoughts were good, but the structure was a mess. That’s when I discovered reverse outlining with ChatGPT that turned my fuzzy draft into a clear, compelling article. Now I use this method for different projects, from writing articles to creating presentations.
What Is Reverse Outlining?
Reverse outlining works backward from your completed draft to reveal what you actually wrote versus what you intended to write. Unlike traditional outlining as a notetaking tactic, which happens before writing, reverse outlining strips away all the supporting details to show your bare-bones structure.
The process involves reading through your draft and identifying the core idea of each paragraph, then listing these main points to create a bird’s-eye view of your content’s organization. Think of it as taking notes on your writing to see if your ideas flow logically.
Here’s why reverse outlining works so well:
- Reveals structural problems that aren’t obvious when reading the full text
- Tests the focus of each paragraph by showing whether each section sticks to one main point
- Identifies gaps where you need more evidence or explanation
- Improves organization by making it easy to spot which paragraphs should be rearranged
The traditional method of reverse outlining requires manually summarizing each paragraph, which can be time-consuming and subjective. That’s where reverse outlining with ChatGPT becomes invaluable and faster.
How to Boost Your Reverse Outlines With ChatGPT
ChatGPT excels at reverse outlining because it provides an objective distance from your text. When you’re too close to your writing, it’s difficult to see structural issues or recognize when your narrative limps off track. On the other hand, ChatGPT is an excellent reasoning model with the right prompt.
I paste my draft into ChatGPT and ask it to break down my content paragraph by paragraph. The AI generates reverse outlines in seconds, rather than the manual process of reading and summarizing each section myself.
Here’s my sample draft about finding purpose through tiny experiments:
When I ran this draft through ChatGPT, the reverse outline revealed that my conclusion felt rushed and my examples needed more specificity. The AI helped me see structural issues I’d missed during writing.
Sample Prompts for Reverse Outlining Your Ideas
Once you get the idea behind reverse outlining, you can create your prompts. Remember to follow the rules for creating perfect ChatGPT prompts. My own prompts have transformed how I analyze my writing. Each serves a different purpose depending on what kind of feedback I need or the type of project I am on.
1. Basic Structure Analysis
Create a reverse outline for this blog post draft. For each paragraph, provide: 1) A one-sentence summary of the main point, 2) The function this paragraph serves in the overall argument, and 3) Any structural issues you notice.
This prompt gives you a sweeping overview of the content’s organization and highlights problem areas. ChatGPT can also summarize it with a concise overall structure note highlighting the strengths and potential gaps.
2. Flow and Cohesion Check
Analyze this draft and provide: 1) A bullet-point reverse outline of each paragraph’s main idea, 2) Does it form a cohesive narrative? 3) Where does the narrative stray or become redundant? 4) What gaps exist in the logical flow?
This prompt is perfect for identifying where your argument loses steam or loses precision.
3. Audience Feedback
I’m writing for people who feel stuck in their careers. Create a reverse outline that evaluates: 1) The main message of each paragraph, 2) Whether each section resonates with this audience, 3) Where I might be missing their key concerns, 4) Suggestions for better emotional connection.
This prompt helps ensure your content serves your audiences’ needs and concerns.
4. Content Gap Identification
Based on this reverse outline, what are the three biggest structural improvements I should make? For each suggestion, explain specifically how to implement the change.
Use this after getting your initial reverse outline to drill down into actionable revision strategies.
5. Series Ideation Analysis
I’m writing a multi-part series on finding purpose. Create a reverse outline that evaluates: 1) How this post can generate new concepts, 2) Whether this post stands alone, and 3) Gaps that future posts should address.
I am using this prompt to fill content gaps and generate more ideas. Try this when you’re working on a blog series or longer content projects that can be strung together around a common theme.
The combination of reverse outlining and ChatGPT has made me a more strategic thinker. Instead of struggling to take my ideas to the next level, I can quickly break them down, then identify and fix structural problems before they blindside me.
You can try reverse outlining with any kind of project. For instance, reverse outlines are invaluable for designing presentations that grab attention. Use it to improve your reading and learning comprehension. As ChatGPT goes through your ideas paragraph by paragraph, you can take a microscope to your content.
Summer on a plate: Beihai Park unveils seasonal pastries
The week’s bestselling books, July 6
Hardcover fiction
1. Atmosphere by Taylor Jenkins Reid (Ballantine Books: $30) A story of friendship, love and adversity during the 1980s Space Shuttle program.
2. James by Percival Everett (Doubleday: $28) An action-packed reimagining of “The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.”
3. Bury Our Bones in the Midnight Soil by V. E. Schwab (Tor Books: $30) A vampiric tale follows three women across the centuries.
4. The Emperor of Gladness by Ocean Vuong (Penguin Press: $30) An unlikely pair develops a life-altering bond.
5. So Far Gone by Jess Walter (Harper: $30) A reclusive journalist is forced back into the world to rescue his kidnapped grandchildren.
6. The Wedding People by Alison Espach (Henry Holt & Co.: $29) An unexpected wedding guest gets surprise help on her journey to starting anew.
7. My Friends by Fredrik Backman (Atria Books: $30) The bond between a group of teens 25 years earlier has a powerful effect on a budding artist.
8. Nightshade by Michael Connelly (Little, Brown & Co.: $30) A cop relentlessly follows his mission in the seemingly idyllic setting of Catalina Island.
9. Among Friends by Hal Ebbott (Riverhead Books: $28) What begins as a celebration at a New York country house gives way to betrayal, shattering the trust between two close families.
10. Great Big Beautiful Life by Emily Henry (Berkley: $29) Two writers compete for the chance to tell the larger-than-life story of an heiress.
…
Hardcover nonfiction
1. The Let Them Theory by Mel Robbins (Hay House: $30) How to stop wasting energy on things you can’t control.
2. Abundance by Ezra Klein and Derek Thompson (Avid Reader Press/Simon & Schuster: $30) A study of the political, economic and cultural barriers to progress in the U.S. and how to work toward a politics of abundance.
3. I Regret Almost Everything by Keith McNally (Gallery Books: $30) The restaurateur relates his gritty childhood and rise in the dining scene.
4. Everything Is Tuberculosis by John Green (Crash Course Books: $28) The deeply human story of the fight against the world’s deadliest infectious disease.
5. How to Lose Your Mother by Molly Jong-Fast (Viking: $28) The author recalls her famed mother, writer Erica Jong.
6. Not My Type by E. Jean Carroll (St. Martin’s Press: $30) The journalist chronicles her legal battles with President Trump.
7. The Book of Alchemy by Suleika Jaouad (Random House: $30) A guide to the art of journaling, with contributions from Jon Batiste, Salman Rushdie, Gloria Steinem and others.
8. The Möbius Book by Catherine Lacey (Farrar, Straus & Giroux: $27) The novelist blends truth and fiction in an exploration of faith and love.
9. Original Sin by Jake Tapper and Alex Thompson (Penguin Press: $32) Inside President Biden’s doomed decision to run for reelection and the hiding of his serious decline.
10. Is a River Alive? by Robert Macfarlane (W. W. Norton & Co.: $32) The naturalist explores rivers as living beings.
…
Paperback fiction
1. All Fours by Miranda July (Riverhead Books: $19)
2. Remarkably Bright Creatures by Shelby Van Pelt (Ecco: $20)
3. Martyr! by Kaveh Akbar (Vintage: $18)
4. One Golden Summer by Carley Fortune (Berkley: $19)
5. Problematic Summer Romance by Ali Hazelwood (Berkley: $20)
6. Demon Copperhead by Barbara Kingsolver (Harper Perennial: $22)
7. The Ministry of Time by Kaliane Bradley (Avid Reader Press/Simon & Schuster: $19)
8. I Who Have Never Known Men by Jacqueline Harpman (Transit Books: $17)
9. Sandwich by Catherine Newman (Harper Perennial: $19)
10. Of Monsters and Mainframes by Barbara Truelove (Bindery Books: $19)
…
Paperback nonfiction
1. The Friday Afternoon Club by Griffin Dunne (Penguin: $21)
2. On Tyranny by Timothy Snyder (Crown: $12)
3. The Artist’s Way by Julia Cameron (TarcherPerigee: $20)
4. All About Love by bell hooks (Morrow: $17)
5. The Hundred Years’ War on Palestine by Rashid Khalidi (Metropolitan Books: $20)
6. The Art Thief by Michael Finkel (Vintage: $18)
7. The Wide Wide Sea by Hampton Sides (Vintage: $19)
8. The White Album by Joan Didion (Farrar, Straus & Giroux: $18)
9. Sociopath by Patric Gagne (Simon & Schuster: $20)
10. The Wager by David Grann (Vintage: $21)
Ola, Uber, Rapido Permitted by Government To Charge Up to Twice Base Fare During Peak Hours, Up From Previous 1.5 Times Allowance
New Delhi, July 2: The government has permitted cab aggregators like Ola, Uber and Rapido to charge up to twice the base fare during peak hours. Previously, they were allowed to apply a surge or dynamic pricing of only up to 1.5 times the base fare.
The change was announced in the revised Motor Vehicle Aggregator Guidelines, 2025, released by the Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRTH). These new rules aim to strike a balance between user safety, driver welfare, and business operations. As per the new rules, cab companies can now charge a minimum of 50 per cent of the base fare during non-peak hours. What Are New Rules for Ola, Uber, Rapido on Peak-Hour Pricing, Ride Cancellations? Know Key Points of Centre’s New Motor Vehicle Aggregator Guidelines 2025.
The base fare will be the amount notified by the respective state government for different types or classes of motor vehicles. States have been advised to adopt the new guidelines within the next three months. The government has also clarified that the base fare should cover a minimum distance of 3 kilometres. This is to compensate for the ‘dead mileage’ — the distance and fuel used by the driver to reach the passenger’s pickup point.
However, passengers will not be charged separately for dead mileage unless the total ride distance is less than 3 km. In all other cases, the fare will be calculated only from the pickup location to the drop-off point. The guidelines ensure that drivers are paid fairly. For drivers who own their vehicles and are onboarded by aggregators, they must receive at least 80 per cent of the total fare collected.
The aggregator can keep the remaining amount. The payment to drivers can be settled daily, weekly, or fortnightly based on their agreement with the company. In cases where the vehicle is owned by the aggregator but operated by a driver, the driver must get at least 60 per cent of the fare collected, while the aggregator can retain the rest. 2 Helmet Rule in India: Government Proposes To Make It Mandatory for 2-Wheeler Manufacturers To Provide 2 Helmets at Time of Vehicle Purchase.
The government has also set new rules for cancellations. If a driver cancels a ride after accepting it without a valid reason, a penalty of 10 per cent of the fare — up to a maximum of Rs 100 — will be charged. The same rule applies to passengers who cancel a ride without a valid reason.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 02, 2025 02:04 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Sam Altman Slams Meta’s AI Talent-Poaching Spree: ‘Missionaries Will Beat Mercenaries’
OpenAI CEO Sam Altman is hitting back at Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg’s recent AI talent-poaching spree. In a full-throated response sent to OpenAI researchers Monday evening and obtained by WIRED, Altman made his pitch for why staying at OpenAI is the only answer for those looking to build artificial general intelligence, hinting that the company is evaluating compensation for the entire research organization.
He also dismissed Meta’s recruiting efforts, saying what the company is doing could lead to deep cultural problems down the road.
“We have gone from some nerds in the corner to the most interesting people in the tech industry (at least),” he wrote on Slack. “AI Twitter is toxic; Meta is acting in a way that feels somewhat distasteful; I assume things will get even crazier in the future. After I got fired and came back I said that was not the craziest thing that would happen in OpenAl history; certainly neither is this.”
The news comes on the heels of a major announcement from Zuckerberg. On Monday, the Meta CEO sent a memo to staff introducing the company’s new superintelligence team, which will be helmed by Alexandr Wang, formerly of Scale AI, and Nat Friedman, who previously led GitHub. The list of new hires also included a number of people from OpenAI, including Shengjia Zhao, Shuchao Bi, Jiahui Yu, and Hongyu Ren. OpenAI’s chief research officer, Mark Chen, told staff that it felt like “someone has broken into our home and stolen something.”
Altman struck a different tone about the departures in his note on Monday.
“Meta has gotten a few great people for sure, but on the whole, it is hard to overstate how much they didn’t get their top people and had to go quite far down their list; they have been trying to recruit people for a super long time, and I’ve lost track of how many people from here they’ve tried to get to be their Chief Scientist,” he wrote. “I am proud of how mission-oriented our industry is as a whole; of course there will always be some mercenaries.”
He added that “Missionaries will beat mercenaries” and noted that OpenAI is assessing compensation for the entire research organization. “I believe there is much, much more upside to OpenAl stock than Meta stock,” he wrote. “But I think it’s important that huge upside comes after huge success; what Meta is doing will, in my opinion, lead to very deep cultural problems. We will have more to share about this soon but it’s very important to me we do it fairly and not just for people who Meta happened to target.”
Altman then made his pitch for people to remain at OpenAI. “I have never been more confident in our research roadmap,” he wrote. “We are making an unprecedented bet on compute, but I love that we are doing it and I’m confident we will make good use of it. Most importantly of all, I think we have the most special team and culture in the world. We have work to do to improve our culture for sure; we have been through insane hypergrowth. But we have the core right in a way that I don’t think anyone else quite does, and I’m confident we can fix the problems.”
“And maybe more importantly than that, we actually care about building AGI in a good way,” he added. “Other companies care more about this as an instrumental goal to some other mission. But this is our top thing, and always will be. Long after Meta has moved on to their next flavor of the week, or defending their social moat, we will be here, day after day, year after year, figuring out how to do what we do better than anyone else. A lot of other efforts will rise and fall too.”
A number of high-ranking employees who’ve worked at Meta followed up in Slack with their own stories about why OpenAI’s culture is superior. “[T]hey constantly rotate their top focus,” wrote one. Another said: “Yes we’re quirky and weird, but that’s what makes this place a magical cradle of innovation,” wrote one. “OpenAI is weird in the most magical way. We contain multitudes.”
California Immigrants Weigh Health Coverage Against Deportation Risk
For months, Maria, 55, a caregiver to older adults in California’s Orange County, has been trying not to smile.
If she opens her mouth too wide, she worries, people will see her chipped, plaque-covered front teeth. An immigrant without legal status, Maria doesn’t have health or dental insurance. When her teeth start to throb, she swallows pain pills. Last summer, a dentist said it would cost $2,400 to fix her teeth. That’s more than she can afford.
“It’s so expensive,” said Maria, who often works 12-hour days lifting clients in and out of bed and helping them with hygiene, medication management, and housework. “I need money for my kids, for my rent, for transport, for food. Sometimes, there’s nothing left for me.”
KFF Health News connected with Maria through an advocacy organization for immigrant workers. Fearing deportation, she asked that only her first name be used.
Maria is among what the federal government estimates are 2.6 million immigrants living in California without legal status. The state had gradually sought to bring these immigrants into its Medicaid program, known as Medi-Cal. But now, facing a state enrollment freeze, low-income California residents in the U.S. without legal permission — along with the providers and community workers that help them — are anxiously weighing the benefits of pushing forward with Medi-Cal applications against the risks of discovery and deportation by the federal government.
Seeking to close a projected $12 billion budget deficit, California Gov. Gavin Newsom, a Democrat, signed a balanced state budget on June 27 that will end new Medi-Cal enrollment in January 2026 for those over 19 without legal status.
Meanwhile, federal immigration raids — which appear to have targeted at least one health clinic in the state — are already making some people afraid to seek medical care, say immigrant advocates and health providers. And the recent news that Trump administration officials are sharing Medicaid enrollee data, including immigration status, with deportation authorities is expected to further erode trust in the program.
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services spokesperson Andrew Nixon said the agency, which oversees the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services, had the legal authority to share the data to address “unprecedented systemic neglect under the Biden-Harris administration that allowed illegal immigrants to exploit Medicaid while millions of Americans struggle to access care, particularly in states like California.”
Further complicating matters, the Trump administration has threatened to withhold funds from states that provide health coverage to people without legal status. Currently, about 1.6 million people in the country without authorization are enrolled in Medi-Cal.
In 2016, California began opening Medi-Cal to low-income people lacking legal status, starting with children, then gradually expanded it to young people, older adults, and — in January 2024 — those ages 26 to 49. The state Department of Health Care Services, which oversees Medi-Cal, partnered with community health clinics to help get eligible people enrolled.
It’s too early to tell what impact the latest state and federal developments are having on enrollment numbers, since data is available only through March. But many health care providers and advocates said they expect a chilling effect on immigrant enrollment.
Seciah Aquino is executive director of the Latino Coalition for a Healthy California, which supports community health workers — also called promotores — who help spread awareness about Medi-Cal’s expansion to adults lacking legal status. Just over half of public health insurance recipients in California are Latino, compared with just 30% of Medicaid enrollees nationwide.
Aquino said her coalition will tell promotores to disclose data-sharing risks so community members can make informed decisions.
“They take it very personally that advice that they provided to a fellow community member could now hurt them,” Aquino said.
Newsom condemned the data sharing, calling the move “legally dubious,” while U.S. Sens. Adam Schiff and Alex Padilla, both Democrats, have demanded that the Department of Homeland Security destroy any data shared.
California’s Department of Health Care Services announced June 13 that it is seeking more information from the federal government. The agency said it submitted monthly reports to CMS with demographic and eligibility information, including name and address, as required by law.
Medicaid enrollee data from Illinois, Washington state, and Washington, D.C., was also reportedly shared with DHS. Jamie Munks, a spokesperson for the Illinois Department of Healthcare and Family Services, the state’s Medicaid agency, said the department was “deeply concerned” by the news and that the data was regularly passed along to CMS with the understanding that it was protected.
In Sacramento, Democratic lawmakers found themselves in the uncomfortable position of rolling back health benefits for low-income residents with unsatisfactory immigration status, including people without legal status, people who’ve held green cards for under five years, and some others who are in the process of applying for legal status or have statuses meant to protect them from deportation. In addition to the Medi-Cal enrollment freeze for immigrants 19 and older in the country without authorization, all enrolled residents with unsatisfactory immigration status from 19 to 59 years old will be charged $30 monthly premiums starting in July 2027.
“What I’m hearing on the ground is folks are telling me they’re going to have a really hard time making these premium payments,” said Carlos Alarcon, health and public benefits policy analyst with the California Immigrant Policy Center, an advocacy group. “The reality is most people already have limited budgets.”
The legislature rejected a proposal from the governor to bar immigrants with unsatisfactory immigration status from receiving long-term nursing home and in-home care through Medi-Cal but went along with eliminating dental benefits starting in July 2026.
Health care providers said that without Medi-Cal coverage, many immigrants will be forced to seek emergency care, which is more expensive for taxpayers than preventive and primary-level care. Sepideh Taghvaei, chief dental officer at Santa Cruz County’s Dientes Community Dental Care, saw this play out in 2009 when the state cut adult Medi-Cal dental benefits. Patients came in with swollen faces and excruciating pain, with conditions so advanced that they required hospital treatment. “It’s not cost-effective,” she said.
State Sen. Roger Niello, a Republican who serves as vice chair of the Senate budget committee, said he believes California shouldn’t be funding Medi-Cal for people who lack legal status, particularly given the state’s fiscal challenges. He also said he worries that coverage of people in the country without authorization could encourage others to move to California.
“If we maintain that expense to the noncitizen,” he said, “we’re going to have to cut someplace else, and that’s undoubtedly going to affect citizens.”
Californians, too, are going through a change of heart. In a May poll conducted by the Public Policy Institute of California, 58% of adults opposed the benefit.
For Maria, shifting health care policies have left her feeling paralyzed. Since she arrived here five years ago, the caregiver’s focus has been on earning money to support her three children, whom she left with her parents in her home country, she said.
Maria didn’t learn she might be eligible for Medi-Cal until earlier this year and hadn’t yet found time to complete the paperwork. After a friend told her that the state could freeze enrollment in January, she began rushing to finish the sign-up process. But then she learned that Medi-Cal data had been shared with immigration authorities.
“Disappointed and scared” was how she described her reaction.
Suddenly, she said, enrolling in Medi-Cal doesn’t seem like a good idea.
Phil Galewitz and Bram Sable-Smith contributed to this report.
This article was produced by KFF Health News, which publishes California Healthline, an editorially independent service of the California Health Care Foundation.
How To Get Gimmighoul In Pokemon Go
Pokemon Go is celebrating its birthday with a special ninth anniversary event until July 6, and as part of the festivities, you’ll have a chance to get the rare Gimmighoul. The Coin Hunter Pokemon is typically hard to find in the mobile game, but during this event, you’ll be able to catch some by completing Research tasks. What’s more, you may even come across a shiny one.
To help you add the elusive Pokemon to your collection, we’ve put together this guide detailing how to catch and evolve Gimmighoul. Be sure to also check out our Pokemon Go July 2025 events guide for a look at everything happening in the game this month.
How To Get Gimmighoul
Aside from trading, there are two main methods of getting Gimmighoul in Pokemon Go. The first involves the Coin Bag, an item you receive after connecting the mobile game with Pokemon Scarlet or Violet, while the second is to simply wait for the Pokemon to appear during special events.
1. Coin Bag
Like Meltan, Gimmighoul typically only appears in Pokemon Go after you use a specific item, in this case the Coin Bag.
To receive one, you must connect your Pokemon Go account to Pokemon Scarlet or Violet for Nintendo Switch and then send a postcard from the mobile game to the title you paired with. Once you’ve completed this step, the Coin Bag will be added to your inventory.
Just as the Mystery Box, the Coin Bag will only work for a limited time. After you open it, Roaming Form Gimmighoul will spawn in the wild for 30 minutes, giving you a brief window to catch as many as you can. Once the 30 minutes have elapsed, the Coin Bag will close, and you’ll need to wait one day and send another postcard before you can open it again.
2. Events
In addition to the Coin Bag, Gimmighoul will occasionally appear during special events, such as the Ninth Anniversary Party currently underway from July 1-6.
Among the various rewards you can earn for completing Field and Timed Research tasks during this event are chances to catch Gimmighoul. Unlike other Gimmighoul, the ones you encounter here may be holding a special Ninth Anniversary coin, making them especially rare.
How To Evolve Gimmighoul
Whereas most Pokemon require a certain number of candies to evolve, Gimmighoul instead requires coins–and a lot of them.
Gimmighoul can evolve into Gholdengo after you’ve amassed a whopping 999 Gimmighoul Coins. You can collect these coins in a few different ways, such as by catching wild Gimmighoul and spinning PokeStops that are set with Golden Lure Modules. You’ll also earn coins by walking with Gimmighoul set as your buddy.
Since Gimmighoul coins are typically hard to come by, it will likely take a while to collect enough needed to evolve one into Gholdengo. However, the Ninth Anniversary Party event is making it a little easier to get your hands on them. When you spin a PokeStop that’s set with a Golden Lure Module, you’ll have a chance to find nine, 99, or even more Gimmighoul coins, so you’ll want to take advantage of this bonus if you’re hoping to get a Gholdengo.
Can Gimmighoul Be Shiny
Although not every Pokemon comes in a shiny variant yet, Gimmighoul does, and it’s very easy to tell it apart from the standard version.
While typical Gimmighoul have silvery bodies, shiny Gimmighoul is white, so you can immediately tell at a glance if you’ve found a shiny or not. Shiny Gholdengo is much harder to tell apart, however; its body color remains the same, but it’s accented with blue lines instead of red.
As mentioned, Pokemon Go’s Ninth Anniversary Party runs until July 6. Once it’s over, you’ll need to rely on the Coin Bag to catch more Gimmighoul, so you don’t want to miss your chance to get the Coin Hunter Pokemon while you can.
This virus infects millions—and we just discovered its secret weapon
New research from the University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine and La Jolla Institute for Immunology, published today (June 30) in Nature Microbiology, reveals an opportunity for developing a therapy against cytomegalovirus (CMV), the leading infectious cause of birth defects in the United States.
Researchers discovered a previously unappreciated mechanism by which CMV, a herpes virus that infects the majority of the world’s adult population, enters cells that line the blood vessels and contributes to vascular disease. In addition to using molecular machinery that is shared by all herpes viruses, CMV employs another molecular “key” that allows the virus to sneak through a side door and evade the body’s natural immune defenses.
The finding might explain why efforts to develop prophylactic treatments against CMV have, so far, been unsuccessful. This research also highlights a new potential avenue for the development of future antiviral drugs and suggests that other viruses of the herpes family, such as Epstein-Barr and chickenpox, could use similar molecular structures to spread from one infected cell to the next while avoiding immune detection.
“If we don’t know what weapons the enemy is using, it is hard to protect against it,” said senior author Jeremy Kamil, Ph.D., associate professor of microbiology and molecular genetics at Pitt. “We found a missing puzzle piece that represents one possible reason why immunization efforts against CMV have been unsuccessful.”
In the United States, approximately one in every 200 babies is born with congenital CMV infection. Of the babies infected, one in five will have birth defects, such as hearing loss, or go on to have long-term health challenges. For most adults, CMV infections are asymptomatic. But a CMV infection during pregnancy presents significant health risks to the unborn child and could be deadly for people who are immunosuppressed, including organ transplant recipients.
Because of the large size of its genome and its complicated molecular machinery, CMV long evaded attempts to develop prophylactic treatments. Similar to other herpes viruses, CMV relies on a protein called gH to enter cells of the vessel lining. But unlike other herpes viruses, which use a protein partner called gL to facilitate infection, the new study found that CMV replaces gL with another partner called UL116 and recruits a protein called UL141. The resulting complex of gH-UL116-UL141, called GATE by the authors, then becomes an alternative tool for breaking into cells lining the blood vessels and causing internal damage while simultaneously preventing the body’s own immune system from recognizing the signs of infection.
The newly discovered GATE could become a potential vaccine target for CMV and other herpes viruses.
“Previous attempts to generate a CMV vaccine have failed, but that was before we identified the GATE complex. We hope that new strategies targeting GATE will improve our chances to combat CMV infection, and also perhaps cleanse our bodies of this lifelong infection,” said Chris Benedict, Ph.D., associate professor at La Jolla Institute for Immunology and co-senior author of the study with Kamil and LJI professor, president & CEO Erica Ollmann Saphire, Ph.D., MBA. “If we can develop antiviral drugs or vaccines that inhibit CMV entry, this will allow us to combat the many diseases this virus causes in developing babies and immune-compromised people.”
Other authors of this research are Michael Norris, Ph.D., of the University of Toronto; Lauren Henderson, Mohammed Siddiquey, Ph.D., both of Louisiana State University Health Shreveport; and Jieyun Yin, Ph.D., Kwangsun Yoo, Ph.D., Simon Brunel, Ph.D., Michael Mor, Ph.D., and Erica Ollmann Saphire, Ph.D., all of La Jolla Institute for Immunology.
This research was supported by the National Institutes of Health (grants AI11685, AI139749, AI101423 and T32HL155022) and by ARPA-H APECx contract 1AY1AX000055.
Journal of Global Research and Analysis [Vol 14, Issue I]
About Journal of Global Research and Analysis (JGRA)
JGRA is a peer-reviewed bi-annual journal that aims to promote the most original and scholarly research. It is published by the Geeta Institute of Law (GIL) under the aegis of K. R. Education Society, Panipat.
Theme
There are no specific themes for writing a paper for JGRA. JGRA invites well- researched, quality contributions on the Contemporary issues in legal field. Moreover, as the journal encourages the multi-disciplinary approach, such submissions will be preferred.
Types of Submissions
JGRA is accepting submissions from the academicians, legal professionals, research scholars and students in the following categories:
- Long Articles (4000-7000, inclusive of footnotes)
Contributors in this category are intended to extensively engage with a particular legal issue of contemporary relevance while recognizing the lacunae and providing possible suggestions. - Essays/Short Articles (3000-5000, inclusive of footnotes)
This category targets at the precise analysis of a legal problem which poses serious reconsideration in present social scenario. - Case and Legislative Comments (2500-3000, inclusive of footnotes)
Authors are intended to present a critical approach to the contemporary legal pronouncements and legislative actions.
Submission Guidelines
- Long and short articles must be accompanied by an abstract of not more than 200 words.
- There can be a maximum of two authors in one submission.
- All manuscripts must be submitted in English language only.
- The research paper must be original and unpublished work of the author(s).
- The manuscript must be drafted in Times New Roman, font size 12, line spacing 1.5, justified alignment (except the title and ‘abstract’ caption which should be centrally aligned).
- Citation format: Journal will strictly follow the ILI Style of Footnoting. The footnotes must be type written in the font Times New Roman, font size 10, line spacing 1.0 and justified alignment.
- All entries should be submitted in .doc or .docx format.
- Any plagiarism shall attract immediate disqualification.
How to Submit?
- All the submissions must be sent in .doc format through electronic mode only by sending an email to [email protected] with the subject of mail as “Submission for Volume 14 (I) of JGRA”.
- All the contributors are also required to submit a cover letter containing the following information:
- Name of the author (s)
- Designation of author (s)
- Affiliation of the author (s)
- Contact number
- Title of the paper: The authors are also required to submit a declaration of originality and previously unpublished work. The declaration can be found attached as Annexure I.
Deadline
For Volume 14 Issue I: The contributors have to submit their research work on or before 31st July, 2025.
Publication Fee
No publication fee is charged by the Journal.
Contact
In case of any queries regarding JGRA, email us at Email address: [email protected].
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
5 popular monsoon trek trails in Karnataka and Maharashtra based on difficulty level: Easy to moderate and challenging | Travel
Jul 02, 2025 11:24 AM IST
Enjoy nature with a monsoon trek. To make the most of the experience, check the trail’s difficulty level to see if it’s your cup of tea.
For the adventure junkies who love the call of the nature, monsoon trekking is the ultimate way to experience nature at its wildest. It’s misty, messy and muddy as it tests your grit and stamina. So if you wish to test, pack the monsoon gear and head out for a trek. Who said trekking is solely for seasoned pros, even beginners, when they find the right trail, can enjoy it. HT Lifestyle reached out to experts who shared the best monsoon treks to explore and exactly what you should pack before hitting the trail.
ALSO READ: Rainscape movement: Top Indian destinations to enjoy monsoon this season
Mallika Sheth, partner at Tealfeel, a conscious luxury travel company, shared the top 5 monsoon trek destinations, as per difficulty level:
5 monsoon trekking trails
1. Rajmachi Fort Trek, Maharashtra
Trek level: Beginner
- Located between Lonavala and Karjat, this is one of Maharashtra’s most accessible monsoon treks.
- Expect misty valleys, gushing waterfalls and a backdrop of twin forts, Shrivardhan and Manaranjan.
- Stop by the Kondhane Caves en route for a quiet, moss-laden moment.
2. Kalsubai Peak, Maharashtra
Trek level: Moderate
- Standing as the highest peak in Maharashtra, Kalsubai (near Bhandardara) offers panoramic views of the Sahyadris wrapped in monsoon fog.
- Watch out for iron ladders along the route; it’s adventurous without being intimidating.
- Make time for a post-trek detour to the serene Arthur Lake.
3. Andharban Forest Trek, Maharashtra
Trek level: Moderate
- Translating to ‘dark forest,’ Andharban is a monsoon classic.
- This trail near Tamhini Ghat feels like walking through a rainforest, with mist-covered trees, valley views and constant drizzle.
- The descent takes you to Bhira Dam, which is a great wind-down spot.
4. Kudremukh Trek, Karnataka
Trek level: Moderate to Advanced
- One of Karnataka’s most stunning monsoon treks, Kudremukh is lush, dramatic and full of rolling meadows that feel straight out of Scotland.
- It’s about 6-7 hours from Bangalore and sits inside a biodiversity hotspot.
5. Harishchandragad via Nalichi Vaat, Maharashtra
Trek level: Advanced
- For serious trekkers, the Nalichi Vaat route to Harishchandragad is a vertical challenge, climbing rock patches through a narrow valley.
- Come for the thrill, stay for the Kedareshwar cave temple and Konkan Kada’s jaw-dropping cliff drop. Only attempt with a guide and the right gear.
Monsoon trek gear
Now that your monsoon trekking list is sorted, it’s time to be smart about how you pack your trek gear. From slippery trails to leeches, monsoon trekking trails present a lot of challenges, but the right gear helps you stay a step ahead.
Bhavna V, co-founder of Nysh.in shared with HT Lifestyle, eight requirements of monsoon trek gear:
1. Rain gear
- A reliable rain jacket and waterproof pants are non-negotiable for monsoon treks.
- Don’t forget a rain cover for your backpack, as torrential rain can seep through even the best covers.
- Plastic or dry bags inside your backpack can act as dividers to separate and protect what you’ve packed and snacks.
- Keep your gadgets safe with waterproof covers or pouches. This extra layer ensures your essentials stay dry even if your backpack gets wet.
2. Quick-dry clothing and spare essentials
- Choose quick-dry, moisture-wicking materials so you stay as dry and fresh as possible, either synthetic blends or merino wool.
- Avoid cotton, which absorbs moisture and leaves you cold.
- Bring extra socks and underclothing; socks, in particular, as they have a tendency to get soaked, and dry socks will keep blisters at bay.
- Put on all of the dry clothes you have when you get to the camp area to help prevent Hypothermia.
3. Medical must-haves
- Include painkillers.
- For headaches or muscle aches, cramp care, pain relief sprays or patches for sore muscles and joints, allergy medicines, and a variety of band-aids for minor cuts and blisters.
- If you have any personal medications, ensure they are clearly labelled and packed securely.
4. Food and hydration
- Pack high-energy snacks that are easy to eat on the move, such as nuts, energy bars, and dried fruits.
- Carry a reusable water bottle with a purification system or tablets, as streams may be contaminated. Electrolyte powders can help prevent dehydration and cramps.
5. Sturdy, water-resistant trekking shoes
- Choose shoes with excellent grip, ankle support, and quick-drying features to prevent slips and injuries.
- Water-resistant footwear with anti-slip soles helps you navigate muddy and slippery trails safely.
- Always pack extra socks to keep your feet dry and avoid blisters
6. Headlamp or flashlight
- A headlamp or flashlight is crucial if you get caught in low light or need to set up camp after sunset.
- Ensure you have extra batteries or a rechargeable option. Hands-free lighting is invaluable for navigating tricky terrain
7. Insect repellent
- Monsoon treks are breeding grounds for mosquitoes and leeches. Carry a DEET-based insect repellent or natural alternatives. Apply it to exposed skin and clothing.
- Consider anti-leech sprays or salt for leech-prone areas. Insect repellent helps prevent bites, infections, and discomfort.
- Carry an effective insect repellent, too, to keep these critters at bay.
- Even on overcast days, the sun’s UV rays can be strong, so apply sunscreen to protect your skin.
8. Multi-tool or knife
- A multi-tool or small knife is handy for repairs, food prep, or emergencies. Choose a compact, durable model.
- Multi-tools often include pliers, screwdrivers, and scissors. They can help you fix gear or clear obstacles. Always handle with care to avoid accidents.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
Sodium channel blockers for pain: New opportunities after Vertex’s ‘watershed’ moment
In the notoriously expensive business of drug development, SiteOne Therapeutics made do with little. The biotechnology startup formed in 2010, aiming to create new, non-addictive pain relievers at a time when overdoses involving opioids were killing more than 20,000 people in the U.S. each year.
Yet the dire need for safer medications didn’t resonate with most investors. To them, pain was too risky. Scientists knew the general outline of how it worked: a cut, scald, break, pinch, slam or zap would alert special proteins and chemicals, which, like sentries, relay pain signals through the body. But the finer details of this process were — and, in many cases, still are — fuzzy, like how people who suffer the same injuries can report very different pain experiences.
This uncertainty meant SiteOne had to, for most of its life, rely on small grants to stay afloat. “There was certainly a difficult period,” CEO John Mulcahy said late last year. “Pain was out of favor, so it was difficult to raise capital around these assets.”
That period now appears over. In the last eight months, SiteOne not only closed a $100 million fundraising round led by Novo Holdings, the controlling stakeholder of Ozempic-maker Novo Nordisk, but also agreed to sell to Eli Lilly in a deal that could be worth up to $1 billion.
The newfound interest and investment can be attributed, in good part, to Vertex Pharmaceuticals, which has led the charge investigating a group of tube-shaped, pain-regulating proteins called sodium ion channels. After a quarter century of meticulous, onerous work, Vertex’s labs finally crafted a channel-blocking molecule the company viewed as safe, effective and precise enough to help address the opioid epidemic.
In January, the Food and Drug Administration approved this molecule, known commercially as Journavx, as a treatment for the sharp, short-lived “acute” pain felt after an accident or surgery. Ken Harrison, a senior partner at Novo Holdings, said a core reason his firm decided to back SiteOne was that Vertex had established these drugs can be successfully studied and brought to market.
While Journavx has so far proven remarkably safe and absent of addictive properties, doctors remain torn about how useful it will ultimately be for patients. At its best, the drug looks to be only as potent as a weak opioid. At least 5,800 Journavx prescriptions were written during the third week of June; millions more will need to come for it to meet Wall Street’s blockbuster forecasts.
Still, TD Cowen analysts recently described the drug’s approval as a “watershed moment that could pave the way for a new era of non-opioid pain treatments.” Indeed, SiteOne and at least 10 other developers want to follow in Vertex’s footsteps with their own medicines that stopper either the “NaV1.8” sodium ion channel, as Journavx does, or a close cousin, “NaV1.7.”
A person holds two pills of Vertex Pharmaceuticals’ new drug for moderate-to-severe pain, Journavx.
Permission granted by Vertex Pharmaceuticals
What are sodium channel inhibitors, and how do they work?
Found in the outermost layers of many cells, these proteins function like faucets for charged sodium particles. They open in response to various stimuli — a bright light switching on, a bite of a salty food, a handful of ice from the freezer — at which point ions flood into the cell. This rush creates an electrical pulse that travels through the nervous system and to the brain, where it’s used as information to determine how the body should feel and react.
Of the nine known types of sodium ion channels, three are primarily found in the peripheral nervous system, where they play key roles in pain signaling. The signaling process resembles a line of dominoes. At the start is the root of the pain, at the end the brain. By blocking these channels, scientists are effectively removing a couple of the earliest tiles so they can’t continue the cascade.
“You’re stopping the pain as close as you can to the source,” and leaving “other modalities of sensory signaling intact,” explained Stephen Waxman, a neurology professor at the Yale School of Medicine who’s made significant discoveries about the role ion channels play in pain, on a 2023 podcast run by The New England Journal of Medicine.
For drugmakers, NaV1.7 and NaV1.8 have emerged as the two most popular pain targets. One reason is their location; being on the outer edge of the nervous system, rather than thoroughly embedded in organs like the heart or brain, reduces the risk that channel-blocking drugs will disrupt other vital body functions.
These proteins also work in different ways, offering researchers a shot at treating a variety of pain types. NaV1.7 acts like a light switch, abruptly turning the pain signal on and off, while NaV1.8 is more akin to a dimmer. SiteOne’s Mulcahy has said NaV1.8 could therefore be a more desirable target for chronic pain management, since the goal there usually is not to shut pain off, but to dial it back down to “normal.”
Designing medicines that bind to a specific sodium channel remains exceptionally challenging, as the subtypes all share very similar structures. Additionally, the proteins move extremely fast — opening and closing in milliseconds — and are exposed to relatively large electrical fields. Only in the last 15 or so years, with the creation of new tools, have drugmakers been able to adequately study and precisely drug ion channels.
What are the advantages over other drugs for pain?
Scientists believe that, by avoiding the central nervous system, sodium channel blockers can alleviate pain without eliciting the side effects or addictive risks posed by opioids. The late-stage studies that led to Journavx’s approval support this theory.
Together, the two trials recruited more than 2,000 people who had just undergone either a “tummy tuck” surgery or a bunion removal. Participants received either Vertex’s drug, a placebo, or a combination of Tylenol and a commonly prescribed opioid that served as an “active comparator.” Investigators found lower rates of nausea, dizziness and headache among those given Journavx than in the other groups.
Journavx was generally safe and well-tolerated, according to Vertex, and nearly all of the adverse events seen in these studies were mild to moderate in severity. Drug-treated patients did, however, show higher rates of itchiness, rash and muscle spasms compared to their placebo-treated counterparts.
As for its effectiveness, Journavx proved significantly better than the placebo at alleviating acute pain. Both trials measured this with a 0-to-10 scale wherein patients rate their pain intensity at a series of time intervals over two days.
Notably, the drug was not more effective than the active comparator regimen. That’s raised debate about its ultimate utility in a setting like acute pain, where both patients and healthcare providers are typically looking for a powerful, quick-acting medication. While Vertex leadership has maintained this finding won’t deter doctors from prescribing Journavx, some pain experts have described the pill’s effects as modest. Richard Vaglienti, medical director of the Center for Integrative Pain Management at West Virginia University, even classified the results as “glaring.”
That could leave the door open for other developers to compete — even those working outside the field of sodium ion channels. In May, Pittsburgh-based Viatris reported positive results from late-stage studies evaluating a reformulated version of an old medication, an “NSAID” called meloxicam, in people who had bunion removal or hernia repair surgeries. Viatris said its drug didn’t just beat a placebo at providing acute pain relief, an after-the-fact analysis found it also offered “significantly superior pain control” to tramadol, an opioid less potent than the one used in Vertex’s studies.
Following this release, Brian Skorney, an analyst at the investment firm Baird, noted how Viatris’ data “highlight a number of concerns we have with Journavx’s profile, in particular, onset of action, a critical factor for post-operative pain.”
The results, Skorney argued, make Journavx “look like an inferior option” compared to a “pretty old” drug. “If NSAID’s don’t have the highest efficacy, as Vertex is fond of saying, what does that say about Journavx?” he wrote.
Select companies developing sodium channel inhibitors for pain
| Company | Program name | Target / type of pain | Stage of development |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vertex Pharmaceuticals | suzetrigine | NaV1.8 / acute and chronic | Approved / Phase 3 |
| Latigo Biotherapeutics | LTG001 | NaV1.8 / acute | Phase 2 |
| Dogwood Therapeutics | Halneuron | NaV1.7 / neuropathic | Phase 2 |
| Newron Pharmaceuticals | ralfinamide | NaV1.7 / neuropathic | Prior testing completed |
| SiteOne Therapeutics | STC-004 | NaV1.8 / acute and chronic | Phase 2 ready |
| Channel Therapeutics* | CT8464, CC2000, CC3000 | NaV1.7 / chronic and eye | Phase 2 ready / Phase 1 |
| Sangamo Therapeutics | ST-503 | NaV1.7 / chronic | Phase 1 |
| Xenon Pharmaceuticals | Undisclosed | NaV1.7 / undisclosed | Preclinical |
| Navega Therapeutics | NT-Z001 | NaV1.7 / chronic | Preclinical |
| Praxis Precision Medicines | vormatrigine | NaV1.7 and NaV1.8** | Undisclosed |
| RaQualia Pharma / Himitsu Pharmaceutical | RQ-00350215 | Undisclosed / chronic** | Undisclosed |
*Channel Therapeutics is being merged into Pelthos Therapeutics via a deal expected to close in summer 2025. **Specific sodium channel target and/or type of pain not disclosed. SOURCE: Companies, clinicaltrials.gov
Which companies are developing NaV1.7 and NaV1.8 inhibitors?
The majority of developers researching sodium ion channels for pain are small biotechs.
One, Dogwood Therapeutics, formed late last year through the reverse merger of Wex Pharmaceuticals and Virios Therapeutics. It had 12 full-time employees at the end of December. Another, Channel Therapeutics, had four, and is now in the process of combining with a subsidiary of drug commercialization specialist Ligand Pharmaceuticals.
Such deals could suggest that, while this area is receiving more attention, building a company around it remains challenging and may require less conventional methods for raising money at a time when investors are viewing biotech more skeptically.
Other players include Praxis Precision Medicines, Newron Pharmaceuticals, RaQualia Pharma and Xenon Pharmaceuticals. Two more, Sangamo Therapeutics and privately held Navega Therapeutics, are taking a genetic approach, with therapies built to suppress the gene that encodes for NaV1.7 proteins.
Latigo Biotherapeutics is further ahead, and like SiteOne touts a drug aimed at NaV1.8 in mid-stage testing. That drug, LTG001, is being evaluated in acute pain following a tummy tuck, bunionectomy or wisdom teeth removal.
Latigo is backed by prominent life sciences investors such as Westlake Village BioPartners, 5AM Ventures and Alexandria Venture Investments, and in March announced the closing of a $150 million funding round that CEO Nima Farzan said should keep the company going at least until it has late-stage data for LTG001.
Vertex and Eli Lilly, with its pending purchase of SiteOne, currently appear to be the sole big pharmaceutical firms in this space, though others have shown interest. AbbVie had “ABBV-318,” an oral molecule designed to inhibit both NaV1.7 and NaV1.8, but no longer lists the drug in its pipeline. Scientific American reported last year how Merck & Co.’s patent activity also suggests it may be stealthily exploring ion channels for pain.
A Merck spokesperson said the company is “committed to neuroscience research,” including chronic and acute pain. “At this time, it’s too early to share information related to sodium ion channel inhibitors, but we will continue to collaborate with scientists and investigators worldwide to advance innovation and find solutions that may address complex and debilitating neurological diseases.”
At Vertex, company leaders are trying to expand Journavx’s approval beyond acute pain and into chronic, though testing has thus far delivered mixed results. Vertex is working on a series of other, small molecule pain drugs, too, including a “next-generation” NaV1.8 inhibitor named VX-993.
The investment bank Stifel models Journavx sales reaching $1.1 billion in 2030 and $3.6 billion in 2038. The average analyst estimate on Wall Street, according to Stifel, is that sales of the drug will hit nearly $2 billion by the end of this decade.
What is the status of these companies’ research?
Vertex is now enrolling a Phase 3 study to evaluate Journavx as a treatment for the chronic nerve pain experienced by some patients with diabetes. Simultaneously, it’s running a smaller study of VX-993 in the same setting.
The assets from Latigo, Newron and Dogwood have either entered or gone through mid-stage trials. A roughly 250-participant study is exploring Latigo’s LTG001 for wisdom teeth removal pain, with results set to arrive sometime in the next couple months. The active ingredient in Dogwood’s Halneuron is actually the neurotoxin found in pufferfish. Investigators are now hoping to enroll about 200 patients in an experiment that will assess the drug as a treatment of chemotherapy-induced neuropathic pain.
Meanwhile, a federal database of clinical trials shows the most recent listings for Newron’s ralfinamide were last updated in 2009 and 2017. The Italy-based company didn’t respond to requests for more recent information about the program.
SiteOne hopes to “rapidly advance” into Phase 2 testing the medicine that caught Lilly’s eye and encouraged it to pursue an acquisition. Like Journavx, this “STC-004” therapy is designed to obstruct NaV1.8.
Mark Mintun, group vice president of Lilly’s neuroscience research and development, in May said that the company is “eager to continue” advancing STC-004. “Innovation in pain management is critical to address the unmet needs of millions of patients around the world.”
Are Short-Term Rentals Really the Villains in Australia’s Housing Crisis?
Key takeaways
Short-term rentals like Airbnb are not the cause of the housing crisis. While there are around 170,000 short-stay listings in Australia, that’s less than 2% of our total housing stock (~11 million dwellings).
Most of these properties are located in tourist areas, not in high-demand suburban rental markets. Think Byron Bay or Noosa—not where the bulk of renters live or want to live.
Many listings are part-time or not rental-ready (e.g., unsuitable layouts, limited amenities), and wouldn’t be viable or available as long-term rental properties anyway.
Over 90% of rental homes are provided by private investors, yet policy often treats them as scapegoats.
Rising taxes, reduced incentives, and restrictive rules are eroding investor confidence, pushing capital away from property and worsening the rental crisis.
Instead of recognising investors as part of the solution, they’re vilified, including for using properties in flexible or income-generating ways.
Every time housing affordability hits the headlines—as it has again this year with surging rents and limited supply—someone inevitably points the finger at property investors.
And lately, there’s been a particular focus on short-term rentals, like those listed on Airbnb, Stayz and other holiday letting platforms.
It’s a neat narrative: investors are allegedly hoarding homes for tourist dollars, keeping them out of the hands of Aussie families.
But like most neat narratives, this one doesn’t hold up to scrutiny.
It’s a simplistic answer to a complex, decades-in-the-making problem—and focusing on short-term rentals won’t solve our housing crisis. In fact, it risks distracting us from the real issues that need urgent attention.
Let’s pull apart the argument and look at the data, the unintended consequences of reactive policymaking, and what truly lies at the heart of our housing woes.
The myth of the short-term rental boogeyman
There are an estimated 170,000 short-term rental listings across Australia, according to CoreLogic, now Cotality, data.
But that number doesn’t tell the full story.
1. Scale matters
Australia has over 11 million residential dwellings.
Even if we take that 170,000 figure at face value (and many of those listings aren’t full-time short-term rentals), we’re talking about less than 2% of the housing stock.
What’s more, many of those properties are not in the suburbs, where housing stress is most acute.
They’re in coastal holiday towns, lifestyle areas, or high-tourism locations where demand for long-term rentals has always been low.
Areas like Byron Bay, the Mornington Peninsula, or Noosa have never been large contributors to mainstream rental stock.
2. They aren’t all “rental-ready”
Not every short-term rental is suitable or intended for long-term tenancy.
A beach shack with no heating or a CBD studio with no parking may work fine for tourists, but it’s not what a family of four or even a single professional is looking for in a long-term lease.
Many hosts also use their properties only part-time—think retirees who rent out their second home during the peak summer season or people who travel for work and lease their home while they’re away.
These homes were never on the permanent rental market and wouldn’t be, even if short-term platforms were banned.
What’s actually driving the housing crisis?
We don’t have a short-term rental problem. We have a housing supply crisis.
And it’s been brewing for over a decade.
1. We haven’t built enough
Australia’s housing construction pipeline has significantly lagged behind population growth.
Between 2012 and 2022, Australia’s population grew by more than 3.7 million people, but dwelling completions simply haven’t kept pace, especially in the areas where people actually want to live: near jobs, schools, transport, and amenities.
Now, with net overseas migration surging again (projected at over 500,000 people in FY24), we’re seeing record demand dumped onto a system that was already strained.
2. Planning bottlenecks
Councils often act as gatekeepers, not facilitators, when it comes to new housing supply.
Red tape, local opposition (NIMBYism), and lengthy approval timelines have made it incredibly difficult to get medium- or high-density developments off the ground in established suburbs.
It’s no surprise that most new supply ends up on the urban fringe, far from transport hubs and employment centres.
But that’s not where rental demand is highest.
3. Build-to-rent and social housing lag behind
Institutional investment in build-to-rent housing, while growing, is still in its infancy in Australia.
Meanwhile, government investment in social and affordable housing has plummeted as a share of total housing stock, from over 6% in the 1990s to just 3.8% today.
Who picked up the slack?
Everyday investors.
Private landlords now provide over 90% of all rental housing in this country, but they’ve been left to carry the burden without much thanks, and often with policy stacked against them.
The policy backlash: well-intentioned, poorly executed
Several state and local governments are now reacting to the headlines with proposals to restrict or heavily regulate short-term rentals:
-
Victoria has announced a 7.5% levy on short-stay properties from 2025, the first statewide tax of its kind.
-
NSW councils like Byron Shire and City of Sydney have pushed for caps of 180 days or less per year.
-
Tasmania and WA have launched registration schemes and public consultation processes, with the aim of limiting Airbnb’s reach.
But here’s the problem: these measures are unlikely to deliver meaningful results in the broader rental market.
Worse still, they could create new distortions.
1. Unintended consequences
Crackdowns on short-stay accommodation may push owners to leave properties empty, convert them into holiday homes not listed anywhere, or even sell out of frustration.
This doesn’t guarantee that those homes will become long-term affordable rentals.
It may just pull more rental stock out of the market altogether.
2. Investor uncertainty
What we’re seeing is a pattern of political volatility—frequent changes to investment rules, new taxes, and shifting goalposts.
This creates risk, and risk drives capital away.
Why would an investor put their money into property, with all its expenses and legislative complexity, when other asset classes offer more stability?
And yet, it’s the private investor that holds the key to rebuilding our rental supply in the near term.
We need more property investors, not fewer
Note: Let me be clear: property investors are not the enemy.
They are, in fact, a big part of the solution to our housing crisis.
In a system where governments are not building enough housing and institutions are only just getting started, it’s the mum-and-dad investors who step up, often risking their own financial comfort to provide homes for others.
But what are we doing?
We’re layering on compliance costs, reducing incentives, increasing land taxes, and now vilifying them for using their properties in ways that suit their lifestyle or income needs.
It’s self-defeating.
What actually needs to change?
We need to stop playing political whack-a-mole and start focusing on structural, long-term solutions.
That means:
-
Accelerating housing approvals – Reduce red tape and push for planning reform to unlock more medium-density housing in existing suburbs.
-
Rewarding supply creation – Use carrots, not sticks. Tax breaks, density bonuses, or infrastructure support can incentivise the right kinds of housing in the right places.
-
Supporting private investors – Stability and predictability in regulation are essential. Without investor confidence, supply dries up.
-
Expanding alternative housing models – Scale up institutional build-to-rent, co-living, and key worker housing.
-
Reinvesting in public housing – The government must lift its share of the burden for low-income Australians, rather than expecting the private market to do it all.
The bottom line
Short-term rentals are an easy target—but they’re not the core problem.
Our housing crisis is the result of years of underbuilding, restrictive planning, and policy uncertainty that have discouraged investment in the supply we desperately need.
Banning or taxing Airbnb might win some headlines, but it won’t build a single new home.
If we truly want to improve housing affordability and availability, we need to stop scapegoating investors and start supporting them.
As always, strategic investors will look beyond the noise.
They’ll focus on supply-demand fundamentals, buy well-located investment-grade assets, and play the long game.
Because when everyone else is chasing headlines, we’re chasing outcomes.
6 Privacy Tweaks Every Samsung User Needs to Make Now
On top of Android, Samsung’s One UI adds its own layer of software and services, each with separate settings, permissions, and default data-sharing options. So even if you’ve already tightened the Android’s core privacy controls on your Samsung phone, there’s still more to do.
6
Turn Off Samsung’s Diagnostic Data Collection
By default, Google collects all kinds of data, including how you use your device, your app activity, and details about your network connections. But even if you adjust Android’s privacy settings to limit what Google can track, manufacturers like Samsung often have their own data collection systems that run quietly in the background.
Samsung’s “Send diagnostic data” feature is one of those settings that’s turned on by default. According to Samsung, this data is used to improve the user experience and fix errors. But if the idea of ongoing data collection makes you uneasy, it’s possible to stop this.
On your Samsung phone, head to Settings > Security and privacy > More privacy settings and turn off the Send diagnostic data toggle.
5
Keep Galaxy AI Data on Your Device Only
Samsung’s high-end devices come packed with handy Galaxy AI features to make your everyday tasks easier. If you have a Galaxy device that supports it, AI can summarize webpages, transcribe voice notes, and even translate phone calls in real time. But convenience often comes with a cost, and in this case, it’s your data privacy.
By default, Galaxy AI sends your interactions to Samsung’s servers for processing, and the data is also used to improve the AI experience. If you’d rather keep everything on your device, though, there’s a quick setting you can switch to make that happen.
To do this, go to Settings > Galaxy AI and turn on Process data only on device. This keeps all AI-related data processing on your device. However, there is a trade-off. Since some of the more advanced Galaxy AI features depend on cloud processing, you’ll lose access to tools like chat translation, note summarization, and generative photo editing.
4
Use Private Share for Safer File Transfers
Sharing files from your Samsung phone is something you probably do all the time. But you don’t have to rely solely on Android’s Quick Share. Your Samsung phone includes a feature called Private Share, which is more privacy-focused.
This encrypts your files before sending them and gives you full control over who can access them, for how long, and how they can interact with them. You can set an expiration date, make files read-only, and even block screenshots on the recipient’s device.
Once a file is sent through Private Share, only the recipient can view it. And if you change your mind, the services allows you to revoke access at any time. To use Private Share, open the share menu and select Quick Share. Then, tap the three-dot menu in the top-right corner and choose Turn on Private sharing. From there, set an expiration date and choose which contacts can access the file.
Of course, Samsung’s Private Share feature only works with Galaxy phones and laptops. So if you need to share something with someone using an iPhone or a Windows laptop, you’ll have to use other methods.
3
Regularly Review Your Privacy Dashboard
It’s easy to forget about apps on your phone that quietly collect data in the background. Some may only need limited access to function properly, yet they might continue to tap into your location, microphone, contacts, and more. The Privacy Dashboard feature can help you stay on top of exactly which apps are doing what, and how often.
To access it, go to Settings > Security and privacy > Permissions used in last 24 hours. You’ll see a breakdown of which apps have accessed sensitive data like your contacts, calendar, location, photos, and microphone over the past day. For a broader view, tap the drop-down menu to expand the timeline to the past 7 days. You can also tap the small i icon at the top of the screen for more specific details about what each permission controls.
Tap any listed permission to see exactly when and how often it was used, complete with timestamps. If you want to check permission usage by app, switch to the Apps tab. If something seems off—like a game accessing your contacts—tap it and select Don’t allow. If you don’t use that app or game, it’s a good idea to uninstall it.
Doing this once a week can help you catch overreaching apps before they become a problem. That said, it’s always best to review an app’s permissions before you install it.
2
Tighten Privacy Settings for Bixby and Samsung Internet
Bixby might not be the most popular Samsung feature, but it’s deeply integrated into the system. And if you haven’t disabled Bixby on your phone, you need to review what data it has access to.
Start by heading to Settings > Advanced features > Bixby. Here, tap Offline processing and make sure it’s enabled. This will ensure that voice commands are handled directly on the device rather than being sent to Samsung’s servers, whenever possible.
Next, scroll down and go to Privacy settings in the Bixby settings menu. Turn off both Allow audio recording review and Allow voiceprint review. These options let Samsung store and review voice recordings and voiceprint data, which isn’t necessary if you are not comfortable with it.
Samsung Internet is a solid alternative to Chrome and other browsers; if you use it regularly, it’s worth tweaking its privacy settings too. In the Samsung Internet app, tap the Menu icon and select Privacy. Tap on Smart anti-tracking and select Strict. This setting automatically deletes tracking cookies and blocks most attempts by websites to track your activity.
While you’re there, it’s a good idea to enable other protective features too, like Block unwanted downloads, Block pop-ups, and Warn about malicious sites.
1
Protect Sensitive Files With Secure Folder
You’ve hopefully already set up a lock screen PIN or password to protect the data on your phone. But if you have specific apps, photos, videos, or documents you want to keep extra private, Samsung’s Secure Folder can help.
Secure Folder is a protected, encrypted space within your Samsung phone. It acts like a vault and keeps anything inside it isolated from the rest of your phone. Files and apps stored here don’t show up in your main storage, gallery, or app drawer, and they’re accessible only after you unlock the Secure Folder. It’s an extra layer of security that helps keep your private data truly private.
To use Secure Folder, go to Settings > Security and Privacy > More security settings > Secure Folder, then follow the prompts to set it up. Once it’s ready, you can move photos, videos, and files into it, or even add apps. This lets you run two copies of the same app, each with its own separate data. It’s especially useful for messaging or banking apps, or if you keep separate accounts for work and personal use.
It’s even possible to hide the Secure Folder icon from the app drawer, so there’s no chance of someone accidentally stumbling across it.
Out of the box, your Samsung phone comes with several settings that quietly share more data than you might realize. All it takes is a few quick tweaks to take control of your data and enjoy a more private experience on your Galaxy device. These changes don’t take long to set up, so make sure you don’t skip them.
Xinjiang in focus: Dates of prosperity
In the orchards of Xinjiang’s Ruoqiang County, the red dates of Gule Airike Village hang heavy on the branches, filling the air with a sweet fragrance as the harvest season unfolds. Amid the bustling activity of farmers and merchants, a quiet battle over price is taking place. Village chief Jia Hui is locked into negotiations over the difference between 8.3 yuan and 8.5 yuan. This seemingly tiny margin could mean thousands of extra yuan in income for the villagers – a reflection of their tireless work throughout the year.
But what makes these dates so special? Ruoqiang dates are known for their thick flesh, rich flavor, and high sugar content, all thanks to the region’s unique climate – long sunny days and large temperature fluctuations between day and night. These conditions give the dates a taste that’s second to none.
Each date is a testament to the farmers’ dedication, and every bit of income symbolizes their aspirations for a brighter future. This story isn’t just about numbers – it’s about the journey of Ruoqiang dates, the hopes they carry, and their potential to shine far beyond. What lies ahead for these delicious fruits? The answer may surprise you.
Frederick M. Nicholas dead: Lawyer shaped MOCA, Disney Concert Hall
Frederick M. Nicholas, a war hero, attorney and real estate developer who shaped several of Los Angeles’ major arts and public service institutions, died peacefully at his home Saturday. He was 105.
Nicholas led the design and development of major L.A. landmarks, including the Museum of Contemporary Art and Walt Disney Concert Hall.
Surprisingly enough, Nicholas discovered his love of the arts in law school at the University of Chicago. “When I went downtown, I saw an art gallery for the first time,” he said in a 2022 YouTube interview with Blake Meidel, a young film creator. “I went inside and I looked at it and I was overwhelmed.”
When he returned to L.A., where he had studied journalism at USC, Nicholas took classes in the visual arts and built a law practice that included representation of artists and galleries. He took on several distinguished roles in the arts community, serving as MOCA’s chairman and vice chairman for a cumulative 11 years and a life trustee for the remainder of his life. Nicholas was instrumental to the development of the Geffen Contemporary at MOCA and Walt Disney Concert Hall.
It is little wonder that he was nicknamed “Mr. Downtown Culture.” In the 1980s, Nicholas led the city out of a cultural stasis and turned it into a global cultural and architectural powerhouse.
“Fred, we literally wouldn’t be L.A. without you,” former mayor Eric Garcetti said in a message to Nicholas on his 100th birthday.
Renowned architect Frank Gehry told The Times that Nicholas’ involvement in MOCA “was too good to be true.”
“He is an extremely smart man, and he’s sensitive. He’s been involved in and interested in the arts as a collector,” Gehry said in 1982. “He understands both the architecture and business of development. He knows all the players involved with the museum, and he has their respect. When I heard he was involved I thought it was too good to be true. I know he can pull it off.”
Nicholas negotiated with Giuseppe Panza of Varese, Italy, to acquire the Panza Collection. Including works from Mark Rothko, Franz Kline and others, the art now forms the core of MOCA’s permanent collection.
As chair of the Walt Disney Hall Concert Committee beginning in 1987, Nicholas headed a committee to find an architect (Gehry was eventually hired for the coveted gig), fundraise and plan the building process.
Over 105 years, Nicholas engaged with some of history’s greatest artists. “I met Pablo Picasso and I had dinner with him,” he told Meidel breezily.
Nicholas’ influence in L.A. extended into the realm of public service as well. After an incredibly successful law career, he shifted to pro bono work. “I thought that lawyers should do something to help the poor,” Nicholas told Meidel. Nicholas founded Public Counsel in 1970, which provided legal support to vulnerable people, including veterans and unhoused families, in what is now the largest firm of its kind in the U.S.
“Public Counsel really is his greatest legacy,” Nicholas’ son, Anthony Nicholas, told The Times on Tuesday. “They are still helping people today.”
Nicholas was born on May 30, 1920 in Brooklyn, N.Y. When he was 14, his family moved to L.A. In 1941, Nicholas served in the Army and was discharged five years later.
“One of the things that made me successful in law was that I was always in a hurry. I was always eager to move because I felt that I had lost so much time in the war. I had to make it up,” Nicholas, one of the oldest and most decorated WWII veterans, said in a retrospective on his life and work at age 100.
Nicholas was also adored by his family. Anthony recalled his father’s “beaming smile,” “great, great energy” and “the love he spread around the world.”
Nicholas is survived by his children, Deborah, Jan and Anthony; Anthony’s wife Mona; six grandchildren; three great-grandchildren; and sister Helen Devor.
Hyundai Motor Sales 2025: South Korean Carmaker Witnesses 1.5% Rise in June Sales Due to Increased Domestic and International Demand
Seoul, July 1: Hyundai Motor, South Korea’s biggest carmaker, said on Tuesday its sales gained 1.5 per cent in June from a year earlier, thanks to increased demand both at home and abroad. Hyundai sold 358,891 vehicles last month, up from 353,566 units a year earlier, the company said in a press release. Domestic sales rose 3.8 percent from 59,804 to 62,064 units, while overseas sales gained 1 percent to 358,891 from 353,566, reports Yonhap news agency.
“Sales increased both domestically and overseas due to the expanded sales of various models,” a company official said, adding, “We will continue to maintain sales momentum by launching competitive new vehicles in the future.” From January to June, cumulative sales edged up 0.1 percent to 2,066,425 vehicles from 2,063,844 in the same period last year. Domestic sales rose 2.7 percent to 354,900 units from 354,704, while overseas sales fell 0.4 percent to 1,711,525 from 1,718,140. Ola Electric Sales in June 2025: Bhavish Aggarwal’s EV Firm Sees Massive 45% YoY Drop in Sales Last Month, Market Share Down 19%.
Meanwhile, Kia said its sales edged up 0.2 percent in June from a year earlier, while its first-half sales hit an all-time high on steady overseas demand for sport utility vehicles (SUVs). Kia, a smaller affiliate of local industry leader Hyundai Motor Co., sold 269,652 vehicles in June, slightly up from 269,201 units a year ago, the company said. Domestic sales rose 4.5 percent on-year to 46,003 units last month, while overseas sales retreated 0.8 percent to 222,997. In the January-June period, cumulative sales rose 2 percent to 1,587,161 units from 1,555,697 a year earlier, marking Kia’s highest-ever six-month performance. Audi India Sales 2025: German Luxury Car Maker Sells 2,128 Units in Country in January-June Period This Year, Positive on Growth in 2nd Half.
The figure surpassed the previous record of 1,576,016 units in the first half of 2023. The Sportage compact SUV was the top-selling model in the six-month period, with 283,512 units sold globally, followed by the subcompact Seltos at 151,049 units and the mid-sized Sorento at 137,461 units.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jul 01, 2025 03:24 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Here’s What Mark Zuckerberg Is Offering Top AI Talent
As Mark Zuckerberg staffs up Meta’s new superintelligence lab, he’s offered top tier research talent pay packages of up to $300 million over four years, with more than $100 million in total compensation for the first year, WIRED has learned.
Meta has made at least 10 staggeringly high offers to OpenAI staffers, sources say. One high ranking researcher was pitched on the role of chief scientist but turned it down, according to multiple sources with direct knowledge of the negotiations. While the pay package includes equity, in the first year the stock vests immediately, sources say.
“That’s about how much it would take for me to go work at Meta,” says one OpenAI staffer who spoke with WIRED on the condition of anonymity as they aren’t authorized to speak publicly about the company. Other employees said that they were weighing the money against the potential impact they could have at Meta in comparison to OpenAI. Several believed their impact would be greater at OpenAI.
“These statements are untrue – the size and structure of these compensation packages have been misrepresented all over the place,” says Meta spokesperson Andy Stone. “Some people have chosen to greatly exaggerate what’s happening for their own purposes.”
A senior engineer who spoke to WIRED confirmed their pay was around $850,000 per year at Meta—an impressive sum that pales in comparison to the packages currently on offer. Those in the pay band above this engineer (E7’s, in Meta terms) make on average $1.54 million a year, according to user data submitted on Levels.FYI.
Andrew Bosworth, chief technology officer at Meta, said that not everyone is getting a $100 million offer during a Q&A with employees last week. “Look, you guys, the market’s hot. It’s not that hot. Okay? So it’s just a lie,” he said. “We have a small number of leadership roles that we’re hiring for, and those people do command a premium.” He added that the $100 million is not a sign-on bonus, but “all these different things” and noted OpenAI is countering the offers.
As a point of comparison, Satya Nadella, CEO of Microsoft, received $79.1 million in total compensation in 2024, most of it in stock, according to a financial filing by the company. Dara Khosrowshahi, the CEO of Uber, made roughly $39.4 million (again, mostly in stock) the same year.
On Monday, Mark Zuckerberg sent a note to Meta staff introducing the new superintelligence team. Alexandr Wang, formerly the CEO of Scale AI, is now Meta’s chief AI officer, Zuckerberg said. He’s joined by Nat Friedman who previously led GitHub. Together, Wang and Friedman will colead an organization Zuckerberg dubbed the Meta Superintelligence Labs. The company did not name a chief scientist or a chief research officer as part of the announcement. Neither Wang nor Friedman are thought of as researchers, at least in the traditional sense. None of the OpenAI staffers who left for Meta received the $300 million offer, according to a source with knowledge of the contracts.
Inmigrantes en California dudan en pedir cobertura médica por miedo a ser deportados
Durante meses, María, de 55 años, cuidadora de adultos mayores en el condado de Orange, se ha esforzado por no sonreír.
Le preocupa que si abre demasiado la boca, la gente vea sus dientes astillados y cubiertos de placa. Inmigrante sin papeles, María no tiene seguro médico ni dental. Cuando le empiezan a doler los dientes, toma analgésicos. El verano pasado, un dentista le dijo que arreglarle la dentadura le costaría $2.400. Es más de lo que puede permitirse.
“Es carísimo”, dijo María, quien generalmente trabaja 12 horas al día subiendo y bajando de la cama a clientes y ayudándolos con la higiene, a tomar los medicamentos y con las tareas del hogar. “Necesito dinero para mis hijos, para el alquiler, para el transporte, para la comida. A veces, no me queda nada para mí”.
Una organización de defensa de los trabajadores inmigrantes puso en contactó a KFF Health News con María. Por temor a la deportación, pidió que solo se usara su nombre de pila en este artículo.
María se encuentra entre los 2.6 millones de inmigrantes que viven en California sin estatus legal, según estimaciones del gobierno federal.
El estado había buscado gradualmente incorporar a estos inmigrantes a su programa de Medicaid, conocido como Medi-Cal.
Pero ahora, ante el congelamiento de las inscripciones estatales, los residentes californianos de bajos ingresos que se encuentran en el país sin papeles, junto con los proveedores y trabajadores comunitarios que los ayudan, evalúan con inquietud los beneficios de avanzar con las solicitudes de Medi-Cal frente a los riesgos de ser descubiertos y deportados por el gobierno federal.
La Legislatura de California, que busca cerrar un déficit presupuestario proyectado de $12 mil millones, aprobó una propuesta del gobernador demócrata Gavin Newsom para finalizar la inscripción en Medi-Cal en enero de 2026 para los mayores de 19 años sin estatus legal. Los legisladores están en proceso de definir los detalles finales del acuerdo presupuestario antes de que entre en marcha el nuevo año fiscal.
Mientras tanto, las redadas federales de inmigración, que parecen haber afectado al menos a una clínica de salud en el estado, ya están provocando que algunas personas teman buscar atención médica, según defensores de los inmigrantes y proveedores de salud.
Y se espera que la reciente noticia de que funcionarios de la administración Trump están compartiendo datos de los beneficiarios de Medicaid, incluyendo su estatus migratorio, con las autoridades de inmigración erosione aún más la confianza en el programa.
Andrew Nixon, vocero del Departamento de Salud y Servicios Humanos de Estados Unidos (HHS), afirmó que la agencia, que supervisa los Centros de Servicios de Medicare y Medicaid (CMS), tenía la autoridad legal para compartir los datos y abordar la “negligencia sistémica sin precedentes bajo la administración Biden-Harris, que permitió que inmigrantes indocumentados explotaran Medicaid mientras millones de estadounidenses luchaban por acceder a la atención médica, particularmente en estados como California”.
Para complicar aún más la situación, la administración Trump ha amenazado con retener los fondos de estados que ofrecen cobertura médica a personas sin estatus legal.
Actualmente, alrededor de 1.6 millones de personas que residen en el país sin documentos están inscritas en Medi-Cal.
En 2016, California comenzó a ampliar Medi-Cal a personas de bajos ingresos sin estatus legal, comenzando con los niños, y luego lo expandió gradualmente a jóvenes, adultos mayores y, en enero de este año, a personas de entre 26 y 49 años. El Departamento de Servicios de Atención Médica del estado, que supervisa Medi-Cal, se asoció con clínicas de salud comunitarias para ayudar a inscribir a las personas elegibles.
Es demasiado pronto para determinar el impacto que las últimas acciones estatales y federales estén teniendo en las cifras de inscripción, ya que los datos solo están disponibles hasta marzo. Sin embargo, muchos proveedores y defensores afirmaron que prevén un efecto negativo en la inscripción de inmigrantes, por miedo.
Seciah Aquino es directora ejecutiva de la Latino Coalition for a Healthy California, que apoya a los promotores de salud comunitarios, quienes ayudan a difundir la expansión de Medi-Cal a los adultos sin papeles. Poco más de la mitad de los beneficiarios del seguro médico público en California son latinos, en comparación con solo el 30% de los beneficiarios de Medicaid en todo el país.
Aquino afirmó que su coalición les pedirá a los promotores que informen sobre los riesgos de compartir datos para que los miembros de la comunidad puedan tomar decisiones informadas. “Se toman muy en serio que el consejo que le dieron a un miembro de la comunidad ahora pueda perjudicarlos”, expresó.
Newsom condenó el intercambio de datos, calificándolo de “legalmente dudoso”, mientras que los senadores nacionales Adam Schiff y Alex Padilla, ambos demócratas, han exigido que el Departamento de Seguridad Nacional (DHS) destruya cualquier dato compartido.
El Departamento de Servicios de Atención Médica de California anunció el 13 de junio que estaba solicitando más información al gobierno federal. La agencia dijo que enviaba informes mensuales a los CMS con información demográfica y de elegibilidad, incluyendo nombre y dirección, según lo exige la ley.
De acuerdo a lo informado, también se compartieron con el DHS datos de los afiliados a Medicaid de Illinois, el estado de Washington y Washington, D.C.
Jamie Munks, vocera del Departamento de Atención Médica y Servicios de Familia de Illinois, la agencia estatal de Medicaid, afirmó que el departamento estaba “profundamente preocupado” por la noticia, y que los datos se transmitían regularmente a los CMS con el entendimiento de que estaban protegidos.
En Sacramento, los legisladores demócratas se encontraron en la incómoda situación de tener que reducir los beneficios de salud para residentes de bajos ingresos con un estatus migratorio insatisfactorio, incluyendo personas sin estatus legal, personas con residencia permanente (green card o tarjeta verde) por menos de cinco años, y algunas otras que están en proceso de solicitar un estatus legal o tienen estatus que los protege de la deportación.
Además de apoyar el congelamiento de la inscripción a Medi-Cal para inmigrantes mayores de 19 años que residen en el país sin documentos, los legisladores acordaron cobrar primas mensuales a todos los residentes con un estatus migratorio insatisfactorio de entre 19 y 59 años. Newsom propuso una prima mensual de $100 a partir de enero de 2027; los legisladores estatales contraofertaron una de $30 a partir de julio de 2027.
“Lo que escucho en los sitios es que la gente me dice que les va a resultar muy difícil realizar estos pagos de primas, ya sean de $100 o $30”, dijo Carlos Alarcón, analista de políticas de salud y beneficios públicos del California Immigrant Policy Center, un grupo de defensa. “La realidad es que la mayoría de la gente ya tiene presupuestos limitados”.
La Legislatura rechazó una propuesta del gobernador para prohibir que los inmigrantes con un estatus migratorio insatisfactorio reciban atención de largo plazo en residencias de adultos mayores y atención domiciliaria a través de Medi-Cal, pero aceptó la eliminación de los beneficios dentales a partir de julio de 2026.
Los proveedores de atención médica afirmaron que, sin cobertura de Medi-Cal, muchos inmigrantes se verán obligados a buscar atención de emergencia, que es más costosa para los contribuyentes que la atención preventiva y de nivel primario.
Sepideh Taghvaei, directora dental de Dientes Community Dental Care del condado de Santa Cruz, presenció este fenómeno en 2009, cuando el estado recortó los beneficios dentales de Medi-Cal para adultos. Los pacientes llegaban con la cara hinchada y un dolor insoportable, con afecciones tan avanzadas que requerían tratamiento hospitalario. “No es rentable”, afirmó.
El senador estatal Roger Niello, republicano y vicepresidente del comité de presupuesto del Senado, afirmó que cree que California no debería financiar Medi-Cal para personas sin estatus legal, especialmente considerando los desafíos fiscales del estado. También expresó su preocupación por la posibilidad de que la cobertura para quienes residen en el país sin papeles anime a otros a mudarse a California.
“Si mantenemos ese gasto para los no ciudadanos, tendremos que recortar en otras áreas, y eso sin duda afectará a los ciudadanos”, aseguró.
Los californianos también están cambiando de opinión. En una encuesta realizada en mayo por el Public Policy Institute of California, el 58% de los adultos se opuso al beneficio.
Para María, los cambios en las políticas de salud la han dejado paralizada. Desde que llegó aquí hace cinco años, su prioridad ha sido ganar dinero para mantener a sus tres hijos, a quienes dejó con sus padres en su país de origen, contó.
La mujer no se enteró de que podría ser elegible para Medi-Cal hasta principios de este año y no había tenido tiempo de completar el papeleo. Después que una amiga le dijera que el estado podría congelar la inscripción en enero, comenzó a apresurarse para completar el proceso de inscripción.
Pero entonces se enteró de que los datos de Medi-Cal se habían compartido con las autoridades de inmigración. “Decepcionada y asustada”, así describió su reacción.
De repente, inscribirse en Medi-Cal ya no le parece buena idea, dijo.
Phil Galewitz y Bram Sable-Smith contribuyeron con este artículo.
Esta historia fue producida por KFF Health News, que publica California Healthline, un servicio editorialmente independiente de la California Health Care Foundation.
Marvel Rivals Season 3 Adds Phoenix And Blade, Introduces New Villain
Jean Grey aka Phoenix has been rumored to be Marvel Rivals bound for a while, and now it’s official. NetEase has confirmed that Phoenix will arrive in Marvel Rivals Season 3 alongside Blade, the popular vampire hunter. But their mutual enemy won’t be Dracula or any of the undead. Instead, the heroes of Marvel Rivals will be going up against one of Venom’s deadliest foes: Knull, the King in Black and the God of Symbiotes.
Season 3 is subtitled “The Abyss Awakens,” and it’s going to launch on July 11. Phoenix will be joining the roster right away, and she will be classified as a Duelist. Even without the Phoenix Force, Jean is an immensely powerful telepath and telekinetic mutant. With the Phoenix at her command, Jean is fire and life incarnate, and imbued with the power of creation itself.
Marvel Rivals’ new map, Klyntar: Celestial Husk, as a link to the Guardians of the Galaxy’s favorite hangout, Knowhere. The entirety of Knowhere was constructed inside the severed head of a dead Celestial. The Celestial Husk is the rest of that Celestial’s body.
In the Marvel Universe, Klyntar was believed to be the homeworld of the Symbiotes. Instead, it turned out to be the place where they imprisoned Knull eons ago. Once Knull is free, he can reclaim control of the Symbiotes and unleash mayhem in the universe.
Blade is being held back for the second half of Season 3 alongside a new competitive mode, but in the meantime there will be new features, a battle pass, system updates, and four new Team-ups. NetEase is overhauling Marvel Rivals’ mission system and adding a new layer of customization to the accessories system.
NetEase is also offering verified university students free access to costume trials that will rotate each season. For now, this offer is limited to the US, the UK, and a few other places, but more regions will be added later. And going forward, Marvel Rivals will launch a new season every two months.
Fans heading to San Diego Comic-Con later this month will be able to visit the Marvel Rivals experience at the Marriott Marquis from Thursday, July 24 to Sunday, July 27. On Friday, July 25, Comic-Con will host the Marvel Rivals: Hero Creation from Concept to Showcase panel, with guests, start time, and location to be announced.
This fall, The Art of Marvel Rivals will give fans a behind-the-scenes peak at the creation of the game’s character designs and locations. One of the most recent additions to the game’s lineup, Ultron, wasn’t announced when Season 2 began. It stands to reason there may be more surprise characters in Season 3 as well.
Scientists just mapped how the body rejects pig organs—and how to stop it
A pioneering study has provided unprecedented insights into the immune response following pig-to-human kidney xenotransplantation.1
The findings, presented today at the ESOT Congress 2025, mark a significant step forward in overcoming the biggest challenge in xenotransplantation: rejection by the human immune system.
Using cutting-edge spatial molecular imaging, researchers mapped how human immune cells interact with pig kidney tissue in transplanted organs, revealing critical early markers of rejection and potential intervention strategies. The study, led by Dr. Valentin Goutaudier and a collaborative international research team (Paris Institute for Transplantation and Organ Regeneration & NYU Langone Transplant Institute), highlights key molecular mechanisms that could shape the future of xenotransplantation.
One of the most striking discoveries was that human immune cells were found in every part of the pig kidney’s filtering system after the transplant. Researchers observed early molecular signs of antibody-mediated rejection as soon as Day 10 and peaking at Day 33, reinforcing previous findings that rejection begins rapidly but progresses over time.2 By tracking these immune responses for up to 61 days, the team identified a crucial window for targeted therapeutic intervention.
“Our study provides the most detailed molecular map to date of how the human immune system engages with a transplanted pig kidney,” explained Dr. Goutaudier. “By pinpointing specific immune cell behaviours and gene expressions, we can refine anti-rejection treatments and improve transplant viability.”
The study’s innovative approach used a bioinformatic pipeline to distinguish human immune cells from pig structural cells, allowing for precise mapping of immune infiltration patterns. Notably, macrophages and myeloid cells were the most prevalent immune cell types across all time points, further confirming their role as key mediators in xenograft rejection.
When targeted therapeutic interventions were introduced, immune-mediated signs of rejection were successfully weakened. Combined with novel spatial insights into how immune cells interact with pig kidney tissue, this marks a major breakthrough — paving the way for more refined anti-rejection strategies. These advances come at a pivotal time as the first US-based clinical trials of pig kidney transplantation into living human recipients begin in 2025.
With xenotransplantation poised to address the global organ shortage crisis, these findings bring researchers one step closer to making genetically modified pig kidneys a viable long-term solution. The next phase will focus on optimising anti-rejection treatments, refining genetic modifications in donor pigs, and developing early detection protocols to monitor and manage rejection responses.
“Understanding the specific immune interactions at a molecular level allows us to develop targeted interventions that can prevent rejection before it escalates,” explained Dr. Goutaudier. “This research lays the groundwork for safer and more effective pig-to-human transplants in the near future.”
As scientific progress accelerates, researchers remain cautiously optimistic that genetically modified pig kidneys could become a routine transplant option within the next decade. However, regulatory approvals will require consistent demonstration of safety and efficacy in diverse patient populations.
References:
- Goutaudier V., Williams, C., Morgand, E., et al. Application of a Novel Spatial Transcriptomic 6000-Plex Panel in Pig-to-Human Xenotransplantation. Presented at ESOT Congress 2025; 30th June 2025; London, United Kingdom.
- Loupy, A., Goutaudier, V., Giarraputo, A. et al. (2023). Immune response after pig-to-human kidney xenotransplantation: A multimodal phenotyping study.The Lancet, 402(10408), 1158-1169. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0140-6736(23)01855-3
- Montgomery RA, Stern JM, Lonze BE, Tatapudi VS, Mangiola M, Wu M, Weldon E, Lawson N, Deterville C, Dieter RA, Sullivan B, Boulton G, Parent B, Piper G, Sommer P, Cawthon S, Duggan E, Ayares D, Dandro A, Fazio-Kroll A, Kokkinaki M, Burdorf L, Lorber M, Boeke JD, Pass H, Keating B, Griesemer A, Ali NM, Mehta SA, Stewart ZA. Results of Two Cases of Pig-to-Human Kidney Xenotransplantation. N Engl J Med. 2022 May 19;386(20):1889-1898. doi: 10.1056/NEJMoa2120238. PMID: 35584156.
Teach for India Fellowship 2026 [2 Years; Stipend of Rs. 25k]
About Teach for India
Teach For India was founded in 2008. Inspired by Teach For America’s journey, we worked with McKinsey & Company to craft a blueprint around the belief that all children must attain an excellent education. Today, they are a movement of 900 Fellows teaching 33,000 children and 4,500+ Alumni who are collectively reaching 50 million children across India.
About Teach for India Fellowship
The Teach For India Fellowship is an empowering movement to revolutionise education in India.
As a Fellow, you will gain invaluable teaching and leadership skills and join a vast network of like-minded educators and mentors. You will become a part of an Alumni network of influential change agents and advocates for educational equity.
Foster lifelong connections and collaborations, gain unique perspectives and create lasting impact.
Eligibility
You are eligible to apply for the 2025 Fellowship cohort if you:
- Completed graduation by June/July 2026.
- Are applying for the first time for 2026 Fellowship cohort, since July 2025.
- Are a citizen of India or Overseas Citizen of India (OCI).
How to Apply?
Interested candidates can apply online via the link given at the end of the post.
Online Application: Share your achievements, interests, experiences and motivations for joining the Teach For India Fellowship.
Phone Interview: A short 30-minute discussion may be required on your submitted Application.
Stipend
As a Teach For India Fellow, you will be paid a stipend of INR 25,344 per month. If you are relocating from your home city, you will receive a City Compensatory Allowance (CCA) ranging from INR 6,000 to INR 12,600 depending on your placement city during the Fellowship.
Benefits
- Reimbursements for work-related expenses (e.g. school supplies on a per-child cost basis).
- Health insurance of up to INR 100,000 and access to free counselling.
- Casual and sick leave, national, regional and school holidays and a summer break.
- Access to our career fair after the Fellowship.
Location
As a Teach For India Fellow, you will be placed in schools in underserved communities in Ahmedabad, Bengaluru, Chennai, Delhi, Hyderabad, Kolkata, Mumbai or Pune. All Fellows will be required to reside in one of these cities during the period of the Fellowship.
Deadline
Deadline: 11:59 PM IST, 7 Sept 2025.
Contact
Still have questions about the Fellowship? Please write to [email protected].
Click here to apply.
Click here for the official notification.
Priyanka Chopra poses with John Cena in the dreamiest floral bodycon dress for Heads of State promotions. See pics | Fashion Trends
Priyanka Chopra is currently gearing up for the release of her upcoming film Heads of State, and her promotional wardrobe is serving look after look. From sultry backless gowns to chic dresses, every outfit is a showstopper. Her latest look is no exception. Posing alongside her co-star John Cena, Priyanka stunned in a floral bodycon dress that’s too gorgeous to ignore. (Also read: ₹10K”>Priyanka Chopra’s game day look while cheering for Nick Jonas at his softball match is stylish, comfy and under ₹10K )
Priyanka Chopra stuns in floral bodycon dress
For her chic look, Priyanka chose a black bodycon dress that hugged her curves to perfection. The outfit featured a deep plunging halter neckline, a sultry backless design, and a flattering midi hemline that added elegance to the bold silhouette.
What truly elevated the look was the striking floral print in soft beige hues, beautifully scattered across the dress, adding a touch of feminine glam. Effortlessly balancing sexy and sophisticated, Priyanka looked every bit the showstopper.
How she styled her look
In terms of accessories, Priyanka kept things sleek yet striking. She styled her look with a pair of sparkling diamond earrings, a statement ring adorning her finger, chic black rectangular sunglasses, and matching black stiletto heels that elevated the glam factor.
Her makeup was equally on point, featuring a soft nude eyeshadow, mascara-coated lashes, well-defined brows, blushed cheeks, a luminous highlighter, and a flattering shade of tinted pink lipstick. With her luscious tresses straightened and parted to the side, Priyanka tied the entire look together with elegance.
On the other hand, John Cena looked dapper in a classic three-piece black pantsuit paired with a crisp white shirt underneath. He added a stylish touch with a black-and-white printed tie, perfectly complementing Priyanka’s chic look.
On the work front
Priyanka is currently gearing up for the release of Heads of State. Meanwhile, she has also begun shooting for SS Rajamouli’s upcoming film with Mahesh Babu.
Atai and Beckley, set to merge, reveal study success for psychedelic drug
Dive Brief:
- Atai Life Sciences and Beckley Psytech are making plans to push the psychedelic drug mebufotenin into Phase 3 testing after it safely and significantly reduced symptoms of treatment-resistant depression in a Phase 2b study.
- Shares of Atai jumped 20% after the companies’ announcement Tuesday. Atai also announced a $50 million private placement in a financing round led by Ferring Ventures and Apeiron Investment, the family office of Atai founder and Chairman Christian Angermayer.
- With the successful study in hand and a new infusion of cash, the companies are proceeding with plans to merge in the second half of this year. The combination, announced in June, was contingent on positive results from the Phase 2b trial. Atai had previously scooped up a 36% stake in privately held Beckley in 2024.
Dive Insight:
Atai and Beckley are looking to benefit from a new openness to psychedelic drugs for the treatment of mental health conditions. Both Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. and Food and Drug Administration Commissioner Martin Makary have touted the potential benefits of the medicines for patients, while Johnson & Johnson’s Spravato, a derivative of ketamine, has generated blockbuster sales.
Investors so far have shown a willingness to support the research but are looking for strong results. Compass Pathways recently failed to meet that mark with a medicine that succeeded in a Phase 3 trial but nevertheless disappointed shareholders by only reducing scores on a scale used to gauge depressive symptoms by a mean difference of 3.6 points compared with placebo.
Beckley’s mebufotenin showed a difference of 5.3 points and 6.3 points for the two therapeutic doses it tested as compared with a low-dose group used as a control when measured at Day 29 after treatment. Wall Street was looking for a difference of at least 5 points, Jefferies analyst Andrew Tsai wrote in a note to clients.
Like Spravato, mebufotenin is administered through the nose. Atai and Beckley said participants in its study generally were able to leave the clinic within 90 minutes, which would put the drug in the conventional treatment window established by Spravato. The study also found no serious side effects and no evidence of suicidal intent or behavior in patients given mebufotenin.
Researchers tested an 8 milligram dose and a 12 milligram dose against an 0.3 milligram control. The larger difference in depression symptom measurement was in the 8 mg dose, though the companies said they consider efficacy equivalent between the 8 mg and 12 mg doses. They plan to advance the 8 mg dose into Phase 3 testing after consulting with regulators.
The companies said improvements were seen as early as one day after treatment and generally lasted at least eight weeks. While the results need to be confirmed in a continuing open-label study of a second dose and the eventual Phase 3 trial, the data suggests Atai and Beckley may be able to offer a longer window between treatments, possibly giving their drug an advantage over rivals such as Spravato, Tsai said.
Prevalence, Early Signs, Stages, and Life Expectancy – Walkin’ Pets
Corgis are charming, smart, and loyal dogs. But because of their long backs and short legs, they’re more likely to develop a spinal condition called IVDD—short for intervertebral disc disease. IVDD can be serious. It affects a dog’s ability to move and walk, and sometimes it causes pain or even paralysis.
This page explains what IVDD is, how common it is in corgis, the early signs you should never ignore, what the different stages mean, and the treatment options that exist today.
How common is IVDD in corgis?
Corgis have a body shape that puts extra pressure on their spine. Their long back and short legs make them more prone to disk problems. IVDD is common in this breed and can show up at any point, but usually appears between ages 3 and 6.
There are two main types of corgis: Pembroke and Cardigan. Both are at risk. While some dogs may go their entire lives without spinal issues, many owners report at least one IVDD incident. The actual number isn’t tracked closely, but IVDD is one of the most frequent health problems seen in corgis.
What are the early signs of IVDD in corgis?
IVDD symptoms can appear slowly or suddenly. In some dogs, the signs start off small. In others, they come on fast and need immediate attention.
Here are the main early signs to watch for:
-
Back pain or stiffness
-
Yelping when touched or picked up
-
Refusing to jump or go up stairs
-
Weakness in the back legs
-
Unsteady walking or wobbling
-
Knuckling of the paws (dragging or flipping under)
-
Sudden trouble standing or walking
-
Loss of bladder or bowel control
If your corgi is acting off in any of these ways, contact your vet right away. Early treatment can make a huge difference.
What are the stages of IVDD?
IVDD affects dogs in different ways depending on how far it has progressed. Vets often group the condition into five stages, from mild to severe.
-
Stage 1: Your dog has mild pain but can still walk.
-
Stage 2: There’s weakness in the back legs, but your dog can still stand.
-
Stage 3: Partial paralysis appears, and walking becomes hard.
-
Stage 4: Full back leg paralysis, but the dog can still feel deep pain.
-
Stage 5: Complete paralysis and no feeling in the back legs. This is the most serious stage.
Dogs in stages 1 or 2 may improve with rest and medicine. Dogs in stages 3, 4, or 5 usually need surgery or more advanced care.
What treatment options are available for corgis with IVDD?
Treatment depends on the stage and how quickly symptoms started. Here are the two main paths vets use.
Conservative treatment
This is often used for dogs in stage 1 or 2. It involves:
-
Strict crate rest for several weeks
-
Anti-inflammatory medication
-
Pain relief
-
Gentle handling
-
Physical therapy once the pain is gone
This type of care works best when caught early. The key is full rest, which allows the inflamed disc to calm down and avoid worsening.
Surgery
Surgery is usually needed if your corgi loses the ability to walk or doesn’t respond to rest. The goal is to remove the damaged disc material and take pressure off the spine.
The faster surgery is done after symptoms appear, the better the outcome. Dogs that still have feeling in their back legs before surgery tend to recover well. If surgery is delayed too long, recovery becomes harder.
After surgery, most dogs need physical therapy and close monitoring at home. Recovery can take weeks or months, depending on the severity.
How do dog wheelchairs help corgis with IVDD?
A dog wheelchair supports your pet’s back end and helps them stay active. Walkin’ Pets makes wheelchairs that fit corgis especially well, with adjustable parts that support their long backs and short legs. They are designed to take pressure off the spine while letting your dog move safely.
Here’s how a wheelchair can help:
-
Keeps your dog mobile after surgery or injury
-
Supports dogs that may never walk on their own again
-
Prevents dragging, which can cause wounds or sores
-
Encourages regular bathroom habits
-
Lifts your dog’s spirits and gives them independence
Some dogs only need a wheelchair during recovery. Others use one long-term. Either way, it lets your corgi live an active life without putting strain on their spine.
What is the life expectancy of a corgi with IVDD?
Most corgis with IVDD can live long and happy lives, especially if they receive early treatment and the right support. IVDD does not shorten life by itself. What matters most is how it’s managed.
If your corgi has mild IVDD and recovers with rest, they may go years without another issue. If they have surgery, recovery is possible with good care. Even dogs with permanent paralysis can live full lives with a wheelchair and the right home environment.
What matters most is your dog’s quality of life. As long as they are pain-free, able to move comfortably, and stay connected with you, they can enjoy many more years.
How can you prevent IVDD or reduce the risk?
While you can’t completely prevent IVDD, there are a few things that can lower the chances or help manage the condition early:
-
Keep your dog at a healthy weight
-
Use ramps instead of stairs or jumping
-
Avoid rough play or high-impact exercise
-
Don’t let your dog leap off furniture
-
Walk your dog using a harness, not a collar
-
Build core strength with safe, low-impact movement
-
Catch symptoms early and contact your vet if you’re unsure
Taking these steps can protect your dog’s spine and reduce the risk of sudden injury.
Moving forward with your corgi after an IVDD diagnosis
Finding out your corgi has IVDD can be scary. But many dogs live active and joyful lives with the right care. Some recover fully. Others may need help walking. Either way, they don’t need to miss out on the things they love.
If your corgi is dealing with IVDD, stay hopeful. With patience, support, and the right tools, your dog can enjoy a great life filled with movement, play, and love.
How Global Trade Trends Influence Industrial Property Values in Australia
Few sectors feel the ripples of global trade as directly as industrial real estate. Investors in Australia have learned that shifts in shipping routes, trade agreements, and international demand can quickly influence property values around ports, freight corridors, and major distribution hubs. It’s not just about steel sheds and warehouses anymore. The movement of goods across oceans and into supply chains has become a critical piece of the puzzle for anyone looking to make strategic bets in the industrial property market. For Australian real estate investors, understanding how trade shapes property demand has never been more essential — or more rewarding for those willing to look beyond the surface.
Australia’s Ports and Trade-Driven Demand
Industrial real estate and trade flows have always been closely linked, but that connection has become even more pronounced in recent years. Investors look at more than local vacancy rates or lease yields. They study freight volumes, shipping capacity, and trends in imports and exports to predict where demand for industrial space will spike next. Ports, intermodal hubs, and highways form the backbone of these investments. The more efficiently goods move through these channels, the more businesses want to be near them, driving up land values and rental rates in those key precincts. For investors, tracking global trade movements offers early clues to which regions could become the next hot spots for industrial growth.
Australia’s geographic position in the Asia-Pacific makes it a significant player in regional trade, and that has direct implications for industrial property values. Major ports like Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, and Fremantle handle huge volumes of goods, both for domestic markets and international trade. Rising exports of resources like iron ore, coal, and agricultural products, as well as steady growth in imported consumer goods, keep demand strong for facilities that support warehousing, distribution, and logistics operations. Investment in infrastructure — from port upgrades to road and rail improvements — has also been expanding to keep pace with trade volumes. These developments attract investors who see the long-term potential in industrial assets tied to Australia’s trading relationships with Asia, North America, and Europe.
Yet global trade can be volatile, and investors in industrial property have had to navigate significant challenges over the past few years. Disruptions caused by the pandemic exposed vulnerabilities in supply chains, with shipping delays and skyrocketing freight costs creating ripple effects through industrial markets. Geopolitical tensions, shifting trade agreements, and changes in manufacturing bases have added more uncertainty. For property investors, this volatility can mean sudden changes in tenant demand or the need for facilities with different capabilities, such as increased storage space or temperature-controlled warehousing. The key for many investors has been building flexibility into their strategies, choosing assets in locations that can adapt quickly as trade dynamics shift.
For real estate investors focused on industrial assets, it’s becoming increasingly important to understand how businesses ship a container of goods. The way manufacturers, wholesalers, and retailers handle containerised freight directly influences the demand for warehousing, cross-docking, and last-mile distribution facilities. Changes in shipping practices — like smaller, more frequent shipments instead of large bulk orders — can drive the need for different kinds of industrial properties. Investors who grasp the logistics behind containerised trade are often better positioned to spot opportunities in areas near major ports or transport corridors where container handling capacity is critical. That knowledge can make the difference between investing in a property that simply offers space and one that fits the evolving needs of modern supply chains.
Future Growth and Opportunity in Industrial Property
Looking forward, investors are watching closely for signs of where industrial growth could accelerate next. New free trade agreements, shifts in global manufacturing patterns, and government-backed infrastructure projects are all shaping the map of Australia’s industrial property sector. Regions with strong transport links and proximity to major ports are likely to remain in high demand, but emerging hubs could also present compelling opportunities. Growth in e-commerce is pushing demand for strategically located distribution centres that can serve urban populations quickly, while sustainability pressures are encouraging companies to modernise older facilities or seek new sites built to higher environmental standards. For investors willing to dig into trade data and anticipate shifts in global supply chains, there’s potential to identify locations poised for significant capital growth and rental upside.
Industrial real estate has become one of the most dynamic sectors in Australian property, driven in no small part by the forces of global trade. Investors who pay attention to shipping routes, trade volumes, and the evolving needs of businesses moving goods around the world stand to gain an edge in a market where location and logistics have never mattered more. As trade continues to reshape how businesses operate, the industrial property landscape will remain tightly linked to the flows of goods across oceans and borders, and for savvy investors, that connection offers both challenges and remarkable opportunities.
Your Samsung Phone Is Hiding a Secret Video Editor—It’s Way Better Than Expected
If you’re looking to edit videos on your Galaxy phone, you don’t have to look far. On Samsung phones running One UI 6 or later, Samsung Studio gives you a full set of video editing tools for free.
What Is Samsung Studio, and How Can You Access It?
While the editing tool in the Gallery app is good enough for trimming, cropping, and even muting videos on your phone, Samsung Studio goes beyond basic edits. It gives you a timeline setup that is way more flexible.
You can move clips around, add smooth transitions, combine a bunch of videos into one project, and throw in effects on specific parts of the footage. It’s made for more thoughtful edits without making things overly complex.
To open Samsung Studio, launch the Gallery app first. Then, tap the Menu button at the bottom and select Go to Studio. In Samsung Studio, tap Start new project, pick the video you want to work on, and you’re good to go.
If you want to open Samsung Studio directly from your app drawer like a regular app, you can do that too. Just tap the three-dot icon in the top-right corner in Samsung Studio, go to Settings, and turn on the Add Studio to Apps screen toggle.
1
Choose Your Preferred Aspect Ratio
Before diving into the edit, it’s a good idea to pick the right aspect ratio depending on where you plan to share the video. For instance, if you shot it in landscape but want to post it as an Instagram Reel, you’ll need to switch it to a vertical format so it looks right.
In Samsung’s Studio app, tap the three-dot icon in the top right and head to Project settings. There, you can choose from popular aspect ratios like 1:1, 9:16, 16:9, or even 2:1. The app will automatically adjust your video by adding black bars either on the sides or at the top and bottom to fit the video.
2
Add, Trim, and Rearrange Clips
Once you’ve set the aspect ratio, you can start trimming, merging, and rearranging clips. If you’ve used any video editor before, this part will feel pretty familiar.
To trim a clip, tap it in the timeline to select it. You’ll see white handles pop up on both ends. Drag these inward to chop off anything you don’t need from the start or finish. If the part you want to remove is in the middle, you’ll need to split the clip first.
Drag the playhead to the exact spot where you want to make the cut, then tap the split icon to break the clip into two pieces. You can then delete a chunk from the middle or drop something new in between. You can also tap the trash icon to delete a clip entirely.
To add a new clip, tap the plus (+) icon at the far left of the timeline. You can insert a blank slide, a photo, or another video from your Gallery. Once it’s in, tap and hold the clip to drag it wherever you want in the timeline.
3
Edit Clips and Add Smooth Transitions
Samsung Studio includes pretty much all the editing tools you get in the Gallery app’s built-in video editor. You can speed up or slow down clips, add filters, crop the frame, and adjust stuff like brightness, contrast, and saturation. If a clip has a sound you don’t want, tap the speaker icon and slide the volume down to zero.
Adding transitions between clips is an easy way to make your video feel more polished. Once you’ve got your clips trimmed, arranged, and in the right order, you can add a few smooth transitions to tie everything together.
To add a transition, tap the small icon that shows up between two clips in the timeline. In the menu that opens, you’ll see different transition effects like Fade, Slide, Wipe, and more. You can preview each one by tapping through the options, and once you pick one, it’s applied right away. If you want to keep things consistent, there’s also the Apply to all option that adds the same transition across all your clips.
4
Add Text, Stickers, and Drawings
Beyond the basic editing, you can add text, stickers, or drawings to clips to make the video more engaging. To start, tap on the clip you want to edit and look for the text, sticker, or pencil icon.
Tap the Text tool to add captions, titles, or labels anywhere in your video. It’s great for calling out key moments or giving a bit of context. You can tweak the font style, size, alignment, and color as you see fit.
Once you’ve added the text, you can drag it anywhere on the screen. If you only want it to show up during a specific part of the clip, use the timeline below to set when it appears. You can also tap the text in the timeline to add entry and exit animations like “pop in,” “slide down,” or “fade out” to give it a bit more flair.
The Stickers tool works pretty much the same way. You’ll find emojis, fun icons, timestamps, and even custom avatars. Like text, you can resize and move stickers around, and set them to pop up at specific points in your video.
And if you’re feeling a bit more creative, the Drawing tool lets you doodle right on the video using your finger or a stylus. It’s perfect for circling something important, underlining a point, or just adding some personal touch. You can pick from different brush styles and colors to match the video.
5
Add Background Music to Videos
Adding background music can really level up your video and make it way more fun. In Samsung Studio, tap the music icon in the bottom right corner. Then choose Soundtrack to browse music from Samsung’s built-in library, or tap My music if you want to use a song or voice recording from your phone’s storage.
In the Soundtrack menu, you’ll find a bunch of tracks from Samsung sorted in categories like Funny, Happy, Lounge, and Upbeat. Tap on any track to download and preview it. If it feels like a good fit, tap Done to add it into your project. Once it’s on the timeline, you can tap the music clip to tweak the volume or add a fade-in and fade-out effect for a smoother feel.
You can trim the track to match the video’s length or layer multiple audio files if needed. Tap on the music clip in the timeline to apply a fade in or fade out effect. You can also adjust the volume to ensure it doesn’t overpower dialogue or important sounds in the video.
To see how everything comes together, tap the full screen icon, then hit the play button to preview your video. If everything looks good, tap Done. From there, tap the three-dot menu to choose your preferred export size and format. Finally, tap Save video to store the edited video to the Gallery.
Related
8 Surprisingly Useful Samsung Apps You Won’t Find Pre-Installed on Galaxy Phones
If you own a Samsung phone, you don’t want to miss out on these!
While there’s no shortage of good video editing apps on the Play Store, if you’ve got a Samsung Galaxy phone, you probably don’t need to bother with most of them. For quick edits on a single video, the video editor in the Gallery app does the job. And when you want something more flexible with a timeline setup, Samsung Studio has you covered.
Sure, Samsung Studio is not meant to replace full-fledged video editing software, but for everyday video projects, it’s more than enough.
Record heat grips southern Europe
Southern Europe is facing a wave of extreme weather, with record-setting temperatures across land and sea, according to national meteorological agencies and the European Copernicus program.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-01/Record-heat-grips-southern-Europe-1EEJjKXs0ko/img/3165b684d74c42cb8cd6ef50f99dd8b8/3165b684d74c42cb8cd6ef50f99dd8b8.jpeg' alt='A pharmacy thermometer displaying 40 degrees Celsius in Lille, France, July 27, 2018. /VCG'
On Sunday, the Mediterranean Sea recorded its highest average sea surface temperature ever for June, reaching 26.01 degrees Celsius, French media reported, citing data from the European Copernicus program.
In France, Meteo-France has placed 84 departments on orange alert for a heat wave, with temperatures already exceeding 35 degrees Celsius across three-quarters of the country and locally approaching 40 degrees, the agency said on its official website on Monday.
July 1 is expected to mark the peak of this heat wave, which began on June 19, with maximum temperatures forecast to range between 36 degrees and 40 degrees, and isolated peaks reaching 41 degrees. On that day, 16 departments in France will be placed on red alert.
Starting July 2, a significant drop in temperatures is expected in regions bordering the English Channel and the Atlantic coast.
The cooling trend will then gradually move from west to east across the country by the end of the week, except for the Mediterranean coast, where high temperatures could persist for a longer period.
Several preventive measures are already in place. Nuclear reactors have been shut down, schools have been closed, and construction sites have adjusted their working hours, according to local media reports.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-01/Record-heat-grips-southern-Europe-1EEJjKXs0ko/img/0441b1c38cd547e29c5e8aad99b77792/0441b1c38cd547e29c5e8aad99b77792.jpeg' alt='Tourists take photos of the city at Torre de la Rovira in Barcelona, Spain, June 30, 2025. /VCG'
Spain also recorded its highest-ever temperature for June over the weekend. The Spanish State Meteorological Agency (AEMET) reported that the town of El Granado, in the southwestern province of Huelva, reached 46 degrees Celsius on Saturday.
This surpasses the previous June record of 45.2 degrees, set in Seville in 1965.
Other parts of southern Spain also experienced extreme temperatures, with 44 degrees recorded in Cordoba and 43.9 degrees near Seville. More than 100 AEMET monitoring stations registered temperatures exceeding 40 degrees during the first major heatwave of the year.
In northeastern Spain, Barcelona saw a new June record of 37.3 degrees. Authorities believe the heat was a contributing factor in the death of a municipal street cleaner, who reportedly collapsed from heatstroke after completing her shift.
Two other heat-related fatalities were reported: a construction worker in Tarragona and an agricultural worker in the neighboring region of Aragon.
The heatwave is expected to persist throughout the week, with temperatures above 40 degrees forecast along the eastern coast, the southwest, and the popular tourist region of the Balearic Islands.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-01/Record-heat-grips-southern-Europe-1EEJjKXs0ko/img/ba041fa606ec4aa3b56e9c7b71584a48/ba041fa606ec4aa3b56e9c7b71584a48.jpeg' alt='People seek relief from the heat by sitting near the Tagus river during the first heatwave of the year in Lisbon, Portugal, June 29, 2025. /VCG'
Meanwhile, Portugal and Slovenia are also confronting a historic climate extreme.
According to the Portuguese Institute for the Sea and Atmosphere (IPMA), the inland town of Mora, in the Evora district, registered a sweltering 46.6 degrees Celsius on Sunday, surpassing the previous June record of 44.9 degrees set in Alcacer do Sal, Setubal, on June 17, 2017.
Although a slight temperature drop is expected in parts of the country beginning June 30, IPMA says the relief will be limited, and high temperatures will persist across much of Portugal, particularly inland.
IPMA has issued red alerts for seven districts – Lisbon, Setubal, Santarem, Evora, Beja, Castelo Branco and Portalegre – effective from Sunday through Tuesday.
Furthermore, 80 municipalities remain at the highest level of wildfire risk due to the extreme heat and dry conditions.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-07-01/Record-heat-grips-southern-Europe-1EEJjKXs0ko/img/f9919c10ad454a7285c4a2e01d1f680a/f9919c10ad454a7285c4a2e01d1f680a.jpeg' alt='The Church of the Assumption of Mary in Bled Lake, Slovenia. /VCG'
The Slovenian Environment Agency (ARSO) announced Monday that June 2025 has officially been the country’s hottest, driest and sunniest June since records began in 1950.
Temperatures in June were 3.5 degrees Celsius above the long-term average, with 40 percent more sunshine and only one-quarter of the typical rainfall, according to ARSO.
Regional disparities were significant, with some western areas receiving nearly half their usual June precipitation, while Central Slovenia and Notranjska recorded less than 10 millimeters, making it their driest June on record.
Scientists across the region have warned that such extreme weather events are becoming more frequent and intense due to climate change. They are calling on policymakers to urgently accelerate adaptation and resilience measures in the face of a warming climate.
(Cover: The sun rises by the Eiffel Tower in Paris, France, July 1, 2025. /VCG)
Books to read in July 2025
Reading List
10 books for your July reading list
If you buy books linked on our site, The Times may earn a commission from Bookshop.org, whose fees support independent bookstores.
Critic Bethanne Patrick recommends 10 promising titles, fiction and nonfiction, to consider for your July reading list.
It’s officially beach-reads season: Whether you do your reading outdoors or inside in air-conditioned comfort, July’s hot new releases will help you stay cool. Topics range from analog memories of Golden Age Hollywood to a maverick female athlete. Happy reading!
FICTION
In Pursuit of Beauty: A Novel
By Gary Baum
Blackstone: 256 pages, $29
(July 1)
Baum, a journalist for the Hollywood Reporter, draws on knowledge he has gleaned about cosmetic surgery, the profession of his protagonist, Dr. Roya Delshad. Dr. Delshad, who is multiracial and once supposedly plain, remakes herself into a glorious bombshell — but then lands in prison. She’s agreed to consider interviews with a ghostwriter named Wes Easton, who will soon discover why she’s called “the Robin Hood of Roxbury Drive.”
Typewriter Beach: A Novel
By Meg Waite Clayton
Harper: 320 pages, $30
(July 1)
Like the carriage of a well-oiled Olivetti, this novel moves between Carmel and Hollywood, in two different centuries, with ease. In 1957, actress Isabella Giori hopes to land a career-making role in a Hitchcock film; when her circumstances change and she winds up secluded in a tiny cottage in Carmel-on-the-Sea, a blacklisted emigre screenwriter named Léon Chazan saves her. In 2018, his screenwriter granddaughter finally learns how and why.
Vera, or Faith: A Novel
By Gary Shteyngart
Random House: 256 pages, $28
(July 8)
Vera, the child narrator of this wry and relevant new novel from Shteyngart (“Our Country Friends”), brings a half-Korean heritage to the Russian-Jewish-WASP Bradford-Shmulkin family. Between Daddy, Anne Mom, and her longing for her unknown bio Mom Mom, Vera has a lot to handle, while all she really wants is to help her dad and stepmom stay married — and to make a friend at school. It’s a must-read.
Mendell Station: A Novel
By J. B. Hwang
Bloomsbury: 208 pages, $27
(July 22)
In the wake of her best friend Esther’s 2020 death from COVID-19, Miriam loses faith in almost everything, including the God that made her job teaching Christian scripture at a San Francisco private school bearable. She quits and takes a job as a mail carrier (as the author also did), not only finding moments of grace from neighborhood to neighborhood but also writing letters to Esther in an effort to understand the childhood difficulties that bonded them.
Necessary Fiction: A Novel
By Eloghosa Osunde
Riverhead: 320 pages, $28
(July 22)
The title tells so much about how queer people must live in Nigeria, and so does the structure: Osunde (“Vagabonds!”) calls it a novel, although its chapters read more like short stories. If it doesn’t hang together like a traditional novel, that may be part of the point. Characters like May, struggling with gender identity, or Ziz, a gay man in Lagos, know that their identities don’t always hang together in traditional ways — and that’s definitely the point.
NONFICTION
The CIA Book Club: The Secret Mission to Win the Cold War With Forbidden Literature
By Charlie English
Random House: 384 pages, $35
(July 1)
Decades of Cold War espionage between the United States and the Soviet Union included programs that leveraged cultural media. The Central Intelligence Agency’s Manhattan-based “book club” office was run by an emigre from Romania named George Midden, who managed to send 10 million books behind the Iron Curtain. Some of them were serious tomes, yes, but there were Agatha Christie novels, Orwell’s “1984” and art books too.
The Hiroshima Men: The Quest to Build the Atomic Bomb, and the Fateful Decision to Use It
By Iain MacGregor
Scribner: 384 pages, $32
(July 8)
Crucially, MacGregor’s painstakingly researched history of the atomic bombs dropped on Japan at the end of World War II includes Japanese perspectives. The historian (“Checkpoint Charlie”) treats the atomic bomb more as a weapon of mass murder and less as a scientific breakthrough, while managing to convey the urgency behind its development for the Allied forces.
On Her Game: Caitlin Clark and the Revolution in Women’s Sports
By Christine Brennan
Scribner: 272 pages, $30
(July 8)
Let this sink in (basketball pun very much intended): Caitlin Clark has scored more points than any player in major college basketball history. Not just the female players — the male players too. Now that she’s in the WNBA as a rookie for the Indiana Fever, Clark is attracting the kind of fan base once reserved for male basketball stars like Michael Jordan and LeBron James. Brennan’s longtime coverage of Clark’s career makes this book a slam dunk.
Strata: Stories From Deep Time
By Laura Poppick
W. W. Norton & Co.: 288 pages, $30
(July 15)
Each stratum, or layer, of our planet tells a story. Science writer Poppick explains what those millions of strata can tell us about four instances that changed life dramatically, from oxygen entering the atmosphere all the way to the dinosaur era. Ultimately, she argues that these strata show us that when stressed, the earth reacts by changing and moving toward stability. It’s a fascinating peek into the globe’s core that might offer clues about sustainability.
The Feather Detective: Mystery, Mayhem, and the Magnificent Life of Roxie Laybourne
By Chris Sweeney
Avid Reader Press: 320 pages, $30
(July 22)
The once-unassuming Roxie Laybourne became the world’s first forensic ornithologist in 1960, when the FAA asked the Smithsonian — where Laybourne was an avian taxidermist — to help them identify shredded feathers from a fatal airplane crash in Boston. She analyzed specimens that contributed to arrests in racial attacks, as well as in catching game poachers and preventing deaths of fighter pilots. In her way, Laybourne was a badass.
TVS Sales Q1 FY2026: TVS Motor Company Records Highest-Ever Quarterly Sales in 1st Quarter, Sells Total 12.77 Lakh Units; EV Sales Down Amid Magnets Shortage
Bengaluru, July 1: TVS Motor Company has recorded its highest-ever quarterly sales in the first quarter of the financial year 2025-26, achieving total sales of 12.77 lakh units. According to company release, in June 2025 alone, the company sold 402,001 units, registering a 20 per cent growth compared to 333,646 units sold in June 2024. This increase was driven largely by strong performance in the two-wheeler and export segments.
Two-wheeler sales saw a robust 20 per cent growth in June 2025, with sales rising from 322,168 units in June 2024 to 385,698 units. Within this category, domestic two-wheeler sales grew by 10 per cent, reaching 281,012 units. Motorcycles witnessed a 24 per cent jump in sales, from 152,701 units to 188,774 units. Scooters also performed well, growing by 26 per cent with 162,291 units sold in June 2025 compared to 128,986 units in the previous year. Ola Electric Sales in June 2025: Bhavish Aggarwal’s EV Firm Sees Massive 45% YoY Drop in Sales Last Month, Market Share Down 19%.
Electric vehicle (EV) sales, however, showed a slight dip. The company sold 14,400 EV units in June 2025, down from 15,859 units in June 2024. TVS attributed this decline to ongoing challenges in the EV supply chain, particularly due to limited availability of magnets, though it noted that demand for its iQube model remains strong.
The company’s international business posted remarkable growth. Total exports grew by 54 per cent, with sales increasing from 76,074 units in June 2024 to 117,145 units in June 2025. Two-wheeler exports alone surged by 58 per cent, from 66,434 units to 104,686 units, indicating strong global demand.
Three-wheeler sales also contributed to the company’s strong performance. In June 2025, TVS sold 16,303 three-wheelers, marking a 42 per cent increase from 11,478 units in June 2024. Audi India Sales 2025: German Luxury Car Maker Sells 2,128 Units in Country in January-June Period This Year, Positive on Growth in 2nd Half.
For the first quarter of FY26, TVS Motor sold 12.32 lakh two-wheelers, reflecting a 17 per cent increase from 10.56 lakh units in the same period last year. Three-wheeler sales rose by 46 per cent, reaching 0.45 lakh units.
Total exports during the quarter grew by 39 per cent, climbing from 2.54 lakh units in Q1 FY25 to 3.52 lakh units in Q1 FY26.
(This is an unedited and auto-generated story from Syndicated News feed, LatestLY Staff may not have modified or edited the content body)
Cloudflare Is Blocking AI Crawlers by Default
Last year, internet infrastructure firm Cloudflare launched tools enabling its customers to block AI scrapers. Today the company has taken its fight against permissionless scraping several steps further. It has switched to blocking AI crawlers by default for its customers and is moving forward with a Pay Per Crawl program that lets customers charge AI companies to scrape their websites.
Web crawlers have trawled the internet for information for decades. Without them, people would lose vitally important online tools, from Google Search to the Internet Archive’s invaluable digital preservation work. But the AI boom has produced a corresponding boomlet in AI-focused web crawlers, and these bots scrape web pages with a frequency that can mimic a DDoS attack, straining servers and knocking websites offline. Even when websites can handle the heightened activity, many do not want AI crawlers scraping their content, especially news publications that are demanding AI companies to pay to use their work. “We’ve been feverishly trying to protect ourselves,” says Danielle Coffey, the president and CEO of the trade group News Media Alliance, which represents several thousand North American outlets.
So far, Cloudflare’s head of AI control, privacy, and media products, Will Allen, tells WIRED, over 1 million customer websites have activated its older AI-bot-blocking tools. Now millions more will have the option of keeping bot blocking as their default. Cloudflare also says it can identify even “shadow” scrapers that are not publicized by AI companies. The company noted that it uses a proprietary combination of behavioral analysis, fingerprinting, and machine learning to classify and separate AI bots from “good” bots.
A widely used web standard called the Robots Exclusion Protocol, often implemented through a robots.txt file, helps publishers block bots on a case-by-case basis, but following it is not legally required, and there’s plenty of evidence that some AI companies try to evade efforts to block their scrapers. “Robots.txt is ignored,” Coffey says. According to a report from the content licensing platform Tollbit, which offers its own marketplace for publishers to negotiate with AI companies over bot access, AI scraping is still on the rise—including scraping that ignores robots.txt. Tollbit found that over 26 million scrapes ignored the protocol in March 2025 alone.
In this context, Cloudflare’s shift to blocking by default could prove a significant roadblock to surreptitious scrapers and could give publishers more leverage to negotiate, whether through the Pay Per Crawl program or otherwise. “This could dramatically change the power dynamic. Up to this point, AI companies have not needed to pay to license content, because they’ve known that they can just take it without consequences,” says Atlantic CEO (and former WIRED editor in chief) Nicholas Thompson. “Now they’ll have to negotiate, and it will become a competitive advantage for the AI companies that can strike more and better deals with more and better publishers.”
AI startup ProRata, which operates the AI search engine Gist.AI, has agreed to participate in the Pay Per Crawl program, according to CEO and founder Bill Gross. “We firmly believe that all content creators and publishers should be compensated when their content is used in AI answers,” Gross says.
Of course, it remains to be seen whether the big players in the AI space will participate in a program like Pay Per Crawl, which is in beta. (Cloudflare declined to name current participants.) Companies like OpenAI have struck licensing deals with a variety of publishing partners, including WIRED parent company Condé Nast, but specific details of these agreements have not been disclosed, including whether the agreement covers bot access.
Meanwhile, there’s an entire online ecosystem of tutorials about how to evade Cloudflare’s bot blocking tools aimed at web scrapers. As the blocking default rolls out, it’s likely these efforts will continue. Cloudflare emphasizes that customers who do want to let the robots scrape unimpeded will be able to turn off the blocking setting. “All blocking is fully optional and at the discretion of each individual user,” Allen says.
Incredible Sonic The Hedgehog Rubber Duck Plushies Hit New Low Prices
Sonic the Hedgehog fans can save on two of the cutest and silliest collectibles featuring Sega’s iconic mascot and his archenemy Doctor Eggman. Amazon has the Sonic the Hedgehog Rubber Duck Plush discounted to a new all-time low of $18.60 (was $25). Meanwhile, Doctor Eggman’s Rubber Duck Plush is up for grabs for $21.10 (was $25), which is also the best price yet for this arguably zanier plushie.
Check out both Sonic characters and more popular heroes and villains as rubber duck plushies below.
$18.60 (was $25)
This 9-inch Sonic the Hedgehog-Duck plush is officially licensed by Sega and modeled after the hero’s classic appearance.
Each Tubbz duck has a weighted base, so that it can be displayed upright as shown above. But while Sonic makes for a funny display piece, it’s also soft enough to cuddle like any other plush. If you’re buying this as a gift for a younger Sonic fan, you’ll be pleased to learn that it’s machine washable.
Amazon doesn’t have an end date listed for the Sonic deal, but this model has only received a few price cuts since its launch last November. It was also sold out for several months after launch and wasn’t readily available again until April.
$21.10 (was $25)
This is the first time the Doctor Eggman Rubber Duck Plush has been priced lower than its $25 MSRP. Amazon has this one marked as a limited-time deal with a set number of units available.
Like Sonic, Doctor Eggman was sold out for a few months following its launch last holiday before being restocked in March.
Collectible company Tubbz has made a name for itself with its zany lineup of vinyl rubber ducks featuring characters like Gandalf from Lord of the Rings, Lara Croft from Tomb Raider, Solid Snake from Metal Gear Solid, Jack Torrance (with an axe) from The Shining, Hannibal Lecter from The Silence of the Lambs, multiple Mortal Kombat fighters, and even Solaire of Astora from Dark Souls, who is, of course, praising the sun.
And yes, Tubbz also has rubber duck vinyl figures of numerous Sonic the Hedgehog characters, including Sonic, Tails, Knuckles, Shadow, Amy Rose, and more.
There aren’t nearly as many plushies as vinyl figures in the Tubbz collection, but there are a bunch of cool ones outside of the Sonic the Hedgehog franchise. Sticking with video game-themed plushies, Destiny fans can pick from a few different characters, including Cayde-6 and Zavala. After selling out earlier this year, Vault Boy from Fallout is back in stock at Amazon.
Amazon also recently started selling plushie versions of Gandalf the Grey and Frodo from Lord of the Rings as well as Batman from The Dark Knight. The Batman plush is on the verge of selling out, though, so fans should snag it while they can. You can display the Caped Crusader next to the Joker Rubber Duck Plush based on the villain’s appearance in The Dark Knight.
Horror fans can get creepy/adorable duck plushie spins on Chucky from Child’s Play and Pennywise from Stephen King’s It. Chucky is on sale for only $15, while Pennywise is a few bucks off. Pennywise is holding his signature red balloon, but even if he keeps telling you that “we all float down here,” you should know that Tubbz plushies are not designed to be brought in the bathtub.
We’ve put together a list of the Tubbz Rubber Duck Plushies we found on Amazon. Several of the characters below have received limited-time discounts similar to Doctor Eggman, including the turtle duck from Avatar: The Last Airbender.
This AI tracks lung tumors as you breathe — and it might save lives
In radiation therapy, precision can save lives. Oncologists must carefully map the size and location of a tumor before delivering high-dose radiation to destroy cancer cells while sparing healthy tissue. But this process, called tumor segmentation, is still done manually, takes time, varies between doctors — and can lead to critical tumor areas being overlooked.
Now, a team of Northwestern Medicine scientists has developed an AI tool called iSeg that not only matches doctors in accurately outlining lung tumors on CT scans but can also identify areas that some doctors may miss, reports a large new study.
Unlike earlier AI tools that focused on static images, iSeg is the first 3D deep learning tool shown to segment tumors as they move with each breath — a critical factor in planning radiation treatment, which half of all cancer patients in the U.S. receive during their illness.
“We’re one step closer to cancer treatments that are even more precise than any of us imagined just a decade ago,” said senior author Dr. Mohamed Abazeed, chair and professor of radiation oncology at Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine.
“The goal of this technology is to give our doctors better tools,” added Abazeed, who leads a research team developing data-driven tools to personalize and improve cancer treatment and is a member of the Robert H. Lurie Comprehensive Cancer Center of Northwestern University.
The study was published today (June 30) in the journal npj Precision Oncology.
How iSeg was built and tested
The Northwestern scientists trained iSeg using CT scans and doctor-drawn tumor outlines from hundreds of lung cancer patients treated at nine clinics within the Northwestern Medicine and Cleveland Clinic health systems. That’s far beyond the small, single-hospital datasets used in many past studies.
After training, the AI was tested on patient scans it hadn’t seen before. Its tumor outlines were then compared to those drawn by physicians. The study found that iSeg consistently matched expert outlines across hospitals and scan types. It also flagged additional areas that some doctors missed — and those missed areas were linked to worse outcomes if left untreated. This suggests iSeg may help catch high-risk regions that often go unnoticed.
“Accurate tumor targeting is the foundation of safe and effective radiation therapy, where even small errors in targeting can impact tumor control or cause unnecessary toxicity,” Abazeed said.
“By automating and standardizing tumor contouring, our AI tool can help reduce delays, ensure fairness across hospitals and potentially identify areas that doctors might miss — ultimately improving patient care and clinical outcomes,” added first author Sagnik Sarkar, a senior research technologist at Feinberg who holds a Master of Science in artificial intelligence from Northwestern.
Clinical deployment possible ‘within a couple years’
The research team is now testing iSeg in clinical settings, comparing its performance to physicians in real time. They are also integrating features like user feedback and working to expand the technology to other tumor types, such as liver, brain and prostate cancers. The team also plans to adapt iSeg to other imaging methods, including MRI and PET scans.
“We envision this as a foundational tool that could standardize and enhance how tumors are targeted in radiation oncology, especially in settings where access to subspecialty expertise is limited,” said co- author Troy Teo, instructor of radiation oncology at Feinberg.
“This technology can help support more consistent care across institutions, and we believe clinical deployment could be possible within a couple of years,” Teo added.
This study is titled “Deep learning for automated, motion- resolved tumor segmentation in radiotherapy.”
Is the Right to Shut Down a Business a Fundamental Right?
Supreme Court confirms conditional right to shut down business, favors Harinagar Sugar Mills in a landmark ruling.
In a landmark ruling, the Supreme Court of India has clarified that the right to shut down a business is not an absolute or standalone fundamental right under the Constitution.
The judgment, delivered by Justice Sanjay Karol and Justice Prashant Kumar Mishra, comes amid growing debates over the balance between individual economic freedoms and regulatory oversight in India’s evolving commercial landscape.
The case in question involved a challenge to government restrictions placed on the closure of a medium-sized manufacturing firm. The company had claimed that being prevented from shutting down operations violated its constitutional right to carry on any occupation, trade, or business under Article 19(1)(g) of the Indian Constitution.
In its verdict, the Apex Court acknowledged that while the freedom to conduct a business includes the right not to carry it on indefinitely, this does not imply an unfettered right to shut down operations in disregard of legal obligations, particularly those concerning employees, creditors, and public interest.
The Supreme Court of India has ruled that while businesses do enjoy a constitutional right to cease operations under Article 19(1)(g), this right is not absolute and must comply with reasonable restrictions laid out in labour laws.
The ruling came in a long-running dispute involving Harinagar Sugar Mills Ltd. (HSML), which had sought to shut down its Biscuit Division factory in Mumbai following the termination of its exclusive contract with Britannia Industries in 2019.
“The Constitution guarantees the right to carry on a trade or business, but this right is subject to reasonable restrictions,” the Court said. “The decision to close a business must comply with applicable laws, including labour codes, environmental obligations, and other statutory frameworks.”
In this particular case, HSML had filed an application on August 28, 2019, seeking permission to close its Mumbai unit. The company explained that it operated solely for Britannia, had no independent infrastructure, and could not secure any new clients despite efforts.
Although the Court ruled in favor of HSML’s right to close the business, it took a balanced approach by ensuring worker compensation.
Legal experts say the ruling will have significant implications for companies operating in highly regulated sectors, especially where closure affects large workforces or public services.
The Court also emphasized that any abrupt or arbitrary shutdown could not be insulated from scrutiny simply by invoking constitutional protections. The judgment reiterated that the state retains the power to regulate economic activity in the broader public interest.
This decision is being seen as a reaffirmation of the principle that economic rights, though protected under the Constitution, are not absolute and must be exercised responsibly within the limits of law.
Prime Day Sale 2025 starts on July 12! Add to cart: Kurtas and kurta sets at up to 80% off | Fashion Trends
When Prime Day meets ethnic fashion, magic happens. Starting July 12, Amazon’s Prime Day Sale 2025 is bringing you jaw-dropping deals on stunning kurta sets at up to 80% off. If you’re stocking up for festive season or just refreshing your wardrobe with breezy, elegant fits; now’s the time to wishlist like never before.
From flowy silks to everyday cottons, detailed embroidery to scalloped dupattas; these kurta sets are your ticket to effortless elegance. And with massive Prime Day discounts, looking festive-ready no longer means spending a fortune. Bookmark your favourites, because this ethnic drop is going fast (and fashionable).
Stylish kurta sets on Amazon Prime Day Sale at up to 80% off:
A rich burgundy hue meets subtle prints on silky fabric that drapes like royalty. This Libas kurta set is made for cocktail soirées, festive dinners, and Insta-boomerangs. Add jhumkas and a glass of wine (or both).
Pair it with:
Golden heels, sleek clutch, and a deep berry lipstick.
This deep green pleated beauty gives luxe-on-a-budget realness. Embroidered detailing at the yoke brings the elegance, while the relaxed fit keeps it comfy. Think wedding guest or Diwali office party.
Pair it with:
Chandbalis, nude heels, and soft curls.
This one’s for the maximalists — zari, embroidery, scalloped dupatta and a floral vibe all in one. It’s regal without trying too hard. Perfect for haldi or your cousin’s engagement.
Pair it with:
Embellished juttis, bold eyeliner, and a potli bag.
Cotton, comfort, and contrast embroidery – the holy trinity for everyday ethnic chic. From office looks to puja mornings, this one’s a weekday winner.
Pair it with:
Kohl-lined eyes, sleek ponytail, and strappy flats.
Digital floral prints make this georgette number airy, breezy, and oh-so-pretty. Flowy palazzos and a soft dupatta complete this brunch-to-sundowner ensemble.
Pair it with:
Soft pink lipstick, pearl studs, and a cute cane sling.
Clean, classic and cool – this cotton A-line set is like a monsoon breeze. The neutral palette lets you dress it up or keep it understated and is perfect for those who want to keep it lowkey.
Pair it with:
Statement earrings, tan kolhapuris, and minimal makeup.
Straight cut, smooth silk blend, and embroidery in all the right places – this one’s a power move in kurta form. Elegant enough for occasions, easy enough for dinners.
Pair it with:
Pointed mules, smokey eyes, and a velvet clutch.
Made to flatter every curve and occasion, this plus-size set brings embroidery and elegance in equal measure. It’s inclusive fashion that feels and looks premium.
Pair it with:
Classic bangles, a bold bindi, and confident posture.
This Prime Day, let your wardrobe win big. If you’re after occasionwear drama or everyday charm, these kurta sets offer up to 80% off and endless compliments. Add to wishlist now because the best looks go fast.
Similar stories for you:
Top 8 linen kurta sets that whisper summer elegance: Best picks to ace the summer season
Kurtas for men: Stylish ethnic wear for every occasion; Top 8 trendy picks
Limited time deals on sarees: Get 50% off on gorgeous pieces; Top 8 picks
Prime Day Sale 2025 starts on July 12! Add to cart: Kurta sets at up to 80% off: FAQs
- Are these kurta sets available in all sizes?
Most offer a wide range from S to XXL, including plus sizes.
- Will these prices change after Prime Day?
Yes, the discounts are exclusive to Prime Day (starting July 12), so act fast!
- Are the dupattas included in all sets?
Yes, most of the listed sets come with matching or contrast dupattas.
- Can I return or exchange if the size doesn’t fit?
Yes! Amazon’s return policy covers size-related exchanges. Check individual listings.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, with respect to the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
Sage to lay off most staff amid Supernus buyout
Dive Brief:
- Sage Therapeutics will lay off 338 employees, the vast majority of its workforce, while in the process of being acquired by Supernus Pharmaceuticals, according to a Massachusetts regulatory filing.
- The move comes less than two weeks after Supernus announced it would buy the developer of the postpartum depression drug Zurzuvae for $561 million, a move that one analyst described as an “unremarkable” outcome for a company that was once worth billions of dollars.
- The layoffs will be effective Aug. 22, according to the filing. It is unclear how the layoffs will impact ongoing R&D programs Supernus will acquire as part of its deal to buy Sage.
Dive Insight:
Sage has seen its share of ups and downs in the 15 years since its launch. The biotech sought to develop medicines for a variety of brain disorders, including epilepsy, Huntington’s disease and major depressive disorder. At its peak, Sage commanded a share price of nearly $200 apiece.
It managed to develop and market an intravenous treatment for postpartum depression, Zulresso, but failed to generate notable sales. An oral drug Sage developed next, Zurzuvae, was approved by the Food and Drug Administration in 2023. However, the agency rejected the company’s application to permit wider use among people with MDD.
Other hurdles included a string of clinical trial busts with its neurology programs. Last fall, Sage cut one-third of its workforce and, earlier this year, said it would pursue strategic alternatives after rebuffing an offer from Biogen to buy out the struggling company.
Sage employed 353 full-time employees as of the beginning of February, according to an annual filing. Of those, nearly one-third, or 122 employees, were involved in research and development.
Neither Sage nor Supernus responded to BioPharma Dive’s request for comment.
[PODCAST] 15 Years of Your Mortgage Goes to the Government — What That Means for Australia’s Housing Crisis with Tim Reardon
Did you know that for the first 15 years of your mortgage, you’re working mostly for the taxman, not your future wealth?
It’s a startling claim, but one backed by data from the Housing Industry Association — and it sheds new light on why housing affordability is getting worse, not better.
Today, I’m joined by Tim Reardon, Chief Economist at the HIA, to unpack this extraordinary insight.
We explore how government taxes and regulatory charges are silently front-loading the cost of home ownership, inflating house prices, and burdening Aussie families before they’ve even laid a brick.
And while there’s some good news on the horizon — with interest rate cuts expected to drive a recovery in home building — the longer-term challenges are immense. Think taxes, planning bottlenecks, and a construction industry on its knees due to chronic underbuilding and workforce shortages.
Whether you’re a property investor, homeowner, or policymaker, this conversation will leave you thinking differently about the hidden forces shaping the housing market — and why just building more homes won’t be enough.
Takeaways
- The first 15 years of mortgage repayments primarily cover taxes.
- Approximately 50% of the cost of a new house is attributed to taxes and fees.
- Government policies significantly impact housing supply and affordability.
- Subsidizing first home buyers does not address the root causes of housing unaffordability.
- The 1.2 million homes initiative requires substantial policy changes to succeed.
- Foreign investment is crucial for increasing housing supply.
- Build-to-rent projects are not currently providing affordable housing options.
- Interest rates directly influence the volume of new home building.
- Labor availability is a significant challenge for the construction industry.
- Policy reforms are necessary to improve housing supply and affordability.
Links and Resources:
Answer this week’s trivia question here- www.PropertyTrivia.com.au
- Win a hard copy of How to Grow a Multi-Million Dollar Property Portfolio – in your spare time.
- Everyone wins a copy of a fully updated property report – What’s ahead for property for 2025 and beyond
Get the team at Metropole to help build your personal Strategic Property Plan Click here and have a chat with us
Michael Yardney – Subscribe to my Property Update newsletter here
Tim Reardon HIA Chief Economist
Get a bundle of eBooks and Reports at www.PodcastBonus.com.au
Also, please subscribe to my other podcast Demographics Decoded with Simon Kuestenmacher – just look for Demographics Decoded wherever you are listening to this podcast and subscribe so each week we can unveil the trends shaping your future.
A Mini PC Is All the Computer You Need—Here’s Why
If you still think a powerful PC means a giant tower under your desk, think again. Modern mini PCs are nothing like their older counterparts, which means it’s time to say goodbye to those big, old tower PCs.
4
Mini PCs Are Powerful Enough for Most Tasks
Don’t let their small size fool you; modern mini PCs pack a serious amount of power. For years, if you wanted a workhorse computer to handle your everyday tasks, you had to get a bulky desktop tower. And it was justified because desktop towers offered far more power than mini PCs.
However, thanks to improvements in hardware over the last couple of years, mini PCs have become increasingly capable machines that can handle most everyday computing tasks with ease. These tiny boxes pack more power than you’d get from desktop computers just a few years ago.
Take the 2024 Mac mini, for example. It’s powered by Apple’s 10-core M4 chip with a 10-core GPU. There’s also an M4 Pro option, with either a 12- or 14-core CPU paired with a 16- or 20-core GPU, respectively. Memory starts at 16GB but can be configured up to a whopping 64GB, depending on your needs.
If you prefer Windows, consider Beelink’s SER9 Pro. It ships with two CPU options: AMD’s Ryzen AI 9 365 (10-core CPU with a 12-core GPU) and Ryzen 9 HX 370 (12-core CPU and 16-core GPU). These chips can deliver boost speeds of up to 5.0 GHz and 5.1 GHz, respectively, and you can choose between 32GB/1TB or 64GB/2TB memory and storage configurations.
That’s serious hardware by today’s standards, and these machines can handle almost anything you throw at them without a struggle. With their power, they can easily breeze through mundane tasks like web browsing, office work, video conferencing, and media streaming. They’re even capable of handling more demanding ones, such as gaming, video editing, and software development.
And most people aren’t doing demanding tasks to justify getting more powerful hardware than mini PCs offer. Even a low-powered CPU can be enough for most of today’s tasks.
3
They Save Space
One of the most significant advantages of buying a mini PC is how much space it frees up in your workspace. Their small footprint means you only need to spare a tiny area on your desk for the PC, unlike traditional desktop computers, which require more space. Heck, you can even mount it behind your monitor.
Using our two models as a reference, the Beelink SER9 Pro measures 5.3 x 5.3 x 1.7 inches and weighs only 3.21 pounds. The M4 Mac mini, on the other hand, measures 5.0 x 5.0 x 2.0 inches and is barely two pounds (the M4 Pro model, the heaviest of the two, is just 1.6 pounds).
Mini PCs are perfect for compact work setups where space is limited. Another advantage of the small footprint is that they’re portable and can be easily carried around, just like laptops. Of course, mini PCs aren’t as convenient as laptops because you’ll need a mouse, keyboard, plus a portable monitor.
2
They Cost Less Than You Think
Despite packing more than enough power for most people and tasks, mini PCs are surprisingly affordable. Entry-level mini PCs start as low as $150 to $200, with some going for even less.
The GMKtec Mini PC, for example, is an entry-level model that starts at around $158 as of this writing. It packs 16GB RAM, 512GB storage, and Intel’s N150 processor. The M4 Mac mini starts at $599 for a 16/256GB model, while the Beelink SER9 series starts at around $829. Beelink’s previous generation SER8 mini PC is even more affordable, starting at $479 for a model with 24GB RAM and 1TB storage.
Related
Mini PC vs. Desktop PC: What Should You Buy?
Do you really need a big, bulky desktop PC? It’s time to consider switching to a mini PC.
And with the vibrant mini PC market, you’ll surely find something that’s just powerful enough for everyday needs, fitting your budget. Compared to laptops or desktops, you get more computing power for a fraction of the cost.
1
They’re Quiet and Energy-Efficient
When you compare costs, it’s not just about the sticker price. Mini PCs also help you save money on energy costs. They often use efficient CPUs that generate less heat, allowing manufacturers to build models with smaller, quieter fans or, in some cases, no fans at all.
Energy efficiency is another significant benefit of opting for a mini PC, as they utilize power-efficient CPUs compared to full-sized tower PCs. For context, the TDP (Thermal Design Power) of the AMD Ryzen AI 9 365 processor used in Beelink’s SER9 Pro is just 65W, the same as the base version of Apple’s M4 chip. That’s almost half the default TDP of AMD’s desktop-class Ryzen 9 9900X3D.
It might not seem like a significant difference, but over the course of a year, lower electricity usage can trim your utility bills, especially if you leave your computer running for extended periods each day.
Modern mini PCs might be the only computers you’ll ever need in 2025 and beyond. They’re portable, energy-efficient, and affordable compared to desktop PCs, and yet powerful enough for most tasks.
Creative pastries present unique symbols of Jiangsu's cities
‘Project Hail Mary’ trailer: Ryan Gosling goes to space, meets alien
Ryan Gosling puts the “not” in “Astronaut” in the new trailer for “Project Hail Mary.”
The upcoming sci-fi film, based on Andy Weir‘s novel of the same name, stars Gosling as middle school teacher turned reluctant astronaut Ryland Grace, who’s tasked with saving humanity from the effects of a dimming sun. However, when he wakes up from a coma as the sole survivor aboard a spaceship, he must overcome his amnesia to remember where he is and why he was sent there.
“It’s an insanely ambitious story that’s massive in scope and it seemed really hard to make, and that’s kind of our bag,” Gosling said of “Project Hail Mary” at CinemaCon in April, where he debuted footage from the film, according to Variety. “This is why we go to the movies. And I’m not just saying it because I’m in it. I’m also saying it because I’m a producer on the film.”
The trailer, released Monday by Amazon MGM Studios, opens with Gosling startling awake on the spacecraft, his hair and beard uncharacteristically long. “I’m several light-years from my apartment,” he proclaims, “and I’m not an astronaut.”
It then jolts back in time to show Grace pre-launch as he learns from Eva Stratt (Sandra Hüller) that if he does not journey into space, everything on Earth will go extinct. According to Stratt, who heads the mission, Grace is the only scientist who might understand what is happening to the sun and surrounding stars.
The trailer, which progresses through an intense montage set to Harry Styles’ “Sign of the Times,” teases Gosling’s signature humor. “I can’t even moonwalk!” the “Barbie” actor declares at one point. (Gosling portrayed moonwalker Neil Armstrong in another recent space movie, Damien Chazelle’s “First Man.”)
Everything leads up to Grace meeting an alien, who isn’t shown in full — but fans of the book know it plays an integral role in saving planet Earth and beyond.
The film, directed by Phil Lord and Christopher Miller, marks the second book-to-movie adaptation for Weir, whose novel “The Martian” became an Oscar-nominated 2015 blockbuster starring Matt Damon. An adaptation for his book “Artemis” is also in development with the same directing team.
“Project Hail Mary” hits theaters March 20.
Bad News for EOL Vehicle Owners! Fuel Stations To Not Sell Fuel To End-of-Life Vehicles in Delhi, Govt Plans To Impound Older Vehicles Starting July 1; Check Details
New Delhi, June 30: The ‘No fuel to old car’ policy, aka ‘no fuel for overage vehicles’ policy, will come into effect in Delhi on July 1, 2025. Tomorrow, the end-of-life (EOL) vehicles considered overage or lacking a valid PUC certificate, will be impounded in the capital of India, and the owners driving such vehicles will be penalised up to INR 10,000. The EOL vehicles will be seized following the directions issued by CAQM (Commission for Air Quality Management). The Delhi government will act on overage vehicles seen at fuel stations or parked in public places.
According to the new ‘no fuel to old car’ policy that is coming into effect on July 1, petrol vehicles which are more than 15 years old and diesel vehicles which are more than 10 years of age will be marked EOLs (end-of-life). Such overage vehicles will not be provided with any fuel at the selected fuel stations in the city. The government has installed ANPR (Automated Plate Number Recognition) cameras at around 500 fuel stations to detect such old vehicles. 2 Helmet Rule in India: Government Proposes To Make It Mandatory for 2-Wheeler Manufacturers To Provide 2 Helmets at Time of Vehicle Purchase.
Why is the Delhi Government Implementing the No Fuel to Old Car Policy?
Delhi government will enforce this new policy of not consuming fuel for old vehicles to reduce the emissions caused by overage vehicles in the city. Vehicular pollution is considered to be one of the major contributing factors to Delhi’s air pollution. Under this new initiative, vehicles that have crossed the permissible age limit will be restricted from accessing fuels such as petrol and diesel.
Fine on Old or Overage Vehicles Under New ‘No Fuel to Old Car Policy’
The four-wheeler which falls under the EOL category will be slapped with a penalty of INR 10,000. On the other hand, the EOL two-wheelers will face INR 5,000 fine starting tomorrow. The CAQM directives have been issued due to the slow progress in removing the older vehicles which cause emissions. Previously, the Supreme Court of India and NGT (National Green Tribunal) issued orders for the same.
Delhi CM Rekha Gupta and Environmental Minister Majinder Singh Sirsa will closely monitor the progress. The Majinder Singh Sirsa said that the government would prefer delay instead of partial or ineffective implementation. The enforcement agencies will regularly remove the EOL vehicles from public places in the city and seize them. The authorities will also issue a seizure memo to the owners. Tesla 1st Self-Driving Delivery: Elon Musk’s EV Firm Completes 1st Fully Autonomous Model Y Delivery (See Pics).
The vehicles will be taken to RVSF (registered vehicle scrapping facility). However, if the owner chooses to move the EOL vehicle out of Delhi, they must obtain an NOC (no-objection certificate) within the year of the vehicle’s expiration date.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jun 30, 2025 01:00 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Here Is Everyone Mark Zuckerberg Has Hired So Far for Meta’s ‘Superintelligence’ Team
Mark Zuckerberg notified Meta staff today to introduce them to the new superintelligence team. The memo, which WIRED obtained, lists names and bios for the recently hired employees, many of whom came from rival AI firms like OpenAI, Anthropic, and Google.
Over the past few months, Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg has been on a recruiting frenzy to poach some of the most sought-after talent in AI. The social media giant has invested $14.3 billion in Scale AI and hired Alexandr Wang, its CEO, to run Meta’s Superintelligence Labs. News of the memo was first reported by Bloomberg.
“We’re going to call our overall organization Meta Superintelligence Labs (MSL). This includes all of our foundations, product, and FAIR teams, as well as a new lab focused on developing the next generation of our models,” Zuckerberg wrote in the memo on Monday. Meta declined to comment.
Zuckerberg introduced Wang, who will be the company’s “chief AI officer” and leader of MSL, as well as former GitHub CEO Nat Friedman. Friedman will colead the new lab with Wang, with a focus on AI products and applied research.
Here’s the list of all the new hires as seen in Zuckerberg’s memo. It notably doesn’t include the employees who joined from OpenAI’s Zurich office.
- Trapit Bansal: pioneered RL on chain of thought and cocreator of o-series models at OpenAl.
- Shuchao Bi: cocreator of GPT-4o voice mode and o4-mini. Previously led multimodal post-training at OpenAl.
- Huiwen Chang: cocreator of GPT-4o’s image generation, and previously invented MaskIT and Muse text-to-image architectures at Google Research.
- Ji Lin: helped build 03/o4-mini, GPT-4o, GPT-4.1, GPT-4.5, 40-imagegen, and Operator reasoning stack.
- Joel Pobar: inference at Anthropic. Previously at Meta for 11 years on HHVM, Hack, Flow, Redex, performance tooling, and machine learning.
- Jack Rae: pre-training tech lead for Gemini and reasoning for Gemini 2.5. Led Gopher and Chinchilla early LLM efforts at DeepMind.
- Hongyu Ren: cocreator of GPT-4o, 4o-mini, o1-mini, o3-mini, 03 and o4-mini. Previously leading a group for post-training at OpenAl.
- Johan Schalkwyk: former Google Fellow, early contributor to Sesame, and technical lead for Maya.
- Pei Sun: post-training, coding, and reasoning for Gemini at Google Deepmind. Previously created the last two generations of Waymo’s perception models.
- Jiahui Yu: cocreator of 03, 04-mini, GPT-4.1 and GPT-4o. Previously led the perception team at OpenAl, and co-led multimodal at Gemini.
- Shengjia Zhao: cocreator of ChatGPT, GPT-4, all mini models, 4.1 and 03. Previously led synthetic data at OpenAl.
In a First, Trump and GOP-Led Congress Prepare To Swell Ranks of U.S. Uninsured
CLARKESVILLE, Ga. — Last September, Alton Fry went to the doctor concerned he had high blood pressure. The trip would result in a prostate cancer diagnosis.
So began the stress of trying to pay for tens of thousands of dollars in treatment — without health insurance.
“I’ve never been sick in my life, so I’ve never needed insurance before,” said Fry, a 54-year-old self-employed masonry contractor who restores old buildings in the rural Appalachian community he’s called home nearly all his life.
Making sure he had insurance was the last thing on his mind, until recently, Fry said. He had been rebuilding his life after a prison stay, maintaining his sobriety, restarting his business, and remarrying his wife. “Things got busy,” he said.
Now, with a household income of about $48,000, Fry and his wife earn too much to qualify for Georgia’s limited Medicaid expansion. And he said he found that the health plans sold on the state’s Affordable Care Act exchange were too expensive or the coverage too limited.
In late April, a friend launched a crowdfunding campaign to help Fry cover some of the costs. To save money, Fry said, he’s taking a less aggressive treatment route than his doctor recommended.
“There is no help for middle-class America,” he said.
More than 26 million Americans lacked health insurance in the first six months of 2024, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
The uninsured are mostly low-income adults under age 65, and people of color, and most live in the South and West. The uninsured rate in the 10 states that, like Georgia, have not expanded Medicaid to nearly all low-income adults was 14.1% in 2023, compared with 7.6% in expansion states, according to KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News.
Health policy researchers expect the number of uninsured to swell as the second Trump administration and a GOP-controlled Congress try to enact policies that explicitly roll back health coverage for the first time since the advent of the modern U.S. health system in the early 20th century.
Under the “One Big Beautiful Bill Act” — budget legislation that would achieve some of President Donald Trump’s priorities, like extending tax cuts mainly benefiting the wealthy — some 10.9 million Americans would lose health insurance by 2034, according to estimates by the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office based on a House version of the budget bill.
A Senate version of the bill could result in more people losing Medicaid coverage, with reductions in federal spending and rules that would make it harder for people to qualify. But that bill suffered a major blow June 26 when the Senate parliamentarian, a nonpartisan official who enforces the chamber’s rules, rejected several health provisions — including the proposal to gradually reduce provider taxes, a mechanism that nearly every state uses to increase its federal Medicaid funding.
The number could rise to 16 million if proposed rule changes to the ACA take effect and tax credits that help people pay for ACA plans expire at the end of the year, according to the CBO. In KFF poll results released in June, nearly two-thirds of people surveyed viewed the bill unfavorably and more than half said they were worried federal funding cuts would hurt their family’s ability to obtain and afford health care.
Like Fry, more people would be forced to pay for health expenses out-of-pocket, leading to delays in care, lost access to needed doctors and medications, and poorer physical and financial health.
“The effects could be catastrophic,” said Jennifer Tolbert, deputy director of KFF’s Program on Medicaid and the Uninsured.
The House-passed bill would represent the largest reduction in federal support for Medicaid and health coverage in history, she said. If the Senate approves it, it would be the first time Congress moved to eliminate coverage for millions of people.
“This would take us back,” Tolbert said.
A Patchwork System
The United States is the only wealthy country where a substantial number of citizens lack health insurance, due to nearly a century of pushback against universal coverage from doctors, insurance companies, and elected officials.
“The complexity is everywhere throughout the system,” said Sherry Glied, dean of New York University’s Wagner School of Public Service, who worked in the George H.W. Bush, Clinton, and Obama administrations. “The big bug is that people fall between the cracks.”
This year, KFF Health News is speaking to Americans about the challenges they face in finding health insurance and the effects on their ability to get care; to providers who serve the uninsured; and to policy experts about why, even when the nation hit its lowest recorded uninsured rate in 2023, nearly a tenth of the U.S. population still lacked health coverage.
So far, the reporting has found that despite decades of policies designed to increase access to care, the very structure of the nation’s health insurance system creates the opposite effect.
Government-backed universal coverage has eluded U.S. policymakers for decades.
After lobbying from physician groups, President Franklin D. Roosevelt abandoned plans to include universal health coverage in the Social Security Act of 1935. Then, because of a wage and salary cap used to control inflation during World War II, more employers offered health insurance to lure workers. In 1954, health coverage was formally exempted from income tax requirements, which led more employers to offer the benefit as part of compensation packages.
Insurance coverage offered by employers came to form the foundation of the U.S. health system. But eventually, problems with linking health insurance to employment emerged.
“We realized, well, wait, not everybody is working,” said Heidi Allen, an associate professor at the Columbia School of Social Work who studies the impact of social policies on access to care. “Children aren’t working. People who are elderly are not working. People with disabilities are not working.”
Yet subsequent efforts to expand coverage to all Americans were met with backlash from unions who wanted health insurance as a bargaining chip, providers who didn’t want government oversight, and those who had coverage through their employers.
That led policymakers to add programs piecemeal to make health insurance accessible to more Americans.
There’s Medicare for older adults and Medicaid for people with low incomes and disabilities, both created in 1965; the Children’s Health Insurance Program, created in 1997; the ACA’s exchange plans and Medicaid expansion for people who can’t access job-based coverage, created in 2010.
As a result, the U.S. has a patchwork of health insurance programs with numerous interest groups vying for dollars, rather than a cohesive system, health policy researchers say.
Falling Through the Cracks
The lack of a cohesive system means that, even though Americans are eligible for health insurance, they struggle to access it, said Mark Shepard, an associate professor of public policy at the Harvard Kennedy School of Government. No central entity exists in the U.S. to ensure that all people have a plan, he said.
Over half of the uninsured might qualify for Medicaid or subsidies that can help cover the costs of an ACA plan, according to KFF. But many people aren’t aware of their options or can’t navigate overlapping programs — and even subsidized coverage can be unaffordable.
Those who have fallen through the cracks said it feels like the system has failed them.
Yorjeny Almonte of Allentown, Pennsylvania, earns about $2,600 a month as an inspector in a cabinet warehouse. When she started her job in December 2023, she didn’t want to spend nearly 10% of her income on health insurance.
But, last year, her uninsured mom chose to fly to the Dominican Republic to get care for a health concern. So Almonte, 23, who also needed to see a doctor, investigated her employer’s health offerings. By then she had missed the deadline to sign up.
“Now I have to wait another year,” she said.
In January, Camden, Alabama, resident Kiana George, who’s uninsured, landed in an intensive care unit months after she stopped seeing a nurse practitioner and taking blood pressure medications — an ordeal that saddled her with nearly $7,000 in medical bills.
George, 30, was kicked off Medicaid in 2023 after she got hired by an after-school program. It pays $800 a month, an income too high to qualify her for Medicaid in Alabama, which hasn’t expanded to cover most low-income adults. She also doesn’t make enough for a free or reduced-cost ACA plan.
George, who has a 9-year-old daughter, said she “has no idea” how she can repay the debt from the emergency room visit. And because she fears more bills, she has given up on treatment for ovarian cysts.
“It hurts, but I’m just gonna take my chances,” she said.
Widening the Gaps
Health insurance is fundamentally a financial product, intended to protect the policyholder’s pocketbook from accidents or illnesses.
Researchers have known for decades that a lack of insurance coverage leads to poor access to health care, said Tom Buchmueller, a health economist at the University of Michigan Ross School of Business.
“It’s only more recently we’ve had really good, strong evidence that shows that health insurance really does improve health outcomes,” Buchmueller said.
Research released this spring by the National Bureau of Economic Research found that expanding Medicaid reduced low-income adults’ chances of dying by 2.5%. In 2019, a separate study published by that nonpartisan think tank provided experimental evidence that health insurance coverage reduced mortality among middle-aged adults.
In late May, the House narrowly advanced the budget legislation that independent government analysts said would result in millions of Americans losing health insurance coverage and reduce federal spending on programs like Medicaid by billions of dollars.
A key provision would require some Medicaid enrollees to work, volunteer, or complete other qualifying activities for 80 hours a month, starting at the end of 2026. Most Medicaid enrollees already work or have some reason they can’t, such as a disability, according to KFF.
House Speaker Mike Johnson has defended the requirement as “moral.”
“If you are able to work and you refuse to do so, you are defrauding the system. You’re cheating the system,” he told CBS News in the wake of the bill’s passage.
A Senate version of the bill also includes work requirements and more frequent eligibility checks for Medicaid recipients.
Fiscal conservatives argue a solution is needed to curb health care’s rising costs.
The U.S. spends about twice as much per capita on health care as other wealthy nations, and that spending would grow under the GOP’s budget bill, said Michael Cannon, director of health policy studies at the Cato Institute, a think tank that supports less government spending on health care.
But the bill doesn’t address the root causes of administrative complexity or unaffordable care, Cannon said. To do that would entail, for instance, doing away with the tax break for employer-sponsored care, which he said fuels excessive spending, raises prices, and ties health insurance to employment. He said the bill should cut federal funding for Medicaid, not just limit its growth.
The bill would throw more people into a high-cost health care landscape with little protection, said Aaron Carroll, president and CEO of AcademyHealth, a nonpartisan health policy research nonprofit.
“There’s a ton of evidence that shows that if you make people pay more for health care, they get less health care,” he said. “There’s lots of evidence that shows that disproportionately affects poor, sicker people.”
Labon McKenzie, 45, lives in Georgia, the only state that requires some Medicaid enrollees to work or complete other qualifying activities to obtain coverage.
He hasn’t been able to work since he broke multiple bones after he fell through a skylight while on the job three years ago. He got fired from a county road and bridge crew after the accident and hasn’t been approved for Social Security or disability benefits.
“I can’t stand up too long,” he said. “I can’t sit down too long.”
In February, McKenzie started seeing double, but canceled an appointment with an ophthalmologist because he couldn’t come up with the $300 the doctor wanted in advance. His cousin gave him an eye patch to tide him over, and, in desperation, he took expired eye drops his daughter gave him. “I had to try something,” he said.
McKenzie, who lives in rural Fort Gaines, wants to work again. But without benefits, he can’t get the care he needs to become well enough.
“I just want my body fixed,” he said.
Have you recently lost your health insurance coverage? Have you been uninsured for a while? Click here to contact KFF Health News and share your story.
Amid Rumors Of Halo On PS5 And Switch 2, Microsoft Confirms Halo News Is Coming
Microsoft is working on multiple new Halo projects, but what are they and when will we learn about them? It might not be a whole lot longer until Halo’s future comes into focus. Halo Studios has announced that it will share more information about what’s next for Halo at the Halo World Championships event this October.
In a blog post, Halo Studios said it’s observed “a fair amount of speculation about when and where more details might emerge” about the next Halo projects currently underway. “We don’t usually comment on such matters, but this time we want to enter the chat and share a little more perspective for Halo fans who might be on the fence about whether to attend this year’s event,” the developer said.
It was at last year’s Halo World Championships that Microsoft revealed the “A New Dawn” trailer that showed off concepts for new Halo projects in the Unreal Engine, including Project Foundry. This was also when Microsoft announced that 343 Industries was rebranding as Halo Studios.
“For us, A New Dawn was just the beginning–at this year’s HaloWC, we look forward to continuing the conversation,” the developer said. “Speculation is always fun, but if you want the official scoop on what Halo Studios has been working on, you won’t want to miss this year’s Halo World Championship.”
The event takes place October 24-26 in Seattle. You can buy tickets to the event or watch the matches live online.
2021’s Halo Infinite is the latest entry in the main series. Microsoft has made major changes since then, including installing a new executive leadership team and switching game engines, while acknowledging that Halo Infinite missed the mark in some respects. Xbox boss Matt Booty previously said Halo Infinite’s launch was like a runner tripping at the finish line.
“Halo Infinite was the last remnant of how we made Halo games in the past. That was our recipe. And what we’re doing right now is changing our recipe,” studio head Pierre Hintze said.
Gallery
It’s been reported that Microsoft wants to bring Halo to PS5 and Switch 2, and it could happen as soon as later this year. Specifically, it’s been said that Microsoft is cooking up a new Halo: Combat Evolved remaster project. 2026 marks the 25th anniversary of Xbox and Halo, and Microsoft Gaming boss Phil Spencer has said Microsoft could release a new Halo project next year alongside new Fable and Gears of War games.
Keep checking back with GameSpot for the latest on Halo projects.
Scientists just found a sugar switch that protects your brain from Alzheimer’s
A new study from scientists at the Buck Institute for Research on Aging has revealed a surprising player in the battle against Alzheimer’s disease and other forms of dementia: brain sugar metabolism. Published in Nature Metabolism, the research uncovers how breaking down glycogen — a stored form of glucose — in neurons may protect the brain from toxic protein buildup and degeneration.
Glycogen is typically thought of as a reserve energy source stored in the liver and muscles. While small amounts also exist in the brain, particularly in support cells called astrocytes, its role in neurons has long been dismissed as negligible. “This new study challenges that view, and it does so with striking implications,” says Professor Pankaj Kapahi, PhD, senior scientist on the study. “Stored glycogen doesn’t just sit there in the brain; it is involved in pathology.”
The research team, led by postdoc Sudipta Bar, PhD, discovered that in both fly and human models of tauopathy (a group of neurodegenerative diseases including Alzheimer’s), neurons accumulate excessive glycogen. More importantly, this buildup appears to contribute to disease progression. Bar says tau, the infamous protein that clumps into tangles in Alzheimer’s patients, appears to physically bind to glycogen, trapping it and preventing its breakdown.
When glycogen can’t be broken down, the neurons lose an essential mechanism for managing oxidative stress, a key feature in aging and neurodegeneration. By restoring the activity of an enzyme called glycogen phosphorylase (GlyP) — which kicks off the process of glycogen breakdown — the researchers found they could reduce tau-related damage in fruit flies and human stem cell-derived neurons.
Rather than using glycogen as a fuel for energy production, these enzyme-supported neurons rerouted the sugar molecules into the pentose phosphate pathway (PPP) — a critical route for generating NADPH (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate) and Glutathione, molecules that protect against oxidative stress. “By increasing GlyP activity, the brain cells could better detoxify harmful reactive oxygen species, thereby reducing damage and even extending the lifespan of tauopathy model flies,” said Bar.
Even more promising, the team demonstrated that dietary restriction (DR) — a well-known intervention to extend lifespan — naturally enhanced GlyP activity and improved tau-related outcomes in flies. They further mimicked these effects pharmacologically using a molecule called 8-Br-cAMP, showing that the benefits of DR might be reproduced through drug-based activation of this sugar-clearing system. “This work could explain why GLP-1 drugs, now widely used for weight loss, show promise against dementia, potentially by mimicking dietary restriction,” said Kapahi.
Researchers also confirmed similar glycogen accumulation and protective effects of GlyP in human neurons derived from patients with frontotemporal dementia (FTD), strengthening the potential for translational therapies. Kapahi says the study emphasizes the power of the fly as a model system in uncovering how metabolic dysregulation impacts neurodegeneration. “Work in this simple animal allowed us to move into human neurons in a much more targeted way,” he said.
Kapahi also acknowledges the Buck’s highly collaborative atmosphere as a major factor in the work. His lab, with expertise in fly aging and neurodegeneration, took advantage of proteomics expertise in the Schilling lab and the Seyfried lab (at Emory University) as well as the Ellerby lab which has expertise in human iPSCs and neurodegeneration.
Kapahi says this study not only highlights glycogen metabolism as an unexpected hero in the brain but also opens up a new direction in the search for treatments against Alzheimer’s and related diseases. “By discovering how neurons manage sugar, we may have unearthed a novel therapeutic strategy: one that targets the cell’s inner chemistry to fight age-related decline,” he says. “As we continue to age as a society, findings like these offer hope that better understanding — and perhaps rebalancing — our brain’s hidden sugar code could unlock powerful tools for combating dementia.”
Coauthors: Additional Buck collaborators include Kenneth A. Wilson, Tyler A.U. Hilsabeck, Sydney Alderfer, Jordan B Burton, Samah Shah, Anja Holtz, Enrique M. Carrera, Jennifer N. Beck, Jackson H Chen, Grant Kauwe, Tara E. Tracy, Birgit Schilling, and Lisa M. Ellerby. Other collaborators include Eric B. Dammer, Fatemeh Seifar and Nicholas T. Seyfried, Emory Center for Neurodegenerative Disease, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA as well as Ananth Shantaraman, Department of Biochemistry, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
Acknowledgments: The work was supported by NIH grants R01AG038688, R21AG054121, AG045835, R01AG071995, R01AG070193, T32AG000266-23, R01AG061879, P01AG066591 and 1S10 OD016281. Other support came from the Hevolution Foundation, American Federation of Aging Research, the Larry L. Hillblom Foundation and the CatalystX award from Alex and Bob Griswold
4th National Moot Court Competition 2025 at JIS University
About the University
JIS University was established through the Legislative Act of the Government of West Bengal, viz. JIS University Act, 2014 (West Bengal Act XXII of 2014) that came into force in February, 2015. The University has a mission to be one of the top class universities in India and a preferred destination for students, research scholars and faculty members alike.
Eligibility
- Students duly enrolled and pursuing full time 5 years or 3 years undergraduate law course from India or from a foreign university with law as major may apply to participate in 4th NATIONAL MOOT COURT COMPETITION, JIS UNIVERSITY.
- Maximum 5 teams from an Institute are eligible to Participate.
- A team should be comprising of Maximum 3 Members (2 Speakers and 1 Researcher) or 2 Speakers.
- A team comprising from students of different institutions are eligible to apply.
Submission Procedure
- Each team shall register to the 4 th National Moot Court Competition, Department of Juridical Sciences, JIS University by filing registration form, in the prescribed manner by 12 th August, 2025.
- On receipt of the duly filled registration form the institute shall respond to the participating team, acknowledging the receipt.
- After the deadline for the registration expires, the Moot Court Committee shall respond to each registered team, with a unique team code, which shall be used to identify the teams during the competition.
- Bring a Hard Copy of the Bonafide Certificate/ ID Card duly signed and sealed by the competent authority of the institution.
How to Register?
Interested candidates can register online via the link given at the end of the post.
Fee
- The registration for the event is Rs. 500/-(Five Hundred) per team.
- The registration fee for 4 th National Moot Court Competition is to be paid through NEFT transfer or UPI. No other payment method shall be accepted.
- Any additional charges incurred by the team while making the wire transfer are to be borne by the team.
- Fee details:
Name of Beneficiary: Souvik Chatterji
RTGS/ IFS Code No.: SBIN0005374
Account Number: 31060816392
Account Type: Saving
Bank Name: South Sinthee
Branch Name: State Bank of India
Important dates
- Last date of registration – 12/08/2025
- Release of Team Codes – 15/08/2025
- Release of Clarifications – 18/08/2025
- Memorial Submission Deadline – 20/08/2025
- Oral Rounds – 22/08/2025
- Researcher Test – 22/08/2025
- Valedictory – 22/08/2025
Prizes
- WINNING TEAM: RS. 12,000/ + Trophy + Certificate
- 1ST RUNNERS UP: RS. 10,000/ + Trophy + Certificate
- 2ND RUNNER UP: RS. 8,000/ + Trophy + Certificate
- BEST SPEAKER: RS. 3,000/ + Trophy + Certificate
- BEST RESEARCHER: RS. 3,000/ + Trophy + Certificate
- BEST MEMORIAL: RS. 3,000/ + Trophy + Certificate
- Certificate of Participation to all.
Contact
Contact Mail – [email protected]
Click here to register.
Happy National Doctors’ Day 2025: 30+ wishes, messages, images, greetings, WhatsApp and Facebook status to share
National Doctors’ Day, observed on July 1 each year in India, honours the relentless commitment, compassion, and service of the country’s medical professionals. It highlights the crucial role doctors play in healing and uplifting communities, often while making personal sacrifices along the way.
To make this day truly special, here are some heartfelt wishes, thoughtful messages, beautiful images, and warm greetings you can share with the doctor in your life to show your gratitude and appreciation. (Also read: National Doctor’s Day 2025: Why is it celebrated on July 1? Know theme, history, significance and more )
National Doctors’ Day 2025 wishes
1. Happy National Doctor’s Day to the one who heals not just with medicine but with compassion and care. Thank you for all that you do!
2. I wish you a Happy Doctor’s Day filled with appreciation because your compassion changes lives in more ways than one.
3. Your care has healed, your words have soothed, and your actions have inspired. Wishing you a beautiful Doctor’s Day.
4. A doctor’s job is never easy, but you do it with so much grace. Happy Doctor’s Day!
5. You carry the weight of many lives, yet continue with kindness and strength. Happy Doctor’s Day!
6. I’ll never forget how much your care meant to me in a difficult time. Thank you, and Happy Doctor’s Day!
7. Happy Doctor’s Day to someone who has changed lives with every diagnosis, every decision, and every act of care.
8. Happy Doctor’s Day! May you always be surrounded by gratitude, respect, and good health.
9. You inspire us with your courage, knowledge, and kindness. Happy Doctor’s Day.
National Doctors’ Day messages and greetings
10. Thank you for being a light in the darkest times. Wishing you a joyful Doctor’s Day.
11. A heartfelt salute to your dedication, passion, and healing hands. Happy Doctor’s Day.
12. Your care brings comfort, your smile brings strength. Happy Doctor’s Day.
13. You’ve got the cure for pain and the heart to heal. Happy Doctor’s Day
14. I’ll never forget how you made me feel heard and safe. Happy Doctor’s Day!
15. It’s an honour to know someone who lives to serve others. Happy Doctor’s Day to you!
16. Your journey may be tough, but your purpose is powerful. Happy Doctor’s Day!
17. You make medicine an art of hope. Wishing you a meaningful Doctor’s Day.
18. Happy Doctor’s Day to someone whose work brings health, hope, and healing into the world.
19. Your dedication to healing lives is nothing short of inspiring. Happy Doctors’ Day!
20. May your kindness and care continue to inspire us all. Wishing you a Happy Doctors’ Day!
National Doctors’ Day WhatsApp and Facebook status
21. May your day be filled with the same hope and care you bring to your patients. Happy Doctors’ Day!
22. Happy Doctors’ Day 2025! Your healing hands and kind heart are a true blessing to the world.
23. Thank you for being a source of strength and healing in our lives. Happy Doctors’ Day 2025
24. Your role in our lives is powerful beyond words. Thank you and Happy Doctors’ Day 2025
25. Happy Doctors’ Day to someone who makes a real difference every single day.
26. Happy Doctors’ Day! Thank you for healing us with your hands and touching our lives with your heart.
27. Wishing you a day filled with appreciation and love, you deserve it all. Happy Doctors’ Day!
28. Happy Doctors’ Day to the one who brings smiles, comfort, and health into people’s lives.
29. To the hands that heal and the hearts that care, Happy Doctors’ Day!
30. Your support meant the world to me. Wishing you a very Happy Doctors’ Day!
31. You heal with science and lead with compassion. Happy Doctors’ Day!
32. Happy Doctors’ Day to someone who makes healing feel human and hopeful. We appreciate you deeply.
33. Here’s to the quiet strength, tireless hours, and everyday miracles you bring to life. Happy Doctors’ Day!
Note to readers: This story includes AI-generated elements.
Moderna flu shot outperforms marketed vaccines in large late-stage trial
Dive Brief:
- Moderna’s seasonal influenza vaccine met its main goal in a large Phase 3 trial, reducing the risk of influenza-like illness in people 50 years and older by 27% compared with those given a marketed shot targeting three or four strains of the virus, the company said Monday.
- The COVID-19 vaccine pioneer said it will begin discussing an approval submission with the Food and Drug Adminstration, aiming to launch what would be the first messenger RNA-based influenza vaccine in the U.S. as early as the 2026-2027 flu season.
- FDA submission of the flu vaccine data could also pave the way for Moderna to also seek approval of a combination COVID-19 and influenza shot. However, they will be reviewed by an FDA and Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, which governs clinical use of approved flu shots, that have become more unfavorable to vaccines and mRNA medicines.
Dive Insight:
Since helping lead the world out of the pandemic by speedily developing its vaccine Spikevax, Moderna has struggled to find a second act. With declining uptake of COVID-19 boosters — access to which will be limited in the future — and disappointing growth for its newest vaccine for respiratory syncytial virus, the company has seen its near-term outlook limited.
An mRNA cancer vaccine it developed has generated promising data, but remains in late-stage testing.
However, its mRNA platform continues to generate effective vaccines. If approved, the seasonal flu shot could be a new source of growth. The trial tested Moderna’s shot, codenamed mRNA-1010, against four marketed vaccines developed by GSK to determine if the experimental shot could reduce incidence of flu.
In addition to the broad analysis in people 50 and older, Moderna said its shot also reduced the risk of sickness in those 65 and older by 27%. The company also said the vaccine showed strong effectiveness for all the strains included in the shot.
According to the company, side effects were mostly mild and related to injection site pain or flu-like symptoms. But Moderna added there were no significant differences between those side effects in people who got MRNA-1010 and other vaccines.
The positive data are most significant for potentially enabling Moderna to submit the combination flu-COVID shot, “which represents a more differentiated commercial opportunity,” TD Securities analyst Tyler Van Buren wrote in a note to clients.
Leerink Partners analyst Mani Foroohar noted, however, that the shot had resulted in more adverse reactions in another trial, which could trigger increased scrutiny from the FDA.
There’s More to Property Negotiation Than You Think
Key takeaways
Most buyers mistakenly believe negotiation is simply about haggling over dollars.
In reality, it’s a strategic process with psychological depth, multiple moving parts, and subtle leverage points. The professionals understand this, and use it.
Trying to negotiate your own deal without experience is like doing your own legal work or surgery, risky and potentially costly.
Inexperience leads to overpaying, getting emotionally trapped, or simply missing hidden issues.
Let me let you in on a little secret…
Most property buyers think negotiation is just about haggling over price.
But as someone who’s been in the property game for decades, I can tell you—it’s not even close.
There’s so much more to the negotiation process than meets the eye.
In fact, there are layers and nuances most amateur buyers simply don’t see, let alone understand.
And that’s exactly why savvy home buyers and investors bring in professionals like the buyers’ agent team at Metropole to help them level the playing field.
The psychology of negotiation
The best negotiators in the world say the same thing: “A great negotiation is where both parties feel like they got what they wanted.”
That’s a subtle but powerful insight.
Yes, you want to buy the right property at the right price.
But remember, there are two parties on the other side, the vendor and the agent who represents them.
While a lot is written about what the vendor wants, have you ever thought about what the selling agent wants?
Sure, they want to please their client and get the property sold, but since they only get paid for their time if a sale occurs, they have a vested interest in ensuring the sale goes through.
Selling is just the means to that end.
So if they lose a deal, they don’t get paid.
And that’s a crucial point of leverage many buyers forget.
The power lies with you (if you know how to use it)
The agent steps in—armed with every play in the book: artificial urgency, whispers of phantom buyers, subtle pressure tactics. It’s all carefully choreographed to put you on the back foot.
But here’s the secret sauce…
It’s your money. Your decision. And most importantly, you have the ultimate weapon – The power to walk away.
And that’s exactly what most buyers give up, without even realising it, because they get emotionally attached.
And let me tell you, emotion is the enemy of good negotiation.
The tools of a seasoned negotiator
Here’s where the real skill comes in.
Negotiation is a process, a strategic game of psychology, timing, and positioning.
And it’s not something you master by reading a blog or watching a few YouTube videos.
But here’s what seasoned pros (like the Metropole team) do differently:
1. They Don’t Dance to the Agent’s Tune
Agents want you to play their game.
They’ll set a tempo: fast decisions, short deadlines, pressure to act before someone else swoops in.
But a good negotiator slows things down.
They do their due diligence, work to their own timeline, and make decisions with clarity, not pressure.
At Metropole, we never get rushed into a deal. We control the rhythm, not the agent.
2. They Call the Bluff
“Another buyer is very interested…” – sound familiar?
Agents love this line.
But a professional buyer’s agent knows when it’s real, and when it’s theatre.
We stay calm. Stick to our figures. Walk away if the numbers don’t stack up.
As I often say, there’s always another property.
3. They Control the Offer
Here’s a classic rookie mistake – making an open-ended offer that gives the agent all the power.
At Metropole, we present our offers based on solid, independent data, backed by our research.
And we include a firm expiration. No bait-and-switch. No, let’s not let the agent shop our number around.
That’s how you keep the power in your court.
4. They Come with a Strategy
Buying property isn’t just about emotion; it’s about structure.
Before we even make an offer, we:
- Conduct inspections – we personally conduct multiple inspections at different times of the day, while many buyer’s agents don’t even inspect the property themselves, but get the selling agent to do a FaceTime call
- Review comparable sales – using industry databases and our own research data
- Understand the seller’s motivations – by speaking the same language as the agent, they will tell us things they wouldn’t tell a typical buyer
And most importantly, we communicate a clear strategy to the agent so they know exactly how we operate.
We’re not mucking around. We’re here to do a deal—but on terms that work for our clients.
Why you shouldn’t go at it alone
You wouldn’t do your own surgery. You wouldn’t represent yourself in court.
So why would you go solo on one of the biggest financial decisions of your life?
There’s a big cost to inexperience. You don’t know what you don’t know.
And this is where the Metropole team comes in.
We’ve negotiated thousands of property deals across decades. ‘
We’ve seen every trick in the book. We know how to cut through the noise, control the process, and secure the best possible outcome for our clients, while shielding them from costly mistakes.
When you’ve got a trusted buyer’s agent in your corner:
- You stay objective
- You never overpay
- You avoid the emotional traps
- You walk away with a strategic, data-driven deal
Some final Thoughts
Negotiation isn’t about winning a battle or beating the agent.
It’s about getting a fair deal that supports your long-term wealth strategy.
At Metropole, we help you do exactly that—calmly, professionally, and strategically.
We recognised that property investment is a process, not an event, and it all starts by developing a personalised Strategic Property Plan for our clients, and then allowing our advice agents to implement this plan.
So if you’re ready to step up your game and avoid the emotional landmines that catch out most amateur buyers, book in a Wealth Discovery Session with one of our Wealth Strategists. We’re here to help you move forward with confidence.
Simply click here now to secure a time.
Over the years, we have helped thousands of Australians safely build intergenerational wealth through strategic property and wealth advice.
This financial freedom has given them more choices in their lives.
161 Weird Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend And Get Him Talking
Whether you’re bored of basic convos or just looking to shake things up, these weird questions to ask your boyfriend are perfect for adding some fun, unpredictability, and genuine connection to your chats. From really weird questions to ask your boyfriend over text to fun hypotheticals and crazy scenarios to ask your boyfriend in person, this is your ultimate list of playful prompts to nudge your man to open up. Be prepared to be surprised, amazed, and may be even a little shocked, as these questions peel back layers to his personality you hadn’t yet discovered.
Why Ask Weird Questions In A Relationship?
Asking your partner weird questions might sound silly, but it’s actually a brilliant way to learn more about him and create meaningful memories, in the process. These fun weird questions to ask your boyfriend reveal his quirks, spark laughter, and bring you closer in the most unexpected ways.
In long-term relationships, it’s easy to fall into the same old conversations. But throwing in a few really weird questions to ask your boyfriend breaks that cycle. Whether it’s a late-night pillow talk session or you’re looking for weird questions to ask your boyfriend over text, these prompts add surprise and depth to your dynamic. That’s why we’ve curated this massive list of crazy scenarios to ask your boyfriend that range from flirty and random to downright hilarious.
- Helps break the routine and spark laughter
- Reveals hidden quirks and personality traits
- Encourages vulnerability in a lighthearted way
161 Weird Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend
Normal is overrated and light, playful moments don’t get the credit they deserve in bringing two people closer together. Give these weird questions to ask your boyfriend a try and find out for yourself. Whether you’re newly dating or deep into a long-term relationship, these questions can instantly flip the script and infuse fresh energy into your dynamic. From fun weird questions to ask your boyfriend during a cozy night in, to totally unexpected weird things to talk about with your boyfriend while texting, these offbeat prompts open the door to meaningful laughs, wild imagination, and real bonding.
Related Reading: 5 Cute Ways To Improve And Strengthen Your Relationship
Weird but deep questions to ask your boyfriend
These weird questions to ask a boyfriend are perfect when you want to dive beneath the surface, but in a fun, unexpected way. They often lead to stories you’ve never heard and sides of him you’ve never seen.
- If your personality were a flavor of chips, what would it be?
- What’s the weirdest thing you secretly believe?
- If aliens landed tomorrow and asked you to represent Earth, what would you say?
- Would you rather be respected or remembered?
- What’s something you’d never admit to anyone else, but might tell me?
- If your younger self could see you now, what would he say?
- What thought scares you but you think about it often?
- Which emotion do you wish you felt more often?
- If your life were a conspiracy theory, what would it be?
- What would be the title of your autobiography if it had to be bizarre?
- If you could see one hidden truth about yourself, what would you choose?
- What belief do you have that no one agrees with?
- If your inner child could talk, what would he tell you today?
- What’s the most irrational fear you’ve never told anyone about?
- Would you want to know how you die, if you could?
- If your mind had a theme song, what would it be?
- What’s your weirdest recurring daydream?
- Do you think there’s a version of you in a parallel universe doing something crazy?
- If you could erase one memory, but it meant losing all related feelings, would you do it?
- What’s one weird thing that always makes you emotional?
Related Reading: 125 Spicy Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend
Strange ‘what if’ questions to ask your boyfriend
These are the best weird questions to ask your bf if you love throwing wild curveballs into your conversations. Strange, surprising, and downright creative, these “what if” questions and scenarios are perfect for shaking things up.
- What if you woke up in my body for a day?
- What if dogs could talk but only to you?
- What if you had to swap lives with a cartoon character for a year?
- What if your mom and I switched bodies, whose advice would you trust?
- What if you had to eat one weird food forever like jellyfish or tarantula?
- What if you had a secret superpower but it only worked when you farted?
- What if everyone suddenly forgot your name, how would you prove who you are?
- What if you found out you were living in a simulation, would you try to escape?
- What if your dreams were actually memories from another life?
- What if you had to marry the last fictional character you watched?
- What if you turned into a plant, what kind would you be?
- What if you could only talk in animal sounds for a week?
- What if I could read your mind once a day, when would you hide your thoughts?
- What if mirrors actually showed alternate dimensions?
- What if every kiss gave you a superpower?
- What if people’s moods changed the color of their skin, what color would you be most?
- What if we switched voices for a week?
- What if you had to relive one random day from your past over and over again?
- What if your pet could spill all your secrets?
- What if your Google search history was tattooed on your body?
Related Reading: 125 Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend to Test His Love For You
Gross and hilarious questions to ask your man
Get ready to laugh and cringe. These weird things to ask your boyfriend are all about leaning into the gross, awkward, and unexpectedly hilarious moments that build emotional intimacy through humor.
- Would you rather never brush your teeth again or never shower again?
- What’s grosser: drinking expired milk or eating a raw onion?
- If burps had flavors, which one would be the worst?
- What’s the most disgusting thing you’ve ever smelled?
- Would you eat a stranger’s toenail for $10,000?
- Have you ever peed in the pool and lied about it?
- If you had to name your poop like a pet, what would it be?
- What’s grosser: boogers or belly button lint?
- If I dared you to sniff your own sock after a workout, would you do it?
- Would you rather always have sweaty hands or constantly itchy feet?
- What’s a gross habit you’ve never told anyone about?
- Would you lick the bottom of your shoe for ₹50,000?
- If you could fart glitter, would you do it all the time?
- Have you ever sneezed so hard that something weird happened?
- What’s the worst bathroom emergency you’ve had in public?
- What’s the weirdest thing you’ve ever picked out of your teeth?
- If someone dared you to eat a spider, would you?
- Have you ever worn the same underwear twice in a row?
- If I cooked something terrible, would you eat it to be polite?
- Would you rather kiss a pig or smell my socks after a workout?
Related Reading: How To Talk Intimately With Your Boyfriend Over Text—15 Easy Ways
Weirdly flirty questions for your bf
These weird questions to ask your boyfriend are perfect for flirting with your man and pushing the boundaries of imagination to forge a deeper connection. Perfect for couples who like to keep things cheeky, fun, and a little unpredictable.
- If I turned into a frog, would you still kiss me?
- What’s the weirdest compliment you could give me right now?
- Would you rather cuddle in a cave or a blanket fort?
- If we were the only people on Earth, what weird date would we go on?
- What odd thing do you find weirdly attractive about me?
- Would you still love me if I spoke in cat noises?
- Can you invent a secret language just for us?
- If love had a smell, what would ours be?
- What’s your ultimate awkward-yet-romantic fantasy?
- Would you serenade me in public if I dared you to?
- What animal do I most resemble when I sleep?
- Would you still date me if I had a tail?
- If I had a laugh like a goat, would you still think I’m cute?
- What’s a weird nickname you’d give me that no one else can use?
- If we had to wear matching outfits daily, what would they be?
- If we wrote a cheesy rom-com, what would the title be?
- Would you rather slow dance in the rain or eat ice cream in the shower together?
- Would you wear a shirt that says “Property of My Girlfriend”?
- What’s a weird flirty thing I do that you secretly love?
- If you had to describe kissing me using only fruit, what would it be?
Related Reading: 69 Flirty Dares Over Text To Spice Things Up
Super random questions to puzzle your boyfriend
These weird things to talk about with your boyfriend have no rhyme or reason, they’re just plain ridiculous and fun. Great for when you want to keep the vibe spontaneous and silly.
- If you had to name a planet after me, what would you call it?
- What’s the weirdest world record you think you could beat?
- If your shadow had a personality, what would it be like?
- If you could swap noses with an animal, which one would you choose?
- If cereal could talk, what would your favorite brand say to you?
- Would you trust a fortune cookie that always came true?
- What kitchen utensil matches your personality?
- If your thoughts had sound effects, what would mine sound like?
- What’s the weirdest item you’d take with you during a zombie apocalypse?
- If you could rename a color, what would you call blue?
- Do you think insects have a fashion sense?
- If we lived in a treehouse forever, how would you decorate it?
- If you could trade eyebrows with someone, who would it be?
- Would you rather sleepwalk or sleep talk for the rest of your life?
- What’s your conspiracy theory about squirrels?
- If you had to wear one Halloween costume every day, which one?
- If we were stuck in a musical, what would your solo be about?
- Do clouds get jealous of balloons?
- Would you eat a cake shaped like my face?
- If your laugh were a musical instrument, what would it be?
Related Reading: 55 Serious Questions To Ask Your Boyfriend
Silly questions to ask your boyfriend over text
Need weird questions to ask your boyfriend over text that will make him laugh on the go? These quick, quirky prompts are great for mid-day fun or late-night giggles.
- If your hands could talk, what would they say?
- If you could shrink any object and carry it in your pocket, what would it be?
- Can I be your human pillow forever?
- What emoji best represents your current mood?
- If I turned into a sandwich, what kind would I be?
- Would you rather have spaghetti hair or pancake feet?
- If our texts were turned into a novel, what would the title be?
- What would your superhero name be if texting were your only power?
- If your pet could text you, what would they say about me?
- Would you rather only text using GIFs or voice notes?
- What’s the weirdest voice message you’ve ever sent?
- Should we start a secret texting language?
- If autocorrect started roasting you, would you still use it?
- Can you send me a duck emoji every time you miss me?
- Would you rather have a phone that reads your mind or one that changes your voice randomly?
- What’s a word you’ve typed wrong so many times it’s embarrassing?
- If you had to end every message with a song lyric, which one would it be?
- Do you ever talk to your phone when you’re alone?
- If you had to choose one emoji to describe our relationship, what would it be?
- Can we have a texting rule, where one day a week, we pretend to be aliens?
Related Reading: 51 Deep Relationship Questions To Ask For A Better Love Life
Bonus: Weird questions to ask your bf, Reddit edition
Inspired by real Reddit threads, these weird questions to ask boyfriend have been shared by girlfriends around the world. They’re equal parts hilarious and oddly romantic.
- “Would you still love me if I had no bones?”
- “If I turned into a sock, which drawer would you put me in?”
- “Do you think ants ever celebrate birthdays?”
- “Would you rather kiss me or have unlimited pizza forever?”
- “If I had a clone, would you date both of us or just the original?”
- “If I were a worm, would you take me to Paris?”
- “Would you rather cuddle with me for 24 hours or have free Wi-Fi forever?”
- “If I got turned into a hat, would you wear me?”
- “Would you still date me if I spoke only in riddles?”
- “If I had spaghetti for hair, would you help me shampoo it?”
- “Would you still love me if I turned into a cardboard cutout?”
- “If I disappeared and came back as a pigeon, would you recognize me?”
- “Would you still date me if I were obsessed with frogs?”
- “If I were a burrito, would you unwrap me or eat me whole?”
- “Do you think our souls high-five in another dimension?”
- “Would you still be with me if I grew a third eye that only cried glitter?”
- “What would you do if I started narrating your life in an opera voice?”
- “If I had a button that changed your haircut daily, would you let me press it?”
- “Would you follow me into a haunted bakery?”
- “Would you still date me if I barked at other girls?”
- “If we could time travel to any date together, what weird event would you choose?”
- “Would you be okay if our future child were born with wings?”
- “What if I turned into your favorite video game character—would you date me harder?”
- “Would you eat cereal from my shoe if it were the only food left?”
- “If I turned into a meme, would you share me or keep me to yourself?”
- “If we had to spend a week as sock puppets, what would we do?”
- “Would you cry if I stopped sending you random selfies?”
- “Do you think love exists between chairs when no one’s looking?”
- “Would you still propose to me if I were dressed as a clown?”
- “If we could only speak in bird calls for a day, how would you say ‘I love you’?”
- “Would you wear a T-shirt with my face on it to meet your boss?”
- “Would you go on a reality show with me called ‘Weird Love’?”
- “Would you dig through trash with me to find a sentimental receipt?”
- “Would you still love me if I lived in a vending machine?”
- “What would you do if I started sleeping in the bathtub ‘for balance’?”
- “Would you carry a photo of my baby teeth in your wallet forever?”
- “Would you fight a goose for me?”
- “Would you let me tattoo my name on your forehead for April Fools’?”
- “If we had to communicate through interpretive dance, how would you say ‘Let’s order food’?”
- “Would you name a star after me or a sandwich?”
- “Would you still date me if I had a tail and it wagged when I saw you?”
Final Thoughts
These weird things to ask your boyfriend aren’t random but a clever means of discovering and rediscovering each other in the most playful, personal ways. Whether you’re laughing at a bizarre ‘what if’ or melting over an oddly sweet compliment, these weird questions to ask your boyfriend help you connect on a level that’s genuine, silly, and heartfelt all at once.
You don’t always need candlelit dinners or deep, emotional talks to feel close. Sometimes, it’s enough to wonder aloud if he’d still date you as a burrito. Because when you can be weird together, you know it’s real.
45 Sexy And Dirty Text Messages For Your Boyfriend To Turn Him On!
100+ Epic Hypothetical Questions For Couples
35 Awkward Questions To Ask A Guy (Some Are Embarrassing!)
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
Spotify’s Discover Weekly Turns 10, and Gets Some Big Improvements
Incredibly, Discover Weekly has been a part of the Spotify app for 10 years now. Which, in terms of tech, makes it an ancient feature. And if you’re not yet familiar with Discover Weekly despite subscribing to Spotify, the latest update means that now is the time to check it out.
Spotify Is Improving Its Discover Weekly Playlists
If you’re not yet familiar with Discover Weekly, it’s Spotify’s way of getting you to listen to new (to you) music. The playlist updates every Monday, adding tracks that the streaming service’s algorithm thinks you’ll like. Spotify generates various different playlists each week, but Discover Weekly was the first when it was launched in 2015.
Millions of people now open Discover Weekly every Monday, hoping to hear a song that they’re unfamiliar with, but which goes on to become a favorite. And now, as announced in a post on For the Record mainly focused on Discover Weekly turning 10 years old, Spotify is making some changes to it.
First up is a visual refresh, with a new geometric pattern that Spotify claims “reflects its ever-evolving nature and the dynamic energy of weekly discovery.” However, much more interesting than the new look is the option to tweak the Discover Weekly playlist by genre.
When you open Discover Weekly from the Made for You hub, initially, you’ll still see the default playlist of 30 songs. However, you’ll also now see a list of five genres above the songs, allowing you to tweak the playlist more to your liking. Essentially, this means you now have six distinct Discover Weekly playlists to explore each week. Which will be (literal) music to the ears of fans of the feature.
I must admit that I don’t listen to all the Discover Weekly tracks, but I almost always discover something I like by flicking through the suggestions. Being able to do that for five specific genres massively increases the chances that a. I’ll hear something completely new to me, and b. I’ll find new songs I like enough to add to my long list of Liked songs.
Discovering New Music Is At the Heart of Spotify
We’re now fully into the streaming era, where almost every movie, game, and song is available to play on demand on whatever device you have to hand. And while some people still mourn for the days of physical media (hence the renewed interest in vinyl), streaming does bring lots of advantages. One of which is the ability to discover new content quickly and easily.
For me, discovering new music is at the very heart of the Spotify experience, and there are lots of different ways to discover new music on Spotify. Discover Weekly is just one of those ways, and the new Discover Weekly playlist makes the feature even better than it already was. But if it still doesn’t hit the spot for you personally, try these AI playlist generators instead.
Shek O: A peaceful escape on Hong Kong Island
Situated in the southeastern part of Hong Kong Island, Shek O, which means “rocky bay,” is a popular coastal retreat known for its natural beauty and laid-back atmosphere.
The peninsula is home to one of Hong Kong’s most popular beaches, which attracts crowds of people looking to relax by the sea on weekends. Beyond the beach, visitors can wander through narrow alleys lined with colorful village houses or take a leisurely hike in the hills above the bay to enjoy sweeping views of the coastline.
AI is controversial in Hollywood. For China’s film business, it’s no holds barred
Hollywood’s relationship with artificial intelligence is fraught, as studios balance the need to cut costs with growing concerns from actors, directors and crew members. But in China, efforts to use AI in entertainment are taking a more no-holds-barred approach.
The China Film Foundation, a nonprofit fund under the Chinese government, plans to use AI to revitalize 100 kung fu classics including “Police Story,” “Once Upon a Time in China” and “Fist of Fury,” featuring Jackie Chan, Jet Li and Bruce Lee, respectively. The foundation said it will partner with businesses including Shanghai Canxing Culture & Media Co., which will license 100 Hong Kong films to AI companies to reintroduce those movies to younger audiences globally.
Chow Yun-fat stars in director John Woo’s “A Better Tomorrow” in 1986.
(Cinema City)
The foundation said there are opportunities to use AI to tell those stories through animation, for example. There are plans to release an animated version of director John Woo’s 1986 film “A Better Tomorrow” that uses AI to “reinterpret” Woo’s “signature visual language,” according to an English transcript of the announcement.
“By empowering cultural storytelling with technology, we can breathe new life into the classics and tell China’s stories farther and louder,” said Zhang Pimin, chairman of the China Film Foundation, at the Shanghai International Film Festival earlier this month.
The project raised eyebrows among U.S. artists, many of whom are deeply wary of the use of AI in creative pursuits.
The Directors Guild of America said AI is a creative tool that should only be used to enhance the creative storytelling process and “it should never be used retroactively to distort or destroy a filmmaker’s artistic work.”
“The DGA strongly opposes the use of AI or any other technology to mutilate a film or to alter a director’s vision,” the DGA said in a statement. “The Guild has a longstanding history of opposing such alterations on issues like colorization or sanitization of films to eliminate so-called ‘objectionable content’, or other changes that fundamentally alter a film’s original style, meaning, and substance.”
The project highlights widely divergent views on AI’s potential to reshape entertainment as the two countries compete for dominance in the highly competitive AI space. In the U.S., much of the traditional entertainment industry has taken a tepid view of generative AI, due to concerns over protecting intellectual property and labor relations.
While some Hollywood studios such as Lionsgate and Blumhouse have collaborated with AI companies, others have been reluctant to announce partnerships at the risk of offending talent that have voiced concerns over how AI could be used to alter their digital likeness without adequate compensation.
But other countries like China have fewer guardrails, which has led to more experimentation of the technology by entertainment companies.
Many people in China embrace AI, with 83% feeling confident that AI systems are designed to act in the best interest of society, much higher than the U.S. where it’s 37%, according to a survey from the United Nations Development Program.
The foundation’s announcement came as a surprise to Bruce Lee Enterprises, which oversees legal usage of Lee’s likeness in creative works.
Bruce Lee’s family was “previously unaware of this development and is currently gathering information,” a spokesperson said.
Woo, in a written statement, said he hadn’t heard from the foundation about the AI remake, noting that the rights to “A Better Tomorrow” have changed hands several times.
“I wasn’t really involved in the project because I’m not very familiar with AI technology,” Woo said in a statement to The Times. “However, I’m very curious about the outcome and the effect it might have on my original film.”
David Chi, who represents the China Film Foundation’s Special Fund for Film and Urban Development, said in an interview that Chan is aware of the project and he has plans to talk with Chan’s team. A representative of Chan’s did not respond to a request for comment.
“We do need to talk … very specifically how we‘re using animated or AI existing technology, and how that would combine with his image rights and business rights,” Chi said. Chi did not have an immediate response to the DGA, Bruce Lee Enterprises and Woo’s statements.
AI is already used in China for script development, content moderation and recommendations and translation. In postproduction, AI has reduced the time to complete visual effects work from days to hours, said He Tao, an official with the National Radio and Television Administration’s research center, during remarks at the festival.
“Across government agencies, content platforms, and production institutions, the enthusiasm to adopt and integrate AI has never been stronger,” He said.
During the project’s announcement, supporters touted the opportunity AI will bring to China to further its cultural message globally and generate new work for creatives. At the same time, they touted AI’s disruption of the filmmaking process, saying the “A Better Tomorrow” remake was completed with just 30 people, significantly fewer than a typical animated project.
China is a “more brutal society in that sense,” said Eric Harwit, professor of Asian studies at the University of Hawaii at Manoa. “If somebody loses their job because artificial intelligence is taking over, well, that’s just the cost of China’s moving forward. They don’t have that kind of regret about people losing jobs and there are less opportunities for organized protest against the Chinese government.”
A scene from the movie “Once Upon A Time In China.”
(Golden Harvest)
Hollywood guilds such as SAG-AFTRA have been outspoken about the harm AI could have on jobs and have fought for protections against AI in contracts in TV shows, films and video games. The unions have also pushed state and federal legislators to create laws that would give people more protections against deep fakes, or videos manipulated to show a person endorsing an idea or product that they don’t actually support. There is no equivalent of that in China.
“You don’t have those freestanding labor organizations, so they don’t have that kind of clout to protest against the Chinese using artificial intelligence in a way that might reduce their job opportunities or lead to layoffs in the sector,” Harwit added.
U.S. studios are also going to court to challenge the ways AI companies train their models on copyrighted materials. Earlier this month, Walt Disney Co. and Universal Pictures sued AI startup Midjourney, alleging it uses technology to generate images that copy the studios’ famous characters, including Yoda and Shrek.
In China, officials involved in the project to remaster kung fu films said they were eager to work with AI companies. They said that AI will be used to add “stunning realism” to the movies. They are planning to build “immersive viewing experiences” such as walking into a bamboo forest duel and “feeling the philosophy of movement and stillness.” In areas such as animation, new environments could be created with AI, Chi said.
“We are offering full access to our IP, platform, and adaptation rights to partners worldwide — with the goal of delivering richer, more diverse, and high-quality AI enhanced film works to global audiences,” said Tian Ming, chairman of Shanghai Canxing Culture & Media Co. in his remarks earlier this month. Tian said there is no revenue-sharing cap and it is allocating about $14 million to co-invest in selected projects and share in the returns.
The kung fu revitalization efforts will extend into other areas, including the creation of a martial arts video game.
Industry observers said China is wise to go back to its well of popular martial arts classics out of Hong Kong, which have inspired U.S. action movies for decades.
There’s also not as much risk involved for China, said Simon Pulman, a partner at law firm Pryor Cashman.
“They’ve got very little to lose by doing this,” Pulman said. “If it can potentially enhance the value of those movies, there’s very little downside for them.”
China’s film industry has grown significantly compared to decades ago, boosted by the proliferation of movie theaters, including Imax screens, in the country.
In the past, China’s box office relied heavily on U.S. productions like movies from the “Fast & Furious” and Marvel franchises, but now local movies dominate the market. The Chinese animated movie “Ne Zha 2” grossed $2.2 billion at the box office globally.
But those Chinese productions generally don’t draw large U.S. audiences when they’re released in the States. The classic martial arts movies, however, have a global following and enduring legacy.
“People love martial arts movies, because action travels,” said Paul Dergarabedian, senior media analyst at Comscore. “It doesn’t matter what language it’s in, if you have a great action sequence and great fighting sequences.”
Hero Vida VX2 Electric Scooter Launch in India Tomorrow; Check Expected Specifications, Features and Likely Price
New Delhi, June 30: Hero Vida VX2 electric scooter is set to launch in India on July 1, 2025 (tomorrow) with various segment-specific features, specifications and other elements. Overall, the upcoming Hero Vida VX2 e-scooter will maintain the same design as the other Vida series model. Currently, Hero MotoCorp offers three Vida series electric scooters in India. They are Hero Vida V2 Pro, Hero Vida V2 Plus and Hero Vida V2 Lite.
As per a report, the upcoming Hero Vida VX2 will likely be offered as an affordable option compared to the other models. It is expected that the VX2 variant will come with a BaaS (battery-as-a-service) scheme. It would allow the customers to choose a subscription model for the battery pack. Customers will not have to pay for the battery pack cost when they buy a scooter under this scheme. Bad News for EOL Vehicle Owners! Fuel Stations To Not Sell Fuel To End-of-Life Vehicles in Delhi, Govt Plans To Impound Older Vehicles Starting July 1; Check Details.
Hero Vida VX2 Price in India
Hero Vida VX2 price in India could be around INR 70,000 to 90,000 (ex-showroom). Compared to other e-scooters, the e-Vida series is priced between INR 1 lakh and INR 1.40 lakh, including the Pro, Plus, and Lite models. Hero MotoCorp will commence deliveries after launching the Vida VX2 model in India.
Hero Vida VX2 Specifications and Features
Hero Vida VX2 is expected to have a battery ranging from 2.2kWh and 3.4kWh. The smaller battery options would allow the electric scooter up to 100 km range on a single charge. The e-scooter would have a subtle design and practical features. The reports said that the Hero Vida VX2 electric scooter would be offered to customers looking for vehicles at competitive pricing. TVS Apache RTR 160 New Variant With OBD2B Compliance Launched in India; Check Price, Specifications and Features.
In terms of features, the EV is expected to have a flat single-pierce seat and LED headlights with a design similar to that of other models. It would likely have a TFT display at the instrument cluster; however, it may not be as feature-packed as the different models. The customers will have a choice of powertrain, which will be available in multiple removable battery pack choices. The Hero Vida VX2 will be introduced tomorrow, revealing all its specifications, features and price.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jun 30, 2025 05:17 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
Schedule 1 Patch Notes Includes Off-Road Skateboard
Schedule 1, the silly-looking drug-dealing game that took the gaming community by storm a few months back, got a new patch today, and it’s headlined by the addition of an off-road skateboard. It also includes some bug fixes, tweaks, and improvements, such as a change to how stamina is consumed while skateboarding.
The off-road skateboard is added to the inventory on sale at the Shred Shack, where it’ll cost you $1,500. While minor in the grand scheme of things, it lets you live out your mountain-boarding dreams. If you’re of a certain age, it might even let you reminisce about the mountain-board levels in Rocket Power: Beach Bandits for the PS2.
This patch also tweaks a couple of other skateboarding-related things. First, the developer notes that it implemented some minor changes for skateboard animations. Second, stamina consumption while on a skateboard has changed from instantaneous to gradual, which will likely smooth out the skateboarding experience.
Other bug fixes and changes include fixing instances where players could not knock on certain doors, reducing stamina consumption while pushing on a skateboard, and improving some pricing issues. You can read all of the changes in the patch notes below.
Developer TVGS has recently stated that big content updates will be decided on the basis of player input, and that a first major update is coming soon.
Schedule I version 0.3.6f6
Additions
- Added off-road skateboard
Tweaks/Improvements
- Skateboard stamina consumption is now gradual rather than instant.Tweaked some IK constraints for skateboard animations.
Bug fixes
- Fixed not being able to knock on the door of the tall brick building next to the overpass.
- Fixed not being able to knock on the doors of the blue apartment building.
- Fixed skateboard pushing consuming excessive stamina.
- Fixed mis-indexed loading bays at the docks warehouse.
- Fixed broken font at the French restaurant.
- Fixed customers accepting unpackaged product, even when displayed success chance is 1%.
- Fixed the packaging station Mk2 being slower to use for NPCs compared to Mk1.
- Fixed Salvador coca seed pricing.
- Fixed a networth calculation bug.
- Fixed a random generation bug causing ‘Aspen Death’ to be a very common output.
- Modified the pawn shop’s pricing algorithm to be a bit less predictable.
Candy colors, THC inside: How cannabis edibles are tricking teen brains
Bright colors, fruit imagery, and labels like “locally made” or “vegan” might seem harmless — but when used on cannabis edibles, they can send misleading messages to teens.
That’s according to a new Washington State University-led study examining how adolescents perceive the packaging of cannabis-infused products such as gummies, chocolates and sodas. Despite regulations barring packaging that targets youth, many teens in the study found these products appealing — often likening them to everyday snacks or health foods.
The research, conducted in collaboration with Public Health – Seattle & King County, is part of a broader effort to reduce accidental cannabis exposure among teens. The findings could help shape new rules aimed at limiting underage appeal.
“What surprised us was how often these products were interpreted as healthy or natural,” said Jessica Willoughby, associate professor in WSU’s Murrow College of Communication and co- author of the study, published in the Journal of Health Communication. “When you combine that with vibrant packaging and familiar fruit flavors, it’s easy to see how these items start to look like snacks — not something potentially harmful or illegal for teens.”
Researchers conducted virtual focus groups and interviews with 28 Washington teens, ages 13 to 17, using real product photos from stores to prompt discussion. With parental permission, participants shared which packaging elements caught their eye and why.
The teens consistently pointed to bright, colorful designs and packaging that resembled healthy snacks as particularly appealing. Some said they’d display the packaging in their rooms or use it in social media posts. Others said terms like “locally made” and “vegan” made the products feel more aligned with their personal values — even if they knew the items contained cannabis.
“Our findings suggest that teens are drawn not just to the look of these packages, but to what the design represents,” said Stacey Hust, a professor in WSU’s Murrow College and the study’s lead author. “They saw these products as trendy, natural and aspirational — qualities that resonate with their identities and beliefs.”
The study also showed that teens with greater familiarity with cannabis — either through personal use or family exposure — were more likely to notice warning labels and dosage information. Those with less knowledge often overlooked health warnings or didn’t recognize cannabis symbols at all.
The results raise concerns for health educators and policymakers as cannabis edibles become more prevalent. The researchers recommend incorporating teen perspectives into regulatory discussions and increasing cannabis literacy through targeted education efforts.
“Teens are telling us what speaks to them — and sometimes it’s not what adults expect,” said Sarah Ross-Viles, youth cannabis prevention manager with King County and study co-author. “If we’re serious about making cannabis packaging less appealing to youth, we need to use their insights to guide smarter, more effective regulations.”
The WSU team recently worked with Public Health – Seattle & King County health officials and the Washington State Liquor & Cannabis Board to conduct a follow-up quantitative study exploring how packaging elements correlate with perceived teen appeal and intent to use.
While broad changes like plain packaging may ultimately be difficult to implement, the researchers say practical updates — such as clearer warnings and limiting branding that mimics health food — could help reduce youth attraction.
“We’re not calling for a marketing ban,” Hust said. “We’re asking for thoughtful regulations that balance the rights of adult consumers with the need to protect kids.”
Ross-Viles agreed: “This is about ensuring cannabis packaging serves its real purpose — informing adult consumers — without confusing or enticing teens. And now, for the first time, we are getting direct feedback from Washington youth to help make that possible.”
Recent Developments in Environmental Law
About the Opportunity
Dr. Naseema P.K, Assistant Professor, AMU Malappuram, Centre & Dr. Alka Bharati,Assistant Professor, B.P.S Mahila Vishwavidyalaya, Sonepat invite academicians,practitioners, policymakers, and research scholars to contribute chapters to an upcoming edited volume focusing on the evolving landscape of environmental law in India and its interplay with international legal developments. This edited book will provide a comprehensive analysis of recent legislative, judicial, and policy changes, fostering a deeper understanding of environmental governance in a globalized world.
Relevance
An edited book on environmental law is highly relevant in today’s rapidly evolving legal and ecological landscape. This compilation brings together diverse perspectives offering a comprehensive and multidisciplinary understanding of key environmental issues and serves as a valuable academic and practical resource, covering contemporary legal developments, case studies, and international obligations related to climate change, biodiversity, pollution control,and sustainable development. Edited volumes has a further scope for the inclusion of region-specific insights and comparative analyses, making them especially useful.
Topics
- Constitutional Mandates in India for a better environment
- Judicial Innovations for a ‘Green India’
- Analysis of landmark judgments recognizing the right to a clean and healthy environment as a fundamental right under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution.
- The role of the judiciary in enforcing environmental norms and addressing climate change-related issues.
- Legislative and Policy Reforms:
- Examination of recent amendments to key environmental statutes, such as the Environment (Protection) Act, Forest (Conservation) Act, and Wildlife Protection Act.
- Implementation and impact of the End-of-Life Vehicles Rules, 2025, and the Plastic Waste Management (Amendment) Rules, 2025.
- Institutional Mechanisms and Regulatory Bodies:
- Evaluation of the functioning and effectiveness of institutions like the National Green Tribunal (NGT), Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), and State Pollution Control Boards (SPCBs).
- Assessment of new regulatory frameworks and their enforcement mechanisms.
- Climate Change Litigation and Policy:
- Exploration of climate change-related litigation in Indian courts and its influence on policy formulation.
- India’s commitments under international climate agreements and their domestic implementation.
- International Environmental Law Developments:
- Analysis of recent international treaties and agreements, such as the High Seas Treaty and the Global Plastic Pollution Treaty.
- The impact of international legal developments on India’s environmental policies and laws.
- Comparative Environmental Law:
- Comparative studies of environmental legal frameworks between India and other jurisdictions.
- Lessons learned and best practices in environmental governance.
Submission Guidelines
- Abstracts of 300-500 words outlining the proposed chapter’s scope, methodology, and relevance to the volume’s themes.
- A brief bio-note of the author(s), including institutional affiliation and contact information.
- Final chapters should be between 6000 to 7,000 words, including references.
- Open for Academicians, Researchers, Practitioners and Scholars having expertise in the given themes
- Co-authorship: Co-authorship of maximum two Authors is allowed.
- Publication Charges: Rs 900/- for Academicians and Practitioners and Rs 500/- for research Scholars
- ILI citation style is preferred
- To be submitted in Times New Roman, font size 12pt and double spaced. Main Title should be in full capitals, bold and centered in font size 12pt.Footnotes should be in Times New Roman, font size 12pt.
Important dates
- Abstract Submission Deadline: 30-11.2025
- Full Chapter Submission: 28.2.2026
- Peer Review Feedback: Within 3 Weeks of Submission of final paper
- Final Revised Chapter Submission: Within 2 weeks of feedback
- Expected Publication Date: 30-6.2026
Review Process
All submissions will undergo a double-blind peer-review process. Notification of acceptance and suggested revisions will be communicated promptly. Book will be published with ISBN number from a reputed publisher.
Contact
Dr. Naseema P.K, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Law, AMU Centre, Malappuram,
Phone: 8129808062, Email: [email protected]
Dr. Alka Bharati, Assistant Professor, Dept. of Law, B.P.SM.V, Sonepat,
Phone: 9671647922, Email: [email protected]
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
Cardiologist explains why you need to have dinner at least 3 hours before sleeping | Health
For many of us, ending our day often looks like eating meals between 8 and 9 PM or later, and then going straight to sleep. But, according to Dr Alok Chopra, cardiologist and functional medicine expert, it is essential to eat at least three hours before you go to bed, and there’s a scientific reason behind it.
Also Read | Gastroenterologist says ‘you don’t need a liver detox’; shares 14 vegetables that naturally boost liver function
‘Eat meals at least 3 hours before sleep’
You may have noticed your grandparents finishing their last meal of the day between 6 and 7 PM, and avoiding eating anything after that. In fact, those who practise intermittent fasting also avoid eating after a certain time. Turns out there is a huge health benefit behind this practice.
According to Dr Chopra, whether you’re following intermittent fasting or not, it’s essential to eat at least three hours before bedtime. He explained, “Sleep is your body’s time to repair, restore, and rejuvenate — not to keep your digestive system working overtime. Let sleep do what it’s meant to do. Eat meals at least 3 hours before sleep.”
Here’s how eating meals 3 hours before sleep helps
Dr Alok warned, “Most people are eating their last meal and going straight to sleep. Stop that habit immediately.” Why?
According to the cardiologist, it’s extremely important to stop eating three hours before you sleep because sleep requires the least energy and fuel. He explained, “During sleep, we experience detox, repair, rest, and rejuvenation. Eating a meal just before sleeping disrupts this process because the body gets involved in digestion rather than these other beneficial functions. The ketones get used up, and glycogen is depleted.”
While he advised the optimum time between your sleeping schedule and the last meal of the day to be 3 hours, Dr Alok highlighted, “By the way, three hours is sufficient, but it’s better to wait four to six hours before you sleep.”
Note to readers: This article is for informational purposes only and not a substitute for professional medical advice. Always seek the advice of your doctor with any questions about a medical condition.
Incyte replaces CEO Hoppenot with dealmaker Meury
Dive Brief:
- Incyte has named veteran pharmaceutical executive Bill Meury as its new CEO, replacing longtime head Hervé Hoppenot, who led the cancer and blood disease drugmaker for the past 11 years.
- Meury, whose appointment is effective immediately, previously ran Anthos Therapeutics, which he sold this year to Novartis for nearly $1 billion, and Karuna Therapeutics, which Bristol Myers Squibb bought for $14 billion in 2023. Prior to those posts, Meury was chief commercial officer at Allergan.
- Hoppenot will remain on Incyte’s board of directors through the end of this year to aid Meury’s transition into the CEO role. Alongside the succession, Julian Baker, managing partner of biotechnology investor Baker Bros. Advisors and lead independent director for Incyte, was elected board chair.
Dive Insight:
Much of Hoppenot’s time at Incyte focused on what he once described as “single asset syndrome.” The company has had a good deal of success with Jakafi, a multipurpose drug approved to treat rare blood cancers and graft-versus-host disease. Last year, Jakafi brought in nearly $2.8 billion in sales.
But Jakafi’s main patents expire in 2028, a date that for years now has been on investors’ radar as they’ve pressed Incyte on what it expects will take the drug’s place.
Early in Hoppenot’s tenure, the answer looked like a cancer medicine called epacadostat, which Incyte believed could become a cornerstone of immunotherapy combinations. However, it flamed out in testing in 2018 and Incyte was forced to pivot research toward other candidates.
Since then, Incyte has had some success building out its portfolio. The company now owns six other approved drugs, including a cream formulation of Jakafi’s main ingredient that’s proved useful treating atopic dermatitis and vitiligo.
“Hervé joined Incyte in 2014 when it was a single product, U.S.-only company,” said board member Baker, in a statement. “During Hervé’s tenure, Incyte launched six novel medicines plus two new indications for Jakafi, expanded commercial operations into Europe, Japan and Canada and grew revenues from $355 million dollars in 2013 to $4.2 billion today.”
However, Incyte’s other drugs don’t make it much money. Jakafi and the cream formulation of the drug Incyte sells as Opzelura accounted for 91% of net product revenues last year. (The company also earned nearly $600 million in royalty revenues.)
Stephen Willey, an analyst at Stifel, gives Hoppenot credit for increasing Incyte revenues by more than 10 times during his time as CEO. But, in a Thursday note to clients, he added that some investors grew frustrated with the company’s high research and development spending without a clear post-Jakafi plan.
Shaping those plans will now fall to Meury, who gained industry visibility by guiding his prior two companies to lucrative acquisitions.
“We expect the immediate reaction from investors will be an expectation that [Incyte] could now become an M&A target, simply because Mr. Meury sold Anthos … and sold [Karuna],” wrote RBC Capital Markets analyst Brian Abrahams, in a note to clients.
Shares in Incyte, which have fallen by 30% over the past five years, rose by more than 4% in Thursday morning trading on the CEO news.
“It has been a privilege to lead Incyte over the past eleven years,” Hoppenot said in the company’s statement. “I am proud to retire at a time when Incyte has the strongest management team, internal R&D pipeline and commercial portfolio ever.”
Incyte expects multiple pivotal trial readouts this year, along with proof-of-concept data for several pipeline candidates.
The Real Cost of a New Mortgage – And What It Means for You as an Investor
Key takeaways
New mortgage holders are paying up to 50% more in monthly repayments than those who borrowed the same amount just 2.5 years ago.
Despite the steepest rate tightening in modern history, property values remain resilient—even growing in many key markets.
The rise in mortgage costs is a reminder that financial conditions can change fast.
But for those who stay informed, nimble, and strategic, this market offers real opportunities.
We’ve all been watching interest rates rise steadily over the last couple of years.
Sure, they’re on the way down now, but many homeowners are still feeling the pressure and there’s a group that’s been hit especially hard: new mortgage holders.
A recent analysis by PropTrack has put some eye-watering numbers behind what we already suspected: borrowing now is significantly more expensive than it was just a couple of years ago.
If you’re taking out a new mortgage today, you’re likely paying almost 50% more in repayments than someone who borrowed the same amount just two and a half years ago.
Let’s look at what this really means, and more importantly, what seasoned investors like us should be thinking and doing in light of this.
How much more are people paying?
According to PropTrack’s modelling, a borrower taking out a $600,000 loan today is forking out $1,284 more each month compared to someone who took out that loan in November 2021.
That’s a staggering 48% increase in monthly repayments—up from $2,688 to $3,972 a month.
And it’s not just big loans feeling the squeeze.
Even a $450,000 mortgage is costing $963 more a month than it would have in late 2021.
That’s the reality of a 4.25 percentage point increase in the cash rate, arguably the fastest and steepest tightening cycle in modern Australian history.
How this affects the broader property market
Now, here’s the thing: we’ve just seen the biggest jump in mortgage costs in decades… yet property values in many parts of the country have remained resilient.
In fact, property values are still climbing in all capital cities of Australia.
Why?
Because property values aren’t just driven by interest rates, they’re driven by supply and demand, population growth, employment, and consumer confidence.
And despite higher borrowing costs, demand remains strong, particularly in our major capital cities, where immigration and housing undersupply continue to fuel competition.
What we are seeing, though, is a shift in buyer behaviour.
First-home buyers are being squeezed out or are having to compromise more than ever.
Upgraders are thinking twice.
Investors are being more selective, and rightly so.
What smart investors are doing differently now
If you’ve already got an established portfolio, you’re likely sitting on significant equity.
You’re probably not borrowing at today’s full 6%-plus rates.
But if you are looking to expand, or if you’ve got loans rolling off fixed rates, it’s time to think strategically.
Here’s what the savvy investors are doing:
1. Refinancing smartly
Even with higher rates, there are still competitive offers out there.
Many investors are leveraging their good credit and equity to negotiate better terms or switch lenders.
2. Prioritising cash flow
Cash flow management is key in a high-interest environment.
You probably know that cash flow keeps you in the game, but it’s really capital growth that gets you out of the rat race.
That means choosing the right property types (think high-demand, low-maintenance), considering rent increases where justified, and using offset accounts or redraw facilities wisely.
3. Buying where it still makes sense
Not all markets are created equal.
The gap between house and unit values has opened up new opportunities, and select locations still offer strong long-term capital growth potential, even if yields are tighter in the short term.
4. Focusing on fundamentals
Rather than speculating on interest rate movements, the best investors are doubling down on fundamentals: demographics, infrastructure, scarcity, and long-term value-add potential.
Should you be worried about affordability pressures?
Affordability is undoubtedly an issue for new entrants.
But for those of us playing the long game, this is just another cycle.
Rates will keep falling as inflation now seems under control and within the RBA’s target range.
In the meantime, while the current market conditions are creating barriers to entry, ironically this makes well-located investment-grade properties even more valuable.
There’s less competition for quality stock now, and that’s the window of opportunity for those who can act.
Final thoughts
The sharp rise in mortgage costs is a stark reminder of how quickly the financial landscape can change.
But it’s also a nudge for investors to stay nimble, informed, and strategic.
At Metropole, we’re not just navigating these headwinds; we’re helping our clients find the opportunities they create.
Whether it’s rebalancing a portfolio, reworking a finance strategy, or finding your next high-performing property, there’s still plenty of upside if you know where to look.
If you’re feeling the squeeze or wondering how to adapt your investment strategy in this higher-rate environment, now’s the time to get proactive.
If you’re like many property investors, you’re probably wondering what’s the right thing to do at present.
Should you buy, should you sell, or should you just wait?
You can trust the team at Metropole to provide you with direction, guidance, and results.
Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced investor, at times like we are currently experiencing you need an advisor who takes a holistic approach to your wealth creation and that’s exactly what you get from the multi-award-winning team at Metropole.
We help our clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through a range of services including:
- Strategic property advice – Allow us to build a Strategic Property Plan for you and your family. Planning is bringing the future into the present so you can do something about it now! Click here to learn more
- Buyer’s agency – As Australia’s most trusted buyers’ agents we’ve been involved in over $4Billion worth of transactions creating wealth for our clients and we can do the same for you. Our on the ground teams in Melbourne, Sydney, and Brisbane bring you years of experience and perspective – that’s something money just can’t buy. We’ll help you find your next home or an investment-grade property. Click here to learn how we can help you.
- Property Development – We enable you to become an “armchair developer” and get all the benefits of property development without getting your hands dirty. We take the hassles out of your investment by assisting you with all the expertise you need, from concept to completion, including construction. Click here to see if it’s the right way for you to grow your portfolio.
- Wealth Advisory – We can provide you with strategic tailored financial planning and wealth advice. Click here to learn more about we can help you.
- Property Management – Our stress-free property management services help you maximise your property returns. Click here to find out why our clients enjoy a vacancy rate considerably below the market average, our tenants stay an average of 3 years, and our properties lease 10 days faster than the market average.
This Secret Menu Shows You Everything Running on Your PC
When your PC encounters a problem, seeing how everything is running can help you troubleshoot the issue. And when all is well, this information can also help you optimize your system. It’s all available in the Task Manager’s Performance tab—as well as a more advanced option.
What Is the Performance Tab in Task Manager?
The Performance tab in Task Manager provides a comprehensive and real-time overview of your Windows computer’s resource usage. It displays graphs and other useful data, allowing you to monitor system performance, identify bottlenecks, and efficiently manage resource-intensive applications.
You can access the Performance tab by right-clicking an empty part of the taskbar and selecting Task Manager, or by hitting Ctrl + Shift + Esc anytime. In Task Manager, click Performance on the left menu to access the tab.
Understanding the Performance Tab and How to Use It Effectively
The Performance tab is divided into several sections; the ones that appear depend on your setup. Here’s what you’ll typically see, along with examples of common use case scenarios.
CPU
This section displays real-time CPU usage through graphs and percentages. It shows detailed information about the processor, including its name, cores, threads, and clock speed. You can also use it to monitor your system’s uptime and track running processes.
A common reason to visit the CPU tab is when you notice your PC acting sluggish during taxing work, like playing a game or editing a video. If this section shows high usage (90–100%), that indicates a bottleneck. From there, you can walk through ways to fix high CPU usage on your Windows computer.
Memory
Random access memory (RAM), or just “memory”, is the temporary, fast storage where your PC keeps running programs. This section displays your computer’s total RAM, including how much of it is in use and available.
Committed refers to memory that’s spoken for, while Paged pool shows how much of your storage disk Windows will use as the paging file (a part of your drive used as pretend RAM when your actual memory runs low). Other useful information includes the memory’s speed, and the RAM slots used and available on your computer.
The memory section comes in most handy when you notice your computer has become slow when multitasking. When memory usage is around 90–100%, you need to do something to identify what is causing the high RAM usage and fix it. For me, this is usually closing memory-intensive applications like Chrome and Blender.
Disk
If you have more than one storage disk in your computer, each one will have its own section in Task Manager (e.g., Disk 0 and Disk 1). This shows the disk’s activity, with separate graphs for active time and transfer rate. It also shows information like capacity, disk type, read/write speed, and whether it’s a System disk (the one Windows is installed on).
High disk usage can indicate a bottleneck, especially when transferring or loading files. The information in this section can also help you troubleshoot apps that cause heavy disk utilization. Studying this will also help you make informed decisions on whether you need to upgrade your storage or switch to an SSD to speed up operations.
Wi-Fi/Ethernet
The Wi-Fi or Ethernet section (depending on your connection type) shows your network usage data in real time, including send/receive data rates. You also get useful information like the adapter name, local IP address, and signal strength.
This networking tab comes in handy when you’re experiencing connectivity issues or slow internet speeds—it’s easy to check if the connection is stable or operating at the speed you expect. You can also use this section to identify bandwidth-hogging applications. Additionally, it’s useful as a way to monitor signal strength when optimizing your router placement.
GPU
Like Disk, you’ll see multiple GPU tabs if you have more than one video card installed in your computer. Each one shows GPU usage statistics on various processes, including 3D rendering, video processing, and video decoding. It also displays specific information about the GPU itself, such as the model and dedicated/shared memory.
The GPU section is crucial for monitoring graphics performance, especially when playing a game or editing video. It also helps you check if your graphics card is working properly. Furthermore, it can help you understand your GPU usage patterns so you know if you need to upgrade your hardware or optimize software.
You Should Also Use the Resource Manager (Resmon)
The Performance tab is good for a quick, high-level overview of how your computer is running. If you want to get a detailed analysis that includes every active process, you should use the Resource Monitor instead. It can help drill down on the root cause of the problem you’re experiencing better than the Performance tab.
There’s a shortcut to access the Resource Manager from the Performance tab you were just on. Click the three-dot icon in the top-right corner and select Resource Monitor from the menu. To open it on its own, just type “resource monitor” into the Start menu.
Once you open it, you’ll see that the Resource Monitor is more advanced. To learn more, we’ve walked through how to troubleshoot various problems with the Resource Monitor.
Windows has a lot of tools to help you optimize performance or troubleshoot issues. Learning to navigate these built-in utilities will save you from installing unnecessary third-party software. Mastering the Task Manager’s Performance tab is an excellent first step toward becoming more proficient with your Windows system.
Global kung fu devotees converge at Shaolin Temple
With Shaolin kung fu sweeping the world, enthusiasts from every continent gather together at its birthplace, the Shaolin Temple in China. Here, they plunge themselves into systematic training; combat techniques, mastery of weapons, and the profound philosophy of “Chan in motion,” where martial skills and spiritual discipline merge.
Vin Diesel says Paul Walker’s Brian O’Conner could return in ‘Fast & Furious 11’
Vin Diesel says the planned finale of the long-running “Fast & Furious” franchise will come with an unexpected passenger.
Speaking at Fuel Fest, an automotive event in Pomona over the weekend, Diesel told fans that the final “Fast & Furious” film will bring back one of the series’ most beloved characters: Paul Walker’s Brian O’Conner. The longtime on-screen partner to Diesel’s Dominic Toretto, O’Conner last appeared in 2015’s “Furious 7,” which was completed after Walker’s death in a car accident in 2013 at age 40.
The franchise — known for its blend of street racing, elaborate heists and outsized action — has grown into one of the most successful of all time, with more than $7 billion at the global box office.
“Just yesterday I was with Universal Studios,” Diesel said in a video from the event. “The studio said to me, ‘Vin, can we please have the finale of ‘Fast & Furious’ [in] April 2027?’ I said, ‘Under three conditions’ — because I’ve been listening to my fanbase.”
Those conditions, he said, were to bring the franchise back to L.A., return to its street-racing roots and reunite Dom and Brian.
“That is what you’re going to get in the finale,” Diesel promised.
How the production might accomplish that reunion remains unclear. When Walker died during the making of “Furious 7,” the filmmakers turned to a mix of archived footage, digital effects and performances by Walker’s brothers, Caleb and Cody, who served as stand-ins for unfinished scenes. Artists at Weta Digital created more than 300 visual-effects shots to map Walker’s likeness onto his brothers’ bodies, often piecing together dialogue from existing recordings. The film’s farewell — showing Brian and Dom driving side by side before splitting onto separate roads — became one of the franchise’s most memorable and emotional moments, widely seen as a tribute to Walker’s legacy.
A return for Brian O’Conner would join a growing list of posthumous digital performances in major franchises — a practice that continues to stir debate over where the line should be drawn. In 2016’s “Rogue One: A Star Wars Story,” Peter Cushing’s Grand Moff Tarkin was recreated through a mix of motion capture, CGI and archival material, decades after Cushing’s death. In 2019, “The Rise of Skywalker” relied on previously unused footage and digital stitching to return Carrie Fisher’s Leia to the screen three years after the actress’ passing.
And in last year’s “Alien: Romulus,” the late Ian Holm’s likeness was recreated as an android using AI and digital effects, with the approval of his estate — a choice that sparked controversy and led to more practical effects being used in the film’s home release.
OpenAI Leadership Responds to Meta Offers: ‘Someone Has Broken Into Our Home’
Mark Chen, the chief research officer at OpenAI, sent a forceful memo to staff on Saturday, promising to go head-to-head with the social giant in the war for top research talent. This memo, which was sent to OpenAI employees in Slack and obtained by WIRED, came days after Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg successfully recruited four senior researchers from the company to join Meta’s superintelligence lab.
“I feel a visceral feeling right now, as if someone has broken into our home and stolen something,” Chen wrote. “Please trust that we haven’t been sitting idly by.”
Chen promised that he was working with Sam Altman, the CEO of OpenAI, and other leaders at the company “around the clock to talk to those with offers,” adding, “we’ve been more proactive than ever before, we’re recalibrating comp, and we’re scoping out creative ways to recognize and reward top talent.”
Still, even as OpenAI leadership appears desperate to retain its staff, Chen said that he has “high personal standards of fairness,” and wants to retain top talent with that in mind. “While I’ll fight to keep every one of you, I won’t do so at the price of fairness to others,” he wrote.
The news comes as competition for top AI researchers is heating up in Silicon Valley. Zuckerberg has been particularly aggressive in his approach, offering $100 million signing bonuses to some OpenAI staffers, according to comments Altman made on a podcast with his brother, Jack Altman. Multiple sources at OpenAI with direct knowledge of the offers confirmed the number. The Meta CEO has also been personally reaching out to potential recruits, according to the Wall Street Journal. “Over the past month, Meta has been aggressively building out their new AI effort, and has repeatedly (and mostly unsuccessfully) tried to recruit some of our strongest talent with comp-focused packages,” Chen wrote on Slack.
A source close to the efforts at Meta confirmed the company has been significantly ramping up its research recruiting, with a particular eye toward talent from OpenAI and Google. Anthropic, while also a top rival, is thought to be less of a culture fit at Meta, one source tells WIRED. “They haven’t necessarily expanded the band, but for top talent, the sky is the limit,” the source says.
Both OpenAI and Meta did not respond to requests for comment.
Chen’s note included messages from seven other research leaders at the company, where they wrote notes to staffers in an apparent effort to encourage them to stay. One leader on the research team encouraged staff to reach out if they received an offer from Meta: “If they pressure you, or make ridiculous exploding offers just tell them to back off, it’s not nice to pressure people in potentially the most important decision. WIRED is not naming the leader as they are not a C-suite executive. “I’d like to be able to talk to you through it and I know all about their offers.”
Get The BioShock And Mafia Trilogies For Just $18 In This New Deal
If you’re craving some FPS gaming this summer, you’ll want to check out Humble’s latest bundle deal, the 2K Classic Trilogies Mafia X Bioshock Game Bundle. The deal lets you grab each mainline entry in the BioShock and Mafia series on PC for just $18. Like other Humble Bundle deals, the company donates a portion of proceeds to charity–in this case, the bundle supports Covenant House, which provides food, shelter, immediate crisis care, and ongoing services to homeless and trafficked young people. You can also adjust the revenue split between Humble, 2K, and Covenant House before checkout.
Humble’s 2K Classic Trilogies Mafia X Bioshock Game Bundle offers a tiered payment option, and the more you pay, the more games you get.
If you only want the Bioshock series, you can grab the base $10 tier that includes the Remastered Editions of BioShock 1 and 2, alongside the original BioShock Infinite. The enhanced editions of Bioshock 1 and 2 included in this bundle offer improved graphics and UI, with support for up to 4K resolutions. It’s also worth noting that the version of Bioshock Infinite included in the bundle does not include the Season Pass DLC content, and must be purchased separately.
If you pay $18 or more, you’ll also unlock the Definitive Edition versions of Mafia, Mafia II, and Mafia III. All three Definitive Editions feature upgraded graphics, as well as all story DLC and additional content from the original versions. Owning all three also unlocks bonus in-game costumes.
While all six games in the bundle are first-person shooters, BioShock and Mafia offer very different gameplay experiences. The BioShock series is a more cramped, atmospheric series set in fantastical alternate-history worlds. The original BioShock was a huge hit when it first released, thanks to its solid gunplay, improvisational combat abilities, and unique, deep-sea steampunk setting of Rapture City. Bioshock 2 returns players to Rapture, and casts them as one of the first game’s most intimidating enemies, the Big Daddy. BioShock Infinite breaks away from the underwater adventures of the previous two games and sends players to Columbia, an airborne city of miracles with dark secrets.
Mafia, on the other hand, are open-world crime thrillers, each of which takes place in a different historical era. The first Mafia game is set during the 1930s in Illinois, Mafia II spans the 1940s and 1950s in New York, and Mafia III takes place in Louisiana during the late 1960s.
The 2K Classic Trilogies Mafia X Bioshock Game Bundle is available at Humble until July 9. All games purchased in the bundle are delivered as official Steam keys.
2K Classic Trilogies Mafia X Bioshock Game Bundle
Pay at least $10
- BioShock Remastered Edition
- BioShock 2 Remastered Edition
- BioShock Infinite
Pay at least $18
- BioShock Remastered Edition
- BioShock 2 Remastered Edition
- BioShock Infinite
- Mafia Definitive Edition
- Mafia 2 Definitive Edition
- Mafia 3 Definitive Edition
If you’re looking for more PC game deals, Humble also has plenty of other bundles available right now. Fans of story-rich games should check out the Narrative Arc Bundle, which offers seven story-rich games like Venba and Dustborn, and the Serenity Forge Story Teller’s Bundle that includes 12 games like Neversong, Paratropic, and more. If you enjoy solving puzzles, there’s the Puzzle Pizzazz Game Bundle featuring 8 titles like The Entropy Centre and Paper Trail, or you can pick up seven detective adventure games like Heavy Rain, Brok the Investigator, and more with the Case & Consequence Collection. Check the list below for even more bundles, or check out all the deals at Humble.
More Humble Bundle Deals
Scientists turn beer yeast into mini factories for smart drugs
Scientists at Ca’ Foscari University of Venice, in collaboration with researchers from Japan, China, Switzerland, and Italy, have developed an innovative method to produce and rapidly analyze a vast array of macrocyclic peptides, molecules increasingly used in modern medicine. The research, published in Nature Communications, harnesses the familiar brewer’s yeast, turning billions of these tiny organisms into miniature fluorescent factories, each capable of creating a unique peptide with potential therapeutic applications.
Macrocyclic peptides are promising drugs because they combine precision targeting, stability, and safety, offering fewer side effects than traditional drugs. However, conventional methods for discovering and testing these peptides are often complex, difficult to control, slow, and environmentally unfriendly.
To overcome these limitations, the researchers engineered common brewer’s yeast cells to individually produce different macrocyclic peptides. Each yeast cell acts like a tiny factory that lights up when prod-ucing the compound, allowing scientists to swiftly identify promising peptides. Using advanced fluorescence-based techniques, the team screened billions of these micro-factories in just a few hours, a process that is significantly faster and more ecofriendly than existing methods.
Sara Linciano, lead author and postdoctoral researcher at Ca’ Foscari’s Department of Molecular Sciences and Nanosystems, explains: “We manipulated yeast cells so that each one functions as a ‘micro-factory’ that becomes fluorescent when producing a specific compound. This allowed us to analyze 100 million different peptides rapidly and effectively.”
Ylenia Mazzocato, co-leader of the study, highlights the sustainability of their approach: “By exploiting the natural machinery of yeast, we produce peptide molecules that are biocompatible and biodegradable, making them safe for health and the environment, a truly ‘green pharma’ approach.”
The team also clarified how these peptides precisely bind to their targets. Zhanna Romanyuk, who contributed to the structural analysis, says: “Using X-ray crystallography, we demonstrated the excellent binding properties of these peptides, confirming their precision and potency.”
This new method offers significant advancements for drug discovery, especially for challenging targets that conventional drugs cannot easily address. Alessandro Angelini, associate professor and study coordinator, emphasizes: “We are pushing the boundaries of this technology to create macrocyclic peptides that can deliver advanced therapies directly to specific cells, potentially revolutionising treatments. This could greatly benefit patient health and have substantial scientific and economic impacts.”
This work was part of the National Recovery and Resilience Plan (PNRR), supported by the European Union’s Next Generation EU initiative, involving multidisciplinary teams from Ca’ Foscari University of Venice, Kyoto Institute of Technology (KIT), Chinese Academy of Sciences, University of Padova, and École Polytechnique Fédérale de Lausanne (EPFL), including experts in chemistry, biophysics, biochemistry, and computational sciences.
Part of this technology has already been patented by Ca’ Foscari and was recently acquired by the startup Arzanya S.r.l. “Seeing our technology gain international recognition makes me proud,” Angelini concludes. “I I hope Arzanya S.r.l. can provide our talented young researchers with the opportunity to pursue their passions here in Italy, without necessarily needing to move abroad.”
Quasi Contracts under Indian Contract Act
| TABLE OF CONTENTS |
|---|
| Definition of Quasi Contracts |
| Characteristics of Quasi Contracts |
| Differences between Contract and Quasi-Contract |
| Elements of Quasi-Contracts |
| Landmark Cases on Quasi Contracts |
| Conclusion |
Definition of Quasi Contracts
Quasi-contracts are a concept under the Indian Contract Act, of 1872, that governs situations where there is no express or implied contract between parties but still imposes an obligation on one party to pay the other party. It is also known as a “constructive contract” or “implied-in-law contract.” This type of contract arises to prevent unjust enrichment of one party at the expense of the other party. Quasi-contracts are based on the principle of equity and justice, rather than a mutual agreement between the parties.
Quantum Meruit is a Latin term that means “as much as he deserved.” This principle is often used in quasi-contract cases where one party has provided goods or services to another party. It refers to the principle that if someone has provided services or goods to another person, they should be paid a reasonable amount for the value of those goods or services, even if there was no express agreement between the parties.
In this article, we will discuss quasi-contracts under the Indian Contract Act, their characteristics, and landmark cases related to it.
Characteristics of Quasi Contracts
- Absence of Agreement: Quasi-contracts arise in the absence of an agreement between the parties. There is no express or implied contract between the parties that specifies their rights and obligations.
- Implied by Law: Quasi-contracts are not created by the parties’ intention but rather imposed by the law to prevent unjust enrichment of one party at the expense of the other.
- Obligation to Pay: One party has an obligation to pay the other party a certain amount of money. This obligation is imposed on the party by law.
- No Mutual Consent: Quasi-contracts are not based on mutual consent, but rather the law’s imposition of an obligation to prevent injustice.
Elements of Quasi-Contracts
To establish a quasi-contract, the following elements must be present:
(i) The defendant must have been enriched;
(ii) The enrichment must have been at the plaintiff’s expense;
(iii) The enrichment must have been unjust;
(iv) There must be no other legal remedy available to the plaintiff; and
(v) The enrichment must not have been due to any fault of the plaintiff.
Restitution is a remedy that is often awarded in quasi-contract cases. Restitution refers to the return of property or money that has been wrongfully obtained by one party from another party. The goal of restitution is to restore the parties to the position they were in before the quasi-contract was formed.
Differences between Contracts and Quasi-Contracts
| CONTRACTS | QUASI-CONTRACTS |
|---|---|
| Formed by parties willing to enter into a contract. | Formed out of obligation of parties. |
| There exists an agreement enforceable by law. | There exists no such agreement. |
| The contract is legally binding | Merely resembles a contract but is still binding |
| Can be either express or implied | Quasi-contracts are implied |
Landmark Cases on Quasi Contracts
- Moses vs. Macferlan: In this case, Macferlan had sold some stock to Moses, but the stock was later found to be defective. Moses sued Macferlan for a refund. The court held that Macferlan had to refund the money to Moses because there was no express contract between the parties, but there was an implied contract based on the circumstances.
- Kedar Nath vs. Gorie Mohamed: In this case, Kedar Nath had paid Gorie Mohamed for the construction of a house, but Gorie Mohamed failed to complete the construction. The court held that Kedar Nath was entitled to get back the money paid to Gorie Mohamed as there was no contract between the parties. It was a case of quasi-contract based on the principle of unjust enrichment.
- P. Sreenivasa Rao vs. State of Andhra Pradesh: In this case, Sreenivasa Rao had been appointed as a public prosecutor, but the government later canceled his appointment. The court held that Sreenivasa Rao was entitled to compensation for the services he had rendered to the government, as there was an implied contract between him and the government.
- Mohd. Shafi vs. Muhammad Ismail: In this case, Shafi had paid Ismail for the purchase of some goods, but Ismail failed to deliver the goods. The court held that Ismail had to refund the money to Shafi as there was no contract between the parties. It was a case of quasi-contract based on the principle of unjust enrichment.
Conclusion
Quasi contracts are a legal concept that is used to prevent unjust enrichment of one party at the expense of the other. These contracts arise when there is no express or implied contract between the parties. The obligation to pay is imposed on one party by law. The Indian Contract Act, 1872, recognizes quasi-contracts and provides remedies for parties in such situations. The above landmark cases demonstrate the application of quasi-contracts in different scenarios.
Note: This post was first published in July, 2024. It was republished on 27th June, 2025.
“You should be in the ICU”: How a 57-year-old woman at coma risk reversed Type 2 diabetes in just 2 months | Health
During a doctor visit in Mumbai in 2024, Usha Rachael Thomas heard words that would change her life. “You’re walking and talking, but physiologically, you should be in the ICU.” A senior brand strategist and communications leader, Usha was used to high stakes and high stress. But nothing prepared her for the reality that her body had been quietly inching toward a diabetic coma.
Her body gave no dramatic signs. Just a growing fatigue, thirst she couldn’t quench, and exhaustion that blanketed her after every meal. For two months, she dismissed the symptoms as stress or heat. But her blood sugar reading told a different story. “The number on the glucometer read over 500, 538 to be precise — more than five times what it should have been,” the 57-year-old recounts in an interview to HT Health Shots.
That was the day her narrative of “I’m just tired” crumbled. Eventually, it led to a medical turnaround that evolved into a deeply personal return to self-respect, self-awareness and a conscious walk towards self-care for Usha.
Diabetes signs that were easily ignored
Usha says she had been feeling unusually tired, especially after meals. A quick breakfast would be followed by an overwhelming urge to sleep. The same thing happened post-lunch. “I thought it was just Mumbai’s relentless heat or the stress of our company’s merger,” she says.
The excessive thirst? She blamed it on dehydration. The frequent urination? A natural outcome of drinking more water. But what she missed was what many do — the body’s subtle signs for help. There was no one else to notice the red flags either.
“Losing my father a year ago, taking care of my mother’s loneliness and managing her grief, the empty nest syndrome after my younger son moved to settle down with his wife in Toronto and working from home during our company’s merger, had created the perfect storm of stress and isolation,” she says.
When Usha finally saw her long-time physician, Dr B.S. Shetty, he didn’t take long to connect the dots. He suggested a random blood sugar test. And when the result showed 538, she was told what no patient wants to hear: “You should be in the ICU.”
Her body was on the brink of a diabetic coma.
“Those words detonated the carefully constructed narrative I’d been telling myself for decades. In that sterile examination room, my illusion of invincibility crumbled. I wasn’t just tired. I wasn’t just thirsty. I was critically ill. I had Type 2 diabetes. And not a mild case! I was standing at the precipice of a diabetic crisis that could have ended my life,” says Usha of what became her wake-up call.
Looking back, Usha can now recognize the early warning signs that her body had been sending for years before she hit a crisis point. She says she had been neglecting:
- Subtle abnormalities in routine blood work that were technically “within range” but trending in concerning directions
- Increased recovery time from sudden sprains
- Persistent fatigue despite seemingly adequate rest
- Unexplained changes in body composition that she attributed to age rather than metabolic dysfunction
- Adaptations that she made unconsciously as her energy declined. She took elevators instead of stairs. Took the car for short distances she once would have walked.
The journey towards diabetes reversal
A week since being told she was on the brink of a diabetic coma, Usha sat across from endocrinologist Dr Dheeraj Kapoor. And without any sugarcoating, he told her: “You should have seen an endocrinologist 11 years ago when the weight gain began. The responsibility is yours now. You will have to work very hard. But there’s good news—your other vitals are excellent. This means you can heal.”
In that moment, she felt she had a choice: “I could continue spiraling, or I could begin healing.” Usha chose to heal.
Reversing Type 2 Diabetes in 60 days
Within just two months of disciplined lifestyle changes, Usha brought her blood sugar levels down to the non-diabetic range. For the past ten months, she has maintained them without aggressive medication or deprivation. The question is how?
It was built on three foundational pillars: medicinal support (initially), mindset transformation, and methodical lifestyle reconstruction, explains Usha, a former journalist and IIM-A alumna.
“While I’m now almost medication-free, I began with the lowest-dose tablet to stabilize my condition. This support created space for my lifestyle changes to take effect,” she says.
Changes in schedule:
- Fixed the eating window: No more daily late dinners or midnight sleep.
- Dinner by 7:30-8:00 PM without exception
- Sleep by 10:30-11:00 PM to support hormonal regulation
- Morning routines that prioritized self-care before work demands
Intentional increase in movement
- 10-minute walks immediately following every meal
- Simple soleus pushups while brushing teeth or waiting for water to boil
- Daily yoga and dance sessions with instructors Saurabh Bothra and Trishala Bothra, restoring energy and joy
- Minimum 45-minute dedicated walks every day
Dietary changes
The major change was not in what she ate, but how.
- Vegetables first, then everything else. “This simple sequence change dramatically impacted my glucose response. I Just flipped the plate, not the food,” she says.
- Practiced mindful eating, slowing down to notice flavours, textures, and satiety cues. I still eat chocolate and fruits. I just balance with exercise and accountability.
- Strategic indulgence: “It was a yes to chocolate, yes to mangoes, but with precise awareness of timing and quantity.”
- Consistency over intensity: “I never deprived myself, only realigned priorities.”
Positive signs of diabetes reversal
Usha noticed that even with these basic lifestyle changes for diabetes management, within 2 weeks her blood sugar levels dropped from 538 to 180, then to 112, then 98. “In 2 months, I reversed Type 2 diabetes. For 10 months and counting, I’ve stayed in a non-diabetic range. And I lost 20 kgs gradually, without looking gaunt or sickly, just stronger and healthier.”
She says while the statistics look great, they fail to capture the mental clarity that returned like morning light after a long night, the renewed energy, or even the profound shift in how she relates to herself.
A mother of two grown-up sons, she shares, “I dismantled 36 years of unconscious self-neglect and rebuilt my relationship with my body. I realized that my near-catastrophic health crisis wasn’t the result of days or even months of poor choices. It was the culmination of 36 years of unintentional self-abandonment. Like many women, I believed that taking care of my family and excelling in my career meant I was taking care of myself. I was productive, successful, reliable. Surely, that meant I was well. What I failed to see was how systematically I had deprioritized my own physical needs.”
To be specific, she says preventive care became an afterthought and she only sought medical attention when something was obviously wrong. She continuously dismissed her 30-kg weight gain as inevitable in the wake of stress and menopause. Late-night dinners and inconsistent sleep patterns became normalized in the 24×7 media and entertainment industry she worked in. Her eating habits included processed foods, restaurant meals, late nights with no consciousness about portion control. Physical movement had nearly vanished from her life as she spent 14-16 hours daily tethered to screens, and ensuring all work deadlines. In between all this, she had simply stopped listening to her body’s signals.
Final reflections: “Don’t wait for a crisis to hit you”
Usha asserts that while Type 2 diabetes has been normalized as an inevitable consequence of aging or genetics, her experience suggests that personal agency plays a far greater role than people have been led to believe.
“My purpose in sharing this deeply personal journey is to highlight possibilities for others. You might be where I was — functional but failing, productive but perishing. You deserve to know that reversal is possible with the right guidance and commitment. And your healing journey deserves to start before crisis forces your hand,” she concludes.
(This story is based on an individual’s experience with Type 2 diabetes. Consult your doctor before making any dietary or lifestyle changes to suit your personal needs.)
Vor, with new CEO, changes course to target autoimmune disease
Dive Brief:
- Vor Biopharma is licensing rights to an immune disease drug from Chinese biotechnology company RemeGen, it said Wednesday, a little over one month after announcing plans to review strategic alternatives.
- As part of its shift in focus, Vor also announced it appointed former MorphoSys leader Jean-Paul Kress as CEO. Vor’s previous chief executive Robert Ang will stay on as an adviser through October.
- Vor also raised $175 million in a PIPE, or private investment in public equity, that involved half a dozen investors including RA Capital Management, Forbion and Venrock Healthcare Capital Partners.
Dive Insight:
PureTech Health and the oncologist and author Siddhartha Mukherjee founded Vor nearly a decade ago. Progress developing a treatment for leukemia led the company in 2021 to price a $177 million initial public offering.
But a rocky few years forced Vor to change direction. The Cambridge, Massachusetts-based biotech had been advancing cell therapies called trem-cel and VCAR33, but in May revealed plans to wind down clinical operations and lay off 95% of its employees.
Now, Vor is reestablishing itself as an autoimmune disease company. The deal with RemeGen gives its rights to develop and commercialize in most parts of the world a drug for generalized myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosus and rheumatoid arthritis that’s already approved in China.
Vor is paying RemeGene $45 million upfront along with $80 million in warrants to purchase common stock in exchange for the drug, called telitacicept.
Telitacicept is in Phase 3 testing for generalized myasthenia gravis in the U.S., Europe and South America, according to the companies. Data from that trial is expected in 2027.
“I am absolutely thrilled to be leading Vor Bio as we transform the company to become a major player in autoimmune disease treatment,” Kress said in a statement.
Telitacicept’s targets are cytokines known as BAFF and APRIL, which have also been the focus of other dealmaking.
Recently, China-based biotechs like RemeGen are providing more and more of the drug candidates licensed by U.S. and European drugmakers. “Global biopharma companies can increasingly look to China as a cost-effective source of innovation, particularly for validated targets and rapid generation of proof-of-concept data,” Leerink Partners analyst David Risinger wrote in a Thursday note to clients.
Vor’s decision to start anew with a Phase 3-ready drug candidate contrasts with the route preferred by some activist investors and analysts, who have pushed struggling biotechs to wind down and return cash to shareholders rather than try to reinvent themselves. Some, like Third Harmonic Bio and iTeos Therapeutics, have taken this course, while others have resisted the pressure
“I couldn’t be more thrilled with this exciting new direction for Vor, and new leadership with the background and skills appropriate for this asset,” Ang, Vor’s former CEO, wrote in a LinkedIn post.
Shares in Vor nearly doubled on the news to trade around $1 apiece by Thursday afternoon.
The Hidden Winners in Australia’s Property Market Boom – And What This Means for You
Key takeaways
The Australian Property Institute (API) has just released its inaugural Valuation Report, and it turns that long-held belief on its head.
While housing markets have seen strong growth, industrial property, especially in Sydney, has quietly emerged as a top performer.
Sydney industrial warehouses emerged as the highest performing non-farm property sector over the past 20 years with a return of 261%.
Over the last 10 years, Queensland property owners have been the chief beneficiaries of ‘sea changers’ and ‘tree changers’, taking out seven of the top 10 best performing residential property regions across Australia in the 2014-2024 period.
Western Australia, NSW and Victoria had one region each in the best performing markets.
Coolangatta (QLD) and Broadbeach (QLD) were the strongest non-capital city markets anywhere in Australia over the last decade, with prices increasing by 154%.
Housing supply remains a key driver of housing unaffordability. For example, despite a NSW Government commitment to deliver 377,000 new well-located homes in the state by 2029, under the National Housing Accord, residential development has fallen below business as usual levels.
NSW Government housing activity and supply figures also suggest the state is lagging with 21,214 net completions in the year to June 2024, 17.8% below the previous five financial years’ average of 25,823. Building Approvals for the year to June 2024 were 25,852, 23.6% below the previous five financial years’ average of 33,847[3].
Greater Sydney housing supply forecasts suggest only an additional 172,900 new homes will be built to 2028-29, which is 10.2% below the previous six financial years’ total completions of 192,498
For decades, Sydney and Melbourne have dominated the conversation when it comes to property investment in Australia.
They’ve been the go-to markets for capital growth, perceived as safe, stable, and predictably lucrative.
But the Australian Property Institute (API) has just released its inaugural Valuation Report, and it turns that long-held belief on its head.
This isn’t just another data set.
It’s a 20-year deep dive into residential, commercial, industrial, and agricultural property values across every Australian state and territory.
And its findings challenge many of the assumptions property investors have held for years.
Let’s explore the key takeaways—and more importantly, what they mean for strategic investors like us.
Smaller cities take the crown in residential growth
According to the API report, Adelaide has topped the list for capital city house price growth over the past 20 years, with a staggering 175% increase.
Hobart follows closely at 172%.
Sydney and Melbourne, while still strong, lag behind at 171% and 169% respectively.
Brisbane also notched 169%, followed by Canberra (148%), Perth (123%) and Darwin (102%).
These numbers are particularly striking when you compare them to inflation over the same period, just 67%.
So why did the smaller cities outperform?
Several factors come into play:
-
Affordability pressures drove buyers to more reasonably priced markets.
-
Lifestyle changes (especially post-COVID) accelerated interest in secondary cities.
-
Government and infrastructure investment in places like Adelaide and Hobart improved liveability and employment options.
Note: Good investment isn’t about sentiment, it’s about being in the right market at the right time, with the right strategy.
Agriculture: the best-performing property class—by far
Interestingly, it wasn’t residential, commercial, or even industrial property that delivered the strongest growth.
It was agricultural land.
Over the past two decades, farming land values increased by an average of 256%, compared to:
What’s behind this massive appreciation?
-
High global commodity prices
-
Consistent demand for food security
-
Climate resilience in some regions
-
An overlay of renewable energy projects in areas like the Wimmera, which saw an incredible 802% increase in value, the highest of any property market in the country.
Agriculture is no longer just for farmers. It’s now a core asset class and increasingly a strategic one.
Industrial leads the commercial pack
While housing markets have seen strong growth, industrial property, especially in Sydney, has quietly emerged as a top performer.
-
Sydney industrial warehouses grew 261% over 20 years, making it the best-performing non-farming property type in the country.
-
Sydney commercial came in second at 176%.
-
Adelaide industrial warehouses weren’t far behind at 173%.
This speaks to broader structural shifts:
-
The rise of e-commerce has created strong demand for logistics and warehousing.
-
Land scarcity around metropolitan areas has led to capital growth.
-
Corporations are paying premiums for newer, greener buildings to meet ESG mandates.
Queensland’s coastal markets are booming
Zoom in on the last 10 years, and you’ll see that Queensland is dominating the regional property growth scene.
Seven of the top 10 highest-growth regions are in Queensland.
The top performers?
-
Coolangatta and Broadbeach–Burleigh both saw 154% growth.
-
Maroochy (141%), Noosa Hinterland (134%), and Robina (126%) were also among the leaders
This is no accident. We’ve seen a long-term shift driven by:
It’s a clear case of lifestyle meeting leverage, and it’s working.
Housing affordability: a structural crisis
The API’s long-term data paints a sobering picture of just how far housing affordability has slipped.
Back in 1975, a Sydney home cost just 4.2 times the average annual wage. Today it’s 13 times.
Melbourne has jumped from 3.5x to 8.4x.
Brisbane, from 2.9x to 8.3x.
Nationally, we’ve gone from 3.4x to 8.1x.
This trend has been driven by:
-
Strong capital growth outpacing wage growth
-
Chronic undersupply of housing stock
-
A policy environment that often struggles to align planning, development, and infrastructure delivery
We’re not just facing a short-term affordability blip.
We’re in a generational shift where ownership is becoming more elusive, especially for younger Australians.
Note: For investors, that only reinforces the long-term opportunity in quality rental housing. Build-to-rent, dual-occupancy dwellings, and high-amenity townhomes will continue to be in strong demand.
Supply is still falling short
The report also underscores one of the biggest systemic risks to the market: Australia isn’t building enough homes.
In NSW, despite a government commitment to deliver 377,000 new homes by 2029, we’re seeing:
-
Net completions of just 21,214 in the year to June 2024—18% below the five-year average
-
Building approvals down 23.6%
-
A forecast shortfall of at least 19,500 homes in Greater Sydney over the next four years.
This is a fundamental reason prices have remained resilient even amid rising interest rates.
Demand remains strong, but supply just isn’t keeping up.
Energy, emissions and land use: a new frontier
Another theme emerging from the report is the role of net-zero targets and renewable energy projects in shaping property values.
Valuers are now having to assess:
-
The impact of transmission infrastructure cutting across farmland
-
The economics of solar and wind projects on rural land
-
Carbon sequestration deals between landowners and corporations
As emissions reduction becomes a national imperative, we’ll see a growing divergence between land that can adapt and land that can’t.
It will be expert valuation and advisory services that help determine the best use.
So, where to from here?
The API’s data confirms what I’ve been saying for years: the property market isn’t a monolith.
It’s not just about capital cities or buying the median house in a “blue-chip” suburb.
It’s about understanding long-term macro trends, demographic shifts, infrastructure plays, policy changes, and asset class performance.
If there’s one thing to take away from this report, it’s that informed investors will win the next decade, just as they did the last.
We’re at a critical inflection point:
-
Migration is surging
-
Infrastructure is evolving
-
The energy transition is reshaping land values
-
And affordability remains one of the defining economic issues of our time
Now is the time for strategic thinking, smart asset selection, and long-term vision.
That’s exactly what we do at Metropole: help clients build resilient portfolios.
If you’re like many property investors, you’re probably wondering what’s the right thing to do at present.
Should you buy, should you sell, or should you just wait?
You can trust the team at Metropole to provide you with direction, guidance, and results.
Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced investor, at times like we are currently experiencing you need an advisor who takes a holistic approach to your wealth creation and that’s exactly what you get from the multi-award-winning team at Metropole.
We help our clients grow, protect and pass on their wealth through a range of services including:
- Strategic property advice – Allow us to build a Strategic Property Plan for you and your family. Planning is bringing the future into the present so you can do something about it now! Click here to learn more
- Buyer’s agency – As Australia’s most trusted buyers’ agents we’ve been involved in over $4Billion worth of transactions creating wealth for our clients and we can do the same for you. Our on the ground teams in Melbourne, Sydney, and Brisbane bring you years of experience and perspective – that’s something money just can’t buy. We’ll help you find your next home or an investment-grade property. Click here to learn how we can help you.
- Property Development – We enable you to become an “armchair developer” and get all the benefits of property development without getting your hands dirty. We take the hassles out of your investment by assisting you with all the expertise you need, from concept to completion, including construction. Click here to see if it’s the right way for you to grow your portfolio.
- Wealth Advisory – We can provide you with strategic tailored financial planning and wealth advice. Click here to learn more about we can help you.
- Property Management – Our stress-free property management services help you maximise your property returns. Click here to find out why our clients enjoy a vacancy rate considerably below the market average, our tenants stay an average of 3 years, and our properties lease 10 days faster than the market average.
I Love Samsung Phones, but These 6 Issues Drive Me Crazy
Even as someone who genuinely likes Samsung phones, the company’s devices have a few recurring issues that get under my skin. While not bad enough to make me switch, they show up often enough to make me groan every time.
6
Too Much Bloatware
Almost every Android phone ships with a few pre-installed apps, but Samsung takes it to another level. Out of the box, Galaxy phones come packed with dozens of apps that you may never need or use.
It starts with Samsung’s own lineup of apps, like Samsung TV, Samsung Members, Smart Tutor, SmartThings, and the Wearable app. Then, because of the Microsoft partnership, you also get apps like Microsoft 365, LinkedIn, OneNote, and OneDrive on your phone from the start.
Put all this together, and even a brand-new Samsung phone can feel messy right out of the box. There are so many preloaded apps, and they don’t just sit there. They take up storage, drain your battery, and quietly eat up system resources in the background. The problem is even worse on budget Galaxy models, where storage and performance are already tight.
Sure, it’s not that hard to get rid of most of the pre-installed apps on your Samsung phone. But first impressions matter, and One UI doesn’t exactly make a great one.
5
Still No Support for Multiple User Profiles
One of the best functions Android phones have that iPhones still don’t is letting you set up multiple profiles or guest accounts. This essentially gives you separate spaces on the same device, like you’d have with multiple users on Windows or macOS. Each profile gets its own home screen, apps, accounts, and settings. It’s kind of like having two phones in one without the extra hardware.
This is super handy if you want a separate space for kids, or to keep work and personal matters apart. Although Samsung phones run on Android, they don’t support this feature for some reason. Strangely enough, the multi-profile option does show up on Samsung tablets.
On Samsung phones, the closest equivalent is Secure Folder. It lets you lock apps, photos, and other personal data behind a passcode, which is great for privacy. But it’s not functionally the same, as you can’t use it to create separate spaces for different users.
4
One UI vs. One UI Core Confusion
Even though all Samsung phones technically run One UI, the experience isn’t the same across every device. Flagship models like the Galaxy S series or the Z Fold and Flip get the full version of One UI, packed with all the features. But a lot of budget and mid-range Galaxy models come with a watered-down version called One UI Core.
The name “One UI Core” used to be a helpful way to tell you that you were getting a lighter, more limited version of the software. However, Samsung has quietly stopped labeling it that way. So now, two devices might both say they run One UI 6.1, but only one gives you the full experience.
The differences between One UI and One UI Core are hard to miss. For starters, phones with the Core version don’t have functions like Edge Panels or Edge Lighting. You also lose out on features like Link to Windows, Secure Folder, and support for Samsung’s Good Lock app. So if you’re using one of these devices, you’re missing out on a bunch of customization options, multitasking tools, and extra privacy features.
While it makes sense that lower-end phones would skip a few features, the confusing part is that Samsung doesn’t make this clear anymore. Unless you go digging through forums or watch detailed reviews, you probably won’t notice what’s missing until you buy a phone and try to use a feature that isn’t there.
3
Duplicate Apps
Samsung loads up its Galaxy phones with its own apps like Gallery, Phone, Contacts, Messages, and a bunch of others. And to be fair, some of them are quite good, with features you won’t find in Google’s versions. The problem is that Android already includes Google’s apps by default, so you end up with two apps for the same purpose.
On a Galaxy device, you get Samsung Internet and Chrome, Gallery and Google Photos, and then Samsung Messages and Google Messages. It’s not just a couple of apps; it’s a whole list. Sure, having options can be nice, but the real issue is that you can’t simply clean this up by picking what you want.
If you’re into Samsung’s apps, then it’s not a big deal since most of the Google ones can be uninstalled. But if you prefer sticking with Google’s ecosystem, you’re out of luck. One UI won’t let you remove many of the Samsung apps, like Gallery, My Files, Phone, Contacts, and the Galaxy Store.
So even if you never plan on using Samsung Internet or Samsung Messages, they’ll stay there, and you can’t delete them. You can hide them if you want, but you won’t get back the storage they’re taking up.
2
Annoying Ads Everywhere (Even on Flagship Models)
If you’ve ever used a Samsung phone, you probably know how often ads show up. They’re not just hiding in random corners of the interface. You’ll see them right on the lock screen, in your notifications, or even inside Samsung’s default apps. And it can get annoying, fast.
Ads aren’t unusual on budget phones where companies have to cut corners, but Samsung doesn’t stop there. Even high-end devices like the Galaxy S25 Ultra or the Fold 6—phones that cost well over a thousand dollars—still come loaded with ads.
What makes it even more frustrating is that there’s no simple, one-tap way to turn all the ads off. You have to dig through settings, tweak permissions, and manually disable app notifications to get rid of ads on Samsung phones.
Even after all that, some ads still manage to sneak through. For anyone coming from an iPhone or even a Pixel, both of which offer a clean, ad-free experience, this can be a total deal-breaker.
1
Charging Speeds That Lag Behind the Competition
Most Samsung phones provide great bang for your buck, with top-notch displays, solid performance, and premium build quality. But when it comes to charging speed, Samsung still lags behind a lot of other Android brands.
While brands like Motorola, Oppo, and OnePlus are pushing fast charging speeds to 68W, 80W, and even 100W, Samsung has barely moved on this. Even its latest flagship, the Galaxy S25 Ultra, maxes out at just 45W. That might have sounded impressive a few years ago, but in 2025, it’s just not enough to keep up.
In everyday use, this means charging your phone feels slower. A full charge can still take more than an hour, while phones from other brands can go from empty to 100 percent in less time. It gets even more frustrating with phones like the Galaxy S25 Edge, which has just a 3,900mAh battery despite its big 6.7-inch display. With a battery that small, faster charging could have at least made up for the more frequent top-ups.
Samsung phones still rank among the top choices for anyone looking to buy a smartphone. But even the most loyal fans can’t ignore the recurring headaches that come with them. Hopefully, future models will iron out these kinks. Until then, we’ll just have to rely on workarounds to make the experience as good as it should be.
Lulang, a vivid example of rural revitalization in Xizang
‘Nautilus’ review: Capt. Nemo’s swashbuckling origin story
Certain elements of Jules Verne’s 1870 novel “Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea” have become a TV series, “Nautilus,” premiering Sunday on AMC, which picked up the show after Disney+, which ordered and completed it, let it drop. Created by James Dormer, it’s not an adaptation but a prequel, or an origin story, as the comic book kids like to say, in which Nemo, not yet captain, sets sail in his submarine for the first time.
Verne’s imaginative fiction has inspired more and less faithful screen adaptations since the days of silent movies. (Georges Méliès 1902 “A Trip to the Moon,” based partially on Verne’s 1865 “From the Earth to the Moon,” is accounted the first science-fiction film.) For a few midcentury years, perhaps inspired by the success of Disney’s own “20,000 Leagues” — a film they continue to exploit in its theme parks — and Mike Todd’s “Around the World in 80 Days,” it was almost a cottage industry: “Journey to the Center of the Earth,” “In Search of the Castaways,” “Five Weeks in a Balloon.” I grew up watching these films rerun on TV; they are corny and fun, as is “Nautilus,” with fancier effects, anticorporate sentiments and people of color.
We have seen Nemo played by James Mason, Michael Caine, Patrick Stewart, Ben Cross and Robert Ryan, but in “The Mysterious Island,” Verne’s sort-of sequel to “Twenty Thousand Leagues,” he identified Nemo as an Indian prince, as he is shown here, played by Shazad Latif, deposed by an imperial power, his wife and child murdered. The character is usually a bit of a madman, and this Nemo — pigheaded, bossy — is not wholly an exception, though he is also a young, smoldering, swashbuckling hero and a man more sinned against than sinning. We meet him as a prisoner of the British East India Mercantile Company, “the most powerful corporation to ever exist, more powerful than any country,” which is building the Nautilus in India with slave labor, in pursuit, says villainous company director Crawley (Damien Garvey), of “prying open and exploiting the Chinese market.” I’m not sure how a submarine is supposed to do that, but, eh, it’s a reason.
Nemo has been collaborating with the submarine’s inventor, Gustave Benoit (Thierry Frémont), who had accepted the corporation’s money under the promise that it would be used for exploration — scientists can be so dense. Nemo, whom the professor credits as the mind behind the ship’s engine, has his own use for the Nautilus and executes a hasty escape with a half-random crew of fellow inmates in a deftly staged sequence that borrows heavily from “Indiana Jones,” an inspirational well to which the series returns throughout.
And we’re off. On the agenda: escaping, revenge and finding buried treasure to finance revenge.
Joining the Nautilus crew are Loti (Céline Menville) and Humility (Georgia Flood).
(Vince Valitutti / Disney+)
When the Nautilus, hardly on its way, cripples the ship they’re traveling on — under the impression that the sub is under attack — the crew is joined, unwillingly, by Humility Lucas (Georgia Flood), a science-minded British socialite with super engineering skills, who is being packed off to Bombay to marry the abominable Lord Pitt (Cameron Cuffe). She’s accompanied by a chaperone/warder, Loti (Céline Menville), a Frenchwoman who has a mean way with a dagger, and cabin boy Blaster (Kayden Price). And a little dog too. Sparks obviously will fly between Nemo and Humility — bad sparks, then good sparks, as in an Astaire and Rogers movie — and there are actual sparks from a bad electrical connection Humility works out how to fix.
Apart from Benoit, Humility and Loti, a big fellow named Jiacomo (Andrew Shaw), who hails from nobody knows where and speaks a language no one understands, and a British stowaway, the crew of the Nautilus are all people of color — South Asian, Asian, Middle Eastern, African or Pacific Islander. Few are really developed as characters, but the actors give them life, and the supporting players carry the comedy, of which there’s a good deal. One episode inverts the tired old scenario in which white explorers are threatened with death by dark-skinned natives; here, the captors are Nordic warrior women. The show is anticolonial and anti-imperialist in a way that “Star Wars” taught audiences to recognize, if not necessarily recognize in the world around them, and anticapitalist in a way that movies have most always been. (The final episode, which has a financial theme, is titled “Too Big to Fail.” It is quite absurd.)
It can be slow at times, which is not inappropriate to a show that takes place largely underwater. But that its structure is essentially episodic keeps “Nautilus” colorful and more interesting than if it were simply stretched on the rack of a long arc across its 10 episodes. It’s a lot like (pre-streaming) “Star Trek,” which is, after all, a naval metaphor, its crew sailing through a hostile environment encountering a variety of monsters and cultures week to week; indeed, there are some similar storylines: the crew infected by a mystery spore, the ship threatened by tiny beasties and giant monsters, encounters with a tinpot dictator and semimythological figures — all the while being pursued by a Klingon Bird of Prey, sorry, a giant metal warship.
The greatest hits of underwater adventuring (some from Verne’s novel) are covered: volcanoes, giant squid, giant eel, engine trouble, running out of air and the ruins of a lost civilization (Is it Atlantis? Benoit hopes so). Less common: a cricket match on the ice. Apart from a pod of whales outside the window (and, later, a whale rescue), not a lot of time is devoted to the wonders of the sea — the special effects budget, which has in other respects been spent lavishly, apparently had no room left for schools of fish. But these submariners have other things on their minds.
The odds of a second season, says my cloudy crystal ball, are limited, so you may have to accommodate a few minor cliffhangers if you decide to watch. I did not at all regret the time I spent here, even though I sometimes had no idea what was going on or found it ridiculous when I did, as there was usually some stimulating activity or bit of scenery or detail of steampunk design to enjoy. I mean, I watched an episode of “Voyage to the Bottom of the Sea” recently, a 1960s submarine series, in which guest star John Cassavetes created a superbomb that could destroy three-quarters of the world, and almost nothing in it made any sense at all, including the presence of John Cassavetes. “Nautilus” is actually good.
No One Is in Charge at the US Copyright Office
Neither the Department of Justice nor the White House responded to requests for comment on this issue; the Library of Congress declined to comment.
Perkins and Nieves did not enter the USCO office or assume the roles they purported to fill the day they showed up. And since they left, sources within the Library of Congress tell WIRED, they have never returned, nor have they assumed any of the duties associated with the roles. These sources say that Congress is in talks with the White House to reach an agreement over these personnel disputes.
A congressional aide familiar with the situation told WIRED that Blanche, Perkins, and Nieves had not shown up for work “because they don’t have jobs to show up to.” The aide continued: “As we’ve always maintained, the President has no authority to appoint them. Robert Newlen has always been the Acting Librarian of Congress.”
If talks are happening, they remain out of public view. But Perlmutter does have some members of Congress openly on her side. “The president has no authority to remove the Register of Copyrights. That power lies solely with the Librarian of Congress. I’m relieved that the situation at the Library and Copyright Office has stabilized following the administration’s unconstitutional attempt to seize control for the executive branch. I look forward to quickly resolving this matter in a bipartisan way,” Senator Alex Padilla tells WIRED in a statement.
In the meantime, the Copyright Office is in the odd position of attempting to carry on as though it wasn’t missing its head. Immediately after Perlmutter’s dismissal, the Copyright Office paused issuing registration certificates “out of an abundance of caution,” according to USCO spokesperson Lisa Berardi Marflak, who says the pause impacted around 20,000 registrations. It resumed activities on May 29 but is now sending out registration certificates with a blank spot where Perlmutter’s signature would ordinarily be.
This unusual change has prompted discussion amongst copyright experts as to whether the registrations are now more vulnerable to legal challenges. The Copyright Office maintains that they are valid: “There is no requirement that the Register’s signature must appear on registration certificates,” says Berardi Marflak.
In a motion related to Perlmutter’s lawsuit, though, she alleges that sending out the registrations without a signature opens them up to “challenges in litigation,” something outside copyright experts have also pointed out. “It’s true the law doesn’t explicitly require a signature,” IP lawyer Rachael Dickson says. “However, the law really explicitly says that it’s the Register of Copyright determining whether the material submitted for the application is copyrightable subject matter.”
Without anyone acting as Register, Dickson thinks it would be reasonable to argue that the statutory requirements are not being met. “If you take them completely out of the equation, you have a really big problem,” she says. “Litigators who are trying to challenge a copyright registration’s validity will jump on this.”
Perlmutter’s lawyers have argued that leaving the Copyright Office without an active boss will cause dysfunction beyond the registration certificate issue, as the Register performs a variety of tasks, from advising Congress on copyright to recertifying organizations like the Mechanical Licensing Collective, the nonprofit in charge of administering royalties for streaming and download music in the United States. Since the MLC’s certification is up right now, Perlmutter would ordinarily be moving forward with recertifying the organization; as her lawsuit notes, right now, the recertification process is not moving forward.
Bloodborne Official Strategy Guide Gets Huge Discount At Amazon
The 744-page Bloodborne Complete Edition Guide is on sale for $45.50 at Amazon. Published last fall by Future Press, the official guidebook rarely is discounted by more than a few bucks. The 25% price cut is already a terrific deal, but shoppers in the Midwest and potentially elsewhere can score an additional 25% discount. With that factored in, you’ll only pay $34.12–nearly 50% off the book’s $60 MSRP. Click the coupon box under the price to get the extra discount at checkout. If you don’t see a coupon box to click, the offer isn’t available in your region.
The Complete Edition is roughly 200 pages longer than the 2017 Collector’s Edition Guide. This is because the Complete Edition also includes The Old Hunters expansion, which received its own 224-page physical guide in 2015. Along with everything you need to 100% the base game and DLC, the guide includes concept art, a deep dive into the lore of Yharnam, an interview with director Hidetaka Miyazaki, and a reference index for in-game lore.
You could use some of the money you’re saving to pick up Bloodborne’s official art book, which is on sale for $32 (was $45) at Amazon. If you already own the art book, check out the upcoming Deluxe Edition of Bloodborne’s first graphic novel for $25.
$45.50 (was $60) or $34.12 if eligible for 25% coupon
Bloodborne’s Complete Edition Guide has a detailed primer to prepare newcomers for Yharnam’s many threats. Mainline objectives are outlined and accompanied by illustrated maps with annotations to help you uncover the many secrets hidden across the interconnected regions in the base game and The Old Hunters expansion.
In addition to mandatory objectives, the guide tackles all of Bloodborne’s optional side content. Most notably, it has a thorough section on the ever-changing Chalice Dungeons to help you unlock some of the game’s best weapons and loot.
You can also use the guidebook as a reference manual, as it contains a full bestiary with in-depth analysis on the monsters who want to keep you in the nightmare. Along with the bestiary, you can reference the weapon and gear catalog to maximize your build’s potential.
The book’s final chapter, Hunter’s Appendices, helps you track your progress toward 100% by cataloging every character, shop, special enemies, and more.
The text is accompanied by work of From Software’s concept artists, making this the ultimate companion for fans of the game. Even if you don’t need a traditional “guide,” there’s enough here in terms of art and lore to make it a worthy addition to your shelf.
Beyond the walkthrough, reference catalogs, and annotated maps found in the main chapters, Bloodborne’s Complete Edition Guide comes with a “bonus chest” featuring the following:
- Exclusive interview with Hidetaka Miyazaki
- The Story of Yharnam – background info on the game world
- The Art of The Old Hunters: 20 pages of concept art
- Lore Index with important reference notes on Yharnam
Note: This guidebook is technically called Bloodborne Complete Guide 25th Anniversary Edition. The anniversary it’s referring to is for Future Press. The publisher gave the reissue of Dark Souls Trilogy Compendium the same 25th Anniversary Edition moniker.
Physical guidebooks aren’t all that common these days, and they generally double as art books and/or have a collectible component to their designs. From Software fans who like strategy guides are quite fortunate, as the studio consistently collaborates with Future Press to produce gorgeous guides for its games. Just last week, Future revealed an official guidebook for Elden Ring Nightreign. Slated for publication on September 30, Elden Ring Nightreign’s Official Companion Guide is available to preorder for $42.74 at Amazon.
Nightreign’s guide will be the fourth Elden Ring book from Future Press following its three-part Books of Knowledge series covering the original game and Shadow of the Erdtree. Books of Knowledge Volume 1 and Volume 2 had been sold out more often than not since early 2024, but both books are back in stock now. Armored Core 6’s Pilot Manual is also back in stock after being sold out since last holiday season.
From Software Art Books
Bloodborne Complete Edition Guide has a ton of official artwork from From Software artists, but for even more, you’ll want to check out Bloodborne Official Artworks, a 256-page paperback published by Udon Entertainment. The publisher has also released a pair of Elden Ring art books and three Dark Souls art books.
Bloodborne also has an official graphic novel adaptation with six volumes. You can pick up the first three volumes in box set format for $29 at Amazon. Preorders for Bloodborne’s Slipcase Set with Volumes 4-6 are available for $50 at Amazon ahead of its October 14 release. Titan Comics is also releasing a premium hardcover version of Volume 1 on September 2. Fans can preorder Bloodborne Vol. 1: The Death of Sleep Deluxe Edition for $25 at Amazon
Bloodborne Graphic Novels at Amazon
Dark Souls Graphic Novels & Manga at Amazon
From Software’s Dark Souls series also has an official graphic novel adaptation as well as a manga that debuted last year. Volume 2 of the Dark Souls: Redemption manga will be published on July 22.
Elden Ring: The Road to the Erdtree Manga
Speaking of From Software manga, Elden Ring has a manga adaptation, too, but it’s decidedly different from the game, as it’s a comedy. Volume 6 will be published on the same day as Volume 2 of Redemption. You can also preorder Volume 7, which is scheduled to hit shelves on October 28.
Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice Manga at Amazon
Sekiro: Shadows Die Twice hasn’t received as much love in terms of official books, but it did receive an excellent manga titled Sekiro Side Story: Hanbei the Undying. Published by Yen Press in 2020, Sekiro Side Story is discounted to $11 (was $15) at Amazon.
A tiny implant just helped paralyzed rats walk again—is human recovery next?
Spinal cord injuries are currently incurable with devastating effects on people’s lives, but now a trial at Waipapa Taumata Rau, University of Auckland offers hope for an effective treatment.
Spinal cord injuries shatter the signal between the brain and body, often resulting in a loss of function.”Unlike a cut on the skin, which typically heals on its own, the spinal cord does not regenerate effectively, making these injuries devastating and currently incurable,” says lead researcher Dr Bruce Harland, a senior research fellow in the School of Pharmacy at Waipapa Taumata Rau, University of Auckland.
Before birth, and to a lesser extent afterwards, naturally occurring electric fields play a vital role in early nervous system development, encouraging and guiding the growth of nerve tissue along the spinal cord. Scientists are now harnessing this same electrical guidance system in the lab.An implantable electronic device has restored movement following spinal cord injury in an animal study, raising hopes for an effective treatment for humans and even their pets.
“We developed an ultra-thin implant designed to sit directly on the spinal cord, precisely positioned over the injury site in rats,” Dr Harland says.
The device delivers a carefully controlled electrical current across the injury site. “The aim is to stimulate healing so people can recover functions lost through spinal-cord injury,” Professor Darren Svirskis, director of the CatWalk Cure Program at the University’s School of Pharmacy says.
Unlike humans, rats have a greater capacity for spontaneous recovery after spinal cord injury, which allowed researchers to compare natural healing with healing supported by electrical stimulation.
After four weeks, animals that received daily electric field treatment showed improved movement compared with those who did not.
Throughout the 12-week study, they responded more quickly to gentle touch.
“This indicates that the treatment supported recovery of both movement and sensation,” Harland says. “Just as importantly, our analysis confirmed that the treatment did not cause inflammation or other damage to the spinal cord, demonstrating that it was not only effective but also safe.”
This new study, published in Nature Communications, has come out of a partnership between the University of Auckland and Chalmers University of Technology in Sweden.
“Long term, the goal is to transform this technology into a medical device that could benefit people living with these life-changing spinal-cord injuries,” says Professor Maria Asplund of Chalmers University of Technology.
“This study offers an exciting proof of concept showing that electric field treatment can support recovery after spinal cord injury,” says doctoral student Lukas Matter, also from Chalmers University.
The next step is to explore how different doses, including the strength, frequency, and duration of the treatment, affect recovery, to discover the most effective recipe for spinal-cord repair.
Companies Act, M&A, and IBC’
Master corporate law from the ground up (Companies Act, M&A, IBC, FEMA, and more), and become job ready in just 5 months!
Earn 2 Certificates: One Completion Certificate from Lawctopus Law School and One Internship Project Certificate from our Partner Law Firm.
30+ live sessions (on weekdays from 7 PM to 8:30 PM), 10+ hours of recorded lectures, 100+ pages of reading resources, 7 practical assignments with personalised feedback, 3 practical presentations/drafting activities, and lifetime access to the entire course material.
Register now and avail the exclusive launch price offer!
About the Course
Corporate law is vast, and it can take years to figure out how it all fits together. This course cuts through the confusion and gives you a solid foundation quickly, clearly, and practically. Let’s make you job-ready for top law firms and in-house legal teams!
Month 1 and 2: We will start this course with Companies Law, where you’ll learn how companies are formed, governed, and dissolved. From incorporation, MOA, AOA, board meetings, and resolutions to NCLT procedures and winding-up, we will cover it all.
You’ll also gain hands-on experience in drafting essential legal documents like Employment agreements, NDAs, Shareholders’ Agreements, Share Purchase Agreements, etc.
Through practical assignments and real-world exercises, you will start drafting the kinds of documents and applications that show up on real desks in law firms and corporate offices.
Month 3 and 4: We will then move to Mergers & Acquisitions (M&A), where you will understand the full deal lifecycle including types of mergers, due diligence, execution of term sheets, key agreements like JV, Business Transfer Agreement, Asset Transfer Agreement, etc, nuances of private equity, venture capital, FEMA regime, SEBI regulations, etc.
You’ll also work on practical assignments like drafting a term sheet and take part in activities designed to simulate real M&A scenarios so that you can confidently step into the world of deal-making and transactional law.
Month 5: The course will then dive deep into the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC), where you’ll learn the basics and the complete CIRP process, liquidation, cross-border insolvency, drafting NCLT applications, landmark judgments, recent amendments, etc.
Also, just like the other modules, you won’t just learn theory, you’ll work on practical assignments and activities such as drafting NCLT applications, preparing minutes of CoC meetings, and more, so that you are well-prepared to take on IBC work from day one.
To top it all off, you will also get an internship project from our partner corporate law firm, and upon completion, you will receive an Internship Project Certificate by the firm, giving your CV a strong boost!
In short, this is a maximum-benefit, power-packed course that gives you everything you need to become job ready!
Course Fee
Rs. 50,000 – Rs. 19,999 [Launching Price]
Structure of this Course
The course begins with a live ‘Orientation Session,’ which explains how to benefit from it fully, and includes 30+ live sessions throughout!
Month 1 and 2: Company Law and Corporate Governance
Module 1: Basics of Company Law
- Incorporation of Companies
- Types of Companies and its legal framework
- Private limited vs. Public limited
- Section 8 company vs. Trust vs. Society
- Key provisions under the Companies Act, 2013 for startups
Module 2: Drafting of MOA and AOA
- Basics of MOA and AOA
- How to draft an MOA?
- How to draft an AOA?
Module 3: Prospectus and Securities Allotment
- Prospectus- Types of Prospectus & Preparation of Prospectus
- Legal Framework for Securities Issuance and Allotment
Module 4: Operations of a company
- Appointment of directors
- Roles and powers of Members, Shareholders, Promoters and Directors
- Directors’ report and Disqualification of directors
- How to draft an Employment Agreement?
Module 5: Governance of companies
- General Meetings
- Board Composition and Powers of the Board
- Board meetings and resolutions
- Notice, quorum, voting, minutes
Module 6: Investment and Debt
- What are debt, equity, and hybrid models?
- Debt v. equity financing
- FEMA Compliance
- FDI Regulations
- SEBI-related and sectoral filings
- How to draft and negotiate a Shareholders Agreement?
- Private investment in public equity transactions
Module 7: Capital Markets and Shares
- Shares and share capital
- Transfer of shares
- Buyback of shares
Module 8: Accounts and Auditors
- Preparation and filing of financial statements
- Role of auditors
- Audit committee and their responsibilities
- Auditor’s Report and CARO
Module 9: Corporate Social Responsibility
- What is CSR?
- CSR under the Companies Act, 2013
- Taxation on CSR activities
Module 10: NCLT and its procedures
- What is NCLT and what are its powers?
- Who can appear?
- How to draft a Petition before NCLT?
- Different kinds of petitions to be filed before the NCLT
- Procedure followed in NCLT (start to end)
Module 11: Winding up of a Company
- What is winding up of a company?
- Voluntary winding up of companies
- Compulsory winding up of companies
Module 12: ESG Reporting and Corporate Ethics, Negotiations and Valuations
- Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) Reporting
- Key clauses in investment agreements
- Term sheet and cap table analysis
- Valuation methods and principles
- Role of ESG (Environmental, Social, and Governance) in corporate financing
Module 13: Startup Legal Framework
- Setting up a startup: Key legal considerations
- Startup India initiative and benefits
- Intellectual Property for startups
- Employee Stock Option Plans (ESOPs)
Module 14: Compliance and Risk Management
- Annual compliance checklist under the Companies Act
- Risk management framework for companies
- Compliance reporting and penalties
- Importance of internal audits and controls
Module 15: Employment Laws and Workforce Management
- Key employment laws applicable to companies
- Drafting employment and confidentiality agreements
- Handling workplace disputes and grievances
Assignments & Activity
- Assignment 1: Draft a Memorandum of Association for a fictitious company, with compliance notes on the Companies Act, 2013
- Assignment 2: Draft a Petition to be filed before the NCLT based on the problem given.
- Practical Presentation Activity
Month 3 and 4: Mergers and Acquisitions, Private Equity and Venture Capital
Module 16: Fundamentals of Mergers and Acquisitions (M&A)
- Introduction to Mergers and Acquisitions
- Classification: Types of M&A
- Structuring the Deal: Choosing the Right Model
- Key Valuation Techniques
- Legal Ecosystem and Procedural Flow
- Overview of Competition Commission of India (CCI) Regulations and Guidelines
- Tax Implications in an M&A Scenario
- Tactics against hostile takeovers
Module 17: Who’s Who in an M&A Deal
- The acquirer and the acquiree, the integrator, the integrated: understanding founders, promoters, and directors
- Role of Investment Bankers, Business Brokers, Lawyers, and CAs
- Becoming the lawyer that business people want
Module 18: Blueprint of a Deal: From Agreement to Approval
- Term Sheet / Letter of Intent (LOI)
- Business Transfer Agreement (BTA) and Asset Transfer Agreement (ATA)
- Shareholders’ Agreement (SHA)
- Share Purchase and Share Subscription Agreement (SPSA)
Module 19 Section 230-240 of the Companies Act, 2013
Compromises, Arrangements, and Amalgamations
Module 20: Timeline and Phases in M&A Execution
- Strategic Planning and Target Evaluation
- Valuation of the Target Company
- Methods: Asset-based, Earnings-based, Market-based valuations.
Module 21: Understanding Due Diligence (DD)
- What is Due Diligence (DD) and why is it important
- Documents which require ‘due diligence’
- Studying a sample DD report
Module 22: Private Equity (PE) and Venture Capital (VC) in M&A
- Understanding PE/VC funding in M&A
- Structuring PE/VC investments
- Key documents in a typical PE/VC deal
- Stages where documentation plays a critical role
- Term Sheets and MoUs
- Share Subscription Agreements (SSA) and Shareholders’ Agreements (SHA)
- Key Clauses in PE/VC Contracts (Drag-Along and Tag-Along Rights, Liquidation Preferences, Anti-Dilution Protections [Full Ratchet, Weighted Average], Pre-emptive Rights and Right of First Refusal (ROFR)]
- Investor Rights and Protective Provisions
- Exit Strategies in Documentation
- Tax and Regulatory Clauses
Module 23: Peeling Back the Layers: Inside Due Diligence
- Core Sections of a Comprehensive Due Diligence Report
- Reviewing Key Documents (Board and shareholder meeting minutes, Material contracts: Leases, JVs, vendor/supplier agreements, Financing agreements, loan documents, charge filings, Insurance policies)
Module 24: Companies Act, 2013: Provisions Relevant to M&A
- Rules on Preferential Allotment and Share Transfers
- Legal Framework for Mergers under the Companies Act
- Share transfer: rules and procedures
- Deemed Public Companies
- Landmark case laws on the subject
Module 25: How to draft Important Agreements in M&A
- Key clauses in a Term Sheet and MOU
- Key clauses in a Shareholders Agreement (SHA)
- Important clauses in a Share Purchase and Share Subscription Agreement (SPSA)
- Key clauses in a Business Transfer Agreement (BTA) and Asset Transfer Agreement (ATA)
- Key clauses in a Joint Venture Agreement
- Negotiation of transaction documents in an M&A deal
Module 26: SEBI Regulations for Listed Companies
- Understanding the SEBI Takeover Code: Key triggers, open offer process, and disclosures
- Complying with SEBI LODR: Listing obligations, corporate governance, and reporting requirements
- Navigating SEBI ICDR: Practical steps for public issues, rights issues, and preferential allotments
- Delisting regulations: Voluntary and compulsory delisting in the context of M&A
- Insider trading concerns: Compliance with SEBI (Prohibition of Insider Trading) Regulations during deal negotiation and execution
Module 27: Crossing Frontiers: FEMA Compliance in Global M&A
- FDI and ODI regulations applicable to cross-border M&A under FEMA
- Automatic vs. Government approval routes for inbound and outbound investments
- Valuation norms and pricing guidelines for cross-border share transfers
- Regulatory filings: FC-GPR, FC-TRS, ODI Form, and Annual Performance Report
- FEMA implications of deal structures: share purchase, asset purchase, and share swaps
- Interaction of FEMA with Companies Act, Income Tax Act, and Competition Act in M&A deals
- Recent Updates and Case Studies [RBI circulars impacting cross-border M&A, Notable enforcement actions and compliance pitfalls, Key takeaways from real-life deal structures]
Module 28: E-commerce, Technology Law and Intellectual Property Rights
- Data protection and privacy regulations under the IT Act
- Intermediary liabilities and compliance norms
- Competition law considerations for digital platforms
- Importance of IPR for startups
- Trademark, copyright, and patent protection
- Licensing and franchising laws
Module 29: Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) in Deal-Making
- Purpose and Structure of SPVs
- Consortium Structures in Investment Deals
- Types of Investment Entities
- Understanding Exit Clauses
- Governance and Control Mechanisms
Module 30: Navigating Post-Merger Integration
- Why Integration Strategy is Critical
- Common Roadblocks in Merging Operations and Cultures
- Managing Disputes Post-Deal Closure
Module 31: Landmark M&A Deals in India
- International Trends Shaping M&A
- Complexities in Cross-Border M&A Transactions
- Political and Economic Influences on M&A Markets
- Case Studies of High-Profile M&A in India
Module 32: Ethics in Negotiations
- Maintaining Transparency and Honest Disclosures
- Role of Regulators
- Prevention of Insider Trading
- Ensuring Equitable Treatment of Stakeholders
- Promoting Social and Cultural Sensitivity in Business Combinations
Module 33: Careers in M&A
- Getting Started in M&A as a Law Student
- Strategic Guidance for Young Professionals (0–5 years)
- Recommended Tools, Platforms, and Resources for Staying Updated
Assignments & Activity
- Assignment 1: Draft an M&A Term Sheet focusing on conditions precedent and indemnity clauses.
- Assignment 2: Detail the purpose and scope of the joint venture between fictitious companies in light of the contributions by each party, and the governance structure.
- Assignment 3: Prepare a Due Diligence Report
- Practical Presentation Activity
Month 5: Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code (IBC)
Module 34: Introduction to insolvency and bankruptcy law in India
- Meaning of insolvency and bankruptcy
- Law existing prior to the IBC, 2016
- Introduction to the advent of IBC, 2016
- Formation of the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Board of India (IBBI)
- Jurisdiction of NCLT
Module 35: Corporate insolvency resolution process (CIRP)
- Meaning, introduction and applicability
- Initiation of CIRP – Financial Creditor, Operational Creditor or by Corporate Debtor
- Step-by-step process and effects once CIRP commences
- Waterfall mechanism under Section 53 of IBC and the concept of the Committee of Creditors
- Concept of Interim Resolution Professional (IRP) and Resolution Professional (RP), rights, duties and powers of IRP and RP
- Concept of moratorium
- Prescribed timelines
- Resolution plan and persons eligible to submit resolution plans
- Pre-packaged insolvency resolution process
- Fast–track insolvency resolution process and its applicability
- Application for the avoidance of different kinds of transactions by RP
- Insolvency resolution process of personal guarantors
Module 36: Liquidation and voluntary liquidation
- Meaning and introduction
- Initiation of liquidation and voluntary liquidation
- Appointment of liquidator
- Step-by-step process
- Prescribed timelines
Module 37: Cross-Border Insolvency
- Overview of cross-border insolvency under the IBC framework.
- UNCITRAL Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency.
- Legal challenges and framework for recognition of foreign insolvency proceedings.
- Coordination Between Domestic and Foreign Courts.
- Group Insolvency in a Cross-Border Context.
Module 38. List of Landmark decisions on IBC, 2016
- Mobilox Innovations Pvt Ltd vs Kirusa Software Pvt Ltd
- Innoventive Industries Ltd vs ICICI Bank
- Pioneer Urban Land and Infrastructure Ltd v Union of India
- Swiss Ribbons vs Union of India
Module 39: Recent Amendments to the IBC, 2016
- Key highlights of the recent amendments.
- Impact of amendments on creditors and resolution applicants.
- Industry-specific insolvency provisions.
Module 40: Interplay of IBC with Other Laws
- Interaction of IBC with the Companies Act, 2013.
- Tax implications during insolvency and resolution.
- Interface of IBC with SEBI, FEMA, and labour laws.
- White Collar Crimes
- Judicial Perspectives on the Interplay of Laws.
Module 41: Economic Impact of IBC on Businesses
- Role of IBC in reviving stressed assets.
- Contribution of IBC to economic growth.
- Challenges faced by MSMEs under IBC.
Module 42: Emerging Trends and Issues in Insolvency
- Impact of technology in insolvency resolution (e.g., digital filings).
- ESG considerations in insolvency proceedings.
- Rising trends in distressed asset sales.
Short Reading Module 43: Personal Guarantors
Assignments & Activity
- Assignment 1: Draft an application to be filed under Section 7 of IBC, 2016, in the format prescribed under IBC, 2016.
- Assignment 2: Analyze the role of a Resolution Plan for a fictitious company undergoing insolvency.
- Practical Activity: Draft minutes of the meeting of the committee of creditors.
8 Unique Elements of the Online Course
| First | Well-researched, practical & detailed reading resources |
| Second | Landmark judgment compilations and PPTs |
| Third | 35+ Live Sessions (on weekdays from 7 PM to 8:30 PM) and recordings of all the live sessions |
| Fourth | Recorded lectures by Industry Experts |
| Fifth | Double Benefit: Certificate from Lawctopus Law School + Partner Law Firm |
| Sixth | 7 Practical Assignments with personalised written feedback to each learner |
| Seventh | 3 practical drafting activity classes |
| Eighth | Discussion Portal for resolving your queries |
How will this Course help you?
Accelerate Your Corporate Law Career in Just 6 Months!
- Law students will gain expertise in corporate law and become law-firm ready.
- All the learners will do a project with Ever Trust Legal, a renowned law firm, and earn a prestigious project certificate.
- Lawyers (0-4 Years of experience) can double their earning potential with enhanced practical skills.
- Build strong industry connections and generate more income.
- Learn from experienced law firm lawyers guiding you at every step.
- What takes lawyers 3-4 years to learn, you’ll master in just 6 months!
- Companies Act, M&A, FEMA, IBC, and more will be taught in great detail!
Who can Enroll for this Course?
- Law students
- Law firm Associates
- Young lawyers wanting to excel in the corporate field
- Company Secretaries
- Corporate Law Enthusiasts
- Academicians wanting to include the practical angle
Course Developers and Faculty of this Course
Soumya Chaturvedi; Ex Associate, Indus Law, Delhi; Learning Manager, Lawctopus Law School
Soumya Chaturvedi graduated from NLU Odisha in 2021.
In college she interned with the best of the law firms like Lakshmikumaran and Sridharan, DSK Legal, L&L Partners, and Atlas Law Partners.
She has worked at IndusLaw, New Delhi in the Capital Markets team as an associate for the last 3 years.
She recently joined Lawctopus Law School as a Learning Manager (Corporate Vertical).
Shashank Sardesai, Co-Founder EverTrust Legal, Company Secretary
- Founder, EverTrust Legal, a Pune-based law firm
- Counsel, Serious Fraud Investigation Office (SFIO)
- Ex-Lawyer, HSA Advocates and Khaitan Legal Advocates
- Qualified Company Secretary professional
- Diploma in International Business Laws from Symbiosis Law School, Pune (2014)
Shashank Sardesai has a strong focus on corporate insolvency resolution processes, liquidation proceedings, and advising creditors and resolution professionals. He regularly handles complex IBC matters before the NCLT and NCLAT.
Aayush Aggarwal, Partner, C Cube Advisors, Company Secretary
- Partner, C Cube Advisors LLP
- Qualified Company Secretary
- LLM in Business Law
- Business networking expert
Aayush Aggarwal completed his LL.B. from Dr. B. R. Ambedkar University, Agra and LLM in Business Law from Kurukshetra University. He began his professional journey as an Associate at RRA Legal, where he built a strong foundation in corporate and tax law.
He currently runs his law firm, which focuses on IP and General Corporate matters.
Archita Mohapatra is a seasoned employment law expert currently serving as a Senior Associate at Trilegal, one of India’s leading law firms.
She specializes in advising multinational corporations on a wide range of labour and employment matters, including workforce restructuring, compensation and benefits, employee investigations, and compliance with Indian labour laws.
Archita began her legal career at Nishith Desai Associates and later pursued an LL.M. in Labour Law and Employment Relations at Tilburg University in the Netherlands.
Her academic and professional excellence has been recognized by The Legal 500, which named her a Rising Star in Labour & Employment Law for three consecutive years (2021–2023).
Archita has also contributed scholarly work to the field, including a publication in the European Labour Law Journal.
Gourav Mohanty, Independent Litigator, Ex Senior Associate, Shardul Amarchand Mangaldas
- Independent Litigator
- Ex Senior Associate, Shardul Amarchand Mangaldas & Co (SAM)
- Published in reputed journals of NLU Jodhpur and NALSAR Hyderabad, and has contributed articles to The Wire, IndiaCorpLaw
- Symbiosis Law School Pune graduate; DAAD Germany scholarship holder
During law school, he was awarded the Gold Medal for Academic Excellence and the DAAD-Germany Scholarship. He served as the Editor of the Symbiosis Law School Journal and was a decorated mooter.
Meghmala Mukherjee, Assistant Professor, JGLS, BCL from Oxford University
- Assistant Dean; Fellow, Khaitan & Co. Centre for Business Law and Research, JGLS
- Ex Associate/Senior Associate: Verist Law; Shardul Amarchand Mangaldas & Co. (SAM); Lakshmikumaran and Sridharan
- BCL, University of Oxford
- NLU Odisha 2018 Graduate (Gold Medallist)
Ms. Meghmala Mukherjee is an Assistant Professor of Legal Practice at JGLS. Her primary focus areas are company law, corporate finance law, corporate governance and securities law.
She graduated from NLUO with 7 gold medals and received the university scholarship for 4 consecutive years. She has also read the BCL at the University of Oxford and was awarded the HSA Advocates Scholarship.
Jaibatruka Mohanta, Research Fellow, NLSIU Bangalore
- Research Fellow, CEERA, NLSIU Bangalore
- B.L.S. LL.B. from SVKM’s Pravin Gandhi College of Law, University of Mumbai
- Consultant, Lawctopus Law School
Mr. Mohanta began his professional journey as a Research Fellow at CEERA, NLSIU Bangalore, where he has been contributing to high-impact policy research and corporate litigation matters. His work spans regulatory and compliance issues, with a growing specialization in matters under the Companies Act and appearances before forums such as the NCLT.
Course Fee
Rs. 50,000 – Rs. 19,999 [Launching Price]
Add-on Benefits
- Project Certificate from our partner corporate law firm
- Completion certificates are issued by Lawctopus Law School after completing the course.
- Merit certificates are awarded to the best-performing learners.
- Access of webinars on contract drafting, contract lifecycle management, etc., are given for free
- Lifetime access to all course materials
- LLS alumni groups are available for exclusive internship/job notifications and discounts on courses/workshops.
Money Back Guarantee
In case you do the course sincerely and are still dissatisfied with it, we’ll refund you 100% of the money you invested; no questions asked. We are that confident in our course!
What does ‘sincerely’ mean? It means that you attend at least 75% of the live classes and complete the compulsory assignments successfully. If you still don’t think the course was worth the money, we’ll refund the full amount, no questions asked!
Just email us at [email protected], and the refund will be issued within 7-10 working days.
Questions?
If you have any queries regarding the course, please send an email to [email protected], and we will get back to you within 24 hours!
8 Tennis shoes for women to be game-ready: Top picks for every court queen to ace the sport | Health
Tennis isn’t just a sport, it’s a statement. So if you’re grinding it out on clay, cruising across hard courts, or just love the clean athletic look, the right tennis shoes make all the difference.
These 8 women’s tennis shoes from brands like ASICS, adidas, Puma, and ATHHLOS bring you everything: grip, bounce, stability, and style. Whether you’re chasing match point or comfort on the move, these kicks ace both performance and fashion.
Top 8 tennis shoes for women:
Experience explosive speed with the ASICS Solution Speed FF 3 — engineered for elite women players who want nothing slowing them down. With cushioning and a lightweight, low-profile design, this shoe delivers incredible bounce and responsiveness. The updated technology enhances side-to-side movement, making it ideal for aggressive baseliners. Breathable mesh keeps you dry even when matches heat up.
The ASICS GEL-Dedicate 8 offers a dependable, cushioned ride perfect for both beginners and casual players. It features the signature GEL™ technology in the forefoot for shock absorption and a stable TRUSSTIC™ system in the midsole for controlled footwork. A tough, wrap-around outsole gives extra grip on all surfaces. It’s supportive, lightweight, and built to last; everything you want in a starter court shoe.
This shoe brings Puma’s iconic street-style edge to the tennis court. The NOVA Court is built with cushioned EVA midsoles and a grippy outsole for quick pivots and lunges. Designed with a sleek silhouette and bold branding, it balances performance with aesthetic flair. If you’re hitting backhands or hitting up brunch after practice, this shoe holds its own.
This adidas sneaker isn’t just court-ready — it’s made to conquer multiple terrains. The durable rubber outsole offers excellent traction, while the cushioned insole provides all-day comfort whether you’re sprinting after shots or running errands. A breathable upper ensures ventilation, and the minimalist design transitions seamlessly into your everyday wardrobe.
Crafted for intermediate players, the Game FF tennis shoe combines stability and cushioning with a flexible feel. Its seamless upper reduces friction, while the rearfoot GEL™ technology absorbs impact with every sprint and slide. The Game FF’s rubber outsole offers versatile grip across different court types, making it your all-round match-day essential.
With the NOVA Smash, Puma delivers playful style wrapped in performance. This tennis shoe features plush cushioning and a flexible sole that supports natural foot movement, while the vibrant design keeps your look fresh. The padded collar adds comfort for extended play and the breathable construction keeps feet cool.
If you’re looking for a court companion that won’t weigh you down, the ASICS Court Slide 4 is your match. Lightweight yet supportive, it features a durable upper and flexible rubber sole that adapts to your movement. The classic lace-up style keeps things simple while ensuring a snug fit during quick rallies.
Designed for multi-sport functionality, these all-rounders by ATHHLOS are ideal for tennis, badminton, gym sessions, or just everyday comfort. The soft inner lining, shock-absorbent soles, and stylish look make it a versatile pick for active women. The anti-skid outsole ensures you stay grounded—even when the game gets intense.
If you’re a weekend warrior, a club regular, or just into the sporty aesthetic, these tennis shoes are your ticket to style and speed. Comfort, grip, bounce, and beauty; you’ll find it all here.
Similar stories for you:
8 Cycling shoes that go the extra mile: Clip, ride and conquer any path
5 sport shoes for kids at up to 50% off on Amazon; Top options for your little one’s big adventures
₹1000: Top 8 kicks to add a spring in your step”>Walking shoes for women under ₹1000: Top 8 kicks to add a spring in your step
8 Tennis shoes for women to be game-ready: Top picks for every court queen: FAQs
- Can I wear tennis shoes casually?
Yes! Most tennis shoes today double up beautifully for athleisure styling.
- How do I clean tennis shoes?
Wipe with a damp cloth or hand wash with mild soap. Avoid machine washing if they’re performance-grade.
- Which one is best for beginners?
ASICS Gel-Dedicate 8 or Court Slide 4 are both beginner-friendly.
- Are these good for other sports?
Some are multi-purpose (like ATHHLOS), but tennis-specific shoes offer optimal lateral support.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, with respect to the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
Congress should reconsider breaking up PBMs, experts say
Bipartisan policies in Congress meant to lower drug costs by targeting middlemen in the pharmaceutical supply chain are likely to run up against a fundamental issue: the three major pharmacy benefit managers’ chokehold on the U.S. drug market, experts said during a drug pricing transparency forum in Washington, D.C. this week.
Influential lawmakers on both sides of the aisle have gotten behind proposals to force more transparency in the sector, delink PBM compensation from the rebates they negotiate with drugmakers, and ban PBMs from profiting off of the difference between what they charge payers and reimburse pharmacies for a drug.
But the so-called “Big Three” PBMs — CVS’ Caremark, Cigna’s Express Scripts and UnitedHealth’s Optum Rx — currently hold almost complete control over how patients access medications and the cost of those drugs.
Going after their business practices without changing that reality won’t help, experts said Wednesday during the Transparency is Rising event hosted by a coalition of small upstart PBMs.
“The solution to this can’t be just to ban existing practices. It has to be to remove the choke points that people have over particular parts of the supply chain,” said Reed Showalter, a former advisor on competition to the White House during the Biden administration and attorney with the Federal Trade Commission.
The PBM ‘pivot’ problem
Caremark, Express Scripts and Optum Rx jointly control 80% of U.S. prescriptions. The companies are all subsidiaries of massive healthcare corporations that also own a major national health insurer and pharmacy business, giving them the ability to influence multiple stages of a drug’s journey from a manufacturer to a patient — and a significant profit motivation to do so, according to experts.
Caremark, Express Scripts and Optum Rx say they use their market power to drive down drug prices for their payer clients and the members they serve.
But that power also allows the Big Three to sidestep past efforts from Washington and the states to affect their business model, Antonio Ciaccia, the president of consultancy 3 Axis Advisors, said.
Ciaccia cited an example from the state of Ohio, which banned spread pricing in its Medicaid program in 2018 after discovering it overpaid PBMs by nearly $225 million in one year due to the practice.
But Ohio didn’t end up saving any money, because the PBMs began paying pharmacies beyond the contractually agreed price and clawing back the difference after the fact, he said.
“What we’re talking about is essentially this: the nimbleness of the industry to pivot around policy reforms,” Ciaccia said.
Instead of targeting specific business practices, Congress and antitrust regulators should instead prioritize weakening the Big Three’s control by reversing years of unchecked integration that have allowed PBMs to find these opportunities for arbitrage, speakers said.
“I’m skeptical when you don’t touch the underlying power of the Big Three PBMs, when they still cover 100 million lives each, when they still have influence over formularies, they’re going to find new avenues to pad their profits,” said Alejandro Molina, a policy advisor for the White House during the Biden administration.
Washington could follow Arkansas’ lead, Molina suggested. In April, the state passed a law preventing PBMs from owning pharmacies in a bid to protect independent pharmacies.
The law, which would force companies like CVS that own both PBMs and pharmacies to divest one or the other, was quickly met with criticism and legal challenges from the PBM industry.
Still, bills with similar provisions were recently introduced in Vermont, Texas and New York, according to the National Community Pharmacists Association.
Some federal lawmakers also support breaking up PBMs. In December, a bipartisan group of legislators introduced a bill that would force PBMs to sell their pharmacy businesses.
There’s a unique window for concrete reform now, given Congress’ attention on the issue and interest from the FTC and the Department of Justice in cracking down on some of the Big Three’s most egregious actions, speakers said.
The FTC, for example, is currently suing Caremark, Express Scripts and Optum Rx for allegedly inflating the cost of insulin, while the DOJ is reportedly investigating UnitedHealth over a variety of antitrust concerns.
“I think there’s a lot of opportunities,” said Charlie Katebi, the deputy director for health at the conservative America First Policy Institute. “There are so many issues where Republicans and Democrats — on many important issues — see things with totally different realities. That is not the case right now.”
Meaningful PBM reform at the federal level is unlikely in the near term. The House included a handful of PBM policies in the GOP reconciliation megabill currently being hammered out on the Hill, but the Senate stripped them out in its version earlier this month.
That doesn’t mean the Senate isn’t on board, Conor Sheehey, a director at Leavitt Partners, said.
It’s just more likely that legislators will work to pass PBM reform in appropriations legislation closer to the end of this year, where healthcare policies are normally enacted, according to Sheehey, who previously worked as a senior health policy advisor to Sen. Mike Crapo, R-Id., the chair of the Senate Finance Committee.
Tackling rebates, transparency
Some policies being thrown around in Washington have merit even if they don’t break up the oliogopy enjoyed by the Big Three PBMs, according to the panelists. For example, the Trump administration has signaled interest in reforming rebates that PBMs negotiate with pharmaceutical companies in exchange for including their drugs on plan formularies.
During the first Trump administration, regulators attempted to require PBMs and insurers to pass through all rebates in Medicare’s prescription drug benefit to patients, but that rule has yet to be implemented.
PBMs should voluntarily find ways to move away from the rebate “kickback” system, lest the federal government do it for them, CMS Administrator Dr. Mehmet Oz said Tuesday, also speaking at the Transparency is Rising event.
Going after rebates won’t solve systemic issues with the market for prescription drugs, experts cautioned. The Big Three say they already pass through the vast majority, if not all, of those savings through to their clients.
And reabtes no longer make up the majority of PBM profits, according to research. Instead, manufacturer fees and specialty pharmacy dispensing are making up more and more of PBMs’ bottom lines.
“As long as the Big Three PBMs have the covered lives of their insured parents they are going to find a way to influence formularies, reimbursements, networks in whatever configuration they want,” Molina said. ”I just feel like we are 10 years behind, and that PBMs are already creating new corporate structures, new revenue sources that we’re going to have to regulate in 10 years. So until we tackle the upstream power of insurers and the Big Three PBMs and vertical integration, we’re not really solving any structural issues.”
But transitioning away from a compensation stream directly tied to drug prices may be good in the long run, given the rebating system continues to function in perverse ways, according to Sheehey.
For example, when one corporate parent owns both the PBM and the payer, they do get to retain profit from rebates even if their PBM is ostensibly passing it through.
“This is no disrespect to CVS Health, but when they’re like, ‘Oh, look, Caremark’s not getting a really fat portion of that rebate revenue.’ But then their parent company is? This is a company that has one ticker on all the markets,” Sheehey said.
In the absence of a top-down overhaul, PBM transparency reform to shine more light on contracting practices, pharmacy fees and other financial arrangements is a good starting point to make the market and policymakers more informed, panelists said.
That’s something the CMS is moving toward as well, with Oz saying the agency could issue rules forcing payers to share more information on their drug transactions as soon as this year.
But as Washington appears poised to step into the fray, it’s imperative lawmakers and regulators think about the root problem to avoid creating new ones, according to the panelists. For example, experts said regulatory scrutiny is one reason why major PBMs have spun off affiliated companies like rebate aggregators that live offshore, adding more complexity into the prescription drug supply chain.
“We need to realign incentives more structurally, and in any efforts to change transparency we need to be very careful that we are not basically emboldening the next layer of opacity, because the unfairness hides in the opacity of the system,” said Showalter.
10 Warren Buffett Quotes for Better Investing
Warren Buffett is obviously incredibly successful.
He’s probably the most successful investor of modern times, having built his wealth long-term to over US $136 billion, making him one of the richest men in America.
Let’s check out 10 intelligent and inspiring lessons and quotes on investing from one of the world’s wealthiest people.
1. One of his most famous quotes
“Be fearful when others are greedy and be greedy when others are fearful.”
3. It’s Usually Best to Just Say “No”
“The difference between successful people and really successful people is that really successful people say no to almost everything.”
5. Be careful who you listen to:
Buffet said: “A public opinion poll is no substitution for thought.”
7. Great Investors Don’t Diversify
“Diversification is protection against ignorance. It makes little sense if you know what you are doing.”
9. Spend time on your personal development
“The most important investment you can make is in yourself.”
How I Made It Brutally Honest
Sometimes, it can feel like ChatGPT is trying to be your biggest cheerleader rather than offering balanced opinions. While sometimes nice, this can cause problems when trying to plan something or trying to get an unbiased response. To combat this, I made ChatGPT as brutally honest as possible.
6
Speaking to ChatGPT Like I Would to a Friend
When I first started using ChatGPT, I talked to the tool like it was a robot. And while it technically is, I unsurprisingly got robotic responses. Unfortunately, this all too often meant the replies were either not honest enough or what I would call “harmless but dull”.
More recent ChatGPT iterations have become much better at speaking more like human beings. For example, the lack of robotic responses in GPT-4o makes ChatGPT Plus very much worth subscribing to.
Now, I type in ChatGPT like I would when texting someone I know. Because of this, my responses are more personalized and honest.
5
Be Direct: Tell ChatGPT to be as Honest as Possible
In my early days of using ChatGPT, I thought simply typing a prompt would result in my desired responses. However, I quickly discovered this wasn’t true. Rather than relying on ChatGPT to completely understand the context I wanted (without saying), I decided to be more specific in my prompts.
If I want an unbiased answer, I’ll simply tell ChatGPT to be as honest as possible. From personal experience, this has been one of the various prompting tricks that actually work. I’m much more likely to get more balanced answers, and if I need more of an overview, I’ll ask the software to provide a full pros and cons list.
Once I’ve put these instructions into the chat (or project), I’m more likely to get honest responses for future parts of the conversation. Sometimes, the memory updates; if it does, I re-enter the prompt.
4
Asking ChatGPT for Conflicting Opinions
I’ve noticed that if I use ChatGPT too much without it disagreeing with me, the tool becomes more detrimental than beneficial. If I’m having a conversation and discussing ideas, the constant agreement also starts to wear on me. While the software has sometimes called me out without needing anything to, I often have to enter the prompt myself.
Besides asking the tool to disagree with me so I don’t become too full of myself, I’ll also ask for conflicting opinions when I’m debating a certain decision. For example, this tactic works really well when I’m thinking about whether to add a new digital tool to my life or keep my toolkit streamlined.
Understanding when ChatGPT is being too agreeable and taking action when needed is one way I stop AI chatbots from agreeing with me all the time.
3
Telling ChatGPT to Go Into “Roast Mode”
I first realized ChatGPT could be quite funny when asking the software for some hot takes. Since then, some of the responses it has given me have been… interesting, to say the least. Telling the software to go into Roast Mode often gives me some brutally honest (and somewhat edgy) results, which makes using the tool more interesting.
Most of the time, ChatGPT goes into Roast Mode if I give a prompt with a brutally honest opinion. This particularly works in projects where I’ve done this before (by the way, Projects is the most underrated ChatGPT feature). The app has more context from other conversations when I use this version.
Sometimes, the software updates its memory and doesn’t give the responses I want. When it does this, I just provide the instructions on how to enter Roast Mode.
2
Asking ChatGPT to Play the Role of an Expert
While I sometimes need to explicitly tell ChatGPT to be more honest, I don’t always have to resort to this. Sometimes, telling the software to play the role of an expert is good enough.
I’ll often tell ChatGPT to be an expert when asking for help with planning my goals. For example, if I were trying to put together a gym routine, I may tell the tool to pretend it’s a personal trainer or nutritionist.
Asking ChatGPT to be an expert is generally the best way to get better prompts.
1
Telling ChatGPT to Disagree With Me in Instructions
While ChatGPT is good with conflicting opinions when asked, it sometimes still agrees with me (or gives both sides of the story). So, when I’m looking for thoughts from the other side, I’ll ask ChatGPT to disagree with me. Doing so is much easier than having a discussion on social media since it tends not to resort to insults.
I’ll sometimes put this instruction in projects, but on other occasions, it’ll just go in the prompt. Occasionally, I will play devil’s advocate and continue asking conflicting questions—but in other instances, I’ll just try and get a more detailed answer.
While ChatGPT can seem like a robotic golden retriever that wants to please, you can make the tool more honest. It’ll sometimes go full-on Roast Mode, but on other occasions, you can get respectful disagreeing responses. Using each of these has made the app more fun to use and also improved the quality of each response I get.
Shaolin's soft kungfu: Grace beyond limits
Soft kungfu is a distinctive practice in Shaolin’s martial arts heritage. Rooted in exceptional suppleness, it relies on limber joints and muscles to achieve motion that’s both graceful and powerful. Practitioners bend their limbs at unorthodox angles, telescope their frames to slide through narrow rings and execute maneuvers that transcend normal physical boundaries.
‘Squid Game’ finale: The wealthy win and nice guys finish last
Rich people suck.
The message was loud and clear when Netflix‘s Korean thriller “Squid Game” arrived in 2021. Imagining wealth and class disparity at the heart of a high-stakes competition, it featured cash-strapped contestants playing a series of children’s games to the death while uber-wealthy spectators bet on their odds of survival. The show’s masked elites watched the carnage from a luxe, concealed spectator box, chomping on cigars and chortling as player after player met a gruesome death. The Korean-language show became the streamer’s most watched series ever.
Comeuppance for the hideously affluent seemed imminent and likely at the hands of protagonist Seong Gi-hun (Lee Jung-jae). The winner of Season 1’s “Squid Game” deserved vengeance after surviving a series of horrific scenarios — a hopscotch-type match played on a fragile glass bridge above a deadly chasm, a red light-green light contest where players who moved at the wrong time were “eliminated” by machine gun fire. He watched as good people were killed by pink guards, other contestants and their own stupid actions.
But no. The last six “Squid Game” episodes, now streaming on Netflix, did something entirely unsatisfying. They veered from the prospect of timely, eat-the-rich vengeance porn to unflattering commentary about the rest of us, the other 99% who aren’t Elon Musk, Mark Zuckerberg or Jeff Bezos. What did we ever do to deserve a lethal game of double dutch with two giant mechanical children swinging a 10-ton metal rod in place of a jump rope? A lot, apparently.
“Squid Game” shows that under the right circumstances, regular folks are just as greedy and morally corrupt as the obscenely prosperous, no matter if their money problems stem from unforeseen medical bills, wanton gambling or generational poverty. Press the little guy or gal hard enough and they’re just as ruthless as the mogul that’s suppressing them.
The VIPs in “Squid Game” Season 3, who watch as the contestants trample one another.
(Dong-won Han / NohJu Han / Netflix)
Season 3 picks up exactly where 2 left off. Gi-hun, who’d found his way back in the clandestine gaming complex (situated inside a mountain on a remote island), is Player 456 again among a new round of contestants. He’d planned to infiltrate the operation from inside, staging a coup against the VIPs and Front Man (Lee Byung-hun) who run the games. But now it’s clear he’s failed. He’s cornered by guards, the players who fought alongside him are dead, and he’s thrown back in with the remaining players, many of whom survived because they’re the most craven of the group.
Free and fair elections are at the heart of every democracy, or so “Squid Game” reminds us each time the bedraggled players are asked for their vote regarding the next round: Continue to compete and thin the herd for a larger reward or stop and split their winnings with their fellow contestants? Majority rules, and each time the group opt to sacrifice their lives — and everyone else’s — in pursuit of money. Series creator Hwang Dong-hyuk has spoken about his dwindling faith in humanity as it relates to his concerns about South Korea’s democracy, and you’ll hear him loud and clear in Season 3: Voting is power, but look what happens when the population increasingly puts its own self-interest above that of the greater good. It’s a scenario that should be recognizable to Americans by now.
“Squid Game” Season 3 takes that idea to the extreme, and quite fearlessly, Hwang puts the series to bed without punishing the rich. Instead he dares to lay bare a truth that’s become all too apparent of late: Wealth wins over morality and money trumps accountability. Nice guys not only finish last, they wind up pulverized like everyone else below a certain tax bracket, no matter their dedication toward humanity.
The Korean show’s run has ended, but not before a finale that alludes to a Hollywood sequel. The episode, set in Los Angeles, shows a familiar scene. A down-and-out man is approached by a mysterious, well-dressed figure who uses a simple kid’s game to test his want of money against his tolerance for pain and humiliation.
Those who’ve watched “Squid Game” will recognize it as the beginning of Gi-hun’s journey, which ended with a sliver of redemption in an abyss of darkness. The mysterious figure appears to be a recruiter for a new, English-language “Squid Game.” She’s played by an A-list celebrity — Cate Blanchett — operating in a city renowned for its self-involvement and privilege. “Squid Game” has a whole new playing field.
OpenAI Loses 4 Key Researchers to Meta
Four OpenAI researchers are leaving the company to go to Meta, two sources confirm to WIRED.
Shengjia Zhao, Shuchao Bi, Jiahui Yu, and Hongyu Ren have joined Meta’s superintelligence team. Their OpenAI Slack profiles have been deactivated. The Information first reported on the departures.
It’s the latest in a series of aggressive moves by Mark Zuckerberg, who is racing to catch up to OpenAI, Anthropic and Google in building artificial general intelligence. Earlier this month, OpenAI CEO Sam Altman said that Meta has been making “giant offers” to OpenAI staffers with “$100 million signing bonuses.” He added that, “none of our best people have decided to take them up on that.” A source at OpenAI confirmed the offers.
Hongyu Ren was OpenAI’s post-training lead for the o3 and o4 mini models, along with the open source model that’s set to be released this summer, sources say. Post-training is the process of refining a model after it has been trained on a primary dataset.
Shengjia Zhao is highly skilled in deep learning research, according to another source. He joined OpenAI in the summer of 2022, and helped build the startup’s GPT-4 model.
Jiahui Yu did a stint at Google DeepMind before joining OpenAI in late 2023. Shuchao Bi was a manager of OpenAI’s multimodal models.
The departures from OpenAI come shortly after the company lost three researchers from its Zurich office, the Wall Street Journal reported.
OpenAI and Meta did not immediately respond to a request for comment.
This is a developing story. Please check back for updates.
The Hidden Tech That Makes Assassin’s Creed Shadows Feel More Alive (And Not Require 2TB)
Most of what happens within the video games we play is invisible to us. Even the elements we’re looking straight at work because of what’s happening behind the scenes. If you’ve ever watched a behind-the-scenes video about game development, you might’ve seen these versions of flat, gray game worlds filled with lines and icons pointing every which way, with multiple grids and layers. These are the visual representations of all the systems that make the game work.
This is an especially weird dichotomy to consider when it comes to lighting in any game with a 3D perspective, but especially so in high-fidelity games. We don’t see light so much as we see everything it touches; it’s invisible, but it gives us most of our information about game worlds. And it’s a lot more complex than “turn on lamp, room light up.” Reflection, absorption, diffusion, subsurface scattering–the movement of light is a complex thing that has been explored by physicists in the real world for literally centuries, and will likely be studied for centuries more. In the middle of all of that are game designers, applying the science of light to video games in practical ways, balanced with the limitations of even today’s powerful GPUs, just to show all us nerds a good time.
If you’ve wondered why many games seem to be like static amusement parks waiting for you to interact with a few specific things, lighting is often the reason. But it’s also the reason more and more game worlds look vibrant and lifelike. Game developers have gotten good at simulating static lighting, but making it move is harder. Dynamic lighting has long been computationally expensive, potentially tanking game performance, and we’re finally starting to see that change.
Case in point is Assassin’s Creed Shadows and Ubisoft Technical Architect Nicolas Lopez. Lopez spoke at the Game Developers’ Conference this spring, and reading through his slide deck was fascinating, with the release of the video recording of the show only amplifying that. I reached out to Ubisoft talked with Lopez via email about how technology like ray tracing is changing game lighting. For more on those aspects of video game visuals, check out our primer on path tracing, ray tracing, and rasterization in game graphics.
The thing that initially piqued my interest was a specific set of numbers Lopez put on the screen during the GDC presentation. Lopez noted that if lighting were calculated in Assassin’s Creed Shadows the same way it had been in Assassin’s Creed Unity, Shadows would’ve taken nearly two years to “bake” all the lighting–that is, precalculate and render it–and around 2TB of storage space to store all of that lighting. (Assassin’s Creed Shadows requires 115GB on PC for the entire game.) Those numbers seem to represent a vast difference between the games of yesteryear and modern triple-A titles. I wanted to put those numbers into context as soon as I saw them.
Cities in Assassin’s Creed Unity and Syndicate, Lopez explained, were pretty small spaces: dense cities about four square kilometers in area. In those games, developers used uniform lighting probes to dictate how global illumination was rendered (alongside other lighting techniques). Lighting probes are points on the map that contain information about what lighting is passing through the empty space in that area, which is then used to help light the static and dynamic objects in that space. These were 50-centimeter probes, meaning they were requesting light information every half a meter across Unity’s entire city of Paris.
Let’s pause for a moment to discuss global illumination, also referred to as GI. This is a broad term used to describe a variety of techniques meant to imitate and mimic realistic lighting, especially indirect lighting. These include cube maps, screen-space reflections, probe lighting, and more. Digital Foundry has a great primer on global illumination that breaks this stuff down into chunks.
“The small scale [of these smaller game worlds] let us afford high-quality lighting, even though it required significant storage,” Lopez told me. From Assassin’s Creed Origins forward, though, world size exploded, and suddenly we were exploring worlds 256 square kilometers in area. That much baked light information would’ve caused games to explode in file storage size, so the team began to use a dynamic system.
“We vary probe density based on scene complexity–dense urban areas still use 50-centimeter spacing, but in open landscapes like deserts or forests, we reduce the resolution,” Lopez explained. Artists paint this “GI density map” directly–meaning they can focus the quality of light where it matters most–which Lopez said “dramatically reduces data size while preserving visual quality where it matters most.”
It’s also worth mentioning that Assassin’s Creed Unity had a limited number of times of day–just four, compared to 11 in Shadows–and had very limited weather effects, while Shadows has a dynamic weather system. All those elements in Shadows create changes in lighting the game has to take into account to present believable visuals.
That original question–why would baking the lighting take so long and require so much file storage?–comes back to a simple conclusion. The limitations of hardware and game engines at the time forced the team to pre-bake a lot of lighting information; neither the hardware nor the software was ready to handle calculating so much light data in real time.
Historically, most if not all game lighting has been “baked.” That means that the various techniques used to light a given scene are calculated ahead of time and then stored as textures and maps that the engine overlays onto the basic scene, so your computer or game console doesn’t have to do those calculations while you’re playing and slow the game to a crawl. This works for really static games and can provide very convincing, impactful lighting. As a game becomes more dynamic, though, baked lighting becomes less viable. If we consider cube maps (see our primer and that Digital Foundry video above for the specifics), you’d have to calculate a cube map for every possible place a character could stand, and that’s where game install sizes can start ballooning when it comes to game lighting.
Unity’s game world was a small, uniform space when compared to the more recent Assassin’s Creed games. The same approach applied to the much larger areas of Shadows, with more dynamic effects and varied density, would’ve made for a truly massive game.
But it has been a long time since the release of Assassin’s Creed Unity. More than a decade, in fact, and in that game, a lot has changed! One of the biggest changes has been ray tracing, which is available to all PlayStation 5 and Xbox Series X|S gamers, and about 30-40% of graphics cards shown in the Steam Hardware Survey as of this May.
“Ray tracing has had a major impact on how we approach lighting, from both a creative and production standpoint,” Lopez said. “In traditional pipelines, lighting was mostly baked global illumination, reflections, ambient occlusion, etc. That meant lighting couldn’t react to world changes. Change or move a piece of architecture? Suddenly the lighting is invalid. Teams would have to re-bake the lighting data, which could take hours or even days. At Ubisoft, we ran overnight compute jobs so artists could get fresh lighting each morning. But it still slowed down iteration dramatically.”
Ray tracing freed artists from many of those constraints, he said.
“Artists can move objects, adjust scenes, or iterate without waiting for long bakes. And since lighting is computed per pixel, the visual fidelity is much higher and more physically accurate,” Lopez explained. In other words, artists can do art at their own pace instead of waiting for computers to compute before they do so.
Even so, ray tracing is often invisible to us on the consumer side of things, especially when we consider how static many game worlds can be. In those games, ray tracing is all but invisible, as it’s doing the same thing that game designers were doing with creatively placed static lights. A Call of Duty level, for example, doesn’t have to account for procedural changes to time of day and weather, so traditional lighting can be very effective.
“The benefits can be subtle,” Lopez admitted, with respect to that set of game-design rules. Shadows, Lopez said, is a truly dynamic world, and that makes ray tracing a genuine game changer–in a figurative and literal sense. Shadows has, as previously mentioned, 11 different times of day, four seasons, a variety of dynamic weather effects, and destructible environments that all affect the way players see the game as they play. The hybrid solution Shadows uses, combining some baked and some dynamic lighting, “pushed baked GI to its absolute limits.”
“Ray tracing allows us to light these dynamic environments accurately and consistently,” Lopez explained. “Lighting behaves as it should, even when the world changes drastically. No hacks, no workarounds. It makes the world feel more grounded and believable.”
“Interiors light up naturally when doors open,” Lopez continued. “Destructible objects finally contribute to the scene lighting. Season lighting changes the mood of a scene. Without ray tracing, these effects can only be approximated to a certain extent.”
The team iterated on Ubisoft’s Anvil engine, which is used across the Assassin’s Creed series, in other ways. They adopted the Academy Color Encoding System, for example, which is a universal color standard used by the film industry to keep the work of hundreds or thousands of people consistent across many devices. It helps ensure that people working on different machines, in different locations, creating different parts of the game in a variety of applications, are working with the same color information. That gives us a more consistent and more grounded game–that is, the characters, buildings, foliage, and even effects look like they belong in the same game and feel convincing–at the end of development. Color Look-Up Tables (LUTs) allow the team to shift the visual tone and color grading to match the weather and environmental ambiance.
One of the key parts of getting Shadows right in particular fell, again, to getting the lighting just right. With HDR screens being so ubiquitous these days, developers can rely on having some ability to show a greater range of light and dark–but dark can still often mean pitch black. Even high-quality displays are subject to a user’s personal preference, the qualities of that particular display, and a game console’s ability to display color accurately. This became especially important when Ubisoft decided to finally fulfill years of gamers wishing for a ninja-focused Assassin’s Creed game.
“We reworked key parts of our physically based rendering and exposure pipelines to behave more accurately in low-light conditions,” Lopez said.
With ray tracing helping to inform the way lighting works in Shadows, the team can “deliver nights that feel moody and authentic, without relying on artificial fill lighting,” Lopez said. The quality of the lighting directly supports the gameplay, both giving it more weight and believability, and making it feel more cinematic.
All of these changes came together, Lopez said, to create a “unified, reactive visual where everything feels connected,” with Shadows in particular having sparked a cycle of innovation that pushed Anvil and Assassin’s Creed both forward.
For the rest of us, Assassin’s Creed Shadows works as an example of how video game design is adapting to new technology for both gamers and game designers alike. Designers working on tentpole games like Shadows have new ways to create games more quickly without sacrificing fidelity. In return, we get more dynamic worlds that live and move around us.
Image credits: Ubisoft
The brain’s sweet spot: How criticality could unlock learning, memory—and prevent Alzheimer’s
In a new paper with implications for preventing Alzheimer’s disease and other neurological disorders, Keith Hengen, an associate professor of biology in Arts & Sciences at Washington University in St. Louis, suggests a new comprehensive approach to understanding how the brain works and the rules it must follow to reach optimal performance.
“There’s a common perception that the human brain is the most complicated thing in the universe,” Hengen said. “The brain is immensely powerful, but that power may arise from a relatively simple set of mathematical principles.”
Hengen starts with the premise that almost everything our brains do is learned or powerfully shaped by experience. In other words, we aren’t born with hard-wired circuits preprogrammed to help us read, drive cars or do anything else that we do every day. A healthy brain must be ready to learn anything and everything.
But how is a collection of neurons capable of learning? Hengen suggests that brains become learning machines only when they reach a special state called “criticality.” A concept borrowed from physics, criticality describes a complex system that is at the tipping point between order and chaos. At this razor’s edge, brains are primed to gain new information, Hengen said. “Brains need to reach criticality to think, remember and learn.”
Hengen proposed criticality as a unifying theory of brain function and disease in the prestigious journal Neuron. Woodrow Shew, a physicist at the University of Arkansas, is the co-author.
A biologist and a physicist may seem like an odd pairing, but the new unifying theory blends both realms of science. Physicists often describe criticality using the classic example of a sand pile: As sand is added, the pile will grow steeper and steeper until it eventually avalanches. Right before that final grain triggered a moment of chaos, the pile was at a critical angle, one step away from instability.
Shew explained that physicists first developed a deep understanding of criticality as a way to describe magnets and other materials. Around the turn of the 21st century, these ideas were expanded to explain a broader range of complex systems, including avalanches, earthquakes and, ultimately, living systems and the brain.
A defining aspect of critical systems is that they look the same at any scale: A sand pile on the brink of an avalanche has the same slope whether the pile is tiny or mountainous. In the brain, criticality is constant whether it’s measured in a handful of neurons or an entire region. Likewise, brain patterns that unfold in time are startlingly similar when considered in milliseconds or hours. “This matches our intuitive understanding of how brains work,” Hengen said. “Our internal experiences span milliseconds to months. They don’t have a scale.”
Hengen and Shew suggest that criticality isn’t just a theoretical concept; it’s a state that can be precisely measured and calculated through fMRI brain imaging technology. “Criticality is the optimal computational state of the brain,” Hengen said. “We’ve developed a mathematical way to measure how close the brain is to criticality, which should help us nail down the fundamental questions about how a human brain works.”
A new understanding of disease
The criticality framework offers a new perspective for understanding neurological disease. Rather than focusing on specific damaged brain regions or accumulated proteins, Hengen argues that diseases such as Alzheimer’s destroy something more basic: the brain’s ability to maintain criticality.
“Alzheimer’s and other neurodegenerative diseases don’t just damage neurons, they break the brain’s general ability to compute by slowly dissolving criticality,” Hengen explained. “As a brain moves further and further from criticality, it loses the ability to adapt and process information effectively.”
This framework explains a puzzling feature of brain diseases: Patients often appear completely normal until they’ve lost many neurons. “The brain has remarkable compensatory abilities that can mask functional problems even as criticality begins to erode,” Hengen said. “Traditional assessments miss the early stages because they focus on established endpoints that the brain tries to maintain through workarounds.”
As criticality gradually deteriorates, the brain works harder to achieve the same cognitive outcomes, Hengen said. “It’s like an engine that still runs but requires more fuel and generates more heat. By the time we notice memory problems or other symptoms, criticality has likely been compromised for years.”
Hengen’s collaboration with David M. Holtzman, MD, the Barbara Burton and Reuben M. Morriss III Distinguished Professor at WashU Medicine, has revealed that tau protein buildup in Alzheimer’s directly disrupts criticality, providing a clear link between the disease’s molecular hallmarks and cognitive collapse.
This connection between criticality and Alzheimer’s opens exciting diagnostic possibilities. In theory, a simple fMRI could help detect breakdowns in criticality years before symptoms appear. “In combination with cutting-edge blood tests, we could identify people at risk and intervene before irreversible damage occurs,” Hengen said.
In another collaboration, Hengen has teamed up with Deanna Barch, the Gregory B. Couch Professor of Psychiatry at WashU Medicine and a professor of psychological and brain sciences in Arts & Sciences, for an observational study to see how criticality at birth determines cognitive development and abilities in childhood. “From the beginning, some kids are closer to criticality than others, which, based on our theory, suggests they are going to be better learners,” Hengen said. “Many outside factors can affect their success in school, but criticality can explain an impressive amount of the variability between children.”
The sleep-mind connection
In early 2024, Hengen and co-author Ralf Wessel, a professor of physics in Arts & Sciences at WashU, used the concept of criticality to revisit an age-old question: Why do we need sleep? By tracking brain activity over multiple weeks, they found that sleep restores a state of criticality. “Being awake and active moves us away from criticality, and sleep is like a reset button,” Hengen explained.
That insight could help researchers unlock the power of sleep as a therapy for Alzheimer’s and other neurological diseases that push the brain away from its optimal state. Previous studies by Holtzman and others have found that people who don’t get the sleep they need — perhaps due to shift work or chronic insomnia — are at a much higher risk for Alzheimer’s as they age. And there’s already some evidence that sleep interventions can help slow the progression of Alzheimer’s symptoms.
Hengen believes that targeted, intensive sleep-based therapy could help restore criticality and improve learning and memory in people with brain disease. Studies of mice conducted by Holtzman and James McGregor, a postdoctoral researcher in Hengen’s lab, offer a glimpse of the possibilities: Mice specifically bred to have symptoms of Alzheimer’s become faster learners after a targeted sleep intervention reinforces criticality.
Critical future
There is much work to be done, but Hengen would eventually like to understand how criticality helps explain complex features of human neurobiology. “We may find that someone who is an amazing artist, for example, might be extremely close to criticality in parts of the brain involved in creative ideation,” he said. It’s also possible that a close look at criticality could point to undiscovered tendencies or talents that just need an outlet. “Maybe they never tried art, but we can see that the potential is there.”
In the meantime, Hengen, Shew, and others are spreading the word about the importance of criticality. Hengen presented a TEDx talk on the subject in 2024 and shared his work at Arts & Sciences’ inaugural research pitch competition, where he took second place. He hopes the new Neuron paper will inspire conversations among neurologists, doctors, reporters and the general public.
A unified theory of the mind could change the world, but first, it must unify the experts. “Woody (Shew) and I really think we’re on to something here,” Hengen said. “And, perhaps slowly, others are starting to agree.”
WashU was the ideal place for a new concept of the brain to emerge, Hengen said. “We’re surrounded by brilliant people in diverse fields, including physics, biology, psychology, mathematics and neuroscience, and the community here is remarkably supportive,” he said. “Everyone is ready to help.”
Conference on Seventy-Five Years of the Constitution of India
About RGNUL
The Rajiv Gandhi National University of Law, Punjab (Patiala) was established by the State Legislature of Punjab by passing the Rajiv Gandhi National University of Law, Punjab Act, 2006 (Punjab Act No. 12 of 2006). The Act incorporated a Law University of National stature in Punjab, thereby fulfilling the need for a Centre of Excellence in legal education in the modern era of globalisation and liberalization.
About the Conference
The Constitution of India, which became fully operative on 26 January, 1950 laid down the foundation of Rule of law with all the dimensions of justice- social, economic or adjudicative. In its dynamic and unrelenting forming of Seventy-five years, it endeavoured to consolidate the Human Rights instinct and all cornered justice guided with liberty, freedom and brotherhood.
Target Audience
- Judges
- Advocates
- Academicians
- Law Students
- Government Officials and Policymakers
- Members and Officers of Legal Services
- Authorities
- NGOs and human rights organisations
Theme & sub themes
- The Constitution of India and the Constitutions of Developed Countries like U.S.A, UK, Canada, Australia, Switzerland, France, Germany, Japan and other countries
- The Constitution of India and the of Constitution of the Developing countries
- The Constitution of India and the Constitutions of Under-developed Countries
- The Constitution of India and International Relations
- The Constitution of India and International Law
- The Constitution of India: Development, Directions & Dimensions
- Constitutionalism in India: Theoretical Foundations
- Federalism and Power Sharing: Lessons from Major Constitutions
- Asymmetric Federalism: Models Across Jurisdictions
- Social Justice: Comparative Perspectives
- Judicial Appointments: Comparative Perspectives
- Judicial Independence: Comparative Perspectives
- Secularism and Religious Freedom: Contemporary Developments
- Local Governance: India and Abroad
- Constitutional Perspectives on Decolonisation of Indian Law
- The Constitution of India and Indian Knowledge Systems
- Basic Structure and Constitutional Identity of India
- Constitution and Human Rights in major Constitutions of the World
- Constitutional Justice and Social Equity: Promise v. Practice
- Constitutional Amendments: Comparative Perspectives
- Legal Aid and Access to Justice: Comparative Innovations and Developments
Submission Guidelines
- The abstract must range between 300 to 500 words, outlining the methodology and the tentative outcomes of the research.
- The abstract must contain 4-5 key words.
- Full Paper: The word limit for full paper submission is 4000-6000 words.
- File must be in Microsoft Word editable format (.doc/.docx).
- The Citation style to be followed is Harvard Bluebook 21st Edition.
- Font: Times New Roman, Size: 12, Spacing: 1.5, Alignment: Justified.
- Title must be font size 14, Times New Roman and bold.
General Guidelines
- Submission must be an original work of the author(s).
- A maximum of two authors are allowed per paper.
- A brief bio-note (maximum 150 words) of the authors to be submitted during the Registration process, detailing the designation and institutional affiliation of the author(s).
- A self-declaration must be submitted along with the full paper stating that the paper is an original work of the author(s) and that it has not been published/sent for publication anywhere else.
- Selected Manuscripts will be invited for presentation.
- Presenters are required to submit their powerpoint presentations along with the full paper.
- The details filled during the registration process shall be used for certification purposes. No request for change will be entertained later.
Registration Details
- The Conference will be held in hybrid mode.
- The registration fee is Rs. 1180/- (including GST) for online and Rs. 2360/- (including GST) for offline.
- Co-authors shall register individually.
- Registration fee for offline participants doesn’t include boarding and logistical charges.
- No request for refund shall be entertained post the payment of registration fees.
- The Participants are required to pay the registration fee by clicking on the below mentioned ‘Registration Link’.
- The Abstract is to be submitted using the ‘Submission Link’ only.
Important dates
- Last Date for Abstract Submission: August 01, 2025
- Last Date for Shortlisting of Abstracts: August 05, 2025
- Last Date for Registration: August 20, 2025
- Last Date for Submission of Final Manuscript: August 20, 2025
Contact
For additional queries, contact: [email protected]
Aadesh Singh (+919598226996).
Click here to register.
Click here to submit.
Disclaimer: WEF April, 2021, Lawctopus will not publish any ‘Call for Papers/Blogs’ by journals that charge money at the time of submission. If you find any journal doing so, please intimate us at tanuj.kalia[at]lawctopus.com
The dignified ‘other woman’: How Rekha’s styling in Silsila attempted to redefine the taboo trope
Alia Bhatt turned into Silsila’s lovelorn Chandni as she arrived at the celebratory screening of 1981 classic, Umrao Jaan, now restored by the National Film Development Corporation-National Film Archive of India under the National Film Heritage Mission, and also momentously re-released in theatres on June 27.
1981, mind you, was a big year for Rekha on the career front, what with the musical drama winning her, her only National Film Award for the grace and gravity with which she portrayed the titular role. Also having graced the movies that year, was Yash Chopra’s Silsila. A morally-grounded yet emotionally evocative love triangle, it was quite the controversial film at the time — the kind of controversy that follows the film’s legacy across decades, given the public conjecture surrounding the reel perceptively imitating the ‘real’.
Amitabh Bachchan starred front and centre as Amit, the object of desire, bound by duty and torn by love with Jaya Bachchan playing his demure wife, Shobha. That left Rekha to embody the crushing aura of unrequited love as she slipped into the shoes of Chandni, the ‘other woman’.
Chandni’s trajectory in Silsila followed a winding road of misery and misfortune as she found love, lost it to fate, found the courage to reclaim it for a few fleeting moments, only for it to be taken away, the only thing left in her possession at the end of it all being her grace. And that is where the masterstroke lies.
The history of cinema, homegrown and foreign, has for decades on end painted the other woman in rather convenient hues. Sultry, seductive and immoral, her selfishness only stood to represent temptation and wreckage, themes amply embodied in how she presented herself. Now in the language of cinema, the immorality that the other woman tends to represent is as sacred as the morality the wife reigns on. And that’s where the iconoclastic nature of Rekha’s Chandni wins. Well, Chandni doesn’t really ‘win’, but her presentation to the audience — much of it incidentally curated by Rekha herself — goes a big little way in highlighting the complexities of the other woman.
Bold reds, rani pinks, luxurious satin and subtle bling may not seem like a big deal now, but in context of Silsila’s Chandni, it very potentially represented the audacity of a woman to prioritise her own heart over that of society’s, though the context of it was and continues to be uncontestably abysmal. The reams of tulle, the short-cropped blouse sleeves and the halter necklines, gave hints of skin without really allowing the character to descend into the demeaning trappings of the trope. The nearly-constant wine-stained lips and crisply kohl-lined eyes further pushed the very same boundaries — all beautifully framed by Rekha’s signature gaze of defiant love.
This isn’t a justification of the rationale of the other woman — but an observation on sartoria being used to ever-so-subtly imprint her gall on the minds of the audience. It’s an early, and seemingly very intentional case study of fashion rebellion.
Silsila, with all its grace and contradictions, is available for streaming on OTT.
Supreme Court upholds ACA preventive services mandate
The Supreme Court on Friday upheld a popular provision of the Affordable Care Act that requires private insurers cover a range of preventive healthcare services without cost sharing.
The 6-3 ruling is a victory for public health advocates and providers, who say the mandate preserves Americans’ access to critical care, including cancer screenings, tests for chronic conditions, and sexual health and pregnancy-related services.
The case, Kennedy v. Braidwood Management, Inc., centered on the U.S. Preventive Services Task Force, which makes recommendations on what preventive care should be covered by insurers. Plaintiffs, led by Braidwood Management, asserted the task force violates the Constitution because the members aren’t appointed by the president or confirmed by the Senate.
But the high court sided with the federal government, determining that members of the the task force are “inferior officers,” whose appointment by the Health and Human Services secretary is consistent with the Constitution’s Appointments Clause.
The court’s liberal justices — Sonia Sotomayor, Elena Kagan and Ketanji Brown Jackson — joined with Chief Justice John Roberts, Brett Kavanaugh and Amy Coney Barrett on the majority decision. Justices Clarence Thomas, Neil Gorsuch and Samuel Alito dissented.
“Task Force members issue preventive services recommendations of critical importance to patients, doctors, insurers, employers, healthcare organizations, and the American people more broadly,” Kavanaugh wrote in the majority opinion. “In doing so, however, the Task Force members remain subject to the Secretary of HHS’s supervision and direction, and the Secretary remains subject to the President’s supervision and direction.”
The case has wound its way through the courts for several years. The plaintiffs, which include two Christian-owned businesses, first sued the federal government in 2020, opposing requirements to cover contraception and medications that prevent HIV.
A district court judge sided with the plaintiffs in 2023, but the decision striking down the ACA preventive services provision did not go into effect while the Biden administration appealed the case.
Last year, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 5th Circuit issued a mixed ruling, finding the district court had overstepped by attempting to apply its decision nationwide. However, the appellate court ruled the task force should be confirmed by Congress.
The federal government under the Biden administration asked the Supreme Court to take up the case in September. The Trump administration also continued to defend the mandate in court, despite Republicans’ previous efforts to dismantle the law.
The government’s attorneys argued the appeals court “relied on an erroneous understanding of the Appointments Clause,” saying the HHS secretary supervises and could remove members of the task force — meaning they aren’t principal officers who have to be appointed by the president and confirmed by the Senate.
The Supreme Court agreed, reversing the lower court’s decision. The high court noted the HHS secretary has the authority to remove task force members as well as review their decisions and block them before the take effect.
“The structure of the Task Force and the manner of appointing its officers preserve the chain of political accountability that was central to the Framers’ design of the Appointments Clause: The Task Force members were appointed by and are supervised and directed by the Secretary of HHS. And the Secretary of HHS, in turn, answers to the President of the United States,” Kavanaugh wrote.
Thomas, Alito and Gorsuch disagreed. In the minority opinion, Thomas said that for years “a subordinate official” at the HHS had appointed task force members, and the government “invented a new theory on appeal, arguing that the combination of two ambiguously worded statutes enacted decades apart establishes that the Secretary of HHS can appoint the Task Force’s members.”
Mortgage arrears remain contained despite high rates and cost of living pressures
Key takeaways
Despite high interest rates and cost-of-living pressures, only 1.68% of Australian home loans are in arrears, well below pandemic-era peaks and international benchmarks.
Tighter serviceability buffers, low levels of risky lending, and strong employment have helped households stay on top of repayments, even as monthly mortgage costs have surged.
Negative equity remains rare, with less than 1% of borrowers in a negative equity position. Most households in hardship can sell before defaulting, preventing widespread mortgage stress.
As interest rates begin to fall and cost-of-living pressures ease, arrears are expected to trend even lower, reinforcing the strength of Australia’s mortgage market.
While mortgage arrears have risen from record lows, the portion of borrowers falling behind on their repayments remains well below 2% of the Australian loan book.
APRA data measuring the proportion of borrowers who are overdue or impaired on their mortgage repayments ticked slightly higher through the March quarter, from 1.64% in Q4 2024 to 1.68% in Q1 2025.
Despite the subtle lift, mortgage arrears remain below the recent high of 1.86% recorded in Q2 2020.
Mortgage arrears include loans that are 30-89 days overdue as well as those categorised as non-performing.
A non-performing loan is one where the borrower is 90 days or more past due on their repayments or where the lender considers the borrower unlikely to pay their credit obligations without recourse from the lender.
A more detailed breakdown of mortgage arrears can be found in the latest Financial Stability Review from the RBA.
The review showed that while highly leveraged borrowers and lower- income households tend to have higher arrears rates, even in these categories, arrears are generally low and trending lower.
Mortgage arrears for borrowers with a loan to valuation ratio of 80% or higher peaked around 2.5% in 2024 but are now falling, while borrowers with a loan-to-income ratio above four reached roughly 1.5% and are also trending lower.
Several factors help explain how the vast majority of mortgagors have kept on top of their mortgage repayments during a period of elevated interest rates and severe cost of living pressures, including strong prudential standards, tight labour markets, extremely low levels of negative equity, and accrued liquidity buffers.
Lending standards have been unquestionably strong throughout the recent cycle, with a consistently low portion of mortgage originations considered ‘risky’.
Interest-only lending comprised 19.7% of originations in the March quarter and has consistently held well below the previous temporary limit of 30% set by APRA between 2017 and 2018.
High LTI and high DTI lending remains well below pre-rate hike levels, tracking at 3.1% and 5.8% of loan originations respectively in Q1.
Similarly, high LVR lending has come in around 7% of originations or lower since mid-2022.
The mortgage serviceability buffer, which assesses prospective borrowers on their ability to repay a mortgage at three percentage points above the current mortgage rate, has also played into the resilience of borrowers.
Lifting the buffer from 2.5 percentage points to 3.0 percentage points in October 2021 has helped to lower the default risk, even though mortgage rates have risen a lot more than three percentage points from their 2022 lows.
Although interest rates are now falling and expected to reduce further, there has been no sign from APRA that the serviceability buffer will be lowered.
While tight lending policies have contributed to financial stability and provided protection for borrowers, there is a counter argument that lending policies may be too tight, reducing access to credit.
The ‘double trigger’ hypothesis for higher mortgage rates
The RBA has previously theorised that higher mortgage arrears rates would need to be predicated by a “double trigger” of both an inability to repay the loan and for the loan to be in a negative equity position.
So far, most borrowers have retained their ability to pay despite higher debt servicing costs, thanks to persistently tight labour market conditions, while instances of negative equity remain rare across the Australian housing market.
Debt servicing costs have risen substantially over the recent rate cycle.
Variable mortgage rates have roughly moved in-line with the cash rate, bottoming out below 3% in 2022 before surging by around four percentage points.
A borrower with a $750k mortgage saw their monthly repayments rise by around $1,550+ (depending on the type of borrower and loan) between the low point and high point of the rates cycle.
However, most Australian’s have retained an ability to service their mortgage through gainful employment, with labour markets holding tight.
The unemployment rate came in at 4.1% in May and has held around this level or lower since early 2022.
Similarly, underemployment, which measures workers who want to work more hours, remains close to multi- decade lows.
The second component of the ‘double trigger’ hypothesis relates to negative equity in housing markets – or simply, where the value of property is less than the debt owed.
The RBA estimated in their most recent Financial Stability Review that less than 1% of households are experiencing a negative equity situation.
Given the low portion of homes in negative equity, most borrowers facing financial hardship should be able to sell their property and clear their debt before moving into default.
Another factor staving off higher arrears relates to an accrual of savings through the pandemic
The household saving ratio held above 10% between mid-2020 and early 2022.
Households have been able to draw down on their savings as higher debt servicing costs and cost of living pressures eroded balance sheets.
Although it’s harder to measure, we have probably also seen households tightening the purse strings, acting out the “wagyu and shiraz” scenario, where households pull back on non-essential spending, focus on debt repayments and fund essential cost of living expenses.
The “wagyu and shiraz” reference relates to the federal court ruling from Justice Nye Perram in the ASIC v Westpac hearing: “I may eat Wagyu beef everyday washed down with the finest shiraz but, if I really want my new home, I can make do on much more modest fare.”
Overall, it’s likely mortgage arrears will trend lower from here as mortgage rates continue to reduce and cost of living pressures ease further.
With housing values once again on a broad-based rise, instances of negative equity are expected to remain a tiny portion of Australian housing stock, providing further resilience to default.
17 Undeniable Signs A Sagittarius Man Has Feelings For You
Sagittarius men, known for their adventurous, optimistic, and freedom-loving spirit, can be uncharacteristically guarded when it comes to romantic feelings, leaving you wondering whether all the attention and care they’re lavishing on you is merely platonic or has a deeper meaning. However, when there are real feelings at play, there will be subtle shifts in the behavior of a Sagittarius man around you. And how do I know this? Well, having been married to one for 15 years, I consider myself somewhat of an authority on the subject. So, allow me to share insights gathered over the years to help you decipher the signs a Sagittarius man has feelings for you.
17 Irrefutable Signs A Sagittarius Man Has Feelings For You
The fun, adventurous, and freedom-loving Sagittarius can be an exciting romantic prospect to pursue. However, his guardedness about his feelings can make the pursuit frustrating at times. Does a Sagittarius man love you, or does he just see you as a friend or someone he’s having a good time with? Ugh, not knowing the answer can be pure torture.
That’s until you learn to observe him closely. Do that, and you’ll begin to notice the signs a Sagittarius man is falling for you. Beneath his happy-go-lucky exterior are feelings bubbling up, and these will find a way to manifest themselves in behaviors that go beyond mere friendship or a casual connection. You may notice that he is suddenly more eager to spend time with you, or is opening up and letting you into his inner world, or he’s suddenly taking a greater interest in your life and aspirations. What else? Let’s take a look at 17 such undeniable signs a Sagittarius man has feelings for you:
1. He makes a clear effort to spend quality time with you
If the Archer has set his sights on your heart, he wouldn’t be able to get enough of you. Despite being someone who thrives on an active and well-rounded life, you’ll notice that your Sagittarius is prioritizing spending quality time with you. As one Reddit user noted on r/astrologymemes, “When a Sagittarius wants you, you’ll know, they’re not the type to be in the background ya know?” You may notice,
- He cancels other plans to spend an evening with you
- He suggests activities that he knows you would enjoy
- He lingers after an outing, trying to extend your time together
- He might even travel a distance just to see you
Related Reading: In Love With A Sagittarius Man? 16 Things To Know
2. He invites you to join his spontaneous adventures
Sagittarius men are known for their love of adventure and spontaneity. According to expert astrologer Angel Eyedealism, Sagittarius “love adventure and excitement…they love movement, they love action”. If he starts including you in his impulsive plans, there’s no denying that he values your company and wants to share these exciting experiences with you. Signs a Sagittarius man likes you can look like this:
- He asks you to join him on a last-minute road trip
- He invites you to try a new restaurant or activity on a whim
- He might suggest exploring a place neither of you has been to before
- He could even propose an impromptu weekend getaway
3. He engages you in deep, meaningful conversations
Talking about anything and everything under the sun, from light-hearted banter to deep conversations, is a core part of my relationship with my spouse, a Sagittarius. As I’ve come to understand, these conversations are his way to connect and feel emotionally in sync with me.
Given that Sagittarius people are curious and appreciate intellectual stimulation, it’s hardly surprising that quality communication is essential for them to develop deep connections with someone they have feelings for. So, if you notice a Sagittarius man wanting to know your secrets, history, and everything in between, know that he has developed feelings for you. He may,
- Ask you about your life philosophies and beliefs
- Discuss his own dreams and aspirations with you in detail
- Seek your opinion on important matters and listen attentively to your responses
- Stay up late talking to you
4. He is invested in your interests and dreams
When a Sagittarius man likes you, he will take a keen interest in what you are passionate about. He will want to learn more about your hobbies and support your aspirations and pursuit of your passions because to him these are attractive qualities. Angel says, “Once a Sagittarius man decides that he likes you, there’s no partner more attentive to and considerate of your passions and interests.” If you’re wondering how to know if a Sagittarius man likes you, see if he:
- Asks you detailed questions about your hobbies and interests
- Attends events or shows to support your endeavors
- Encourages you to pursue your goals and offers help or resources if possible
- Tries to learn more about your field of interest
5. He communicates with remarkable honesty
A Sagittarius man is honest, sometimes to a fault. If he is emotionally invested in you, expect him to be open and truthful, even when the truth might be a little blunt. This is among the signs a Sagittarius man has feelings for you and isn’t interested in playing mind games. You may notice that
- He tells you exactly what’s on his mind, even if it’s not always what you expect
- He is straightforward about his intentions and doesn’t lead you on
- He might even be brutally honest about his feelings, in a well-meaning way
- He expects the same level of honesty from you in return
Related Reading: Libra And Sagittarius Compatibility In Love, Sex, And Life
6. You can make him laugh easily
Sagittarius men have a great sense of humor, and to them, finding someone they can share a hearty laugh with is key to a happy, healthy relationship. So, if you notice that a Sagittarius man often laughs at your jokes, it’s a clear sign that he enjoys your wit and that amps up the likelihood of him falling for you. Angel points out, “If a Sagittarius man is genuinely interested, he will likely find your humor appealing and laugh at your jokes.” The following behaviors can be indicative of a Sagittarius man showing interest in you:
- He chuckles at your silly remarks and puns
- He teases you playfully and enjoys your reactions
- He might even try to make you laugh with his own jokes and stories
- The banter between you two feels natural and effortless
7. He enjoys playful teasing and light-hearted banter with you
Playful teasing and banter are among the common Sagittarius man flirting signs. This is how a man born under this zodiac typically shows interest and affection. If you’ve been racking your brains about, “What are the signs a Sagittarius man is interested?”, you can be fairly sure that he is, if:
- He might tease you gently about your quirks or habits
- He enjoys it when you tease him back in a good-natured way
- The conversations are filled with witty remarks and inside jokes
- He initiates playful arguments or debates just for fun
8. He shares his feelings and aspirations with you
A Sagittarius man tends to be private about his deeper emotions. He may laugh and joke around, spend time with you, but he won’t let just anyone enter his inner world, where he safely keeps his feelings, aspirations, hopes and dreams. My observation has been that a Sag man can be immensely picky about who he lets it.
If he starts to open up about these things that he holds dear, it’s a clear indication that he sees you as someone special. How to tell if a Sagittarius man has feelings, you ask? Here are some signs:
- He talks to you about his fears and insecurities
- He shares his long-term goals and dreams for the future
- He might discuss past experiences that have shaped him
- He seems comfortable being vulnerable and authentic with you
Related Reading: Sagittarius And Sagittarius Compatibility – Love, Marriage, Sex, And Problem Areas
9. He consistently stays in touch, even when his schedule is demanding
Sagittarius men value their me-time and freedom. In fact, he needs copious amounts of space, without judgment or nagging, to thrive in a relationship. That said, when a Sagittarius man falls in love, despite this need for space, he will make a sincere and consistent effort to stay in touch with you through texts, calls, or messages, even when he is busy or traveling.
- He will send you regular texts throughout the day
- He will call to check in and see how you are doing
- He responds to your messages promptly and enthusiastically
- He makes an effort to maintain contact even if you’ve been apart for a long time
10. He is eager to introduce you to his close friends and family
For a Sagittarius man, introducing someone to his inner circle of friends and family is a significant step. If the Sagittarius man in your life takes this step, it’s one of the most obvious signs a Sagittarius man has feelings for you because this isn’t something he’d do unless he saw you as someone special.
Angel says, “If he is actively trying to organize a time for you to meet his loved ones, he wants you to be a significant part of his life and stick around.” The key to decoding his feelings lies in actions such as:
- Inviting you to hang out with his friends
- Suggesting meeting his family members
- Including you in social gatherings with his loved ones
- Flaunting you to the people who are important to him
11. He pays attention to your comfort and strives to ensure your happiness
When a Sagittarius man likes you and develops real feelings for you, he will treat you right and be considerate of your needs, and try to make sure you are comfortable and happy. I speak from experience when I say a Sagittarius man makes for the most caring and thoughtful partner. He will not only be attentive to your preferences and needs, but will aalso nticipate what you might need or want in a particular moment and go out of his way to make it happen. Make no mistake that a Sagittarius man has feelings for you if,
- He asks if you are enjoying yourself and if you need anything
- He remembers your preferences, like your favorite food or drink
- He might offer you his jacket if you are cold
- He pays attention to the little details that make you feel cared for
Related Reading: 8 Most Unemotional And Cold Zodiac Signs
12. He initiates physical touch and enjoys being close to you
While not always immediately obvious, a Sagittarius man who is developing feelings might initiate physical touch more often. This could range from casual touches on the arm to more lingering hugs, indicating a desire for closeness. One Reddit user shares, of her Sagittarius husband, “When we’re out in public, he likes to plant surprise kisses on me, like walking up to me and kissing my face or kissing my neck, or like leaning over and resting his head into my neck/shoulder area. He likes to hold hands or lock arms.” You can sense his feelings are moving from platonic to romantic when,
- He places his hand on your back when guiding you
- He lingers in hugs a little longer than usual
- He finds excuses to be physically close to you
- He enjoys cuddling and being in your personal space
13. He starts to include you in his plans for the near and distant future
Sagittarius men generally live in the present moment. If he starts planning a future with you, whether it’s a weekend getaway or something further down the line, you can be sure things are getting serious on this end. He now envisions you being a part of his life for the foreseeable future. For instance,
- He mentions wanting to take a trip with you next year
- He talks about attending a specific event together in the coming months
- He might even discuss long-term goals that involve you
- He openly talks about the future with you
14. He reveals a softer, more vulnerable side of himself
As I’ve already mentioned, Sagittarius men can be guarded with their emotions and innermost feelings. A shift in this behavior can give you an answer to: Does a Sagittarius man love you? If he starts to show you a softer, more vulnerable side of himself, it’s a strong sign that he trusts you and feels comfortable being vulnerable with you. There are definitely deep feelings at play, if
- He shares his fears and insecurities with you
- He shows sadness or disappointment in your presence
- He allows you to see him when he is not always the life of the party
- He seeks comfort and support from you during tough times
Related Reading: Zodiac Signs Strongest To Weakest, Ranked As Per Astrology
15. He respects your need for independence
Since a Sagittarius needs space to survive and thrive, they naturally understand and respect these needs in others as well. If he gives you space to pursue your own interests and doesn’t become clingy or possessive, it’s a sign he respects you and your boundaries. When a Sagittarius man loves you,
- He won’t pressure you to spend all your time with him
- He will encourage you to pursue your own hobbies and friendships
- He’d understand if you need time alone and won’t take it personally
- He appreciates your independence and strength
16. He might exhibit subtle signs of jealousy when you talk about others
While he understands your need for space and independence, it doesn’t mean he doesn’t have a possessive streak about him. Now, his possessiveness doesn’t border on unhealthy or result in toxic, controlling behavior. Even so, he will feel a tinge of jealousy if you talk about other romantic interests or shower someone else with attention and time. This is among the most prominent signs a Sagittarius man has feelings for you because it shows that he sees you as more than just a friend and doesn’t want to lose you to someone else. And so,
- He might ask probing questions about your interactions with other men
- He could become quiet or withdrawn when you mention dating others
- He might subtly try to steer the conversation back to himself
- He might playfully tease you about your other admirers
17. He explicitly tells you that he has romantic feelings for you
While Sagittarius men might show their feelings through actions, they can also be quite direct. If his feelings are real, you won’t have to wonder, “What are the signs a Sagittarius man is interested?”, for too long. Chances are, he will tell you explicitly, and that really means something because a Sag won’t just fess up lightly. You can stop searching for signs a Sagittarius man likes you when,
- He directly states his romantic interest in you
- He might use phrases like “I have feelings for you” or “I really like you.”
- He might even confess that he is falling for you
- Given their direct nature, if he says it, it’s highly likely to be true
How to Respond to a Sagittarius Man Who Has Feelings for You
Now that you can read all the signs a Sagittarius man is falling for you, the question is, what next? How do you respond? Should you make the first move or wait for him to confess his feelings to you? And what after that? How do you build a strong relationship with him? And what if you don’t like him back? Let’s answer all of these questions.
If you like him back
Sagittarius men appreciate honesty, adventure, and independence. If you reciprocate his feelings, it’s best to be direct and honest in your response. Here is how you can do that and do on to foster a strong connection with your Sag man:
1. Be direct and honest about your feelings
Just as he is likely to be straightforward with you, he’d appreciate it if you reciprocated with an honest expression of your feelings. Relationship coach Anna Kovach advises that the “#1 turn on for me as a Sag is a partner that is completely open about their feelings.” So,
- Tell him you’ve noticed his interest and that you feel the same way
- Don’t play games or try to be overly coy; sincerity is key
- Express your excitement about exploring a potential relationship with him
2. Embrace spontaneity and adventure together
Show him that you can keep up with his adventurous spirit. Sagittarians love unpredictability and excitement. Plan spontaneous outings or surprise adventures to keep the relationship dynamic.
- Suggest a last-minute hike or a weekend trip to a nearby town
- Be open to trying new things he suggests, even if they are outside your comfort zone
- Plan surprise dates that cater to his interests
3. Engage in intellectual conversations and share your knowledge
Susan Miller from Astrology Zone notes that a Sagittarius man is “ready for a deep discussion on ethics, morality, politics, philosophy, or religion”. As his partner, you have to be prepared to stimulate his mind by engaging in thoughtful discussions and sharing your perspectives. Here’s how:
- Ask him open-ended questions about his views on various topics
- Share interesting articles or documentaries you’ve come across
- Don’t be afraid to challenge his ideas respectfully and engage in lively debates
Related Reading: Zodiac Signs Characteristics – The Positives And Negatives
4. Respect his need for freedom and independence
Angel says, “Sagittarius men always need space…If you trust them enough to give them space, they will come closer.” Avoid being clingy or trying to control his time or movements. Instead, respect this independence by:
- Letting him have own social life and pursue his individual interests
- Not constantly checking in on him or demanding his undivided attention
- Showing that you are also independent and have your own fulfilling life
5. Be honest and straightforward in your communication
After independence, honesty is the value dearest to a Sagittarius. So, to avoid trouble in paradise, you need to ensure your communication with him is clear, direct, and sincere. Avoid passive-aggressive behavior or beating around the bush.
- Express your needs and expectations openly and honestly
- Address any issues or concerns directly and respectfully
- Be genuine in your interactions and avoid pretense
If you don’t like him back
In case you’ve been trying to look for the signs a Sagittarius man is falling for you because you want to let him down easy, here are some tips on handling the situation with kindness and honesty:
1. Be direct and clear about your lack of romantic interest
Given his likely straightforward approach, the kindest response is to be equally direct and clear about your feelings. Avoid ambiguity that could lead to further misunderstanding. Politely but firmly tell him that you value his friendship but don’t see him romantically.
2. Avoid leading him on or giving mixed signals
Ensure your actions and words align with your lack of romantic interest. Don’t give mixed signals or false hope by suggesting “maybe someday,” or engage in flirtatious behavior or overly intimate interactions. Avoid accepting romantic gestures or dates if you are not interested in that way.
3. Clearly define the boundaries of your friendship
If you value his friendship and wish to maintain it, clearly communicate the boundaries of your platonic relationship. Explicitly state that you would like to remain friends but nothing more. Avoid behaviors that might blur the lines between friendship and romance. Be consistent in your interactions to reinforce the platonic nature of your relationship.
4. Be empathetic and acknowledge his feelings
While being direct is important, showing empathy for his feelings can blunt the pain of rejection. Acknowledge that it might be disappointing to hear that you’re not interested in him romantically. You can say something like, “I appreciate you telling me how you feel, and I value our friendship, but I don’t feel the same way romantically.” Validate his feelings without reciprocating them romantically. Let him know that your decision is about your own feelings and not a reflection of his worth.
Related Reading: 7 Most Caring Zodiac Signs Who Will Always Be There For You
5. Be prepared for him to become distant
Depending on the depth of his feelings, he might need some time and space to process your rejection. Respect this need and allow him to distance himself if he chooses to. Let him know that you are there for him as a friend when he is ready, but refrain from constantly reaching out if he seems to be withdrawing.
Infographic On How to Attract A Sagittarius Man
If you’ve fallen hard for a Sagittarius man but sense that he is being too guarded about his feelings or may not feel the same way about you, it’s natural to wonder how to trigger his attraction. Here are some clever ideas on how to attract a Sagittarius man and cast a love spell on him:
Key Pointers
- A Sagittarius man who has feelings will actively seek your company and prioritize spending quality time with you
- He will invite you to share in his adventurous and spontaneous lifestyle, valuing your presence in his exciting experiences
- He will engage you in deep, intellectual conversations, showing a genuine interest in your thoughts, beliefs, and aspirations
- Honesty and directness are hallmarks of a Sagittarius man’s communication, especially when developing feelings for someone
- Respecting his need for freedom and independence is crucial when responding to a Sagittarius man’s romantic interest, whether reciprocated or not
Final Thoughts
Understanding the signs a Sagittarius man has feelings for you can be an enlightening journey. His blend of adventurous spirit and intellectual curiosity often translates into unique expressions of affection. By recognizing these signs and responding in a way that aligns with his core personality traits—honesty, independence, and a love for adventure—you can steer the potential for romance toward a meaningful companionship.
The Most Intelligent Zodiac Sign, Ranked Highest To Lowest
Ever Wondered What Are Your Most Valuable Zodiac Sign Traits?
Best Zodiac Pairs For Marriage
Your contribution does not constitute a charitable donation. It will allow Bonobology to continue bringing you new and up-to-date information in our pursuit of helping anyone in the world to learn how to do anything.
Share Feedback
Don’t Waste Money on Windows 11 Pro Unless You Need This One Feature
Most of Windows 11 Pro’s features are replicable on Windows Home with third-party options. However, there’s one tool that wraps so many useful functionalities into a single convenient menu that it’s the sole reason you should consider Windows Pro.
What Is Group Policy Editor and What Does It Do?
Group Policy Editor, also known by its Run command of gpedit.msc, is a control center that lets you configure hundreds of Windows options that aren’t available through the regular Settings app. Think of it as Windows’ hidden control room where you can tell your computer what to do, instead of accepting whatever Microsoft decides is best for you.
When you try to control Windows behavior through the regular Settings app, you’re limited to what Microsoft thinks most users should change. Learning how to navigate the Registry Editor gives you more control, but it’s risky; one wrong move and you could break your entire system. Group Policy Editor sits in the middle, giving you powerful control with built-in safety guards.
What I like most about Group Policy Editor is its transparency. Unlike mysterious Registry tweaks you find online, every Group Policy setting comes with clear descriptions of what it does and what happens when you enable or disable it. You’re not guessing when you make changes. The interface shows you exactly which systems will be affected and provides detailed explanations for each setting.
Related
The 9 Most Annoying Windows 11 Features (and How to Fix Them in Minutes)
Make Windows 11 work for you, not against you.
Another reason to use Group Policy Editor is its reliability. When you make changes through Group Policy Editor, Windows respects those decisions. Unlike some Registry tweaks that Windows Updates can overwrite, Group Policy settings stick around and maintain your preferences. This consistency means you can set up your computer once and trust that it will stay configured the way you want it.
Overall, the key advantage of Group Policy over all other methods is its combination of safety, persistence, and transparency. It’s the professional way to manage Windows computers, even in a home environment.
How I Easily Manage My Device With Group Policy Editor
Most people think Group Policy Editor is just for IT departments, but I’ve found it’s one of the most practical tools for home users like me. I use it to shape my computer into a machine that works exactly how I want, without the usual Windows headaches.
Getting started is simple; press Win + R, type “gpedit.msc”, and hit Enter. You can also hit the Windows key and search for “group policy editor” to open the menu, or use the many other ways to open Local Group Policy Editor on Windows 11.
Once it’s open, there’s no need to feel overwhelmed. Let’s look at the various ways I use Group Policy Editor to make my computer work better for me.
After I make changes in Group Policy Editor, I always run gpupdate /force in the Command Prompt to apply them right away. Some settings might need a restart or sign-out.
Taking Control of Windows Updates
Windows Updates used to drive me crazy. My computer would restart right in the middle of important work, or it would spend twenty minutes installing updates when I just needed to quickly grab a file before heading out. Group Policy Editor completely solved this frustration.
Navigate to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Windows Update. Here you can set exactly when updates get installed. I configure my main work computer to only install updates at 2AM on Saturdays.
The best part is controlling which updates get installed automatically. I allow security updates to be installed immediately because they are critical, but I defer feature updates for several weeks. This way, I avoid being an unwilling beta tester for Microsoft’s latest experiment while still staying secure. Group Policy lets me strike the perfect balance between security and stability.
Hide Shutdown and Restart to Prevent Family Mishaps
When my nieces visit, I often let them play on my desktop computer with one of the virtual desktops I use for multitasking. Since I do my writing projects on this specific computer, having a virtual workspace prevents my work from being tampered with. However, there have been had multiple cases where I lost progress because someone accidentally pressed the power button.
To fix this, I used Group Policy Editor to disable the power button on my computer. This way, others can’t accidentally turn off the machine while downloads are in progress or I’m in the middle of certain tasks.
Disabling the power button is easy. Go to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > System > Power Management > Button Settings. There, double-click Select the Power Button Action; set it to Enabled, select Take no action, hit Apply, and then choose Okay. The change takes effect right away.
Aside from the power button issue, I’ve also grown tired of cleaning up “free game boosters” and other mysterious junk programs. I thus use a policy that blocks users from installing software unless I approve it as an admin. This has nearly eliminated malware headaches and keeps my systems running clean.
To do this, open Group Policy Editor and navigate to Computer Configuration > Windows Settings > Security Settings > Software Restriction Policies. Right-click to create a new policy if there isn’t one already. Under Enforcement, set it so that software restriction policies apply to everyone except local administrators.
This way, only I can install new programs, and I know exactly what’s on the living room computer.
Prevent Windows Bloatware From Reinstalling After an Update
It’s pretty frustrating when you do a big Windows update, only to see Microsoft fill your Start menu with apps and ads you never asked for. Suddenly, Candy Crush, TikTok, and a bunch of other “suggested” programs are back, even after you took the time to remove them before.
To stop this from happening, open Group Policy Editor and go to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Cloud Content. Look for the setting called Turn off Microsoft consumer experiences. Double-click it, set it to Enabled, and apply your changes.
This simple tweak tells Windows to stop automatically installing bloatware and suggested apps after updates or resets. Your Start menu stays clean, and you don’t have to keep uninstalling the same unwanted programs over and over again. It’s a small change that makes a big difference in keeping your PC clutter-free.
Stop Windows Telemetry and Take Back Privacy
I’m not comfortable with Windows sending usage info to Microsoft, especially from computers used for banking or sensitive work. The regular Settings app doesn’t go far enough, but Group Policy lets me lock it down.
Unlike Registry tweaks that might be incomplete or reset by updates, Group Policy provides thorough, persistent privacy protection. Third-party privacy tools often interfere with legitimate Windows functions, while Group Policy makes surgical changes.
Open Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Data Collection and Preview Builds and double-click Allow Diagnostic Data. I set it to Disabled (or Enabled with Diagnostic data off if that’s what’s available) and hit OK. Now, I know my data isn’t being sent out without my say-so.
Lock Down the Control Panel for Standard Users
I’ve had family members accidentally change my computer’s network settings or display options. With Group Policy, I can hide the Control Panel and Settings utilities from standard users, so only I can make system changes.
In User Configuration > Administrative Templates > Control Panel, double-click Prohibit access to Control Panel and PC settings, set it to Enabled, and click OK. Now, only admins can get into those settings, so I don’t have to keep fixing issues others create.
Toggle Remote Desktop Access for Safe Home Office Connections
Sometimes I need to access my home PC from another room, or even outside the house. Group Policy helps me control who can connect, keeping my machine secure.
Go to Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows Components > Remote Desktop Services > Remote Desktop Session Host > Connections, double-click Allow users to connect remotely by using Remote Desktop Services, and set it to Enabled or Disabled depending on your needs. You can also adjust other security settings in the same section to keep remote access safe.
Why This Feature Is Worth the Upgrade
With these tweaks, I’ve made my Windows 11 Pro devices easier to manage, safer, and more predictable for everyone in my household.
Whether Group Policy Editor justifies the $199 cost of Windows 11 Pro (or a $99 upgrade from Home) depends on your situation and computing habits. If you’re a casual user who’s comfortable with Windows’ default behaviors and primarily uses your computer for basic tasks, you can probably skip the upgrade. Windows 11 Home handles these everyday needs perfectly well without the added complexity.
However, the upgrade makes a lot more sense if you’re tired of fighting Windows’ default behaviors or need better control while sharing your computer with family members. The value increases significantly when you consider the other Pro features bundled in. Windows Sandbox provides safe testing environments for suspicious downloads, BitLocker offers enterprise-grade drive encryption, and Hyper-V enables virtualization for running multiple operating systems. Meanwhile, Remote Desktop functionality adds professional remote access capabilities.
For power users who want centralized system control, the ability to manage multiple user accounts, or need enhanced security features, Windows 11 Pro delivers substantial value. The time savings from automated management and peace of mind from comprehensive system control easily justify the upgrade cost for anyone who takes their computing seriously. But if you don’t need those, skip Windows Pro and save your money.
Four giant pandas to depart Japan for China
Kamasi Washington gives new LACMA building its first listen
“The general public was admitted to new Los Angeles County Museum of Art for the first time on Friday night — not to look at art but to listen to music,” wrote Times music critic Albert Goldberg in 1965. Exactly 70 years and three months later, history repeated itself.
Thursday night was the first time the public was allowed into LACMA’s David Geffen Galleries. The occasion was a massive sonic event led by jazz saxophonist Kamasi Washington. More than a hundred musicians spread out in nine groups along 900-foot serpentine route of Peter Zumthor’s new building, still empty of art.
The celebration, which drew arts and civic leaders for the first of three preview nights, was far grander than the concert on March 26,1965, that opened LACMA’s Leo S. Bing Theatre the night before the doors opened to the museum’s original galleries. That occasion, a program by the legendary Monday Evening Concerts in which Pierre Boulez conducted the premiere of his “Éclat,” helped symbolize an exuberant L.A. coming of age, with the Music Center having opened three months earlier.
Monday Evening Concerts had been a true L.A. event drawing local musical celebrities including Igor Stravinsky and showing off L.A.’s exceptional musicians. The mandolinist in “Éclat,” for instance, was Sol Babitz, the father of the late, quintessential L.A. writer Eve Babitz. Boulez, an explosive composer, eventually turned the 10-minute “‘Éclat,’ for 15 instruments” into a 25-minute orchestral masterpiece, “Éclat/Multiples,” and left unfinished sketches behind to extend that to a full hour.
Kamasi Washington performing Thursday night.
(Allen J. Schaben / Los Angeles Times)
Washington turned out to be the ideal radical expansionist to follow in Boulez’s footsteps for the new LACMA, with a resplendent enlargement of his 2018 half-hour EP, “Harmony of Difference.” The short tracks — “Desire,” “Knowledge,” “Perspective,” “Humility,” “Integrity” and “Truth” — employ nearly three dozen musicians in bursts of effusive wonder.
For LACMA, Washington tripled the number of musicians and the length. What some critics thought were bursts of bluster, however enthralling, became outright splendor. Introducing the program, LACMA Director Michael Govan called it an event that has never happened before and may never happen again. I got little sense of what this building will be like as a museum with art on the walls, but it’s a great space for thinking big musically and, in the process, for finding hope in an L.A. this year beset by fires and fear-inducing troops on our streets.
Washington is one of our rare musicians who thrives on excess. He has long been encouraged to aim toward concision, especially in his longer numbers, in which his untiring improvisations can become exhausting in their many climaxes. But that misses the point. I’ve never heard him play anything, short or long, that couldn’t have been three times longer. His vision is vast, and he needs space.
In the David Geffen Galleries, he got it. The nine ensembles included a large mixed band that he headed, along with ensembles of strings, brass, woodwinds and choruses. Each played unique arrangements of the songs, not quite synchronized, but if you ambled the long walkways, you heard the material in different contexts as though this were sonic surrealism.
A crowd gathers to watch Washington on Thursday.
(Allen J. Schaben / Los Angeles Times)
Acoustically, the Geffen is a weird combination. The large glass windows and angled concrete walls reflect sound in very different ways. Dozens of spaces vary in shape, size and acoustical properties. During a media tour earlier in the day, I found less echo than might be expected, though each space had its own peculiarities.
Washington’s ensembles were all carefully amplified and sounded surprisingly liquid, which made walking a delight as the sounds of different ensembles came in and out of focus. A chorus’ effusiveness gradually morphed into an ecstatic Washington saxophone solo down the way that then became a woodwind choir that had an organ-like quality. The whole building felt alive.
There was also the visual element. The concert took place at sunset, the light through the large windows ever changing, the “Harmony of Difference” becoming the differences of the bubbling tar pits nearby or the street life on Wilshire or LACMA’s Pavilion for Japanese Art, which looks lovely from the new galleries.
Govan’s vision is of a place where art of all kinds from all over comes together, turning the galleries into a promenade of discovery.
LACMA Director Michael Govan addressing the crowd Thursday night before Kamasi Washington performs.
(Allen J. Schaben / Los Angeles Times)
Musically, this falls more in line with John Cage’s “Musicircus,” in which any number of musical ensembles perform at chance-derived times as a carnival of musical difference — something for which the Geffen Galleries is all but tailor-made. Nevertheless, Washington brilliantly demonstrated the new building’s potential for dance, opera, even theater.
The museum may not have made performance a priority in recent years, but Washington also reminded us that the premiere of Boulez’ “Éclat” put music in LACMA’s DNA. Seven decades on, Zumthor, whether he intended it or not, now challenges LACMA to become LACMAP: Los Angeles County Museum of Art and Performance.
TVS Apache RTR 160 New Variant With OBD2B Compliance Launched in India; Check Price, Specifications and Features
Chennai, June 28: Two and three-wheeler manufacturer TVS Motor Company has launched OBD2B Compliant 2025 TVS Apache RTR 160 cc motorcycle, equipped with OBD2B compliance, Dual-Channel Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). The new range of its highly popular motorcycle is priced from Rs 1.34 lakh (ex-showroom Delhi).
“The 2025 TVS Apache RTR 160 is OBD2B compliant and introduces dual channel ABS, delivering enhanced safety and control. The motorcycle offers best-in-class performance and precision handling. The OBD2B compliance refers to on-board diagnostics systems conforming to stricter emissions norms. Equipped with features that cater to the evolving demands of today’s riders, the TVS Apache RTR 160 combines cutting-edge technology, refined design and enhanced capabilities,” the city-headquartered company said in a press release on Saturday. 2 Helmet Rule in India: Government Proposes To Make It Mandatory for 2-Wheeler Manufacturers To Provide 2 Helmets at Time of Vehicle Purchase.
The Apache RTR 160 motorcycle comes with Sport, Urban, Rain, ride modes and Bluetooth and Voice Assist TVS SmartXonnect feature. It is available in Matte Black, Pearl White with red alloy wheels among others.
Commenting on the launch of a new variant, TVS Motor Company Head-Business Premium Vimal Sumbly said, “The TVS Apache RTR 160 has consistenly set benchmarks in its segment, evolving with every generation. With segment-leading features like Ride Modes, SmartXonnect with Voice Assist and now Dual Channel ABS, it continues to redefine what riders can expect from a performance motorcycle.” Mahindra Scorpio N Teased, SUV Expected To Launch in India Soon With ADAS and Panoramic Sunroof; Check More Details.
The TVS Apache is more than a machine, it is a global community of over 6 million riders, he said. The motorcycle is available at TVS Motor Company dealerships across India, with prices starting at Rs 1,34,320 (ex-showroom Delhi), the company said.
(This is an unedited and auto-generated story from Syndicated News feed, LatestLY Staff may not have modified or edited the content body)
Substack Is Having a Moment—Again. But Time Is Running Out
Before June 8, the skilled and respected ABC News television journalist Terry Moran was neither a household name nor political lightning rod. That changed abruptly when Moran posted on X that Donald Trump’s deputy chief of staff Stephen Miller was “a world-class hater,” followed by an addendum that the president was a hater as well. (The post was later taken down.) While the statements were certainly defendable, they apparently violated ABC policy, and Moran was suspended, then dismissed. Moran, though, had one move left. On June 11, he started writing on Substack.
Moran was joining a movement based on a dream: Journalists could start a Substack newsletter and garner subscription fees that would match or exceed their previous salaries. And they would be editorially liberated! No editors to screw up copy, no censorship from bosses when advertisers complain, no corporate overlord to fire you when you say the president of the United States is a hater. Substack says that some people are indeed living the dream. CEO Chris Best recently boasted in a speech that “more than 50” of its users were pulling in a million dollars in revenue.
As more journalists get pushed out of their jobs, get fed up with their bosses, or just want to breathe the cool air of freedom, they now have what appears to be a viable escape hatch. Recently a lot of them are taking advantage of it. Jeff Bezos has been good to Substack: The Washington Post editorial page’s apparent recent disinterest in stopping democracy from dying has led popular opinion writer Jennifer Rubin to start a publication called The Contrarian, and censored editorial Post cartoonist Ann Telnaes now publishes on Substack as well. Former MSNBC host Mehdi Hassan started his own publication. Even Chuck Todd has gone indie.
You might be tempted to think that the Substack revolution is shaking up the foundations of journalism, agreeing with Substack star Emily Sundberg that newsroom leaders everywhere should be barring their doors to prevent further defections. Well, not so fast. The Substack model may work very well for a few, but it’s not so easy to march in and match a salary. Readers have to pay a high price for a voice that they once enjoyed in a publication they subscribe to. And writers have to get used to the idea that the breadth of their wisdom is limited to a small percentage of patrons. Is Substack sustainable for writers addressing a general audience?
Just in the last week or so, a cluster of critics have been publishing that the platform may be on shaky ground. It started when Eric Newcomer—posting on his own successful Substack—celebrated Substack’s recent influx of big names and reported that the platform told investors it was taking in $45 million a year in revenue. He claimed it was seeking a new investment round which would value the company at $700 million. (Substack did not confirm those numbers.)
But then Dylan Byers of Puck looked at those numbers and wondered whether the bottom line valuation was actually less than in the previous rounds. Byers, like other critics, charged that once you get past the few real big earners, the platform was full of low-flying mediocrities: “The truth is that the vast majority of the content on Substack is boring, amateurish or batshit crazy,” he wrote. His conclusion was that Substack was a media company trying to be valued as a tech company, which is a familiar fail point for similar companies. (WIRED itself once failed at an IPO for that very reason.)
Ana Marie Cox, who once enjoyed blogging fame as Wonkette, is even grimmer, writing in her newsletter that Substack “is as unstable as a SpaceX launch.” She wasn’t impressed with the more recent influx of name writers. “How many Terry Morans does Substack have room for?” she wrote. “Is there even a public appetite for a dozen Terry Morans, each independently Terry Moran-ing in his own newsletter?”
Cox is referring to subscription fatigue, which is something I think of every time a sign-up page pops up when opening a new Substack. Typically, Substack pros solicit a monthly fee of $5-10 or an annual rate of $50-150. Usually there’s a free tier of content, but journalists who hope to make at least part of their livelihood on Substack save the good stuff for paid customers. Compared to subscribing to full-fledged publications, this is a terrible value proposition. After leaving The Atlantic, celebrated writer Derek Thompson started a Substack that cost $80 a year—that’s one penny more than a digital subscription to the magazine he just left! (The Atlantic will probably spend $300,000 to replace him with someone else worth reading.) It doesn’t take too many of those subscriptions to match the cost of The New York Times, which probably has 100 journalists as good as Substack writers, and you get Wordle to boot.
Thune Says Health Care Often ‘Comes With a Job.’ The Reality’s Not Simple or Straightforward.
“A lot of times, health care comes with a job.”
Sen. John Thune (R-S.D.), in an interview with KOTA on May 30, 2025
Millions of people are expected to lose access to Medicaid and Affordable Care Act marketplace health insurance plans if federal lawmakers approve the One Big Beautiful Bill Act, President Donald Trump’s domestic policy package, which is now moving through the Senate.
Senate Majority Leader John Thune discussed health care and the pending legislation in an interview with KOTA, a South Dakota TV station. But he focused on a different kind of health insurance — employer-sponsored insurance.
“A lot of times, health care comes with a job,” Thune said.
Thune’s comments in the interview were made in the context of highlighting part of the GOP’s economic policy objective. “Creating those better-paying jobs that come with benefits is ultimately the goal here,” he said.
KFF Health News reached out to Thune’s office to find out the basis for this comment. His communications director, Ryan Wrasse, responded by reiterating Thune’s message: “Getting a job has the potential to lead a worker to acquiring health care.”
Paul Fronstin, director of health benefits research at the Employee Benefit Research Institute, said Thune’s comment may also be alluding to discussions surrounding Medicaid work requirements. The One Big Beautiful Bill Act would let nondisabled adults enroll in Medicaid only if they prove they’re volunteering, working, or searching or training for work.
Medicaid, funded by the federal government and states, is the country’s main health insurance program for people with low incomes. Some people with disabilities also qualify.
Some Republicans have built on the jobs talking point in defending the Medicaid cuts and work requirements. Sen. James Lankford (R-Okla.), for instance, told CNBC the bill isn’t about “kicking people off Medicaid. It’s transitioning from Medicaid to employer-provided health care.”
But the health policy experts we checked with made clear that getting a job isn’t a guarantee for getting work-sponsored insurance.
Employer-Sponsored Health Insurance: The Basics
These experts said most jobs do offer health insurance. But they also said the link between employment and work-based coverage is not always straightforward.
“When I see this statement, I’m like, ‘I’ve got so much more to say about this.’ But I’m not arguing with the statement,” Fronstin said.
Matthew Rae, an associate director focused on researching private insurance at KFF, a health information nonprofit that includes KFF Health News, also weighed in.
“Employer-sponsored coverage remains the bedrock of how people get health insurance in the United States,” Rae said. “I would say that getting a job is not a guarantee you’re going to have health insurance. It just increases your chances of getting it.”
About 60% of Americans younger than 65 receive health insurance through their job or as the spouse, child, or other dependent of someone insured through their work, according to 2023 KFF data.
Among workers ages 18 to 64 who were eligible but didn’t sign up for their workplace insurance, 28% said the reason they decided not to enroll was that the plans were too expensive, 2023 KFF data showed.
Most of these workers found health insurance elsewhere, such as through a relative’s workplace plan. But a small percentage of eligible employees, 3.7%, were uninsured.
Health insurance has been “the most valued benefit in the workplace” since businesses began offering it to recruit employees in a tight labor market during World War II, Fronstin said.
Federal law also encourages companies to offer plans. Under the Affordable Care Act, employers with 50 or more full-time workers are penalized if they don’t offer most employees insurance that the federal government considers affordable.
As of last year, 54% of companies offered health insurance to at least some employees, according to KFF.
But that’s not the main way the ACA helped lower the rate of people without health insurance, said Melissa Thomasson, a professor at Miami University in Ohio who specializes in the economic history of health insurance. “Nearly all of that” change, she said, came from the ACA creating private marketplace plans and allowing states to expand Medicaid eligibility.
Health policy analysts say the One Big Beautiful Bill would make it more difficult for people to qualify or afford marketplace plans, with proposals that would increase paperwork, shorten enrollment periods, and allow enhanced tax credits to fizzle out. Thomasson also noted that political rhetoric surrounding jobs and health insurance doesn’t always align.
“We often talk about small businesses being the engine of job creation,” but those are the businesses that often can’t afford to offer workplace insurance, she said.
So Who Isn’t Insured Through Workplace Insurance?
The most obvious category of people who don’t have workplace insurance are those who don’t have a job. This group includes children and retirees, people searching for work, people who choose not to work, and those who can’t work, because of a disability or illness.
Another group without employer-provided insurance is the 25% of people ages 18 to 64 who have a job but are unable to obtain such insurance, according to 2023 data from KFF.
Some of these people work for companies that don’t offer health insurance. These employers tend to be small businesses or part of certain industries, such as farming and construction.
Others are part-time, temporary, or seasonal workers at companies that offer health insurance only to full-time employees. Workers with low incomes are significantly less likely than those with higher incomes to be eligible for workplace insurance, according to 2023 KFF data.
People who aren’t employed or don’t get insurance through their job can get coverage in other ways. Some are insured through a relative’s workplace plan, while others purchase plans and may qualify for subsidies on the ACA marketplace.
Others get insurance through Medicaid or Medicare, the federal health insurance program for people 65 or older and some people with disabilities.
Cost and Quality — And Therefore Access to Care — Vary
Just because someone has health insurance doesn’t mean they’ll get the health care they need. People may skip or delay care if their plans are unaffordable or if they limit in-network providers.
“Health benefits come in all shapes and sizes,” Fronstin said. “Some employers offer very generous benefits, and others less so.”
KFF data shows that premiums and enrollees’ cost-sharing expenses grew faster than wages from 2008 to 2018 but have slowed in recent years.
Whether workplace insurance is affordable significantly varies by income. According to 2020 KFF data, lower-income families insured through a full-time worker spent, on average, 10.4% of their income on premiums and out-of-pocket costs. That’s more than twice the rate when looking at families across all incomes.
Our Ruling
Thune said, “A lot of times, health care comes with a job.”
This statement is partially accurate. Most workers in the U.S. get health coverage through work. But it glosses over aspects of our nation’s job-based health insurance system — such as how costs and coverage, especially for those with lower incomes, can make an employer plan out of reach even if it is available.
Bottom line: Not all jobs provide health insurance or offer plans to all their workers. When they do, cost and quality vary widely — making Thune’s statement an oversimplification.
We rate this statement Half True.
Sources
KOTA interview with Sen. John Thune, May 30, 2025.
CNBC interview with Sen. James Lankford, June 5, 2025.
KFF, “2024 Employer Health Benefits Survey,” Oct. 9, 2024.
KFF, “Employer Responsibility Under the Affordable Care Act,” Feb. 29, 2024.
KFF, “Employer-Sponsored Health Insurance 101,” May 28, 2024.
Peterson-KFF Health System Tracker, “What Are the Recent Trends in Employer-Based Health Coverage?” Dec. 22, 2023.
Peterson-KFF Health System Tracker, “How Affordability of Employer Coverage Varies by Family Income,”March 10, 2022.
Peterson-KFF Health System Tracker, “Tracking the Rise in Premium Contributions and Cost-Sharing for Families With Large Employer Coverage,” Aug. 14, 2019.
Manhattan Institute, “Put Employees in Control of Health Insurance with ‘Worker’s Choice ICHRA,’” May 22, 2025.
Brookings, “Uninsurance Rates Have Fallen Significantly Following the Affordable Care Act,” July 22, 2024.
Harvard Business Review, “Why Do Employers Provide Health Care in the First Place?” March 15, 2019.
Congressional Budget Office letter on the One Big Beautiful Bill Act increasing the number of uninsured people, June 4, 2025.
Phone interview with Paul Fronstin, director of health benefits research at the Employee Benefit Research Institute and a member of the Commonwealth Fund’s National Task Force on the Future Role of Employers in the U.S. Health System, June 6, 2025.
Phone interview with Melissa Thomasson, professor and health economist at Miami University, June 6, 2025.
Phone interview with Maanasa Kona, associate research professor at the Center on Health Insurance Reforms at Georgetown University, June 6, 2025.
Phone interview with Matthew Rae, associate director for the Health Care Marketplace Program at KFF, June 10, 2025.
Phone interview with Sally Pipes, president and CEO of the Pacific Research Institute, June 11, 2025.
Email correspondence with Ryan Wrasse, communications director for Sen. John Thune, June 10, 2025.
KFF Health News, “Some Employers Test Arrangement To Give Workers Allowance for Coverage,” Oct. 2, 2024.
KFF Health News, “Trump’s ‘One Big Beautiful Bill’ Continues Assault on Obamacare,” June 3, 2025.
KFF Health News is a national newsroom that produces in-depth journalism about health issues and is one of the core operating programs at KFF—an independent source of health policy research, polling, and journalism. Learn more about KFF.
USE OUR CONTENT
This story can be republished for free (details).
A Really Fun Game Is Leaving Steam Soon But Costs Less Than $1 Right Now
A really cool parkour game is being delisted from Steam on June 30, but you still have a chance to grab it for dirt cheap. Supermoves: World of Parkour is on sale right now for just $0.79 ahead of its removal next week.
Despite being a blast to play, Supermoves has had a bit of a tragic life following its release last year. Based on both critical and Steam review response, Supermoves is a blast, combining Mirror’s Edge-inspired freerunning with some cool multiplayer modes. However, the game did not sell particularly well, and developer Makea Games was forced to shut down back in April.
Tomi Toikka, the founder and former CEO of Makea Games, stated that he has been in negotiations to try to retain control over the Supermoves IP, but to no avail. As he shared in a final update announcing the delisting, Makea’s financing structure apparently prohibits any path for Toikka to keep the game on sale. He wrote, “After shutting down Makea Games, I had hoped I could salvage the game IP to be preserved in another game company, so players could still play the game they own online, and maybe it could see a resurgence in new players one day. But sometimes the cost of doing business is losing something you love.”
As part of the process of removing the game from sale and the restrictions imposed by Makea’s liquidation proceedings, Toikka is also shutting down all of Supermoves’ multiplayer features. This means that the game can only be played offline, and while there is a single-player mode that will remain fully functional, much of the original game will be rendered unusable.
Being forced to essentially eliminate a large swath of his own game has, understandably, made Toikka frustrated and upset. “If you care about digital preservation, independent development, or public R&D policy, I hope the fate of Supermoves sparks a wider conversation about how we keep creative work alive, even when the business behind it closes its doors,” he wrote. “I’ll cherish the time I spent working on the game with the greats at Makea Games forever. I just wish I could have played the game online with my future kids someday.”
If you’re interested in checking out the game, grab it as soon as possible, as it’ll be gone for good on Monday, June 30. The base game goes for $0.79 right now, and the deluxe edition–which includes some cosmetics as well as a copy of the soundtrack–is available for $2.43.
AI sees what doctors miss: Fatty liver disease hidden in chest x-rays
Fatty liver disease, caused by the accumulation of fat in the liver, is estimated to affect one in four people worldwide. If left untreated, it can lead to serious complications, such as cirrhosis and liver cancer, making it crucial to detect early and initiate treatment.
Currently, standard tests for diagnosing fatty liver disease include ultrasounds, CTs, and MRIs, which require costly specialized equipment and facilities. In contrast, chest X-rays are performed more frequently, are relatively inexpensive, and involve low radiation exposure. Although this test is primarily used to examine the condition of the lungs and heart, it also captures part of the liver, making it possible to detect signs of fatty liver disease. However, the relationship between chest X-rays and fatty liver disease has rarely been a subject of in-depth study.
Therefore, a research group led by Associate Professor Sawako Uchida-Kobayashi and Associate Professor Daiju Ueda at Osaka Metropolitan University’s Graduate School of Medicine developed an AI model that can detect the presence of fatty liver disease from chest X-ray images.
In this retrospective study, a total of 6,599 chest X-ray images containing data from 4,414 patients were used to develop an AI model utilizing controlled attenuation parameter (CAP) scores. The AI model was verified to be highly accurate, with the area under the receiver operating characteristic curve (AUC) ranging from 0.82 to 0.83.
“The development of diagnostic methods using easily obtainable and inexpensive chest X-rays has the potential to improve fatty liver detection. We hope it can be put into practical use in the future,” stated Professor Uchida-Kobayashi.
Junior Legal Associate at IThum World, Delhi NCR
About the Organization
IThum World, an eminent commercial real estate developer in Delhi NCR, is widely known for its high standards in construction and delivery. With 35+ years of excellence in construction and delivery of over 5 million sq. ft. area, we have an edge in the real estate industry. Our landmark delivered projects like The Corenthum, IThum, and Caladium have given immense accolades and helped us grow as a brand.
With the mantra of Quality Construction and Timely Delivery, we are creating opportunities for millions of people all around. We are leading the real estate industry in Delhi NCR with our ultra-modern commercial projects in Noida and Greater Noida. These projects are IThum Heights, IThums 62, IThums 73 and IThums Galleria. Keeping a customer-centric approach on top of the agenda, we strive to become a leading name in commercial real estate development in India.
About the Opportunity
We are looking to expand our legal team at IThum World, a leading real estate Group based in Delhi NCR with over 30 years of industry experience and a strong reputation for delivering cutting-edge infrastructure.
Role and Responsibilities
- Real Estate Advisory – Assisting with due diligence in land/property transactions, identifying risks, and facilitating final closures. Vetting real estate documents for legal and compliance risks. Drafting and reviewing documentation for RERA registration, extensions, and compliance (QPRs, audit filings, etc.) across UP-RERA, HARERA, etc.
- Contract Management – Drafting and vetting commercial contracts such as MOUs, LOIs, NDAs, Lease Deeds, Shareholder Agreements (SHA), Share Purchase Agreements (SPA), License Agreements, etc. Specialized focus on real estate documents, including Buyer Builder Agreements (BBAs), Possession Certificates, and related formalities. Preparing concise legal briefs for internal departments and senior management.
- Corporate Governance – Coordinating with company secretaries, finance teams, CRM executives, auditors, and external counsel. Supporting secretarial work and compliance activities.
- Legal Research – Staying current with regulatory changes and industry-specific legal developments. Preparing monthly legal updates and ensuring the applicability of relevant laws and regulations.
- Litigation & Dispute Management – Assisting with internal teams to ensure proper representation before courts and regulatory authorities, along with coordinating with external counsel, managing litigation trackers. Drafting Commercial Suits, Written Statements, Legal Notices, responses for and on behalf of the company, and reviewing resolution plans under IBC for legal and commercial compliance.
Education and Qualifications
- 3-year or 5-year LL.B. from a recognized university (Bar Enrolment – 2022).
- 2-3 years of post-qualification experience in commercial real estate (In-House legal team or law firm). Prior in-house corporate legal experience preferred.
- Proficient in Contract Law, RERA, Arbitration, Companies Act, IBC, and Real Estate Laws. Must be able to read and write Hindi fluently.
Location
Sector 62, Noida (Immediate Joiner)
Work Mode
Work from Office (Six Days Working)
Salary
As per profile (Negotiable)
How to Apply?
Interested Candidate can email your CVs with a brief introduction to RISHI GUJRAL, HEAD LEGAL, at [email protected].
Click here for the LinkedIn Notification
Disclaimer: Charging money from students for internships or from job applicants is unethical and can result in blacklisting. We strongly discourage requesting any kind of payment from interns, including processing fees or charges for certificates. If you have any concerns, please contact us at [email protected]
Delhi monsoon: Rain, poetry, and birds are on radar of heritage walkers this season; ready to soak in the vibe?
Clouds hover over the city making way for monsoon, announcing that it’s time to soak in the vibe of the season. But Delhiites are not one to do that by just sitting beside the window That’s why walk curators across the city are gearing up to curate special experiences where raindrops kiss the face when sky turns dramatic, and one gets to be amid Nature that acquires a fresh makeover in that moment. From chasing misty sunsets to spotting flashy colourful wings, and listening to rain-soaked poetry, you can do it all with your walk buddies. Here’s how you can get just the right mix of calm, creativity, and pure vibe. Let the clouds lead the way!
Monsoon + Poetry = Magic
“The monsoon in Delhi has its own charm, it’s like poetry coming to life,” says Ramit Mitra of DelhiByFoot (+91-9871181775), which is hosting a special monsoon-themed, poetry-infused heritage walk at Mehrauli Archaeological Park on July 6. “The poetry we share moves between classical and contemporary, from Hindi to Urdu,” adds co-founder Priyanka Bhaskar, “Take for example, Kalidasa’s Meghdoot, where he names the clouds as messengers to his estranged lover. Then there are verses that instantly bring back childhood rains, Kaagaz ki kashti, baarish ka paani…” What makes the evening special, she says, is the spontaneity: “Nothing is rehearsed. Poetry flows naturally, inspired by the weather, the sky, and the moment itself. And yes, attendees are welcome to join in and recite a few lines too, making it an immersive experience.”
Catching winged wonders
Rains don’t just transform the landscape, they bring forests and parks alive with colour, calls and movement. “The monsoon is when birds nest, sing and flaunt their brightest plumage; it’s like their festival of life,” says Nikhil Devasar of delhibird (+91-9910003399), who is hosting special birdwatching walks this season. “The star of these walks is the Indian Pitta, a stunning little bird that carries the mood of the monsoon on its wings,” he shares, “With nine vivid colours shimmering across its feathers, it’s fondly called navrang. In places like Bhondsi, Gurugram, it arrives with the first monsoon showers, building a ball-shaped nest from dry leaves and twigs. Even its fleeting glimpse feels like spotting a rainbow with wings.” Other monsoon visitors include the Sarus crane (above), the world’s tallest flying bird, which also breeds during this season.
Click, click: Sunrise to sunset
For photography enthusiasts, the monsoon offers the perfect chance to blend their craft with the season’s mood. Virendra Shekhawat of Delhi Photography Club (+91-8826712162), says, “Capturing a sunrise or sunset when the sky is cloaked in clouds is magical.” Their next walk is scheduled for July 13 at Qutb Minar, and you don’t need a DSLR to join in, just a camera, a keen eye, and the monsoon does the rest. “We organise in small groups of about 20 photogs at places like Sunder Nursery, Lodhi Gardens, etc.”
Pearls on water
The city’s water bodies also take on a unique character during the rains, offering a very different experience in the monsoon. “Walking by the lake at Sanjay Van Park in the rain is a whole vibe,” says Manu Rao of Namaste Delhi Travels (+91-9953011097), which is hosting monsoon special lake walks. “These walks are perfect for those who want to experience Delhi’s softer, quieter side,” he adds, “The best part is the pause… we give everyone time to sit by the lake, soak in the stillness, jot down thoughts, or simply watch the rain. When it drizzles, the lake shimmers and the raindrops look like tiny pearls dancing on the water. We also offer private walks and can customise the experience to suit group’s preferences.”
Biocryst sells Europe business; Peter Marks criticizes new FDA vaccine rules
Today, a brief rundown of news involving Biocryst and Peter Marks, as well as updates from UCB and Altimmune that you may have missed.
Biocryst said Friday it is selling the European business of its hereditary angioedema drug Orladeyo to Italy’s Neopharmed Gentili for $250 million upfront. The deal, which transfers BioCryst’s European sales organization to Neopharmed, promises $14 million in additional milestone payments associated with sales in central and eastern Europe. Biocryst said it will use the proceeds to pay off about $249 million in term debt owed to Pharmakon Advisors, which it said will save $70 million in interest. Sale of the European organization will save an additional $50 million in annual operating costs. The company now expects to end 2027 with $700 million in cash, an increase of $400 million from previous guidance. — Jonathan Gardner
The Food and Drug Administration is overstepping its authority over vaccination practices with new rules that will limit who can receive annual COVID-19 shots, according to a New England Journal of Medicine commentary authored by Peter Marks, the former head of the FDA division that reviews vaccines. Marks left the FDA’s vaccine review division following disagreements with health secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. The FDA’s new rules require any new COVID-19 booster for healthy, non-elderly adults and children must be supported by a large, randomized controlled trial evaluating death or hospitalization before approval, a policy that could make it difficult for any new vaccines to gain wide approval. Marks wrote that the FDA has “taken on aspects of policymaking that have previously been in the domain” of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Moreover, it did so without a public discussion of the changes or consulting with outside public health experts who advise the FDA and CDC. In addition, he said the changes ignore the existing safety data for the COVID-19 shots and the continued hospitalizations and deaths caused by the virus. — Jonathan Gardner
Experimental liver disease drug pemvidutide met one of the two main goals of a Phase 2 trial in MASH, resolving the inflammatory disorder and stabilizing fibrosis in significantly more participants than did placebo after 24 weeks of treatment, its developer, Altimmune, said Thursday. In the trial, 59% of people who got a 1.2 milligram weekly shot of pemvidutide saw MASH resolution and no increase in fibrosis score, as did 52% of people who got a 1.8 milligram shot, the company said. Of those who received a placebo, 19% saw MASH resolution and no fibrosis increase. The drug missed on a second goal, fibrosis improvement with no worsening of MASH. Altimmune shares fell by more than half following the news. — Jonathan Gardner
Belgian drugmaker UCB plans to submit fenfluramine, one of the two drugs that made up the scandal-ridden “fen-phen” diet regimen, for approval in a new setting, now that it has positive results from a late-stage study. The company didn’t release any detailed data, but said the drug, which was tested as an add-on therapy for patients with a rare genetic disorder that gravely impairs brain development, hit the study’s main goal for effectiveness. It was also “generally well tolerated,” according to UCB, which wants to file it with regulatory agencies “as soon as possible.” An oral solution of fenfluramine is already cleared in the U.S. to treat Dravet syndrome and Lennox-Gastaut syndrome, two other uncommon, severe diseases characterized by persistent seizures. — Jacob Bell
5 Common Landscape Design Styles for Australian Properties
Landscape design is absolutely crucial for property owners to consider. A home’s exterior can increase property value, improve curb appeal, impress potential buyers, and, notably, make living in a home all the more enjoyable. The importance of curbside appeal has been written about in depth. There is no denying that first impressions matter in the selling, purchasing, and valuation realms of the property market. But getting it right is not as simple as throwing money at it.
Tip: You need to consider the strengths of your home and area and play to them, while harnessing refined styles to bring together a design that truly makes a strong impression.
Across Australia, five landscape designs have gained widespread popularity for their practicality and visual appeal. In this guide, we will discuss the elements of each design, empowering you to choose the landscaping style that best suits your home and lifestyle and adds value to your property in the eyes of a broad range of buyers.
Contemporary and Modern Landscape Design
This design is incredibly common among modern builds. The contemporary or modern style is unmistakable – clean lines, minimalist gardening, geometric hardscapes, and neutral colour palettes. There’s a clear focus on function over form, making it a practical and efficient choice for many Australians. Those who opt for this style typically match it with a low-maintenance landscape, featuring drought-resistant plants, durable pavement, and smooth decking. Contemporary landscaping usually features modern materials, such as concrete and metal – think matte Aluminium batten fencing over traditional white timber fences.
This style is sleek, architectural, and free from visual clutter, but that doesn’t mean it’s cold and uninviting. Modern landscape designs often contrast organic materials to create a special atmosphere that is soaked in earthy elements while remaining clean and easy to maintain. They may include modular outdoor furniture, steel or concrete fire pits, and built-in lighting along walkways so that guests can enjoy a soothing, understated environment.
Coastal Landscape Design
Inspired by the world-famous Australian beachside lifestyle, this design is breezy and relaxed. Light colours, open layouts, and salt-tolerant plants – such as lavender, seaside daisies, and stick yucca – are staples in coastal landscape design. Native grasses and succulents are also common additions. You may see design elements that appear to have been weathered by the sea air, even in homes far from the coast. This may include driftwood accents, crushed shells in pathways, or sandstone.
The coastal landscape design is all about creating a relaxing atmosphere. The furniture, often in white or pale finishes, is durable yet charming, and drenched by the sun. Guests will enjoy feeling relaxed as they savour the sensation of a sea breeze while dining, capturing the essence of Australia’s iconic coast and making them feel calm and at ease.
Native and Australian Bush Landscape Design
This design embodies and celebrates the natural beauty of Australia, drawing its inspiration from local flora and natural forms. Those who choose a native landscape often believe in sustainability, prioritising fire safety, or creating safe habitats for Australian birds and insects. Gardens often feature indigenous plants, such as kangaroo paws, bottlebrush, and banksia. These plants offer numerous benefits to homeowners and the environment, ranging from increased water efficiency to reduced soil erosion.
Design choices tend to be looser and less formal. The Australian bush landscape design often features curved paths, natural materials, and elements that blend seamlessly into the surrounding nature rather than dominating it. The result is a landscape that feels authentically connected to and in harmony with the country surrounding it.
Formal and Traditional Landscape Design
Timelessness is key to maintaining and improving property value. The traditional landscape design is timeless and elegant, with a clear European influence, making it a popular choice for heritage homes. In this design, you’ll see an emphasis on symmetry, order, and strength. Hedges are carefully manicured, lawns are well-maintained, and gardens often feature grand centrepieces like rose bushes or ornamental trees. Materials used in this design are romantic – think brick walls with ivy, cobblestone pathways, ornate fountains, and iron accents.
This style is perfect for hosting garden parties or simply boosting the curb appeal of a property. It’s the ideal choice for those who appreciate classic beauty and a sense of tradition that stands the test of time and will never alienate future buyers.
Tropical and Subtropical Landscape Design
Those living in the humid, warm climates of northern Australia will appreciate this landscaping style, born to thrive in this region. The tropical and subtropical design uses the dense foliage of palms and ferns to create an atmosphere similar to that of a private resort. Unlike the coastal landscape design, this style prioritises shade, moisture, and a more wild and chaotic arrangement. Pools are a common feature in this landscape, with glass pool fencing enhancing both the aesthetic appeal and safety of the swimming area.
Bamboo and natural stone elements fit this design beautifully. Winding paths, dark timber furniture, and subtle walkway lighting lend themselves to a lush environment guests will feel immediately immersed in, allowing them to relax and unwind in peace.
Key Takeaways
From the structured modern style to the lush freedom of the tropical design, each of these five common landscape design styles brings something unique to Australian properties. No matter your style, selecting foliage and other design elements that work together in harmony can result in a home exterior that feels cohesive and appeals to potential buyers.
- Contemporary and modern landscape designs focus on function, neutral palettes, and minimalism.
- Coastal landscape designs emphasise relaxation, salt-resistant plants, and beach-inspired elements.
- Native and bush landscape designs embrace Australian flora and sustainability.
- Formal and traditional landscape designs draw inspiration from European elegance.
- Tropical and subtropical landscape designs capture the lushness and tranquillity typical of a rainforest environment.
I Let ChatGPT Make Tough Decisions for Me—Here’s How It Works
I’m sure I’m not alone in often struggling to make decisions. It’s not just the big decisions, such as whether to move house or change jobs, but also everyday minutiae, like what to eat for dinner or what to watch on TV.
Our lives are all punctuated by a never-ending succession of decisions, both big and small. And that can sometimes feel overwhelming. Thankfully, artificial intelligence, and (in my case) ChatGPT in particular, can help.
Using ChatGPT to Help Me Make Decisions
We all make multiple decisions every single day. And that can sometimes feel a little overwhelming. So, when the number of decisions I need to make starts racking up, and I start to feel a little overwhelmed as a result, I turn to ChatGPT for help.
Related
What Are Large Language Models (LLMs) and How Do They Work?
Generative AI is all the rage, but how does a large language model work?
As a large language model, ChatGPT can analyze the information I feed it and logically spit out an answer. So, with some sensible prompting, you can have ChatGPT make decisions for you. Or, if you don’t like the answer it provides, use ChatGPT’s responses to make your own mind up.
Which Restaurant Should I Visit Next?
My partner and I try to eat out at restaurants fairly often. And while it isn’t always possible due to stretched times and budgets, when we do venture out, we like to try new places. But which restaurants should we visit? After all, there are dozens of decent restaurants within traveling distance, so how do we sort the wheat from the chaff and narrow the many options down to just a few?
ChatGPT is an ideal tool to assist with this decision. I tend to start broadly, before providing more information to help ChatGPT narrow in on its choices. The important details are what location you’re referring to, what type of cuisine you’re considering, and the budget you have available. With these three pieces of information, ChatGPT can provide a list of choices for you to pick from, allowing you to make the final decision.
Where’s the Best Place to Go on Vacation?
My partner and I are fortunate enough to be able to go on vacation once a year, providing a nice respite from the pressures of work and home life. However, with just one or two weeks available each year, deciding where to go on vacation becomes an important thing to get right. The first question that needs answering is where to go on vacation, followed closely by where to stay in that location.
As with all of these decisions, ChatGPT requires some information before it can help you choose. In this case, the pertinent information is the type of holiday you’re looking to go on (from a relaxing beach holiday to a cultural city break), the budget you have available, and the time of year you want to travel. Provide this, and ChatGPT will offer suggestions that can then be refined further with additional prompts. Once you have decided where to go, you should consider using Google Maps to make your vacations better.
Which PS5 Game Should I Play Next?
After sticking with my PS4 for a long time, in 2024, I finally took the plunge and purchased a PS5. Since then, I have purchased several games, and have a huge back catalog of PlayStation Plus games available too. Which raises the dilemma of which game to play next? With free time at a premium once you reach adulthood and all the responsibilities that come with that, not wasting time on bad games is important.
You can ask ChatGPT to decide from the list of games you already have available, or allow it to direct you to all the games available for PS5. Either way, you should provide the AI chatbot with the genres of games you generally enjoy playing, whether you enjoy single-player or multiplayer games, and whether you want a short burst of gaming fun or a longer challenge. You can also list games you have previously enjoyed playing.
In What Order Should I Tackle My To-Do List?
I suspect everyone reading this has a to-do list, whether you have it written down or it’s just in your head. There’s always something that needs doing, whether at work or regarding your home life. But in what order should you tackle your to-do list? What tasks should be prioritized over others? Ticking things off your to-do list in the best order is crucial in order to keep everyone happy and life moving in the right direction.
To have ChatGPT help you tackle your to-do list, you just need to feed your to-do list into the AI chatbot. This can either be in the form of a bulleted list or a random brain dump. Either way, ChatGPT will help you organize it and prioritize certain tasks over others. ChatGPT can do this based on your own preferences, whether that’s urgency, importance, time required, or anything else that’s important to you.
What Improvements Should I Make to My Home?
If you’re lucky enough to own your own home, you’ll know that there are always jobs that need doing. Many of these jobs are just maintenance, with certain appliances and elements needing to be maintained regularly. However, you should also consider making home improvements in order to make your house a nicer place to live and/or increase its value when it comes time to sell and move on to new pastures, especially if the home improvements you’re making involve smart technology.
ChatGPT can list a whole range of home improvements you should consider doing, either to make your home a nicer place to live or increase its potential value when selling it. Once ChatGPT provides its initial list of potential home improvements to make, you can provide further prompts to direct ChatGPT to help you further. Naming particular rooms, particular issues, your budget, the type of home you own, and/or how long you plan on staying there before selling can all help direct ChatGPT.
What Career Path Should I Pursue?
With job markets ever-evolving, chances are that most of us will need to switch career paths at least once in our working lives. Having been a freelance writer and editor for 20 years, I’m facing the dilemma of whether to stay in this field until I retire or switch paths now before I get too old to do so. But if I decide to switch, what would the best career path be for me to pursue, given my current experience and skill set?
ChatGPT can help direct you down certain career paths based on the information you provide. That information includes your interests and passions, your skills and strengths, and your level of education. The best thing to do is zero in on what’s important to you. If you would prefer to work in a field that aligns with your values, for example, focus on that over the potential salary level of each potential profession.
How ChatGPT Has Improved My Decision-Making Process
ChatGPT has helped me make decisions in several ways.
As you can see above, it has literally made decisions for me when asked, taking the mental burden off my shoulders and onto the shoulders of the large language model that powers ChatGPT. Whether it’s big decisions or small ones, ChatGPT has helped resolve some dilemmas for me.
The other, equally important way that ChatGPT has helped is by showing me how to work through problems to make better decisions for myself. By observing how ChatGPT approaches decision-making through a logical process, I have acquired some new techniques.
Seaside public art, screening and dialogue
Where the tide meets the stage, Aranya becomes a canvas. For eleven days, this stretch of sand transforms into a living dialogue — between art and nature, tradition and avant-garde, the ephemeral and the eternal.
Jeff Bezos and Lauren Sánchez get married: What to know about wedding
Jeff Bezos and Lauren Sánchez are officially husband and wife.
The Amazon founder, who’s been linked to Sánchez since 2019, hosted an extravagant, reportedly $50-million celebration in Venice, Italy, stretching three days. From the lavish location to the celebrity guest list, the event has attracted a media frenzy, but also experienced its fair share of hiccups — including a last-minute venue change to the island of San Giorgio Maggiore.
Here’s what we know about the wedding so far.
The wedding dress
Sánchez opted for a custom Dolce & Gabbana wedding gown inspired by Sophia Loren’s gown in the 1958 film “Houseboat.” This marks the first time Sánchez has worn such a high-necked formal dress, she told Vogue.
“It is a departure from what people expect,” she said, “from what I expect — but it’s very much me.”
The bride shared two images of her dress Friday on Instagram, where she also updated her handle to @laurensanchezbezos.
Other ensembles planned for the big day were a corseted gown inspired by the Rita Hayworth film “Gilda” and an Oscar de la Renta cocktail dress with 175,000 crystals, according to Vogue.
Lauren Sánchez departs from her hotel in Venice for pre-wedding celebrations.
(Antonio Calanni / AP)
Something Blue Origin
Sánchez’s “something borrowed” was a pair of Dolce & Gabbana Alta Gioielleria Miracolo earrings, according to Vogue. And her “something blue,” she revealed, was a souvenir she brought on her controversial 11-minute Blue Origin spaceflight.
“It was literally one of the most profound experiences I’ve ever had in my life,” she told Vogue. “Jeff said, ‘It’s gonna change you more than you think,’ and it completely has, visually, spiritually.”
Kim and Khloé Kardashian were among the celebrities who attended Jeff Bezos and Lauren Sánchez’s wedding.
(Luigi Costantini / AP)
A star-studded guest list
As expected, several A-listers made the 200-person guest list.
Notably, Orlando Bloom arrived solo after reportedly ending his engagement with Katy Perry. Sánchez seemed to acknowledge Perry’s absence, commenting, “We miss you Katy,” Friday on the pop star’s Instagram. Perry famously joined Sánchez on the Blue Origin space flight and has received a disproportionate amount of the criticism.
Though President Trump was not present (despite reports that he received an invitation), his daughter Ivanka Trump and Ivanka’s husband, Jared Kushner, were in attendance, along with in-laws Karlie Kloss and Joshua Kushner.
Other celebrities in attendance were Kim and Khloé Kardashian; Kris, Kylie and Kendall Jenner; Bill Gates and Paula Hurd; Sydney Sweeney; Tom Brady; Leonardo DiCaprio; Usher; Eva Longoria and José Bastón; Diane von Furstenberg and Barry Diller; Oprah Winfrey; and Gayle King, who was also aboard the Blue Origin spaceflight.
Though President Trump wasn’t present, his daughter Ivanka Trump and her husband, Jared Kushner, attended the wedding.
(Luigi Costantini / AP)
Protests and criticism
The lavish celebration was not without its critics. The No Space for Bezos movement — a combination of anti-cruise ship campaigners, university groups and housing advocates — staged protests throughout Venice leading up to the event, even planning to obstruct canal access to prevent wedding guests from reaching the venue, according to the Associated Press. The newlyweds reportedly had to make an eleventh hour venue change, opting for the more secluded and secure Arsenale for the Saturday reception, according to local media.
Xiaomi YU7 Price, Specifications and Features Revealed, Know Everything About First EV SUV From Xiaomi To Gain 2,89,000 Orders in an Hour of Launch in China
New Delhi, June 27: Xiaomi YU7 is launched in China during the company’s recent Human x Car x Home event. The new electric vehicle (EV) follows the earlier release of the Xiaomi SU7 sedan and adds to the company’s growing lineup of vehicles. Xiaomi aims to compete with global EV makers, like Tesla. Xiaomi will compete with the Tesla Model Y with the YU7. The EV comes in Xiaomi YU7 Standard, Xiaomi YU7 Pro and Xiaomi YU7 Max versions.
The Xiaomi YU7 comes with a new design, which is expected to attract potential buyers looking for an alternative to other EV models available in the world. The company said, “Xiaomi YU7 is positioned as a high-performance luxury SUV that aims to redefine luxury through advanced design, technology, driving experience, and safety, creating an advanced SUV that defies the ordinary. ” As per a report of CNBC TV18, Xiaomi’s new EV SUV gained 2,89,000 orders in an hour. Mahindra Scorpio N Teased, SUV Expected To Launch in India Soon With ADAS and Panoramic Sunroof; Check More Details.
Xiaomi YU7 Specifications and Features
The YU7 is available in Basalt Gray, Lava Orange, Titanium Silver, and Emerald Green, Pearl White, Ocean Blue, DuskPurple, Shadow Teal, and Dawn Pink colour options. All the versions are powered by Xiaomi HyperEngine V6s Plus, as the company refers it as “three core electric technologies.” It delivers a peak torque of 528 Nm and peak power to 288kW. The Xiaomi YU7 Max version offers a driving range of up to 760 km on a single charge and can accelerate from 0 to 100 km/h in 3.23 seconds. The Xiaomi YU7 Pro delivers a range of up to 770 km and the Xiaomi YU7 Standard version offers up to 835 km of range. Samsung Wallet To Support Digital Car Key Compatibility for Mercedes-Benz From July 2025; Check Details.
Xiaomi YU7 Price in China
The Xiaomi YU7 is available in three versions to suit various preferences. The base model, Xiaomi YU7 Standard, is an ultra-long-range rear-wheel-drive (RWD) variant priced at RMB 2,53,500. The Xiaomi YU7 Pro offers all-wheel drive (AWD) with ultra-long-range capabilities and is priced at RMB 2,79,900. The Xiaomi YU7 Max, which is a high-performance AWD version and is priced at RMB 3,29,900.
(The above story first appeared on LatestLY on Jun 27, 2025 12:32 PM IST. For more news and updates on politics, world, sports, entertainment and lifestyle, log on to our website latestly.com).
OpenAI’s Unreleased AGI Paper Could Complicate Microsoft Negotiations
A small clause inside OpenAI’s contract with Microsoft, once considered a distant hypothetical, has now become a flashpoint in one of the biggest partnerships in tech.
The clause states that if OpenAI’s board ever declares it has developed artificial general intelligence (AGI), it would limit Microsoft’s contracted access to the startup’s future technologies. Microsoft, which has invested more than $13 billion in OpenAI, is now reportedly pushing for the removal of the clause and is considering walking away from the deal entirely, according to the Financial Times.
Late last year, tensions around AGI’s suddenly pivotal role in the Microsoft deal spilled into a debate within OpenAI over an internal research paper, according to multiple sources familiar with the matter. Titled “Five Levels of General AI Capabilities,” the paper outlines a framework for classifying progressive stages of AI technology. By making specific assertions about future AI capabilities, sources claim, the paper could have complicated OpenAI’s ability to declare that it had achieved AGI, a potential point of leverage in negotiations.
“We’re focused on developing empirical methods to evaluate AGI progress—work that is reproducible, measurable, and useful to the broader field,” OpenAI spokesperson Lindsay McCallum said in a written comment to WIRED. “The ‘Five Levels’ was an early attempt at classifying stages and terminology to describe general AI capabilities. This was not a scientific research paper.” Microsoft declined to comment.
In a blog post describing its corporate structure, OpenAI notes that AGI “is excluded from IP licenses and other commercial terms with Microsoft.” OpenAI defines AGI as “a highly autonomous system that outperforms humans at most economically valuable work.”
The two companies have been renegotiating their agreement as OpenAI prepares a corporate restructuring. While Microsoft wants continued access to OpenAI’s models even if the startup declares AGI before the partnership ends in 2030, one person familiar with the partnership discussions tells WIRED that Microsoft doesn’t believe OpenAI will reach AGI by that deadline. But another source close to the matter describes the clause as OpenAI’s ultimate leverage. Both sources have been granted anonymity to speak freely about private discussions.
According to the Wall Street Journal, OpenAI has even considered whether to invoke the clause based on an AI coding agent. The talks have grown so fraught that OpenAI has reportedly discussed if it should publicly accuse Microsoft of anticompetitive behavior, per the Journal.
A source familiar with the discussions, granted anonymity to speak freely about the negotiations, says OpenAI is fairly close to achieving AGI; Altman has said he expects to see it during Donald Trump’s current term.
That same source suggests there are two relevant definitions: First, OpenAI’s board can unilaterally decide the company has reached AGI as defined in its charter, which would immediately cut Microsoft off from accessing the technology or revenue derived from AGI; Microsoft would still have rights to everything before that milestone. Second, the contract includes a concept of sufficient AGI, added in 2023, which defines AGI as a system capable of generating a certain level of profit. If OpenAI asserts it has reached that benchmark, Microsoft must approve the determination. The contract also bars Microsoft from pursuing AGI on its own or through third parties using OpenAI’s IP.
Criminal Stablecoin Use Continues Growing, Task Force Says
Most illegal activity happening on cryptocurrency ledgers now involves the tokens known as stablecoins, according to a report released on Thursday by an intergovernmental body that develops policies to protect the global financial system against money laundering and terrorist financing.
The findings in the new report from the Financial Action Task Force land just as US lawmakers and businesses are pushing for the wider distribution of stablecoins, crypto tokens that are pegged to the dollar or some other national currency.
The task force, which brings together officials from most of the biggest countries in the world, found that a wide array of illicit actors — including terrorists, drug traffickers and North Korean hackers — have stepped up their use of stablecoins since the group’s last report on digital assets in 2024.
The so-called “Genius Act” that was recently passed by the US Senate aims to normalise stablecoins by bringing them under a more standardised and rigorous regulatory regime than they have faced until now. This has led numerous companies to push forward with initiatives that would give consumers access to stablecoins and knit them into the traditional financial industry.
The issuer of the USDC token, Circle Internet Group, went public in early June and its share price has risen more than sixfold since then. A company tied to President Donald Trump’s family, World Liberty Financial Inc., has released its own stablecoin project.
Some critics of stablecoins have said that the tokens are a poor substitute for standard currencies and unlikely to gain traction outside the crypto industry. Earlier this week, a report from the Bank for International Settlements said the tokens “may eventually play a subsidiary role in the hinterland of the financial system if adequately regulated.”
The Financial Action Task Force, in its report, said that if stablecoins gain more widespread use in so-called “unhosted wallets,” outside the reach of financial institutions, it will potentially make it easier for criminals to evade detection in ways that “could amplify illicit finance risks.”
“The perceived reduction in volatility, transaction efficiency with low costs, and abundant liquidity in the market that make stablecoins attractive to many consumers and businesses also draw in criminals seeking to maximise profits and reduce their costs,” the report said.
The report singled out the use by illicit actors of the largest stablecoin, Tether Holdings’ USDT, on the ledger tied to the Tron cryptocurrency. The report also noted a “significant uptick” in the use of other digital assets in frauds and scams, and said that one industry participant had estimated “there was approximately $51 billion (roughly Rs. 4,36,214 crore) in illicit on-chain activity relating to fraud and scams in 2024.” Tether did not respond to a request for comment.
While government oversight of digital assets has improved, “big gaps remain” in making sure they don’t end up being used by terrorists and criminals, the report said. It called for governments to increase and enhance their licensing and registration of virtual asset companies and pointed to the ongoing challenges in identifying people and organisations running decentralised blockchain applications, which offer everything from lending to gaming.
The task force, a standard-setting body that has no legal enforcement powers, began recommending standards for governments to apply to digital assets in 2019. It aims to release a report on stablecoins early next year and plans to propose new measures that governments can take to protect against illegal activity.
© 2025 Bloomberg LP
(This story has not been edited by NDTV staff and is auto-generated from a syndicated feed.)